Skip to main content

Full text of "The Fabric Of Geology"

See other formats



1 025 




The Fabric o 



Reading, Massachusetts Palo Alto London 



CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, Jr., Editor 



f GEOLOGY 



Prepared under the direction of a Committee 
of The Geological Society of America, in 
commemoration of the Society's 75th Anniversary 



ADDISON-WESLEY PUBLISHING COMPANY, INC. 



Copyright 1963 
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA 



Printed in the United States of America 

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. THIS BOOK, OR PARTS 

THEREOF, MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FORM 

WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE SOCIETY. 

Library of Congress Catalog Card No. 63-77726 



Preface 



During the years immediately following World War II, many geologists 
became dissatisfied with the training that was being given to students of the 
earth sciences. Accordingly, the Council of The Geological Society of America, 
in December of 1946, named a committee to investigate the state of geologic 
education, and to offer suggestions for its improvement. The report of this 
committee appeared in the Interim Proceedings of the Society for 1949. Of the 
recommendations presented, the one emphasized most strongly urged that, at 
all levels of instruction, "only those inferences be presented ... for which the 
essential observational data and the logical steps leading to the inference have 
also been presented."* Before this criterion could be satisfied, the committee- 
men asserted, the logical structure of geologic science would have to be re- 
examined "from the ground up." 

When the time came to make plans for the Society's seventy-fifth anniversary, 
the Councilors, recalling this last recommendation, decided that the theme for 
the anniversary meetings should be the philosophy of geology. A committee 
was asked to produce a book of essays on the fabric of geologic thought, and to 
arrange a program on the same subject for the annual meetings in 1963. 

The very lack of any modern book on the philosophy of geology is justifica- 
tion enough for this work. The members of the Anniversary Committee will 
have achieved their purpose if this collection, despite any shortcomings it may 
have, serves as a focal point for discussions of our role as scientists. 

The book begins with a toast to James Hutton, as founder of modern geology. 
Mclntyre seeks out the origin of the ideas which shaped Hutton's fruitful theory 
of the earth, and he finds some likely sources in some unlikely places including 
steam engines, organisms, and the all but forgotten work of George Hoggart 
Toulmin. 

Does geology have laws and theories of its own? What is to be understood 
when geology is called historical science? These questions are considered in a 
sequence of three essays. Bradley identifies the history and constitution of the 
earth as the two principal subjects of geologic investigation. Simpson goes on 
to develop the differences between the historical and the nonhistorical aspects 
of the science, which he finds in their respective concerns with the configurational 
as opposed to the immanent properties of matter and energy. If "laws," in the 

* Hubbert, M. K., Hendricks, T. A., and Thiel, G. A. (Chairman), Report of the 
Committee on Geologic Education of The Geological Society of America: Geol. Soc. 
Am., Int. Pr., 1949, pt. 2, pp. 17-21. 



vi PREFACE 

usual sense of this term, apply to the immanent and not to the configurational 
in nature, then the laws of physical and dynamic geology are the laws of physics 
and chemistry. Kitts concludes that the theory of geology is likewise the theory 
of physics and chemistry used by geologists, however, as instruments of his- 
torical inference. 

Laboratory experiments have played a less important role in geology than in 
chemistry or physics. And yet, as H. H. Read has observed, "Any man looking 
out of any window sees a geological laboratory in constant and full-scale opera- 
tion." McKelvey develops this theme by showing how geologists have the un- 
usual opportunity to observe the results of complex natural experiments that 
involve larger masses and longer periods of time than can be handled in the 
laboratory. 

The six essays forming the middle section of the book treat of geologic thought 
within the framework of some particular branch of earth science. Woodford 
critically examines the proposition in stratigraphy that fossils may be used to 
order strata in chronologic sequences. Mclntyre investigates the reliability of 
certain methods for obtaining the absolute ages of rocks that are used to cali- 
brate the stratigraphic column described by Woodford. Mclntyre's essay also 
illustrates a trend toward the quantitative in geology, and this is the theme of 
Mackin's comparison of the rational and empirical methods of investigation. 
Mackin draws his examples from geomorphology, the same field which Leopold 
and Langbein use to illustrate the association of ideas in geologic thought. 
Structural geology provides Hill with an example which he uses to develop 
rules of geologic nomenclature and classification. Anderson also turns to 
structural geology for examples to show how the geologist uses the logical 
principle of simplicity. 

Three essays are concerned primarily with the communication of geologic 
data and ideas. Betz examines the documentary tools of communication and 
suggests how these might be better used to contend with the "information 
problem" which is of growing concern to all scientists. Gilluly shows how 
G. K. Gilbert, in his scientific memoirs, took pains to disclose the chains of 
reasoning that linked his observations to his conclusions. Harrison discusses 
the interpretative character of the geologic map, and illustrates the way in 
which theory may influence mapping, and vice versa. 

The last two essays in the book identify contrasting areas of geologic thought 
and work which are in need of further development. Hagner urges that more 
attention be given to the history and philosophy of geology, while Legget points 
to the increasing opportunities of putting geology to work in the service of man. 

A bibliography of writings that reflect upon the character of geologic thought 
concludes the volume. 

The planning of this book has been the resonsibility of a committee of eight 
persons, who, in addition to the Editor, are Messrs. Frederick Betz, Jr., James 



PREFACE vii 

Gilluly, J. M. Harrison, H. H. Hess, Mason L. Hill, Luna B. Leopold, and 
W. W. Rubey. 

The members of the Anniversary Committee thank the Trustees of The 
Graduate Research Center, Inc. for sponsoring a conference on the scope and 
philosophy of geology, which was held in Dallas in October of 1960. At this 
meeting, membeis of the Committee presented their tentative thoughts on the 
logical foundations of geology. Three philosophers Nelson Goodman, Carl G. 
Hempel and John H. Kultgen served as critics, and were especially helpful in 
drawing lines between real problems and false issues. William E. Benson and 
Eugene Herrin were guests of the conference and active participants in discus- 
sions which did much to shape the contents of the book. 

The idea of bringing philosophers and geologists together for the conference 
in Dallas belongs to Mr. W. H. Freeman. As the Publisher's Editor for this 
book, he has, moreover, arranged to have most of the essays read by Professors 
Morton Beckner and Michael Scriven, whose forthright criticisms are grate- 
fully acknowledged. 

Mrs. Robert R. Wheeler prepared the special index for the annotated bibli- 
ography and also the general index for this book. Mrs. Jacquelyn Newbury 
typed much of the manuscript and obtained permission to reproduce the 
numerous quotations in the bibliography and text. 

"When 'Omer Smote 'is Bloomin' Lyre," by Rudyard Kipling, is reprinted 
from Rudyard Kipling's Verse (Definitive Edition) by permission of Mrs. George 
Bambridge and Doubleday & Company, Inc. 

Dallas, Texas C. C. A. 

July 7, 1963 



Contents 



James Hutton and the philosophy of geology 1 

DONALD B. MC!NTYRE 

Geologic laws 12 

W. H. BRADLEY 

Historical science 24 

GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

The theory of geology 49 

DAVID B. Krrrs 

Geology as the study of complex natural experiments 69 

V. E. McKELVEY 

Correlation by fossils 75 

A. O. WOODFORD 

Precision and resolution hi geochronometry 112 

DONALD B. MC!NTYRE 

Rational and empirical methods of investigation in geology 135 

J. HOOVER MACKIN 

Role of classification in geology 164 

MASON L. HILT. 

Simplicity in structural geology 175 

CHARLES A. ANDERSON 

Association and indeterminacy in geomorphology 184 

LUNA B. LEOPOLD AND WALTER B. LANGBEIN 
ix 



x CONTENTS 

Geologic communication 193 

FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

The scientific philosophy of G. K. Gilbert 218 

JAMES GILLULY 

Nature and significance of geological maps 225 

M. M. HARRISON 

Philosophical aspects of the geological sciences 233 

ARTHUR F. HAGNER 

Geology in the service of man 242 

ROBERT F. LEGGET 

Philosophy of geology: A selected bibliography and index 262 

CLAUDE C. ALBRTTTON, JR. 

Index 367 



DONALD B. McINTYRE 

Pomona College 



James Hutton and the 

Philosophy of Geology 1 



"When 'Omer smote 'is bloomin' lyre, 
He'd 'card men sing by land an' sea; 

An' what he thought 'e might require, 
'E went an' took the same as me! 

"The market-girls an' fishermen, 

The shepherds an' the sailors, too, 

They 'card old songs turn up again, 
But kep' it quiet same as you! 

"They knew 'e stole; 'e knew they knowed. 

They didn't tell, nor make a fuss, 
But winked at 'Omer down the road, 

An' 'e winked back the same as us!" 

KIPLING 



1 On the 150th anniversary of Button's death it was my good fortune to attend, in 
Edinburgh, a memorable lecture by S. I. Tomkeieff. The effect it had on me was pro- 
found and, because my present subject concerns the unavoidable and indeed laudable 
practice of borrowing of ideas, I have not hesitated to adopt TomkeiefPs title and a 
little more besides. The extent of my indebtedness may be gauged by reference to 
TomkeiefPs paper (1948). 

1 



2 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

Prior to Hutton, geology did not exist, and I think it is generally agreed 
that the science was created in the fifty years between 1775 and 1825. In 
1775, Hutton's close friend, James Watt, constructed his first working steam 
engine, and Werner, who was to become the leader of the Neptunists, began 
teaching at the Mining Academy of Freiburg. By 1825, the first passenger 
train was in operation, and Lyell, who was born the year Hutton died, was 
at work on his "Principles of Geology" "the coping stone" of the new science. 
The same years saw the American War of Independence, the Industrial Revo- 
lution, the French Revolution, and the Napoleonic wars. It was the age of 
Wordsworth and Coleridge, Byron and Shelley, Goethe and Schiller, Scott 
and Burns. 

During this period the necessary foundations for petrology, and the study of 
the materials of the crust, were laid by the work of Haiiy on crystallography, 
Werner on the physical properties of minerals, and Joseph Black on their 
chemical composition. Stratigraphical paleontology and the technique of field 
mapping were initiated by William Smith, but it was Hutton, and Hutton 
alone, who provided geology with a dynamic scheme a theory, in the original 
sense of "something seen in the mind." Thus Hutton plays the same role in 
geology as Newton in astronomy, or Darwin in biology. Comprehension is 
the power of the mind to understand, and these intellectual giants have given 
us comprehension of the great processes which go on around us. For this 
reason, Hutton truly deserves the title "Founder of Modern Geology." 

Fortunately for posterity, Hutton had a most eloquent biographer in John 
Playfair, Professor of Physics and of Mathematics at the University of Edin- 
burgh, and one of the finest writers of scientific prose the English language has 
known. If the history of science is to be the study of the origin and development 
of ideas, then the history of geology needs to give attention to Playfair's re- 
mark: "It would be desirable to trace the progress of Dr. Hutton's mind in the 
formation of a system where so many new and enlarged views of nature occur, 
and where so much originality is displayed." 

But how can anyone, other than the author himself, possibly hope to follow 
the sequence of ideas that unconsciously have been at work in a creative 
mind? The classic answer to this question has been given by John Livingston 
Lowes in his study of the process of creation in the mind of Coleridge, entitled 
"The Road to Xanadu" one of the most remarkable works of detection ever 
written. Coleridge kept a notebook in which he recorded facts and phrases 
which had caught his attention, and Lowes was able to use this book, along 
with library records, to follow Coleridge through his reading and hence "to 
retrace," as he said, "the obliterated vestiges of creation." The result is aston- 
ishing: the origin of almost every phrase and analogy in "The Rime of the 
Ancient Mariner" can be identified; and quite an assortment these sources are, 



JAMES HUTTON AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF GEOLOGY 3 

including as they do such unlikely works as Burnett's "Sacred Theory of the 
Earth," Maupertuis' geodetic study on "The Figure of the Earth, 9 ' Father 
Bourges* "Luminous Appearances in the Wakes of Ships," and the Astronomer 
Royal's paper in the Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society entitled 
"An account of an appearance, like a star, seen in the dark part of the moon." 

Hutton, we are told, "was in the habit of using his pen continually as an 
instrument of thought," and he left behind him what is described as "an 
incredible quantity of manuscript"; unhappily almost none has survived, so 
we are deprived of the clues his notebooks would have afforded. 

Coleridge himself was keenly aware ot the pattern: "the imagination, the 
true inward creatrix," constantly working on "the shattered fragments of 
memory, dissolves, diffuses, dissipates, in order to recreate." And elsewhere 
he wrote that the "hooks-and-eyes of memory permit a confluence of our recol- 
lections." The analogy is reminiscent of Poincar6's image of mathematical 
discovery, in which he pictures ideas as hooked atoms ploughing through space 
like the molecules as conceived in the kinetic theory of gases. The number of 
possible combinations is so vast that even in a lifetime they couldn't all be 
examined, and PoincarS concluded that esthetic sensibility, the appreciation 
of the beauty of an elegant solution, acts in the subconscious like a delicate 
sieve to catch combinations worthy of the attention of the conscious mind. 
Thus, the creation of a poem and the discovery of a mathematical law may 
have much hi common. Perhaps a geologic theory also is born in the same 
manner. 

A long time ago that giant of American geology, Grove Karl Gilbert, 
elaborated this theme in two masterly presidential addresses: one was entitled 
"The Inculcation of Scientific Method by Example" (1885) and the other 
"The Origin of Hypotheses" (1895). Gilbert, himself no mean deviser of 
brilliant and ingenious ideas, made a practice of trying to analyze the methods 
he and his associates used in geologic research. 

He wrote: "Just as in the domain of matter nothing is created from nothing, 
just as in the domain of life there is no spontaneous generation, so in the 
domain of mind there are no ideas which do not owe their existence to ante- 
cedent ideas which stand in the relation of parent to child. It is only because 
our mental processes are largely conducted outside of consciousness that the 
lineage of ideas is difficult to trace ... To explain the origin of hypotheses" 
wrote Gilbert, "I have a hypothesis to present. It is that hypotheses are 
always suggested through analogy. Consequential relations of nature are in- 
finite in variety, and he who is acquainted with the largest number has the 
broadest base for the analogic suggestion of hypotheses." I believe it was 
H. H. Read who affirmed that "the best geologist is he who has seen the most 
geology.* 1 At any rate, there is undoubtedly some truth in the remark. 



4 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

The conclusion we reach seems to be that the equipment necessary to devise 
hypotheses includes: 

First, an excellent memory and an extensive knowledge of the relevant 
material; 

Second, the ability to form associations of ideas, and to reason by analogy; 
and 

Third, the possession of an unusually high degree of esthetic feeling for an 
elegant solution, and a burning enthusiasm for the subject. 

Now Playfair (1805, p. 98) informs us that Dr. Hutton: 

. . . had acquired great information; and an excellent memory supplied an 
inexhaustible fund of illustration, always happily introduced. He used also 
regularly to unbend himself with a few friends, in the little society . . . known 
by the name of the Oyster Club. . . The original members of it were Mr. 
[Adam] Smith [the author of "The Wealth of Nations"], Dr. [Joseph] Black 
[the discoverer of latent heat and of carbon dioxide, and who introduced 
quantitative methods in chemistry], and Dr. Hutton, and round them was 
soon formed a knot of those who knew how to value the familiar and social 
converse of these illustrious men. As all the three possessed great talents, 
enlarged views, and extensive information, without any of the stateliness 
and formality which men of letters think it sometimes necessary to affect; 
as they were all three easily amused, were equally prepared to speak and to 
listen, and as the sincerity of their friendship had never been darkened by 
the least shade of envy; it would be hard to find an example where every 
thing favourable to good society was more perfectly united, and every thing 
adverse more entirely excluded. The conversation was always free, often 
scientific, but never didactic or disputatious; and as this club was much the 
resort of the strangers who visited Edinburgh, from any object connected 
with art or with science, it derived from thence an extraordinary degree of 
variety and interest. 

Hutton, then, was peculiarly well placed for the accumulation of diverse 
information and ideas, and he had an excellent memory. What of his ability 
to reason by analogy? Playfair records that Hutton possessed "the experienced 
eye, the power of perceiving the minute differences and fine analogies which 
discriminate or unite the objects of science, and the readiness of comparing 
new phenomena with others already treasured up in the mind." 

What then of his appreciation of the beauty of an elegant solution, and what 
of his enthusiasm? 

A circumstance which greatly distinguished the intellectual character of 
the philosopher of whom we now speak, was an uncommon activity and ar- 
dour of mind, upheld by the greatest admiration of whatever in science was 



JAMES HUTTON AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF GEOLOGY 5 

new, beautiful, or sublime. The acquisitions of fortune, and the enjoyments 
which most directly address the senses, do not call up more lively expressions 
of joy in other men, than hearing of a new invention, or being made ac- 
quainted with a new truth, would, at any time, do in Dr. Hutton. This 
sensibility to intellectual pleasure was not confined to a few objects, nor to 
the sciences which he particularly cultivated: he would rejoice over Watt's 
improvements on the steam engine, or Cook's discoveries in the South Sea, 
with all the warmth of a man who was to share in the honour or the profit 
about to accrue from them. The fire of his expression on such occasions, 
and the animation of his countenance and manner, are not to be described; 
they were always seen with great delight by those who could enter into his 
sentiments, and often with great astonishment by those who could not. 

With this exquisite relish for whatever is beautiful and sublime in science, 
we may easily conceive what pleasure he derived from his own geological 
speculations. The novelty and grandeur of the objects offered by them to 
the imagination, the simple and uniform order given to the whole natural 
history of the earth, . . . are things to which hardly any man could be in- 
sensible; but to him they were matter, not of transient delight, but of solid 
and permanent happiness. (Playfair, 1805, p. 91) 

Elsewhere Playfair remarks that both Hutton and Black were "formed with 
a taste for what is beautiful and great in science, with minds inventive and 
fertile in new combinations." Clearly, Hutton had all the qualities we have 
suggested as necessary in a great scientific synthesizer and he possessed them 
to a remarkable degree. We must now look at the most likely sources of his 
ideas: his immediate background and the achievements of his friends. 

Hutton' s first serious studies were in chemistry and medicine, first in Edin- 
burgh, then in Paris, and finally in Leyden, where he took his M.D. degree 
at the age of 23. However, he never practiced medicine, for, on his return to 
Scotland, he took charge of the small farm which he had inherited from his 
father. Hutton, who never did things by halves, immediately applied his 
scientific training to agriculture. He introduced new methods to Scottish 
farming, and he traveled to Norfolk and the Low Countries in search of the 
best techniques and practices. While on these journeys he became increasingly 
interested in the origin of soil and in the processes of geology. 

After 13 years of successful farming, he moved to Edinburgh, where his prin- 
cipal income was from his ammonium chloride plant the first in Britain. 
His time was spent in reading, in chemical experiments, often together with 
Black, and in the company of his illustrious and stimulating friends. He was 
a member of the Council of the newly organized Royal Society of Edinburgh, 
and for the first volume of the Society's Transactions he prepared his paper 
on the "Theory of the Earth, or an investigation of the laws observable in the 
composition, dissolution, and restoration of land upon the globe." The paper 
was read at two successive meetings of the Society in 1785. Illness prevented 



6 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

Hutton from attending the first of these meetings, and the first part of his paper 
was read by his friend Joseph Black. 

In addition to his studies of medicine, agriculture, chemistry, meteorology, 
and geology, he published a three-volume work on philosophy and a disserta- 
tion on the Chinese language. 

The accomplishments of his friends are so extensive that we can afford only 
a catalog. His intimate acquaintances were responsible for the discovery of 
carbon dioxide, nitrogen, oxygen, and strontium, and he himself was the first 
to extract sodium from a silicate. The list includes the discovery that water 
has a point of maximum density and that latent heat is needed to change its 
state. His friends included men responsible for the development of the steam 
engine; for the founding of iron works and a sulfuric acid plant; for the use of 
chlorine in bleaching; the author of the first book on agricultural chemistry; 
the author of the "Wealth of Nations"; the man to whom Sir Walter Scott 
dedicated "Waverley"; and that remarkable man who, never having been to 
sea, devised a system of naval tactics which won the British fleet several vic- 
tories, and which was quoted in Nelson's battle orders at Trafalgar. 

With this background we are now equipped to examine Hutton's Theory, 
and we will also draw somewhat on the unpublished manuscript of his "Ele- 
ments of Agriculture" on which he was working at the time of his death. 
Insofar as is practicable, I will give you Hutton's own words. 

First of all we need to know that for Hutton, "A theory is nothing but the 
generalization of particular facts; and, in a theory of the earth, those facts must 
be taken from the observations of natural history." For Hutton, a phenomenon 
(what he termed an "appearance") was "explained" when it had been "com- 
prehended" by a theory, that is to say, incorporated into the structure of the 
theory. 

Second, Hutton remarked that "It is with pleasure that man observes order 
and regularity in the works of nature, instead of becoming disgusted with 
disorder and confusion. If the stone which fell today were to rise tomorrow, 
there would be an end of natural philosophy, our principles would fail, and 
we would no longer investigate the rules of nature from our observations." 

This, of course, is the doctrine of uniformitarianism, but it wasn't original 
with Hutton. Before Hutton went to Leyden, the Professor of Astronomy there 
wrote: "When, as a result of certain observations, we anticipate other cases 
which we have not directly observed, our prediction is based on the axiom of 
uniformity of nature. All action- would be impossibly if we could not assume 
that the lessons of former experience would be valid in the future." 

For Hutton it was clear that, in his own words, "We must read the trans- 
actions of time past in the present state of natural bodies, and, for the reading 
of this character, we have nothing but the laws of nature, established in the 
science of man by his inductive reasoning. For man is not satisfied in seeing 



JAMES HUTTON AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF GEOLOGY 7 

things which are; he seeks to know how things have been, and what they are 
to be." However, it was Sir Archibald Geikie and not James Hutton who 
crystallized this concept in the memorable dictum: "The present is the key to 
the past. 35 

In Hutton's own opinion, it was agriculture that had been the study of his 
life; geology had been incidental. Accordingly he looked on the world as a 
well-run farm, designed to sustain plants and animals, and with rotation, 
necessary to maintain fertility. Indeed, the secret of Hutton is that he thought 
of the world as a sort of superorganism. His was not the mind of a narrow 
specialist. For him the biological sciences were completely integrated with the 
physical. "Here," he said, "is a compound system of things, forming together 
one whole living world." 

The most solid rocks moulder and decay upon the surface of the earth, 
and thus procure a soil, either immediately upon the place which, thus, had 
given it birth, or remotely upon some other place where it may be trans- 
ported by the water or the wind. For this great purpose of the world, the 
solid structure of the earth must be sacrificed; for the fertility of the soil 
depends upon the loose and incoherent state of its materials; and this state 
of the fertile soil necessarily exposes it to the ravages of the rain upon the 
inclined surface of the earth. 

From the tops of the mountains to the shores of the sea, all the soils are 
subject to be moved from their places, and to be deposited in a lower situa- 
tion; thus gradually proceeding from the mountain to the river; and from 
the river, step by step, into the sea. If the vegetable soil is thus constantly 
removed from the surface of the land, and if its place is thus to be supplied 
from the dissolution of the solid earth, ... we may perceive an end to this 
beautiful machine; an end arising from . . . that destructibility of its land 
which is so necessary in the system of the globe, in the economy of life and 
vegetation. It may be concluded that the apparent permanency of 'this 
earth is not real or absolute, and that the fertility of its surface, like the 
healthy state of animal bodies, must have its period and be succeeded by 
another. (Hutton, 1788, p. 215 et passim) 

"We have now considered the globe of this earth as a machine, constructed 
upon chemical as well as mechanical principles, . . . But is this world [he asks] 
to be considered thus merely as a machine, to last no longer than its parts 
retain their present position, their proper forms and qualities?" And here we 
see Watt and his steam engine in Hutton's mind. "Or, [he asks] may it not 
be also considered as an organized body such as has a constitution in which 
the necessary decay of the machine is naturally repaired . . . [Is] there, . . . 
in the constitution of this world, a reproductive operation by which a ruined 
constitution may be again repaired?" (Hutton, 1788, p. 215) And here we 
see the physician and the farmer. 



8 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

"From the constitution of those materials which compose the present land, 
we have reason to conclude that, during the time this land was forming, by the 
collection of its materials at the bottom of the sea, there had been a former 
land containing minerals similar to those we find at present in examining the 
earth ... A habitable earth is made to rise out of the wreck of a former world." 
And this is Hutton the geologist. 

The whole spirit of Mutton's geology is contained in his statement that 
"The matter of this active world is perpetually moved, in that salutary circu- 
lation [a good medical expression!] by which provision is so wisely made for 
the growth and prosperity of plants, and for the life and comfort of the various 
animals." 

Now it is a most remarkable fact that, immediately prior to the publication 
of Hutton' s Theory in 1788, there was a man, today almost completely for- 
gotten, who viewed the earth just as Hutton did. His name was George 
Hoggart Toulmin. No one familiar with Hutton's writings can read Toulmin's 
"The Antiquity of the World" without being impressed by astonishing simi- 
larities. For my own part, I find it impossible to avoid the conclusion that 
Hutton had read it prior to writing his own paper. 

Like Hutton, Toulmin took a remarkably comprehensive view of the earth, 
referring to "the beautiful order and disposition of the several parts that com- 
pose the stupendous whole." Like Hutton, he adopted a fundamental uni- 
formitarianism: "Nature is always the same, her laws are eternal and im- 
mutable." Like Hutton he believed that slow changes, long continued, can 
produce far-reaching results: "These immutable truths should never be for- 
got," he writes, "that animals and vegetables flourish and decay; that earths 
are formed by slow degrees; that they too change by time; that stone is formed, 
is decomposed or altered in its composition; that mountains now are elevated; 
now depressed; that nature lives in motion." 

Like Hutton, he recognized the significance of sedimentary rocks as proof 
of the circulation of matter. But to me it was of particular interest that Toul- 
min's very words and phrases echoed what I knew in Hutton: "The continual 
formation and decay of every existing substance, the unceasing circulation of 
matter, produces no disorder. A continual waste in every part is necessary to 
the incessant repairs of the whole. The closest sympathy and connection is 
preserved throughout the entire system of things." 

Now Hutton wrote: We are "led to acknowledge an order in a subject which, 
in another view, has appeared as absolute disorder and confusion. . . There 
is a certain order established for the progress of nature, for the succession of 
things, and for the circulation of matter upon the surface of the globe. . . 
We must see how this machine is so contrived as to have those parts which are 
wasting and decaying, again repaired ... the necessary decay is naturally 
repaired." 



JAMES HUTTON AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF GEOLOGY 9 

"We are," says Hutton, "thus led to see a circulation in the matter of the 
globe, and a system of beautiful economy in the works of nature. This earth, 
like the body of an animal, is wasted at the same time that it is repaired. It 
has a state of growth and augmentation; it has another state which is that of 
diminution and decay. This world is thus destroyed in one part, but it is 
renewed in another." 

The last sentence of Toulmin's book ends: "We have by no means been led 
to contravene . . . the existence of infinite intelligence and wisdom." And else- 
where he refers to "nature, whose every operation is stamped with wisdom and 
consistency." The last paragraph of Hutton's paper begins, "We have now 
got to the end of our reasoning; we have the satisfaction to find that in nature 
there is wisdom, system, and consistency." 

Toulmin wrote: "there has ever been a succession of events, something 
similar to what is continually observed ... a vast succession of ages. . . We 
have been induced to conclude that the whole system of things," and so on. 
Hutton put it thus: "having seen a succession of worlds, we may from this 
conclude that there is a system in nature." 

Toulmin said: "In the circle of existence, in vain do we seek the beginning 
of things." And Hutton, intimating that he had reached the limit of his 
vision into the past, wrote: "It is in vain to look for anything higher in the 
origin of the earth." 

Toulmin's main point is that "through the whole of this enquiry we have 
endeavoured to demonstrate . . . that, as there never was any beginning, so 
will there never be a conclusion. . ." And he repeats, "the whole system of 
things never had any beginning, nor will have any termination." And the 
final sentence of Hutton's paper is: "The result, therefore, of our present 
enquiry is, that we find no vestige of a beginning, no prospect of an end." 
Are we not, like John Livingston Lowes, "retracing the obliterated vestiges of 
creation"? 2 

In 1749 Hutton was granted the M.D. degree at Leyden for his thesis on 
"The Blood and Circulation in the Microcosm." The title reminds us that, 
from the beginning of speculative thought, philosophers have pondered the 
concept that man, the microcosm, is the epitome of the macrocosm or the 
world in which he lives. Attempts were constantly being made to find analogies 
or correspondences between aspects of the anatomy and physiology of man, 
and the structure and workings of the universe. One of the oldest was the 
analogy between the sun, as the ruling power of the macrocosm, and the heart, 
the governing power of the microcosm. Now at a medical school with the 
reputation of that at Leyden, Hutton could not have taken the circulation of 



2 1 trust that the significance of these words will be understood; no reader of Lowes 
is likely to accuse Coleridge of plagiarism. 



10 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

blood as his subject without becoming very familiar with Harvey's classic 
book "On the Movement of the Heart and Blood," published in 1628. 

Harvey began his dedication, to King Charles I, thus: "The animal's heart 
is the basis of its life, its chief member, the sun of its microcosm; on the heart 
all its activity depends, from the heart all its liveliness and strength arise. 
Equally is the king the basis of his kingdoms, the sun of his microcosm, the 
heart of the state." And in his text Harvey wrote: 

I began to think whether there might not be a motion, as it were in a circle, 
in the same sense that Aristotle uses when he says that air and rain emulate 
the circular movement of the heavenly bodies; for the moist earth warmed by 
the sun evaporates; the vapors drawn upwards are condensed and fall as 
rain to moisten the earth again, so producing successions of fresh life. In 
similar fashion the circular movement of the sun gives rise to storms and 
atmospheric phenomena. And so, in all likelihood, is it in the body, through 
the motion of the blood. . . The heart deserves to be styled the starting 
point of life and the sun of our microcosm just as much as the sun deserves 
to be styled the heart of the world. 

That the suggestion I am hinting at is not far-fetched is made clear by the 
following quotation from Hutton: "The circulation of the blood is the efficient 
cause of life; but life is the final cause, not only for the circulation of the blood, 
but for the revolution of the globe: without a central luminary and a revolution 
of the planetary body, there could not have been a living creature upon the 
face of this earth." Now this quotation is not from his medical thesis, but from 
the "Theory of the Earth," written 46 years after he left Leyden! And twice, 
in that geologic classic, does Hutton refer to the "physiology" of the earth 
a most significant phrase, and one reminiscent, incidentally, of Thomas 
Robinson's book, "The Anatomy of the Earth," published in 1694, which pro- 
claimed that the earth was a superorganism with "a constant circulation of 
water, as in other animals of blood." 

Analogy of microcosm and macrocosm, analogy of celestial spheres and 
atmosphere, analogy of heart and sun, analogy of blood and rain: this is the 
heredity of Hutton' s Theory of our theory. And the heart of the theory (if 
I may use the analogy) is the concept of circulation of matter in the macrocosm. 
One of the famous teachers at Leyden, just before Hutton' s time there, wrote 
that "the author of nature has made it necessary for us to reason by analogy." 
I know that Grove Karl Gilbert would have approved of this. The moral seems 
to be that analogies are so important in the genesis of scientific hypotheses that 
even false analogies are sometimes extremely fertile. 

In closing I should like to report to you on the Circulation Club which was 
founded in Edinburgh three years before Hutton's paper was read to the 
Royal Society. Its object was, and here I quote from the Constitution: "to 
commemorate the discovery of the circulation of the blood by the circulation 



JAMES HUTTON AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF GEOLOGY 11 

of the glass." Let us adopt and adapt that old tradition; let our hearts beat 
faster and our blood thrill as we commemorate the discovery of circulation in 
the macrocosm, and drink to the immortal name of the founder of geology, 
James Hutton, M.D. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

BAILEY, Sir E. B., 1950, James Hutton, founder of modern geology (1726-1797): Roy. 
Soc. Edinburgh, Pr., vol. 63, sec. B., 1947-49, pp. 357-368. 

GILBERT, G. K., 1885, The inculcation of scientific method by example, with an illus- 
tration drawn from the Quaternary geology of Utah: Am. J. Sci., 1886, 3rd series, 
vol. 31, pp. 284-299. 

, 1896, The origin of hypotheses, illustrated by the discussion of a topographic 

problem: Science, n.s., vol. 3, pp. 1-13. 

HARVEY, WILLIAM, 1628, Exercitatio anatomica de motu cordis et sanguinis in ani- 
malibus: Tr. from original Latin by Kenneth J. Franklin for the Royal College of 
Physicians of London, 1957, Oxford, Blackwell Scientific Publications, 209 pp. 

HUTTON, JAMES, 1788, Theory of the earth; or an investigation of the laws observable 
in the composition, dissolution, and restoration of land upon the globe: Roy. Soc. 
Edinburgh, Tr., vol. 1, pt. 1, pp. 209-304. 

, 1795, Theory of the earth, with proofs and illustrations: Edinburgh, Facsim. 

reprint 2 vols., 1959, New York, Hafner. 

LOWES, J. L., 1927, The road to Xanadu; a study in the ways of the imagination: 
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 623 pp. 

PLAYFAIR, JOHN, 1802, Illustrations of the Huttonian theory of the earth: Edinburgh, 
Cadell and Davies, and William Creech (Facsim. reprint with an introduction by 
George W. White, 1956: Urbana, Univ. of Illinois Press), 528 pp. 

, 1805, Biographical account of the late Dr. James Hutton, F.R.S. Edin.: Roy. 

Soc. Edinburgh, Tr., vol. 5, pt. 3, pp. 39-99. Reprinted in The works of John 
Playfair, Esq., 1822, vol. 4, pp. 33-118, Edinburgh. 

POINCARE, HENRI, 1908, Science et m6thode: Translated by Francis Maitland, re- 
printed 1952: New York, Dover Publications, 288 pp. 

TOMKEIEFF, S. L, 1948, James Hutton and the philosophy of geology: Edinburgh 
Geol. Soc., Tr., vol. 14, pt. 2, pp. 253-276. Reprinted 1950, Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, 
Pr., vol. 63, sec. B, 1947-49, pp. 387-400. 

, 1950, Geology in historical perspective: Adv. Sci., vol. 7, pp. 63-67. 

TOULMIN, G. H., 1780, Antiquity and duration of the world: (cited by Tomkeieff). 

, 1783, The antiquity of the world, 2d ed.: London, T. Cadell, 208 pp. 

, 1785, The eternity of the world: (cited by Tomkeieff). 



W. H. BRADLEY 

U. S. Geological Survey 



Geologic Laws 1 



Students of the philosophy of science agree that general laws are numerous 
and widely accepted among physicists and chemists. Indeed, they seem to 
regard these laws as the sine qua non of science, and some even go so far as to 
say that if there are no general laws, we are not dealing with true science but 
with something of a lower order something more amorphous. Some philos- 
ophers have also observed (though rarely in print) that, in geology, laws of 
general scope are either rare or perhaps as yet unrecognized and therefore 
unformulated. 

General laws are indeed rare in geology. Why is this so? Is geology not 
amenable to such generalizations or are geologists too little concerned with 
the universal aspects of geology? Is geology perhaps still too immature to 
produce generalizations of wide applicability or have geologists found that, for 
their purposes, general laws are intellectual traps? Or do geologists, because 
of their subject matter, have to reason somewhat differently from chemists 
and physicists? Perhaps we, and the biologists who also must perforce travel a 
comparable, or even more complex, network of paths, have something different 
in the way of disciplined reasoning to offer the philosophers of science. Just 
possibly, the philosophers of science err in judging the goals and caliber of a 
science by the traditionally rigorous sciences of physics and chemistry. May 
there not be goals other than the general laws of physics with their undeniably 
beautiful simplicity and vast inclusiveness? 



1 In writing this essay I have, as usual, had the benefit of generous criticism and 
suggestions from a number of my colleagues in the U. S. Geological Survey. Of these, 
I want to thank particularly W. T. Pecora and Dwight Taylor because, among other 
things, they persuaded me to throw away the first draft and start afresh. 

Besides this aid from my colleagues, I am especially grateful to Donald B. Mclntyre, 
of Pomona College, and Allen M. Bassett, of San Diego State College, for constructive 
suggestions. Professor Mclntyre also raised a number of provocative questions not 
dealt with in my essay. Fortunately, most of his points are discussed and satisfyingly 
answered by Simpson in his chapter. 

12 



GEOLOGIC LAWS 13 

One wonders whether full understanding and satisfactory explanation of a 
continuously operating dynamic process, such as the building and sculpture 
of a mountain range or the division of living cells, are not as desirable goals 
and as valuable rungs in the ladder of knowledge as the discovery of 
Gay-Lussac's law. This is not to derogate Gay-Lussac's law; I merely wish to 
raise for serious consideration a matter of long-term values in the realm of 
knowledge. Actually, I wonder whether physicists, chemists, and indeed 
scientists in general, are not today much less concerned with formulating laws 
than they are with gaining deeper understanding of phenomena and the rela- 
tionships among all kinds of phenomena. 

It is pertinent to examine first what is meant by a law in science and then 
take a brief look at geology itself. After that we shall be in a better position 
to consider what laws there are in geology, what are some of the laws being 
formulated today, and why laws are in fact rare in geology. But before we 
get to these we shall consider briefly the more speculative aspects of the mental 
tools geologists use in reasoning. These speculations involve an analogy with 
modern biologists, whose problems of explication and law formulation seem 
to have somewhat the same pattern as ours, and for similar reasons. 

Of the many explanations of the term "law" in science, probably none is 
more plainly stated than that of Karl Pearson (1900, pp. 86-87, 99): 

Men study a range of facts . . . they classify and analyze, they discover re- 
lationships and sequences, and then they describe in the simplest possible 
terms the widest possible range of phenomena . . . We are thus to under- 
stand by a law in science ... a resum6 in mental shorthand, which replaces 
for us a lengthy description of the sequences among our sense impressions . . . 
Such laws simply describe, they never explain . . . 

Classical examples of natural laws are, of course, Newton's laws of motion 
and the laws of thermodynamics. Some of the most fundamental relationships 
in nature, such as the equivalence of mass and energy, are stated in the form 
of general laws. They express concisely a group of more or less complex inter- 
relationships that have repeatedly been observed to be consistent. They are 
convenient packages of knowledge bench marks of a sort. They simplify our 
efforts to explain the phenomena we study. But all such laws are man-made, 
and for that reason reflect man's range of experience. They differ in degree of 
generality. Some, like the laws of thermodynamics, are apparently valid for 
all earthly phenomena over every yet conceivable range of values. Others are 
valid for all ordinary conditions, say of pressure and temperature, but do not 
hold strictly over extreme ranges, e.g., Boyle's law. 

Natural laws that state more limited relationships are commonly referred to 
as specific laws or empirical generalizations. They too are convenient small 
bundles of knowledge. "Principle" is a word we, and other natural scientists, 



14 W. H. BRADLEY 

use freely, yet I have found no satisfactory way of discriminating between spe- 
cific laws or empirical generalizations on the one hand and principles on the 
other. Perhaps they are equivalents. If so, it is odd that geologists react so 
cautiously toward one and so casually toward the other. A suitable illustration 
of a "basic principle" is given by Gilluly, Waters, and Woodford (1951, p. 146) 
in discussing the contribution Cuvier and Brongniart made to stratigraphy, 
"Each formation (closely related group of strata) contains its own character- 
istic assemblage of fossils." 

Earlier in this essay I suggested that possibly geology has goals that are 
somewhat different from those of physics and chemistry and has different 
means for reaching them. If our ways of reasoning do in fact differ, the cause 
must lie within the science of geology itself. 

What are the properties of geology that set it apart? Geology is commonly 
thought of as a derived science because it draws so much of its substance from 
other sciences, notably chemistry, physics, and biology. But it has a hard core, 
or spine, which is quite independent. It is this spine that gives geology its 
distinctive qualities, and that determines in large measure the manner in 
which its problems must be tackled. Geology's spine is the history and con- 
stitution of the earth each term to be understood in its broadest sense. Run- 
ning through this spine is the thread of time a thread connecting all terrestrial 
events. The succession and relationships between these events, together with 
the dynamic processes that have operated, make up the science of geology. 
Geology's task is to reconstruct these events and explain their direct and in- 
direct consequences. When we say "constitution of the earth" we mean to 
include not only its elemental chemical composition but also its mineralogical 
and lithologic constitution, the internal structures of minerals and rocks, and 
the structural relationships these have with one another, i.e., the architecture 
and ornamental features of the earth. 

Long ago, Lyell's simple definition of geology (1832, p. 1) said much the 
same thing: 

Geology is the science which investigates the successive changes that have 
taken place in the organic and inorganic kingdoms of nature; it inquires into 
the causes of these changes, and the influence which they have exerted in 
modifying the surface and external structure of our planet. 

Indeed, everything we find in or on the earth came to be what it is, and where 
it is, by geologic processes. Perhaps this should be qualified in the case of 
organisms, but life also had its evolution in geologic history and certainly all 
of life that has gone before us, and left any trace of itself or its activities, is of 
concern to geologists. 

To implement our understanding of geologic phenomena, we make use of 
the dynamic earth processes of weathering, erosion, sedimentation, volcan- 
ism and deformation all of which are assumed to have operated throughout 



GEOLOGIC LAWS 15 

the vast expanse of geologic time essentially as they do today. Nevertheless, 
much of our understanding must come from completed "experiments" : from the 
results of processes that required thousands or, more usually, millions of years 
to form, or that have formed and lain dormant millions or billions of years. 
The interpretation of such completed experiments is further complicated by 
the fact that the same rocks may have been repeatedly deformed, and have 
been reconstituted both chemically and mineralogically. Given immense 
spans of time and immense forces acting for these long intervals, elements be- 
come mobile and substances that are hard and brittle yield, flex, and flow. 
As McKelvey points out elsewhere in this volume, most of these experiments 
were of such a scale and involved forces and spans of time so enormous that 
we probably cannot achieve adequate similitude in laboratory models designed 
to test our explanations. 

An additional difficulty is omnipresent, as only nongeologists need be re- 
minded, and that is the impossibility of seeing all of most geologic features by 
reason of their size and depth below the earth's surface, or by reason of a partial 
cover of soil or younger rock, or by reason of the fact that parts of the features 
have been eroded away. Therefore geologists are forever faced with the task 
of reconstructing events that happened on a vast scale and in the remote past 
from the partial remains of the products of those events. This compound 
problem puts a premium on the capacity to reason analogically, inductively, 
and with imagination. 

Reasoning by analogy is not only common, it has probably been with us as 
long as man has reasoned. Sir D'Arcy Thompson (1961, p. 6) refers to ana- 
logical reasoning as another great Aristotelian theme. Indeed, he thus led into 
the following footnote, "Hume declared, and Mill said much the same thing, 
that all reasoning whatsoever depends on resemblance or analogy, and the 
power to recognise it." G. K. Gilbert, apparently quite independently, ex- 
pressed exactly the same concept to account for the way scientists originate 
hypotheses (1896, pp. 2-3). I want to amplify Gilbert's specific point a little 
and add a small homily for geologists. We can often say that the unknown 
phenomenon resembles another phenomenon whose explanation is already 
known or can be determined from experiment or from observation and study. 
We are, in fact, often aware of present-day processes in nature which may 
provide valuable analogies, only to find that the processes themselves are still 
without adequate explanations. But these processes operate where we can 
observe and measure them. Adequate explanations are within reach, if we will 
but reach. 

Because a geologist must use fragmentary data the incomplete results of 
long-completed experiments he must use inductive reasoning to reconstruct 
a whole from the parts. The virtue and value of inductive reasoning have 
been extolled and used effectively by many. Others who have trod the same 



16 W. H. BRADLEY 

paths have been equally eloquent in pointing out the dangers inherent in the 
use of inductive reasoning. Valuable and necessary as inductive reasoning is, 
a geologist must keep at least one foot on the tangible earth which he seeks to 
explain. 

Many people equate imagination with the tendency to conjure up fanciful, 
unreal things without restraint a faculty to be used either for amusement or 
for escape from reality. And so it is, but in a more literal sense it is the power 
of having mental images. Again, because a geologist can see only parts of the 
features he studies and must forever deal with partial information (he constructs 
geologic maps primarily to bring large features down to a comprehensible 
scale at which he can integrate the parts and visualize the whole), it is most 
essential that he be able to visualize, in three dimensions and with perspective, 
processes that may have gone on that will help to reconstruct the events of the 
past. Indeed, all the better if his imagination permits him to visualize processes 
as they may have operated with time a sort of vision in motion. Although I 
have mentioned imagination last of the three essential elements in the thought 
processes of geologists, I am inclined to place it first in importance. A geologist 
who has no imagination is as ineffective as a duck without webs between his 
toes. 

Perhaps such a long discursion on how geologists reason is out of place in 
an essay on geologic laws. Nevertheless, by these mental means, I believe 
geologists have made significant contributions. They have brought forth a 
satisfying, though far from perfect, image of the earth on which we live and 
a satisfying account of the long sequence of events that provided the changing 
environments in which all life evolved. Such images and concepts have value 
in human affairs and fill a significant niche in the realm of knowledge. 

If this appraisal of the geologist's contribution is valid, it is pertinent to 
enquire how much of this edifice was built on what kind of a foundation of 
natural law. As W. M. Davis (1926, pp. 465-466) said, most of it is built on 
inference the inference that the processes we observe today operated in the 
same way in the remote past. But the events and the sequence of events are 
none the less valid, for they have so far met all the tests we can apply to them 
for the great expanse of time we can actually measure. For absolute measure- 
ments of geologic time, however, we rely mostly on the physicists and their laws. 

We might consider first how far geologists have gone and can go if they stay 
within what we have defined as the core of geology that part which borrows 
little or nothing from other disciplines. We can, with confidence, explain the 
stratigraphic succession of any series of beds, and tell which way is "up" in 
most such sequences, using purely geologic evidence. Indeed, the oft-repeated 
verification that in any such sequence (not upset by tectonic movements) the 
youngest beds are on top, gave rise many years ago to the law of superposition: 
"In any pile of sedimentary strata that has not been disturbed by folding or 



GEOLOGIC LAWS 17 

overturning since accumulation, the youngest stratum is at the top and the 
oldest at the base" (Gilluly, Waters, and Woodford, 1951, p. 73). This was 
first clearly stated by Nicholas Steno in 1669. Steno also stated another law, 
recognized by all geologists as generally valid, namely, the law of original 
horizontality, thus: "Water-laid sediments are deposited in strata that are not 
far from horizontal, and parallel or nearly parallel to the surface on which 
they are accumulating" (idem, p. 73). We can tell the geologic ages of such 
sequences from the fossils they contain, and we can correlate such sequences 
of beds even though their outcrops are discontinuous. This follows the "basic 
principle" established by Cuvier and Brongniart, already mentioned, and this 
principle seems to have as good a claim to be one of our established laws as 
those of Steno. 

If we are granted the use of mathematics, we can, still within the framework 
of pure geology, determine the sequence of events in complexly folded and 
faulted areas, and can explain how we can predict where the various parts 
are to be found beneath the surface. Furthermore, much of the sculpture of 
the earth's surface can be explained without borrowing anything from other 
sciences. (See, for example, Gilbert, 1877 and Hack, 1960.) Such explanations 
must be based on analogy with present-day processes. Volcanic cones, ash 
beds, lava flows, and mud flows all have ready explanations from what has 
been observed in nature. 

It was the analysis of a vast volume of such descriptions and explanations, 
wholly within the realm of pure geology, that led Bucher (1933) to formulate 
46 laws, each of which stated some generalization about the observed relation- 
ships of deformational features of the earth's crust. Whether such generaliza- 
tions (specific laws as we saw earlier in this essay) have served the purpose he 
visualized, I leave to students of structural geology. Perhaps it will be re- 
garded as another homily if I observe that another natural science, biology, 
has formulated many such specific generalizations, or laws, and apparently has 
used them to good advantage. 

Except for Bucher's formulation of a goodly number of specific laws in 1933, 
geologists of the present century have shown relatively little inclination to 
formulate laws. But this was not always so. Seventy-five to 100 years ago 
geologists were more prone to formulate generalizations and to state them as 
laws. A few illustrations will suffice to make the point. In G. K. Gilbert's 
Henry Mountains Report (1877, pp. 108-124) he analyzes the processes that 
sculpture the land surface and speaks often about laws, although he explicitly 
formulates only three: the law of declivity, "In general we may say that, 
ceteris paribus, declivity bears an inverse relation to quantity of water"*; the law 
of structure, "Insofar as the law of structure controls sculpture, hard masses 
stand as eminences and soft are carved in valleys"; and the law of divides, 
"The nearer the watershed or divide the steeper the slope." 



18 W. H. BRADLEY 

L. V. Pirsson (1905, p. 43) stated the following generalization as a "General 
law of the province". "The petrographic province of central Montana is 
characterized by the fact that in the most siliceous magmas the percentages 
of potash and soda are about equal; with decreasing silica and increasing lime, 
iron and magnesia, the potash relatively increases over the soda, until in the 
least siliceous magmas it strongly dominates." Today such a generalization 
would not be stated as a law. This example, and those cited above from 
Gilbert, reflect a tendency of those times a striving for generalization and for 
fixing generalizations in the form of laws. From our present vantage point, 
realizing now how complex nature actually is, we probably would be right in 
saying that such a tendency reflected a then unrecognized immaturity of our 
science. 

If geology was too immature 75 or 100 years ago to warrant the formulation 
of general laws, what is our status today? 

Actually, if one were to make an exhaustive census, which I have not, we 
probably would find more generalizations being expressed now than there 
were a generation or two ago. Three illustrations with which I happen to be 
acquainted will serve to characterize the current effort, though none is called 
or thought of as a law. 

One is the principle of dynamic equilibrium in the evolution of landscape 
elaborated by Hack (1960, pp. 85-96) from earlier statements by G. K. Gilbert, 
W. M. Davis, and A. N. Strahler. According to Hack (p. 86): 

The concept requires a state of balance between opposing forces such that 
they operate at equal rates and their effects cancel each other to produce a 
steady state, in which energy is continually entering and leaving the system. 
The opposing forces might be of various kinds. For example, an alluvial 
fan would be in dynamic equilibrium if the debris shed from the mountain 
behind it were deposited on the fan at exactly the same rate as it was removed 
by erosion from the surface of the fan itself. 

Another generalization was expressed by T. B. Nolan in his presidential ad- 
dress before the Geological Society of America (1962, p. 277). In discussing 
the grade of mineral resources he pointed out that in making estimates of future 
resources one should keep in mind not only the fact that we have been able 
over the years to use progressively lower-grade ores, but "that the tonnages of 
material available in the earth's crust increase geometrically with decreasing 
grade." 

Still another generalization or, more accurately, a group of generalizations, 
was presented by James B. Thompson (1955, pp. 65-103) in his treatment of 
the thermodynamic basis for the mineral facies concept. 

He considers the following four limiting cases and then discusses certain 
geologic applications. 



GEOLOGIC LAWS 19 

CASE 1 . The mobile component in question is present as a pure phase at 
the same temperature and pressure as the surrounding rock. This is the 
assumption implicit in current hydrothermal experimental work and in 
calculated equilibria such as that of Goldschmidt for calcite-wollaston- 
ite. It yields a maximum equilibrium temperature at any given pressure 
(depth). 

CASE 2. The rock is in chemical equilibrium \\ ith a fissure system containing 
a dilute aqueous solution. This method is applicable only when the mobile 
component in question is water itself. It indicates a decrease in most de- 
hydration temperatures with depth. 

CASE 3. The vertical gradient of chemical potential of the mobile compo- 
nent has reached a value such that there is no longer any tendency for 
vertical diffusion of this component. This method also suggests (not without 
reservations) a slight decrease of most devolatilization temperatures with 
depth. 

CASE 4. The chemical potential of the mobile component is sufficiently low 
that no phases containing it are stable. 

For simplicity, we will refer to these limiting cases as cases 1, 2, 3, and 4, 
respectively. It now remains for us to consider the extent to which these 
may be applicable to some specific geological problems, (p. 96) 

Thompson's treatment of the various mineralogical changes under the as- 
sumed conditions goes far toward quantifying these geologic processes and 
therefore constitutes an important advance in the science of geology. Given 
adequate data on the environments and thermochemical data on the minerals 
involved, it appears that similar generalizations can now be made about such 
processes as diagenesis, weathering, and the formation of ore deposits. 

Thus far (with the exception of Thompson's work just mentioned) we have 
deliberately kept within that sphere of geology which is purely geologic, that 
is, not borrowed from any other science. We have seen that we can explain 
many of the phenomena of geology within this frame of reference. But such 
explanations leave unanswered virtually all questions of "how." How can 
hard rocks bend and flow; what caused this mineral to change over into that, 
what permits it to do so and what are the conditions that determine the change; 
how do we account for the fact that the ratios of oxygen isotopes change pro- 
gressively with distance from a certain focus; how can such things as amino 
acids be preserved in fossils for millions of years; what must have been the 
conditions to permit the preservation of the color pattern in a fossil or a chloro- 
plast within a plant cell? How can we account for the mobility and rearrange- 
ment of elements and compounds within the earth's crust; how does it come 
about that certain elements aggregate to form deposits of commercial value 



20 W. H. BRADLEY 

and that some minerals are piezoelectric? One needs only to begin asking 
"how" in geology and the list grows like weeds after a warm rain. 

We cannot begin to answer these queries without the help of chemistry, 
physics, or biology. In every problem of this broad class of problems we realize 
that minerals, the fundamental units of geology, are chemical compounds and 
that they are what they are and came to be where they are by chemical as well 
as geologic processes. Moreover, they have optical, electrical, magnetic, ther- 
mal, and mechanical properties, and atomic structures that belong just as much 
in the realm of physics as the properties of any man-made material or man- 
designed experiment. In short, we can scarcely look to a deeper understanding 
of any of our geologic problems without coming face to face with the realiza- 
tion that all the materials we seek to understand and whose behavior we seek 
to understand have the properties, structures, and behavior of all matter. The 
answers we seek must come from the same kinds of sources that the chemist, 
the physicist, and the biologist study to get their enlightenment. 

We are utterly dependent on chemistry, physics, and biology for under- 
standing, yet the problems we bring up from the earth do not in any sense 
thereby lose their geologic character. Geologists must and will continue to 
observe, measure, and analyze geologic phenomena and, more importantly, 
they will continue to formulate the problems to ask exactly how and exactly 
why. This is the province and the responsibility of geologists, and no one can 
be expected to do it better. Important as chemistry and physics are to the 
solution of geologic problems, neither chemists nor physicists are going to take 
over the role of formulating the problems that arise out of geologic work unless 
they themselves become geologists. This is not to say, of course, that the geo- 
chemists and geophysicists will not generate questions of their own about earth 
processes. 

We have considered what natural laws are, what properties give geology its 
distinguishing marks, something about the way geologists reason, and lastly 
the growing realization of the great complexity of geology and the growing 
dependence of geology on the disciplines of chemistry, physics, and biology. 
Let us consider next the steps in the development of generalizations in geology. 
At least in part this can be expressed graphically (Fig. 1). The concept of 
such a graph evolved in a discussion with my colleague V. E. McKelvey, after 
he had returned from the Brookings Institution's Conference for Federal 
Science Executives at Williamsburg, Va., where he had heard Henry Margenau 
of Yale discuss the development of natural laws in general. Margenau's 
diagram, as I understand it, consisted of three ordinates, labeled Primary 
observations, Concepts, and Propositions (laws). These are used also in Fig. 1. 
McKelvey and I added the boundary curve to indicate the philosophical field 
of activity of geologists. The great bulk of geologic activity hovers close to the 
observational ordinate. When enough observations have been related and 
explained, the activity moves right into the field of concepts. This move comes 



GEOLOGIC LAWS 



21 



Primary 
observations 



Concepts 
(principles) 



Propositions 
(laws) 




Generalization *- 

Fig. 1. Diagrammatic representation of the field of geologic activity and thought 
plotted against Margenau's three ordinates: Primary observations, Concepts, and 
Propositions (laws). The shaded field above represents a reservoir of the combined 
disciplines of chemistry, physics, and biology in an unsorted mixture the position of 
the names, therefore, has no relationship to Margenau's ordinates. The crosshatched 
part of this field indicates progressively greater assimilation by geology of chemistry, 
physics, and biology. Ideas in geology move out along the generalization abscissa in 
proportion to the number and significance of the verified observations and theories 
that are unified into broader concepts or principles. 



about from inductive reasoning and results in a concept or principle, i.e., a 
generalization, which we repeatedly test against more observations. Paren- 
thetically, we also use these principles to explicate other geologic phenomena, 
thereby nourishing a sort of feedback mechanism, which is present in the 
reasoning operations of all sciences. But I am inclined to think that such 
feedback operations are especially important in geology because we deal so 
much with fragmentary data and with working hypotheses. 

The theory of isostasy, the origin of igneous rocks, and organic evolution 
are examples of such concepts or principles. 

Most geologists are happy to explore and describe. Fewer are unhappy until 
they are able also to explain what they have found. And very few seem in- 
terested in trying to integrate the explanations into more general concepts or 
principles. Just possibly this derives from the patent fact that it is a lot more 
fun to do field work than it is to put the pieces of explained phenomena to- 
gether, especially if the pieces were constructed by someone else. 

Casual inspection of this curve (Fig. 1) prompts one to ask why (with the 
exception of Steno's two laws formulated long ago) we have not, or do not, 
push our concepts or principles still farther to the right into the realm of laws? 
I believe there are several reasons for this. One is the growing realization that 



22 W. H. BRADLEY 

the earth's history and the processes involved in shaping it are vastly more 
complex than was thought even a generation or tvvo ago. We have, so to speak, 
become more conscious of the number of variables and the magnitude of the 
gaps in our knowledge. Another reason is the growing realization that we can 
press our effort for deeper understanding of geology only with the aid of pro- 
gressively more chemistry, physics, and biology. As we progress with our 
reasoning toward the right in the diagram, the content of these borrowed 
disciplines must increase. I hazard the guess that the area under the curve in 
the region of the "concept" and "laws" ordinates will increase with time in 
proportion to geology's assimilation of chemistry, physics, and biology. 

In conclusion, it seems to me that wherever we look there is a striving for 
deeper understanding of ever more complex problems and a corresponding 
realization of how much more we must learn, especially in geochemistry and 
geophysics, in order to gain this fuller understanding. Such phases of rapid 
expansion of the frontiers of any science, I suggest, are not conducive to think- 
ing about the formulation of general laws. Everything is too new, too pregnant 
with the possibility of growth and change too much is clearly missing or 
imperfectly understood for us to become preoccupied with reflective thinking 
about that which is already known. The new and unsolved problems are much 
more worth the candle, are more exciting, more rewarding. Reflection is 
crowded out in the excitement of the day. 

The biologists appear to find themselves in pretty much the same situation. 
Paul Weiss (1962, p. 470) stated it thus: 

Biology ... is destined to retain its autonomy, which means that to be 
known and understood, biological mechanisms will have to be studied and 
formulated in their own right and full diversity. And this explains why in 
biology so many generalizations must stop far short of the vast inclusiveness 
of laws of physics, hence, why the range of validity of each must be deter- 
mined empirically. It is this inherent feature of biological nature, rather 
than backwardness or extravagance, then, which necessitates testing over a 
far wider spectrum of variables . . . than would seem necessary or even 
pardonable in most of physics. 

But this situation we find ourselves in is no cause for lament; rather is it a 
source of inspiration, a cause of exhilaration. It seems to me geology is now 
at the beginning of an explosive stage of development comparable to that which 
occurred in the biological sciences when biochemistry and biophysics came into 
full swing. Let the philosophers of science revel a bit in the yeasty ferment that 
is geology today and tomorrow. Some day we may grow old and have more 
laws; right now we are busy exploring, experimenting, and trying to understand 
more of the "how" of those processes that have produced the features of the 
earth, its crust beneath, and all it contains. 



GEOLOGIC LAWS 23 

REFERENCES CITED 

BUCHER, W. H., 1933, The deformation of the earth's crust: Princeton, Princeton Univ 

Press, 518 pp. 

, 1936, The concept of natural law in geology: Ohio J. Sci., vol. 36, pp. 183-194. 

DAVIS, W. M., 1926, The value of outrageous geological hypotheses: Science, vol. 63, 

pp. 463-468. 
GILBERT, G. K., 1877, Geology of the Henry Mountains: U. S. Geog. and Geol. Survey 

of the Rocky Mountain Region, Washington, D. C., Government Printing Office, 

170 pp. 
, 1896, The origin of hypotheses, illustrated by the discussion of a topographic 

problem: Science, n.s., vol. 3, pp. 1-13. 
GILLULY, J., WATERS, A. C., and WOODFORD, A. O., 1951, Principles of geology: 

San Francisco, W. H. Freeman, 631 pp. 
HACK, J. T., 1960, Interpretation of erosional topography in humid temperate regions: 

Am. J. Sci., vol. 258-A, pp. 80-97. 

LYELL, Sir CHARLES, 1832, Principles of geology, 2nd ed.: London, John Murray, vol. 1. 
NOLAN, T. B., 1962, Role of the geologist in the national economy: Geol. Soc. Am., B., 

vol. 73, pp. 273-278. 
PEARSON, KARL, 1900, The grammar of science, 2d ed.: London, Adam and Charles 

Black, 548 pp. 
PIRSSON, L. V., 1905, The petrographic province of central Montana: Am. J. Sci., 

vol. 20 (whole no. 170), pp. 35-49. 
THOMPSON, Sir D'ARCY W., 1961, On growth and form (abridged edition, edited by 

J. T. Bonner): New York, Cambridge Univ. Press, 346 pp. 
THOMPSON, J. B., 1955, The thermodynamic basis for the mineral facies concept: 

Am. J. Sci., vol. 253, pp. 65-103. 
WEISS, PAUL, 1962, Experience and experiment hi biology: Science, vol. 136, pp. 468- 

471. 



GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

Harvard University 



Historical Science 1 



History, Science, and Historical Science 

The simplest definition of history is that it is change through time. It is, 
however, at once clear that the definition fails to make distinctions which are 
necessary if history is to be studied in a meaningful way. A chemical reaction 
involves change through time, but obviously it is not historical in the same 
sense as the first performance by Lavoisier of a certain chemical experiment. 
The latter was a nonrecurrent event, dependent on or caused by antecedent 
events in the life of Lavoisier and the lives of his predecessors, and itself causal 
of later activities by Lavoisier and his successors. The chemical reaction 
involved has no such causal relationship and has undergone no change before 
or after Lavoisier's experiment. It always has occurred and always will recur 
under the appropriate historical circumstances, but as a reaction in itself it has 
no history. 

A similar contrast between the historical and the nonhistorical exists in 
geology and other sciences. The processes of weathering and erosion are un- 
changing and nonhistorical. The Grand Canyon or any gully is unique at 
any one time but is constantly changing to other unique, nonrecurrent con- 
figurations as time passes. Such changing, individual geological phenomena 
are historical, whereas the properties and processes producing the changes 
are not. 

The unchanging properties of matter and energy and the likewise unchanging 
processes and principles arising therefrom are immanent in the material universe. 
They are nonhistorical, even though they occur and act in the course of history. 
The actual state of the universe or of any part of it at a given time, its con- 
figuration, is not immanent and is constantly changing. It is contingent in 



1 Parts of this essay have been developed from a talk on the explanation of unique 
events given in the Seminar on Methods in Philosophy and Science at the New School 
for Social Research on May 20, 1962. On that occasion I also profited from discussion 
and other talks pertinent to the present topic, especially by Dobzhansky, Nagel, and 
Pittendrigh. 

24 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 25 

BernaTs (1951) term, or configurational, as I prefer to say (Simpson, 1960). 
History may be defined as configurational change through time, i.e., a sequence 
of real, individual but interrelated events. These distinctions between the 
immanent and the configurational and between the nonhistorical and the 
historical are essential to clear analysis and comprehension of history and of 
science. They will be maintained, amplified, and exemplified in what follows. 

Definitions of science have been proposed and debated in innumerable ar- 
ticles and books. Brief definitions are inevitably inadequate, but I shall here 
state the one I prefer: Science is an exploration of the material universe that 
seeks natural, orderly relationships among observed phenomena and that is 
self-testing. (For explanation and amplification see Simpson, 1962, 1963.) 
Apart from the points that science is concerned only with the material or 
natural and that it rests on observation, the definition involves three scientific 
activities: the description of phenomena, the seeking of theoretical, explanatory 
relationships among them, and some means for the establishment of confidence 
regarding observations and theories. Among other things, later sections of 
this essay will consider these three aspects of historical science. 

Historical science may thus be defined as the determination of configurational 
sequences, their explanation, and the testing of such sequences and explana- 
tions. (It is already obvious and will become more so that none of the three 
phases is simple or thus sufficiently described.) 

Geology is probably the most diverse of all the sciences, and its status as in 
part a historical science is correspondingly complex. For one thing, it deals 
with the immanent properties and processes of the physical earth and its con- 
stituents. This aspect of geology is basically nonhistorical. It can be viewed 
simply as a branch of physics (including mechanics) and chemistry, applying 
those sciences to a single (but how complex!) object: the earth. Geology also 
deals with the present configuration of the earth and all its parts, from core 
to atmosphere. This aspect of geology might be considered nonhistorical 
insofar as it is purely descriptive, but then it also fails to fulfill the whole 
definition of a science. As soon as theoretical, explanatory relationships are 
brought in, so necessarily are changes and sequences of configurations, which 
are historical. The fully scientific study of geological configurations is thus 
historical science. This is the only aspect of geology that is peculiar to this 
science, that is simply geology and not also something else. (Of course I do 
not mean that it can be studied without reference to other aspects of geology 
and to other sciences, both historical and nonhistorical.) 

Paleontology is primarily a historical science, and it is simultaneously bio- 
logical and geological. Its role as a part of historical biology is obvious. In 
this role, like all other aspects of biology, it involves all the immanent properties 
and processes of the physical sciences, but differs from them not only in being 
historical but also in that its configurational systems are incomparably more 



26 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

complex and have feedback and information storage and transmittal mechan- 
isms unlike any found in the inorganic realm. Its involvement in geology and 
inclusion in that science as well as in biology are primarily due to the fact that 
the history of organisms runs parallel with, is environmentally contained in, 
and continuously interacts with the physical history of the earth. It is of less 
philosophical interest but of major operational importance that paleontology-, 
when applicable, has the highest resolving power of any method yet dis- 
covered for determining the sequence of strictly geological events. (That 
radiometric methods may give equal or greater resolution is at present a hope 
and not a fact.) 

Description and Generalization 

In principle, the observational basis of any science is a straight description 
of what is there and what occurs, what Lloyd Morgan (1891) used to call 
"plain story." In a physical example, plain story might be the specifications 
of a pendulum and observations of its period. A geological plain story might 
describe a bed of arkose, its thickness, its attitude, and its stratigraphic and 
geographic position. An example of paleontological plain story would be the 
occurrence of a specimen of a certain species at a particular point in the bed 
of arkose. In general, the more extended plain stories of historical science 
would describe configurations and place them in time. 

In fact, plain story in the strictest, most literal sense plays little part in science. 
Some degree of abstraction, generalization, and theorization usually enters in, 
even at the first observational level. The physicist has already abstracted a 
class of configurational systems called "pendulums" and assumes that only the 
length and period need be observed, regardless of other differences in indi- 
viduals of the class, unless an observation happens to disagree with the assump- 
tion. Similarly, the geologist by no means describes all the characteristics of 
the individual bed of arkose and its parts but has already generalized a class 
"arkose" and adds other details, if any, only in terms of such variations within 
the class as are considered pertinent to his always limited purpose. The 
paleontologist has departed still further from true, strict plain story, for in 
recording a specimen as of a certain species he has not only generalized a 
particularly complex kind of class but has also reached a conclusion as to 
membership in that class that is not a matter of direct observation at all. 

Every object and every event is unique if its configurational aspects are 
described in full. Yet, and despite the schoolteachers, it may be said that some 
things are more unique than others. This depends in the first place on the com- 
plexity of what is being described, for certainly the more complex it is the more 
ways there are in which it may differ from others of its general class. A bed 
of arkose is more complex than a pendulum, and an organism is to still greater 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 27 

degree more complex than a bed of arkose. The hierarchy of complexity and 
individual uniqueness from physics to geology to biology is characteristic of 
those sciences and essential to philosophical understanding of them. It bears 
on the degree and kind of generalization characteristic of and appropriate to 
the various sciences even at the primary observational level. The number of 
pertinent classes of observations distinguished in physics is much smaller than 
in geology, and much smaller in geology than in biology. For instance, in 
terms of taxonomically distinguished discrete objects, compare the numbers of 
species of particles and atoms in physics, of minerals and rocks in geology, and 
of organisms in biology. Systems and processes in these sciences have the same 
sequence as to number and complexity. 

Another aspect of generalization and degree of uniqueness arises in com- 
parison of nonhistorical and historical science and in the contrast between 
immanence and configuration. In the previous examples, the physicist was 
concerned with a nonhistorical and immanent phenomenon: gravitation. It 
was necessary to his purpose and inherent in his method to eliminate as far as 
possible and then to ignore any historical element and any configurational 
uniqueness in the particular, individual pendulum used in the experiment. 
He sought a changeless law that would apply to all pendulums and ultimately 
to all matter, regardless of time and place. The geologist and paleontologist 
were also interested in generalization of common properties and relationships 
between one occurrence of arkose and another, between one specimen and 
another of a fossil species, but their generalizations were of the configurational 
and not the immanent properties and were, or at least involved, historical and 
not only nonhistorical science. The arkose or the fossil had its particular as 
well as its general configurational properties, its significant balance of difference 
and resemblance, not only because of immanent properties of its constituents 
and immanent processes that had acted on it, but also because of its history, 
the configurational sequence by which these individual things arose. The latter 
aspect, not pertinent to the old pendulum experiment or to almost anything in 
the more sophisticated physics of the present day, is what primarily concerns 
geology and paleontology' as historical sciences, or historical science in general. 

Scientific Law 

It has been mentioned that the purpose of the pendulum experiment was to 
formulate a law. The concept of scientific law and its relationship with his- 
torical and nonhistorical science are disputed questions requiring clarification. 
The term "law" has been so variously and loosely used in science that it is no 
longer clear unless given an explicit and restrictive definition. The college 
dictionary that I happen to have at hand (Barnhart, 1948) defines "law" in 
philosophical or scientific use as "a statement of a relation or sequence of 



28 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

phenomena invariable under the same conditions." This is satisfactory if it is 
made clear that a law applies to phenomena that are themselves variable: it 
is the relationship (or sequence, also a relationship) that is invariable. "Under 
the same conditions" must be taken to mean that other variables, if present, 
are in addition to and not inextricably involved with those specified in the law. 
Further, it is perhaps implicit but should be explicit that the relationship must 
be manifested or repeatable in an indefinitely recurrent way. A relationship 
that could or did occur only once would indeed be invariable, but surely would 
not be a law in any meaningful scientific sense. With these considerations, the 
definition might be rephrased thus: a scientific law is a recurrent, repeatable 
relationship between variables that is itself invariable to the extent that the 
factors affecting the relationship are explicit in the law. 

The definition implies that a valid law includes all the factors that necessarily 
act in conjunction. The fact that air friction also significantly affects the ac- 
celeration of a body falling in the atmosphere does not invalidate the law of 
gravitational acceleration, but only shows that the body is separately acted on 
by some factor defined by another law. Friction and the factors of gravitational 
acceleration are independent. Both laws are valid, and they can be combined 
into a valid compound law. But if some factor necessarily involved in either one, 
such as force of gravitation for acceleration or area for friction, were omitted, 
that law would be invalidated. 

Laws, as thus defined, are generalizations, but they are generalizations of a 
very special kind. They are complete abstractions from the individual case. 
They are not even concerned with what individual cases have in common, in 
the form of descriptive generalizations or definitions, such as that all pendulums 
are bodies movably suspended from a fixed point, all arkoses are sedimentary 
rocks containing feldspar, or all vertebrates are animals with jointed backbones. 
These and similar generalizations are obviously not laws by any usage. When 
we say, for instance, that arkose is a feldspathic sedimentary rock, we mean 
merely that we have agreed that if a rock happens to be sedimentary and 
within a certain range of texture and of composition including a feldspar, we 
will call it "arkose." We do not mean that the nature of the universe is such 
that there is an inherent relationship among sedimentary rocks and feldspars 
reducible to a constant. Laws are inherent, that is immanent, in the nature of 
things as abstracted entirely from contingent configurations, although always 
acting on those configurations. 

Until recently the theoretical structure of the nonhistorical physical sciences 
consisted largely of a body of laws or supposed laws of this kind. The prestige 
of these sciences and their success in discovering such laws were such that it 
was commonly believed that the proper scientific goal of the historical sciences 
was also to discover laws. Supposed laws were proposed in all the historical 
sciences. By way of example in my own field, paleontology, I may mention 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 29 

"Dollo's law" that evolution is irreversible, "Cope's law" that animals become 
larger in the course of evolution, or "Williston's law" that repetitive serial 
structures in animals evolve so as to become less numerous but more differen- 
tiated. The majority of such supposed laws are no more than descriptive gen- 
eralizations. For example, animals do not invariably become larger in time. 
Cope's law merely generalizes the observation that this is a frequent tendency, 
without establishing any fixed relationship among the variables possibly in- 
volved in this process. 

Even when a relationship seems established, so-called "historical laws" are 
almost always open to exceptions. For example, Rensch (1960), an evolutionist 
convinced of the validity of historical laws, considers "Allen's rule" a law: 
that when mammals adapt to colder climates their feet become shorter. But 
of the actual mammals studied by him, 36% were exceptions to the "law." 
Rensch explains this by supposing that "many special laws act together or 
interfere with one another. Thus 'exceptions' to the laws result." This is a 
hypothetical possibility, but to rely upon it is an act of faith. The "inter- 
fering" laws are unknown in this or similar examples. A second possibility is 
that the "laws," as stated, are invalid as laws because they have omitted factors 
necessarily and inherently involved. I believe this is true, not in the sense that 
we have only to complete the analysis and derive a complete and valid law, 
but in the sense that the omissions are such as to invalidate the very concept 
of historical law. 

The search for historical laws is, I maintain, mistaken in principle. Laws 
apply, in the dictionary definition "under the same conditions," or in my 
amendment "to the extent that factors affecting the relationship are explicit in 
the law," or in common parlance "other things being equal." But in history, 
which is a sequence of real, individual events, other things never are equal. 
Historical events, whether in the history of the earth, the history of life, or 
recorded human history, are determined by the immanent characteristics of 
the universe acting on and within particular configurations, and never by either 
the immanent or the configurational alone. It is a law that states the relation- 
ship between the length of a pendulum any pendulum and its period. Such 
a law does not include the contingent circumstances, the configuration, neces- 
sary for the occurrence of a real event, say Galileo's observing the period of a 
particular pendulum. If laws thus exclude factors inextricably and significantly 
involved in real events, they cannot belong to historical science. 

It is further true that historical events are unique, usually to a high degree, 
and hence cannot embody laws defined as recurrent, repeatable relationships. 
Apparent repetition of simple events may seem to belie this. A certain person's 
repeatedly picking up and dropping a certain stone may seem to be a recurrent 
event in all essentials, but there really is no applicable historical law. Abstrac- 
tion of a law from such repeated events leads to a nonhistorical law of immanent 



30 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

relationships, perhaps in this case of gravity and acceleration or perhaps of 
neurophysiology, and not to a historical law of which this particular person, 
picking up a certain stone, at a stated moment, and dropping it a definite 
number of times would be a determinate instance. In less trivial and more 
complex events, it is evident that the extremely intricate configurations in- 
volved in and necessary, for example, as antecedents for the erosion of the 
Grand Canyon or the origin of Homo sapiens simply cannot recur and that there 
can be no laws of such one-of-a-kind events. (Please bear in mind that the true, 
immanent laws are equally necessary and involved in such events but that they 
remain nonhistorical; the laws would have acted differently and the historical 
event, the change of configuration, would have been different if the configura- 
tion had been different; this historical element is not included in the operative 
laws.) 

It might be maintained that my definition of law is old-fashioned and is no 
longer accepted in the nonhistorical sciences either. Many laws of physics, 
considered nonhistorical, are now conceived as statistical in nature, involving 
not an invariable relationship but an average one. The old gas laws or the 
new laws of radioactive decay are examples. The gas laws used to assume an 
ideal gas. Now they are recognized as assuming that directions of molecular 
motion tend to cancel out if added together, and that velocities tend to vary- 
about a mean under given conditions. This cannot be precisely true of a real 
gas at a given moment, but when very large numbers of molecules are involved 
over an appreciable period of time, the statistical result is so close to the state 
described by the gas laws that the difference does not matter. In this and similar 
ways the descent from the ideal to the real in physical science has been coped 
with, not so much by facing it as by finding devices for ignoring it. 

The historical scientist here notes that a real gas in a real experiment has 
historical attributes that are additional to the laws affecting it. Every molecule 
of a real gas has its individual history. Its position, direction of motion, and 
velocity at a given moment (all parts of the total configuration) are the outcome 
of that history. It is, however, quite impractical and, for the purposes of 
physics, unnecessary to make an historical study of the gas. The gas laws apply 
well enough "other things being equal," which means here that the simple 
histories of the molecules tend, as observation shows, to produce a statistical 
result so nearly uniform that the historical, lawless element can be ignored for 
practical purposes. 

The laws immanent in the material universe are not statistical in essence. 
They act invariably in variable historical circumstances. The pertinence of 
statistics to such laws as those of gases is that they provide a generalized de- 
scription of usual historical circumstances in which those laws act, and not 
that they are inherent in the laws themselves. Use of statistical expressions, 
not as laws but as generalized descriptions, is common and helpful in all science 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 31 

and especially in historical science. For example, the statistical specifications 
of land forms or of grain size in sediments clearly are not laws but descriptions 
of configurations involved in and arising from history. 

To speak of "laws of history" is either to misunderstand the nature of history 
or to use "laws" in an unacceptable sense, usually for generalized descriptions 
rather than formulations of immanent relationships. 

Uniform! tarianism 

Uniformitarianism has long been considered a basic principle of historical 
science and a major contribution of geology to science and philosophy. In one 
form or another it does permeate geological and historical thought to such a 
point as often to be taken for granted. Among those who have recently given 
conscious attention to it, great confusion has arisen from conflicts and ob- 
scurities as to just what the concept is. To some, uniformitarianism (variously 
defined) is a law of history. Others, maintaining that it is not a law, have 
tended to deny its significance. Indeed, in any reasonable or usual formulation, 
it is not a law, but that does not deprive it of importance. It is commonly 
defined as the principle that the present is the key to the past. That definition 
is, however, so loose as to be virtually meaningless in application. A new, 
sharper, and clearer definition in modern terms is needed. 

Uniformitarianism arose around the turn of the 18th to 19th centuries, and 
its original significance can be understood only in that context. (The historical 
background is well covered in Gillispie, 1951.) It was a reaction against the 
then prevailing school of catastrophism, which had two main tenets: (1) the 
general belief that God has intervened in history, which therefore has included 
both natural and supernatural (miraculous) events; and (2) the particular 
proposition that earth history consists in the main of a sequence of major 
catastrophes, usually considered as of divine origin in accordance with the 
first tenet. (For a historical review anachronistically sympathetic with these 
beliefs see Hooykaas, 1959.) Uniformitarianism, as then expressed, had various 
different aspects and did not always face these issues separately and clearly. 
On the whole, however, it embodied two propositions contradictory to catas- 
trophism: (1) earth history (if not history in general) can be explained in terms 
of natural forces still observable as acting today; and (2) earth history has not 
been a series of universal or quasi-universal catastrophes but has in the main 
been a long, gradual development what we would now call an evolution. 
(The term "evolution" was not then customarily used in this sense.) A classic 
example of the conflicting application of these principles is the catastrophist 
belief that valleys are clefts suddenly opened by a supernally ordered revolution 
as against the uniformitarian belief that they have been gradually formed by 
rivers that are still eroding the valley bottoms. 



32 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

Both of the major points originally at issue are still being argued on the 
fringes of science or outside it. To most geologists, however, they no longer 
merit attention from anyone but a student of human history. It is a necessary 
condition and indeed part of the definition of science in the modern sense that 
only natural explanations of material phenomena are to be sought or can be 
considered scientifically tenable. It is interesting and significant that general 
acceptance of this principle (or limitation, if you like) came much later in the 
historical than in the nonhistorical sciences. In historical geology it was the 
most important outcome of the uniformitarian-catastrophist controversy. In 
historical biology it was the still later outcome of the Darwinian controversy 
and was hardly settled until our own day. (It is still far from settled among 
nonscientisls.) 

As to the second major point originally involved in uniformitarianism, there 
is no a priori or philosophical reason for ruling out a series of natural worldwide 
catastrophes as dominating earth history. However, this assumption is simply 
in such flat disagreement with everything we now know of geological history 
as to be completely incredible. The only issues still valid involve the way in 
which natural processes still observable have acted in the past and the sense 
in which the present is a key to the past. Uniformitarianism, or neo-uni- 
formitarianism, as applied to these issues has taken many forms, among them 
two extremes that are both demonstrably invalid. They happen to be rather 
amusingly illustrated in a recently published exchange of letters by Lippman 
(1962) andFarrand (1962). 

Lippman, one of the neocatastrophists still vociferous on the fringes of 
geological science, attacks uniformitarianism on the assumption that its now 
"orthodox" form is absolute gradualism, i.e., the belief that geological processes 
have always acted gradually and that changes catastrophic in rate and extent 
have never occurred. Farrand, who would perhaps consent to being called an 
orthodox geologist, demonstrates that Lippman has set up a straw man. 
Catastrophes do now occur. Their occurrence in the past exemplifies rather 
than contradicts a principle of uniformity. It happens that there is no valid 
evidence that catastrophes of the kind and extent claimed by the original 
catastrophists and by Lippman have ever occurred or that they could provide 
explanations for some real phenomena, as claimed. This, however, is a different 
point. Farrand expresses a common, probably the usual modern understanding 
of uniformitarianism as follows: "The geologist's concept that processes that 
acted on the earth in the past are the same processes that are operating today, 
on the same scale and at approximately the same rates" (italics mine). But this 
principle also seems to be flatly contradicted by geological history. Some pro- 
cesses (those of vulcanism or glaciation, for example) have evidently acted in 
the past on scales and at rates that cannot by any stretch be called "the same" 
or even "approximately the same" as those of today. Some past processes 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 33 

(such as those of Alpine nappe formation) are apparently not acting today, at 
least not in the form in which they did act. There are innumerable exceptions 
that disprove the rule. 

Then what uniformity principle, if any, is valid and important? The dis- 
tinction between immanence and configuration (or contingency) clearly points 
to one: the postulate that immanent characteristics of the material universe 
have not changed in the course of time. By this postulate all the immanent 
characteristics exist today and so can, in principle, be observed or, more 
precisely, inferred as generalizations and laws from observations. It is in this 
sense that the present is the key to the past. Present immanent properties and 
relationships permit the interpretation and explanation of history precisely 
because they are not historical. They have remained unchanged, and it is the 
configurations that have changed. Past configurations were never quite the 
same as they are now and were often quite different. Within those different 
configurations, the immanent characteristics have worked at different scales 
and rates at different times, sometimes combining into complex processes 
different from those in action today. The uniformity of the immanent charac- 
teristics helps to explain the fact that history is not uniform. (It could even be 
said that uniformitarianism entails catastrophes, but the paradox would be 
misleading if taken out of context.) Only to the extent that past configurations 
resembled the present in essential features can past processes have worked in a 
similar way. 

That immanent characteristics are unchanging may seem at first sight either 
a matter of definition or an obvious conclusion, but it is neither. Gravity would 
be immanent (an inherent characteristic of matter now) even if the law of 
gravity had changed, and it is impossible to prove that it has not changed. 
Uniformity, in this sense, is an unprovable postulate justified, or indeed re- 
quired, on two grounds. First, nothing in our incomplete but extensive knowl- 
edge of history disagrees with it. Second, only with this postulate is a rational 
interpretation of history possible, and we are justified in seeking as scientists 
we must seek such a rational interpretation. It is on this basis that I have 
assumed on previous pages that the immanent is unchanging. 

Explanation 

Explanation is an answer to the question "Why?" But as Nagel (1961) has 
shown at length, this is an ambiguous question calling for fundamentally dif- 
ferent kinds of answers in various contexts. One kind of answer specifies the 
inherent necessity of a proposition, and those are the answers embodied in laws. 
Some philosophers insist that this is the only legitimate form of explanation. 
Some (e.g. Hobson, 1923) even go so far as to maintain that since inherent 
necessity cannot be proved, there is no such thing as scientific explanation. 



34 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

Nagel demonstrates that all this is in part a mere question of linguistic usage 
and to that extent neither important nor interesting. The only substantial 
question involved is whether explanation must be universal or may be con- 
tingent. Nagel further shows, with examples (ten of them in his Chapter 2), 
that contingent explanations are valid in any usual and proper sense of the 
word "explanation." Nagel does not put the matter in just this way and he 
makes other distinctions not pertinent in the present context, but in essence this 
distinction between universal and contingent explanation parallels that be- 
tween, on one hand, immanence and nonhistorical science, which involves 
laws, and, on the other, configuration and historical science, which does not 
involve laws but which does also have explanations. 

The question "Why?" can be broken down into three others, each evoking 
a different kind of explanation, as Pittendrigh (1958) and Mayr (1961), among 
others, have discussed. "How?" is the typical question of the nonhistorical 
sciences. It asks how things work: how streams erode valleys, how mountains 
are formed, how animals digest food all in terms of the physical and chemical 
processes involved. The first step toward explanation of this kind is usually a 
generalized description, but answers that can be considered complete within 
this category are ultimately expressed in the form of laws embodying invariable 
relationships among variables. It is at this level that nonhistorical scientists 
not only start but usually also stop. 

The historical scientists nevertheless go on to a second kind of explanation 
that is equally scientific and ask a second question, in the vernacular, "How 
come?" How does it happen that the Colorado River formed the Grand 
Canyon, that Cordilleras arose along the edge of a continent, or that lions live 
on zebras? Again the usual approach is descriptive, the plain-story history of 
changes in configurations, whether individual, as for the Grand Canyon, or 
generalized to some degree, as for the concurrent evolution of lions and zebras. 
This is already a form of explanation, but full explanation at this more complex 
level is reached only by combination of the configurational changes with the 
immanent properties and processes present within them and involved in those 
changes. One does not adequately explain the Grand Canyon either by 
describing the structure of that area and its changes during the Cenozoic or 
by enumerating the physical and chemical laws involved in erosion, but by a 
combination of the two. 

There are two other kinds of scientific explanation to be mentioned here for 
completeness, although they enter into geology only to a limited extent through 
paleontology and are more directly biological and psychological. Both are 
kinds of answers to the question "What for?" This question is inappropriate 
in the physical sciences or the physical ("How?") aspects of other sciences, 
historical or nonhistorical. "What does a stone fall for?" or "Why was the 
Grand Canyon formed?" (in the sense of "What is it now for?") are questions 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 35 

that make no sense to a modern scientist. Such questions were nevertheless 
asked by primitive scientists (notably Aristotle) and are still asked by some 
nonscientists and pseudoscientists. The rise of modern physical science re- 
quired the rejection of this form of explanation, and physical scientists insisted 
that such questions simply must not be asked. In their own sphere they were 
right, but the questions are legitimate and necessary in the life sciences. 

One kind of "What for?" question, for example, "What are birds 5 wings 
for?" calls for a teleonomic answer. That they are an adaptation to flying is 
a proper answer and partial explanation near the descriptive level. Fuller 
explanation is historical: through a sequence of configurations of animals and 
their environments wings became possible, had an advantageous function, and 
so evolved through natural selection. Such a history is possible only in systems 
with the elaborate feedback and information-storage mechanisms character- 
istic of organisms, and this kind of explanation is inapplicable to wholly in- 
organic systems (or other configurations). "What for?" may also be answered 
ideologically in terms of purpose, explaining a sequence of events as means to 
reach a goal. Despite Aristotle and the Neo-Thomists, this form of explanation 
is scientifically legitimate only if the goal is foreseen. It therefore is applicable 
only to the behavior of humans and, with increasing uncertainty, to some 
other animals. 

The question "How come?" is peculiar to historical science and necessary in 
all its aspects. Answers to this question are the historical explanations. Never- 
theless, the full explanation of history requires also the reductionist explanations 
(nonhistorical in themselves) elicited by "How?" Teleonomic explanations 
are also peculiar to historical science, but only to that part of it which deals 
with the history of organisms. 

Predictive Testing and Predictability 

All of science rests on postulates that are not provable in the strictest sense. 
The uniformity of the immanent, previously discussed, is only one such postu- 
late, although perhaps the most important one for historical science. Indeed 
it may be said that not only the postulates but also the conclusions of science, 
including its laws and other theories, are not strictly provable. Proof in an 
absolute sense occurs only in mathematics or logic when a conclusion is demon- 
strated to be tautologically contained in axioms or premises. Since these 
disciplines are not directly concerned with the truth or probability of axioms 
or premises, and hence of conclusions drawn from them, their proofs are trivial 
for the philosophy of the natural sciences. In these sciences, the essential point 
is determination of the probability of the premises themselves, and mathe- 
matics and logic only provide methods for correctly arriving at the implications 
contained in those premises. Despite the vulgar conception of "proving a 



36 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

theory," which does sometimes creep into the scientific literature, careful usage 
never speaks of proof in this connection but only of establishment of degrees of 
confidence. 

In the nonhistorical sciences the testing of a proposition, that is, the attempt 
to modify the degree of confidence in it, usually has one general form. A pos- 
sible relationship between phenomena is formulated on the basis of prior 
observations. With that formulation as a premise, implications as to phenomena 
not yet observed are arrived at by logical deduction. In other words, a pre- 
diction is made from an hypothesis. An experiment is then devised in order to 
determine whether the predicted phenomena do in fact occur. The premise 
as to relationships, the hypothesis, often has characteristics of a law, although 
it may be expressed in other terms. As confidence increases (nothing contrary 
to prediction is observed) it becomes a theory, which is taken as simultaneously 
explaining past phenomena and predicting future ones. 

Physical scientists (e.g. Conant, 1947) have often maintained or assumed 
that this is the paradigm of testing ("verification" or increase of confidence) 
for science in general. On this basis, some philosophers and logicians of science 
(notably Hempel and Oppenheim, 1953) have concluded that scientific ex- 
planation and prediction are inseparable. Explanation (in this sense) is a 
correlation of past and present; prediction is a correlation of present and future. 
The tense does not matter, and it is maintained that the logical characteristics 
of the two are the same. They are merely two statements of the same relation- 
ship. This conclusion is probably valid as applied to scientific laws, strictly 
defined, in nonhistorical aspects of science. In previous terms, it has broad 
perhaps not completely general validity for "How"? explanations. But we 
have seen that there are other kinds of scientific explanations and that some of 
them are more directly pertinent to historical science. It cannot be assumed 
and indeed will be found untrue that parity of explanation and prediction is 
valid in historical science. 

Scriven (1959 and personal communication) has discussed this matter at 
length. One of his points (put in different words) is that explanation and 
prediction are not necessarily symmetrical, that in some instances a parity 
principle is clearly inapplicable to them. Part of the argument may be para- 
phrased as follows. If X is always preceded by A, A is a cause, hence at least 
a partial explanation, of AT. But A may not always be followed by X. There- 
fore, although A explains X when X does occur, it is not possible to predict the 
occurrence of AT from that of A. A simple geological example (not from Scriven) 
is that erosion causes valleys, but one cannot predict from the occurrence of 
erosion that a valley will be formed. In fact, quite the contrary may occur; 
erosion can also obliterate valleys. 

The example also illustrates another point by Scriven (again in different 
terms). The failure of prediction is due to the fact that erosion (A) is only a 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 37 

partial cause of valleys (-Y). It is a (complex) immanent cause, and we have 
omitted the configurational cause. Erosion is always followed by a valley 
formation, A is followed by A', if it affects certain configurations. The total 
cause, as in all historical events, comprises both immanent and configurational 
elements. It further appears that prediction is possible in historical science, 
but only to a limited extent and under certain conditions. If the immanent 
causation is known and if the necessary similarities of configurational circum- 
stances are known and are recurrent, prediction is possible. 

The possibility of predicting the future from the past is nevertheless extremely 
limited in practice and incomplete even in principle. There seem to be four 
main reasons for these limitations. Mayr (1961) has discussed them in connec- 
tion with historical aspects of biology, and with some modification his analysis 
can be extended to historical science in general. 

(1) A necessary but insufficient cause may not be positively correlated with 
the usual outcome or event. This is related to the asymmetry of explanation 
and prediction already discussed, and it is also discussed in other words by 
Scriven (1959). Scriven's example is that paresis is caused by syphilis, but that 
most syphilitics do not develop paresis. A modification of Mayr's example is 
that mutation is a necessary cause for evolutionary change, but that such change 
rarely takes the direction of the most frequent mutations. A geological example 
might be that vulcanism is essential for the formation of basalt plateaus, but 
that such plateaus are not the usual result of vulcanism. 

(2) The philosophical interest of the foregoing reason for historical unpre- 
dictability is reduced by the fact that the outcome might become predictable 
in principle if all the necessary causes were known. But as soon as we bring in 
configuration as one of the necessary causes, which must always be done in 
historical science, the situation may become extremely, often quite impossibly, 
complicated. Prediction is possible only to the extent that correlation can be 
established with pertinent, abstracted and generalized, recurrent elements in 
configurations. Considerations as to base level, slope, precipitation, and other 
configurational features may be generalized so as to permit prediction that 
a valley will be formed. It would be impossibly difficult to specify all the far 
more complex factors of configuration required to predict the exact form of a 
particular valley, an actual historical event. In such cases it may still be pos- 
sible, as Scriven has pointed out in a different context, to recognize a posteriori 
the configurational details responsible for particular characteristics of the actual 
valley, even though these characteristics were not practically predictable. This 
reason for unpredictability of course becomes more important the more complex 
the system involved. As both Scriven and Mayr emphasize, it may become 
practically insurmountable in the extremely complex organic systems involved 
in evolution, and yet this does not make evolution inexplicable. Even in the 
comparatively extremely simple physical example of the gas laws, it is obviously 



38 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

impossible in practice and probably also in principle (because of the limitations 
of simultaneous observation of position and motion) to determine the historical 
configurations of all the individual molecules, so that the precise outcome of a 
particular experiment is in fact unpredictable. 

In this example the complications may be virtually eliminated and in his- 
torical science they may often be at least alleviated by putting specification of 
configurational causes on a statistical basis. This may, however, still further 
increase the asymmetry of explanation and prediction. For instance, in Scriven's 
previously cited example, as he points out, the only valid statistical prediction 
is that syphilis will not produce paresis; in other words, that a necessary cause 
of a particular result will not have that result. If, as a historical fact, a syphilitic 
does become paretic, the event was not predictable even in principle. The point 
is pertinent here because it demonstrates that a statistical approach does not 
eliminate the effect of configurational complication in making historical events 
unpredictable. 

(3) As configurational systems become more complex they acquire charac- 
teristics absent in the simpler components of these systems and not evidently 
predictable from the latter. This is the often discussed phenomenon of emer- 
gence. The classical physical example is that the properties of water may be 
explicable but are not predictable by those of hydrogen and oxygen. Again the 
unpredictability increases with configurational complications. It is difficult to 
conceive prediction from component atoms to a mountain range, and to me, 
at least, prediction from atoms to, say, the fall of Rome, is completely incon- 
ceivable. It could be claimed that prediction of emergent phenomena would be 
possible if we really knew all about the atoms. This might just possibly, and 
only in principle, be true in nonhistorical science, as in the example of 
2H+O >H 2 O. It would, however, be true in historical science only if we 
knew all the immanent properties and also all the configurational histories of 
all the atoms, which is certainly impossible in practice and probably in prin- 
ciple. Whether or not the predictability of emergent phenomena is a philo- 
sophical possibility (and I am inclined to think it is not), that possibility would 
seem to have little heuristic and no pragmatic value. 

(4) Scientific prediction depends on recurrence or repeatability. Prediction 
of unique events is impossible either in practice or in principle. Historical 
events are always unique in some degree, and they are therefore never pre- 
cisely predictable. However, as previously noted, there are different degrees 
of uniqueness. Historical events may therefore be considered predictable in 
principle to the extent that their causes are similar. (This is a significant 
limitation only for configurational causes, since by the postulate of uniformity 
the immanent causes are not merely similar but identical.) 

In practice, further severe limitations are imposed by the difficulties of 
determining what similarities of cause are pertinent to the events and of ob- 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 39 

serving these causal factors. It must also again be emphasized that such 
prediction can only be general and not particular. In other words, prediction 
does not include any unique aspect of the event, and in historical science it is 
often the unique aspects that most require explanation. One might, for in- 
stance, be able to provide a predictive explanation of mountain formation 
(although in fact geologists have not yet achieved this) and also explanations 
of the particular features of say, the Alps (achieved in small part), but the 
latter explanations would not be predictive. (This is also an example of the 
fact that unpredictive ad hoc explanation may be easier to achieve than pre- 
dictive general explanation.) 

At this point, one might wish to raise the question of what is interesting or 
significant in a scientific investigation. In the physical study of gases or of 
sand grains, the individuality (uniqueness) of single molecules or grains, slight 
in any case, is generally beside the point. In dealing with historical events, 
such as the formation of a particular sandstone or mountain range, individuality 
often is just the point at issue. Here, more or less parenthetically, another aspect 
and another use of the statistical approach are pertinent. A statistical descrip- 
tion of variation in sand grains or of elevations, slopes, etc. in a mountain range 
is a practical means of taking into account their individual contributions to the 
over-all individuality of the sandstone or the mountain range. 

Two other aspects of explanation and prediction in historical science may 
be more briefly considered: the use of models, and prediction from trends and 
cycles. Past geological events cannot be repeated at will, and furthermore, 
prediction loses practical significance if, as is often the case in geology, its 
fulfillment would require some thousands or millions of years. This is the 
rationale for the experimental approach, using physical models to study the 
historical aspects of geology and, when possible, other historical sciences. The 
models abstract what are believed to be the essential general configurational 
similarities of historical events (folding and faulting, valley erosion, and the 
like) and scale these in space and time in such a way as to make them repeatable 
at will and at rates that permit observation. With such models predictive 
explanations can be made and tested. (The further problems of projecting from 
model to geological space and time need not be considered here.) 

Finally, the most common form taken by attempts at actual historical pre- 
diction is the extrapolation of trends. In fact, this approach has no philosoph- 
ical and little pragmatic validity. Its philosophical justification would require 
that contingent causes be unchanging or change always in the same ways, 
which observation shows to be certainly false. Its degree of pragmatic justi- 
fication depends on the fact that trends and cycles do exist and (by definition) 
continue over considerable periods of time. Therefore, at randomly distributed 
times, established trends and cycles are more likely to continue than not. 
Predictions through the extrapolation of trends are useful mostly for short 



40 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

ranges of time; for larger ranges their likelihood decreases until the appropriate 
statistical prediction becomes not continuation but termination or change of 
trend or cycle within some specified time. The period of likely continuation or 
justifiable extrapolation is, furthermore, greatly reduced by the fact that a 
trend or cycle must already have gone on for a considerable time in order to be 
recognized as actually existent. Present knowledge of geological and biological 
(evolutionary) history suggests that all known trends and cycles have in fact 
ended or changed except those which are now still within the span of likelihood 
that is statistically indicated by the trends and cycles of the past. Moreover, 
many supposed examples, such as regular cycles of mountain building or trends 
for increase in size of machairodont sabers, now seem to have been mistaken. 
Many real trends and cycles also turn out to be neither so uniform nor so long 
continued as was formerly supposed, often under the influence of invalid his- 
torical "laws" such as that of orthogenesis or of the pulse of the earth. It is 
improbable that prediction about a total historical situation on this basis alone 
is ever justified, even when prediction from causal properties and configurations 
is possible within limits. 

Strategy in Historical Science 

The sequence hypothesis-prediction-experiment is not the only strategy of 
explanation and testing in nonhistorical physical science. It is, however, so 
often appropriate and useful there that philosophers who base their concepts 
of science on physical science, as most of them do, tend to consider it ideal if 
not obligatory. (On this point of view see, as a single example among many, 
Braithwaite, 1953.) This is an example of the existing hegemony of the physical 
sciences, which is not logically justifiable but has been fostered by human his- 
torical and pragmatic factors. It has been shown that this strategy is also 
possible in historical science, but that it here plays a smaller and less exclusive 
role. It must be supplemented and frequently supplanted by other strategies. 
These are in part implicit in what has already been said, but further notice of 
some of the more important ones remains as the final aim of this essay. One 
purpose is to demonstrate more fully and distinctly that nonpredictive explana- 
tion and testing are in fact possible in historical geology and other historical 
sciences. 

The primary data of the historical scientist consist of partial descriptions of 
configurations near the level of plain story. If the configurations are sequential 
and connected, that is, if the later historically arose from the earlier, the ante- 
cedent can be taken as including, at least in part, the configurational require- 
ments and causes for the consequent. Even in such simple circumstances, a 
direct causal connection can often be assumed on the basis of principles already 
developed or on the basis of known parallels. For instance, partial configura- 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 41 

tional causation is clearly involved in the sequence Hyiacotheriun (Eohippus)- 
Orohippus or sand-sandstone. The latter example adds an important point: the 
earlier configuration of a stratum now sandstone is not actually observed but 
is inferred from the latter. The examples illustrate two kinds of explanatory 
sequences available to the historical scientist. In one we have dated documents 
contemporaneous with the events and so directly historical in nature and 
sequence. In the other we have a pseudohistorical sequence such as that of 
presently existing sands and sandstones. Their resemblances and differences 
are such that we can be confident that they share some elements of historical 
change, but that one has undergone more change than the other. In this case 
it is easy to see that the sandstone belongs to a later period in the pseudohis- 
torical sequence. One therefore infers for it a historically antecedent sand and 
can proceed to determine what characteristics are inherited from that sand and 
the nature of the subsequent changes. 

The use of pseudohistorical sequences is another way in which the present 
is a key to the past, but it does not involve another principle of uniformity. 
The addition to the element of uniformity of immanent characteristics is 
simply a descriptive resemblance or generalization of configuration applicable 
to the particular case as a matter of observation. In practice, an historical 
interpretation commonly involves both historical and pseudohistorical se- 
quences. For example, study of the stratigraphy of a given region simultane- 
ously concerns the directly historical sequence of strata and the history of each 
stratum from deposition (or before) to its present condition as inferred on the 
basis of appropriate pseudohistorical sequences. 

A second form of strategy has a certain analogy with the use of multiple 
experiments with controlled variables. The method is to compare different 
sequences, either historical or pseudohistorical, that resemble each other in 
some pertinent way. Resemblances in the antecedent configurations may be 
taken to include causes of the consequent resemblances. It is not, however, 
legitimate to assume that they are all necessary causes or that they include 
sufficient causes. Even more important at times is the converse principle that 
factors that differ among the antecedents are not causes of resemblances among 
the consequents. By elimination when many sequences are compared, this may 
warrant the conclusion that residual antecedent resemblances are necessary 
causes. There is here applicable a principle of scientific testing in general: 
absolute proof of a hypothesis or other form of inference is impossible, but 
disproof is possible. Confidence increases with the number of opportunities for 
disproof that have not in fact revealed discrepancies. In this application, con- 
fidence that residual resemblances are causal increases with the number of 
different sequences involved in the comparison. This form of strategy is ap- 
plicable to most geological sequences, few of which are unique in all respects. 
Obvious and important examples include the formation of geosynclines and 



42 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

their subsequent folding, or many such recurrent phenomena as the strati- 
graphic consequences of advancing and retreating seas. 

An interesting special case arises when there is more resemblance among 
consequent than among antecedent configurations: the phenomenon of con- 
vergence. This has received much more attention in the study of organic 
evolution than elsewhere, but nonorganic examples also occur. If I am cor- 
rectly informed, the origin of various granites from quite different antecedents 
is a striking example. Another fair example might be the formation of more 
or less similar land forms by different processes: for example, the formation of 
mountains by folding, faulting, or by erosion of a plateau; or the development 
of plains and terraces by erosion or deposition. Doubtless most geologists can 
find still other examples in their specialities. The special strategic interest of 
convergence is that its elimination of noncausal factors often gives confidence 
in identification of causes and increases knowledge of them. In organic evolu- 
tion it has greatly increased understanding of the nature and limits of adapta- 
tion by natural selection. In the example of the granites it shows that an essential 
antecedent is not some one kind of lithology but atomic composition, and it 
pinpoints the search for the processes bringing about this particular kind of 
configuration of the atoms. 

It has been previously pointed out that the explanation of an historical event 
involves both configuration and immanence, even though the latter is not 
historical in nature. Historical science therefore requires knowledge of the 
pertinent immanent factors, and its strategy includes distinguishing the two 
and studying their interactions. Nonhistorical science, by its primary concern 
with the immanent, is the principal source of the historian's necessary knowledge 
of immanent factors and his principal means of distinguishing these from con- 
figurational relationships. A typical approach is to vary configurations in 
experiments and to determine what relationships are constant throughout the 
configurational variations. To a historical geologist, the function of a physical 
geologist is to isolate and characterize the immanent properties of the earth 
and its parts in that and other ways. The historical geologist is then interested 
not in what holds true regardless of configuration, but in how configuration 
modifies the action of the identified immanent properties and forces. In this 
respect, the nonhistorical scientist is more interested in similarities and the 
historical scientist in differences. 

Here the historical scientist has two main strategies, both already mentioned. 
They may be used separately or together. One proceeds by controlled experi- 
mentation, in geology usually with scaled-down models although to a limited 
extent experimentation with natural geological phenomena is also possible. 
(The opportunities for experimentation are greater in some other historical 
sciences.) The other might be viewed as complementary to the previously 
discussed study of similarities in multiple sequences. In this strategy, attention 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 43 

is focused on consequent differences, the causes of which are sought among the 
observable or inferable differences of antecedent configurations. Although the 
explanation is rarely so simple or so easy to identify, a sufficiently illustrative 
example would be the presence in one valley and absence in another of a water- 
fall caused by a fault, of a ledge of hard rock above shale, or of some other 
readily observable local configuration. 

Points always at issue in historical science are the consistency of proposed 
immanent laws and properties with known historical events and the sufficiency 
and necessity of such causation acting within known configurations. Probably 
the strongest argument of the catastrophists was that known features of the 
earth were inconsistent with their formation by known natural forces within 
the earth's span of existence, which many of them took to be about 6000 years. 
The fault of course was not with their logic but with one of their premises. 
The same argument, with the same fallacy, was brought up against Darwin 
when it was claimed that his theory was inadequate to account for the origin 
of present organic diversity in the earth's span, then estimated by the most 
eminent physicists as a few million years at most. Darwin stuck to his guns 
and insisted, correctly, that the calculation of the age of the earth must be 
wrong. Historical science has an essential role, both philosophical and prac- 
tical, in providing such cross checks (mostly nonpredictive and nonexperi- 
mental), both with its own theories and with those of other sciences as part of 
the self-testing of science in general. A current geological example, perhaps 
all the more instructive because it has not yet reached a conclusion, is the 
controversy over continental drift and the adequacy of physical forces to bring 
it about if indeed it did occur. (Incidentally the original motive for writing 
Simpson, 1944, was to test the consistency and explanatory power of various 
neontological theories of evolution by comparison with the historical record.) 

The testing of hypothetical generalizations or proposed explanations against 
a historical record has some of the aspects of predictive testing. Here, however, 
one does not say, "If so and so holds good, such and such will occur," but, 
"If so and so has held good, such and such must have occurred." (Again I 
think that the difference in tense is logically significant and that a parity prin- 
ciple is not applicable.) In my own field one of the most conspicuous examples 
has been the theory of orthogenesis, which in the most common of its many 
forms maintains that once an evolutionary trend begins it is inherently forced 
to continue to the physically possible limit regardless of other circumstances. 
This view plainly has consequences that should be reflected in the fossil record. 
As a matter of observation, the theory is inconsistent with that record. A more 
strictly geological example is the "pulse of the earth" theory, that worldwide 
mountain-making has occurred at regularly cyclic intervals, which also turns 
out to be inconsistent with the available historical data (Gilluly, 1949, among 
others). 



44 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

The study of human history is potentially included in historical science by 
our definition. One of its differences from other branches of historical science 
is that it deals with configurational sequences and causal complexes so exceed- 
ingly intricate that their scientific analysis has not yet been conspicuously 
successful. (Toynbee's (1946) correlation of similar sequences would seem to 
be a promising application of a general historical strategy, but I understand 
that the results have not been universally acclaimed by his colleagues.) A 
second important difference is that so much of this brief history has been di- 
rectly observed, although with varying degrees of accuracy and acuity and only 
in its very latest parts by anyone whose approach can reasonably be called 
scientific. Direct observation of historical events is also possible in geology and 
other historical sciences, and it is another of their important strategies. Meticu- 
lous observation of the history of a volcano (Paricutin) from birth to maturity 
is an outstanding example. More modestly, anyone who watches a flash flood 
in a southwestern arroyo or, for that matter, sees a stone roll down a hillside 
is observing an historical event. 

In geology, however, and in all historical science except that of human 
history, the strategic value of observing actual events is more indirect than di- 
rect. The processes observed are, as a rule, only those that act rapidly. The 
time involved is infinitesimal in comparison with the time span of nonhuman 
history, which is on the order of nlO 9 years for both" historical geology and 
historical biology. Currently practicable resolution within that span varies 
enormously but is commonly no better, and in some instances far worse, 
than wlO 6 . The observed events are also both local and trivial in the great 
majority of instances. They are in fact insignificant in themselves, but they are 
extremely significant as samples or paradigms, being sequences seen in action 
and with all their elements and surrounding circumstances observable. They 
thus serve in a special and particularly valuable way both as historical (and 
not pseudohistorical) data for the strategies of comparison of multiple sequences 
and as natural experiments for the strategies of experimentation, including on 
some but not all occasions that of prediction. (This, incidentally, is still a 
third way in which the present is a key to the past, but again it involves 
no additional uniformity principle.) 

Direct observation of historical events is also involved in a different way in 
still another of the historical strategies, that of testing explanatory theories 
against a record. For example, such observations are one of the best means of 
estimating rates of processes under natural conditions and so of judging whether 
they could in fact have caused changes indicated by the record in the time 
involved. Or the historical importance of observed short-range processes can 
be tested against the long-range record for necessity, or sufficiency, or both. 
An interesting paleontological example concerns the claims of some Neo- 
Lamarckians who agree that although the inheritance of acquired characters 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 45 

is too slow to be directly observed, it has been an (or the) effective long-range 
process of evolution. The fossil record in itself cannot oifer clear disproof, but 
it strips the argument of all conviction by showing that actually observed short- 
range processes excluded by this hypothesis are both necessary and sufficient 
to account for known history. 



Conclusion 

The most frequent operations in historical science are not based on the ob- 
servation of causal sequences events but on the observation of results. From 
those results an attempt is made to infer previous causes. This is true even when 
a historical sequence, for example one of strata, is observed. Such a sequence 
is directly historical only in the sense that the strata were deposited in a time 
sequence that is directly available to us. The actual events, deposition of each 
stratum, are not observable. In such situations, and in this sense, the present 
is not merely a key to the past it is all we have in the way of data. Prediction 
is the inference of results from causes. Historical science largely involves the 
opposite: inferring causes (of course including causal configurations) from results. 

The reverse of prediction has been called, perhaps sometimes facetiously, 
postdiction. In momentary return to the parity of explanation and prediction, 
it may be noted that if A is the necessary and sufficient cause of X and X is 
the necessary and sole result of A, then the prediction of X from A and the 
postdiction of A from AT are merely different statements of the same relationship. 
They are logically identical. It has already been demonstrated and sufficiently 
emphasized that the conditions for this identity frequently do not hold in 
practice and sometimes not even in principle for historical science. Here, then, 
postdiction takes on a broader and more distinct meaning and is not merely a 
restatement of a predictive relationship. With considerable oversimplification 
it might be said that historical science is mainly postdictive, and nonhistorical 
science mainly predictive. 

Postdiction also involves the self-testing essential to a true science, as has 
also been exemplified although not, by far, fully expounded. Perhaps its 
simplest and yet most conclusive test is the confrontation of theoretical explana- 
tion with historical evidence. A crucial historical fact or event may be deduced 
from a theory, and search may subsequently produce evidence for or against 
its actual prior occurrence. This has been called "prediction," for example, 
by Rensch (1960), sometimes with the implication that historical science is 
true science because its philosophical basis does not really differ from that of 
nonhistorical physics. The premise that the philosophy of science is necessarily 
nonhistorical is of course wrong, but the argument is fallacious in any case. 
What is actually predicted is not the antecedent occurrence but the subsequent 
discovery; the antecedent is postdicted. Beyond this, perhaps quibbling, point, 



46 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

the antecedent occurrence is not always a necessary consequence of any fact, 
principle, hypothesis, theory, law, or postulate advanced before the postdiction 
was made. The point is sufficiently illustrated on the pragmatic level by the 
sometimes spectacular failure to predict discoveries even when there is a sound 
basis for such prediction. An evolutionary example is the failure to predict 
discovery of a "missing link," now known (Australopithecus), that was upright 
and tool-making but had the physiognomy and cranial capacity of an ape. 
Fortunately such examples do not invalidate the effectiveness of postdiction in 
the sense of inferring the past from the present with accompanying testing by 
historical methods. In fact the discovery of Australopithecus was an example of 
such testing, for without any predictive element it confirmed (i.e. strengthened 
confidence in) certain prior theories as to human origins and relationships and 
permitted their refinement. 

Another oversimplified and yet generally significant distinction is that his- 
torical science is primarily concerned with configuration, and nonhistorical 
science with immanence. Parallel, not identical, with this is a certain tendency 
for the former to concentrate on the real and the individual, for the latter to 
focus on the ideal and the generalized, or for both to operate with different 
degrees of abstraction. We have seen, however, that interpretation and ex- 
planation in historical science include immanence and, along with it, all the 
facts, principles, laws, and so on, of nonhistorical science. To these, historical 
science adds its own configurational and other aspects. When it is most charac- 
teristically itself, it is compositionist rather than reductionist, examining the 
involvement of primary materials and forces in systems of increasing complexity 
and integration. 

Historical science, thus characterized, cuts across the traditional lines between 
the various sciences: physics, chemistry, astronomy, geology, biology, anthro- 
pology, psychology, sociology-, and the rest. Each of these has both historical 
and nonhistorical aspects, although the proportions of the two differ greatly. 
Among the sciences named, the historical element plays the smallest role in 
physics, where it is frequently ignored, and the greatest in sociology, where the 
existence of nonhistorical aspects is sometimes denied one of the reasons that 
sociology has not always been ranked as a science. It is not a coincidence that 
there is a correlation with complexity and levels of integration, physics being 
the simplest and sociology the most complex science in this partial list. Un- 
fortunately philosophers of science have tended to concentrate on one end of 
this spectrum, and that the simplest, so much as to give a distorted, and in some 
instances quite false, idea of the philosophy of science as a whole. 

Geology exhibits as even a balance of historical and nonhistorical elements 
as any of the sciences, and here the relationships of the two may be particularly 
clear. It is in a strategic position to illuminate scientific philosophy an 
opportunity not yet sufficiently exploited. 



HISTORICAL SCIENCE 47 

Addendum 

The preceding essay was read in manuscript and constructively criticized by a 
number of geologists, mostly authors of other chapters in this work. The following 
additional comments bear on points brought up by them. 

A few critics objected to the term "immanent" on the grounds that it is unfamiliar 
and is liable to confusion with "imminent," a word different in origin and meaning. 
The most nearly acceptable substitute proposed was "inherent/ 5 which does not seem 
to me equally precise or strictly appropriate in the intended sense. Since "immanent" 
is here clearly defined and consistently used, I cannot believe that it will prove mis- 
leading. It did not, in fact, mislead the readers who nevertheless criticized it. 

Another critical suggestion was that under some special circumstances extrapolation 
from historical trends may make unique events predictable. This is, I think, possible 
to a limited extent and for relatively short-range prediction on a strictly probabilistic 
basis, as is, indeed, pointed out in the preceding essay. The example given by the com- 
mentator also illustrates the limitations: that the exhaustion of the preponderant part 
of the fossil fuels within the next few centuries is predictable. In fact, contingent cir- 
cumstances have changed so radically and unpredictably over recent years that the 
term of this prediction has had to be greatly changed and has evidently become looser 
and less reliable than was earlier believed. Even though some confidence may yet be 
felt in the eventual outcome, such a historical prediction is on a different level from one 
based on causal analysis apart from or in addition to trends. 

Along similar lines, it was also remarked that prediction from cycles may be ex- 
tremely reliable when the phenomena are definitely known to be cyclical, with planetary 
motions as one example. That is, of course, true for the given example and for others 
in which such current configurational changes as occur have come to be almost entirely 
governed by cyclical immanent processes. The prediction is then based on the latter, 
alone, and a truly historical element is limited. If a nonrecurrent historical change 
should occur, for example if the mass of any planet were significantly altered, the pre- 
dictions would prove false. To the extent that prediction is possible in such examples, 
it depends on knowledge of immanent causes and on strictly recurrent configurations, 
as specified above. Moreover, as this critic agrees in the main, similarly predictable 
cycles may be discounted so far as geology is concerned. 

Finally, radioactive decay of an isotope is cited as an example of a precisely pre- 
dictable noncyclical phenomenon. I consider radioactive decay to be analogous to the 
gas laws or to a chemical reaction; in each case the prediction of actual historical events 
is not precise in principle, but the historical circumstances may be statistically so uniform 
that changes in them can often be ignored in practice. Then the laws or the generalized 
descriptions expressed in the appropriate equations hold good just to the extent that the 
historical element can safely be ignored, and their predictions are not historical in 
principle. 



48 GEORGE GAYLORD SIMPSON 

REFERENCES CITED 

BARNHART, C. L., ed., 1948, The American college dictionary: New York and London, 

Harper, 1432 pp. 
BERNAL, J. D., 1951, The physical basis of life: London, Routledge and Kegan Paul, 

80pp. 
BRATTHWAITE, R. B. 3 1953, Scientific explanation: New York, Cambridge Univ. Press, 

375 pp. 

CON ANT, J. B., 1947, On understanding science: New Haven, Yale Univ. Press, 145 pp. 
FARRAND, W. R., 1962, Frozen mammoths: Science, vol. 137, pp. 450-452. [See also 

Lippman, 1962.] 
GILUSPBE, C. C., 1951, Genesis and geology; a study in the relations of scientific thought, 

natural theology, and social opinion in Great Britain, 1790-1850: Cambridge, Mass., 

Harvard Univ. Press, 315 pp. 
GILLULY, J., 1949, Distribution of mountain building in geologic time: Gcol. Soc. 

Am., B., vol. 60, pp. 561-590. 
HEMPEL, C. G., and OPPENHEIM, P., 1953, The logic of explanation, in Readings in the 

philosophy of science, H. Feigl and M. Brodbeck, eds.: New York, Appleton-Century- 

Crofts, pp. 319-352. 
HOBSON, E. W., 1923, The domain of natural science; The Gifford Lectures delivered in 

the Univ. of Aberdeen in 1921 and 1922: New York, Macmillan, 510 pp. 
HOOYKAAS, R., 1959, Natural law and divine miracle; a historical-critical study of the 

principle of uniformity in geology, biology, and theology: Leiden, E. J. Brill, 237 pp. 
LIPPMAN, H. E., 1962, Frozen mammoths: Science, vol. 137, pp. 449-450. [See also 

Farrand, 1962.] 
MAYR, E., 1961, Cause and effect in biology; kinds of causes, predictability, and 

teleology are viewed by a practicing biologist: Science, vol. 134, pp. 1501-1506. 
MORGAN, C. L., 1890-91, Animal life and intelligence: London, E. Arnold, 512 pp. 
NAGEL, E., 1961, The structure of science; problems in the logic of scientific explana- 
tion: New York, Harcourt, Brace, and World, 618 pp. 
PTTTENDRIGH, C. S., 1958, Adaptation, natural selection, and behavior, in Behavior and 

evolution, A. Roe and G. G. Simpson, eds.: New Haven, Yale Univ. Press, 557 pp. 
RENSCH, B., I960, The laws of evolution, in Evolution after Darwin, S. Tax, ed., vol. 1: 

Chicago, Univ. Chicago Press, pp. 95-116. 
SCRIVEN, M., 1959, Explanation and prediction in evolutionary theory; satisfactory 

explanation of the past is possible even when prediction of the future is impossible: 

Science, vol. 130, pp. 477-482. 
SIMPSON, G. G., 1944, Tempo and mode in evolution: New York, Columbia Univ. 

Press, 237 pp. 
, 1960, The history of life, in Evolution after Darwin, S. Tax, ed., vol. 1 : Chicago, 

Univ. of Chicago Press, pp. 117-180. 
, 1962, Notes on the nature of science by a biologist, in Notes on the nature of 

science: New York, Harcourt, Brace, and World, pp. 7-12. 

, 1963, Biology and the nature of science: Science, vol. 139, pp. 81-88. 

TOYNBEE, A., 1946-47, A study of history: London, Oxford Univ. Press, 617 pp. 



DAVID B. KITTS 

University of Oklahoma 



The Theory of Geology 1 



Geologists have, throughout the history of their discipline, asked questions 
about the nature of geology and its relationship to the other natural sciences. 
Self-consciousness has been increasing among geologists during the past decade 
as it has been increasing among all scientists. In print the most obvious sign 
of an inclination toward self-examination is to be found in discussions of the 
ideal geologic curriculum in colleges and universities. Many of the questions 
raised in these discussions may be interpreted as questions about the theoretical 
structure of the science. 



Geologic Generalizations 

In the discussion that follows, "geologic term" will be understood to mean 
a term which fulfills a particular function in geology and is not a term necessary 
for meaningful discourse outside geology. Geologic terms may have been in- 
vented for the specific role which they fill, for example, "syncline"; or they 
may be terms of the common language whose meaning has been expanded, 
or more often restricted, to fill a particular technical role, for example, "sand." 
A general statement which employs geologic terms in the above sense will be 
called a "geologic generalization." 

In a recently published paper (Kitts, 1963) I expressed the opinion that 
geologic explanations are justified hi terms of generalizations which may be 
compared to the laws of the other natural sciences. Most geologists have been 
reluctant to attach the label "law" to any of the statements which they employ. 
A few geologists, for example Bucher (1933), have used the term freely. It is 



1 1 should like to express my gratitude to the members of the advanced seminar in 
the history of science at the University of Oklahoma for their critical reading of the 
manuscript. Carolyn Wares has given valuable assistance in the preparation of the 
manuscript. Certain alterations in the last section of the paper have been made at 
the suggestion of Dr. M. King Hubbert. 

49 



50 DAVID B. KITTS 

not my intention to discuss the question of which statements should or should 
not be called laws. This question has been discussed at some length by most 
philosophers of science. For excellent recent discussions of the concept of a 
scientific law, I refer the reader to Nagel (1961), Braithwaite (1953), and 
Hempel and Oppenheim (1948). Although I shall have occasion to mention 
current opinion on the kinds of statements which are to be called laws, my main 
purpose here is to examine that great variety of general statements, whatever 
we choose to call them, which serve as a part of the logical justification for vari- 
ous kinds of geologic explanations. 

Traditionally, scientific explanation has been regarded as a deductive opera- 
tion. A generalization which functions in a deductive argument must be of 
strictly universal form, that is, it must admit of no exceptions whatever. Con- 
sequently, many writers have restricted the term "natural law" to statements 
of strictly universal form. One can cite examples of geologic generalizations 
which are universal. For example, the statement, "If the supply of new sand 
is less than that moved over the crest ... the windward slope will be degraded 
as the leeward slope grows, and thus the dune will migrate with the wind by 
transfer of sand from one slope to the other" (Dunbar and Rodgers, 1957, 
p. 20) is in form, though perhaps not in principle, universal. 

Generalizations employing terms denoting probability or possibility, how- 
ever, far outnumber generalizations of universal form in the geologic literature. 
A striking feature of geologic discourse is the frequency with which such 
words and phrases as "probably," "frequently," and "tends to," occur in 
generalizations. 

Explanations which contain these nonuniversal general statements are not 
deductive, but rather inductive in form. As Hempel (1958, p. 40) has put it, 
"This kind of argument, therefore, is inductive rather than strictly deductive 
in character: it calls for the acceptance of E [a sentence stating whatever is 
being explained] on the basis of other statements which constitute only partial, 
if strongly supporting, grounds for it." Few geologists would disagree that the 
generalizations which they employ seldom provide more than "partial, if 
strongly supporting, grounds" for their conclusions. 

It is customary to call general statements which admit of some exceptions 
"statistical" or "probabilistic." According to Bunge (1961, p. 267) statistical 
lawlike statements are "... propositions denoting regularities in the large or 
in the long run. They contain logical constructs belonging to mathematical 
statistics and characterizing central or overall trends ('average/ 'dispersion,' 
'correlation,' and the like)." The generalization which states the rate of decay 
of carbon fourteen is statistical in this sense. 

General statements which contain terms denoting probability or possibility 
but which are characterized by no precise formulation of statistical constructs 
in numerical terms are better labeled "probabilistic" than "statistical." The 
geologic literature abounds in statements of this sort. For example: "Wind- 



THE THEORY OF GEOLOGY 51 

driven sand, like snow, tends to settle in drifts in the wind shadow of topographic 
obstructions." (Dunbar and Rodgers, 1957, p. 19) 

Statistical inference is playing an increasingly important role in geologic 
investigation and one cannot help being impressed by the frequency with 
which statistical constructs appear in geologic literature. In much of this 
literature, however, the precise statistical terminology- employed may obscure 
the loosely probabilistic character of the generalizations containing it. In the 
following quotation the antecedent portions of the generalization are framed 
with statistical precision but the operators, for example "most" and "many," 
lack such precision. 

Dune sands tend to be better sorted than river sands and a plot of standard 
deviation (sorting) against mean grain-size indicates three fields, one for 
river sands, one for dune sands, and a third field of overlap. This figure 
points out that many river sands can be distinguished from dune sands and 
vice versa on the basis of their textural parameters but that a wide field of 
overlap exists. In practice this field of overlap is not necessarily a serious 
matter, since most coastal, barrier bar, and lake dune sands have a standard 
deviation of less than 0.40, and many desert and inland dune sands do not 
exceed 0.50, whereas most river sands have a standard deviation in excess 
of 0.50. (Friedman, 1961, p. 524, italics mine) 

Scriven (1959) has recently suggested that the generalizations in terms of 
which explanations of individual events are justified are usually neither uni- 
versal nor statistical, nor even probabilistic, but rather belong to another 
category of statements which he calls "normic statements." Scriven's concept 
of the normic statement throws particular light on the problem of geologic 
generalizations and explanations. He states (p. 464), "I suggest there is a 
category of general statements, a hybrid with some universal features and some 
statistical features, from which alone can be selected the role-justifying grounds 
for good explanations of individual events," and (p. 466), 

The statistical statement is less informative than the normic statement in a 
very important way, although an exact statistical statement may be informa- 
tive in a way a normic statement is not. The statistical statement does not 
say anything about the things to which it refers except that some do and 
some do not fall into a certain category. The normic statement says that 
everything falls into a certain category except those to which certain special condi- 
tions apply. And although the normic statement itself does not explicitly 
list what count as exceptional conditions, it employs a vocabulary which 
reminds us of our knowledge of this, our trained judgment of exceptions. 

and (p. 466) 

Now if the exceptions were few in number and readily described, one 
could convert a normic statement into an exact generalization by listing 



52 DAVID B. KITTS 

them. Normic statements are useful where the system of exceptions, although 
perfectly comprehensible in the sense that one can learn how to judge their 
relevance, is exceedingly complex. We see immediately the analogy with 
in fact, the normic character of physical laws. The physicist's training 
makes him aware of the system of exceptions and inaccuracies, which, if 
simpler, could be put explicitly in the statement of scope. 

and finally (p. 467) 

. . . statistical statements are too weak they abandon the hold on the 
individual case. The normic statement tells one what had to happen in this 
case, unless certain exceptional circumstances obtained; and the historical 
judgment is made (and open to verification) that these circumstances did 
not obtain. 

Let us consider again the generalization from Dunbar and Rodgers (1957, 
p. 19) concerning the accumulation of wind driven sand. "Wind-driven sand, 
like snow, tends to settle in drifts in the wind-shadow of topographic obstruc- 
tions." Offhand one would be inclined to regard this statement as probabilistic 
because of the distinct probabilistic, or even statistical, connotation of the phrase 
"tends to." But was it the intention of the authors to assert that if certain 
specified conditions are realized then in a majority of cases certain other specified 
conditions will follow, in which case the generalization must indeed be re- 
garded as probabilistic; or was it their intention to assert that if certain specified 
conditions are realized then certain other specified conditions will always 
follow except where certain special conditions apply, in which case the general- 
ization may be regarded as normic? I do not know what the intentions of the 
authors were, but in the absence of this knowledge it seems to me fully as 
plausible to regard the statement as normic as to regard it as probabilistic. 
The question of meaning raised in connection with this generalization can be 
raised in connection with a great number of seemingly probabilistic geologic 
generalizations, and, for that matter, about a great number of seemingly 
universal statements. 

Most geologic generalizations, whatever their explicit form, could be re- 
garded as normic statements, and the sense in which we actually understand 
them is better conveyed by the term "normic" than by the terms "universal," 
"statistical," or "probabilistic." One thing is certain and that is the geologist 
will not "abandon the hold on the individual case" by allowing statistical 
statements to assume too important a role in his procedures, for, as I have 
suggested earlier, it is the individual case which is his primary concern. 

The normic character of some generalizations is made explicit. Whenever 
the terms "normally" or "ordinarily" are encountered in a generalization it 
can usually be assumed that the statement is normic. The following statement 
is explicitly normic. "Carbonaceous material is a residue that remains after 



THE THEORY OF GEOLOGY 53 

various more or less mobile compounds, produced during the decomposition 
of organic matter in an oxygen-deficient environment, have moved away. 
Methane gas, for example, evolves and escapes under ordinary conditions." 
(Weller, 1960, p. 152) 

Scriven holds out the hope at least that normic statements can be converted 
into universal statements. Von Engeln's (1942, p. 457) statement of the "law of 
adjusted cross sections" represents an attempt to list "exceptional circum- 
stances" which, if they should apply, invalidate the generalization. 

Given that the surfaces of the joining glaciers are at the same level, that the 
width of the main valley is not abruptly increased below the junction point, 
and that the rate of motion of the main glacier is not greater below than 
above the junction and all these conditions are met in numerous instances 
it follows that there must be an abrupt increase in depth of the main valley 
to accommodate the volume of the combined ice streams at the place where 
they join. 

It is clear that geologists tolerate a good deal more imprecision in their 
generalizations than is technically necessary. Let us turn once again to the 
generalization from Dunbar and Rodgers (1957, p. 19) on the accumulation 
of wind-driven sand. It might be possible to specify the circumstances under 
which wind-driven sand would always accumulate in the wind-shadow of 
topographic obstructions. To accomplish this it would be necessary to specify 
restricted ranges for the pertinent initial and boundary conditions such as the 
velocity of the wind, the character and quantity of the sand, the form of the 
obstruction, etc. The framing of universal statements is not, however, the 
primary goal of the geologist. The primary goal is to frame general statements, 
universal or not, on the basis of which explanations can be justified. The intro- 
duction of specific initial and boundary conditions may permit the formulation 
of strictly universal statements, but these statements will be of no use what- 
soever unless these specific conditions can be independently determined. Very 
often it is not possible to determine these conditions, and generalizations are 
intentionally left in a loosely formulated state. This does not preclude the 
possibility of taking certain specific conditions into account when they can be 
independently inferred. 

The view, not uncommon among geologists, that geology is as much an 
"art" as a science, may stem from the fact that the system of exceptions as- 
sociated with geologic generalizations is usually so complex that "judgment" 
of their relevance may play an important role in investigation more im- 
portant a role than in the natural sciences in which the system of exceptions 
seems simpler. 

The employment of many seemingly statistical and probabilistic generaliza- 
tions imparts to geology an aspect of "indeterminacy." It would be very mis- 



54 DAVID B. KITTS 

leading to equate, as some geologists have done, this geologic indeterminacy 
with the indeterminacy principle of modern physics. In modern quantum- 
statistical mechanics indeterminacy is an integral part of theory. It is not 
assumed that uncertainty can be removed by a more complete and detailed 
specification of a particular set of variables. In geology, it seems to me, the 
opposite assumption is usually made. Uncertainty is regarded as a feature to 
be tolerated until more complete knowledge of variables allows its replacement 
with certainty or, to put it another way, until probabilistic and normic state- 
ments can be replaced by universal statements. Geologists are fundamentally 
deterministic in their approach to scientific investigation. Indeterminacy, in the 
sense that it is understood in physics, may enter into geology in those cases where 
the principles of statistical mechanics enter directly into a geologic inference. 

One final point should be made in connection with probability. Logicians 
have called attention to the fact that there are two senses in which the term 
"probability" may be used in connection with scientific hypotheses. In the 
first sense it may be asserted that a particular hypothesis is probable or more 
probable than some other hypothesis; for example, "It is probable that 
glauconite marl represents the normal primary occurrence and that greensand 
is a concentrate brought together like any other kind of sand during trans- 
portation on the sea floor" (Dunbar and Rodgers, 1957, p. 184). In the second 
sense a probability is assigned to an event within a hypothesis, for example, 
"Almost all moving masses that begin as landslides in subaqueous situations 
become mud flows." (Weller,- 1960, p. 158). Probabilistic terms are so fre- 
quently and loosely employed by geologists that it is often difficult to determine 
in which of the two senses a particular probabilistic term is to be understood. 

Whether or not a geologic generalization is of universal form is certainly not 
the only question which need concern us. A statement may be of strictly uni- 
versal form but be restricted in scope. The scope of a statement corresponds 
to the class of objects or events to which the statement applies. Every statement 
is to some degree restricted in scope. Certain kinds of restrictions of scope can 
seriously detract from the usefulness of a general statement which is intended 
to have explanatory power. Among the most serious of these restrictions is 
that imposed by reference to particular objects, or to finite classes of objects, 
in particular spatio-temporal regions. 

Generalizations which contain references to particular objects, or which 
contain terms whose definition requires reference to particular objects are rare 
in geology, as they are in other sciences. Generalizations in which reference is 
made to a particular finite class of objects falling into a definite spatio-temporal 
region are quite common and could conceivably cause some difficulty. In the 
statement, "Major streams of the northern Appalachian region rise in the 
Allegheny Plateau and flow southeastward to the Atlantic directly across the 



THE THEORY OF GEOLOGY 55 

northeast-southwest grain of rocks and structures ranging in age from Pre- 
cambrian to Tertiary" (Mackin, 1938, p. 27), for example, it is clear that the 
scope is restricted to a finite class of objects. Obviously the statement has no 
explanatory power. We should not be justified in explaining the fact that a 
particular major stream of the northern Appalachian region flowed southeast- 
ward by reference to this statement, because, as Nagel (1961, p. 63) puts it, "if 
a statement asserts in effect no more than what is asserted by the evidence for 
it, we are being slightly absurd when we employ the statement for explaining or 
predicting anything included in this evidence." No geologist would attempt to 
explain anything at all by reference to this statement, nor did Mackin intend 
that they should. The statement was obviously framed not to provide a means 
of explanation and prediction, but rather to convey, as economically as possible, 
information about some particular objects in a particular region. The statement 
could have been formulated as a conjunction of singular statements without 
change of meaning. Many general statements in geology whose scope is ex- 
plicitly restricted are of this type. 

As Nagel (1961, p. 63) has pointed out, a general statement which refers 
to a group of objects or events which is presumably finite may be assigned an 
explanatory role if the evidence for the statement is not assumed to exhaust 
the scope of predication of the statement. The evidence cited to support the 
statement, "As the velocity of a loaded stream decreases, both its competence 
and its capacity are reduced and it becomes overloaded" (Dunbar and Rodgers, 
1957, p. 9), for example, would consist of a finite number of observations, and 
yet it is clearly not the intention of the authors to assert that this set of obser- 
vations exhausts the scope of the statement. 

A problem about the intention of the framer of a general statement might 
arise. This problem is particularly likely to come up in connection with general 
statements concerning the association of past events where the number of 
instances cited in support of the statement is small. Do the instances cited to 
support the following generalization exhaust its scope of predication or not? 
"Fold mountains have their origin in the filling of a geosyncline chiefly with 
shallow water sediments, conglomerates, sandstone, shales, and occasional 
limestones." (von Engeln and Caster, 1952, p. 234) The class of fold mountains 
contains a finite number of individuals. The question of scope cannot be an- 
swered by an analysis of the statement, nor can it be answered by examining 
the evidence for the statement. The answer lies in a determination of the 
intention of the authors. Is it their intention merely to convey information 
about a finite number of instances, or do they intend to assert that fold moun- 
tains, past, present and future, have their origin in the filling of geosynclines? 
If the latter is the case, then the intention is to assign an explanatory, and 
possibly even a predictive, role to the statement. I cite this example to illustrate 



56 DAVID B. KITTS 

the importance of intention. I have no doubt that the authors meant to go 
beyond a mere historical report. 

It might be argued that all general geologic statements are restricted in 
scope, because they contain implicitly or explicitly the individual name, 
"the planet earth." Nagel (1961) regards Kepler's laws of planetary motion 
as lawlike even though they contain individual names because, as he puts it 
(p. 59), "The planets and their orbits are not required to be located in a fixed 
volume of space or a given interval of time." I think that it is true of geologic 
generalizations that the objects covered are not required to be associated with 
"the planet earth." The generalization will hold wherever certain, to be sure 
very specific, conditions obtain. In other words, it would be possible, in prin- 
ciple at least, to express every term, including "the planet earth," in universal 
terms and so eliminate essential reference to any particular object. The fact is, 
of course, that no one worries about essential reference to the earth, and need 
not worry so long as we practice our profession on earth. 

A serious problem concerns suspected but unstated restriction of the temporal 
scope of geologic statements. Because this problem stands at the very core of 
any consideration of the uniformitarian principle, I shall discuss it in a separate 
section of this paper. 

The Theory of Geology 

Is there any justification whatever for speaking about a "theory" of geology? 
The answer to this question obviously hinges on another, namely, "What do 
we mean by theory?" In an attempt to answer the latter question I shall quote 
three philosophers of science on the subject. 

Hempel (1958, p. 41) has this to say. 

For a fuller discussion of this point, it will be helpful to refer to the familiar 
distinction between two levels of scientific systematization: the level of 
empirical generalization, and the level of theory formation. The early stages in 
the development of a scientific discipline usually belong to the former level, 
which is characterized by the search for laws (of universal or statistical form) 
which establish connections among the directly observable aspects of the 
subject matter under study. The more advanced stages belong to the second 
level, where research is aimed at comprehensive laws, in terms of hypo- 
thetical entities, which will account for the uniformities established on the 
first level. 

Nagel (1961, p. 83) recognizes the usefulness of a distinction between 
"theoretical laws" and what he calls "experimental laws," but calls attention 
to the difficulties which may arise in the attempt to label a particular law as 



THE THEORY OF GEOLOGY 57 

one or the other. He points out, however, that, 

Perhaps the most striking single feature setting off experimental laws from 
theories is that each "descriptive" (i.e. nonlogical) constant term in the 
former, but in general not each such term in the latter, is associated with at 
least one overt procedure for predicating the term of some observationally 
identifiable trait when certain specified circumstances are realized. The 
procedure associated with a term in an experimental law thus fixes a definite, 
even if only partial, meaning for the term. In consequence, an experimental 
law, unlike a theoretical statement, invariably possesses a determinate 
empirical content which in principle can always be controlled by observa- 
tional evidence obtained by those procedures. 

And finally Carnap (1956, p. 38), emphasizing the linguistic consequences 
of the distinction made by Nagel and Hempel, states: 

In discussions on the methodology of science, it is customary and useful 
to divide the language of science into two parts, the observation language 
and the theoretical language. The observation language uses terms desig- 
nating observable properties and relations for the description of observable 
things or events. The theoretical language, on the other hand, contains 
terms which may refer to unobservable events, unobservable aspects or 
features of events, e.g., to microparticles like electrons or atoms, to the 
electromagnetic field or the gravitational field in physics, to drives and 
potentials of various kinds in psychology, etc. 

We may now proceed to examine geology with these "theoretical" charac- 
teristics in mind. The claim has been repeatedly made that geology was in the 
past, and to some extent remains today, "descriptive." For example, Leet and 
Judson (1954, p. ii) state, "Originally geology was essentially descriptive, a 
branch of natural history. But by the middle of the 20th century*, it had de- 
veloped into a full-fledged physical science making liberal use of chemistry, 
physics and mathematics and in turn contributing to their growth." Just what 
is meant by "descriptive" in this sort of statement? It certainly cannot be taken 
to mean that geology is today, or has been at any time during the last two 
hundred years, wholly, or even largely, concerned with the mere reporting of 
observations. The very fact that during this period geologists have remained 
historical in their point of view belies any such contention. The formulation 
of historical statements requires inferential procedures that clearly go beyond 
a mere "description." 

The feature that has apparently been recognized by those who characterize 
geology as descriptive, and indeed the feature which we can all recognize, is 
that most geologic terms are either framed in the observation language Or can 
be completely eliminated from any geologically significant statement in favor 



58 DAVID B. KITTS 

of terms that are so framed. This is simply to say that most geologic terms are 
not theoretical. Even Steno's four great "axioms" may be regarded as "ob- 
servational" rather than "theoretical." 

The abundance of historical terms in geology may give rise to some confusion 
when an attempt is made to distinguish between observation terms and theo- 
retical terms. Historical terms involve some kind of historical inference to a 
past event or condition and consequently require for their definition reference 
to things which have not been observed by us. Consider, for example, the term 
"normal fault" which has been defined as a fault "in which the hanging wall 
has apparently gone down relative to the footwall" (Billings, 1954, p. 143). 
The label "theoretical" would probably be denied this term by most philos- 
ophers of science because the past event can be described in the observation 
language and could consequently, in principle at least, be observed. 

The question then arises, are there any geologic terms which clearly qualify 
as theoretical? This is a difficult question because, as many authors have 
pointed out, the distinction between theoretical terms and observation terms is 
far from clear. There are certainly no geologic terms so abstract as the higher- 
level theoretical constructs of quantum mechanics, for example. On the other 
hand there are a number of geologic terms which almost certainly qualify as, 
what might be called, "lower-level theoretical terms," that is terms of rela- 
tively limited extension. "Geosyncline," it seems to me, is such a term. Ac- 
cording to Kay (1951, p. 4) a geosyncline may be defined as "a surface of 
regional extent subsiding through a long time while contained sedimentary and 
volcanic rocks are accumulating; great thickness of these rocks is almost in- 
variably the evidence of the subsidence, but not a necessary requisite. Geo- 
synclines are prevalently linear, but nonlinear depressions can have properties 
that are essentially geosynclinal." 

Another candidate for the title "theoretical term" is "graded stream." 
According to Mackin (1948, p. 471), 

A graded stream is one in which, over a period of years, slope is delicately 
adjusted to provide, with available discharge and with prevailing channel 
characteristics, just the velocity required for the transportation of the load 
supplied from the drainage basin. The graded stream is a system in equi- 
librium; its diagnostic characteristic is that any change in any of the con- 
trolling factors will cause a displacement of the equilibrium in a direction 
that will absorb the effect of the change. 

If I am correct in regarding these terms as theoretical, we might expect that 
some difficulties would arise if an attempt were made to define these expressions 
in terms of observables. I do not, however, feel inclined or qualified to go into 
the problem of "rules of correspondence" at this point. 



THE THEORY OF GEOLOGY 59 

What is the function of theoretical terms in a scientific system? The answer 
to this question was given, I think, in the passage from Hempel (1958, p. 41) 
quoted earlier, and in the words of Nagel (1961, pp. 88-89) when he says, 

An experimental law is, without exception, formulated in a single state- 
ment; a theory is, almost without exception, a system of several related 
statements. But this obvious difference is only an indication of something 
more impressive and significant: the greater generality of theories and their 
relatively more inclusive explanatory power. 

The general statements which contain the terms "geosyncline" and "graded 
stream" have, relative to other geologic statements, great generality and quite 
clearly fulfill the function which theoretical terms are designed to fill, that is, 
they establish some considerable "explanatory and predictive order among 
the bewildering complex 'data' of our experience, the phenomena that can be 
directly observed by us." (Hempel, 1958, p. 41) 

One of the most striking features of scientific systems with a highly developed 
theoretical structure is the degree to which it is possible to make logical con- 
nections between the various general statements contained in the system. A 
given general statement may, in combination with other general statements or 
even with singular statements, serve as the basis for the deductive derivation of 
other general statements, or itself be derivable from other generalizations in the 
same way. It is this feature which provides empirical systems with their sys- 
temicity. The importance of system is indicated by Braithwaite (1953, pp. 301- 
302), who holds that a hypothesis is to be considered "lawlike" only on the 
condition that it "either occurs in an established scientific deductive system 
as a higher-level hypothesis containing theoretical concepts or that it occurs in 
an established scientific deductive system as a deduction from higher-level 
hypotheses which are supported by empirical evidence which is not direct 
evidence for itself." 

As Braithwaite suggests, in the case of a generalization (G) which is deduc- 
tively related to other generalizations, it is possible to distinguish between 
indirect and direct supporting evidence for it. Any empirical evidence which 
supports a generalization which is deductively related to G will count as indirect 
evidence in support of G. Nagel (1961, p. 66) emphasizes the importance of 
indirect evidence in the statement, "Indeed, there is often a strong disinclina- 
tion to call a universal conditional L a 'law of nature,' despite the fact that it 
satisfies the various conditions already discussed, if the only available evidence 
for L is direct evidence." 

How much systematization is there in the body of geologic knowledge? If 
we consider geologic generalizations, that is, general statements containing 
only special geologic terms, we are immediately struck with how little system- 
atization obtains. There is some, of course, and it is usually provided in terms 



60 DAVID B. KITTS 

of such unifying concepts as "graded stream" and "geosyncline." This low- 
degree systematization is not surprising, for, as every elementary geology text 
insists, geology is not a discipline unto itself. We have only to introduce into 
our system the generalizations and laws of physical-chemical theory and the 
logical connections within the branches and between the branches of geology 
become more impressive. It may still be a matter of contention among geolo- 
gists as to whether every geologic generalization has been, or in principle could 
be, incorporated into a theoretical system in terms of physical-chemical laws. 
If a geologic generalization is truly independent, however, no matter how useful 
it may be, its status will suffer because no indirect evidence can be presented 
to support it, and we are likely to speak of it as "merely" an empirical general- 
ization. 

The question is not whether geology is chemistry and physics, but whether 
or not geologists will utilize physical-chemical theory with all its admitted 
imperfections and all its immense power. - The question has been answered. 
Almost all geologists proceed as if every geologic statement either has now, or 
eventually will have, its roots in physical-chemical theory. Geologic theory is 
modified to accommodate physical-chemical theory and never conversely. 
Furthermore, this confidence in physics and chemistry is not a unique feature of 
twentieth-century geology, for Hutton (1795, pp. 31-32) said: 

It must be evident, that nothing but the most general acquaintance with 
the laws of acting substances, and with those of bodies changing by the 
powers of nature, can enable us to set about this undertaking with any 
reasonable prospect of success; and here the science of Chemistry must be 
brought particularly to our aid; for this science, having for its object the 
changes produced upon the sensible qualities, as they are called, of bodies, 
by its means we may be enabled to judge of that which is possible according 
to the laws of nature, and of that which, in like manner, we must consider as 
impossible. 

Certainly no consistent, economical, complete deductive system of geology 
exists, but I think that we can detect a suggestion of such a system. In this 
system the higher-level universals, or postulates, which serve as the basis for 
the deductive derivation of other generalizations and of singular statements of 
the system are exactly those universals which serve this purpose in physics and 
chemistry. The theory of geology is, according to this view, the theory of 
physics and chemistry. The geologist, however, unlike the chemist and the 
physicist, regards this theory as an instrument of historical inference. 

The generalizations containing the theoretical terms "geosyncline" and 
"graded stream" are not regarded as "fundamental laws of nature" nor as 
postulates of a theory of geology. Geologists are committed to the view that 



THE THEORY OF GEOLOGY 61 

generalizations containing these terms can be derived from higher-level gen- 
eralizations which belong to physics. Thus Leopold and Langbein (1962, 
p. A 11) state with reference to the graded-stream state, "A contribution made 
by the entropy concept is that the Equilibrium profile 5 of the graded river is 
the profile of maximum probability and the one in which entropy is equally 
distributed, constituting a kind of isentropic curve." 

The activity of attempting to relate geologic generalizations to physical- 
chemical theory is not a game played by geologists for its own sake, nor is it 
played solely for the sake of increasing our confidence in these generalizations 
by providing indirect supporting evidence for them. It is the hope of those 
engaged in this activity, which I am tempted to call "theoretical geology," 
that putting a geologic generalization into a theoretical setting will allow a 
more precise and rigorous formulation of it, and thus may increase its utility. 
This consideration is undoubtedly behind Leopold and Langbein's statement 
(1962, p. A 1), "The present paper is an attempt to apply another law of 
physics to the subject for the purpose of obtaining some additional insight into 
energy distributions and their relation to changes of land forms in space and 
time." 

A major objection to the view that geology is "descriptive" and thus in some 
sense not "mature" is that the scope of geologic knowledge and theory is in 
no sense now, nor has it ever been, exhausted by what can be framed in special 
geologic terms and in terms of the common language alone. The laws which 
provide for much of the higher-level systematization in geology are perhaps 
not immediately associated with a theory of geology because they are laws 
without particular geologic reference which are ordinarily recognized as 
belonging to the theory of chemistry and physics. To consider the science of 
geology as composed of just those statements containing particular geologic 
references amounts to a wholly artificial decapitation of a rather highly organ- 
ized theoretical structure. An arbitrary distinction among physical, chemical, 
and geologic terms is not significant here. What is significant is the role played 
by laws and terms, no matter what their origin or what we may choose to call 
them, in the theory of geolog> r . Modern geology assumes all of contemporary 
physical-chemical theory and presents on the basis of this assumption a high 
degree of logical integration. 

It has been suggested, for example by Leet and Judson (1954, p. ii) in the 
statement quoted above, that geology not only draws upon physical-chemical 
theory but may contribute to this theory. In some sense, at least, this is true 
since geologic problems may serve to stimulate investigations which are pri- 
marily physical or chemical in nature, particularly if the problems arise in such 
fields as geochemistry, geophysics, and crystallography in which the borderline 
between geology and the rest of physical science is difficult to draw. Tradi- 
tionally, however, geologists have not tampered with nongeologic theory in 



62 DAVID B. KITTS 

any very direct way. The physical-chemical theory of their time is a standard 
which tends to be accepted by each generation of geologists. 



The Origin of Geologic Generalizations 

It has often been said that geology is "inductive." It may be that, in some 
cases at least, the application of this label is meant to convey the fact that the 
explanations proposed by geologists are probabilistic rather than deductive. 
Usually, however, I think that the term "inductive" when applied to geology- 
is meant to convey that the generalizations of geology are to be regarded as 
inductive generalizations. If we agree that most geologic generalizations are 
not theoretical, then this latter view of the inductive nature of geology is en- 
tirely plausible since, as Nagel (1961, p. 85) has pointed out, "An immediate 
corollary to the difference between experimental laws and theories just dis- 
cussed is that while the former could, in principle, be proposed and asserted 
as inductive generalizations based on relations found to hold in observed data, 
this can never be the case for the latter." The problem of the process by which 
theoretical laws are formulated is far beyond the scope of this paper. 

Although the usual procedure in geology is to explain a generalization which 
has been formulated inductively in terms of higher-level generalizations, using 
the laws of chemistry and physics, it is possible to start with these higher-level 
generalizations and deduce from them generalizations of geologic significance 
and utility. We thus speak of the deduction of the mineralogical phase rule 
from the phase rule of Gibbs (see, for example, Turner, 1948, p. 45). It is my 
belief that the most dramatic advances in geologic theory are to be expected 
from this deductive method. 



The Uniformi tarian Principle 

There is widespread agreement among geologists that some special principle 
of uniformity is a fundamental ingredient of all geologic inference. Longwell 
and Flint (1955, p. 385) go so far as to say that, "The whole mental process 
involved in this reconstruction of an ancient history is based on that cornerstone 
of geologic philosophy, the principle of uniformitarianism, probably the great- 
est single contribution geologists have made to scientific thought." Despite 
this general agreement about the importance of the principle, geologists hold 
widely divergent views as to its meaning. So divergent are these views, in fact, 
that one is led to conclude that there has been little or no resolution of the 
problems which gave rise to the famous controversies between the "uniformi- 
tarians" and the "catastrophists" in the nineteenth century. Though the prob- 
lems have not been solved, the controversy has subsided. A number of accounts 
of the history of the uniformitarian principle are available, including an excel- 
lent recent one by Hooykaas (1959). 



THE THEORY OF GEOLOGY 63 

There are two principal problems concerning the concept of uniformity. 
The first problem concerns the grounds upon which the assertion of uniformity 
rests. The second problem concerns the precise nature of the restriction which 
it imposes. 

As to the grounds upon which the assertion of uniformity rests, it would be 
difficult, if not impossible, to contend that any meaningful empirical support 
can be presented for the view that "geologic process" in the past was in any 
way like this process in the present, simply because statements about process 
must be tested in terms of statements about particulars and no observation of 
past particulars can be made. We do, of course, formulate statements about 
particular past conditions. These statements are not supported by direct 
observations, however, but rather are supported by inferences in which some 
assumption of uniformity is implicit. In terms of the way a geologist operates, there 
is no past until after the assumption of uniformity has been made. To make statements 
about the past without some initial assumption of uniformity amounts, in 
effect, to allowing any statement at all to be made about the past. Geologists, 
as I have suggested earlier, are primarily concerned with deriving and testing 
singular statements about the past. The uniformitarian principle represents, 
among other things, a restriction placed upon the statements that may be 
admitted to a geologic argument, initially at the level of primary historical 
inference. Once the assumption of uniformity has been made for the purposes 
of primary historical inference, then it may be possible to "demonstrate" some 
uniformity or, for that matter, depending upon how strictly the principle is 
applied in the first place, some lack of uniformity. The essential point is that 
the assumption of uniformity must precede the demonstration of uniformity 
and not vice versa. In principle, at least, it would be possible to make at the 
outset some assumptions about particular conditions at some time in the past 
and on the basis of these assumptions "test" whether some law held at that 
time. Geologists have chosen to do the opposite, however, by making some 
assumptions about the uniformity of the relationships expressed in a law and 
on this basis to derive and test some singular statements about the past. 

The view that the uniformity of "nature" or of "geologic process" represents 
an assumption that is made in order to allow geologists to proceed with the 
business of historical inference is a very old one. In Hutton (1788, p. 301-302), 
for example, we find this view expressed in the statement, "We have been 
representing the system of this earth as proceeding with a certain regularity, 
which is not perhaps in nature, but which is necessary for our clear conception 
of the system of nature." And Lyell (in a letter to Whewell, 1837, from "Life, 
Letters and Journals," 1881, Vol. II, p. 3) expresses a similar view when he 
states, 

The former intensity of the same or other terrestrial forces may be true; I 
never denied its possibility; but it is conjectural. I complained that in at- 
tempting to explain geological phenomena, the bias has always been on the 



64 DAVID B. KITTS 

wrong side; there has always been a disposition to reason a priori on the 
extraordinary violence and suddenness of changes, both in the inorganic 
crust of the earth, and in organic types, instead of attempting strenuously 
to frame theories in accordance with the ordinary operations of nature. 

The uniformitarian principle is not usually formulated as an assumption by con- 
temporary geologists. 

If the uniformitarian principle is to be regarded as a methodological device 
rather than an empirical generalization, a reasonable step toward a solution 
of the problems surrounding the principle would be an attempt to explicate it. 
"What statements in the theory of geology shall be regarded as untimebound"? 
is a question which might be asked in connection with such an attempt. 

It is plausible to regard every singular descriptive statement in geology as 
timebound, to some degree at legist, simply because a principal aim of geologic 
endeavor is to "bind" singular descriptive statements temporally, which is 
another way of saying that a principal aim of geologic endeavor is to produce 
historical chronicle. Singular descriptive statements may apply to different 
times and different places, but it cannot be assumed that they apply to all 
times and to all places, and consequently their uniformity cannot be assumed 
for the purposes of inference. 

There are few geologists who would disagree with this view regarding 
singular descriptive statements, and for this reason I may be accused of pro- 
pounding the obvious. Before the accusation is made, however, let us consider 
a passage from Read (1957, p. 26). 

This difficulty confronting static metamorphism has been tackled by Daly, 
who meets it by relaxing the rigidity of the doctrine of uniformitarianism. 
He admits that, compared with its proposed potency in the Pre-Cambrian 
times, load metamorphism must have been of relatively little importance in 
later geological eras. To account for this, he assumes that the earth's thermal 
gradient was steeper during the formation of the Pre-Cambrian so that 
regional metamorphism under a moderate cover was possible. He considers 
that this speculation concerning a hotter surface to the earth is c no more 
dangerous than the fashionable explanation of all, or nearly all, regional 
metamorphism by erogenic movements.' I agree that. . . [although] uni- 
formitarianism suits the events of the 500 million years of geological history 
as recorded in the Cambrian and later fossiliferous rocks, it may quite likely 
not be so valid for the 2,000 million years of Pre-Cambrian time. 

To suggest that the thermal gradient of the earth was steeper during the Pre- 
cambrian than it is today is to make an assertion about particular conditions 
during the past. This assertion is perhaps not so soundly based as many others, 
but it has resulted from the kind of retrodictive inference that geologists fre- 
quently perform. To claim that this statement requires a relaxation of the 



THE THEORY OF GEOLOGY 65 

doctrine of uniformitarianism is, in principle, equivalent to claiming that an 
assertion that the topography of Oklahoma during Permian time was different 
from what it is today requires a similar relaxation. 

The statements that the geologist wishes to regard as untimebound are of 
general form. This is revealed by the fact that he speaks of uniformity of 
"cause" or "process" or "principle" or "law," concepts which are expressed 
in general statements. The whole problem of the strictness with which the 
uniformitarian assumption is to be applied revolves ultimately around the 
question of which of the many statements of general form in the theory of 
geology are to be regarded as being without temporal restriction. 

Geologists usually speak of the problem of uniformitarianism as though it 
were a problem of whether or not the relationships expressed in scientific laws 
could be regarded as constant throughout geologic time. Is this really the 
problem? Are geologists bothered, for example, by the question of whether or 
not the relationship expressed in the equation F = G m^m^/d* can be regarded 
as independent of time? They may occasionally speculate about the "uniform- 
ity of nature," but such speculations do not enter into the conduct of geologic 
investigation in any significant way. Here again it is to the authority of physical- 
chemical theory that appeal is made. If an expression is untimebound in this 
theory, it is untimebound in the theory of geology, particularly if the expression 
is regarded as a "fundamental law." Furthermore, if a law should be formu- 
lated in which the expressed relationship were a function of the passage of 
historic time, and if this law should come to be regarded as a valid part of 
some physical or chemical theory, there would probably be no reluctance on 
the part of geologists to accept the law nor would the acceptance signal an 
abandonment of the uniformitarian principle. The view that it is "law" 
which is to be regarded as uniform has been suggested many times before, for 
example in the following statement from Moore (1958, p. 2): "As foundation, 
we accept the conclusion that nature's laws are unchanging." 

Not only is the most general form of a fundamental law regarded as untime- 
bound but so are substitution instances and other logical consequences of such 
a law. We should agree, for example, that at any time and place where two 
spherical masses of one pound each and of uniform density are held with their 
centers one foot apart, the force of attraction between them will be 3.18 X 
10"" 11 pounds weight. We do not conclude from this, however, that the attrac- 
tion between any two objects at any time is 3.18 X 10~~ n pounds weight, for to 
do so would necessitate the assumption of the temporal uniformity of certain 
particular conditions. This particular attractive force is to be inferred only 
where the specified antecedent conditions actually obtain. That these particular 
conditions, or for that matter any particular conditions, did in fact obtain at 
a particular time and place is a matter for independent verification. The law 
does not "change," but different substitution instances of the law are applicable 



66 DAVID B. KITTS 

to different times and places. The immediate problem which the geologist 
faces is not one of uniformity, but one of determining which, if any, of the 
infinite number of substitution instances of a general law is applicable in a 
particular case. 

Let us consider a geologic statement in which doubt about temporal exten- 
sion is expressed. "Probably only time and the progress of future studies can 
tell whether we cling too tenaciously to the uniformitarian principle in our 
unwillingness to accept fully the rapid glacial fluctuations as evidenced by 
radiocarbon dating." (Horberg, 1955, p. 285) The author has suggested, has 
he not, that there was available a generalization concerning the rate of glacial 
fluctuation, perhaps supported by observations of extant glaciers, whose 
validity had become doubtful because of our greater confidence in another 
generalization. Isn't there something suspicious about a statement which is 
supposed to have some degree of temporal extension and which contains a 
reference to a particular rate or even to a limited range of rates? There are 
many physical laws in the form of equations which allow the calculation of a 
particular rate when particular values are substituted for variables. The 
unsubstituted form of a physical equation, however, contains no reference to 
a particular rate. Rate of glacial fluctuation does not remain constant through- 
out time any more than the force of attraction between objects remains con- 
stant throughout time. Rate of glacial advance and retreat is dependent upon 
a number of variables, among which are the topography, the thickness of the 
ice, and the temperature of the atmosphere. Unless specific values can be sub- 
stituted for each of these variables a law of glacial movement cannot be mean- 
ingfully applied at all, and could certainly not be called upon to serve as the 
basis for the assertion that the rate of glacial movement had some uniformity 
in geologic time. Horberg's problem did not involve a question of the "uni- 
formity of nature" but rather it involved a question of whether or not he was 
in a position to determine particular values for each of the variables upon which 
rate of glacial movement might be presumed to be dependent. No explication 
of the concept of "the uniformity of nature" nor "universal causation" could 
have served as a basis for the solution of this problem. 

Another problem presents itself at this point. Is there a law of glacial move- 
ment which has been formulated with sufficient precision to allow us to say 
what the pertinent variables are, let alone determine specific values for them? 
The answer would have to be that there is not. What is available is an im- 
precisely formulated generalization, probably normic in form, which may 
serve as the basis for a variety of inferences but cannot serve as a basis for a 
calculation of the rate of glacial advance and retreat during a particular interval 
of time. The temporal universality of imprecisely formulated probabilistic and 
normic generalizations will always be suspect simply because it is character- 
istic of such statements that they contain what must be regarded as hidden 
references to particulars. We are able to increase our confidence in the temporal 



THE THEORY OF GEOLOGY 67 

universality of a generalization by formulating it with greater precision. It 
must be borne in mind, however, that progress in geology- has depended upon 
the willingness of geologists to assume the temporal uniformity of a great 
variety of imprecisely formulated generalizations. 

There is a long-standing philosophical problem concerning the uniformity 
of nature. It has been discussed at great length in the past and it will be dis- 
cussed in the future. This problem is everybody's problem, not a special prob- 
lem for geologists. The special problem for geologists concerns first the avail- 
ability of appropriate laws and second the applicability of laws to particular 
situations. In an attempt to solve the problem, many geologists are engaged 
in work that is directed toward the goal of increasing the precision with which 
geologic generalizations are formulated. They proceed by observing in the 
field, experimenting in the laboratory and, increasingly, by paper and pencil 
operations within a theoretical framework. The latter procedure may turn 
out to be the most satisfying of all because never are we so confident in the 
precision of a law as when it has been made a part of some theory. 

The precise formulation of geologic generalizations cannot be expected to 
lead to an immediate solution of all the problems facing the contemporary 
geologist. The principal use to which geologic generalizations are put is as a 
basis for explanatory inferences which allow the derivation and testing of 
singular statements about the past. A generalization cannot be used in this 
way unless specific values can be substituted for most of the variables contained 
in it. A specific value which is substituted for a variable in a generalization 
employed in a retrodictive inference must have been determined on the basis 
of another retrodictive inference which is itself dependent upon some general- 
ization. The necessary interdependence of the bewildering variety of geologic 
retrodictive inferences upon one another seems, at times, to result in a piling 
of uncertainty upon uncertainty. Remarkably, however, confidence in geologic 
statements about the past as reliable descriptions of particular conditions, in 
particular places, at particular times, is high. The basis of this confidence is 
that not only are retrodictive inferences to a large extent dependent upon one 
another, but that they serve as the only means of verification of one another. 
Each statement about the past is tested against other statements about the past. 
Laboriously we build the chronicle, selecting, eliminating, and modifying as 
we proceed, bringing to bear, in addition to an immensely complicated infer- 
ential apparatus, our trained judgment. 

REFERENCES CITED 

BILLINGS, M. P., 1954, Structural geology: New York, Prentice-Hall, 514 pp. 
BRArrHWAiTE, R. B., 1953, Scientific explanation: New York, Cambridge Univ. Press, 

375 pp. 
BUCHER, W. H., 1933, The deformation of the earth's crust; an inductive approach to 

the problems of diastrophism: Princeton, Princeton Univ. Press, 518 pp. 



68 DAVID B. KITTS 

BUNGE, M., 1961, Kinds and criteria of scientific laws: Phil. Sci. 3 vol. 28, pp. 260-281. 

CARNAP, R. 3 1956, The methodological character of theoretical concepts, p. 38-76 in 
H. Feigl and M. Scriven, eds., Minnesota Studies in the Philosophy of Science, 
vol. 1. The foundations of science and the concepts of psychology and psychoanalysis: 
Minneapolis, Univ. Minnesota Press, 346 pp. 

DUNBAR, C. O., and RODGERS, J., 1957, Principles of stratigraphy: New York, John 
Wiley, 356 pp. 

FRIEDMAN, G. M., 1961, Distinction between dune, beach, and river sands from their 
textural characteristics: J. Sediment. Petrology, vol. 31, pp. 514-529. 

HEMPEL, G. G., 1958, The theoretician's dilemma; a study in the logic of theory con- 
struction, pp. 37-98 in H. Feigl, M. Scriven, and G. Maxwell, eds., Minnesota 
Studies in the Philosophy of Science, vol. 2. Concepts, theories, and the mind-body 
problem: Minneapolis, Univ. Minnesota Press, 553 pp. 

and OPPENHEIM, P., 1948, Studies in the logic of explanation: Phil. Sci., vol. 15, 

pp. 135-175. 

HOOYKAAS, R., 1959, Natural law and divine miracle: Leiden, E. J. Brill, 237 pp. 

HORBERG, L., 1955, Radiocarbon dates and Pleistocene chronological problems in the 
Mississippi Valley region: J. Geol., vol. 63, pp. 278-286. 

HUTTON, JAMES, 1788, Theory of the earth: Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, Tr., vol. 1, pp. 209-304. 

, 1795, Theory of the earth with proofs and illustrations, vol. I: Edinburgh, 

Gadell, Junior and Davies, 620 pp. 

KAY, M., 1951, North American geosynclines: Geol. Soc. Am., Mem. 48, 143 pp. 

KITTS, D. B., 1963, Historical explanation in geology: J. Geol., vol. 71, pp. 297-313. 

LEET, L. D., and JUDSON, S., 1954, Physical geology: New York, Prentice-Hall, 466 pp. 

LEOPOLD, L. B., and LANGBEIN, W. B., 1962, The concept of entropy in landscape evolu- 
tion: U. S. GeoL Survey, Prof. Paper 500-A, pp. A1-A20. 

LONGWELL, C. R., and FLINT, R. F., 1955, Introduction to physical geology: New 
York, John Wiley, 432 pp. 

LYELL, CHARLES, 1881, Life, letters and journals of Sir Charles Lyell Bart, Mrs. Lyell, 
ed.: London, John Murray, 489 pp. 

MACKIN, J. H., 1938, The origin of Appalachian drainage a reply: Am. J. Sci., vol. 
236, pp. 27-53. 

, 1948, Concept of the graded river: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 59, pp. 463-512. 

MOORE, R. C., 1958, Introduction to historical geology, 2nd ed.: New York, McGraw- 
Hill, 656 pp. 

NAGEL, E., 1961, The structure of science: New York and Burlingame; Harcourt, 
Brace, and World, 618 pp. 

READ, H. H., 1957, The granite controversy: New York, Interscience publishers, 430 pp. 

SCRIVEN, M., 1959, Truisms as the grounds for historical explanations, pp. 443-475 in 
P. Gardiner, ed., Theories of history: Glencoe, Illinois, The Free Press, 549 pp. 

TURNER, F. J., 1948, Mineralogical and structural evolution of the metamorphic rocks: 
Geol. Soc. Am., Mem. 30, 342 pp. 

VON ENGELN, O. D., 1942, Geomorphology: New York, Macmillan, 655 pp. 

, and CASTER, K. E., 1952, Geology: New York, McGraw-Hill, 730 pp. 

WELLER, J. M., 1960, Stratigraphic principles and practice: New York, Harper, 725 pp. 



V. E. McKELVEY 

U. S. Geological Survey 



Geology As the Study of 
Complex Natural Experiments 1 



Geology offers almost unique opportunity to observe the results of processes 
that not only involve interplay of more variables and larger masses than can 
be handled in the laboratory, but that also extend over much greater periods 
of time and hence reveal the effects of reactions too slow to observe under 
ordinary conditions. Other natural sciences, of course, offer similar oppor- 
tunities to observe the interplay of many variables on a grand scale, but none 
save astronomy observes the complete record and results of "natural experi- 
ments" that have required millions or billions of years to complete. 

Because it observes the results of complex natural experiments conducted 
on a large scale in both time and space, geology is an exploratory science that 
provides opportunity to observe phenomena and processes not predictable on 
the basis of knowledge and theory acquired and developed through the lab- 
oratory sciences alone. In the past, geology has therefore guided the concepts 
and set limits to the scope of the laboratory sciences, and it will continue to do 
so in the future. Beyond this, geology provides means of solving a wide variety 
of problems too complex to be attacked by artificial experiments. 

Like artificial experiments, the experiments of nature are of little value unless 
their results are carefully observed and viewed through the frame of searching 
question and imaginative hypothesis. However, approached in this manner, 
they have led to the discovery of new phenomena and to the formulation of 
principles that might not have been developed otherwise. A few examples 
will illustrate this point. 



1 In recent years, I have discussed the significance of geology as an exploratory and 
problem-solving science with a number of friends whose ideas I am sure are reflected 
in this essay. I wish especially to acknowledge stimulating discussions on the subject 
with J. R. Balsley, W. H. Bradley, R. M. Garrels, R. A. Gulbrandsen, and H. L. James, 
and to thank for similar stimulation as well as specific suggestions on this manuscript 
C. A. Anderson, Michael Fleischer, E. D. Jackson and E. M. Shoemaker. 

69 



70 V. E. McKELVEY 

Discovery of the Nonpredictable 

Observations of natural phenomena lie at the root of all science, and most of 
these phenomena were at some stage not predictable on the basis of accumu- 
lated human knowledge and theory. Perhaps more than other realms accessible 
to human observation, the earth has been the source of the discovery of phe- 
nomena that have stimulated scientific inquiry or posed challenging problems 
which led eventually to the principles forming the web of physical science. 
Thus observations of minerals posed many of the problems that stimulated the 
growth of chemistry, crystal chemistry, crystallography, and optics; observa- 
tions of the properties of uranium minerals and compounds formed the base 
of both radiochemistry and nuclear physics; and the discovery of the natural 
phenomena of fluorescence, luminescence, and magnetism played similar roles 
in other branches of physics. At the time these various phenomena were ob- 
served they could not have been predicted from available knowledge and 
theory, and indeed many of them would be unpredictable even today if they 
were not known to exist in nature. 

There would not be much point here in calling attention to the study of the 
earth, its processes, and history as a source of discovery of phenomena stimu- 
lating general science, if this form of contribution were a thing of the past. 
The fact is, however, that geology is still playing an important role as an ex- 
ploratory science and has abundant opportunity to do so in the future. Some 
of these discoveries may come in the form of single observations for example, 
T. F. W. Barth's and E. Posnjak's discovery of the inverse structure of the 
spinels, which contributed significantly to the theory and development of semi- 
conductors; and K. J. Murata's discovery that the fluorescence of natural 
halite and calcite, previously ascribed to the presence of manganese, actually 
occurs only when two activating elements, lead and manganese, are present, a 
phenomenon that led to the synthesis of many new fluorescent compounds. 
Some of the most significant discoveries, however, are likely to be of complex 
phenomena, including those of a secular nature, whose recognition depends on 
the collection and synthesis of many and perhaps diverse data. The concepts 
of biologic evolution, folded geosynclines, and periodic reversal in polarity of 
the earth's field are examples of secular processes discovered through the 
synthesis and analysis of many diverse geologic observations. 

The process of piecing together and analyzing isolated geologic observations 
is notoriously difficult and slow, not only because of the number and diversity 
of the phenomena involved but also because of their scale. Thousands of 
square miles may have to be mapped, scores of stratigraphic sections measured 
and correlated, volumes of data accumulated on rock properties, and many 
hypotheses tested and discarded before even a valid empirical relation among 
such data can be formulated. 

The fable of the blind men and the elephant the incorrect conclusions 
reached by observers whose vision is limited compared to the breadth and 



THE STUDY OF COMPLEX NATURAL EXPERIMENTS 71 

complexity of the problem has sometimes been cited to ridicule the stumbling 
operation of inductive reasoning. This tale, however, carries a meaning of far 
deeper significance than is generally recognized in the telling, namely, that it 
is only by patient exploration that an elephant or a folded geosyncline can 
be discovered. Once the existence of an elephant has been established, many of 
its other characteristics can be deduced, but accumulated scientific theory is 
not yet and may never be adequate to predict its existence in the first place. 

What are some of the areas in which geologic elephants are likely to be dis- 
covered in the future? Because I am talking about phenomena that are not 
predictable, I can hardly be expected to be very specific, but a few examples 
of some of the poorly explored areas that may yield the unexpected are in 
order. Surely the subject of crustal structure and composition is one such prom- 
ising field; the relation between local structure, thickness, and composition of 
rocks of the upper crust, and similar properties in the lower crust and upper 
mantle are as yet poorly known and can be expected to yield relationships not 
imagined now. In stratigraphy and paleontology, data adequate to permit a 
comprehensive view of the paleogeographic, paleoclimatic, paleoecologic, and 
paleotectonic records are just now being synthesized, and their analysis very 
likely will disclose relations not now anticipated: between rate and direction 
of biologic evolution and environmental controls, between geologic history and 
secular changes (perhaps related to unidirectional or evolutionary changes in 
the composition of the ocean and the atmosphere) in the composition of sedi- 
mentary rocks, and between tectonic history and climatic changes. Data on 
the abundance of the elements, especially the minor ones, and on the mass of 
major rock units in the earth's crust are as yet so sparse and poorly integrated 
that we can still expect surprises on the subject of the composition of the earth's 
crust and its major components. Generally speaking, the data being accumu- 
lated on rock structure the wavelength and amplitude of folds; the distribu- 
tion, orientation, and frequency of fractures, the magnitude of the displace- 
ments along them, and the orientation of minerals within them have not 
been synthesized and analyzed with respect to such factors as area! magnitude, 
thickness, and composition of the deformed units, depth of burial or load, and 
duration of the deforming forces. Finally, integration of knowledge in all these 
areas will be necessary to test such concepts as continental drift and an expand- 
ing or shrinking earth. No doubt other elephants will be discovered in the 
process. 

Use of Natural Experiments in Solving Complex Problems 

In using nature's completed experiments to solve problems involving such a 
large number of variables, large mass, or long period of time that they cannot 
be attacked satisfactorily in the laboratory, we begin with the problem or 
question and observe results of experiments already performed. What minerals 



72 V. E. McKELVEY 

will precipitate from a complex silicate melt, given time for slow reactions to 
reach equilibrium? Igneous differentiates and their ores will yield the answer 
in a detail unobtainable otherwise. Can specific minerals ordinarily formed at 
high temperatures form at low temperatures, given time? Their presence or 
absence as authigenic minerals in sedimentary rocks may suggest the answer 
(and incidentally Charles Milton's work on authigenic minerals formed in 
saline deposits has shown that the list not only includes such well-known forms 
as feldspar but also many other high-temperature forms, such as riebeckite 
and leucosphenite). What diadochous substitutions, including doubly com- 
pensated ones, can occur in a given compound? Analysis of mineral specimens 
from a variety of geologic environments is likely to yield a more comprehensive 
answer than artificial experiments do. What are the relative solubilities of 
refractory minerals in dilute aqueous solutions? Their behavior during weath- 
ering will give valuable qualitative data, and if analyzed with regard to the 
characteristics of soil solutions, runoff, and mean annual temperature, it may 
be possible to obtain more quantitative answers. To what extent will brittle 
minerals deform plastically, and under what physical conditions? Natural 
experiments provide a parameter time that cannot be evaluated in the 
laboratory. 

The usefulness of natural experiments in problem solving depends, of course, 
on the degree to which the conditions of the experiment can be established, 
and this may require use of both field and laboratory data. For example, the 
relative conditions under which syngenetic minerals are deposited from sea- 
water can be established from lithofacies analysis of beds known from geologic 
evidence to have been synchronously deposited. If physical and chemical data 
are available for a few of the minerals, however, the conditions under which 
the others have been deposited may be interpolated. Using this approach, 
H. L. James demonstrated from stratigraphic analysis that iron sulfides, iron 
silicates, iron carbonate, and the iron oxides, hematite and (most surprising, 
for it is ordinarily thought of as a high-temperature mineral) magnetite, are 
synchronously deposited in a regular lateral sequence reflecting progressive 
change in redox potential and pH. And R. P. Sheldon, my co-worker in the 
study of the phosphorite family of sediments, defined rather closely, from litho- 
facies analysis and existing physical and chemical data, the physical and 
chemical conditions in the Phosphoria sea, in which black shale, phosphorite, 
chert, carbonates, redbeds and salines were deposited in a laterally changing 
environment ranging from the deeper part of the shelf to coastal lagoons. 

The work of E. M. Shoemaker and others on meteorite craters illustrates the 
deliberate use of geology in solving problems of multidisciplinary interest. 
Measurements of the depth and radius of craters formed artificially by chemical 
and nuclear explosives and the radius of mixing due to shock show a consistent 
relation to yield, and similar features in meteorite craters appear to obey the 



THE STUDY OF COMPLEX NATURAL EXPERIMENTS 73 

same scaling laws. The dimensions and other features of natural meteorite 
craters are equivalent to those of craters formed by the impact of explosions 
in the range of tens or even hundreds of megatons. Study of their structure 
and other features, therefore, yields data valuable in predicting the effects of 
nuclear explosives that are more powerful than those tested artificially in the 
past, as well as the effects of nuclear explosions in rock types, such as granite 
and limestone, in which nuclear devices have not yet been tested. Artificial 
tests thus far have been limited to a few rock types, and provide little basis for 
predicting the effects of natural structures, such as joints, on crater shape. A 
natural experiment, Meteor Crater, Arizona, already completed in jointed 
limestone, however, shows that joints do influence crater shape, for the outline 
of Meteor Crater is nearly square and the diagonals of the square correspond 
to the direction of the two principal joint systems. It is interesting to note also 
that the discoveries of the high-pressure silica polymorphs, coesite and stisho- 
vite, by E. C. T. Chao and co-workers, in impactites associated with meteorite 
craters demonstrated for the first time that these high-pressure phase changes 
could be produced by shock pressure of extremely short duration. 

The power of laboratory experiments stems in large part not only from the 
fact that they can be closely controlled, but also that they can be repeated to 
isolate and measure the effect of a single variable. This advantage is not 
wholly lost in natural experiments, however, for similar experiments may have 
taken place under differing circumstances that bring to light the effects of 
various factors. For example, according to E. D.Jackson (personal communica- 
tion, 1963), the composition of the original magmatic liquid in the Precambrian 
Stillwater complex of Montana and the still liquid lava lake at Kilauea Iki, 
Hawaii, is essentially the same, so that differences in their crystallization history 
and products can be related to their size and position in the crust. 



Summary 

Geology, like other sciences, has many economic or practical objectives that 
in themselves more than justify its pursuit and support. The knowledge and 
principles it develops enable us to use more fully the land, water, mineral, and 
energy resources of our physical environment and if it yielded no other 
dividends it would, for these reasons alone, deserve high emphasis among scien- 
tific endeavors in the modern world. The opportunities it provides, however, 
for observing the results of natural experiments make it important also as one 
of the prime exploratory and analytical fields of general science, capable not 
only of uncovering challenging problems but also of solving many difficult and 
complex ones that are beyond the reach of artificial experiments. 



74 V. E. McKELVEY 

REFERENCES CITED 

EARTH, T. F. W., and POSNJAK, E., 1931, The spinel structure: an example of variate 

atom equipoints: J. Washington Acad. Sci., vol. 21, pp. 255-258. 
CHAD, E. C. T., FAHEY, J. J., and LITTLER, J., 1962, Stishovite, SiC>2 5 a very high pres- 
sure new mineral from Meteor Crater, Arizona: J. Geophys. Res., vol. 67, pp. 419-421. 
, SHOEMAKER, E. M., and MADSEN, B. M., 1960, First natural occurrence of 

coesite: Science, vol. 132, pp. 220-222. 
JAMES, H. L., 1954, Sedimentary facies of iron-formation: Econ. Geol., vol. 49, pp. 

235-293. 
MILTON, CHARLES, 1957, Authigenic minerals of the Green River formation of the 

Uinta Basin, Utah: Intermountain Assoc. Petroleum Geol., 8th Ann. Field Conf., 

pp. 136-143. 
MURATA, K. J., and SMITH, R. L., 1946, Manganese and lead as coactivators of red 

fluorescence in halite: Am. Mineralogist, vol. 31, pp. 527-538. 
SHELDON, R. P., in press, Physical stratigraphy and mineral resources of Permian rocks 

in western Wyoming: U. S. Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 313-B. 
SHOEMAKER, E. M., 1960, Brecciation and mixing of rock by strong shock: U. S. Geol. 

Survey, Prof. Paper 400-B, pp. 423-425. 
, 1960, Penetration mechanics of high velocity meteorites illustrated by Meteor 

Crater, Arizona: Internat. Geol. Cong., 21st, Copenhagen, 1960, pt. 18, sec. 18, 

Pr., pp. 41 8-434. 



A. O. WOODFORD 

Pomona College 



Correlation by Fossils 



The presence of successive and dissimilar fossil faunas in the stratified rocks 
of northwestern Europe was demonstrated by William Smith and his con- 
temporaries as early as 1815. Some forty-five years later, Darwin convinced 
the scientific community that evolution of stratigraphically lower faunas into 
higher ones is more probable than alternating creations and extinctions. Soon 
after the "Origin of Species" appeared, however, Thomas Henry Huxley 
(1862, 1870) challenged the assumption, already well established in his time, 
that two widely separated sedimentary rock masses containing closely similar 
faunas or floras must have been deposited at the same time. He asked for a 
sharp distinction between homotaxis (identical or similar successions of faunas 
or floras) and the kind of correlation that implies synchronism (identical age for 
each correlated faunal or floral pair). Huxley (1862, p. xlvi) asserted that 
"a Devonian fauna and flora in the British Islands may have been contempo- 
raneous with Silurian life in North America, and with a Carboniferous fauna 
and flora in Africa." 

I have no intention of championing this heresy, but I do intend to follow 
Huxley's logic, working from homotaxis to possible time correlation, without 
making the assumption that homotaxis necessarily implies synchronism. 

Guide Fossils 

Correlation by fossils involves two problems. First we must determine the 
changes in the successive fossil faunas at one locality; and second, we must 
learn how to use the faunal changes in making correlations from one local 
column to another, carefully distinguishing between time and facies correla- 
tions. Even while working on a single column it is desirable to keep two 
objectives in mind. Paleontologically, we use our collections of fossil faunas 
relatively small and probably biased samples of the original, much larger, 
biological populations as bases for unscrambling the ecological facies and 
evolutionary sequences of the animals. Stratigraphically, we subdivide the 

75 



76 A. O. WOODFORD 

column by use of differences between the species at different levels. Note that 
the evolutionary and the stratigraphic values of species require emphasis on 
exactly opposite aspects of the observations. For evolution we emphasize 
similarities between the species at successive levels, and for correlation we 
emphasize differences. 

Subdivision of the column depends on how fossiliferous the rocks are and 
how clearly the succession is exposed. If the local succession is well exposed 
and the faunas are rich, we must choose between two possible methods of 
work: (1) statistical study of a large collection of each fauna (or a large sample 
of the ammonites or brachiopods or other selected group), a procedure that in 
the past has usually seemed excessively time-consuming, or (2) use of selected 
guide species (or genera), the customary procedure. With computers at hand 
to make the calculations, statistical methods are coming into vogue, but for 
any general discussion it is still necessary to stick to guide fossils. 

The ideal set of guides would belong to a group that evolved rapidly, occurs 
abundantly in all kinds of stratified rocks, and is worldwide in distribution. 
The fossils that approach this ideal most closely appear to be the Ordovician- 
Silurian graptolites, the Upper Paleozoic fusuline foraminifera, the Upper 
Paleozoic goniatitic ammonoids, the ammonites of the three Mesozoic systems, 
and a few Cretaceous and Tertiary planktonic foraminifera, and still smaller 
nannoplankton. The ammonites appear to be the best of the lot. Among the 
Mesozoic systems, the Jurassic includes, in northwestern Europe, the most 
usefully fossiliferous sequence, with excellent preservation and the most favor- 
able set of well-studied exposures. Almost every aspect of stratigraphic sub- 
division by the use of guide fossils can be illustrated from the Jurassic System, 
in Europe and elsewhere. 

Lower and Middle Jurassic Zones of Northwestern Europe 

Subdivision of Jurassic. The Jurassic has been divided and subdivided into 
stages, substages, zones, and subzones. We shall take the stratigraphic zone as 
our starting point. It is true that zones were not the first divisions of the Jurassic 
to be invented. Historically, several of William Smith's formations Lias, 
Blue Marl, Under Oolyte, Great Oolyte, Forest Marble, Cornbrash Lime- 
stone, Kelloways Stone, Chinch Clay, Coral Rag, Oak Tree Clay, Portland 
Rock, and Purbeck Stone were put together to form the Jurassic System. 
Then Alcide d'Orbigny (1842-1851; summary, pp. 600-623) reversed the 
process and divided most of the Jurassic into 10 paleontologically defined 
stages, using ammonites primarily. Finally, the stages were subdivided into 
zones by d'Orbigny and others, notably A. Oppel of Germany (1856-58). 
Current usage for the Lower and Middle Jurassic is shown in Table 1 on 
pp. 78-79. 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 77 

Zones. l A zone is made up of the stratified rocks deposited with a particular 
assemblage of fossils. This definition is vague and very nearly begs the vital 
time question, but it has nevertheless proved fairly easy to use. \Ve shall come 
back later to the possible time significance of a zone. 

The implications of the zonal concept are grasped most readily in connection 
with an idealized example. First, we study in detail a sequence of beds at one 
location, A. We study and name the fossils contained therein, emphasizing the 
ammonites in the Jurassic. Almost always the ammonite succession is dis- 
continuous; the section yields several distinct successive faunas. We choose 
one species in each fauna as a special guide or index and use its name to label 
the fauna. The limits of the faunal ranges do not necessarily coincide with 
rock boundaries. 

We repeat the process at a second exposure, B. The rock succession is differ- 
ent, but the faunal succession at B has elements in common with that at A. 
In particular, some of the faunal zones established at A can be recognized at 5, 
even though others cannot. The reverse may also be true. In this manner we 
compare faunal successions in ever widening geographical extent. We find 
that some of our faunas at A can be identified over distances of hundreds of 
miles while others are very local. By compilation of successive faunas of suit- 
ably wide extent we can construct a table of standard zones for a particular 
area, such as northwestern Europe. The names of the standard zones are de- 
rived from faunal index species, used to designate stratigraphical sets of beds, 
not paleontological entities. A particular zone is referred to as the "Zone of 
Parkinsonia parhnsoni" or merely "Parkinsoni Zone" (No. 30 in Table 1). 

Now, returning to our starting point A, we see that some of our original 
local zones at that place have become standard zones. Others, that proved to 
be more or less local in extent, are usually attached to one or another of the 
standard zones, as subzones. Moreover, we may find that not all of the standard 
zones are represented at A. That is, the section at A is not paleontologically 
complete; it contains paleontological lacunas. Finally, of the nonfossiliferous 
beds between zones we can say nothing. 

Note that (a) for the recognition of a zone, we need both rock and fossils; 
(b) a zone is characterized by an assemblage of species (especially that at the 
type locality), and the zone index species may be rare or even missing from 
any one place or even from a region; (c) it is a matter of convenience, based 
usually on geographical extent, as to which units we call zones and which sub- 
zones; (d) the existence of a standard zone table implies widespread homotaxis; 
and (e) such homotaxis may prove to be explainable only in terms of syn- 
chronism (time correlation), making the standard zonal table also a table of 



1 The first six paragraphs of this discussion of the zone are modified from a statement 
furnished by Dr. J. H. Callomon of University College, London. 



TABLE 1 

CORRELATION TABLE FOR MARINE LOWER AND MIDDLE JURASSIC, 



Stage 




Zone 


1 
England 


2 

Eastern 
France 


3 
South- 
western 
Germany 


4 
North- 
western 
Germany 


Middle 




41. 


Quenstedtoceras lamberti 


z 


z 


z 


z 


Jurassic 




40. 


Peltoceras athleta 


z 


z 


z 


z 


Callovian 


M 


39. 
38. 


Erymnoceras coronation 
Kosmoceras jason 


z 
z 


z 


z 
z 


z 
z 






37. 


Sigaloceras callomense 


z 


z 


? 


z 






36. 


Macrocephalites macrocephalus 


z 


z 


z 


z 






35. 


Clydoniceras discus 


z 


z 




z 






34. 


Oppelia aspidoides 


z 


p 


? 


p 


Bathonian 


M 


33. 
32. 


Tulites subcontracts 
Gracilisphinctes progracilis 


z 
z 


z 


z 






L 31. 


Zigzagiceras zigzag 


z 


z 


z 


z 






30. 


Parkinsonia parkinsom 


z 


z 


z 


z 




U 


29. 


Garantiana. garantiana 


z 


z 


z 


z 






28. 


Strenoceras subfurcatum 


z 


z 


z 


z 






27. 


Stephanoceras humphriesianum 


z 


z 


z 


z 


Bajocian 


M 


26. 


Otoites sauzei 


z 


z 


z 


z 


j w~. 




25. 


Sonninia sowerbyi 


z 


z 


z 


z 






24. 


Graphoceras concavum 


z 


z 


z 


z 




T 


23. 


Ludwigia murchisonae 


z 


z 


z 


z 




ij 


22. 


Tmetoceras scissum 


z 




z 


z 






21. 


Leioceras opalinum 


z 


z 


z 


z 


Lower Jurassic 




20. 


Dumortieria levesquei 


z 


z 


z 


z 


(lias) 


U 


19. 


Grammoceras thouarsense 


z 


z 


z 


? 


Toarcian 




18. 
17. 


Haugia vanabilis 
Hildoceras bifrons 


z 
z 


z 
z 


z 
z 


z 
z 




L 


16. 


Harpoceras falcijer 


z 


z 


z 


z 






15. 


Dactyhoceras tenuicostatum 


z 


z 


z 


z 




u 


14. 


Pleuroceras spinatum 


z 


z 


z 


z 




\J 


13. 


Amaltheus margaritatus 


z 


z 


z 


z 


Pliensbachian 




12. 


Prodactylioceras davoei 


z 


z 


z 


z 




L 


11. 


Tragophylloceras ibex 


z 


z 


z 


z 






10. 


Uptonia jamesoni 


z 


z 


z 


z 






9. 


Echioceras raricostatum 


z 


z 


z 


z 




U 


8. 


Oxynoticeras oxynotum 


z 


z 


z 


z 


Sinemurian 




7. 
6. 


Asteroceras obtusum 
Caenisites turnen 


z 

z 


z 
z 


z 
z 


z 
z 




L 


5. 


Arnioceras semicostatum 


z 


z 


z 


z 






4. 


Anetites bucklandi 


z 


z 


z 


z 




3. 


Schlotheimia angulata 


z 


z 


z 


z 


Hettangian 


2. 


Alsatites hasicus 


z 


z 


z 


z 




1. 


Psiloceras planorbis 


z 


z 


z 


z 



t Compiled from W. J. Arkell's Jurassic Geology of the World, with modifications from 
Dean, Donovan, and Howarth (1961), J. H. Callomon (1955, 1961), and H. K. Erben (1956). 
U = Upper. M = Middle. L = Lower. S = stage present, z = zone present, x = fauna 

78 



SHOWING ZONES AND STAGES IN 13 SELECTED COLUMNS! 



5 

Jura 
Mts. 


678 9 10 11 12 13 

Cau- A . . Cutch, Eastern Western ,., . Eastern A , 
casus Arabia India Greenland Canada ^ onun S Mexico Andes 




z 


ss z z 


41 


z 


z z 


40 


ss 


ss Z J + S 


39 
38 


z 


z ? z + X 
ss 


37 


z 


z z z + 


36 


z 


ee? OO 


35 


z 


aoi oo ^ 


34 


z 


S 1 


33 


p 


SS w 


32 


z 


? 1 ? ? z 


31 


z 


z 


30 


z 


SS SS? 


29 


z 


Z 


28 


z 


z z z 


27 


z 


z ss z ss S ? 


26 


z 


? z z 


25 


z 


? 


24 


z 


z 


23 


z 


z z 


22 


z 


z 


21 


? 




20 


z 


ss? ss ss ss 


19 


* 


s 


18 


* 


z 


17 


* 


ss 


16 


* 


ss ss 


15 


z 




14 


z 


ss 


13 


? 


S z S z 


12 


z 


z 


11 


z 


z z z 


10 


z 


z 


9 


z 


? ss 


8 


z 


s? ? ? ? 


7 
6 


z 


z z ? 


5 


z 


z z z 


4 


z 


z ? 


3 


z 


s? 


2 


z 


z z 


1 



bridging Middle and Lower Callovian. ? = zone perhaps present. 1 = 6 local Bathonian 
zones. + = 5 local zones, ss substage present, ss? = substage perhaps present. * = per- 
haps all zones; condensed. 

79 



TABLE 2 

DISTRIBUTION OF AMMONITE SPECIMENS IN BETHEL BRICK QUARRY AT 



Zone 




29-30 
transition 


29 (G. garantiana), 13 meters 


Bed number 




1 


2 3-4 7 8 15 16-17 19 21 


Parkinsonia acns and P. rancostata 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) depressa 


6 
2 



Garantiana (Subgarantiana) tetragona 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) suemca 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) alticosta 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) subgaranti 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) wet&li 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) trauthi 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) pompeckji 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) coronata 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) cydogaster 
Garantiana (Subgarantiana) subangulata 
Garantiana (Garantiana) garantiana 
Garantiana (Garantiana) dubia 
Garantiana (Garantiana) baculata 
Garantiana (Garantiana) althoffi 
Garantiana (Garantiana) filicosta 
Garantiana (Psmdogarantiana) minima 
Garantiana (Pseudogarantiana) dichotoma 
Perisphinctids 
Bigotites sp. indet. 
Garantiana (Qrthogarantiana) mflata 
Garantiana (Orthogarantiana) schroederi 
Garantiana (Orthogarantiana) densicostata 
Strenoceras subfurcatum 
Strenoceras bajocensis 
Strenoceras latidorsatum 
Strenoceras robustum 
Strenoceras rotmdum 



164361 



1 1 

2 



time correlation, with each zone made up of the rocks deposited during the 
time when the group of zonal guide fossils was living. 

Historically, Oppel set up the first table of standard Jurassic zones for north- 
western Europe in 1856. This event was fortunately located, for the unusually 
complete and extensively fossiliferous European sequence gives geographic 
zone ranges of the order of 1000 miles, and the experience of the hundred years 
after Oppel has shown that this is a suitable extent for a zone. 

80 



BIELEFELD, NORTHWEST GERMANY. AFTER A. BENTZ, 1928. 



28-29 transition, 12 meters . 28 (S ~ ^/ 

1 4 meters 



22 23 24 25 26 27 27A* 28 29-32 34 35 36 41 42 , Upper Lower 



1 1 

1 

142 1 

2" 1 64 

3 

2 1 
1 

1 l a 1 

1 

1 

1 

1 1 1 

1 4 1 

4 4 

3 1 

2 
1 
1 2 8 



2 


2 






15 






5 






11 






2? 


4 






1 






2 




2 





* Specimens from nodules, not all from one horizon. 
*cf. 

Some peculiarities of actual faunas are shown in Table 2, representing the 
ammonites of a sequence of Upper Bajocian units in the clays and shales of a 
brick quarry near Bielefeld in northwestern Germany. The Garantiana Zone 
(No. 29 of Table 1) and the Subfurcatum Zone (No. 28) are present and in 
addition, there are the 28-29 and 29-30 transitional units. Here the paleon- 
tological units are also lithologic units. The 29-30 transitional beds, at the top 

81 



82 A. O. WOODFORD 

of the section, are blue-black micaceous shales. Zone 29 is made up of 13 
meters of more calcareous shales with few fossils, though some ammonites are 
present, as shown in the table, and a reptile skeleton was found at the base of 
the zone. The 28-29 transition beds, which are 12 meters thick, are somewhat 
micaceous marly clays. Fossils are moderately numerous. Zone 28, that of 
Strenoceras subfurcatum, is four meters thick and is distinguished by its fauna. 
Paleontologically, the transition beds between zone 30, that of Parkinsonia 
parkmsom, and zone 29, that of Garantiana garantiana, are characterized by the 
occurrence together of Parkinsonia and Garantiana. Zone 29, at this locality, 
yielded but a single example of the index species, Garantiana garantiana, and is 
characterized by perisphinctids. The 28-29 transition beds have the distinction 
of being the only ones containing Pseudogarantiana. In zone 28 the zone species 
Strenoceras subfurcatum is common; in this section, the genus Strenoceras is limited 
to this zone. 

At Bielefeld, paleontological subdivision goes beyond the standard zones in 
two ways, (a) Two extra units are present, both well marked paleontologically, 
and these units contain faunas which are transitional from one standard zone 
to the next. Such transitional units are unusual in the Jurassic of northwestern 
Europe, (b) The Subfurcatum Zone is divided into two subzones. Subzones 
are more numerous in some other parts of the northwest European Jurassic. 
The 20 zones of the Lower Jurassic (Lias) include 50 subzones, most of which 
have been recognized in most parts of the province (Dean and others, 1961). 

Kosmoceras in the Callovian at Peterborough. For details concerning species and 
specimens we turn to a part of the Callovian, here considered the uppermost 
stage of the Middle Jurassic, following the practice of Arkell (1956) and the 
German geologists. Some of the commonest Callovian ammonites exhibit 
nearly continuous transitions from one species to another, and some of the 
vaguely delimited species are used as guide or even index fossils. With the aid 
of these guides, exceptionally satisfactory homotaxial parallels have been 
demonstrated, notably between the sections in the Oxford (Clunch) Clay at 
Peterborough and Kidlington, England. 

The Peterborough section was examined by Roland Brinkmann of Germany 
(1929) in a statistical study that involved 3035 specimens which he assigned to 
the genus Kosmoceras. Brinkmann also identified the few other ammonites he 
found, as well as the numerous pelecypods, belemnites, and other invertebrates 
that he collected. He mentioned the fine fish specimens found in the quarries 
by others, as well as the skeletons of large plesiosaurs that are exhibited in the 
British Museum. 

The Oxford Clay near Peterborough is flat-lying and at least 98 ft thick. 
It is mostly a dark gray, poorly laminated bituminous rock. The 1300 cm 
(42 ft) of clay in the lower part of the formation, which was studied statistically 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 83 

by Brinkmann (compare Table 3), is exposed in the lower parts of the walls 
of three quarries of the London Brick Company. One of the quarries is two 
miles south of Peterborough; the others are close together, three or four miles 
southeast of the city. The clay contains numerous white layers called plasters, 
usually only a few millimeters thick, rarely several centimeters, which separate 
the dark-colored rock into bands. The plasters are made up of collapsed am- 
monite shells, mostly in separated fragments. Local lithologic correlation, 
from one part of a pit to another part, or between pits, is made possible by the 
plasters and by three much thicker reference beds: (1) a concretionary* layer 
56-78 cm above Brinkmann's zero horizon (perhaps 176-198 cm above the 
Kellaways Rock that underlies the clay), (2) a very dark, thick-bedded clay 
at 560-680 cm above the zero level, and (3) a green clay at 1130-1160 cm. 
The thicknesses of the plasters and other reference beds and the intervals 
between them are uniform throughout the Peterborough quarries. 

Brinkmann recognized 12 Kosmoceras species at Peterborough in the 1300 cm 
of clay to which the statistical study was restricted (Fig. 1). He concluded that 
each of the four columns of species in Fig. 1 represents an evolutionary lineage 
that should be recognized as a subgenus of Kosmoceras. Each subgenus is desig- 
nated by one of the many names previously coined by S. S. Buckman: %ugo- 
kosmokeras (column 1), Kosmoceras s. s. (column 2), Gulielmiceras [Anakosmokeras] 
(column 3), and Spimkosmokeras (column 4). Other workers, notably Callomon 
(1955), separate the part of the first column below the 135.5-cm horizon 
(K. jason and lower) as the subgenus Guhelmites (another of Buckman's names). 

The shells of the last two columns are similar to those of the first two, horizon 
by horizon, except for smaller size and the possession of prongs called lappets 
on either side of the aperture (the back lappet of a pair being hidden by the 
front one in a side view). At almost ever}* horizon a form figured in column 3 
corresponds to one of similar sculpture in column 1 that is twice as big and 
lacks lappets. The same relation holds somewhat less clearly between columns 
2 and 4. Brinkmann (1929, pp. 212-213) concluded that the dimorphism is 
not sexual and that the unlappeted lineages were derived from Sigaloceras 
(Table 4) slightly before the beginning of Oxford Clay deposition. Now J. H. 
Callomon (letter, February 10, 1963) doubts the distinctness of the four lineages 
and considers the Kosmoceras sequence at Peterborough a single lineage, with 
sexual dimorphism. Brinkmann's collections actually were not large enough 
to demonstrate bimodal distributions. 

Whatever the number of lineages, Brinkmann's statistics are useful, in part 
because of the numerical predominance of ugokosmokeras (column 1 of Fig. 1), 
with 1802 specimens, 703 complete, over Kosmoceras s.s. (column 2), with 67 
specimens, 50 complete. The statistics are consistent with an explanation in 
terms of persistent evolutionary changes, if there are lacunas in the fossil 
record at some of the plasters. Brinkmann grouped measurements and ratios 



84 






Grossouvrei 




Grossouvrei 




obductum 




obductum 




Jason 




enodatum 




gemmatum 



A. O. WOODFORD 
Section height, cm 

-1300 



-900 




pollucinum 




-800 



-700 



-100 



nodosum 



Fig. 1. Lineages and subgenera of Kosmoceras at Peterborough, modified slightly 
from Brinkmann (1929, Tafel V). 1, ugokosmokeras and (Jason and lower) Gvliclmites; 
2, Kosmoceras s.s. Sizes greatly reduced. 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 



85 



compression 






Section height, cm 



aculeatum om ^ 



Coarse ribbed Typical Fine ribbed 



Castor 




Pollux 



1300 



-900 



800 



700 



100 



Fig. 1 (Cont.}. 3, Gulielmiceras; 4, Spinikomokeras. Sizes greatly reduced. 



86 A. O. WOODFORD 

by lineages and horizons, the 1300 cm of clay being divided into 48 strata 
groups. The measurements for one lineage in one strata group tended toward 
normal distribution. Two of the many sets of data are selected for presentation 
here. The first set is shown as Table 3, representing the variations in diameter 
among the 703 complete specimens, most of them flattened to thin discs, that 
were assigned to the Gulielmites-^ugokosmokeras lineage (column 1 of Fig. 1). 
Note the rapid increase in size up to the 135-cm plaster, the sharp drop there, 
and the slow and interrupted increase thereafter, with the maximum mean 
diameter 146.6 2.0 mm for the 31 specimens from 793 cm (individuals up to 
almost 170 mm). Standard deviations of the differences between adjacent 
means have been added to the table, together with /-values (difference between 
adjacent means divided by the standard deviation of the difference). All 
/-values greater than 3 for the differences 1, 3, 4, 6, 10, and 27 are strongly 
indicative of dissimilar populations. Difference 10, at the 135.5-cm horizon, is 
between the highest Jason Zone strata group and the lowest Goronatum Zone 
straca group. These two zones are the two parts of the Middle Callovian 
(compare Table 4). Most other pertinent statistical measures for all lineages 
also show breaks at this horizon. 

The second set of Brinkmann statistics pertains to the ratio between the num- 
bers of outer ribs and peripheral spines in the Spinikosmokeras sequence of Fig. 2. 
In this sequence, note the change from the approximately 1/1 ratio between 
outer ribs and spines in Fig. 2(c) to the approximately 2/1 ratio in Fig. 2(d). 
The statistics (Fig. 3a) show that this change is largely concentrated between 
1093 and 1094 cm (1093.5 cm of Fig. 3a), at a horizon which is now about to 
be established as the Athleta-Coronatum zonal contact (J. H. Callomon, letter 
of February 10, 1963; see also Table 4). The regression lines on the two sides 





Fig. 2. A Spinikosmokeras succession at Peterborough, after Brinkmann (1929, Tafel 
III), (a) K. (S.) castor anterior, from 312 cm; (b) JT. () castor castor, from 670 cm; (c) 
K. (S.) aadeatum anterior, from 988 cm; (d) K. (S.) aculeatum acvleatum, from 1277 cm. 
Approx. X J natural size. 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 



87 



3.0- 
1 25^ 




. 




1 ' : 








M 




,' 




1 2.0- 




. " 




I 1 - 5 - 


. .; - 


-^r^T^- 




i n- 


^H^* 








1080 



1100 



1120 1140 



1093.5 
Centimeters above zero level 

(a) 



3.0 








|2.5- 




Lacuna 





1&2.0- 

1 1-5- 


1 O 


: 


^^ ~- 


.. :. ./. - 




i i i , 

1 /-kOrt 




i i i i i i i 

1 1 f\f\ 1 1 Ort 1 



1093.5 



1093.5 ' 



CentI meters 
(b) 



Fig. 3. Lacuna at Peterborough, shown by Spinikomokeras statistics and regression 
lines. After Brinkmann (1929, Abb. 20). (a) plotted by strata-groups; (b) expanded 
to evaluate lacuna. 

of the 1093.5-cm plaster actually have the same slope. This slope represents a 
rate of change that Brinkmann attempted to use in estimating the relative 
length of time represented by the lacuna. By assuming that (1) the rib-spine 
ratio changed at a uniform rate, (2) the clay between the plasters accumulated 
at a uniform rate, and (3) each plaster represents a time of nondeposition of 
clay, he was enabled to draw a second diagram with a gap at 1093.5 cm, wide 
enough to produce a single straight rib-spine regression line (Fig. 3b), in which 
the new abscissas became measures of time and from which the relative lengths 
of the two periods of clay deposition and the intervening lacuna could be 
determined. The result is dependent on the slopes of the two partial regression 
lines of Fig. 3(a), which are not very precise because of the scatter of the rib- 
spine ratios. Despite this and the other uncertainties, Brinkmann's data show 
clearly enough that some plasters, both interzonal and intrazonal, are horizons 
of exceptionally large changes in the statistical properties of the ammonites 



TABLE 3 

END-DIAMETERS OF ZUGOKOSMOKERAS (AND GULIELMITES) FROM 



Strata-group, 


Number of 


Mean and its 


For 


the differences: 




cm 


specimens 


Stand. Dev., mm 


Number 


Stand. Dev. 


t 


7-20 


12 


61.6 1.5 
















219 


in nn 


21-25 


12 


82.8 1.5 




.l 


iU.UU 








9 


9 49 


OQ1 


26-28 


23 


85.0 =fc 1.9 




Atm'Tft 


. y L 








i 


2in 


1 94 


29-39 


32 


78.2 =h 0.9 




. 1U 


J,t*T 








A 


1 A 


A. f\A. 


40-45 


16 


84.9 d= 1.4 




1 .00 


^.L/*r 








5 


3.67 


0.98 


46-50 


9 


88.5 d= 3.4 
















^ n^ 


^ AA. 


56-78 


19 


105.8 =h 3.7 




j.\jj 


J.*r*r 










A QA. 


079 


79-90 


8 


109.3 d= 3.1 




*r.O"r 


. 1 ft 








8 


3.80 


1.42 


91-120 


15 


114.7 =fc 2.2 














9 


3.72 


1.16 


121-135 


9 


119.0 3.0 














in 


379 


690 


136-160 


9 


95.6 d= 2.2 




. / 


.*y 








11 


3.25 


0.22 


161-200 


11 


96.3 =b 2.4 














12 


3.76 


0.40 


201-240 


5 


94.8 db 2.9 














13 


3.58 


0.31 


241-260 


12 


93.7 =b 2.1 














14 


3.83 


0.52 


261-300 


7 


95.7 d= 3.2 














15 


5.12 


2.05 


301-320 


5 


85.2 =b 4.0 














16 


4.47 


1.30 


321-340 


14 


91.0 d= 2.0 














17 


4.20 


1.64 


341-360 


7 


97.9 3.7 














18 


4.25 


0.99 


361-380 


7 


93.7 =t 2.1 














19 


3.50 


2.37 


381-440 


6 


102.0 =fc 2.8 














20 


4.18 


0.53 


441-460 


12 


99.8 d= 3.1 














21 


5.46 


2.45 


461-500 


6 


113.2 =fc 4.5 














22 


5.76 


0.40 


501-520 


19 


110.9 =h 3.6 














23 


4.11 


2.21 



* Not a plaster; no data; ammonites not classified because of lack of time. 

t First 3 columns from Brinkmann, 1929, p. 103. Plasters (and strata-groups whose 
fossils were not studied) shown by horizontal lines. Stand. Dev. Standard Deviation. 
For t see text. 

88 



QUARRIES NEAR PETERBOROUGH, ENGLANDJ 



Strata-group, 
cm 


Number of 
specimens 


Mean and its 
Stand. Dev., mm 


For 

Number 


the differences: 
Stand. Dev. 


t 


521-530 
531-539 


20 
13 


101.8 2.0 
106.1 =h 2.5 


24 


3.20 
3.14 
3.14 
2.92 
3.80 
4.14 
4.91 
5.50 
5.58 
4.93 
10.05 
10.05 
3.69 
3.98 
9.53 
11.19 
7.39 
4.76 
3.84 
3.61 
3.48 
4.56 
4.94 
4.32 


1.34 
2.13 
0.03 
5.24 
0.34 
0.89 
2.59 
2.47 
2.29 
0.51 
1.73 
0.01 
1.17 
0.58 
1.45 
0.76 
2.07 
1.43 
2.79 
1.16 
1.72 
1.47 
0.18 
0.60 


540 
541-559 


38 
10 


112.8 =t 1.9 
112.7 d= 2.5 


26 

07 


560 
561-680 
681-690 


27 
15 
13 


128.0 1.5 
126.7 =t 3.5 
130.4 2.2 


28 
29 
*^n 


691-759 


13 


117.7 =h 4.4 


^1 


760-780 

? 


16 


131.3 d= 3.3 


Jt 

u u ^O 


781-792 
793 


8 
31 


144.1 =Jr 4.5 
146.6 d= 2.0 


jZ 

33 

\A 


794-854 


6 


129.2 =fc 10.3 


^ 


855 
856-864 


23 
21 


129.1 d= 2.0 
124.8 =h 3.1 


36 

^7 


865 
866-880 
881-894 
895 


33 

7 
7 
9 


127.1 =fc 2.5 
140.9 =h 9.2 
132.4 =h 6.4 
117.1 =b 3.7 


38 
39 
40 
J.1 


896-920 


15 


123.9 =b 3.0 


- - 4? 


961-980 
981-990 


11 
12 


113.2 d= 2.4 
109.0 =b 2.7 


43 

AA 


1080-1093 


22 


115.0 db 2.2 


^ 


1094-1120 
1121-1135 


14 
21 


121.7 d= 4.0 
120.8 =k 2.9 


46 

A.7 


1270-1310 


23 


123.4 =fc 3.2 





89 



90 A. O. WOODFORD 

and hence may well represent relatively long periods of nondeposition of clay, 
during which the ammonites changed at their usual rates. 

At Peterborough there is no sign of erosion, just deposition and nondeposition. 
The plasters are uninterrupted sheets, even though just beneath some of them 
the clay was reworked by pre-plaster burrowing animals. 

Correlations in the Oxford Clay (Callovian) between Peterborough and Kidlington. 
The qualitative and quantitative changes of the lower strata groups at Peter- 
borough are closely paralleled at Kidlington near Oxford, 70 miles southwest 
of Peterborough. The 0-135 cm portion of the Oxford Clay at Peterborough 
is the Jason Zone, the lower part of the Middle Callovian. It can be correlated 
with 450-500 cm of Oxford Clay that in 1948-51 was temporarily exposed at 
Kidlington. At that place, Callomon (1955) collected 165 measurable speci- 
mens of the Gulielmites and Guhelmiceras subgenera of Kosmoceras. Brinkmann 
had 1086 Kosmoceras specimens (349 measurable) collected from the 0-135 cm 
clay at Peterborough, and all but seven were assigned to the same two sub- 
genera. The Kosmoceras (Guhelmites and Guhelmiceras) diameters at Peterborough 
and Kidlington are similar at corresponding horizons. 

The most exact Peterborough-Kidlington correlation is for the faunal break 
which occurs at the 51.5-cm plaster in the Peterborough quarries and probably 
at the plaster 173 cm above the zero level at Kidlington, although the clay 
just below the Kidlington plaster lacks ammonites. Shell sizes for both Guliel- 
mites and Guhe Imicerasr are markedly greater above this horizon. Other charac- 
teristics change too, especially for Gulielmites^ so that Callomon described the 
new species Kosmoceras (Gulielmites) medea (Fig. 1, column 1) to include the 
Gulielmites shells below this horizon (boundary of Jason/Medea subzones, 
Table 4). There are eight plasters in the Jason Zone at Peterborough and six 
at Kidlington. Although the plasters in the Peterborough quarries extend for 
miles, the Jason/Medea plaster correlation is the only one that can be made 
between Peterborough and Kidlington with any confidence. The plasters mark 
times when clay was not being deposited, although ammonite shells were 
accumulating, and the area must have been covered by clear sea water. The 
failure of most plaster correlations between Peterborough and Kidlington may 
mean that most plasters were relatively local; perhaps they were formed on 
that side of a large delta which for a time was not receiving muddy water. 

In the Oxford-Peterborough belt of Kellaways Rock and Oxford Clay, the 
Upper Callovian Athleta and Lamberti zones are not subdivided, but each 
Middle or Lower Callovian zone is divided into two or more subzones (Table 4). 
The subzones have been recognized in some but not all British Callovian sec- 
tions. The Erymnoceras coronatum Zone, i.e., the upper part of the Middle 
Callovian, has as its index species a heavy-ribbed ammonite 16-20 in. in diam- 
eter that is common in Britain; the zone can also be recognized by the Kos- 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 



91 



TABLE 4 

CALLOVIAN ZONES AND SUBZONES IN BRITAIN, AFTER CALLOMON (1955) 



Zone 



Subzone 



Upper Callovian Quenstedtoceras lamberti 



Peltoceras athleta 



Middle Callovian Erymnoceras coronation 



Kosmoceras (%ugokosmokeras) grossouvrei 
Kosmoceras (ugokosmokeras) obductum 



Kosmoceras (Gulielmites) 
jason 



Kosmoceras (Gulielmites) jason 
Kosmoceras (Gulielmites) medea 



Lower Callovian Sigaloceras callomense 



Sigaloceras planicerclum 
Sigaloceras callomense 
Proplanidites koenigi 



Macrocephalites 
(Macrocephalites) 
macrocephalus 



Macrocephalites (Kamptokephahtes) 
kamptus 

Macrocephalites (Macrocephalites) 
macrocephalus 



moceras guides to the two subzones. At Peterborough, the Coronatum Zone 
is divided into the Obductum Subzone, from 135.5 to about 854 cm, and the 
Grossouvrei Subzone, from about 854 cm to 1093.5 cm. The Kosmoceras guides 
to the subzones have been found at Christian Malford in the Oxford Clay belt 
35 miles southwest of Oxford, and K. grossouvrei (Table 4), at least, is present 
at Weymouth on the south coast (Arkell, 1947, p. 29). The Jason Zone at 
Peterborough is divided into the Medea Subzone, 0-51.5 cm, and the Jason 
Subzone, 51.5-135.5 cm. 

Brinkmann and Callomon emphasized different aspects of the Kosmoceras 
evidence. Brinkmann mentioned species and zones, but for him the Guhelmites- 
%ugokosmokeras lineage was one unit, in which variations in size, form, and 
sculpture were treated statistically. Statistical breaks at plasters were inter- 
preted as proofs of lacunas in the record of a continuously evolving population 
or sequence of populations. Callomon gave statistics but used them to define 
species, zones, and subzones. Callomon's correlations between Peterborough 
and Kidlington were correlations of the Medea and Jason subzones, in the 
course of which it was shown that the Kosmoceras shells went through similar 
changes in adult size at the two localities. 

Callovian in Germany, France, and Switzerland. The Callovian is well represented 
throughout the Northwest European Province. In the Schwabian and Fran- 



92 A. O. WOODFORD 

conian Alb of southwestern Germany all six zones are probably present, al- 
though the Calloviense Zone (No. 37 in Table I) is poorly represented and 
probably incomplete. The Middle and Lower Callovian has the thin "Macro- 
cephalenband" at the base, but mostly consists of the clay called Ornatenton, 
which is 10 meters thick and richly fossiliferous, with abundant Kosmoceras. 
The sequence of Kosmoceras species is confusing and unexplained (Arkell, 1956, 
p. 118). The Upper Callovian, fully exposed during the building of the Auto- 
bahn in 1937 (R. and E. Model, 1938), is a three-meter clay crowded with 
ammonites, many of which are pyritized or phosphatized. Large specimens 
of the knobby Peltoceras athleta occur near the base, and specimens of the sharp- 
keeled, streamlined Quenstedtoceras lamberti occur at higher levels. An overlying 
half-meter of nodular clay contains more or less crushed pyritized or phos- 
phatized specimens of both Q. lamberti and the Lower Oxfordian (lowest Upper 
Jurassic) guides, forming one of the "condensed" zones that are common in 
the continental Jurassic and may be the result of erosion and redeposition of at 
least part of the ammonites. 

In the Jura tableland, including the region in eastern France around Besan- 
on and Belfort north of the Jura Mountains and also extending into Switzer- 
land beyond Basel to the Herznach iron mine, all six Callovian zones are 
present (Theobald, 1957), although not all are known throughout the area. 
The best faunas are found in 10.5-ft deposits of iron ore and associated strata 
in the Herznach iron mine (Callomon, 1955, p. 250). Here the Lower Callovian 
is present, but the Jason Zone kosmocerids are lacking, and the next fossiliferous 
horizons are the well-marked Coronatum and Athleta zones. The successive 
faunas are sharply contrasted instead of including closely related kosmocerids 
as at Peterborough. At Besangon, a newly exposed Coronatum-Athleta- 
Lamberti sequence (Rangheard and Theobald, 1961) includes a Coronatum 
Zone with Erymnoceras coronatum and abundant Hecticoceras of Middle Callovian 
species, but no Kosmoceras. 

In general, on the European continent the distribution of Kosmoceras is very 
spotty, but the Callovian zones can be correlated with those in England by 
the use of kosmocerids and other guide ammonites. Callovian lacunas are 
present on the continent, as in England, and some of these, at several levels, 
coincide with slight erosional unconformities and concentrations of battered, 
silicified, or phosphatized ammonites. 

At lower horizons, in the Bajocian, one or two slight angular unconformities 
occur, in England and in Normandy. In Wiltshire, S. S. Buckman (1901) 
demonstrated extensive overlap and a discordance of 7 feet per mile. 

European Lower and Middle Jurassic zones. The Lower and Middle Jurassic 
zones of the Northwest European Province are all of the same general type as 
those described for the Callovian. All 41 zones are present in England (column 1 
of Table 1). Almost all are present in France, especially on the east side of the 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 93 

Paris Basin and in the Jura tableland (column 2 of Table lj, and in the cuestas 
of the Schwabian and Franconian Alb of southwestern Germany (column 3). 
Almost all the zones are probably present in the thick strata of the northwest 
German basin between the North Sea and the Harz Mountains (column 4) 
and in the folded Jura of the Franco-Swiss border (column 5j. 

Facies zones. The Lower and Middle Jurassic zones of northwestern Europe 
have long been considered time-stratigraphic units. Before we accept this 
important inference, we should survey all the other possibilities. Under the 
general assumption of organic evolution, there are two other possibilities or 
possible complications: (1) local evolution, with lag elsewhere as a result of 
poor communications, and (2) migration of relatively long-lived facies faunas. 
We shall consider facies faunas first, illustrating them with the present-day 
marine facies found off north-south coasts, with special attention to foraminiferal 
facies off California because the foraminiferal species living there are also found 
fossil in nearby Pleistocene and Pliocene strata. 

The present-day shallow-water marine faunal temperature and depth facies 
have been thoroughly studied along several north-south trending coasts, in- 
cluding the Pacific Coast of North America (for the mollusks, see Burch, 
1945-46; Keen, 1958). On the Pacific Coast, breaks between well-defined 
molluscan provinces occur at the tip of the Lower California Peninsula, at 
Point Conception, California, and elsewhere. 

Local and regional differences in the Pleistocene and Pliocene molluscan and 
foraminiferal faunas can be established by comparisons with living species. 
One kind of facies succession in the rocks is clearly the result of temperature 
change. Examples are successions of alternately warm and cold Pleistocene 
molluscan faunas at many places along the east and west coasts of North 
America. No doubt these faunas moved south during glacial epochs and north 
during interglacial periods. Practically all the species are living somewhere 
along these coasts today: the cold-water species live in the north and the warm- 
water species in the south. But the same species also have a tendency to move 
down into deeper colder water somewhat south of their inshore, shallow-water 
range. There can be no doubt that these molluscan species, still living today, 
are facies fossils in their Pleistocene occurrences, rather than guides to some 
particular parts of Pleistocene time, but there may be some uncertainty as to 
whether, at any particular latitude, the facies succession is due to climatic 
change or to change in the depth of the water in which the Pleistocene animals 
lived (Woodring and others, 1946). In either case, the Pleistocene facies suc- 
cessions at different localities can be no more than homotaxial and cannot be 
used as evidence of synchronism. 

In other facies successions, change of depth seems to have been the variable 
factor. Examples are found in southern California in two small basins, each 
some 25 X 60 miles in horizontal dimensions, where the sediments and faunas 



94 A. O. \VOODFORD 

have been studied in connection with oil field exploitation. In the Los Angeles 
and Ventura basins, the presumably Pliocene strata are 10,000 to 15,000ft 
thick and are made up of alternating beds of sandstone and shale, with minor 
marginal conglomerate. In both basins, foraminiferal (foramj species are 
locally satisfactory guide fossils. The zones occur in the same order in the two 
basins, are of comparable thickness, and conform to the structures in the basins, 
notably to the folds and faults determined from the sandstone layers that are 
the reservoir rocks in the numerous oil fields. But the same foram assemblages 
found in the basin strata also occur living on the floor of the nearby Pacific 
Ocean, with well-marked depth-of-water ranges. In a way, the order offshore 
is the same as in the rocks. The shallowest foram fauna of the oil-well sequence 
is also found on the sea floor in shallow water, and the oil-field zones follow in 
order down the slope of the sea floor, until the deepest oil-well foram assemblage 
is found living on the continental slope of the present ocean at depths greater 
than 6000 ft (Natland, 1933, 1957; Bandy, 1953). Almost all the foram species 
found in the wells or in Pliocene outcrops are also living offshore today. The 
very few extinct species are almost all in the lowest zone in the rocks. All the 
zones in the rocks, including the lowest one, must be primarily depth zones, 
distinguished by the faunal facies of a particular depth, namely the depth of 
water at the time of deposition of the strata involved. Apparently the lowest 
strata, those containing several extinct foram species, were deposited in water 
more than 6000 ft deep, and all the higher strata were deposited in shallower 
and shallower water as the basins filled. The deep-water marine basins appear 
to have been steep sided, with very narrow marginal selvages. These selvages 
have been involved in deformation and erosion, so that horizons are hard to 
trace, but on the east side of the Los Angeles Basin lateral transitions from deep 
to shallow facies are probably preserved. 

In the two southern California basins, the homotaxis of foram zones does not 
necessarily involve synchronism. We do not know whether any particular facies 
zone was deposited at the same time in both basins, although the identical 
extinct species in the lowest zone of the Pliocene rocks have been considered 
sufficient to justify time correlation for this zone. 

The weakness of the depth-zone forams as guides to relative age has been 
demonstrated by comparisons with the faunas in the Neogene of the Great 
Valley of California, 200-300 miles to the north. The strata called Pliocene in 
the Valley contain assemblages of shallow-water foraminifera, all assignable to 
living species, and are underlain by strata called Miocene. The deeper foramin- 
iferal facies zones are missing. It is impossible by the use of foraminifera alone 
to develop parallelism between subdivisions of the Pliocene strata of the Great 
Valley and the zones set up for the southern California basins. 

Facies fossils are harder to recognize in the older rocks. The stratigrapher 
feels his way, working back from the present. Facies that merely indicate 
depth differences can usually be avoided by looking for forms whose structures 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 95 

(or relationships to living forms of known behavior) suggest the swimming or 
floating mode of life. The very fact of wide geographic distribution, essential 
for a guide fossil, is suggestive of mobility unlikely in organisms narrowly 
restricted in habitat. 

In evaluating an extinct kind of guide, such as the ammonites, one must 
rely in part on lithofacies and the nonammonitic biofacies. Ammonites are 
especially abundant in clays. In the British Callovian they are common in 
the Oxford and other clays but are not found in the interbedded sandstone, 
the Kellaways Rock. The ammonites of the Oxford Clay are associated with 
numerous pelecypods, including oysters. Oysters are commonly shallow-water 
forms. In general, ammonites have been found associated with all marine 
biofacies except reef corals. They have not been found in brackish, lagoonal, 
estuarine, or freshwater associations. 

Westermann (1954) recognized at least two alternating ammonite facies 
(stephanoid and sonniniid) in the Middle Bajocian calcareous-sandy clays of 
the northwest German trough at Alfeld east of Bielefeld, close to the Harz 
horst. The stephanoid facies occurs three times, the sonniniid twice, but the 
whole sequence can probably be divided satisfactorily between the Stephanoceras 
humphriesianum Zone (No. 27 in Table 1) and the Otoites sau&i Zone (No. 26), 
since both index fossils are members of the stephanoid group. 

On a larger scale, there are two European ammonite facies of provincial 
scope, which may be temperature or depth facies. The ammonites of the whole 
northwest European platform, including those in the Oxford Clay and also 
those in the northwest German trough, may represent a cooler or shallower 
facies than that of the Mediterranean Tethys, the home of the smooth, globose 
genera called Lytoceras and Phylloceras, which are almost absent from the 
platform. 

Gayle Scott (1940) attempted to establish five Mesozoic depth zones, which 
he lettered from A to E. The deepest zone (E) was the Tethyan zone of Lytoceras 
and Phylloceras. The four shallower zones were all illustrated by Texas Creta- 
ceous faunas, the shallowest (A) without ammonites. The ammonites of 
depth(?) zone D are smoothly rounded shells, found in marls and marly lime- 
stones. In the supposed depth zone C, the ammonites are quadrate and highly 
sculptured; they occur in marls and clays as well as in chalk and dense lime- 
stone. The slender sharp-keeled ammonites of depth (?) zone B (15-20 fathoms?) 
are found in sandy limestones and sandy shales. 

Stratigraphic paleontologists have a built-in bias against facies interpreta- 
tions of their stock in trade, the guide fossils, and Scott's suggestions were not 
spontaneously accepted. In this case, caution seems to have been justified, as 
ammonites of the supposed depth zone D have been found in a Fort Worth 
quarry associated with sea weeds and with genera of foraminifera that today 
live attached to plants in shallow water (Claude Albritton, personal communi- 
cation). 



96 A. O. WOODFORD 

Comparison of European ammonite and Calif ornia foram zones. The northwestern 
European Jurassic ammonite zones resemble the foram facies zones of the 
southern California Pliocene in one way. Both have been found invariably in 
the same order. But the Pliocene forams were sedentary bottom animals with 
living relatives confined to depth zones. The ammonites were probably active 
swimming animals similar to the living Nautilus. Not only did the ammonites 
probably get around easily but their empty shells may occasionally have been 
spread rather widely by currents, just as a few nautilid shells have been carried 
hundreds of miles to Japan, far northeast of the haunts of the living animals. 
Finally, the unfailing ammonite homotaxis in the large European Jurassic area 
contrasts with the failure of Pliocene foram homotaxis between the southern 
California basins and the Great Valley of central California. 

Possible faunal lag in the European Jurassic. In the northwest European Lower 
and Middle Jurassic there is little or no evidence for local lag in faunal change 
at a specific horizon, or series of horizons, as a result of temporary barriers or 
the time required for migration. The practically complete homotaxis through- 
out the province, zone by zone, combined with the Peterborough evidence for 
an evolutionary sequence, is explainable by the easy migration of rapidly 
evolving animals and probably in no other way. If this explanation is the 
correct one, the homotaxis implies time correlations. 

Before accepting this conclusion of synchronism for each zone throughout 
the province, we should try to discover the implication for travel times ex- 
pressed in years. Since the time of deposition for the whole Jurassic System 
was probably of the order of 45 million years (compare Holmes, 1960; Kulp, 
1961) and the system is divided into upwards of 60 zones (41 for the Middle 
and Lower Jurassic, 20 or more for the Upper), the average zone accumulated 
in about 750,000 years. Modern marine clams and snails have spread through 
scores or even hundreds of miles of shallow water in a few decades (Elton, 
1958). If the ammonites got around as quickly as the clams and snails do now, 
which seems likely, the spread of a new European zonal fauna must have been 
geologically instantaneous. The conclusion follows that the Lower and Middle 
Jurassic zones really are temporal units throughout the Northwest European 
Province. 

Extent and meaning of lacunas in the northwest European Lower and Middle Jurassic. 
If the northwest European Lower and Middle Jurassic zones are time-strati- 
graphic units within the province, what are the extent and meaning of the 
frequently sharp zonal boundaries? Brinkmann and Callomon showed that 
in Britain the Coronatum-Jason boundary of the Middle Callovian marks a 
lacuna in the paleontologies! record. Apparently this boundary also coincides 
with a paleontological lacuna at many places in the continental portion of the 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 



97 



TABLE 5 

LOWER JURASSIC CORRELATIONS: NORTHWEST EUROPE-MEXICO (ERBEN, 1956) 



Stage 



Northwest European zone 
(Table 1) 



East-central Mexico ammonite 
"faunizones" 



Pliensbachian 10. Uptonia jamesoni 



Uptonia sp. 



Sinemurian 9. Echioceras raricostatwn 



8. Oxynoticeras oxynotwn 
7. Asteroceras obtusum 

6. Caenisites turneri 

5. Arnioceras semicostatum 

4. Arietites bucklandi 

(Coroniceras subzones) 



(Microderoceras bispinatum altespinatum 
[Ecfuoceras burckhardti 
(Pleurechioceras? james-danae 
[Pleurechioceras subdeciduum 
? ? 

Vermiceras bavaricum mexicanum* 

Oxynoticeras sp.f 

? ? 

(Euagassiceras subsauzeanum 
(Arnioceras geometricoides 

Coroniceras pseudolyra 



* Doubtful correlation. 

t Perhaps equal to European zone 8. 



province, with at least local disconformity and the reworking of ammonites. 
However that may be, the kosmocerids must have lived right through the time 
of restricted deposition, in some part or parts of the region. Northwestern 
Europe was their homeland, and they were never abundant elsewhere. At 
other zone boundaries exotic guide fossils appear, perhaps as immigrants from 
Tethys (compare Spath, 1933, p. 427) and disappear, perhaps becoming 
extinct without issue. 

Worldwide significance of northwest European Jurassic zones. No northwest 
European Lower or Middle Jurassic zone is worldwide in extent. Neverthe- 
less, many of the zones have been recognized at one or more places outside the 
province (compare Table 1), through the presence of the index species of the 
zone, other guide species, or closely related species. Take, for example, the 
Lower Jurassic correlations between Europe and eastern Mexico (Table 5). 
Note that zones 4, 5, 9, and 10 of the European sequence are confidently 
correlated with local Mexican zones ("faunizones") although no index (zone 
name) species, and almost no ammonite species, is common to the two regions. 
Some Mexican species, however, are very similar to guides for the European 
zones; examples are Echioceras densicosta of Mexico, with about 25 costae on 
the last whorl, compared to 18 for the index species of the Echioceras raricostatum 



98 A. O. \VOODFORD 

Zone, and Coromceras pseudolyra of Mexico, similar to Coromceras lyia of the 
Anetites bucklandi Zone. There are difficulties at the horizons of zones 6, 7, 
and 8 (Table 1). Nothing like zone 6 has been recognized in Mexico. The 
author of Table 5 (Erben, 1956) seriously considered correlating zone 8 (Oxy- 
noticeras oxynotum) of northwestern Europe with the Oxynoticeras sp. Zone of 
Mexico, but finally chose the zone 7 (Asteroceras-Vermiceras] correlation, shown 
in Table 5. This drops Oxjnoticeras two notches. The correlation of Table 5 
or any other possible set of matches leaves two zones in each region unmatched 
in the other. 

Actually, the matching of zones between eastern Mexico and northwestern 
Europe is exceptionally close. In general, intercontinental correlation, zone 
by zone, is not practical. For most horizons, larger and more generalized units 
substages must be used. 



Lower and Middle Jurassic Stages and Substages 

Standard stages and substages of northwestern Europe. The zones of Table 1 are 
grouped into stages. Although stages were established before zones, a stage 
is most precisely defined in terms of the zones that make it up in its type area, 
which for the Lower and Middle Jurassic is northwestern Europe. Since the 
stages are based on zones, they too are defined on a paleontological basis. 
Stages have boundaries that may cross formation boundaries obliquely, even 
in the type areas; stages may be represented by different lithologic facies in 
different areas; stages can be identified in isolated distant places all because 
they are based on assemblages of guide fossils. In 1956, just before his death, 
the British stratigrapher W. J. Arkell (1956, p. 9) wrote of the Jurassic stages 2 : 
"As units of the single world scale of classification, stages must be based on 
zones . . . They are essentially groupings of zones, but they transcend zones 
both vertically and horizontally." Vertically, a sequence of zones makes one 
stage. Horizontally, the characteristic zone assemblages of fossils may disap- 
pear, but the stage may still be recognizable and still divisible. For distant 
correlations, therefore, both stages and substages are needed. A substage is a 
major subdivision of a stage, defined in terms of the zones that make it up in 

2 The Middle Jurassic stages were based fairly closely on William Smith's formations. 
The Callovian Stage was named from Smith's Kelloways Stone, by Latinization; it also 
includes most of the overlying Oxford Clay. The Bathonian Stage includes Smith's 
Great Oolyte, or Bath Freestone, named after Bath, England, and also the Forest 
Marble and Clay. The Bajocian is Smith's Under Oolyte, but the type locality is across 
the Channel at Bayeux, Normandy. The four Lower Jurassic stages were all carved 
out of Smith's Lias clay, shale, and limestone, but the type localities are in France 
and Germany. Unlike the zones, the stages have remained practically unchanged since 
1864. 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 99 

the type area. Each Middle Jurassic stage is divided into upper, middle, and 
lower substages. The three higher Lias stages Toarcian, Pliensbachian, and 
Sinemurian have upper and lower substages; the Hettangian is not divided. 

Recognition of Callovian and other stages outside Europe. Sample Middle and Lower 
Jurassic sections in Asia and America are shown in Table 1, columns 6-13. 
The Callovian is the only stage represented in all 8 columns. The three lowest 
stages are found together in two and probably in three of the 8 columns, and 
in these two or three they are rather fully represented. The Caucasus Moun- 
tains (column 6) and the central and southern Andes (column 13) have excep- 
tionally complete sections. Note particularly the number of European zones 
that have been identified in the Andes, two-thirds of the way around the globe. 

The Callovian Stage, at the top of the Middle Jurassic, is both widespread 
and varied. Several Callovian zones are recognizable outside western Europe, 
notably in the Caucasus and in Cutch, India (Table 1). Cutch, at the north- 
eastern edge of the Arabian Sea, has perhaps the most fossiliferous and paleon- 
tologically complex sequence of the lower part of the Callovian in the world. 
Close correlation with Europe is difficult because the Cutch faunas are com- 
posed largely of Oriental elements. Kosmoceras is unknown there. 

In western North America the Lower Callovian substage has been reported 
in several areas. In the Wyoming-Montana area five regional zones have been 
distinguished (Imlay, 1953). In this same region a zone with Quenstedtoceasr 
may be approximately equivalent to the Quenstedtoceras lamberti Zone of Europe, 
the highest Callovian zone in the type section (Table 4). 

In the southern hemisphere some of the most characteristic European Cal- 
lovian genera do not exist, but the Callovian Stage can be recognized "by the 
general grade of evolution of the ammonite fauna as a whole and by a chain of 
overlapping correlations carried link by link round the world" (Arkell, 1956, 
P- 12). 

Time correlation from stage and substage homotaxis* In the statement just quoted, 
Arkell assumed (1) that the presence of the same guide ammonites at two 
localities provides sufficient evidence for synchronism, and (2) that local 
"overlaps" of provincial ammonite taxa are almost equally good evidence for 
synchronism. Similar assumptions are made by most, but not all, stratigraphic 
paleontologists. We must now consider whether the assumptions are justified. 

Possibilities other than synchronism are hard to formulate in a general and 
exhaustive way, especially because the data vary from horizon to horizon. 
With respect to the ammonite guides of the Lower and Middle Jurassic stages 
and substages, we shall assume that local facies variations have been accounted 
for at the zone level. Facies of provincial scope do not provide homotaxial 
problems. The possibilities for significant error at the substage level appear 



100 A. O. WOODFORD 

to be two: (1) difference in the time range of the substage guides in two or more 
districts or provinces, as by survival in a distant province after extinction in 
the homeland, or vice versa, and (2) misinterpretation of differences in details 
or rate of evolution in two provinces separated by a barrier. The questions at 
issue are the probability and magnitude of these sources of error. Every case 
must be treated on its own merits, although the cumulative effect of evidence 
for synchronism at horizon after horizon would be to establish a presumption 
favorable to synchronism for other cases. 

We shall take the Toarcian Stage of the Lower Jurassic as an example. 
Typical Toarcian faunas can be followed around the world in the northern 
hemisphere, from western Europe to the Donetz Basin of southern Russia, the 
Caucasus, Persia, Baluchistan, Indonesia, Indochina, Korea, Japan, Alaska, 
a Canadian Arctic island, eastern Greenland, and back to northwestern Europe 
(Arkell, 1956). Everywhere European guide genera are found and in many 
places European guide species. Grammoceras thouarsense is a guide fossil for a 
zone in the midst of the stage in the type section at Thouars, France. The same 
species is found in the same homotaxial position in the Toarcian of the Cau- 
casus. Other west European guides also occur in the Caucasus, in about the 
standard order, although the thick section has structural complexities and 
definitive studies have not yet been made. In Japan the Toarcian zones are 
almost the same as in western Europe, with typical European genera but 
peculiar Japanese zone species. In eastern Greenland the Upper Toarcian 
and a Lower Toarcian zone (No. 17) can be distinguished, both with guide 
species similar to those in Europe (Callomon, 1961). The Toarcian localities 
range in latitude from the equator (Indonesia) nearly to the North Pole (the 
Arctic island). The facies range from platform to thick geosynclinal with 
interbedded volcanics (Caucasus). In Japan some 1500 feet of Toarcian sand- 
stone and shale are known, and in the Caucasus 15,000 to 20,000 feet of sand- 
stone and shale, interbedded with freshwater strata containing coal. 

Let us imagine that the two successive Toarcian faunas that can be generally 
recognized (Lower and Upper) originated in northwestern Europe and mi- 
grated eastward, and only eastward, around the world, evolving slowly as 
they migrated, and that after circumnavigation the lower fauna had evolved 
into the upper. By the time the migrants reached Japan new species might 
well have developed. To this extent the hypothesis fits the evidence. But 
evidence for eastward migration ends with Japan. The Japanese species did 
not get to Alaska or Greenland. The somewhat scanty evidence suggests a 
different hypothesis, namely, migration both east and west from an evolu- 
tionary center that may have included both Tethys and the European plat- 
form, with development of local species in distant, more or less isolated areas, 
such as Japan, but with communication sufficiently complete and rapid to 
permit the earlier Toarcian fauna to be everywhere overwhelmed by the 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 101 

second soon after the second had become well characterized anywhere. This 
hypothesis explains the similar succession of Toarcian genera all around the 
world, in Japan as well as in Europe. That is to sa\, the evidence favors inter- 
pretation of the Toarcian homotaxis in Europe, Japan, etc., as evidence for 
the time correlation of the highly varied enclosing strata, substage by substage, 
or even in some places zone by zone. 

The Toarcian is a specially instructive stage, for one must work around the 
world with some care in order to find at all localities the same typical European 
Lower Toarcian genera. A more southern course from Europe to the Indian 
Ocean yields a somewhat different set of results for the Lower Toarcian. This 
route goes from the northwestern European Platform to Portugal and then 
jumps to Arabia, East Africa, and Madagascar, where, on the south side of 
Tethys, the peculiar Bouleiceras fauna, unlike anything in northwestern Europe, 
characterizes a province called Ethiopian by Arkell (1956, p. 614). In Portugal, 
Bouleiceras itself occurs in the same beds with northwestern European guides; 
this is the "overlap." The Ethiopian Lower Toarcian fauna has Oriental 
affinities that perhaps make possible correlations with Baluchistan and eastern 
Asia, but this correlation is not so well established as those on the northern 
route. One cannot assert positively that the Lower Toarcian of Arabia is the 
time equivalent of the Lower Toarcian of northwestern Europe, but one can 
say that this time correlation is more likely than any other. 

Upper Jurassic Provincialism 

Ammonite provincialism increases in the Upper Jurassic. Correlations in 
the lowest Upper Jurassic stage, the Oxfordian, are achieved in the same way 
as for the Callovian (Arkell, 1956, p. 12). Worldwide correlations are also 
possible for the lower part of the next higher stage, the Kimeridgian. In the 
remainder of the Upper Jurassic, however, three European provinces are only 
too well defined: northwestern European, Tethyan, and Russian- Arctic, or 
Boreal. The uppermost Jurassic faunas which are most satisfactory for world- 
wide homotaxis and time correlation are those of the Tithonian Stage of 
western Tethys (Gignoux, 1955, p. 354), with type localities in or near the 
French Alps. For these uppermost Jurassic levels, northwestern Europe cannot 
furnish a standard for the world. 

The Russian-Arctic faunas may reflect a cold-water facies, although some of 
the genera are known from widely separated parts of the great Pacific region. 
In some parts of this region ammonites are rare or absent and uppermost 
Jurassic-lowest Cretaceous correlations are made by using species of the oyster- 
like genus Aucella (also called Buchia). The shells of several species of Aucella 
are abundant in European Russia and California and are known in Mexico 
and New Zealand. 



102 A. O. WOODFORD 

The Upper Jurassic faunas of the Northwest European Province may repre- 
sent the alternation of cold-water and warm-water conditions. Northern 
ammonite genera appear in the Mediterranean at the base of the Oxfordian, 
and Upper Oxfordian coral reefs are present as far north as central England. 

Once the provinces become sharply defined, correlation between them be- 
comes difficult but not impossible. Worldwide Upper Jurassic correlations may- 
yet be achieved, but the present situation still makes impressive, by contrast, 
the well-established correlations of the Lower Jurassic and part of the Middle 
Jurassic. 

Top and Bottom of Jurassic 

Boundaries in type section. In southern England, the marine Jurassic forma- 
tions, with guide ammonites, form a natural unit, bounded above and below 
by beds transitional to nonmarine formations. The uppermost English Jurassic 
unit, the brackish and freshwater Purbeckian, without ammonites, is overlain 
by the continental Wealden beds of the Weald anticline, south of London, 
which are called Cretaceous. The basal transition beds, called the Rhaetic 
(or Rhaetian), are made up largely of shale and limestone containing pectens 
and other shallow marine mollusks, but also include the Rhaetic bone bed 
with its abundant remains of fish, amphibians, and reptiles. The Rhaetic has 
its type area in southern Germany and northern Tyrol; there, in the north- 
eastern Alps, it contains a few ammonites of Triassic aspect that justify its 
incorporation in that system. In both England and Germany the Rhaetic 
is overlain conformably by the Psiloceras planorbis Zone, zone 1 of the Jurassic. 

Extent of Planorbis %pne. The lowest Jurassic is recognizable as the Planorbis 
Zone throughout the northwest European platform area, and in England and 
France, it is divisible into two subzones. The Planorbis Zone has also been 
recognized in Sicily, western British Columbia (West Canada in Table 1), and 
Peru. Beds containing species of the guide genus Psiloceras, and hence probably 
at the approximate Planorbis Zone horizon, are also known in western Nevada, 
New Zealand, New Caledonia, and (from boulders) on Timor. In central 
Europe and Nevada, Planorbis strata overlie beds with characteristic upper- 
most Triassic ammonites. 

Precision of the base of the Jurassic. The base of the Planorbis Zone, lowest in 
the Jurassic, seems to be a fair example of a fossil-determined Mesozoic horizon 
that is recognizable in several continents. We shall make estimates of the prob- 
able precision of this horizon, in years and in percent of its age. We take the 
probable average span of a Jurassic zone as 750,000 years, as developed on a 
previous page. Judging by the ranges found for the zone guides on the European 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 103 

platform, the Jurassic guide species did not last longer than the time repre- 
sented by a European zone. If the Planorbis Zone took twice the average time 
for its deposition, that is, about 1.5 million years, the age of the base of the 
Jurassic, where the Planorbis Zone is present, probably does not vary by more 
than this length of time. Since 180 million years is a reasonable guess for the 
radiometric age of the base of the Jurassic (Holmes, 1960; Kulp, 1961), the 
base of the Planorbis Zone, wherever it is present, can be correlated, even from 
continent to continent, with a probable precision of one percent or better, 
even though this estimate is obviously not based on standard statistical pro- 
cedures. 



Triassic and Cretaceous Homotaxis and Correlations 

The Triassic and Cretaceous systems have been zoned, and the zones have 
been grouped into stages in about the same manner as was done for the Jurassic. 
Ammonites are the principal marine guide fossils. Homotaxis, supplemented 
by overlapping correlations, is worldwide for large parts of each system. The 
marine Cretaceous is considerably more widespread than the Jurassic, the 
marine Triassic considerably less. The type area for the Triassic is in the 
eastern Alps, where 6 stages have been established (Brinkmann, 1954, p. 175). 
The type sections for the 12 Cretaceous stages now commonly recognized are 
mostly in France, although some are just outside that country (Gignoux, 1955, 
pp. 392, 398; see also "Danian," below, under Cenozoic). In many regions 
the Upper Cretaceous contains few ammonites. Echinoids, forams, pelecypods, 
and gastropods must then take the ammonites' place, especially for local cor- 
relations. Study of the ammonite (and planktonic foraminiferal) faunas indi- 
cates that correlations to the substage level are generally justified, as in the 
Jurassic. 

Conclusions Concerning Mesozoic Stages 

As a summary of our consideration of Mesozoic stages and their ammonite 
faunas, the following statements may be made. 

1. Mesozoic stages are groupings of the rock sheets called zones, based 
on ammonite assemblages. 

2. Although zones are more or less local, Mesozoic stages and even 
substages are mostly worldwide, made so by step-by-step correlations of 
geographically changing ammonite assemblages. 

3. Mesozoic stages and substages are time-stratigraphic units: each 
stage or substage is composed of strata that accumulated at about the same 
time in all the places where the stage or substage has been properly identi- 
fied. 



104 A. O. WOODFORD 

This statement is vitally important, but it contains two ambiguous phrases, 
"about the same time" and "properly identified," which need to be reempha- 
sized. The second is easier to handle. A proper identification should involve 
the use of ammonites, whose stratigraphic range should be connected with the 
ranges of the guide ammonites in the pertinent European stages by methods 
indicated on previous pages. "About the same time" expresses confidence that 
there is little time overlap of the stages (or substages). For example, we think 
that practically all the marine Sinemurian of all regions was deposited before 
the accumulation of any ammonite-bearing strata anywhere that have been 
assigned to the Pliensbachian. The degree of our confidence and the reasons 
for it have been stated in such paragraphs as those on the European-Mexican 
Lower Jurassic homo taxis (compare Table 5). 

Paleozoic Guide Fossils and Correlations 

For the Paleozoic, no single group of animals has provided an adequate set 
of guide fossils. Goniatitic ammonoids are useful in the Upper Paleozoic, but 
they are less numerous and less widely distributed than their Mesozoic relatives. 
Goniatite zones have about the same significance as Mesozoic stages. Zones 
almost equally valuable may be established by using other organisms. Trilo- 
bites are outstanding for the Cambrian, graptolites for the geosynclinal facies 
of the Ordovician and Silurian, and fusuline forams in the Pennsylvanian and 
Permian. In the highly fossiliferous and widespread limestones and shales of 
the broad continental platforms, the most useful guide fossils, especially for 
relatively short-distance correlations, are brachiopods. 

Paleozoic subsystems and stages. Each Paleozoic system below the Carboniferous 
is divided into thirds, and these subsystems have worldwide correlative signi- 
ficance. Below the Devonian, stages or other worldwide units smaller than 
subsystems seem to be in uncertain status, at least temporarily. Recently, Bell 
(1960) and Berry (1961) have emphasized the difficulties of interprovincial 
stage correlations in the Cambrian and Ordovician. In the marine Devonian, 
useful stages have been established, with type areas in Belgium or the Rhine- 
land. Gignoux (1955, p. 120) gave the following stages, from the base up: 
Gedinnian and Coblencian in the Lower Devonian, Eifelian and Givetian in 
the Middle Devonian, Frasnian and Famennian in the Upper Devonian. 
Brinkmann (1954) gave a somewhat different list, with 9 stages. The Car- 
boniferous is divided into Lower (also called Dinantian or Mississippian, 
although these two terms are not synonymous; compare Brinkmann, 1954, 
opposite p. 106) and Upper (Pennsylvanian or Coal Measures). The Upper 
Carboniferous is divided into three stages designated, in ascending order, 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 105 

Namurian, Westphalian, and Stephanian, with the most satisfactory type sec- 
tions (probably even for the Stephanian) in Belgium, west central Germany, 
and central Russia because of the presence of marine bands there. Each stage 
has characteristic goniatites and the upper two have guide fusulines (Brink- 
mann, 1954, opposite p. 106). For the Permian, Brinkmann (1954, opposite 
p. 132) gave a composite set of five Old World stages, with guide ammonoids 
and fusulines From the base up, with the West Texas equivalent in paren- 
theses, Brinkmann's stages are Sakmara (Wolfcamp), Artinsk (Leonard), Sosio 
(Word), Basleo (Capitan), and Chideru (Ochoa). A composite set of stages is 
unsatisfactory, but the type Permian in European Russia is brackish to non- 
marine in its upper part. 

In North America, the whole Paleozoic has been provided with more or less 
independent local stages and other units (see C. O. Dunbar and others, 1942, 
1944, 1948, 1954, 1960), with American type sections or localities. 

Cenozoic Correlations 

The first problem connected with the Cenozoic is its definition, and the 
definition of its marine subdivisions, in the European type region. Preva- 
lent current practice seems to be to make the Danian of Denmark a part of the 
Cenozoic and put the top of the Mesozoic at the top of the Maestrichtian Stage 
in Holland and Denmark (Loeblich and Tappan, 1957, p. 1113; Bramlette 
and Sullivan, 1961, p. 136). Few if any worldwide marine Cenozoic stages are 
yet valid, although prospects are bright for success in the Paleogene, through 
the use of planktonic forams and nannoplankton (Loeblich and Tappan, 1957; 
Bolli, 1959; Bramlette and Sullivan, 1961). The Cenozoic series Paleocene, 
Eocene, Oligocene, Miocene, Pliocene, and Pleistocene are now well estab- 
lished, at least as names, although there is considerable variation in the number, 
terminology, and distribution of the stages that make up the series in the 
European type section (compare Brinkmann, 1954, p. 254, with Gignoux, 
1955, pp. 472 and 557). The base of the Miocene is put variously at the base 
of the Aquitanian, at the Burdigalian-Aquitanian boundary, and at the top 
of the Burdigalian. For Brinkmann it is sub-Aquitanian, for Gignoux sub- 
Burdigalian. Drooger (1954, 1956), within two years, dropped the base of the 
European Miocene from the top of the Burdigalian to the base of the Aquitanian. 
Overseas correlations are even less definite. Recently Eames and others (1962) 
suggested that the Vicksburg and certain other North American formations, 
commonly considered pre-Aquitanian Oligocene, should be raised to positions 
in the Miocene. In general, Cenozoic intercontinental marine correlations are 
exceptionally difficult. The difficulties are magnified if correlatipns involving 
nonmarine mammals are taken into account. 



106 A. O. WOODFORD 

Divisions of Geologic Time 

Systems and stages are divisions of the rocks. If we agree that the procedures 
by which sedimentary rocks all over the world are assigned to particular systems 
and subsystems, or even to stages and substages, are, at least in favorable cases, 
correlations of contemporaneous strata, we can make the transition from the 
stratigraphic division of the rocks to the division of geologic time. We can 
then recognize geologic periods and the primary subdivisions of the periods: 
Early Cambrian time, the time of deposition of the Lower Cambrian rocks; 
Middle Cambrian time, the time of deposition of the Middle Cambrian rocks; 
Late Cambrian time, the time of deposition of the Upper Cambrian rocks; etc. 
Some finer time subdivisions can also be made, especially in the Mesozoic. 
Callovian time was the time of deposition of the Callovian rocks; early Callo- 
vian time was the time of deposition of the Lower Callovian rocks. 

Most periods seem to have been between 40 and 70 million years long 
(compare Holmes, 1960; Kulp, 1961). Subperiods were therefore very roughly 
15-25 million years each. The Cambrian subperiods were probably longer; 
a Chinese Lower Cambrian fauna might have an age uncertainty of 35 million 
years from vagueness of correlation alone. The Mesozoic stages are more pre- 
cise. There are about 11 Jurassic stages and about 12 Cretaceous stages. If 
the Jurassic and Cretaceous periods were respectively 45 and 65 million years 
long (compare Holmes, 1960; Kulp, 1961), each Jurassic or Cretaceous stage 
represents, on the average, 4 or 5 million years. The earliest Jurassic stage, 
the Hettangian, which includes only three zones, may stand for a shorter time. 
Most Mesozoic substages are thirds or halves of stages and so may represent 
1.5 to 2.5 million years each. 

Lacunas and the Geologic Column 

Recognition and naming of lacunas. Each lacuna in the rock succession repre- 
sents a lapse of time. The time represented by the lacuna at 135.5 cm Peter- 
borough, between the Jason and Coronatum zones of the Middle Callovian, 
is part of Middle Callovian time. If, however, one wished to subdivide Middle 
Callovian time, should the separation be into two parts Jason time and 
Coronatum time or into three parts Jason time, lacuna time, and Corona- 
tum time? If one is considering a global time scale, this particular problem is 
unreal, because the European zonal stratigraphy cannot be extended through- 
out the world. But similar questions have been raised with regard to pairs of 
periods. Should intervals between periods be recognized? Moreover, if a 
large lacuna existed between the type Cambrian and Ordovician of Wales or 
in the more easily handled Cambro-Ordovicfan section in Scandinavia, should 
an American stratigrapher with a more complete section insert a new unit 
between Cambrian and Ordovician? This was in part what Ulrich tried to 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 107 

do with his Ozarkian System (Ulrich, 1911, p. 608). A consensus of opinion 
now seems to have developed with regard to lacuna fillings. Xew systems are 
not to be established. Stratigraphic units with lacuna-filling faunas are to be 
assimilated into the systems and subsystems of the long-established standard 
column. Just how to do this is a problem of adjustment or negotiation in each 
case. To take one example, the marine strata that seem to belong between the 
highest Russian marine Permian and the lowest Alpine marine Triassic are 
assigned to the Permian, not to the Triassic (Brinkmann, 1954, opposite p. 132). 
The question of "intervals" remains. Are there still any unfilled large 
lacunas? Unconformities marking lacunas on the continental platforms are 
no longer pertinent, now that basins near the margins of the platforms have 
been found to contain more continuous sections. Studies of surface and sub- 
surface sections in the basin areas have filled in most of the more obvious 
lacunas of the fossiliferous marine section. Transitions have been found from 
Precambrian to Cambrian (southeast California Nelson, 1962), from Permian 
to Triassic (Newell, 1962), and from Cretaceous to Tertiary (central California 
Payne, 1951; Schoellhamer and Kinney, 1953). It now seems probable that 
somewhere, on some continent or island, or beneath some small or moderate- 
sized sea, sedimentary strata exist that formed during the time represented by 
every paleontologically measurable lacuna in the European record. 

Found changes and lacunas. It should be noted that not every faunal change 
is proof of a paleontological lacuna. Even where the ecological facies are 
similar or identical and whole groups of animals disappear at one horizon, as 
do the ammonites and plesiosaurs at the Cretaceous-Tertiary boundary in 
California, the Stratigraphic and paleontological lacuna may be small. On the 
west side of the San Joaquin Valley (Schoellhamer and Kinney, 1953), the 
shales and sandstone of the Moreno formation are overlain with slight uncon- 
formity by the sandstones, mudstones, and claystones of the Lodo formation, 
which is glauconitic at the base, but the Cretaceous-Tertiary contact, deter- 
mined faunally, is in the Moreno formation more than 200 ft below the uncon- 
formity. The provincial Paleocene guide fossils Flabellum remondianum Gabb, a 
coral, and Brachysphingus sinuatus Gabb, a gastropod, were collected from an 
80-ft sandstone lens in the Moreno, and the top of the lens was about 200 ft 
below the Lodo contact. The Moreno shales, 600 ft or more below the sand- 
stone lens, contain Maestrichtian ammonites and several kinds of large Meso- 
zoic reptiles: plesiosaurs, a mosasaur, and the dinosaur Trachydon. No physical 
Stratigraphic break was found between the lowest Paleocene guide fossils and 
the highest Cretaceous guides. Regionally, the abundant marine forams of the 
highest Cretaceous strata are so similar to those of the lowest 'Paleocene that 
the assignment of some faunas to the Cretaceous or the Paleocene is somewhat 
uncertain (compare Goudkoff, 1945, p. 1004). 



108 A. O. WOODFORD 

Summary Discussion 

Biostratigraphic generalizations. Stratigraphic correlations through the use of 
guide fossils are based on repeated observations over a period of 100-150 years, 
with results so uniform that they may be summarized as empirical generaliza- 
tions: (1) The fossil species and genera in a single column vary from horizon 
to horizon. (2) Homotaxis occurs between columns. (3) Within a province, 
guide species useful in time correlation can be established for horizon after 
horizon, using the methods described in this paper in connection with the 
northwestern European Lower and Middle Jurassic zones. (4) More distant 
correlations, between provinces, can be made through step-by-step correlations, 
using gradually varying assemblages. Time correlations based on homotaxial 
evolutionary sequences will become more and more easily distinguishable from 
the misleading correlations of facies zones as more is learned about the evolu- 
tion and geologic history of the families involved. Most of the older studies on 
ammonite groups were weakened by the use of the now discredited biogenetic 
law: ontogeny recapitulates phylogeny. The kind of study needed is illustrated 
by Brinkmann's work on the Kosmoceratidae, although that work now deserves 
the compliment of restudy and revision. The extension of such work will be 
difficult because so few families have their Peterboroughs. 

Correlations based on the appearance or disappearance of major groups, 
such as trilobites, ammonites, or mammals, are inherently unsafe (Huxley, 
1870). Consider, for example, the absurdity of a correlation based on the first 
appearance of eutherian mammals in North America and Australia. This rule 
does not prevent an ammonite species or genus from being a sound guide to 
the uppermost Cretaceous. 

In favorable circumstances, such as those that prevail for the northwest 
European Lower and Middle Jurassic, time correlations within a province may 
be very precise. For significant comparisons with radiometric ages, however, 
more nearly worldwide interprovincial correlations must be considered. The 
precision of interprovincial correlations varies from one part of the geologic 
column to another. In the Jurassic and Cretaceous a time correlation based on 
numerous well-preserved specimens of ammonite guide species can hardly be 
in error by more than one substage, perhaps =fc2 million years. The base of 
the fossiliferous Lower Cambrian, on the other hand, may vary in age by tens 
of millions of years. 

Stratigraphy and time. Geologic stages and systems are second-order units and 
geologic periods are, in a way, third-order units. Stratigraphy began with the 
local columns of one region, from which the generalized column of stages and 
systems has been chiefly derived. The standard time scale is derived directly 
from the standard column and from no other source, except for Late Pleistocene 
details. The fossils of the units in the standard column and of other units in 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 109 

other columns are still our principal guides in stratigraphic correlation, al- 
though we cordially welcome the statistical calibration of the standard column, 
in years, from radiometric data. 



REFERENCES CITED 

ARKELL, W. J., 1947, The geology of the country around Weymouth, Swanage, Corfe, 

and Lulworth: Great Britain, Geol. Survey Mem., 386 pp. 

, 1956, Jurassic geology of the world: Edinburgh, Oliver and Boyd, 806 pp. 

BANDY, O. L., 1953, Ecology and paleoecology of some California foraminifcra: J. Pale- 

ont., vol. 27, pp. 161-182, 200-203. 

BELL, W. C., 1960, Cambrian, in McGraw-Hill Encyc. Sci. Techn.: New York, McGraw- 
Hill, pp. 424-427. 
BENTZ, A., 1928, Uber Strenoceraten und Garantianen insbesondere aus dem mittleren 

Dogger von Bielefeld: Jahrb. Preuss. geol. Landesanst., pp. 138-206. 
BERRY, W. B. N., 1961, Chorology, chronology, and correlation: Geol. Soc. Am., pro- 
gram Ann. Mtg., pp. 10A-11A. 
BOLLI, H. M., 1959, Planktonic foraminifera as index fossils in Trinidad, West Indies 

and their value for worldwide stratigraphic correlation: Eclogae Geol. Helvetiae, 

vol. 52, pp. 627-637. 
BRAMLETTE, M. N., and SULLIVAN, F. R., 1961, Coccolithophorids and related nanno- 

plankton of the early Tertiary in California: Micropaleont., vol. 7, pp. 129-188. 
BRINKMANN, R., 1929, Statistisch-biostratigraphische Untersuchungen an mitteljuras- 

sischen Ammoniten uber ArtbegrifF und Stammesentwicklung: Abh. Ges. Wiss. 

Gottingen, N. F., vol. 13, no. 3 3 249 pp. 

, 1954, Abriss der Geologic: Stuttgart, Enke, 2 vols. 

BUCKMAN, S. S., 1901, Bajocian and contiguous deposits in the North Cotteswolds: The 

Main Hill-mass: Geol. Soc. London, Quart. J., vol. 57, pp. 126-155. 
BURCH, J. Q., ed., 1945-1946, Distributional list of the West American marine mollusks 

from San Diego, California, to the Polar Sea: Conch. Club Sou. Calif. Minutes 

nos. 45-63, separately paged. 
CALLOMON, J. H., 1955, The ammonite succession in the lower Oxford Clay and Kella- 

ways Beds at Kidlington, Oxfordshire, and the zones of the Callovian Stage: Roy. 

Soc. London, Phil. Tr., s. B., vol. 239, pp. 215-264. 
, 1961, The Jurassic System in East Greenland, in Geology of the Arctic, G. O. 

Raasch, ed.: Toronto, Univ. Toronto Press, vol. 1, pp. 258-268. 
DEAN, W. T., DONOVAN, D. T., and HOWARTH, M. K., 1961, The Liassic ammonite 

zones and subzones of the North-West European Province: British Mus. (Nat. Hist.), 

B., Geol., vol. 4, no. 10, pp. 437-505. 
DROOGER, C. W., 1954, The Oligocene-Miocene boundary on both sides of the Atlantic: 

Geol. Mag., vol. 91, pp. 514-518. 
, 1956, Transatlantic correlation of the Oligo-Miocene by means of foraminifera: 

Micropaleont., vol. 2, pp. 183-192. 



110 A. O. \VOODFORD 

DUNBAR, C. O., chm., 1942-1960, Correlation charts prepared by the Committee on 

Stratigraphy of the National Research Council: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 53, pp. 

429-433; Cambrian, vol. 55 (1944), pp. 993-1003; Ordovician, vol. 65 (1954), pp. 

247-298; Silurian, vol. 53 (1942), pp. 533-538; Devonian, vol. 53 (1942), pp. 1729- 

1793; Mississippian, vol. 59 (1948), pp. 91-196; Pennsylvanian, vol. 55 (1944), pp. 

657-706; Permian, vol. 71 (1960), pp. 1763-1805. 
EAMES, F. E., BANNER, F. T., BLOW, W. H., CLARKE, W. J., and Cox, L. R., 1962, 

Fundamentals of mid-Tertiary stratigraphical correlation: Cambridge, Eng., Cam- 
bridge Univ. Press, 163 pp. 
ELTON, C. S., 1958, The ecology of invasions by animals and plants: London, Methuen, 

181 pp. 
ERBEN, H. K., 1956, El Jurasico inferior de Mexico y sus amonitas: XX Int. Geol. 

Congress, Mexico, 393 pp. 
GIGNOUX, M., (1950) 1955, Stratigraphic geology (trans, by G. G. Woodford): San 

Francisco, Freeman, 682 pp. 
GOUDKOFF, P. P., 1945, Stratigraphic relations of Upper Cretaceous in Great Valley, 

California: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., B., vol. 29, pp. 956-1007. 
HOLMES, A., 1960, A revised geological time-scale: Edinburgh Geol. Soc. Tr., vol. 17, 

pp. 183-216. 
HUXLEY, T. H., 1862, The anniversary address: Geol. Soc. London, Quart. J., vol. 18, 

pp. xl-liv. 
, 1870, Anniversary address: Geol. Soc. London, Quart. J., vol. 26, pp. xxix- 

Ixiv. 
IHLAY, R. W., 1953, Callovian (Jurassic) ammonites from the United States and Alaska: 

U.S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 249, 108 pp. 
KEEN, A. M., 1958, Sea shells of tropical West America: Stanford, Calif., Stanford Univ. 

Press, 624 pp. 

KULP, J. L., 1961, Geologic time scale: Science, vol. 133, pp. 1105-1114. 
LOEBUCH, A. R. 5 and TAPPAN, H., 1957, Correlation of the Gulf and Atlantic Coastal 

Plain Paleocene and Lower Eocene formations by means of planktonic foraminifera: 

J. Paleont., vol. 31, pp. 1109-1137. 
MODEL, R., and MODEL, E., 1938, Die Lamberti-Schichten von Trockau in Ober- 

franken: Jahrb. preuss. geol. Landesanstalt, vol. 58, pp. 631-665. 
NATLAND, M. L., 1933, The temperature- and depth-distribution of some recent and 

fossil foraminifera in the southern California region: Scripps Inst. Oceanog., B., 

Tech. Ser., vol. 3, pp. 225-230. 
, 1957, Paleoecology of West Coast Tertiary sediments: Geol. Soc. Am., Mem. 

67, vol. 2, pp. 543-572. 

NELSON, C. A., 1962, Lower Cambrian-Precambrian succession, White-Inyo Moun- 
tains, California: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 73, pp. 139-144. 
NEWELL, N. D., 1962, Paleontological gaps and geochronology: J. Paleont., vol. 36, 

pp. 592-610. 
OPPEL, A., 1856-1858, Die Juraformation Englands, Frankreichs, urid des siidwest- 

lichen Deutschlands: Stuttgart, Ebner and Seubert, 857 pp. 
D'ORBIGNY, A. D., 1842-1851 (1850-1860), Paleontologie fran$aise: terrains juras- 

siques, cephalopodes: Paris, 642 pp. 



CORRELATION BY FOSSILS 111 

PAYNE, M. B., 1951, Type Moreno Formation and overlying Eocene strata on the west 
side of the San Joaquin Valley, Fresno and Merced counties, California: California 
Div. Mines, Spec. Rept. 9, 29 pp. 

RANGHEARD, Y., and THEOBALD, N., 1961, Nouveaux gisements fossiliferes dans le Cal- 
lovien moyen et superior de Besangon-Palente: Univ. Besangon Ann. Sci., 2me ser., 
Geol., Fasc. 15, pp. 3-7. 

SCHENCK, H. G., and KEEN, A. M., 1936, Marine molluscan provinces of western North 
America: Am. Phil. Soc. Pr., vol. 76, pp. 921-938. 

SCHOELLHAMER, J. E., and KINNEY, D. M., 1953, Geology of portions of Tumey and 
Panoche Hills, Fresno County, California: U.S. Geol. Survey Oil and Gas Inv. Map 
128. 

SCOTT, G., 1940, Paleoecological factors controlling the distribution and mode of life 
of Cretaceous ammonoids in the Texas area: J. Paleont., vol. 14, pp. 299-323. 

SMITH, W., 1815, A memoir to the map and delineation of the strata of England and 
Wales, with part of Scotland: London, J. Gary, 51 pp. 

, 1816, Strata identified by organized fossils: London, W. Arding, 32 pp. 

SPATH, L. F., 1933, The evolution of the Cephalopoda: Biol. Rev., vol. 8, pp. 418-462. 

STENO, N., 1669, De solido intra solidum naturaliter contento dissertationis prodromus: 
Florence, 78 pp. 

THEOBALD, N., 1957, Documents nouveaux sur I'extension des difierentes zones a am- 
monites d'age callovien dans le Jura septentrional: Univ. Besangon Ann. Sci., 2me 
ser., Gol., Fasc. 7, pp. 21-40. 

ULRIGH, E. O., 1911, Revision of the Paleozoic systems: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 22, 
pp. 281-680. 

WESTERMANN, G., 1954, Monographic der Otoitidae (Ammonoidea): Beihefte z. geol. 
Jahrb. (Hannover), no. 15, 364 pp. 

WOODRING, W. P., BRAMLETTE, M. N., and KEW, W. S. W., 1946, Geology and paleon- 
tology of Palos Verdes Hills, CaUfornia: U.S. Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 207, 145 pp. 



DONALD B. McINTYRE 

Pomona College 



Precision and Resolution 
in Geochronometry 



There are probably compensating errors, and the resulting age determination 
will be very useful to geologists z/, for instance, we could say that 9 times out 
of 70 the age is x =t y million years. (Larsen, Keevil, and Harrisori, 
1952, p. 1046) 

Formerly it was the custom to distinguish between the so-called exact and 
inexact sciences, an exact science being one which admitted, or perhaps we 
should say whose practitioners claimed, absolute precision. Nowadays we are 
more cautious, and most scientists are well aware that absolute precision can 
be hoped for only when our measuring devices are being used far from their 
limits. In other words, whether we are determining chemical composition, 
stratigraphic thickness, or the age of a rock, it is common to find that if we 
make replicate readings they will not be identical. Recognizing this, authors 
often follow the report of a measurement by a plus-or-minus quantity which is 
intended to indicate, in some manner, the degree of confidence which is to be 
placed in the value given. Unfortunately, the reader is not always informed 
what the basis for the plus-or-minus quantity is and what confidence is to be 
assigned to it, and to provide the figure in such cases is obviously an empty 
gesture. 

In this essay the degree of reproducibility is referred to as precision; this is 
not to be confused with accuracy which is the approach to a hypothetical "true" 
value. We will assume that accuracy (or bias) is dependent upon systematic 
errors, such as faulty adjustment of instruments or the use of incorrect constants, 
whereas precision is determined by numerous small and independent random 
errors. * Discussion of the existence and possible magnitude of systematic errors 
and of gross errors lies beyond the scope of this essay. 

1 The implied hypothesis of normal distribution may be questioned, but until we are 
given data demonstrating how the distribution departs from the normal, we have no 
satisfactory alternative but to accept it. 

112 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHRONOMETRY 113 

Geology is rapidly becoming quantitative and it seems worth while to draw 
attention to the importance of presenting data so that the precision of measure- 
ment is clear, for it is this precision that determines the resolving power and 
hence, in large measure, the utility of the method. Although the topic is rele- 
vant to any measurements, geochronometry happens to present convenient 
examples. It is not the writer's purpose, however, to review the relative merits 
of different methods of age dating. The two methods which are discussed, 
potassium-argon and lead-alpha, were chosen as illustrations because they have 
yielded the majority of dates on the Mesozoic batholithic rocks of western 
North America. The writer is not a practitioner of geochronometry; his quali- 
fications are those of most members of the geological fraternity, for we have 
all been addressed on this subject through our professional literature, and it is 
our responsibility to draw conclusions from the information published. 

In 1960 this essay was sent to many who are active in geochronometry, and 
the writer is grateful for the replies and comments which he has received. In 
the meantime considerable advances have been made in isotopic studies, and 
some doubt has been expressed regarding the accuracy of the lead-alpha 
method. Nevertheless, because the purpose of the essay is to encourage other 
readers to draw their own conclusions from any data presented to them, it 
does not seem necessary to substitute other examples for those originally 
included. 

Since Rutherford's suggestion, in 1905, that the accumulation of decay 
products in radioactive minerals might provide a means of measuring geological 
time, great numbers of minerals and rocks have been "dated." Indeed, the 
rate of output of new "dates" is now so high that it is difficult for evaluation 
to keep abreast of production. Many geologists have all but given up the 
attempt and are ready to accept without question any age correlation or dis- 
tinction made by such methods. 

A date quoted for a rock is no better than its precision; hence readers are 
entitled to expect every author to pass on, in unambiguous terms, his best 
quantitative evaluation of this date. Because the precision of the age is a func- 
tion of the precisions of each variable entering into the computation, we must 
begin by analyzing the random errors in each of these variables. 

Precision of the Lead-Alpha Method 

"A mineral to be usable for determining the age of rocks by this method 
should have only radiogenic lead, should have lost no lead, should have only 
primary radioactive elements, and should have lost none of them." (Larsen 
ft al., 1952, p. 1046) The ionic radius of Pb 2+ (1.32 A) is very close to that of 
K+ (1.33) and very different from that of Zr 4 + (0.87); hence it is reasonable 
to suppose that primary lead will be preferentially captured (Goldschmidt, 



114 



DONALD B. McINTYRE 



TABLE 1 

TWENTY-FIVE REPLICATE DETERMINATIONS OF PB IN SAMPLE 

CONTAINING 30 PPM 
ANALYSES BY C. L. WARING AND H. WORTHING (1953) 



Observation number 


Pb, ppm 


* 2 * 


i 


x* 




1 


31 


961 


2 


30 


900 


3 


33 


1089 


4 


30 


900 


B 


34 


. 


B 


30 


. 


. 


29 


. 




30 






28 






28 






28 






29 






30 






30 






32 






28 






31 




. 


30 


. 


. 


35 


. 


. 


32 


m 


21 


30 


900 


22 


29 


841 


23 


30 


900 


24 


31 


961 


25 


32 


1024 


n 25 


Et-i x, = 760 


Z?-i ^* = 23184 


r 5 * r Y^ ft f^T Vl 


3.33, 


n( 1)L '^ vi-V J - 


1_ 


J = - r = 30.4, 


^ = 1.82 ppm or 1.82 X 100/30.4 = 6.0%. 



* In practice the figures in column i and x* are not recorded, for only the totals are 
used and these are obtained on a desk calculator as by-products of entering the values *,-. 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHRONOMETRY 115 

1944; Gottfried, et aL, 1959) in orthoclase, whereas any lead found in zircon 
is likely to be radiogenic from a U 44 " (1.05) or Th 4+ (1.10) parent. Isotopic 
analyses confirm that the proportion of primary lead in zircon is often small 
(Gottfried, et aL, 1959, Table 14), although there are notable exceptions. On 
the assumption that the mineral has had a history which makes the method a 
valid one, it is necessary to determine (a) the radioactivity, by means of an 
alpha counter, (b) the thorium/uranium ratio, which for accessory zircons is 
usually considered known from earlier work, and (c) the amount of lead by 
spectrographic analysis. 

Precision of lead determination. In the application of the method to zircon 
concentrates from Mesozoic rocks, it is necessary to determine the lead content 
when it ranges from 1.8-180 ppm (Larsen, et aL, 1958). In order to estimate 
the precision of the lead determinations, Waring and Worthing (1953) made 
25 replicate measurements (reproduced in Table 1) on a sample known to 
contain 30 ppm lead in a silica base. We consider these 25 measurements as a 
sample (size n = 25) which is representative of the population of all possible 
measurements. Each individual measurement is termed a variate, x^ i = 1, 
. . . , n; and the statistics of the sample are: 

I 

the mean, x = - Yj * = 30.4 ppm, 
n ~r. 

2 1 ^~* / \ 2 * F ^ 2 /^ \2 I 

the variance, s = T >, (*i x) = -7 TT n^x (2*x) \, 

n - 1 J n(n - 1)L J 

and the standard deviation, s = 1.82 ppm or 6.0%. 2 

These definitions are in forms suitable for use with a desk calculator on which 
the sums of x* and of x can be accumulated simultaneously. They give the 
best estimates of the parameters* of the population from which the sample has 
been drawn. From the table prepared by Eleanor G. Crow (in Crow, et aL, 1 960, 
Table 8), the standard deviation of the population is a = 4.9-7.9% with 
90% confidence or 4.7-8.4% with 95% confidence. This gives a meaningful 
measure of the precision of the method. 



2 WQs/x is the coefficient of variation. It is often denoted by C, but here we will use 
simply j%, and, by analogy, <r%. The transformation is justified if s is proportional to *; 
in some of the examples this may not be the case. 

8 It is convenient to use italic letters, such as x and s, for the statistics of a sample and 
to use Greek letters, such as /* and <r, for the parameters of a population. In practice 
we are interested in the statistics only as estimates of the parameters. 



116 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

In 1959, Gottfried, JafTe, and Senftle (1959, Table 8) presented a table 
showing how the precision of the lead determination (at confidence level of 
90^) varies with the amount of lead present. If the percentage standard 
deviation is plotted on semilog paper against the geometric mid-points of the 
lead ranges given by these authors, we may estimate 4 the precision of all lead 
determinations on zircons published in U. S. Geol. Survey B. 1070-B (Larsen, 
et a/., 1958, Tables 5-11). The mean value of the standard deviations estimated 
in this way is 10%. However, many of the lead-alpha dates on rocks of the 
Mesozoic batholiths were determined on the basis of average values of several 
lead determinations. In these cases the precision is that of the mean, 
cr = CV/X/H, where n is the number of replicate determinations included in 
the mean. The mean value of all the standard deviations estimated in this 
manner is 8.8%. 

An independent evaluation of the precision of the lead determinations can 
be obtained from an analysis of the duplicate results themselves. A pooled 
estimate of the mean precision of the individual lead determinations, i.e., a 
mean value giving increased weight to larger values of j and of n was computed 
as s p where A" is the number of samples on which replicate determinations were 
made and 

= Zf-i ( - D4 = 



Hence we estimate (7 = 9.4-13.6% with 90% confidence. This is consistent 
with the value of 10% obtained above on the basis of the application of Gott- 
fried, Jaffe and Senftle's Table 8 (1959) to the data in U. S. Geol. Survey B. 
1070-B, Tables 5-11. We therefore adopts = 9-13% as a tentative 5 measure 
of the precision of lead determinations for the evaluation of the dares obtained 
on the Mesozoic batholithic rocks of western North America. That this value 
is reasonable is further borne out by the fact that replicate analyses of lead in 
accessory zircons from eastern Massachusetts granites (Webber, et al., 1956, 
Table 2) yield a pooled estimate of <r = 9.2-12.0% with 90% confidence 
(see Table 2). 



4 The interpretation of Table 8 of Gottfried, et d. (1959) is ambiguous, but the writer 
believes that any other method of plotting will give higher values for <r. He has assumed 
that 1.645<r = precision at 90% confidence. 

5 Since this essay was written, the work of Rose and Stern has suggested that a better 
precision (<6%) may be obtained; but whether the values published in U. S. Geol. 
Survey B. 1070-B justify this higher confidence is another matter. This illustrates one 
of the difficulties faced by the reader who wishes to evaluate published dates. 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHRONOMETRY 



TABLE 2 



117 



ANALYSIS OF REPLICATE LEAD DETERMINATIONS ON ACCESSORY ZIRCONS 

FROM EASTERN MASSACHUSETTS GRANITES 
BASED ON DATA IN WEBBER, HURLEY, AND FAIRBAIRN, 1956 



n 


Pb, ppm 


s, ppm 


s% 


n 


Pb, ppm 


s, ppm 


*% 


6 


46.5 


2.6 


5.6 


6 


68.3 


8.6 


12.6 


6 


21.3 


1.0 


4.9 


3 


73.0 


2.0 


2.7 


6 


19.2 


1.9 


10.1 


4 


70.2 


3.3 


4.7 


3 


141.0 


20.4 


14.5 


2 


89.5 


0.7 


0.8 


6 


85.8 


2.7 


3.2 


3 


77.0 


5.0 


6.5 


2 


58.0 


18.4 


31.7 


3 


117.0 


6.1 


5.2 


6 


37.2 


6.4 


17.3 


3 


116.3 


14.8 


12.7 


4 


28.0 


0.8 


2.9 


5 


81.8 


10.1 


12.3 


4 


46.8 


2.1 


4.4 


3 


75.3 


3.8 


5.0 


3 


76.3 


9.7 


12.7 


5 


65.6 


7.4 


11.3 


3 


56.3 


7.5 


13.3 


3 


55.0 


5.3 


9.6 


7 


71.4 


8.7 


12.2 


3 


66.0 


1.7 


2.6 




2> 


1) = 75 




V (* 1 > -2 
2^(n i)sr 


8111.5 





8111.5 
75 



108.15 



Hence s p = 10.4%, and<7 = 9.2-12.0% with 90% confidence. 



Precision of Th/U ratio. Because the decay constants of thorium and uranium 
differ, it is necessary to know the Th/U ratio in a mineral which is to be dated 
by the lead-alpha method. Most of the dates obtained by Larsen and his 
associates on the batholithic rocks of western North America were based on 
accessory zircon, and it is this case which is treated here. The available data 
on the Th/U ratio in accessory zircon have been summarized by Gottfried, 
Jaffe, and Senftle (1959, Table 1). It is interesting to note the following points: 
(a) none of the data were published prior to 1957, (b) only 13 "localities" are 
represented, (c) the Mesozoic batholithic rocks of western North America are 
not included, (d) a considerable variety of analytical methods were employed 
providing accuracies said to vary from 1% to =b20%, (e) at only seven of 
the "localities" were measurements made on more than one sample, and hence 
these are the only ones for which a* can be estimated, and (f ) the number of 
samples, the range, and the average are given for these seven localities, but s is 
not given. 

Because complete data are not available for calculation of j, we have to 
estimate it from the range (see Crow, et a/., 1960, Table 12). In four cases it is 



118 



DONALD B. McINTYRE 



TABLE 3 

Th/U RATIOS IN ACCESSORY ZIRCONS 



Number of samples. Range, Mean value. Estimate of 
it, w Th/U-*, * 



2 90% confidence 
*. limits for <r< 



1 




0.8 








22 


2.2 


1.2 


0.59 


7.31 




1 




1.2 








21 


2.3 


0.9 


0.62 


7.68 


0.37-0.62* 


24 
10 


0.8 
0.2 


0.5 
0.2 


0.21 
0.07 


1.01 
0.04 


0.16-0.26f 
0.06-0.14f 


1 




0.3 








9 


2.4 


1.2 


0.81 


5.25 


0.58-1.38J 


1 




0.4 








1 




0.5 








4 


0.32 


0.3 


0.16 


0.08 




2 


0.24 


0.4 


0.21 


0.04 




1 




1.1 









!> = 98, where 

HI > 1, !> = 92, 

and .V =* 7. 

Pooled mean for Th/U - 0.78 



21.41 



Pooled estimate s% = 
Total range = 2.7; 



21 41 
' 



; hence J P = 0.50, andcr = 0.44-0.57 \vith 90% confidence 
98; hence standard deviation can be estimated as 0.54 



Columns 1 through 3 of this table computed from Gottfried, et al. (1959), Table 1. 

* Figures computed from the data of H. Holland (in Gottfried, et al., 1959). 
f Figures computed from Hurley and Fairbairn (1957). 

* Figures computed from Lyons, tt a/. (1957). 

possible to refer to the original data, and for these the writer has computed 
90^-confidence limits for cr (see Table 3). In each case the values of standard 
deviation computed from the range fall within these limits. The pooled mean 
for Th/U is 0.78 and the unweighted mean is 0.69. These figures do not accord 
very closely with the claim that: "At present it seems reasonable to assign a 
thorium-uranium ratio of 1 for the average accessory zircon." (Gottfried, 
et aL, 1959, p. 12) If the wrong ratio has been used, it is quite possible that this 
would produce a systematic error only, and that the relative ages of the rocks 
of a single province might not be affected. However, it is obvious from Table 3 
that even within a single province the Th/U ratio in accessory zircon can vary 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOGHROXOMETRY 119 

considerably. Thus, the variability of Th/U must be estimated, for it will 
affect the precision of the date. Because 2.7 is the total range of all 98 values 
on which Table 3 is based, we can estimate the standard deviation as 0.54. 
This agrees with the pooled estimate of the standard deviation, s = 0.50, 
giving a- = 0.44-0.57 with 90% confidence. 

Now, the Th/U ratio enters into the age computation by way of the factor c , 
where 

_ 2632 + 624 Th/U 
*~~ 1 +0.312 Th/U " 

(See Gottfried, et a/., 1959, Fig. 1.) We have determined that the mean value 
of Th/U is about 0.78 and that the standard deviation of the possible values 
for this ratio is likely to be about 0.50. Hence a Th U range of <7 would be 
0.28-1.28, giving a range of 2581 through 2452 for c. Hence or for factor c can 
be estimated as about 2.6%, or approximately 3%. 

Precision of alpha measurement. The radioactivity is measured by the ion- 
chamber method and is given as the number of alpha counts per milligram 
per hour. Gottfried, Jaffe, and Senftle (1959, p. 22) report: "... the activity 
determined by counting methods agrees on the average within 5 percent with 
the alpha activity calculated from the thorium and uranium content ... In 
general, the interlaboratory checks agree within 5 percent. From these checks, 
and also from the alpha-counting experience in this and other laboratories, 
the alpha-counting data probably are accurate to within 5 percent.* 5 Lyons, 
et aL, (1957, p. 528) have recorded their precision in the statement: "Duplicate 
measurements of alpha activity on the same sample are reproducible to within 
5% of the measured value. 95 Webber, Hurley, and Fairbairn (1956, Table 3) 
have given figures for "standard-deviation precision error based on replicate 
alpha counts 55 ; their data as published yield a mean value, 5%, of 7.8 with 
cr = 6.4-10.1% with 90% confidence. Our conclusion must therefore be 
vague, with <r for alpha determination surely somewhere in the range from 
3-10%. 

Resulting precision of age determination. If the age is less than 200 million years 
(m. y.), it is determined from the equation t = (c - Pb)/a, where t is the age 
in millions of years, c is the factor depending upon the Th/U ratio, Pb is the 
lead content in parts per million, and a is the radioactivity in alpha counts 
per milligram per hour. If the partial errors in / due to given errors in c, Pb, 
and a are E C9 pb and E a respectively, then the total error in / is E t = E c + 
Efb + * In practice we know only the probability distributions of these 
partial errors and not their actual values. Thus, although it is true that the 
total error is the sum of the partial errors, the parameters of the probability 



120 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

distribution of t cannot be obtained by summation of the parameters of the 
probability distributions of the individual variates: i.e., <r t 7* <r c + 0"Pb + 0"*- 
When we make an age determination, what we do in effect is to pick at random 
the magnitudes of the errors in c, Pb, and a and then add their effects. 
Assuming that there is no correlation between E c , Epb, and a , i e., that there 
is no reason to expect a particularly large error in c to occur along with a 
particularly large error in Pb or in a, then we have of = <r? + <Tpb + <r. 6 
(If this assumption is not correct then the correlation coefficients must be 
determined and used to derive of.) As a consequence of this relationship, 
if <rpb is considerably greater than a c or <r a , as may be the case, then ff t will be 
only a little larger than o-pb- Using the best estimates which we have derived 
above, we obtain 

(Tp b - 9-13%, <r a ~ 3-10%, (T C ~ 3%. 

Hence, the predicted precision of dates on the Mesozoic batholithic rocks by 
the lead-alpha method is a ~ 10.0-16.7%, or about 9.8-13.6% if allowance 
is made for the replicate determinations of lead. 

The observed precisions (based on Larsen, et at., 1958, Table 12) are as 
follows: 



s% 90%-confidence limits 



35 


Mexico and Southern California 


10.3 


8.6-12.9 


15 


Sierra Nevada 


10.8 


8.3-15.7 


16 7 


Idaho 


11.1 


8.6-16.0 


16 


Coast Range 


12.4 


9.6-17.8 


82 


All 82 specimens taken together 


11.2 


9.9-12.9 



We conclude that (a) the observed and predicted precisions are the same, 
within the limits imposed by the data available to us, and (b) all 82 specimens 
from the Mesozoic batholiths of western North America have the same age, 
within the limits of the method. 

In their work on the accessory zircon from the eastern Massachusetts gran- 
ites, Webber, Hurley, and Fairbairn (1956, Table 4) state "standard deviation 
precision errors" for the ages determined. From their data we estimate <r = 
7.7-12.3% with 90% confidence. 



6 One reason for the common use of standard deviations is that their units can be those 
of the original observations. But in practice there are advantages when variances are 
employed; the additivity referred to here is one of these. 

7 Incorrectly given in loc. ciL 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHRONOMETRY 121 

The Potassium-Argon Method 

The potassium-argon method is based on the assumption that all potassium 
in nature contains the same percentage of radioactive K 40 and, further, that 
the mineral to be dated has neither gained nor lost any potassium or any 
radiogenic A 40 since its crystallization. The method and the history of its 
development have been outlined by Carr and Kulp (1957) and by Lipson 
(1958), and possible sources of systematic error have been discussed by Curtis, 
Evernden and Lipson (1958), Curtis and Reynolds (1958), and by Centner 
and Kley (1958). 

The source of the greatest practical difficulty which is encountered in this 
method is that 99.6% of atmospheric argon is A 40 , identical with the minute 
amount of radiogenic argon which has to be extracted from the mineral and 
measured. Hence the A 38 and A 36 , together forming only 0.4% of atmospheric 
argon, provide the only means by which the amount of contamination by 
atmospheric argon can be determined. In practice a "spike 55 of pure A 38 is 
added to the sample as an isotopic tracer and the A 40 / A 38 and A 38 / A 36 
ratios are each measured on the mass spectrometer. 

Total potassium is usually determined by flame photometry and the amount 
of K 40 is then computed using 0.000119 as the atom fraction of K 40 in potas- 
sium and 39.100 as the atomic weight. 

Precision of radiogenic A 40 /K 40 ratio. The writer has found great difficulty 
in discovering just what some authors mean in their statements regarding 
precision. Some use standard deviation or probable error explicitly (cr = 
1.4826 X PE), but others refer vaguely to "maximum error," do not dis- 
tinguish clearly between precision and accuracy, or make statements such as 
"duplicate measurements are usually reproducible to within /?%." Frequently 
even the number of determinations and the range are not stated. In many 
instances it is obvious that the authors had data from which useful measures 
of the precision could have been obtained. By not sharing them with their 
readers, they have diminished the value of their work, for confident inferences 
cannot be drawn unless the precision is known. 

An explicit statement regarding precision has been given by Lipson (1958, 
p. 144): 

The A 40 /K. 40 ratio may now be computed with a probable error of from 
5 percent to 7 percent, depending upon the percentage of atmospheric argon 
in the sample. The total probable error arises from a probable error of 
3 percent in the potassium determination and a probable error of 4 percent 
in the radiogenic argon determination exclusive of error in the atmospheric 
argon correction. The error in the determination of the A 36 /A 40 abundance 
ratio is taken to be 3 percent, but the effect of this error on the radiogenic 



122 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

argon determination varies with the percentage of atmospheric argon. If 
we let 

e = the percentage error in A 36 /A 40 , 
/ = percentage of atmospheric argon in the sample, 
E = the percentage error in the radiogenic argon due to the error in 
A 36 /A 40 , 

then 



Applying this equation by using the percentages of atmospheric argon which 
are tabulated for each sample, the total probable error can be calculated. 

If the percentage of atmospheric argon rises above 50, then, as a consequence 
of the relationship cited, the error in A? 'K 40 increases very rapidly. Unfor- 
tunately, the percentage of atmospheric argon is not always stated, and not 
infrequently, it is impossible to tell whether this error has been included in 
the precision given for A 40 ' K 40 . Centner, Jensen, and Mehnert (1954) report 
10-1 5% of atmospheric argon in the determination of a feldspar from a pegma- 
tite in the Black Forest. Such a percentage gives an error of only or = 0.5-0.8% 
in the A 40 , K 40 ratio. On the other hand, for the 10 New Zealand glauconites 
dated by Lipson (1958), the atmospheric argon varied from 37-68%, cor- 
responding to a range in precision for A 40 /K 40 of a = 2.6-9.5%. In the 
dating of 10 granitic rocks from Yosemite (Curtis, Evernden, and Lipson, 
1958), the range in percentage of atmospheric argon was 8.5-63.2, which 
corresponds to a range of precision for the A 40 /K 40 ratio of <r = 0.4-7.6%. 
Yet, referring to the Yosemite analyses, Evernden, Curtis, and Lipson (1957, 
pp. 2120-2121) wrote: 

The major error in our technique is concerned with the absolute calibra- 
tion of the argon-38 spikes used for isotope dilution. This calibration error 
may give rise to a probable error of 2 or 3 per cent. However, it must be 
emphasized that, with the spike preparation procedure now being used, the 
argon-38 spike quantities are known relative to one another to less than 
1 per cent. Thus it is believed, if the error introduced by uncertainty in the 
absolute-spike calibration constant is negligible, that the analytical technique 
has an inherent probable error of less than 1 .5 per cent. Repeat runs on split 
fractions of biotite concentrates substantiate this conclusion. 

No data on these reproducibility tests are given. The Yosemite dates are 
stated as =tl-2%. With reference to the same rocks, Curtis, Evernden, and 
Lipson (1958) state that, for the potassium analyses, if duplicate determina- 
tions do not check within 1.5%, they are rejected. However, this does not 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHROXOMETRY 123 

tell us what the precision of a potassium analysis is. Precision can be improved 
only by perfecting the method or increasing the number of replicate determina- 
tions; it cannot be improved by arbitrary rejection of supposedly extreme 
values (See for example Crow, et al., 1960, Table 16). 

In 1954, Wasserburg (in Paul, 1954, p. 342) wrote: "Since argon 40 : potas- 
sium 40 ratios can be determined to within 4 percent, it should be quite possible 
to resolve Paleozoic intrusions separated by one geological period." If 4% 
is the probable error, thencr = 6%. In 1956, Folinsbee, Lipson, and Reynolds 
(1956, Table I) gave the A 40 /K 40 ratio as 5%, although they did not show 
how the figure was derived. Presumably a = 7.5%. Aldrich, et aL, (1956, 
p. 217) make the following statement: "From the reproducibility of the results 
by the two methods, it is believed that the error in the potassium analyses is 
5 percent or less. From the determinations of argon in air and minerals, the 
accuracy of the argon determinations is believed to be 3 percent. The error in 
the ratio, A 40 /K 40 , is believed to be less than 6 percent." Presumably cr < 9%. 
Carr and Kulp (1957, p. 777) report: "The numerous repeat runs on the same 
powder show that the reproducibility in the A 40 determination lies in the 
range of 1-3 percent in most cases. Since this is also the range of variation 
of the replicate potassium analyses, the analytical error in the A 40 /K 40 ratio 
probably does not exceed 5 percent." 

With reference to the dating of basement rocks from the Black Forest, 
Centner and Kley (1958, p. 103) give the following values for the nonsystematic 
errors: potassium analysis 1-2%; argon determination 2%; atmospheric argon 
correction 1-2%. If these figures are probable errors, then <7A 40 /K 40 is in 
the range 3.6-5.1%. These authors also state (p. 103) that the individual 
measurements can fluctuate through a maximum of 10% on a relative time 
scale. If by "maximum" is meant "with 95% probability," then we can con- 
clude that <7A?/K 40 is about 5.1%, whereas if "with 99% probability" is 
meant, then a turns out to be about 3.9%. 

These examples are sufficient to indicate how difficult it is to determine from 
the literature what standard deviation should be accepted for the ratio of 
radiogenic A 40 /K 40 on which the age of a rock may depend. The obvious 
conclusion is that authors should be sure that their readers know exactly what 
is meant by the precision stated, what it is based on, and what confidence 
should be attached to it. The writer suggests that until this important question 
is clarified the most reasonable theoretical precisions to adopt for the purposes 
of evaluating dates are as follows: 



Potassium analysis 3-6 

Total argon determination 3-6 

Atmospheric argon correction 0.5-8 

Spike calibration 1.5 



124 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

Assuming that there is no correlation between these errors, we find that the 
precision is in the range or = 4.5-11. 8^. It is unfortunate that this important 
parameter is not better known. 

Resulting precision of potassium-argon age. K 40 decays into Ca 40 with a constant 
denoted by X& as well as into A 40 with a constant XK (.sometimes written X e ). 
The ratio between these two constants, XK X$, is designated /?, the branching 
ratio. The total rate of decay of K 40 is given by X = XK + X$. The conver- 
sion of K 40 into Ca 40 is accompanied by emission of /3-rays (electrons), which 
are easily detected; hence \& is comparatively well known. On the other hand, 
the conversion of K 40 into A 40 is effected within the nucleus by transformation 
of a proton into a neutron by capture of one of the electrons from the A"-shell. 
In the consequent rearrangement of the remaining electrons, which is necessary 
in order that the vacancy in the A"-shell be filled, there is emission of low- 
energy x-rays, the characteristic A-radiation of potassium. Thus XK can be 
determined only indirecdy, and the uncertainty in the value of this constant 
is one of the major sources of systematic error in the method at the present 
time. Centner and Kiev (1958) claim that whereas X, the total disintegration 
constant of K 40 , is known to within 3-4%, the branching ratio, R, may be in 
error by as much as lO^. 

However, any errors in the constants will not affect relative age measure- 
ments, provided that the same values are used for all determinations. Because 
we take as an example the granitic rocks of Yosemite, reported on by Evernden, 
Curtis, and Lipson (1957) and by Curtis, Evernden, and Lipson (1958), we 
adopt the values used by these authors: 

X0 = 0.472 X lO^yr" 1 , 

X K = 0.557 X lO-^yr" 1 , 
R = 0.118, 
X = 0.528 X 10" 9 yr" 1 . 

Now the equation used in calculating the age of a potassium-bearing mineral 
is 

T= -InTl + 1 + *1 

where T is the age in years. Letting x = A 40 /K 40 and t = age in millions of 
years, we have dt/dx = 2.12/(0.118 + 1.118*) million years per 10~ 3 unit of 
A 40 /K 40 . Even after 100 m.y., A 40 /K 40 is still less than 0.006, and thus the 
gradient changes only very slowly with increasing age. A 1% error in A 40 /K 40 
produces about the same error in the age if the rock is less than some 200 m.y. 
old. If the rock is older than about 800 m.y., then the error produced in the 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHROXOMETRY 125 

age is appreciably less than the error in A 40 K 40 . Thus, unless we are dealing 
with Precambrian rocks, or the precision is kno\\n \\ith great confidence, it 
can be assumed that a given percentage error in A 40 K 40 will produce about 
the same percentage error in the age. 

If replicate age determinations are made on one or more rocks, then the 
results can yield a value for the "observed precision" of the age, which can be 
compared with the "theoretical precision" determined from consideration of 
the analytical techniques. It appears that the data on a suite of rocks from the 
Black Forest (Mehnert, 1958) may be used in this way, but it is unfortunate 
that experiments have not been undertaken with this goal specifically in view. 
Fourteen specimens were collected from the basement rocks of the Black Forest, 
and from some of these, feldspars and micas were separated so that 19 prepara- 
tions were available for dating, and on these, a total of 66 determinations were 
made. For the present purposes, we are concerned solely with the degree of 
reproducibility. An analysis of Mehnert's data is given in Table 4. For each 
preparation we compute the standard deviation as a percentage of the mean 
so that the effect of variation in the means may be eliminated. A pooled esti- 
mate of the standard deviation is s p = 10.8%, with a t = 9.0-13.5% with 
95% confidence, which is to be compared with the predicted precision of 
a t = 4.5-12%. If the analyses given by Mehnert are truly replicate, it would 
seem reasonable to suppose that the precision of age determinations by the 
potassium-argon method could be as much as a t = 10%. 

Statistical Inference 

Sampling distributions. If a random sample of size n is drawn from a normal 
population with mean p x and standard deviation <r x , then, in general, the mean 
of the sample is x 7* p x . But the number of possible samples of size n which 
could be drawn from the population may be large, and the assemblage of 
all these possible samples forms a second-order population whose parameters 
are related to those of the original population as follows: 

the mean value of x = /** = p x , 
the standard deviation of the sampling distribution 
(standard error of *) = G = cr x /\/. 

For example, suppose we draw a sample of size 10 from a population of 100 indi- 
viduals with ps = 12 and v x = 4. Our sample is one out of 100!/(10! X 90!) 
or more than 10 13 possible samples. The mean of this sampling distribution 
(population of samples) is fig = 12, and its standard deviation (standard 
error) is cr $ = 4/VTO = 1.26. Similarly, if the standard deviation s is deter- 



126 DOXALD B. McINTYRE 

TABLE 4 

REPLICATE AGE DETERMINATIONS ON 19 ROCKS AND MINERALS FROM 

THE BLACK FOREST BY THE POTASSIUM-ARGON METHOD 

BASED ON DATA PUBLISHED BY MEHNERT, 1958 



Number of 
determinations 


Mean age 


s% 


5 


249 


2.0 


2 


254 


0.3 


3 


243 


2.4 


3 


268 


2.6 


5 


253 


4.5 


3 


269 


3.5 


4 


287 


1.6 


5 


241 


16.1 


3 


273 


0.9 


2 


306 


0.1 


3 


303 


3.8 


3 


280 


2.7 


2 


260 


1.1 


6 


256 


25.5 


5 


278 


15.1 


3 


344 


2.4 


3 


304 


1.3 


3 


283 


1.5 


3 


310 


6.6 


Hence jp = 10.8% and<T = 


9.0-13.5% with 


95% confidence 



mined for all possible samples of size n, then the standard deviation (standard 
error) of this sampling distribution is <r 8 = tr x /-\/2n. For the example given, 
we would expect the standard deviations of samples of size 10 to have a distri- 
bution with a mean of /z = <r x = 4 and a standard deviation of 

<r g = 4/V20 = 0.9. 

Suppose we have two populations defined by parameters AC* and <r x , and /i y 
and <r tf , respectively, and we draw a pair of variates, one from each population, 
and take the difference (x y). If we continued to draw pairs until we had 
determined all possible values of (x 7), then we would have a new second- 
order population (sampling distribution) with parameters 

= MX Pt/ and <rL. v = a* + cri 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHRONOMETRY 



127 




.960* 



FIG. 1 . If the precision of an analytical method is given by (7, \ve have 95% confidence 
that a single determination will not differ from the mean, j&o> by more than 1.960(7. 



provided that there is no correlation between members of the pairs. Thus if 
&x = &y = 0*3 then ffx-y = (7\/2. 



If we are concerned with differences between means instead of between vari- 
ates, then we have 

M2 y ~~~ M2 Mys 

2 2 



= ,'(1 + 1), 
\BI n 2 / 

2cr 2 



if (7a; = <7 y = (7, 



j if, in addition, ?zi = 2 = - 

n 

Critical value. Suppose that the precision of chemical analysis of an element 
is already known and is given by <r, and further, let us assume that the distribu- 
tion of numerous replicate analyses would yield a normal curve with mean /z 
and standard deviation cr (Fig. 1). Because we find, from tables of areas under 
the normal curve, that 95% of the distribution lies between 1.960(7 and 
+1.960(7, the probability is only 0.05 that a single determination will fall 
outside the range JLI O 1.960(7. Accordingly, with 95% confidence, we reject 
the hypothesis that a determination outside this range belongs to this popu- 
lation. Now at this confidence level, five times out of one hundred, we will 
make a mistake and reject a measurement erroneously, claiming that it does 
not belong to the population when in fact it does, as we would discover if 
we were to make more determinations. The error of rejecting the null hy- 



128 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

pothesis when in fact it is true is called a type I, or producer's, error, for when 
it is made, a perfectly "good" sample is rejected. In our example, the chance 
of making a type I error is a. = 0.05; this is called the significance level. Now 
it may be that the cost of producing each measurement is so high, or other 
consequences of making this error are such that we cannot afford to reject 
such a high percentage of good determinations. If this is so, we can decrease 
the critical rejection area, say by setting a = 0.01, with 0.005 at each tail of 
the distribution, or even less. From tables of percentiles of the normal distribu- 
tion we find the following: 

Probability of making Critical value for 

Type I error \x /io| 



0.10 


1.645<7/V* 


0.05 


1.960<r/V 


0.01 


2.576<7/Vn 


0.001 


3.291o-/V 



We can also make use of these relations in the following way: if we have deter- 
mined x from a sample of size n and we already know <r, then we can state 
confidence limits for the mean, ju 05 of the population to which x belongs. For 
example, with 95^ confidence, we can say 8 /i = * 1.960or/\/fl- Alter- 
natively, the sample size required to specify ju to the range A with 95% 
confidence is n = (1.960er/A) 2 . 

Resolution. We have seen that we can always lessen the probability of making 
a type I error (i.e., claiming that the null hypothesis is false when it is actually 
true) merely by decreasing the rejection area a. This is true even when the 
sample size is as small as two. Whatever value of a we decide upon, we calcu- 
late the critical value and agree to reject the null hypothesis if \x /*o| is 
greater than this. Now, clearly the smaller we have made a (to avoid type I 
errors), the more likely it will be that we accept the null hypothesis when it is 
false. This would be a type II error, and the probability of making it is given 
by (Fig. 2). We see that, although [^i /* | is greater than our critical 
value, the probability of overlooking this difference is ft. This error is often 
called a consumer's error, for it will result in the acceptance of measurements 
which should be rejected. Our confidence in avoiding this error is 1 and 
is the power of the test. Clearly 0, and hence the power, depends upon |/ii j* | 
<r, n, and a. If four of these variables are given, then the fifth is fixed. Let us 
suppose that <r and n are given and a has been assigned the value 0.05, so that 



8 If a were not known, we would use the ^-distribution (see. for example, Crow et al., 
1960, p. 47). 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHRONOMETRY 



129 




-30 



70 



Million years 



FIG. 2. a is the probability that we will reject, in error, the null hypothesis that a 
sample mean belongs to population JLIQ because it is greater than JLIQ + h or less than 
MO h. (1 a) 100% is our confidence that we will not make this error, ft is the 
probability that we will accept, in error, the null hypothesis that a sample mean belongs 
to population JUQ because it is less than JUQ + h when an alternative hypothesis, namely, 
that the sample mean belongs to population MI, is true. (1 )100% is our confidence 
that we will avoid this error. The diagram is drawn with a. = 0.05 and ft = 0.2. 

the critical value for rejection is k\<r$ = 1.960cr/\/. It is clear that ft must be 
much larger than a. unless |/*i /x | is made extreme. Let us suppose that ft 
is not to exceed 0.2; then, from normal curve tables. 



Hence 



0.8420- 
VS ' 

2.8020- 



MO| 



for a = 0.05 and ft = 0.2. Similarly, 



~ MO| = 



3.242(7 
Vn 



for a. = 0.05 and ft = 0.1. These values of \m /o| are called the resolution 9 
differences. The values of a and ft that we use will depend upon the penalty 
attached to these errors in each particular case and on the economics involved. 
In what follows, we adopt the values a = 0.05 and ft = 0.2, thus indicating 



9 The analogy with the resolving power of an optical system will be obvious. 



130 DONALD B. McINTYRE 

that we expect to make a type I error (i.e., to claim a difference jjui Moi > 
when the difference is actually zero] once in 20 times and a type II error 
(i.e., fail to detect an actual difference |MI Mo' > Q) once i n 5 times. It 
does not seem worthwhile to make statements which have lower degrees of 
confidence, but on the other hand if these risks seem too great, then they can 
be reduced: the price is an increased value for the minimum difference, R, 
which can be resolved, and this penalty can be avoided only by improving the 
precision of the individual measurements (thereby reducing 0") or increasing n, 
the size of the samples used in determining x. 

Summarizing these conclusions we can make the following statements: 

(1) With 80^ confidence, we can claim that if JMI MO| exceeds 2.802(7 ^/H, 
we will detect this at the 0.05-significance level. 

(2) With 95^ confidence, we can claim that if |3c MO! exceeds 1.9600yS/J2, 
then MI ^ Mo- 

(3) The number of variates to be included in each sample in order to establish 
a given degree of resolution = (2.8020", R) 2 . 

In geochronometry we commonly have data on two samples and wish to 
know whether the populations from which they were drawn have a common 
mean. For instance, two samples are analyzed for potassium: the number of 
replicate determinations made on the first is HI, and on the second n 2 ; the 
respective means are x and J. Let us suppose that the precision for the method 
is already established so that ff x = <r y = a which is known. Then we have 
the following results. 

For ,MZ M ; : 

/I 1\ 1/2 0- 

Resolution, R = 2.8020- ( + j = 3.963 -^ if ni = n 2 = ; 

for \x Jj: 

f\ IN 1 ' 2 0- 

Critical value = 1.9600- ( h I = 2.772 -7=. if HI = n 2 = n: 

vzi n 2 / Vn 

and 

.2 



to establish a given resolving power. 

These values used in testing the hypothesis (MI "" Ma| = are greater by the 
factor \/2 than the comparable values for the hypothesis |MI MO| = 0. The 
reason is that whereas MO was given, neither MI nor M2 is known. 

We may therefore state criteria for decision-making as follows. If MO is 
known and <r x = <r v = v is known but MI and M2 are unknown, then (1) with 
100(1 0)% confidence, we can claim that if a difference exceeds the reso- 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHRONOMETRY 131 

lution, we will detect this at the a significance level: 

100(1 0)% Difference Resolution a 



80 


IMI MO| 


2.802cr 'v^ 


0.05 


80 


IMI M2J 


3.963(r/V^ 


0.05 


90 


IMI ~~ MO! 


3.858<r/V^ 


0.01 


90 


IMI M2J 


5.456cr/\/7z 


0.01 



(2) with 100(1 a)% confidence we can claim that if a difference exceeds 
the critical value for rejection, then m 9* a: 

100(1 a)% Difference Critical value a 



95 


|* - MO| 1.960(7/V^ 


MO 


95 


/I 1\ 1/2 
\x y\ 2.772cr/Vn or 1.960<r ( + ) 

\fll T12/ 




99 


\x jitol 2.576cr/Vn 


MO 




/I 1\ 1/2 




99 


|3c y\ 3.643o-/V or 2.576<r I H ] 


M2 



Examples 

Let us suppose that we have two rocks which have been selected as meeting 
the specifications that qualify them for radioactive age dating. If a single 
determination is to be made on each, then, if we are to have an 80% confidence 
in our ability to distinguish between them at the 0.05 significance level, the 
difference will have to exceed 3.9630"; apparently this is somewhere between 
43% and 66% for lead-alpha, and between 18% and 48% for K-A ages. 
These are rough figures, but apparently our best estimates of the current 
resolving powers of the methods. It is certainly hoped that more reliable 
measures of the resolution will soon become available, and at that time the 
reader can bring up to date the conclusions presented here. 

Suppose now that a single age determination has been made on each of the 
two rocks, then with 95% confidence we can say that there is indeed a differ- 
ence between their actual ages if the observed difference between the two 
determinations exceeds 2.772<r, that is, it seems, 30-46% for lead-alpha and 
12-33% for K-A ages. If the two determinations are each the mean of four 
replicate 10 measurements, then the critical value is halved. It should be noted 
that it is possible to detect a difference which is smaller than the resolution, 



10 There is obviously a practical limit to the extent to which we should endeavor to 
improve the precision of a method by increasing the number of replicate readings. 



132 DONALD B. McIXTYRE 

but the a priori confidence in our ability is less than 80% ; indeed \ve may 
c% detect"' a difference which is actually zero, but we may make a type I error 
in doing so ! 

The mean age of 11 specimens of tonalite from the batholith of southern 
California is 114 m.y., whereas the mean of 7 specimens of granodiorite from 
the same plutonic complex is 105 m.y. (Larsen, et al , 1958, Tables 6 and 7). 
If we take a = 10% then <r- tl er ?2 = ICK^ -r f' 1 2 = 4.8%. Hence the 
resolution is 2.80 X 4.8 = 13.5% or nearly 15 m.y. The critical value is 
1.96 X 4.8 = 9.5% or nearly 10.5 m.y. Thus we conclude that if there is any 
difference between the actual mean ages of the tonalites and granodiorites in 
the batholith of southern California then, with 80% confidence, the difference 
is less than 15 m.y. 

Of all the Mesozoic batholiths of western North America which have been 
dated by the lead-alpha method (Larsen, et al., 1958, Table 12) the widest 
range of apparent mean ages is between the Sierra Nevada (n = 15, ? = 102) 
and Idaho (n = 16, / = 108) batholiths. Taking <r = 10% u , we have 
o- t = 2.5%. Hence the resolution is 3.96 X 2.5 = 9.9%, or nearly 10.5 m.y. 
The critical value is 2.77 X 2.5 = 6.9% or nearly 7.5 m.y. Thus we must 
conclude that if there is any difference between the mean ages of these batho- 
liths, then, \\ith 80% confidence, it is less than 11 m.y. 

The relative ages of the granitic rocks of Yosemite (Sierra Nevada) are be- 
lieved to be known from their field relationships. Ten of these rocks have been 
dated by the potassium-argon method (Evernden, Curtis, and Lipson, 1957). 
The ages are given to 0.1 m.y., and it is reported that "The agreement between 
field and experimental determinations of relative age of the various plutons is 
remarkable. It can be seen that the average interval of time between intru- 
sions is approximately two million years." (Curtis, et a/., 1958, p. 12) 

Apparently replicate determinations were not made, with the exception 
that three specimens of the Half Dome quartz monzonite were dated. That 
this number is too small to yield a satisfactory estimate of the precision is 
seen from the fact that, whereas s = 0.8%, the 99%-confidence range for 
<r = 0.4-13.3%. Until a better estimate of the precision is published, then, 
largely for the purpose of illustration, we will adopt <r = 10% as a tentative 
estimate. The resolution would then be about 34 m.y., and the critical value 
about 24 m.y. (see Fig. 2). If the resolution were to equal the range of observed 
ages, 18.4 m.y., the analytical precision would have to be more than twice 
as good or else at least five replicate determinations would have to be made on 
each specimen. To bring the resolution down to one million years, the analyti- 
cal precision would have to be about 30 times as good as it now appears to be. 



11 The confidence levels quoted do not reflect the present uncertainty in the values 
of<r. 



PRECISION AND RESOLUTION IN GEOCHROXOMETRY 133 

We conclude therefore that there is about a 709c probability that the observed 
range of dates (about zhcr) on the Yosemite rocks is due to random errors in 
the analytical methods; or alternatively, \\ith the customary confidence levels, 
if there is any difference between the actual ages of the rocks, it is less than 
34 m.y. If cr is as low as 5%, then the resolution would be 20 m.y. or almost 
equal to the apparent range. 

In this field, reproducibility tests are very costly; however, the results are 
not useful until we have some estimate of their precision. Science is a rational 
activity and authoritarianism is out of place; hence potential users of published 
dates are entitled to know the nature, extent, and findings of any reproduci- 
bility tests which have been made. Given certain assumptions and a knowl- 
edge of precision, we can hope to detect discrepant observations; but without 
better knowledge than seems to exist currently, it would be disquieting to find 
circumstantial evidence suggesting that dates may be discarded on the basis 
that they do not fit expectation. If a rock, which was acceptable a priori, is 
rejected a posteriori because of its age, then full details regarding the precision 
must be given. Quite apart from judgment of the harder problems of relevancy 
and accuracy, no one should use a date until he has satisfied himself that the 
resolution of the method justifies the use intended. 



REFERENCES CITED 

ALDRICH, L. T., DAVIS, G. L., TELTON, G. R., and WETHERILL, G. W., 1956, Radio- 
active ages of minerals from the Brown Derby Mine and the Quartz Creek granite 
near Gunnison, Colorado: J. Geophys. Res., vol. 61, pp. 215-232. 

CARR, D. R. and KULP, J. L., 1957, Potassium-argon method of geochronometry : Geol. 
Soc. Am., B., vol. 68, pp. 763-784. 

CROW, E. L., DAVIS, F. A., and MAXFIELD, M. W., 1960, Statistics manual: New York, 
Dover, 288 pp. 

CURTIS, G. H., EVERNDEN, J. F., and LIPSON, J., 1958, Age determination of some 
granitic rocks in California by the potassium-argon method: California Div. Mines, 
Sp. Report 54, 16 pp. 

and REYNOLDS, J. H., 1958, Notes on the potassium-argon dating of sedimentary 

rocks: Geol. Soc. Am. B., vol. 69, pp. 151-160. 

EVERNDEN, J. F., CURTIS, G. H., and LIPSON, J., 1957, Potassium-argon dating of igneous 
rocks: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., B., vol. 41, pp. 2120-2127. 

PAUL, HENRY, 1954, Nuclear geology: New York, John Wiley, 414 pp. 

FOLINSBEE, R. E., LIPSON, J., and REYNOLDS, J. H., 1956, Potassium-argon dating: 
Geochim. et Cosmochim. Acta., vol. 10, pp. 60-68. 

GENTNER, W., JENSEN, F., and MEHNERT, K. R., 1954, Zur geologischen Altersbestim- 
mung von Kalifeldspat nach der Kalium-Argon-Methode: Zs. Naturforschung, Bd. 
9a, 176 pp. 



134 DOXALD B. McINTYRE 

and KLEY, W., 1958, Argonbestimmungen an Kaliummineralien-V: Geochim. 

et Cosmochim. Acta., vol. 14, pp. 98-104. 
GOLDSCHMIDT, V. M., 1944, Crystal chemistry and geochemistry: Chemical Products, 

vol. 7, pp. 29-34. 
GOTTFRIED, D., JAFFE, H. \V., and SENFTLE, F. E., 1959, Evaluation of the lead-alpha 

(Larsen) method for determining ages of igneous rocks: U. S. Geol. Survey, B., 

1097-A, 63 pp. 
HURLEY, P. M. and FAIRS AIRN, H. \V., 1957, Abundance and distribution of uranium 

and thorium in zircon, sphene, apatite, epidote, and monazite in granitic rocks: 

Am. Geophys. Union, Tr., vol. 38, pp. 939-944. 
LARSEN, E. S., JR., KEEVIL, N. B., and HARRISON, H. C., 1952, Method for determining 

the age of igneous rocks using the accessory minerals: Geol. Soc. Am. B., vol. 63, 

pp. 1045-1052. 
, GOTTFRIED, D., JAFFE, H. W., and WARING, C. L., 1958, Lead-alpha ages of 

the Mesozoic batholiths of western North America: U. S. Geol. Survey, B., 1070-B, 

62pp. 
LIPSON, J., 1958, Potassium-argon dating of sedimentary rocks: Geol. Soc. Am., B., 

vol. 69, pp. 137-150. 
LYONS, J. B., JAFFE, H. W., GOTTFRIED, D., and WARING, C. L., 1957, Lead-alpha ages 

of some New Hampshire granites: Am. J. Sci., vol. 255, no. 8, pp. 527-546. 
MEHNERT, K. R., 1958, Argonbestimmungen an Kaliummineralien-VI: Geochim. et 

Cosmochim. Acta, vol. 14, pp. 105-113. 
ROSE, H., JR., and STERN, T., 1960, Spectrochemical determination of lead in zircon 

for lead-alpha age measurements: Am. Mineralogist, vol. 45, pp. 1243-1256. 
WARING, C. L. and WORTHING, H., 1953, A spectrographic method for determining 

trace amounts of lead in zircon and other minerals: Am. Mineralogist, vol. 38, pp. 

827-833. 
WEBBER, G. R., HURLEY, P. M., and FAIRBAIRN, H. W., 1956, Relative ages of eastern 

Massachusetts granites by total lead ratios in zircon: Am. J. Sci., vol. 254, pp. 574-583. 



J. HOOVER MACKIN 

University of Texas 



Rational and Empirical 

Methods of Investigation 
in Geology 1 



Most of us are concerned, and some of us have strong feelings, pro or con, 
about what has been happening to geology in the past 25 years: greatly in- 
creased use of nongeologic techniques in the solution of geologic problems, 
such as dating by radioisotope methods; the tendency for what were special 
fields of interest to become nearly or wholly independent disciplines, with 
separate journals and jargon; and most of all, because it penetrates every field, 
what may be called the swing to the quantitative. 

At meetings of our societies, when the elder brethren gather together in hotel 
rooms after the technical sessions, the discussion usually comes around to these 
changes. There are apt to be sad postmortems for certain departments, once 
powerful, which are now, owing to the retirement or flight of their older stal- 
warts, largely staffed by dial twisters and number jugglers. It is stated, as a 
scandalous sign of the times, that in certain departments geologic mapping is 
considered to be, not research, but a routine operation something like survey- 
ing from the point of view of an engineer and therefore not suitable as a basis 



1 A preliminary draft of this paper was given as an address at the banquet of the 
Branner Club during the meeting of the Cordilleran Section of the Geological Society 
in Los Angeles, April 17, 1962. The text has benefitted in substance and form from 
criticisms by the other authors of papers in this volume. I would like also to express 
my gratitude to the following, who have read parts or all of the manuscript: Charles 
Bell, Richard Blank, Howard Coombs, Ronald DeFord, Ken Fahnestock, Peter Flawn, 
John Hack, Satish Kapoor, William Krumbein, Luna Leopold, Mark Meier, H. W. 
Naismith, and Dwight Schmidt. Special thanks are due Frank Calkins, who did his 
best to make the paper readable. 

135 



136 J. HOOVER MACKIN 

for the doctoral thesis. There is almost always at least one sarcastic remark 
per evening along the line of what our equation-minded youngsters think is 
the function of the mirror on a Brunton compass: a comment or two on their 
ignorance or disregard of the older literature: some skepticism as to whether 
the author of a new monograph on the mechanism of mountain building had 
ever been on a mountain, off a highway; and so on. This is partly banter, be- 
cause we are aware that these are merely the usual misgivings of even" older 
generation about the goings-on of every younger generation. But sometimes 
there is evidence of real ill-feeling, which in part at least reflects a defensive 
attitude; and there may be a few who seem to think that the clock ought to be 
stopped that nothing new is good. 

Though I am one of the elders, I often cross the hall to a concurrent session 
of another group, our avant-garde, where there is an almost evangelical zeal 
to quantify, and if this means abandoning the classical geologic methods of 
inquiry, so much the better; where there are some who think of W. M. Davis 
as an old duffer with a butterfly-catcher's sort of interest in scenery; where 
there is likely to be, once in a while, an expression of anger for the oldsters who, 
through their control of jobs, research funds, honors, and access to the journals, 
seem to be bent on sabotaging all efforts to raise geology to the stature of a 
science: where, in the urgency for change, it seems that nothing old is good. 

This picture is not overdrawn, but it applies only to a small number: the 
blacks and the whites, both sure of their ground. Most geologists are somewhere 
in the gray between, and are beset with doubts. As for myself, I have sometimes 
thought that the swing to the quantitative is too fast and too far, and that, 
because a rather high percentage of the conclusions arrived at by certain meth- 
ods of manipulating numerical data are superficial, or wrong, or even ludicrous, 
these methods must be somehow at fault, and that we do well to stay with the 
classical geologic methods. But at other times I have been troubled by ques- 
tions: why the swing has been so long delayed in geology as compared with 
physics and chemistry; and whether, with its relative dearth of quantitative 
laws, geology is in fact a sort of subscience, as implied by Lord Kelvin's pro- 
nouncement that what cannot be stated in numbers is not science. (For original 
wording, and a thoughtful discussion, see Holton, 1952, p. 234.) Even more 
disturbing is the view, among some of my friends in physics, that a concern 
with cause-and-effect relations merely confuses the real issues in science; I will 
return to this matter later. If only because of the accomplishments of the scien- 
tists who hold these views, we must wonder whether our accustomed ways of 
thinking are outmoded, and whether we should not drastically change our 
habits of thought, or else turn in our compasses and hammers and fade away 
quietly to some haven reserved for elderly naturalists. 

Preparation for a talk on quantitative methods in geomorphology, as a 
visiting lecturer at the University of Texas last year, forced me to examine 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 137 

these conflicting appraisals of where we stand. 2 I suggest that two changes, 
quite different but closely interlocking, are occurring at the same time and have 
become confused in our thinking. 

One of these changes includes an increase in the rate of infusion of new ideas 
and techniques from the other sciences and from engineering, an increase in 
precision and completeness of quantitative description of geologic features and 
processes of all kinds, and an increased use of statistics and mechanical methods 
of analyzing data. This change fits readily within the framework of the classical 
geologic method of investigation, the most characteristic feature of which is 
dependence on reasoning at every step; "Quantitative Zoology," by Simpson, 
Roe, and Lewontin (1960) shows the way. In so far as it merely involves 
doing more completely, or with more refinement, what we have always been 
doing, it is evolutionary; and it is axiomatic that it is good. Some of us may 
find it hard to keep abreast of new developments, but few oppose them even 
privately, and even the most reactionary cannot drag his feet in public without 
discredit to himself. 

The other change is the introduction, or greatly increased use, of an alto- 
gether different method of problem-solving that is essentially empirical. In 
its purest form this method depends very little on reasoning; its most character- 
istic feature, when it functions as an independent method, is that it replaces the 
reasoning process by operations that are largely mechanical. Because in this 
respect and others it is foreign to our accustomed habits of thought, we are 
inclined to distrust it. By "we 53 I mean, of course, the conservatives of my 
generation. 

At least a part of the confusion in our thinking comes from a failure to dis- 
tinguish between the evolutionary quantification, which is good, and the 
mechanical kind of quantification, which I think is bad when it takes the place 
of reasoning. It is not easy to draw a line between them because the empirical 
procedures may stand alone, or they may function effectively and usefully as 
parts of the classical geologic method; that is, they may replace, or be combined 
in all proportions with, the reasoning processes that are the earmarks of that 
method. When this distinction is recognized it becomes evident that the real 
issue is not qualitative versus quantitative. It is, rather, rationality versus blind 
empiricism. 

2 1 was only dimly aware, until some library browsing in connection with method- 
ology in the other sciences, of the extent of the scholarly literature dealing with the 
history and philosophy of science. And I was surprised, as was Claude Albritton (1961), 
to find that with a few noteworthy exceptions (for example, Conant, 1951, p. 269-295) 
geology is scarcely mentioned in that literature. I should like to make it plain at the 
outset that I am not a scholar I have only sampled a few anthologies of the history 
of science. I should emphasize also that I do not presume to speak for geology; what 
I say expresses the viewpoint of a single field geologist. 



138 J. HOOVER MACKIN 

Although the timing has been influenced by such leaders as Chayes, Hubbert, 
Leopold, Krumbein, and Strahler, we are now in the swing to the quantitative 
because of the explosive increase in the availability of numerical data in the 
last few decades (Krumbein, 1960, p. 341), and because basic descriptive 
spadework has now advanced far enough in many fields of geology to permit 
at least preliminary formulation of significant quantitative generalizations. 
The quantification of geology will proceed at a rapidly accelerating rate no 
matter what we do as individuals, but I think the rate might be quickened a 
little, and to good purpose, if the differences between the two groups on oppo- 
site sides of the hall, at least those differences that arise from misunderstanding, 
could be reduced. An analysis of certain quantitative methods of investigation 
that are largely empirical will, I hope, serve to bring out both their merits and 
limitations, and may convince some of our oldsters that although disregard 
of the limitations may produce questionable results, it does not follow that 
there is anything wrong with quantification, as such, nor with blind empiricism, 
as such. But this is not very important tune will take care of the oldsters, soon 
enough. This essay is for the youngsters the graduate students and its 
purpose is to show that as they quantify, which they are bound to do, it is 
neither necessary nor wise to cut loose from the classical geologic method. 
Its message is the not very novel proposition that there is much good both hi 
the old and the new approaches to problem-solving. A brief statement of 
what I am calling the rational method will point up the contrast between it 
and the empirical method, with which we are principally concerned. 

The Rational Method 

I'm sure that most American geologists are acquainted with our three out- 
standing papers on method: G. K. Gilbert's "Inculcation of the Scientific 
Method by Example," published in 1886; T. C. Chamberlin's "Method of 
Multiple Working Hypotheses," published in 1897; and Douglas Johnson's 
"Role of Analysis in Scientific Investigation," published in 1933. I do not 
need to describe the so-called scientific method here; for present purposes I 
need only remind you that it involves an interplay of observation and reason- 
ing, in which the first observations suggest one or more explanations, the 
working hypotheses, analysis of which leads to further observation or experi- 
mentation. This in turn permits a discarding of some of the early hypotheses 
and a refinement of others, analysis of which permits a discarding of data now 
seen to be irrelevant to the issue, and a narrowing and sharpening of the focus 
in the search for additional data that are hidden or otherwise hard to obtain 
but which are of special diagnostic value; and so on and on. These steps are 
spelled out in formal terms hi the papers just mentioned, and it was useful to 
do that, but those who use the method all the time never follow the steps in 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 139 

the order stated; the method has become a habit of thought that checks reason- 
ing against other lines of reasoning, evidence against other kinds of evidence, 
reasoning against evidence, and evidence against reasoning, thus testing both 
the evidence and the reasoning for relevancy and accuracy at every stage of 
the inquiry. 

It now seems to be the vogue to pooh-pooh this method, as differing in no 
essential way from the method of problem-solving used by the man in the street. 
I've been interested in watching the way in which men in the street, including 
some medical doctors practitioners, not investigators arrive at conclusions, 
and I can only suggest that the scientists who insist that all persons arrive at 
conclusions in the same way should reexamine their conviction. There are, of 
course, rare intellects that need no disciplining, but for most of us with ordinary 
minds, facility in the operations that I have just outlined must be acquired by 
precept, example, and practice. 

The objective of the scientific method is to understand the system investi- 
gated to understand it as completely as possible. To most geologists this 
means understanding of cause and effect relations within the system (Garrels, 
1951, p. 32). Depending on the nature of the problem and its complexity, 
quantitative data and mathematical manipulations may enter the investigation 
early or late. In general, the larger the problem, the more many-sided it is, 
the more complicated by secondary and tertiary feedback couples, and the more 
difficult it is to obtain the evidence, the more essential it is to the efficient 
prosecution of the study that the system first be understood in qualitative terms; 
only this can make it possible to design the most significant experiments, or 
otherwise to direct the search for the critical data, on which to base an eventual 
understanding in quantitative terms. 

A problem any problem when first recognized, is likely to be poorly 
defined. Because it is impossible to seek intelligently for explanations until we 
know what needs explaining, the first step in the operation of the scientific 
method is to bring the problem into focus. This is usually accomplished by 
reasoning, i.e., by thinking it through, although we will see shortly that there is 
another way. Then, if it is evident that the problem is many-sided, the investi- 
gator does not blast away at all sides at once with a shotgun; he shoots at one 
side at a time with a rifle with the rifle, and the bullet, that he considers best 
suited to that side. 

This means that the investigator admits to his graphs, so to speak, only items 
of evidence that are relevant to the particular matter under investigation, and 
that are as accurate as practicable, with the probable limits of sampling and 
experimental error expressed graphically. In reading answers from the graph, 
he does no averaging beyond that required to take those limits into account. 
And once an item of information has been admitted to the graph, it cannot 
be disregarded; as a rule, the items that lie outside the clusters of points are at 



140 J. HOOVER MAGKIN 

least as significant, and usually much more interesting, than those that lie 
within the clusters. It is from inquiry as to wh\ these strays are where they are 
that most new ideas most breakthroughs in science develop. 

The scientific method tries to visualize whole answers complete theoretical 
structures at the verv outset; these are the working hypotheses that give 
direction to the seeking-out and testing of evidence. But one never rushes 
ahead of the data-testing process to a generalization that is regarded as a 
conclusion. This is not because there is anything ethically wrong with quick 
generalizing. It is only that, over a period of 500 years, investigators have 
found that theoretical structures made in part of untested and ill-matched 
building blocks are apt to topple sooner or later, and that piling them up and 
building on them is therefore not an efficient way to make progress. The need 
to test the soundness of each building block before it gets into the structure 
to determine the quality* and the relevance of each item of evidence before it 
gets onto the graph is emphasized by Douglas Johnson (1933). His approach 
was the antithesis of that to which we mav now turn. 



The Empirical Method 

What I have long thought of as the engineering method or the technologic 
method (we shall soon see that it needs another name) deals almost exclusively 
with quantitative data from the outset, and proceeds directly to a quantitative 
answer, which terminates the investigation. This method reduces to a mini- 
mum, or eliminates altogether, the byplay of inductive and deductive reason- 
ing by which data and ideas are processed in the scientific method; this means 
that it cannot be critical of the data as they are gathered. The data are analyzed 
primarily by mathematical methods, which make no distinction between cause 
and effect; understanding of cause and effect relations may be interesting, but 
it is not essential, and if explanations are considered at all, there is usually 
only one, and it is likely to be superficial. All of the reasoning operations that 
characterize the so-called scientific method depend on a fund of knowledge, 
and on judgment based on experience; other things being equal, the old hand 
is far better at these operations than the novice. But the operations of the 
"engineering method" are much less dependent on judgment; in applying this 
method the sharp youngster may be quicker and better than the experienced 
oldster. For this reason and because of its quick, positive, quantitative answers, 
it makes a strong appeal to the younger generation. I would like now to explain 
the logic of this method, as it operates in engineering. 

Many engineers feel that unless a relation can be stated in numbers, it is 
not worth thinking about at all. The good and sufficient reason for this attitude 
is that the engineer is primarily a doer he designs structures of various types, 
and supervises their building. In the contract drawings for a bridge he must 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 141 

specify the dimensions and strength of each structural member. Xonengineers 
may be able to think of a drawing that indicates the need for a rather strong 
beam at a given place in the bridge. But a young man who has spent five years 
in an engineering school is incapable of thinking seriously of a "rather strong" 
beam; all of the beams of his mind's eye have numerical properties. If the 
strength of a beam cannot be put in numerical terms, thinking about it is mere 
daydreaming. 

The matter of stresses in a steel structure is fairly cut and dried. But the 
engineer is confronted with many problems for which there are no ready 
answers; he must deal with them he must complete his working drawings 
against a deadline. If he is charged with the task of designing a canal to carry 
a certain flow of irrigation water without either silting or erosion of the bed, or 
with the immensely more complex task of developing and maintaining a 10-foot 
navigable channel in a large river, he cannot wait until he or others have 
developed a complete theory of silting and scouring in canals and rivers. 
It may be 50 or a 100 years before anything approaching a complete theory, 
in quantitative terms, can be formulated; and his drawings, which must be 
entirely quantitative, have to be ready within a few days or weeks for the con- 
tractors who will bid the job. So he has to make certain simplifying assump- 
tions, even though he realizes that they may be wide of the mark, and he has 
to make-do with data that are readily available, even though they are not 
entirely satisfactory, or with data that can be obtained quickly from experi- 
ments or models, even though the conditions are significantly different from 
those existing in his particular canal or river. 

He is accustomed to these expedient operations, and he is not much con- 
cerned if, in plotting the data, he mixed a few oranges with the apples. In fact, 
he wouldn't worry much if a few apple crates and a few orange trees got onto his 
graph. He cannot scrutinize each item of evidence as to quality and relevancy; 
if he did, none but the simplest of structures would ever get built. He feels 
that if there are enough points on a scatter diagram, the bad ones will average 
out, and that the equation for the curve drawn through the clustered points 
will be good enough for use in design, always with a goodly factor of safety as 
a cushion. And it almost always is. This method is quantitative^ empirical^ and 
expedient. As used by the engineer, it is logical and successful. 

It is of course used by investigators in many fields other than engineer- 
ing. Friends in physics and chemistry tell me that- it accounts for a large per- 
centage of the current research in those sciences. A recent paper by Paul Weiss 
(1962) with the subtitle "Does Blind Probing Threaten to Displace Experience 
in Biological Experimentation?" calls attention to its increasing use in biology. 
The approach and examples are different, but the basic views of Dr. Weiss 
correspond so closely with those expressed in this essay that I am inclined to 
quote, not a passage or two, but the whole paper. Because this is impracticable, 



142 J. HOOVER MACKIN 

I can only urge that geologists interested in this phase of the general problem 
whither are we drifting, methodologically? read it in the original. 

In view of its widespread use in science, what I have been calling the engineer- 
ing or technologic method certainly should not be identified, by name, with 
engineering or technology as such. And on the other side of the coin, the 
so-called scientific method is used more consistently and effectively by many 
engineers and technologists than by most scientists. Besides being inappropriate 
on this score, both terms have derogatory or laudatory connotations which 
beg some questions. So, with serious misgivings that will be left unsaid, I will 
from here on use the term "rational method" for what we are accustomed to 
think of as the scientific method, and what I have been calling the engineering 
method will be referred to as the empirical method. 3 

Actually, the method that I am trying to describe is an empirical method; 
it is shotgun or scatter-diagram empiricism, very different from the one-at-a- 
time, cut-and-try empiricism of Ehrlich who, without any reasoned plan, tried 
in turn 606 chemical substances as specifics for syphilis. The 606th worked. 
Both the scatter-diagram and the one-at-a-time types can be, at one extreme, 
purely empirical, or, if you prefer, low-level empirical. As Conant (1952, 
pp. 26-30) points out, the level is raised the empirical approaches the rational 
as the gathering and processing of the data are more and more controlled 
by reasoning. 



Use of Examples 

The expositions of the rational method by Gilbert, Chamberlin, and Johnson 
all depend on the use of examples, and having tried several other ways, I am 
sure that this is the only way to make clear the workings of the empirical 
method. I have chosen to use actual examples, because these are far more 
effective than anything I could invent. They could have been selected from 
any field in geology. My examples are from recent publications dealing 
with the geologic work of rivers; I know of no other field hi which the two 
approaches to problem-solving stand in such sharp contrast. "Horrible ex- 
amples" are available, analysis of which would have a certain entertainment 
value; I shall draw my examples from publications that rank as important 
contributions. The principal example is from a paper that is unquestionably 
the outstanding report in this field, "The hydraulic geometry of stream chan- 



3 So many friends have objected to these terms that I should say that I am fully 
aware that they are unsatisfactory, chiefly because they have different connotations in 
different fields of study. I use them in their plain English meaning. They seem to me 
to be less objectionable than any other terms, but I will not take issue with those who 
think otherwise. 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 143 

nels," by Luna Leopold and Thomas Maddock (1953). I have discussed the 
methodology of geologic investigation with Leopold on numerous occasions, 
and we have, in effect, agreed to disagree on some points. 4 

Examples are essential in a discussion of methods, but it is difficult to work 
with them. The problems of fluvial hydraulics are so complex that if the ex- 
amples are to be comprehensible they must be simplified, and we must treat 
them out of context. This may irritate the few who are familiar with these 
matters at the technical level; I can only ask their indulgence on the ground 
that I am steering a difficult course between nonessential complexity and over- 
simplification. I should acknowledge, moreover, that I am an interested party; 
about 15 years ago I published an article in this field (Mackin, 1948). Finally, 
and most important, I will be deliberately looking at the way data are handled 
from the point of view of the conservative geologist, unaccustomed to this 
manner of handling data and highly critical of it. But I will come around full 
circle in the end, to indicate that the operations I have been criticizing are 
those of a valid method of investigation which is here to stay. 

Downstream Change in Velocity in Rivers 

All of us have seen the white water of a rushing mountain stream and the 
smooth-surfaced flow of the streams of the plains, and we are prepared by the 
contrast to suppose that the velocity of the flow decreases downstream. We are 
aware, moreover, that slope commonly decreases downstream and that velocity 
tends to vary directly with slope. Finally, we know from observation that the 
grain size of the load carried by rivers tends to decrease downstream, and 
that the grain size of the material carried by a river varies directly with some 
aspect of the velocity. For these reasons, we have always taken it for granted 
that velocity decreases downstream. 

So in 1953, when Leopold and Maddock stated that velocity in rivers in- 
creases downstream, the statement came as a first-rate shock to most geologists. 
Three graphs (Fig. 1) from that article are good examples of the sort of evi- 
dence, and the manner of handling evidence, on which this generalization is 
based. They are log-log plots of several parameters; at the top, width of channel 
against discharge in cubic feet per second; in the middle, depth against dis- 
charge; and at the bottom, velocity against discharge. Each point represents 
data obtained from a U. S. Geological Survey gaging station in the Yellowstone- 
Big Horn drainage system. The points at the far left, such as 13 and 16, are 
on small headwater tributaries, and those at the far right, such as 19, are on 
the main stem of the Yellowstone. The upper and middle graphs show that, 
as should be expected, both width and depth increase with increase in dis- 



4 Leopold states his position elsewhere in this volume. 



144 



J. HOOVER MACKIX 



500 




100 1000 

Mean annual discharge, cf$ 



10,000 



Fie. 1. Width, depth, and velocity in relation to discharge, Bighorn and Yellowstone 
Rivers, Wyoming and Montana (Leopold and Maddock, 1953, Fig. 6). 



charge; the line in the lower graph also slopes up to the right; that is, velocity 
increases with increase in discharge. 

Some may wonder why we have moved over from increase in velocity down- 
stream, which is the exciting issue, to increase in velocity with increase in dis- 
charge. While it is true that discharge increases downstream in most rivers, 
it is at best only an approximate measure of distance downstream the distance 
that would be traveled, for example, by the grains composing the load. The 
answer given in the Leopold-Maddock paper is that there were not enough 
gaging stations along the rivers to provide a sufficient number of points. Use 
of discharge, rather than distance, makes it possible to bring onto one graph 
the main stream and its tributaries of all sizes; or, for that matter, since "main 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 145 

stream" is a relative term, all the neighboring streams in an area large enough 
to provide enough points to bring out the significant relationships. 

This explanation does not quite answer the question, unless expediency is an 
answer, but it raises another question. 

Velocity at any given place at any gaging station, for example varies with 
variations in discharge from time to time during the year; as discharge and 
depth increase, usually in the spring, velocity at a given place increases very 
markedly. We may ask, then, what discharge is represented by the points on 
the lower graph? The question is pertinent, because we know that in most 
rivers much of the year's transportation of bed load the sand and gravel that 
move along the bed is accomplished during a relatively brief period of maxi- 
mum discharge. But these graphs show mean annual discharges, and the 
velocities developed at those discharges. The reason for using mean annual 
discharge is said to be that this parameter is readily available at a large number 
of gaging stations. This explanation does not answer the question: what is the 
relevance of mean annual discharge in an analysis of the geologic work of 
rivers? 

This general question, which applies to each of the stations considered indi- 
vidually, takes on another meaning when the relations between mean annual 
discharge and maximum discharge on streams are considered. Reference to 
Water Supply Paper 1559 (1960, p. 169) indicates that at point 13 (Fig. 1), 
which represents a gaging station on the North Fork of Owl Creek, the average 
annual discharge for the 14-year period of record was 15 cfs (cubic feet per 
second), whereas the maximum discharge during the same period was 3200 cfs; 
that is, the maximum was about 213 times the average. The same paper 
(p. 234) indicates that at point 19, which represents the Yellowstone River at 
Sidney, Montana, the average annual discharge over a 46-year period was 
13, 040 cfs, whereas the maximum during the same period was 15 9, 000 cfs; 
here the maximum was about 12 times the average. The noteworthy thing 
about this graph the thing that makes it so exciting is that it shows that 
velocity increases downstream although we know from observation that grain 
size decreases downstream. The significance of the graph is more readily under- 
stood when we remember: (1) that the larger grains move only at times of 
maximum discharge; (2) that this graph shows mean annual discharge; and (3) 
that in the small rivers on the left side, the maximum discharge may be more 
than 200 times as great as the discharge shown on the graph, while in the big 
rivers on the right, it is less than 20, and usually less than 10 times the discharge 
shown, that is, that the critical ratios on the two sides are of a different order of 
magnitude. The slope of the line is an important statistical fact, but it does 
not bear directly on transportation of bed load by rivers. 

One more thought in this connection. The depth at average annual dis- 
charge at point 13, on the North Fork of Owl Creek, is shown in the middle 



146 J. HOOVER MACKIN 

graph as being something less than 0.6 foot. I know the general area, and, 
although I have no measurements at this gaging station, it is my recollection 
that the larger boulders on the bed of the North Fork are more than 0.6 foot 
in diameter the boulders on the bed have diameters that are of the same order 
of magnitude as the depth at which the very low velocity shown for this point 
was calculated. Similar relationships obtain for other small headwater streams, 
the points for which anchor down, so to speak, the left end of the line. 

Let us look briefly at one more aspect of the case. The velocity is lower near 
the bed of a river than near the surface. Rubey (1938) and others have shown 
that the movement of bed load is determined, not by the average velocity, but 
by the velocity near the bed. And it has also been established that the relation 
between average velocity and what Rubey calls "bed velocity" varies markedly 
with depth of water, roughness of channel, and other factors. We may reason- 
ably ask, then, what velocity is represented by the points on the graph? The 
answer is spelled out clearly by Leopold and Maddock (1953, p. 5). 

Velocity discussed in this report is the quotient of discharge divided by 
the area of the cross section, and is the mean velocity of the cross section as 
used in hydraulic practice . . . This mean velocity is not the most meaningful 
velocity parameter for discussing sediment transport, but it is the only 
measure of velocity for which a large volume of data is available. Although 
the writers recognize its limitations, the mean velocity is used here in lieu of 
adequate data on a more meaningful parameter. 

There are various other similar questions about this graph, some of which 
are discussed by the authors in the clear and candid style of the last quotation. 
I will not develop these questions, or the secondary and tertiary questions that 
spring from the answers. Some of you may be thinking: never mind the indi- 
vidual points; what about the trends? It could be argued that if the conclusions 
are internally consistent; if they match those for other river systems; if, in 
short, these procedures get results, this alone justifies them. 

Let's look at the results. Figure 2 is the velocity-discharge graph of Fig. 1, 
modified by use of symbols to identify related points and with dashed lines for 
individual rivers. 

Points 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, are on the main stem of the Big Horn River. Points 
1, 2, and 3 are in the Big Horn Basin; point 4 is about 50 miles downstream 
from 3, and 5 is about 20 miles downstream from 4. The dashed line, which 
fits these points quite well, slopes down to the right; it means that on the main 
stem of the Big Horn, velocity decreases downstream. 

Points 6, 7, 8, and 9 are on the Wind River, which is actually the upper 
part of the Big Horn River. I do not know whether points 8 and 9 represent 
the same types of channel conditions as 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, as suggested by their 
positions, or whether they should be grouped with 6 and 7, as called for by the 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 



147 




10 



100 1000 

Mean annual discharge, cfs 



10,000 



FIG. 2. Same as velocity-discharge graph in Fig. 1, with dashed lines for certain 
rivers; triangles, Greybull River; open circles, Wind River; X's, Bighorn River; solid 
squares, Yellowstone River. 

geographic usage of the names. Let us say, then, that in what the geographers 
call the Wind River, velocity at average annual discharge increases downstream. 

Points 10 and 11, both on the Greybull River, also suggest by their relative 
position that velocity increases downstream; the line slopes up to the right. 
But point 10 is near the mouth of the Greybull, about 40 airline miles down- 
stream from 9; the average annual discharge decreases downstream (Leopold, 
1953, p. 612) partly because of withdrawal of water for irrigation. Velocity 
actually decreases very markedly downstream on the Greybull. 

Points 17, 18, and 19 are on the main stem of the Yellowstone. It appears 
from this graph that velocity increases downstream between 17 and 18, and 
decreases downstream between 18 and 19. 

The generalization that velocity increases downstream, at a rate expressed 
by the slope of the solid line on this graph, is a particular type of empirical 
answer. It is what the nonstatistician is likely to think of as an "insurance 
company 35 type of statistic a generalization applying to this group of rivers 
collectively, but not necessarily to any member of the group. Of the river 
segments represented on the graph, about half increase in velocity down- 
stream, and about half decrease in velocity downstream. As shown by the 
different slopes of the dashed lines, in no two of them is the rate of change in 
velocity the same. 

This is really not very surprising. The solid line averages velocity-discharge 
relations in river segments that are, as we have seen, basically unlike in this 
respect. Moreover, slope, which certainly enters into velocity, is not on the 
graph at all. For these reasons the equation of the solid line is not a definitive 
answer to any geologic question. 

But and here I change my tune this graph was not intended to provide 
a firm answer to any question. It is only one step a preliminary descriptive 
step in an inquiry into velocity changes in rivers from head to mouth. This 
is accomplished by plotting certain conveniently available data on a scatter 
diagram. 



148 J. HOOVER MACKIX 

I have indicated earlier how this procedure, which is empirical, expedient, 
and quantitative, serves the practicing engineer very well in getting answers 
that are of the right order of magnitude for use in design in deadline situations. 
Here we see the same procedure operating as a step in a scientific investigation. 
It is used in this graph to learn something about velocity relations in rivers 
from a mass of data that were obtained for a different purpose; the purpose 
of U. S. Geological Survey gaging stations is to measure discharge, not velocity. 
This gleaning of one kind of information from measurements particularly 
long-term records of measurements that are more or less inadequate because 
they were not planned to provide that kind of information, is a very common 
operation in many scientific investigations, and is altogether admirable. 

There is another point to be made about this graph. Before the work repre- 
sented by it was done, there had been no comprehensive investigations of 
velocity in rivers from head to mouth: this study was on the frontier. In these 
circumstances, some shots in the dark some shotgun shots in the dark were 
quite in order. The brevity with which this point can be stated is not a measure 
of its importance. 

Finally, I wish to emphasize that Leopold and Maddock did not regard the 
solid line as an answer its equation was not the goal of their investigation. 
They went on in this same paper, and in others that have followed it, to deal 
with velocities developed at peak discharges and with many other aspects of 
the hydraulic geometry of river channels. It is for this reason, and the other 
two reasons just stated, that I can use the graph as I have without harm to its 
authors. 

But our literature is now being flooded by data and graphs such as these, 
without any of the justifications, engineering or scientific, that I have outlined. 
In many instances the graph is simply a painless way of getting a quantitative 
answer from a hodge-podge of data, obtained in the course of the investigation, 
perhaps at great expense, but a hodge-podge nevertheless because of the failure 
of the investigator to think the problem through prior to and throughout the 
period of data gathering. The equations read from the graphs or arrived at 
by other mechanical manipulations of the data are presented as terminal scien- 
tific conclusions. I suggest that the equations may be terminal engineering 
conclusions, but, from the point of view of science, they are statements of prob- 
lems, not conclusions. A statement of a problem may be very valuable, but if 
it is mistaken for a conclusion, it is worse than useless because it implies that 
the study is finished when in fact it is only begun. 

If this empirical approach this blind probing were the only way of quan- 
tifying geology, we would have to be content with it. But it is not; the quanti- 
tative approach is associated with the empirical approach, but it is not wedded 
to it. If you will list mentally the best papers in your own field, you will dis- 
cover that most of them are quantitative and rational. In the study of rivers 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 149 

I think of Gilbert's field and laboratory studies of Sierra Nevada mining debris 
(1914, 1917), and Rubey's analysis of the force required to move particles on 
a stream bed (1938). These geologists, and many others that come to mind, 
have (or had) the happy faculty of dealing \\ith numbers \vithout being carried 
away by them of quantifying without, in the same measure, taking leave 
of their senses. I am not at all sure that the percentage of geologists capable 
of doing this has increased very much since Gilbert's day. I suggest that 
an increase in this percentage, or an increase in the rate of increase, is in the 
direction of true progress. 

We shall be seeing more and more of shotgun empiricism in geologic writings, 
and perhaps we shall be using it in our own investigations and reports. We must 
learn to recognize it when we see it, and to be aware of both its usefulness and 
its limitations. Certainly there is nothing wrong with it as a tool, but, like most 
tools, how well it works depends on how intelligently it is used. 

Causes of Slope of the Longitudinal Profile 

We can now turn to a matter which seems to me the crux of the difference 
between the empirical and the rational methods of investigation, namely, 
cause-and-effect relations. 5 I would like to bring out, first, an important 
difference between immediate and superficial causes as opposed to long-term, 
geologic causes; and second, the usefulness, almost the necessity, of thinking 
a process through, back to the long-term causes, as a check on quantitative 
observations and conclusions. 

Most engineers would regard an equation stating that the size of the pebbles 
that can be carried by a river is a certain power of its bed velocity as a com- 
plete statement of the relationship. The equation says nothing about cause 



5 I am aware that my tendency to think in terms of cause and effect would be regarded 
as a mark of scientific naivete by some scientists and most philosophers. My persistence 
in this habit of thought after having been warned against it does not mean that I chal- 
lenge their wisdom. Perhaps part of the difficulty lies in a difference between what I 
call long-term geologic causes and what are sometimes called ultimate causes. For 
example, a philosopher might say, "Yes, it is clear that such things as discharge and size 
of pebbles may control or cause the slope of an adjusted river, but what, then, is the 
cause of the discharge and the pebble size? And if these are effects of the height of the 
mountains at the headwaters, what, then, is the cause of the height of the mountains"? 
Every cause is an effect, and every effect is a cause. Where do we stop? I can only 
answer that I am at the moment concerned with the geologic work of rivers, not with 
the cause of upheaval of mountains. The question, where do we stop?, is for the phi- 
losopher, who deals with all knowledge; the quest for ultimate causes, or the futility 
of that quest, is in his province. The investigator in science commonly stays within 
his own rather narrow field of competence and, especially if time is an important 
element of his systems, he commonly finds it useful to think in terms of cause and effect 
in that field. The investigator is never concerned with ultimate causes. 



150 J. HOOVER MACKIN 

and effect, and the engineer might be surprised if asked which of the two, 
velocity or grain size, is the cause and which is the effect. He would almost 
certainly reply that velocity controls or determines the size of the grains that 
can be moved, and that therefore velocity is the cause. To clinch this argu- 
ment, he might point out that if, by the turn of a valve, the velocity of a labora- 
tory river were sufficiently increased, grains that previously had been at rest 
on the bed would begin to move; that is, on the basis of direct observation, and 
by the commonsense test of relative timing, the increase in velocity is the cause 
of the movement of the larger grains. This is as far as the engineer needs to 
go in most of his operations on rivers. 

He might be quite willing to take the next step and agree that the velocity 
is, in turn, partly determined by the slope. In fact, getting into the swing of 
the cause-and-effect game, he might even volunteer this idea, which is in terri- 
tory familiar to him. But the next question what then, is the cause of the 
slope? leads into unfamiliar territory; many engineers, and some geologists, 
simply take slope for granted. 

Our engineer would probably be at first inclined to question the sanity of 
anvone suggesting that the size of the grains carried by a river determines the 
velocity of the river. But in any long-term view, the sizes of the grains that are 
supplied to a river are determined, not by the river, but by the characteristics 
of the rocks, relief, vegetative cover, and other physical properties of its drain- 
age basin. If the river is, as we say, graded (or as the engineer says, adjusted), 
this means that in each segment the slope is adjusted to provide just the trans- 
porting power required to carry through that segment all the grains, of what- 
ever size, that enter it from above. Rivers that flow from rugged ranges of 
hard rock tend to develop steep slopes, adjusted to the transportation of large 
pebbles. Once they are developed, the adjusted slopes are maintained indefi- 
nitely, as long as the size of the pebbles and other controlling factors remain the 
same. Rivers that are supplied only with sand tend to maintain low slopes 
appropriate to the transportation of this material. 

If the sizes of the grains supplied to a given segment of an adjusted river are 
abruptly increased by uplift, by a climatic change, or by a work of man, the 
larger grains, which are beyond the former carrying power, are deposited in 
the upper part of the segment; the bed is raised thereby and the slope is conse- 
quently steepened. This steepening by deposition continues until that particular 
slope is attained which provides just the velocity required to carry those larger 
grains, that is, until a new equilibrium slope is developed, which the river will 
maintain thence forward so long as grain size and other slope-controlling 
conditions remain the same. 

Thus in the long view, velocity is adjusted to, or determined by, grain size; 
the test of relative timing (first the increase in grain size of material supplied 
to the river, and then, through a long period of readjustment, the increase in 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 151 

velocity) marks the change in grain size as the cause of the change in velocity. 
Note that because the period of readjustment may occupy thousands of years, 
this view is based primarily on reasoning rather than on direct observation. 
Note also that we deal here with three different frames of reference spanning 
the range from the empirical to the rational. 

The statement that grain size tends to vary directly with bed velocity is an 
equation, whose terms are transposable; neither time nor cause and effect are 
involved, and this first frame may be entirely empirical. The numerical 
answer is complete in itself. 

The short-term cause-and-effect view, that grain size is controlled by bed 
velocity, is in part rational, or if you prefer, it represents a higher level of 
empiricism. As I see it, this second frame has a significant advantage over the 
first in that it provides more fertile ground for the formulation of working 
hypotheses as to the mechanical relations between the flow and the particle at 
rest or in motion on the bed, leading to purposeful observation or to the design 
of experiments. 

The third frame, the long-term view, that velocity is controlled by grain 
size, has a great advantage over the short-term view in that it provides an un- 
derstanding of the origin of slope, which the short-term view does not attempt 
to explain. It is largely rational, or if you prefer, it represents a still higher level 
of empiricism. 

Because I think that the objective of science is an understanding of the world 
around us, I prefer the second and third frames to the first, but I hope that it is 
clear that I recognize that all the frames are valid; the best one, in every 
instance, is simply the one that most efficiently gets the job done that needs 
doing. The important thing is to recognize that there ore different frames; 
and that they overlap so completely and are so devoid of boundaries that it is 
easy to slip from one to the other. 

The difference between the rational and the empirical approach to this 
matter of river slope, and the need for knowing what frame of reference we are 
in, can be clarified by a little story. One of the earliest theories of the origin 
of meanders, published in a British engineering journal in the late eighteen 
hundreds, was essentially as follows: divested of all geographic detail. Two 
cities A and B, both on the valley floor of a meandering river, are 50 airline 
miles apart. City B is 100 feet lower than city A\ hence the average slope of 
the valley floor is two feet per mile (Fig. 3). But the slope of the river, measured 
round its loops, is only one foot per mile. The British engineer's theory was, 
in effect, though not expressed in these words, that the river said to itself, 
"How, with a slope of one foot per mile, can I manage to stay on a valley floor 
with a slope of two feet per mile? If I flow straight down the middle of the 
valley floor, starting at A, I will be 50 feet above the valley floor at 2?, and that 
simply will not do." Then it occurred to the river that it could meet this 



152 J. HOOVER MACKIN 




FIG. 3. Diagram illustrating an hypothesis for the origin of meanders. 

problem by bending its channel into loops of precisely the sinuousity required 
to keep it on the valley floor, just as a man might do with a rope too long for 
the distance between two posts. And it worked, and that's why we have 
meanders. 

Note that this theory not only explains meandering qualitatively, but puts 
all degrees of meandering, from the very loopy meanders of the ribbon-candy 
type to those that are nearly straight, on a firm quantitative basis the sinu- 
osity or degree of meandering, M, equals the slope of the valley floor, S y , 
over the slope of the river, S T . 

There is nothing wrong with this equation, so long as it only describes. 
But if its author takes it to be an explanation, as the British engineer did, and 
if he slips over from the empirical frame into the rational frame, as he may do 
almost without realizing it, he is likely to be not just off by an order of magni- 
tude, but upside-down to be not only wrong but ludicrous. This explana- 
tion of meanders leaves one item out of account the origin of the valley floor. 
The valley floor was not opened out and given its slope by a bulldozer, nor is 
it a result of special creation prior to the creation of the river. The valley 
floor was formed bv the river that flows on it. 



Causes of Downvalley Decrease in Pebble Size 

It is a matter of observation that there is commonly a downvalley decrease 
in the slopes of graded rivers, and it is also a matter of observation that there 
is commonly a downvalley decrease in the size of pebbles in alluvial deposits. 
A question arises, then, as to whether the decrease in slope is caused in part 
by the decrease in pebble size, or whether the decrease in pebble size is caused 
in part by the decrease in slope, or whether both of these changes are independ- 
ent or interdependent results of some other cause. My third and last example 
applies the empirical and rational approaches to a part of this problem, namely, 
what are the causes of the decrease in pebble size? The reasoning is somewhat 
more involved than in the other examples; in this respect it is more truly rep- 
resentative of the typical geologic problem. 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IX GEOLOGY 153 

The downvalley decrease in pebble size could be caused by either of two 
obvious, sharply contrasted mechanisms: (1) abrasional wear of the pebbles 
as they move along the bed of the stream, and (2 ) selective transportation, that 
is, a leaving-behind of the larger pebbles. The question is, which mechanism 
causes the decrease, or, if both operate, what is their relative importance? 

There is no direct and satisfactory' way of obtaining an answer to this ques- 
tion by measurement, however detailed, of pebble sizes in alluvial deposits. 
The most commonly used approach is by means of laboratory experiment. 
Usually fragments of rock of one or more kinds are placed in a cylinder which 
can be rotated on a horizontal axis and is so constructed that the fragments 
slide, roll, or drop as it turns. The fragments are remeasured from time to 
time to determine the reduction in size, the corresponding travel distance 
being calculated from the circumference of the cylinder and the number of 
rotations. This treatment does not approximate very closely the processes of 
wear in an actual river bed. Kuenen (1959) has recently developed a better 
apparatus, in which the fragments are moved over a concrete floor in a circular 
path by a current of water. Whatever the apparatus, it is certain that the 
decrease in pebble size observed in the laboratory is due wholly to abrasion, 
because none of the pebbles can be left behind; there is no possibility of 
selective transportation. 

When the laboratory rates of reduction in pebble size per unit of travel 
distance are compared with the downvalley decrease in pebble size in alluvial 
deposits along most rivers, it is found that the decrease in size along the rivers 
is somewhat greater than would be expected on the basis of laboratory data on 
rates of abrasion. If the rates of abrasion in the laboratory correctly represent 
the rates of abrasion in the river bed, it should be only necessary to subtract 
to determine what percentage of the downvalley decrease in grain size in the 
alluvial deposits is due to selective transportation. 

Field and laboratory data bearing on this problem have been reviewed by 
Scheidegger (1961) in his textbook, "Theoretical Geomorphology," which is 
about as far out on the quantitative side as it is possible to get. Scheidegger 
(p. 175) concludes that ". . . the most likely mechanism of pebble gradation 
in rivers consists of pebbles becoming contriturated due to the action of fric- 
tional forces, but being assigned their position along the stream bed by a sorting 
process due to differential transportation." 

If I understand it correctly, this statement means that pebbles are made 
smaller by abrasion, but that the downvalley decrease in pebble size in alluvial 
deposits is due largely (or wholly?) to selective transportation. 

On a somewhat different basis the rate of reduction of pebbles of less re- 
sistant rock, relative to quartzite, in a downvalley direction in three rivers 
east of the Black Hills Plumley (1948) concludes that about 25 per cent of 



154 



J. HOOVER MACKIN 



the reduction in these rivers is due to abrasion, and about 75 per cent is due to 
selective transportation. 

These two conclusions as to the cause of the downstream decrease in pebble 
size, solidly based on measurements, agree in ascribing it mainly to selective 
transportation. Let us try a different approach let us think through the long- 
term implications of the processes. 

Downstream decrease in pebble size by selective transportation requires that 
the larger pebbles be left behind permanently. The three-inch pebbles, for 
example, move downstream to a certain zone, and are deposited there because 
they cannot be transported farther. The two-inch pebbles are carried farther 
downstream, to be deposited in an appropriate zone as the slope decreases. 
These zones may have considerable length along the stream, they may be 
poorly defined, and they may of course overlap, but there is a downstream 
limit beyond which no pebbles of a given size occur in the alluvial deposits 
because none could be carried beyond that limit, which is set by transporting 
power. 

Consider a river carrying a bed load of sand and gravel under steady-state 
conditions such that the slope and altitude in a given segment are maintained 
indefinitely without change, and let it be assumed for simplicity that the 
channel is floored and walled by rock (Fig. 4a). The load moves chiefly 



^TO*^ 








(c) 




Flo. 4. Diagram illustrating exchange in graded and aggrading rivers. 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 155 

during high-water stages and lodges on the bed during low-water stages. The 
smaller pebbles are likely to be set in motion sooner than the larger pebbles 
during each rising stage, they are likely to move faster while in motion, and 
they are likely to be kept in motion longer during each falling stage. In this 
sense, the transportation process is selective if a slug of gravel consisting of 
identifiable pebbles were dumped into the segment, the smaller pebbles would 
outrun the larger, and this would cause a downstream decrease in the sizes of 
these particular pebbles in the low-water deposits. But in the steady-state con- 
dition, that is, with a continuous supply of a particular type of pebble or of 
pebbles of all types, all the pebbles deposited on the bed during the low stages 
must be placed in motion during the high stages; if the larger pebbles were 
permanently left behind during the seasonal cycles of deposition and erosion, the 
bed would be raised, and this, in turn, would change the condition. A non- 
aggrading river flowing in a channel which is floored and walled by rock cannot 
rid itself of coarse material by deposition because there is no place to deposit it 
where it will be out of reach of the river during subsequent fluctuations of flow; 
every pebble entering a given segment must eventually pass on through it. 
The smaller pebbles move more rapidly into the segment than the larger 
pebbles, but they also move more rapidly out of it. In the steady-state condi- 
tion, the channel deposits from place to place in the segment contain the same 
proportions of the smaller and larger pebbles as though all moved at the same 
rate. Selective transportation cannot be a contributing cause of a downstream 
decrease in pebble size hi our model river because there can be no selective 
deposition. 

In a real river that maintains the same level as it meanders on a broad 
valley floor, bed load deposited along the inner side of a shifting bend is ex- 
changed for an equal volume of slightly older channel deposits eroded from 
the outside of the bend. If these channel deposits were formed by the same 
river, operating under the same conditions and at the same level over a long 
period of time (Fig. 4b), the exchange process would not cause a reduction 
in the gram size of the bed load; insofar as selective transportation is concerned, 
the relation would be the same as hi our model river. But if, by reason of 
capture or climatic change or any other change in controlling conditions, the 
older alluvial deposits in a given segment are finer grained than the bed load 
now entering that segment (Fig. 4c), exchange will cause a decrease in pebble 
size in a downstream direction, at least until the older deposits have been 
completely replaced by deposits representing the new regime. Exchange also 
causes a reduction hi grain size if the river, maintaining the same level, cuts 
laterally into weak country rock that yields material finer in grain size than 
the load that is being concomitantly deposited on the widening valley floor. 

The selective transportation associated with the process of exchange in 
the graded river, while by no means negligible, is much less effective as a 



156 J. HOOVER MACKIX 

cause of downstream decrease in pebble size than the selective transportation 
that characterizes the aggrading river. The essential difference is shown in 
Fig. 4(dj: some of the deposits formed by one swing of the aggrading river 
across its valley floor are not subject to reworking in later swings, because the 
channel is slowly rising. The largest pebbles in transit in a given segment in a 
high-\\ater stage are likely to be concentrated in the basal part of the deposit 
formed during the next falling stage. Thus the aggrading river rids itself of 
these pebbles, selectively and permanently, and there is a corresponding down- 
stream decrease in pebble sizes in the deposits. 

If upbuilding of the flood plain by deposition of overbank material keeps 
pace with aggradational rising of the channel, the shifting meanders may 
exchange channel deposits for older alluvium consisting wholly or in part of 
relatively fine-grained overbank material (Fig. 4d). But in rapidly aggrading 
rivers this rather orderly process may give way to a fill-spill mechanism in which 
filling of the channel is attended by the splaying of channel deposits over ad- 
joining parts of the valley floor. On some proglacial outwash plains this type 
of braiding causes boulder detritus near the ice front to grade into pebbly sand 
within a few miles; there is doubtless some abrasional reduction in grain size 
in the proglacial rivers, but nearly all the decrease must be due to selective 
transportation. 

Briefly then, thinking the process through indicates that the downstream 
decrease in grain size in river deposits in some cases may be almost wholly due 
to abrasion, and in others almost wholly due to selective transportation, depend- 
ing primarily on whether the river is graded or aggrading and on the rate of 
aggradation. It follows that no generalization as to the relative importance of 
abrasion versus selective transportation in rivers all rivers has any mean- 
ing. 

A different way of looking at this problem has been mentioned in another 
connection. As already noted, selective transportation implies permanent 
deposition, for example, the three-inch pebbles in a certain zone, the two-inch 
pebbles in another zone farther downstream, and so on. If this deposition is 
caused by a downstream decrease in slope, as is often implied and sometimes 
stated explicitly (Scheidegger, p. 171), then what is the cause of the decrease 
in slope? We know that the valley floor was not shaped by a bulldozer, and we 
know that it was not formed by an act of special creation before the river began 
to flow. As we have seen in considering the origin of meanders, rivers normally 
shape their own valley floors. If the river is actively aggrading, this is usually 
because of some geologically recent change such that the gradient in a given 
segment is not steep enough to enable the river to move through that segment 
all of the pebbles entering it; in this (aggrading) river, the size of the pebbles 
that are carried is controlled in part by the slope, and the larger pebbles are 
left behind. But if the river is graded, the slope in each segment is precisely 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 157 

that required to enable the river, under the prevailing hydraulic conditions, 
whatever they may be, to carry the load supplied to it. The same three-inch 
pebbles that are the largest seen on the bed and banks in one zone will, after a 
while, be the two-inch pebbles in a zone farther downstream. 

We cannot wait long enough to verify this conclusion by direct observation 
of individual pebbles, because the pebbles ordinarily remain at rest in alluvial 
deposits on the valley floor for very long intervals of time between jogs of move- 
ment in the channel. We are led to the conclusion by reasoning, rather than 
by direct observation. In the long-term view, the graded river is a transporta- 
tion system in equilibrium, which means that it maintains the same slope so 
long as conditions remain the same. There is no place in this self-maintaining 
system for permanent deposits: if the three-inch pebbles entering a given zone 
accumulated there over a period of geologic time, they would raise the bed 
and change the slope. As the pebbles, in their halting downvalley movement 
in the channel, are reduced in size by abrasion, and perhaps also by weathering 
while they are temporarily at rest in the valley floor alluvium, the slope, which 
is being adjusted to their transportation, decreases accordingly. 

Does this reasoning settle the problem? Of course not ! It merely makes us 
take a more searching look at the observational data. Since it is theoretically 
certain that the mechanisms which cause pebbles to decrease in size as they 
travel downstream operate differently, depending on whether the river is 
graded or aggrading, there is no sense in averaging measurements made along 
graded rivers with those made along aggrading rivers. However meticulous 
the measurements, and however refined the statistical treatment of them, the 
average will have no meaning. 6 

The reasoning tells us that, first of all, the rivers to be studied in connection 
with change of pebble size downstream must be selected with care. Because a 
steady-state condition is always easier to deal with quantitatively than a shifting 
equilibrium, it would be advisable to restrict the study, at the outset, to the 
deposits of graded rivers; when these are understood, we will be ready to deal 
with complications introduced by varying rates of aggradation. Similarly, it 
will be well, at least at the beginning, to eliminate altogether, or at least reduce 
to a minimum, the complicating effects of contributions from tributaries or 
other local sources; this can be done by selecting river segments without large 
tributaries, or by focusing attention on one or more distinctive rock types from 
known sources. There are unavoidable sampling problems, but some of these 

6 I owe to Frank Calkins the thought that, like most hybrids, this one would be 
sterile. The significance of this way of expressing what I have been saying about the 
averaging of unlike things is brought out by Conant's (1951, p. 25) definition of science 
as "an interconnected series of concepts and conceptual schemes that have developed 
as a result of experimentation and observation and are fruitful of further experimenta- 
tion and observations. In this definition the emphasis is on the word 'fruitful'." 



158 J. HOOVER MACKIX 

can readily be avoided; for example, there are many river segments in which 
the alluvial deposits are not contaminated by lag materials. Any attempt to 
develop sampling procedures must take into account, first of all, the fact that 
the channel deposits in a given segment of a valley differ significantly in grada- 
tion of grain size from the material moving through the channel in that segment 
in any brief period; the investigation may deal with the bed load (trapped in a 
box, so to speak), or with the deposits, or with both; but if both bed load and 
the deposits are measured, the measurements can only be compared, they can- 
not be averaged. Certainly we must investigate, in each river individually, the 
effects of weathering of the pebbles during periods of rest. 

\Ve must also take another hard look at the abrasion rales obtained by 
laboratory- experiments, and try to determine in what degree these are directly 
comparable with abrasion rates in rivers. It is clearly desirable to develop other 
independent checks, such as those given by Plumley's measurement of rates 
of downstream reduction in sizes of pebbles of rock types differing in resistance 
to abrasion. Finally, it goes \\ithout saying that the reasoning itself must be 
continuously checked against the evidence, and one line of reasoning must be 
checked against others, to make sure that the mental wheels have not slipped 
a cog or two. 

\Vhen we eventually have sufficient data on rates of downstream decrease of 
pebble size in alluvial deposits along many different types of rivers (considered 
individually), it will be possible to evaluate separately, in quantitative terms, 
the effect of special circumstances influencing the process of exchange in graded 
rivers, rates of aggradation in aggrading rivers, and the other causes of down- 
stream decrease in pebble size. These generalizations will apply to all river 
deposits, modern as well as ancient, and it may even be that we can draw sound 
inferences regarding the hydraulic characteristics of the ancient rivers by com- 
paring their deposits with those of modern rivers, in which the hydraulic 
characteristics can be measured. 

This rational method of problem-solving is difficult and tortuous, but the 
history of science makes it clear, again and again, that if the system to be in- 
vestigated is complex, the longest way 'round is the shortest way home; 
most of the empirical shortcuts turn out to be blind alleys. 



Whither Are We Drifting, Methodologically? 

I would like now to return to some of the questions asked at the outset. 
Must we accept, as gospel, Lord Kelvin's pronouncement that what cannot be 
stated in numbers is not science? To become respectable members of the scien- 
tific community, must we drastically change our accustomed habits of thought, 
abandoning the classic geologic approach to problem-solving? To the extent 
that this approach is qualitative, is it necessarily loose, and therefore bad? 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 159 

Must we now move headlong to quantify our operations on the assumption 
that whatever is quantitative is necessarily rigorous and therefore good? 

Why has the swing to the quantitative come so late? Is it because our early 
leaders, men such as Hutton, Lyell, Agassiz, Heim, Gilbert, and Davis, were 
intellectually a cut or two below their counterparts in classical physics? There 
is a more reasonable explanation, which is well known to students of the history 
of science. In each field of study the timing of the swing to the quantitative 
and the present degree of quantification are largely determined by the subject 
matter: the number and complexity of the interdependent components involved 
in its systems, the relative ease or difficulty of obtaining basic data, the suscepti- 
bility of those data to numerical expression, and the extent to which time is an 
essential dimension. The position of geology relative to the basic sciences has 
been stated with characteristic vigor by Walter Bucher (1941) in a paper that 
seems to have escaped the attention of our apologists. 

Classical physics was quantitative from its very beginning as a science; it 
moved directly from observations made hi the laboratory under controlled 
conditions to abstractions that were quantitative at the outset. The quantifi- 
cation of chemistry lagged 100 years behind that of physics. The chemistry 
of a candle flame is of an altogether different order of complexity from the 
physics of Galileo's rolling ball; the flame is only one of many types of oxidation; 
and oxidation is only one of many ways in which substances combine. There 
had to be an immense accumulation of quantitative data, and many minor 
discoveries some of them accidental, but most of them based on planned 
investigations before it was possible to formulate such a sweeping generaliza- 
tion as the law of combining weights. 

If degree of quantification of its laws were a gage of maturity in a science 
(which it is not), geology and biology would be 100 to 200 years behind chem- 
istry. Before Bucher (1933) could formulate even a tentative set of "laws" for 
deformation of the earth's crust, an enormous descriptive job had to be well 
under way. Clearly, it was necessary to know what the movements of the crust 
are before anybody could frame explanations of them. But adequate description 
of even a single mountain range demands the best efforts of a couple of genera- 
tions of geologists, with different special skills, working in the field and the 
laboratory. Because no two ranges are alike, the search for the laws of mountain 
growth requires that we learn as much as we can about every range we can 
climb and also about those no longer here to be climbed; the ranges of the 
past, which we must reconstruct as best we can by study of their eroded stumps, 
are as significant as those of the present. Rates of growth and relative ages of 
past and present ranges are just as important as their geometry; the student of 
the mechanics of crustal deformation must think like a physicist and also like 
a historian, and these are very different ways of thinking, difficult to combine. 
The evidence is hard to come by, it is largely circumstantial, and there is never 



160 J. HOOVER MACKIX 

enough of it. Laboratory models are helpful only within narrow limits. So it 
is also with the mechanism of emplacement of batholiths, and the origin of 
ore-forming fluids, and the shaping of landforms of all kinds, and most other 
truly geologic problems. 

It is chiefly for these reasons that most geologists have been preoccupied 
with manifold problems of description of geologic things and processes particu- 
lar things and processes and have been traditionally disinclined to generalize 
even in qualitative terms. Because most geologic evidence cannot readily be 
stated in numbers, and because most geologic systems are so complex that some 
qualitative grasp of the problem must precede effective quantitative study, we 
are even less inclined to generalize in quantitative terms. Even-body knows 
the story of Lord Kelvin's calculation of the age of the earth. 

These things are familiar, but they are worth saying because they explain 
why geology is only now fully in the swing to the quantitative. Perhaps it would 
have been better if the swing had begun earlier, but this is by no means certain. 
A meteorologist has told me that meteorology might be further ahead today if 
its plunge to the quantitative had been somewhat less precipitous if there 
had been a broader observational base for a qualitative understanding of its 
exceedingly complex systems before these were quantified. At any rate, it is 
important that we recognize that the quantification of geology is a normal 
evolutionary process, which is more or less on schedule. The quantification 
will proceed at an accelerating pace, however much our ultraconservatives 
may drag their feet. I have been trying to point out that there is an attendant 
danger: as measurements increase in complexity and refinement, and as mathe- 
matical manipulations of the data become more sophisticated, these measure- 
ments and manipulations may become so impressive in form that the investi- 
gator tends to lose sight of their meaning and purpose. 7 

This tendency is readily understandable. Some of the appealing features of 
the empirical method have already been mentioned. Moreover, the very act 
of making measurements, in a fixed pattern, provides a solid sense of accom- 
plishment. If the measurements are complicated, involving unusual techniques 

7 The subtitle of a recent article by Krumbein (1962), "Quantification and the ad- 
vent of the computer open new vistas in a science traditionally qualitative" makes 
evident the overlap of our interests. Professor Krumbein's article deals explicitly with 
a mechanical method of processing data; the fact that there is no mention of the use 
of reasoning in testing the quality and relevance of the data to the specific issue being 
investigated certainly does not mean that he thinks one whit less of the "rational 
method" than I do. Similarly, I hope that nothing that I have said or failed to say is 
construed as meaning that I have an aversion to mechanical methods of analyzing 
data; such methods are unquestionably good if they bring out relationships not other- 
wise evident, or in any other way advance the progress of the rational method of in- 
vestigation. When mechanical processes replace reasoning processes, and when a num- 
ber replaces understanding as the objective, danger enters. 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 161 

and apparatus and a special jargon, they give the investigator a good feeling 
of belonging to an elite group, and of pushing back the frontiers. Presentation 
of the results is simplified by use of mathematical shorthand, and even though 
nine out of ten interested geologists do not read that shorthand with ease, the 
author can be sure that seven out of the ten will at least be impressed. It is 
an advantage or disadvantage of mathematical shorthand, depending on the 
point of view, that things can be said in equations, impressively, even arro- 
gantly, which are so nonsensical that they would embarrass even the author 
if spelled out in words. 

As stated at the outset, the real issue is not a matter of classical geologic 
methods versus quantification. Geology- is largely quantitative, and it is rapidly 
and properly becoming more so. The real issue is the rational method versus 
the empirical method of solving problems; the point that I have tried to make 
is that if the objective is an understanding of the system investigated, and if 
that system is complex, then the empirical method is apt to be less efficient 
than the rational method. Most geologic features ledges of rock, mineral 
deposits, landscapes, segments of a river channel present an almost infinite 
variety of elements, each susceptible to many different sorts of measurement. 
We cannot measure them all to any conventional standard of precision blind 
probing will not work. Some years ago (1941) I wrote that the "eye and brain, 
unlike camera lens and sensitized plate, record completely only what they 
intelligently seek out." Jim Gilluly expresses the same thought more succinctly 
in words to the effect that most exposures provide answers only to questions 
that are put to them. It is only by thinking, as we measure, that we can avoid 
listing together in a field book, and after a little while, averaging, random 
dimensions of apples and oranges and apple crates and orange trees. 

Briefly, then, my thesis is that the present swing to the quantitative in geology-, 
which is good, does not necessarily and should not involve a swing from the 
rational to the empirical method. Fm sure that geology' is a science, with 
different sorts of problems and methods, but not in any sense less mature than 
any other science; indeed, the day-to-day operations of the field geologist are 
apt to be far more sophisticated than those of his counterpart the experi- 
mentalist in physics or chemistry. And I'm sure that anyone who hires out 
as a geologist, whether in practice, or in research, or in teaching, and then 
operates like a physicist or a chemist, or, for that matter, like a statistician or an 
engineer, is not living up to his contract. 

The best and highest use of the brains of our youngsters is the working out 
of cause and effect relations in geologic systems, with all the help they can get 
from the other sciences and engineering, and mechanical devices of all kinds, 
but with basic reliance on the complex reasoning processes described by Gilbert, 
Chamberlin, and Johnson. 



162 J. HOOVER MACKIX 

REFERENCES CITED 



ALBRTTTON, C. C., JR., 1961, Notes on the history* and philosophy of science (1) A con- 
ference on the scope and philosophy of geology: J. Graduate Research Center, 

Southern Methodist Univ., vol. 29, no. 3, pp. 188-192. 
BUCHER, \V. H., 1933 3 The deformation of the earth's crust: Princeton, N. J., Princeton 

Univ. Press, 518 pp. 
, 1941, The nature of geological inquiry* and the training required for it: Am. 

Inst. Mining Metall. Eng., Tech. Pub. 1377, 6 pp. 
CHAMBERLIN, T. C., 1897, The method of multiple working hypotheses: J. GeoL, vol. 5, 

pp. 837-848. 

CONANT, J. B., 1951, Science and common sense: New Haven, Yale Univ. Press, 371 pp. 
, 1952, Modern science and modern man: New York, Columbia Univ. Press, 

111 pp. 

GARRELS, R. M., 1951, A textbook of geology: New York, Harper, 511 pp. 
GILBERT, G. K., 1886, The inculcation of the scientific method by example, with an 

illustration drawn from the Quaternary geology of Utah: Am. J. ScL, vol. 31, (whole 

no. 131), pp. 284-299. 
, 1914, The transportation of debris by running water: U. S. Geol. Survey, Prof. 

Paper, 86, 263 pp. 
, 1917, Hydraulic-mining debris in the Sierra Nevada: U. S. Geol. Survey, Prof. 

Paper 105, 154 pp. 
HOLTON, G., 1952, Introduction to concepts and theories in physical science: Reading, 

Mass., Addison-Wesley, 650 pp. 
JOHNSON, DOUGLAS, 1933, Role of analysis in scientific investigation: Geol. Soc. Am., B., 

vol. 44, pp. 461-494. 
KRUMBEIN, W. G., 1960, The "geological population" as a framework for analysing 

numerical data in geology: Liverpool and Manchester Geol. J., vol. 2, pt. 3, pp. 341- 

368. 

, 1962, The computer in geology: Science, vol. 136, pp. 1087-1092. 

KUENEN, P. H., 1959, Fluviatile action on sand, Part 3 of Experimental Abrasion: 

Am. J. ScL, vol. 257, pp. 172-190. 
LEOPOLD, L. B., 1953, Downstream changes of velocity in rivers: Am. J. ScL, vol. 251, 

pp. 606-624. 
, and MADDOCK, T., JR., 1953, The hydraulic geometry of stream channels and 

some physiographic implications: U. S. Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 252, 57 pp. 
MACKIN, J. H., 1941, Drainage changes near Wind Gap, Pennsylvania; a study in map 

interpretation: J. Geomorphology, vol. 4, pp. 24-53. 

, 1948, Concept of the graded river: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 59, pp. 463-512. 

PLUMLEY, W. J., 1948, Black Hills terrace gravels; a study in sediment transport: J. 

Geol., vol. 56, pp. 526-577. 
RUBEY, W. W., 1938, The force required to move particles on a stream bed: U.S. Geol. 

Survey, Prof. Paper 189-E, pp. 120-140. 
SCHEIDEGGER, A. E., 1961, Theoretical geomorphology: Berlin, Springer- Verlag, 333 pp. 



METHODS OF INVESTIGATION IN GEOLOGY 163 

SIMPSON, G. G., ROE, ANNE, and LEWONTO, R. C., 1960, Quantitative zoology: New 

York, Harcourt-Brace, 440 pp. 
U. S. Geological Survey, 1960, Surface water supply of the United States, 1958; Part 6A, 

Missouri River Basin above Sioux City, Iowa: U. S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply 

Paper 1559, 434 pp. 
WEISS, PAUL, 1962, Experience and experiment in biology: Science, vol. 136, pp. 468- 

471. 



MASON L. HILL 

Richfield Oil Corporation 



Role of Classification 
in Geology 



Goethe said that mineralogy* interested him only for two reasons: "I valued 
it for its great practical utility, and then I thought to find a document elucidat- 
ing the primary formation of the world, of which Werner's doctrine gave hopes." 
But he went on to conclude that, "Since this science has been turned upside 
down by the death of this excellent man, I do not proceed further in it, but 
remain quiet with my own convictions." (Oxenford, 1882) 

This statement, made in 1827, reflects Goethe's melancholy reaction to the 
triumph of the Plutonists 5 fruitful classification of rocks over that of Werner's 
less productive Neptunist school. The statement also illustrates the theme of 
this essay, which is that modern geologic classifications must be revised as 
knowledge increases, lest they too prove disenchanting. 

Examples of attention to classification in geology are evidenced by an early 
reclassification of sedimentary rocks (Grabau, 1904), by a more recent sym- 
posium on the classification of sediments (Pettijohn, 1948; Shrock, 1948; 
Krynine, 1948), and by a recent book on the classification of carbonate rocks 
(Ham, 1962). A discussion of fault classifications is presented here to illustrate 
the role of classification in geology, to emphasize the usefulness of rules of 
nomenclature and classification, and more particularly to show the need for a 
reclassification of faults in order to stimulate progress in structural geology. 

Classification and Ordering 

According to Webster, a classification is "a system of classes or groups, or a 
systematic division of a series of related phenomena." To classify, one must 
recognize differences and likenesses as well as gradations between things, 
processes, and concepts. Classifications are particularly difficult in geology 
because geologic things, processes, and concepts are many and complex; they 
usually need to be fixed in space and time; and they commonly involve the 

164 



ROLE OF CLASSIFICATION IN GEOLOGY 165 

terminology of other natural sciences. Furthermore, since the historical science 
of geology is concerned with the antecedents of natural phenomena, the most 
significant classifications are interpretive and are, accordingly, subject to error 
both in formulation and application. 

Although classification is usually conceived as a grouping on the basis of 
differences and likenesses, much good classification is based on gradations of 
characteristics. The arrangement of related phenomena in gradational series 
has been called "ordering 39 (Hempel, 1952 and 1959), or the continuous 
variable type of classification (Rodgers, 1950). Ordering is preferred whenever 
it is a possible means of classification, because both large and small differences 
can be expressed precisely and quantitatively. Ordering may be compared 
to a "more-or-less," rather than a "yes-or-no" relationship, where one class 
(or member) has characteristics which grade into another, instead of having 
separate characteristics. These gradational characteristics may be expressed 
either in a relative manner (before or after, larger or smaller, etc.) or quanti- 
tatively, in which case mathematical analyses may be applied. Ordering is a 
common means of classification in geology (e.g. isomorphous mineral series 
allow quantitative chemical classification, or "late Eocene" provides compara- 
tive age classification). Often artificial grouping is employed in a gradational 
series to facilitate scientific work and communication (e.g., clay, silt, sand, and 
gravel are useful classes of sediments within a gradational series of clast sizes). 
Sometimes classes will be separated by nongradational differences in a classi- 
fication, whereas members within these classes may vary gradationally and 
thus be subject to ordering. Thus igneous and sedimentary rocks are generally 
nongradational, whereas members of both classes usually vary gradationally. 
Ordering is especially adaptable to expressing quantitative relationships in 
mineralogy, petrology, paleontology, and other geologic fields, by graphs 
showing two or more gradational variables. 

Classifications of Faults 

The history of geology records many examples of unproductive as well as 
fruitful classifications, for the contrast between the Wernerian and Huttonian 
classifications of rocks finds parallels in many less dramatic cases. Far too many 
geologic terms are either so misleading or so commonly misused that they 
actually retard scientific progress. The use of names which imply knowledge 
that does not exist is particularly reprehensible. Thus genetic terms such as 
"turbidites" and "slump structures" are often applied to features whose origins 
are uncertain. This practice not only promulgates error but also discourages 
further study of the objects under investigation. To the extent that the classi- 
fications of faults now in use imply knowledge which usually does not exist, 
these must be suspected of retarding progress in structural geology. 



166 }^L\SOX L. HILL 

The terminology of faulting presumably began more than 150 years ago in 
the British coal mines with the words "at fault" used to express the abrupt 
termination of coal seams. As experience was gained in locating the displaced 
continuations of these seams, it was discovered that planar structures along 
which movement apparently had occurred were responsible for abrupt separa- 
tions of the coal beds. Such structures have continued to be known as faults, 
and although defined as fractures along which relative movement has occurred, 
the concept is not complete without at least some reference to the geometric 
relations of one fault wall to the other. As geologists mapped other terrains, 
faults of different characteristics were described. To distinguish between faults 
of differing characteristics the names normal, reverse, thrust, and lateral were 
gradually introduced, and used as a classification of faults. These terms are 
not only common in English geologic literature, but they have equivalents in 
most other languages; and the structures they denote are shown by conven- 
tional symbols on geologic maps and sections. Unfortunately, these terms do 
not mean the same things to all geologists, as demonstrated by variations in 
definition revealed in glossaries, textbooks, periodicals, and in oral discussions. 
For example, Beloussov (1962) gives a classification of faults based on relative 
and absolute movements without describing criteria for the determination of 
slip. Furthermore, the basic concept of fault separation as contrasted to slip 
is not presented. In another section of the same textbook, a genetic classifica- 
tion of faults is given without any indication as to how it is to be used. Concern 
over classification is evidenced in a number of recent discussions including 
those of Boyer and Muehlberger (1960), Crowell (1959), Kelley (1960), and 
Kupfer (1960). 

It is obvious that the sense of movement on faults is of paramount tectonic 
importance. It is true, but not obvious, that geologists can rarely determine 
fault slip (actual relative movement). It is also true, and again not generally 
obvious, that geologists classify most faults on the basis of separations (apparent 
relative movements) but erroneously use the terms normal, reverse, thrust, and 
lateral in relation to slip. This confusion between the concepts of fault separa- 
tion and fault slip, in the common usage of these terms, is the result of imperfect 
classification. 

Although Reid, et al. (1913) did much to standardize and establish modern 
fault nomenclature, they .allowed the terms normal and reverse to mean ambigu- 
ously either slip or separation. Gill (1941) in a committee effort which recog- 
nized the difference between slip and separation, recommended the fault names 
"normal," "reverse," "right," "left," and combinations thereof (e.g., "right 
reverse fault") on the basis of relative slip, but without proposing complemen- 
tary terms based on fault separations (the usual evidence for faults). Certainly 
a logical and progressive fault classification, based on sound rules for good 
nomenclature and classification, is long overdue. 



ROLE OF CLASSIFICATION IN GEOLOGY 



167 




FIG. 1. Diagram of normal left-lateral fault. The dip separation A and the strike 
separation B are used for the separation-based (apparent relative movement) classifica- 
tion of this fault. The slip-based (actual relative movement) classification would be 
used as follows, if slips of diagram were approximately determined: (1) reverse left- 
lateral slip fault; (2) left-lateral slip fault; (3) normal left-lateral slip fault; (4) normal 
slip fault; and (5) normal right-lateral slip fault. 



Dual classification of faults. Most faults are recognized by discontinuities of 
planar or tabular geologic elements. The accompanying diagram (Fig. 1) 
shows that the displacement of a tabular geologic element with fixed strike 
separation (B) and dip separation (A) can be accomplished by slips (1) through 
(5) and thus demonstrates that separation (apparent relative movement) and 
slip (actual relative movement) are different concepts. The fault slip (sense 
and amount of relative movement) is usually indeterminable unless linear 
geologic elements (e.g., line of intersection of bed and vein) are dislocated. 
In such cases, and some other rare ones, the net slip is determinable. Therefore, 
any generally useful classification of faults must be based on the geometry of the 
separations (apparent relative movements) in relation to the fault surface; 
but in the rare and tectonically important cases where slip can be determined, 
a kinematic classification is more appropriate. These two natural geologic 
situations call for two classifications of faults (Hill, 1959) as in Table 1. 

These fault types are defined as follows: 

Normal fault is an inclined surface along which there has been apparent relative 
depression of the hanging wall. 

Reverse fault is an inclined surface dipping 45, or more, along which there 
has been apparent relative elevation of the hanging wall. 



168 



MASON L. HILL 



TABLE 1 



Separations 



Faults 



Slips 



Faults 



Dip separation 


Normal ' Dip slip 


Normal slip 


(measured in 


Reverse (measured in 


Reverse slip 


dip of fault) 


Thrust dip of fault) 


Thrust slip 


Strike separation 


Right-lateral Strike slip 


Right-lateral slip 


(measured in 


Left-lateral (measured in 


Left-lateral slip 


strike of fault) 


strike of fault) 




Dip and strike 


Named after prin- ; Oblique slip 


Named after principal 


separations 


cipal separation 


(measured in 


slip component 


(measured in 


or appropriate 


fault surface) 


or appropriate 


both dip and 


combined term 




combined term 


strike of fault) 


(e.g., normal 




(e.g., reverse left- 




left-lateral fault 




lateral slip fault, 




of diagram) 




1 of diagram) 



Thrust fault is a surface dipping less than 45 along which there has been 
apparent relative movement of the hanging wall over the footwall. (Some work- 
ers use this term either as synonymous with, subordinate to, or inclusive of 
reverse fault, but there is a good case for reverse and thrust as equal and sep- 
arate categories in order to distinguish between the ratios of apparent hori- 
zontal shortening to apparent relative uplift.) 

Right-lateral fault is a surface along which, as viewed in plan, the side opposite 
the observer has had apparent relative movement to the right. (Note that the 
single word "lateral" is not used in the dual classification of faults, whereas 
right-lateral and left-lateral faults are as different from each other as normal 
and reverse faults. 

Left-lateral fault is a surface along which the side opposite the observer has 
had apparent relative movement to the left. 

Normal slip faulty reverse slip fault, thrust slip fault, right-lateral slip fault, and 
left-lateral slip fault are defined as the separation-based terms above, with the 
omission of the word "apparent," to show that information on actual relative 
movement (slip) has been obtained. 

These two sets of fault names, one classifying faults according to commonly 
determined apparent relative movement (the strike and/or dip separations), 
and the other by occasionally determined actual relative movement (the strike 
and/or dip components of slip), are needed for comprehensive and practical 
fault classification. The great advantage of the twofold classification is that 
connotation of slip (actual relative movement) on a fault is avoided when only 



ROLE OF CLASSIFICATION IN GEOLOGY 169 

separation (apparent relative movement) is known. Although the separation- 
based terms can usually be employed, the slip-based terms have greater tec- 
tonic significance, and therefore should be used whenever possible. 

Rules of Nomenclature and Dual Classification of Faults 

Rules for providing good scientific classification must be formulated and 
applied. First, however, rules of nomenclature (the system of names used in a 
classification) must be considered. The following rules, in part modified from 
Wadell (1938), are proposed, and the application of each to the dual classifi- 
cation of faults is presented. 

RULE 1. A name should be widely understood and used by scientists, or 
it should be so appropriate that it is likely to become widely understood and 
used. 

Application. The separation-based fault names are widely used by geologists, 
but too often in the sense of denoting slip. The terms wrench or transcurrent are 
frequently used instead of lateral; but, hi this writer's opinion, wrench is objec- 
tionable because of its dynamic implication; transcurrent improperly implies 
transection of other structures; and both terms refer to slip without benefit of 
complementary terms for use when only separations are known. A wider 
understanding of the difference between separation and slip is required before 
the names of faults can be commonly understood. 

RULE 2. A name should be descriptive or explanatory. If the significance 
(such as genesis) of the thing, action or concept is adequately known, a name 
expressing such significance is desirable. However, if doubt of this signifi- 
cance exists, or if the term may be used when doubt does exist, it is better 
to use a purely descriptive name. A combined descriptive and explanatory 
name is likely to be ambiguous and should therefore be avoided. If possible, 
a descriptive name should be subject to operational definition (Bridgman, 
1927), whereby others may verify by reobservation or experimentation. 

Application. The fault names are descriptive rather than explanatory, al- 
though normal is not rational, and thrust is dynamic rather than geometric. 
Right- or left-lateral are particularly good descriptive words for apparent side- 
wise movements, as right- or left-lateral slip are for relative sidewise move- 
ments. These names also aptly express important geometric (or kinematic) 
differences. Kelley (1960) and others have objected to naming faults on the 
basis of separations, because these can vary along the fault (in plan or section). 
Obviously in some such cases, due to complicated structural or stratigraphic 
situations, the separation-based terms characterize only local segments of the 
fault. But in many of these cases such variations of separation provide evidence 



170 MASON L. HILL 

for fault slip. For example, separations resulting from the displacement of an 
anticline may clearly indicate either dip slip, strike slip, or some combination 
thereof. In these cases the fault can be named according to the slip, which is 
descriptive of the kinematics and thus is technically more significant than a 
name based upon the separation alone. 

RULE 3. If possible, a name should be a common word, with modifying 
words as required; it should approximate a definition of a class, with modifiers 
to distinguish between members of the class. Proper names and terms com- 
bining roots of different linguistic origins are permissible only if they are 
more practical. When a common or vernacular name is used in a scientific 
sense, its meaning must be defined. It is better to adopt a new name that is 
precisely defined than to use a common name whose meaning is inexact. 

Application. The fault names are precisely defined common nouns with ap- 
propriate adjectives. It has been suggested by Gill (1935) and others, that the 
qualifying word "separation" be added to the fault term when slip has not 
been determined. However, experience indicates that this limiting word will 
seldom be appended, whereas if slip had been determined the author would be 
eager to add the word "slip" to the fault name as evidence of additional in- 
formation. It has been suggested by Kelley (1960) that right and left slip be 
substituted for right- and left-lateral slip, respectively. If these terms are 
accepted, it would be logical to change the separation-based terms to right 
fault and left fault, or right-separation and left-separation faults. Furthermore, 
if the term separation were used in the dual classification, it would also be logical 
to refer to normal separation, reverse separation, and thrust separation faults. 
These and other reasonable suggestions for fault names, including wrench and 
transcurrent, need to be accepted or rejected so that one set of names can be 
employed. Recommendations from a duly appointed international committee 
may be required to establish standards. 

RULE 4. A name should be rational and appropriate to the science 
involved, although a new name should not be used if an appropriate old one 
exists within the science or if an acceptable one from another science is 
available. However, new and precisely defined terms are preferable to old 
terms that are imprecise or commonly misused. 

Application. The fault names are, in context, rational and appropriate to the 
science of geology. New names are not used in the dual classification of faults, 
although more precise and restricted definitions are employed. If the names 
were not in common usage, new names for both separation-based and slip- 
based classifications might be preferred. 



ROLE OF CLASSIFICATION IN GEOLOGY 171 

RULE 5. A foreign term should be used when appropriate, but unless it 
is a common word it should be used in its original rather than in its translated 
form. 

Application. Foreign names are not used in the classification, although some 
are properly used in fault terminology. 

RULE 6. Symbolic and/or mnemonic terms may be used if properly 
defined, and if more practical than descriptive terms. 

Application. Since the terms are few and short, symbolic or mnemonic terms 
are not justified. 

RULE 7. The same thing should not be given two different names, nor 
should two different things be given the same name. It is, however, less 
objectionable for a thing to have two names than for two different things to 
have the same name. 

Application. The fault names of the dual classification are not ambiguous. 
If slip is determined, only the slip-based nomenclature is used, even though 
the fault may have previously been classified according to separation. The 
common usage of a single set of fault terms in a slip sense when only separation 
is known is ambiguous, and has conspired to prevent a search for criteria 
determining fault slip. For example, hi common usage "reverse foul? 9 can 
mean either that reverse slip or that reverse separation is known. This usage 
has also encouraged ill-founded tectonic interpretations, and has generally 
retarded progress in structural geology. Use of the dual nomenclature can 
preclude ambiguity and encourage determination of fault slip. 

RULE 8. A name should represent a group of things, processes, or concepts 
and, if possible, should also be a part of a greater group (e.g. granite repre- 
sents a mineralogical and textural group of rocks and it is also a class of 
igneous rocks). 

Application. The names of the dual classification represent groups of faults, 
and faults are only one group of earth structures. 



Rules of Classification and Dual Classification of Faults 

RULE A. A classification (including its nomenclature) should be appro- 
priate to the knowledge of the subject, and to the purposes for which it is 
devised. 

Application. The dual classification of faults is appropriate for current knowl- 
edge of faulting and for the purposes for which it is devised. There are other 



172 MASOX L. HILL 

ways of classifying faults, and for special purposes some of these may be better 
than the dual classification. For example, bedding-plane, dip, strike, and 
oblique faults, or longitudinal and transverse faults, or epi-anticlinal faults 
provide grouping according to associated structures. But since such classi- 
fications are not based on the characteristics of the faults themselves, they 
cannot be considered as significant classes of faults. Although fault classifica- 
tions based on presumed origins (Clark, 1943) or on presumed stress fields 
(Anderson, 1951) have had considerable acceptance, it appears that genetic 
or dynamic classifications are either too theoretical or too subjective for present 
knowledge of structural geology- (Hill, 1947). The dual classification allows 
appropriate classification of most faults on the basis of apparent relative move- 
ment (separation), and in addition provides a classification for faults when 
actual relative movement (slip) is determined. 

RULE B. A classification should be comprehensive and exclusive. Thus 
the categories of the classification should be collectively complete and indi- 
vidually separate. 

Application. The classification is comprehensive and exclusive. All recognized 
cases of fault separation and slip are included, and the five rational categories 
in each (normal, reverse, thrust, and right- and left-lateral) are mutually 
exclusive. 

RULE C. A classification should be flexible. Provision should be made 
for intercalation of new terms and for expansion of existing terms. Classifi- 
cation based on ordering of gradational characteristics should be used where 
possible, because greater precision in differentiation is allowed without 
preventing broad grouping. 

Application. The classification is such that all the principal fault types are 
named, all combination types can be expressed (e.g. normal left-lateral fault), 
and all possible components of separation or slip are included. No expanded 
connotation of the terms can be conceived until dynamic and/or genetic fault 
characteristics are commonly recognized. Ordering of all gradations of strike 
and/or dip of the fault, all variations of separation, and all variations in sense 
of slip may be expressed within the categories of the dual classification. Al- 
though, for example, normal and reverse (or normal-slip and reverse-slip) 
faults are gradational through the vertical, ordering across a vertical surface 
is not good classification because this dip divides apparent (or actual, if slip is 
known) horizontal extension from shortening across the fault. On the other 
hand, ordering of fault dip within one class is significant in order to obtain the 
proportion of relative uplift to either extension or shortening. 



ROLE OF CLASSIFICATION IN GEOLOGY 173 

RULE D. A classification should be either descriptive or theoretical. 
Combinations of descriptive and theoretical elements lead to confusion. As 
the science progresses theoretical classifications become more useful. 

Application. The dual classification of faults is based entirely on the descrip- 
tive elements of separation (geometric) or slip (kinematic), although it is pos- 
sible that future advancements in the knowledge of faulting may allow dynamic 
or even genetic classifications. 



Conclusions 

In geology, as in all other sciences, progress is facilitated by precise nomen- 
clature and logical classification. All geologic classifications should be scruti- 
nized in the light of current knowledge. To stimulate advancements in their 
science, geologists must be as willing to revise their classifications as they are to 
make new observations and new interpretations. The rules proposed here for 
naming and classifying geologic phenomena are thought to be useful, although 
they may not be complete or mutually exclusive, are not of equal importance 
or scope, and could be expressed in different terms. 

Present classifications of faults have retarded progress in structural geology 
because the names commonly given to faults so often falsely imply knowledge 
of fault slip. The dual classification of faults recommended here is analogous 
to the dual classification of strata into rock-stratigraphic and time-stratigraphic 
categories. In stratigraphy progress was stimulated by a classification which 
distinguished between lithologic and chronologic units. A classification which 
distinguishes between the concepts of fault separation and fault slip might 
likewise stimulate progress in structural geology. 



REFERENCES CITED 

ANDERSON, E. M., 1951, The dynamics of faulting and dyke formation with applications 

to Britain, 2nd ed.: London, Oliver and Boyd, 206 pp. 
BELOUSSOV, V. V., 1962, Basic problems in geotectonics (Am. Geol. Inst. translation): 

New York, McGraw-Hill, 816 pp. 
BOYER, R. E., and MUEHLBERGER, W. R., 1960, Separation versus slip: Am. Assoc. 

Petroleum Geol., B., vol. 44, pp. 1938-1939. 

BRIDGMAN, P. W., 1927, The logic of modern physics: New York, Macmillan, 228 pp. 
CLARK, S. K., 1943, Classification of faults: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., B., voL 27, 

pp. 1245-1265. 
CROWELL, J. C., 1959, Problems of fault nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., 

B., vol. 43, pp. 2653-2674. 



174 MASOX L. HILL 

GILL, J. E., 1935, Normal and reverse faults: J. GeoL, vol. 43, pp. 1071-1079. 
, 1941, Fault nomenclature: Roy. Soc. Canada, Tr., 3rd ser., vol. 35, sec. 4, 

pp. 71-85. 
GRABAU, A. W., 1904, On the classification of sedimentary rocks: Am. Geologist, vol. 33, 

pp. 228-247. 
HAM, W. E., ed., 1962, Classification of carbonate rocks, a symposium: Am. Assoc. 

Petroleum GeoL, Mem. 1. 
HEMPEL, C. G., 1952, Fundamentals of concept formation in empirical science: Internat. 

Encyclopedia of Unified Sciences, vol. 2, no. 7, Chicago, Univ. Chicago Press, 93 pp. 

, 1959, Some problems of taxonomy: unpublished manuscript. 

HILL, M. L., 1947, Classification of faults: Am. Assoc. Petroleum GeoL, B., vol. 31, 

pp. 1669-1673. 
, 1959, Dual classification of faults: Am. Assoc. Petroleum GeoL, B., vol. 43, 

pp. 217-221. 

, 1960, Fault symbols: GeoTImes, vol. 5, no. 3, pp. 23-24. 

KELLEY, V. C., 1960, Slips and separations: GeoL Soc. Am., B., vol. 71, pp. 1545-1546. 
KRYNINE, P. D., 1948, The megascopic study and field classification of sedimentary 

rocks: J. GeoL, vol. 56, pp. 130-165. 
KUPFER, D. H., 1960, Problems of fault nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum GeoL, B., 

vol. 44, pp. 501-505. 

OXENFORD, JOHN, 1882, Conversations of Goethe: London, George Bell and Sons. 
PETTIJOHN, F. J., 1948, A preface to the classification of sedimentary rocks: J. GeoL, 

vol. 56, pp. 112-117. 
REID, H. F., DAVIS, W. M., LAWSON, A. C., and RANSOME, F. L., 1913, Report of the 

Committee on the Nomenclature of Faults: GeoL Soc. Am., B., vol. 24, pp. 163-183. 
RODGERS, JOHN, 1950, The nomenclature and classification of sedimentary rocks: Am* 

J. Sci., vol. 248, pp. 297-311. 

SHROCK,R.R., 1948, A classification of sedimentary rocks: J. GeoL, vol. 56, pp. 118-129. 
WADELL, HAKON, 1938, Proper names, nomenclature and classification: J. GeoL, 

vol. 46, pp. 546-568. 



CHARLES A. ANDERSON 

U. S. Geological Survey 



Simplicity in 

Structural Geology 1 



In 1951, I made the statement that "Until more precise correlations of the 
older Precambrian rocks can be made, based on radioactivity or other methods, 
the simplest explanation is that only one period of orogeny, corresponding to 
Wilson's Mazatzal Revolution, has occurred in Arizona during early Pre- 
cambrian time." (Anderson, 1951, p. 1346; italics added) This explicit refer- 
ence to the use of simplicity in correlating structural events and reconstructing 
geologic history led the Chairman of the Anniversary Committee to ask for an 
essay on simplicity in structural geology. 

Principle of Simplicity 

The principle of simplicity has been called Occam's (or Ockham's) razor, 
the principle of parsimony, or the principle of economy. Allusions to simplicity 
in the literature are innumerable and varied in intent and nuance. A revival 
of interest in this principle among philosophers of science has been partly 
inspired by the work of Nelson Goodman. 

All scientific activity amounts to the invention of and the choice among 
systems of hypotheses. One of the primary considerations guiding this 
process is that of simplicity. Nothing could be much more mistaken than 
the traditional idea that we first seek a true system and then, for the sake of 
elegance alone, seek a simple one. We are inevitably concerned with sim- 
plicity as soon as we are concerned with system at all; for system is achieved 
just to the extent that the basic vocabulary and set of first principles used in 
dealing with the given subject matter are simplified. When simplicity of 



1 1 wish to thank my two colleagues, James Gilluly and Walter S. White, for helpful 
and critical comments in their review of this essay. 

175 



1 7 6 CHARLES A. ANDERSON 

basis vanishes to zero that is, when no term or principle is derived from 
any of the others system also vanishes to zero. Systematization is the same 
thing as simplification of basis. (Goodman, 1958, p. 1064} 

William of Occam, known as Doctor Invincibilis and Venerabihs Inceptor, was 
born around 1300 and became a member of the Franciscan order while still a 
youth. He was an intellectual leader in the period that saw the disintegration 
of old scholastic realism and the rise of theological skepticism. The famous 
dictum attributed to him, "Entia non sunt multiplicanda praeter necessitate" has 
appeared in nearly every book on logic from the middle of the nineteenth 
century*. It is doubtful that the "Invincible Doctor" used these words (Thor- 
burn, 1918), but he did use similar words such as Frustrafit per plura quod potest 
fieri per pauciora (Laird, 1919, p. 321). The "razor" is commonly used now 
without special reference to the scholastic theory- of entities, and Laird believes 
that the precise form in which Occam stated it is irrelevant. 

Russell (1929, p. 113) states that Occam's razor, "entities are not to be multi- 
plied without necessity," is a maxim that inspires all scientific philosophizing, 
and that in dealing with any subject matter, one should find out what entities 
are undeniably involved, and state everything in terms of these. 

The concept of simplicity is a controversial topic in the philosophy of science 
according to Kemeny (1953, p. 391 ). One school believes it involves an assump- 
tion about the simplicity of nature, whereas others justify it as a matter of con- 
venience, "a labor-saving device." Jevons (1883, p. 625) objected to the gen- 
eralization that the laws of nature possess the perfection which we attribute to 
simple forms and relations, and suggested that "Simplicity is naturally agree- 
able to a mind of limited powers, but to an infinite mind all things are simple." 

Mill (1865, p. 461) questioned Hamilton's belief that "Nature never works 
by more complex instruments than are necessary*," stating that "we know 
well that Nature, in many of its operations, works by means which are of 
a complexity so extreme, as to be an almost insuperable obstacle to our in- 
vestigations." Mill (1865, p. 467) believed that we are not justified in reject- 
ing an hypothesis for being too complicated, but "The 'Law of Parcimony 5 
needs no such support; it rests on no assumptions respecting the ways or pro- 
ceedings of Nature. It is a purely logical precept; a case of the broad practical 
principle, not to believe anything for which there is no evidence . . . The 
assumption of a superfluous cause, is a belief without evidence." Mill (ibid.) 
emphasizes that the principle which forbids the assumption of a superfluous 
fact, forbids a superfluous law and "The rule of Parcimony, therefore, whether 
applied to facts or to theories, implies no theory concerning the propensities or 
proceedings of Nature." 

Feuer (1957, p. 121), like Mill, emphasized that the scientific principle of 
simplicity does not rest on the assumption that the laws of nature are simple, 



SIMPLICITY IN STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY 177 

and he pointed out that the simplicity of nature has had a long philosophical 
history which he would call the metascientific principle of simplicity, to distinguish 
it from the scientific methodological principle of Occam's razor. Verifiability 
is the important element in Occam's razor; the principle of simplicity is thus a 
straightforward basis for rejecting theories if they are unverifiable (Feuer, 
1957, p. 115). The verified theory is the simplest because every unnecessary' 
component is an unverified item. 

Demos (1947) expresses some skepticism about the use of simplicity and 
suggests that the scientific philosopher tries to evade the charge of fallacious 
reasoning by introducing the principle of simplicity, thereby enabling him to 
choose among the several theories consistent with the observed facts. The 
scientist then selects the theory that explains the greatest number of phenomena 
with the fewest assumptions. Bridgman (1961, p. 10) regarded Occam's razor: 

... as a cardinal intellectual principle, ... I will try to follow it to the ut- 
most. It is almost frightening to observe how blatantly it is disregarded in 
most thinking ... To me it seems to satisfy a deep-seated instinct for intel- 
lectual good workmanship. Perhaps one of the most compelling reasons for 
adopting it is that thereby one has given as few hostages to the future as 
possible and retained the maximum flexibility for dealing with unanticipated 
facts or ideas. 

Simplicity and Geology 

A recent issue of "Philosophy of Science" contains a symposium on simplicity, 
but only one paper mentions its application to geology. Barker (1961, p. 164) 
revives the old problem of the meaning of fossils: are they remains of organisms 
that actually existed on earth millions of years ago, or were they placed there 
by the Creator to test our faith? Barker concluded that unless there is inde- 
pendent evidence in favor of a Creator, the simple theory is that plants and 
animals existed in the past in circumstances similar to those in which we find 
them today. This leads to uniformitarianism, a topic discussed elsewhere in 
this volume. 

An excellent geologic example of simplicity is given by Woodford (1960) in 
discussing the magnitude of strike slip on the San Andreas fault. In 1906, the 
right-lateral slip along this fault was 22 feet in central California, and in south- 
ern California offset streams indicate right-lateral movement of thousands of 
feet during Quaternary time. But for pre-Quaternary movements, it is necessary 
to distinguish between separation and slip. A structurally complex succession 
of granodiorite, Paleocene, and Miocene rocks north of the San Gabriel 
Mountains is offset in a way that seems to require 30 miles of right-lateral slip 
since the middle Tertiary. Displacements may have been even greater (a range 
from 160 to 300 miles has been suggested), but Woodford prefers a working 



178 CHARLES A. ANDERSON 

hypothesis that includes some dip slip and so he limits strike slip on the San 
Andreas fault to 30 miles, right lateral. "The tentative choice of short slips, if 
these will do the business, is an example of the use of the principle Disjunctiones 
minimae> disjunction's optimae. This rule may be considered a quantitatively 
parsimonious relative of Ockham's law: Entia non sunt multiplic anda praeter neces- 
sitatem." (Woodford, 1960, p. 415) 

The preparation of a geologic map is the essential first step in structural 
geology, and one of the first steps is the building up of the stratigraphic se- 
quence. The law of superposition is vital to the success of this study. Even 
where we have "layer-cake" stratigraphy, Albritton (1961, pp. 190-191) has 
pointed out that it is not clear how the principle of simplicity operates in 
geology: 

. . . [given] two nearby mesas of three formations conformably arranged in 
similar sequence from bottom to top. Without evidence to the contrary, 
most stratigraphers would recognize only three formations in all, perhaps on 
the ground that it is in vain to do with more what can be done with fewer. 
But if a three-formation column is simpler than a [six-formation] column, 
would it not be simpler still to lump the three formations into one group, 
and then have a single entity? 

Of course the answer is that to do so is to lose information. The purpose of 
the geologic study has an important bearing on the choice of stratigraphic units. 
Fundamentally, selection is made to focus attention on the environment of 
deposition of the sediments, to indicate the various stages in the geologic history. 
For structural interpretations, delineation of thin units may help the geologic 
map to elucidate the structure. The objective is to use the map as a means of 
showing as many as possible of the elements that bear on the geologic history 
and structure, and something about the basis on which these elements have 
been verified. 

In regions of complex structure, particularly if the rocks are nonfossiliferous 
and folded isodinally, stratigraphy and structure are determined concurrently 
by mapping distinctive lithologic units whether they are beds, zones, or forma- 
tions. Structural elements and data on the direction that the tops of beds are 
now facing are diligently searched for in all exposures. In this manner, the 
stratigraphy and structure unfold together, and the final interpretation results 
from the integration of both. The interpretation may be complex, but the 
principle of simplicity will be followed if no unverifiable facts are essential to 
the interpretation. In actual practice there are few situations in which a geo- 
logic interpretation does not require some unverified assumptions, and in 
general the use of the principle of simplicity involves the acceptance of the 
interpretation that has the maximum of verifiable facts and minimum of 
assumptions. 



SIMPLICITY IN STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY 179 

Prediction is an important facet of structural geology; in mapping, a field 
geologist commonly predicts what will be found on the next ridge, valley, or 
mountain range. In a sense, this is a field test of the interpretations developing 
in the mind of the geologist. No doubt it is a frequent experience with a 
geologist, mapping in a region of complex geology, to find his predictions 
erroneous; the geology may be more complex than the interpretation of the 
moment. But this is a part of the accumulation of field data and in no way 
conflicts with the use of simplicity in the final interpretation. Prediction is the 
end product of many studies in structural geology in proposing exploration 
programs, and in the search for new mineral deposits and petroleum accumu- 
lations. 

Many examples could be cited where early expositions of the geologic history 
of a particular region are less complex than later explanations based on addi- 
tional field studies. Probably most geologists would accept as axiomatic that 
new information leads to a more complex story. In a sense, it is a mark of 
progress as we build upon the experience of those who worked before us on 
similar problems. This is to be expected, particularly in regions where the 
rocks have been acutely deformed by past tectonic activity. The geologic 
history becomes more complex as we build up a storehouse of "verifiable 
elements," even though each succeeding historical account does not introduce 
entities beyond necessity. 

In regions where heavy vegetation and thick soil cover the rocks, it is a 
time-consuming process to assemble the facts that are needed to reconstruct 
the story of the stratigraphy and structure. The early interpretations are likely 
to be simple because of meager data. Trenching, drill holes, and painstaking 
studies of the saprolites may in time add to the verifiable elements to give a 
more complete and more complex history. 

Older Precambrian in Arizona 

I would like to discuss in more detail the older Precambrian geology in 
Arizona as an example of the workings of the principle of simplicity in struc- 
tural geology. By 1951, sufficient geologic mapping had been done in the 
older Precambrian rocks of the Grand Canyon, Globe-Miami, Mazatzal 
Mountains, Little Dragoon Mountains, Bagdad, and Prescott-Jerome areas 
to indicate that only one period of orogeny, followed by the intrusion of granitic 
rocks, could be recognized in each of these areas. 

The natural temptation is to assume that the orogenies in these five 
separate areas occurred at the same time, particularly because of the general 
parallelism of the folds where the trends were determined, and Wilson 
(1939) has termed this probable widespread erogenic disturbance, the 
Mazatzal Revolution. From a purely academic view, one might question 



180 CHARLES A. ANDERSON 

this conclusion, for it is well known that the Precambrian covers an immense 
period of time, and it would be surprising if only one period of orogeny 
occurred in Arizona during the early Precambrian time. Hinds (1936) has 
suggested that two periods of orogeny and two periods of granitic invasion 
occurred in Arizona prior to the deposition of the Younger Precambrian 
Grand Canyon series and Apache group, the Mazatzal quartzite marking 
the period of sedimentation between these orogenies. Because no positive 
angular unconformities have been found between the Mazatzal quartzite 
and Yavapai schist, some doubt exists regarding the validity of this older 
period of orogeny and granitic invasion. (Anderson, 1951, p. 1346; there- 
upon followed the sentence quoted in the introductory* paragraph.) 

Philip M. Blacet of the U.S. Geological Survey has recently mapped, south 
of Prescott, a basement of granodiorite gneiss older than the Yavapai Series. 
This gneiss underlies a basal conglomerate containing angular blocks of the 
granodiorite and abundant well-rounded boulders of aplite. The basal con- 
glomerate grades upward into feldspathic sandstone, gray slate, pebble con- 
glomerate, and beds of rhyolitic tufiaceous sandstone (now recrystallized to 
quartz-sericite schist; of the Texas Gulch Formation, described by Anderson 
and Creasey (1958, p. 28) as possibly the oldest formation in the Alder Group 
of the Yavapai Series. Similar slate, pebble conglomerate, and tuffaceous 
sandstone occur in the type section of the Alder Group hi the Mazatzal Moun- 
tains (Wilson, 1939, p. 1122) and were deformed during Wilson's Mazatzal 
Revolution. The unconformable relation between the Texas Gulch Formation 
and the granodiorite gneiss south of Prescott is important as proving the 
existence of a granitic rock older than the Yavapai Series, and therefore older 
than the granitic rocks intruded during the Mazatzal Revolution. Therefore 
two periods of granitic intrusion in the older Precambrian of Arizona are 
proved by normal stratigraphic relations, superposition, and transgressive 
intrusive contacts. Hinds was correct in suggesting the two periods, but he 
placed his second period after the Mazatzal Revolution rather than before. 
He did not have verifiable data to support his conclusion, and following the 
principle of simplicity, his contribution had to be ignored. 

Progress is being made in the use of radiometric measurements to correlate 
rocks and structural events in the older Precambrian of Arizona. Some of these 
data are shown in Table 1 ; the ages indicated for the gneisses, granites, and 
pegmatites from which mica samples were collected range from around 1200 
to around 1500 million years (m. y.). 

Mica from the pre- Yavapai granodiorite gneiss south of Prescott gave K-Ar 
and Rb-Sr measurements indicating an age of about 1250 m. y. (Carl Hedge, 
written communication). Measurements of the isotopes of lead in the zircon 
from the granodiorite gneiss indicate a minimum age of 1700 m. y. (E. J. Catan- 
zaro, oral communication). These data indicate that the mica in the granodi- 



SIMPLICITY IN STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY 181 

TABLE 1 

RADIOMETRIG AGES OF ROCKS 
FROM THE OLDER PRECAMBRIAN OF ARIZONA 

. Ages in million years 

Sample locations* 

F K-Ar Rb-Sr 



1. 


Gneiss, Grand Canyon 


1390 


1370 


2a. 


Lawler Peak granite, Bagdad 


1410 


1390 


2b. 


Pegmatite in Lawler Peak granite 


1410 


1500 


3. 


Pegmatite, Wickenburg 


1160 


1300 


4. 


Pegmatite in Vishnu schist, 




1550 




Grand Canyon 




1530 


5. 


Migmatite zone in Vishnu schist, 








Grand Canyon 




1390 


6. 


Granite near Valentine 




1300 


7. 


Diana granite, Chloride 




1350 


8. 


Chloride granite, Chloride 




1210 


9. 


Oracle granite, Oracle 




1450 



* Samples 1 through 3 are from Aldrich, Wetherill, Davis, 1957, p. 656, 
and samples 4 through 9 are from Giletti and Damon, 1961, p. 640. 



orite gneiss recrystallized during the deformation of the Yavapai Series, cor- 
responding in a general way to the time Aldrich, Wetherill, and Davis (1957) 
have called the 1350-m.y. period of granitic rocks. The zircon gives an older 
age, more in keeping with the stratigraphic relations. It should be noted that 
Silver and Deutsch (1961) have reported an age of 1650 m. y. for zircon from 
a granodiorite in southeastern Arizona (Cochise County). 

It is tempting to assume that the 1350-m.y. period corresponds to the 
Mazatzal Revolution; unfortunately no reliable radiometric dates have been 
obtained from granitic rocks clearly related to the Mazatzal orogeny, that is, 
from the Mazatzal Mountains or adjacent areas. The available age data 
clearly demonstrate the need for systematic work, for there is much to be 
learned from radiometric measurements of the Precambrian rocks in Arizona. 
I predict that such studies will ultimately show that the structural history is 
more complex than can be documented from present data. 

Most structural geologists would infer that there are, in Arizona, meta- 
morphic rocks older than the granodiorite gneiss south of Prescott and that such 
rocks were deformed prior to or during the intrusion of the granodiorite made 
gneissic during the deformation of the Yavapai Series. Using the principle of 
simplicity, we can say with assurance that the simplest explanation in 1962 is 



182 CHARLES A. ANDERSON 

that there were at least two periods of orogeny and granitic intrusion in the 
older Precambrian history of Arizona. As more verifiable elements are dis- 
covered, the story may well become even more complex. 

Concluding Statement 

Much of my discussion has been limited to the use of the principle of sim- 
plicity in explanatory' or interpretive aspects of structural geology rather than 
in developing theories or laws. It is appropriate to refer to Mario Bunge, who 
raises doubts about simplicity in the construction and testing of scientific 
theories. A theory must at least be consistent with the known facts and should 
predict new and unsuspected facts (Bunge, 1961, p. 133). Bunge (1961, p. 148) 
believes that simplicities are undesirable in the stage of problem finding, but 
desirable in the formulation of problems, and much less so in the solution of 
problems. His advice is that "Ockham's razor like all razors must be 
handled with care to prevent beheading science in the attempt to shave off 
some of its pilosities. In science, as in the barber shop, better alive and bearded 
than dead and cleanly shaven." 

It seems to me that when a structural geologist is formulating explanatory 
hypotheses, the principle of simplicity should not restrict his imagination; 
complex hypotheses may stimulate and guide the work toward new and differ- 
ent data. For this phase of a study, Bunge has made an excellent point; it is 
only in the final selection of the hypotheses that the assortment should be pared 
by Occam's razor. 

REFERENCES CITED 

ALBRTTTON, C. C., JR., 1961, Notes on the history and philosophy of science. (1) A con- 
ference on the scope and philosophy of geology: J. Graduate Research Center, 
Southern Methodist Univ., vol. 29, no. 3, pp. 188-192. 

ALDRICH, L. T., WETHERELL, G. W., and DAVIS, G. L., 1957, Occurrence of 1350 
million-year-old granitic rocks in western United States: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 68, 
pp. 655-656. 

ANDERSON, C. A., 1951, Older Precambrian structure in Arizona: Geol. Soc. Am., B., 
vol. 62, pp. 1331-^6. 

and CREASEY, S. C., 1958, Geology and ore deposits of the Jerome area, Yavapai 

County, Arizona: U. S. Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 308, 185 pp. 

BARKER, S. F., 1961, On simplicity in empirical hypotheses: Phil. ScL, vol. 28, pp. 162- 
171. 

BRIDGMAN, P. W., 1961, The way things arc: New York, Viking (Compass Books Edi- 
tion) 333 pp. 

BUNGE, MARIO, 1961, The weight of simplicity in the construction and assaying of 
scientific theories: Phil. Sci., vol. 28, pp. 120-149. 



SIMPLICITY IN STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY 183 

DEMOS, RAPHAEL, 1947, Doubts about empiricism: Phil. Sci., vol. 14, pp. 203-218. 
FEUER, L. S., 1957, The principle of simplicity: Phil. Sci., vol. 24, pp. 109-122. 
GILETTI, B. J. and DAMON, P. E., 1961, Rubidium-strontium ages of some basement 

rocks from Arizona and northwestern Mexico: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 72, pp. 639- 

644. 

GOODMAN, NELSON, 1958, The test of simplicity : Science, vol. 128, pp. 1064-1069. 
HINDS, N. E. A., 1936, Uncompahgran and Beltian deposits in western North America: 

Carnegie Inst. Washington, Pub. 463, pp. 53-136. 

JEVONS, W. S., 1883, The principles of science: London, MacMillan, 786 pp. 
KEMENY, J. G., 1953, The use of simplicity in induction: Phil. Rev., vol. 62, pp. 391-408. 
LAIRD, JOHN, 1919, The law of parsimony: The Monist, vol. 29, p. 321-344. 
MILL, J. S., 1865, An examination of Sir William Hamilton's philosophy: London, 

Longmans, Green, 561 pp. 
RUSSELL, BERTRAND, 1929, Our knowledge of the external world: New York, W. W, 

Norton, 268 pp. 
SILVER, L. T. and DEUTSCH, SARAH, 1961, Uranium-lead method on zircons: New 

York Acad. Sci., Ann., vol. 91, pp. 279-283. 

THORBURN, C. C., JR., 1918, The myth of Occam's Razor: Mind, vol. 27, pp. 345-353. 
WILSON, E. D., 1939, Pre-Cambrian Mazatzal Revolution in central Arizona: Geol. Soc. 

Am., B., vol. 50, pp. 1113-1164. 
WOODFORD, A. O., 1960, Bedrock patterns and strike-slip faulting in southwestern 

California: Am. J. Sci., vol. 258A, pp. 400-417. 



LUNA B. LEOPOLD 
WALTER B. LANGBEIN 

U.S. Geological Survey 



Association and 
Indeterminacy 
in Geomorphology 



You find a rock. It looks like an ordinary piece of flint, broken and rough. 
On a part of it is a patina whose soft grey color contrasts with the shiny brownish 
surfaces of conchoidal fracture. You could have found this rock in nearly any 
kind of an environment almost anyplace in the world. There is nothing dis- 
tinctive about it. 

You hand this same piece of rock to a colleague and ask what he can make 
of it. He considers it soberly before he says, "You know, that could be an 
artifact." There springs to mind then a picture of a primitive man, squatting 
barefoot before a fire warming his hands. The firelight casts his shadow 
against the cliff below which he crouches. 

The difference between the reaction before and after the passing thought 
that this might indeed be the tool of ancient man is the difference between 
mild disinterest and a kaleidoscope of mental pictures. This difference reflects 
differences in the associations of thoughts. 

The present essay is concerned with how associations are used in geologic 
reasoning, and then with certain philosophic considerations which seem to be 
influencing the methodology and direction of geomorphology. 

When you picked up the piece of flint the associations which flashed through 
your mind were specific to the limits of your knowledge regarding the object 
itself. This stone was unusual only in that it appeared to have been worked by 
human hands. The mental pictures which were projected by the thought 
process stemmed only from an intellectual interest. The specimen itself is 
valueless. If, however, the rock had been a sample of ore, the chain of thought 
might have led to interest of quite a different kind. Our everyday experience 

184 



ASSOCIATION AND INDETERMINACY IN GEOMORPHOLOGY 185 

in geology emphasizes that the purposes of this branch of natural science are 
twofold intellectual and utilitarian being constituted of the two principal 
elements which generally tend to stimulate the mind of man. 

In geomorphology, as in other branches of science, mental pictures depicting 
associations in the natural world have an intrinsic value which stems from the 
wonderment that a knowledge of nature seems to produce nearly uniformly 
among thoughtful human beings. But associations in the natural world are 
not only objects of interest in themselves; they are also tools of the art. 

The association of different observations is a form of logic. What is here 
called "association" might be viewed by some merely as another word for 
reasoning. But this type of reasoning which is used in geology is so extensively 
elaborated that it bears but little resemblance to mathematical logic, even if 
the logician may be able to discern in geologic reasoning the same precepts 
and, indubitably, the same methods which constitute the bases for any kind of 
logical reasoning. If the reader, then, wishes to equate the word "association" 
as used here with logic or with reasoning, we pose no objection, but it is the 
basis for this reasoning that is here being examined. 

The simplest and most fundamental type of association deals with the process 
acting. When one observes in an outcrop a uniformly bedded sandstone he 
associates this with his general knowledge of the way in which sand may be 
deposited. A sand deposit usually implies that there was a source of quartz 
materials, a process by which these materials were reduced to relatively uni- 
form size and sorted, and a physical situation leading to progressive accumula- 
tion of the materials in a depositional environment. The outcrop is inter- 
preted, then, by means of a general knowledge of the processes of weathering 
and subsequent transportation by water or wind. 

In contrast to the observations of materials in a vertical section, another line 
of associations relates a feature of the landscape to particular processes. The 
occurrence of an alluvial fan at the mouth of a canyon is interpretable in terms 
of the form and location of the materials, in this case both indicating that the 
sediment making up the fan had its source in the canyon and that it was trans- 
ported from there to its present position, presumably by water or by gravita- 
tional flow lubricated by water. 

Implicit in the utilization of associations is the principle of uniformitarian- 
ism: geologic processes presently observed are presumed to be the same as 
those operating throughout geologic time. The association of a cropping of 
uniformly bedded sandstone with presently observed conditions under which 
sand may be so deposited stems from the assumption that processes presently 
observed are the same ones that operated in the distant past. 

The concept of association goes far beyond a principle even so general as 
that of uniformity. That principle in itself does not necessarily suggest sequen- 
tial operations, nor does it treat of the relationship between individual observa- 



186 LEOPOLD AND LAXGBEIX 

tions and the generality to which these observations may be applicable. For 
example, in the sample case cited, let it be supposed that the sandstone is 
transected by a dike of igneous material. The knowledge of process leads to 
the conclusion that the sand must have been deposited at a time previous to 
that in which the igneous material was intruded. 

The idea of uniformitarianism does not in itself deal with time relationships. 
The geologist studies the bones of a dinosaur. In the same formation where 
the bones were discovered the footprints of a beast are found preserved as casts. 
The bones of the feet can be compared with the footprint and, let us say, the 
print seems to have been made by the animal whose bones are now fossilized. 
There is nothing at the present time quite like this creature, and it is by the 
use of association rather than by reasoning stemming from uniformitarianism 
that the bodily form of the dinosaur can be shown to be compatible with the 
casts of his footprints. It would seem, then, that the use of associations provides 
an indispensable extension to uniformitarianism in geologic reasoning. 

Whole fields of geology, particularly paleontology, are based more on asso- 
ciation than on any principle which relates presently observable processes to 
those which occurred in previous epochs. Interpretations must be made of 
phenomena unlike any known to occur under present conditions. This implies 
that the concept of association is of no lower an order of generality than is the 
principle of uniformitarianism. 

To summarize, then, geologic reasoning is based on a logic called here the 
use of associations. Associations are useful in four different ways. First, par- 
ticular associations may indicate the sequence of events in time. Second, an 
association found locally may indicate a general relation having limits far 
beyond the immediate locality or scope of the observation. Third, a particular 
association may be indicative of the processes acting. Fourth, synthesis of a 
variety of observations is, in effect, a broadening of the scope of associations 
considered in a given context. 

Generalization may be thought of as a synthesis of individual bits of knowl- 
edge into a broader framework, but synthesis is merely the broadening of a 
context of association. The number of associations which are involved in a 
particular thought process is possibly one measure of the degree to which syn- 
thesis is achieved. Thus the use of association, much in the manner indicated 
by the simple examples cited above, constitutes the methodology of synthesis, 
or integration. From this point of view the utilization of the concept of associa- 
tion represents one of the fundamental bases of geology. 

In the inductive method, the purpose of describing a phenomenon may be, 
for example, to eliminate extraneous details to see what, on the average, is 
the pattern represented by the data. The generalized description may be either 
quantitative or qualitative. The question of what data should be included 



ASSOCIATION AND INDETERMINACY IX GEOMORPHOLOGY 187 

would be determined primarily by the question asked rather than by an 
a priori determination of whether the data apply to the generalized description 
required. As many cases as possible would be studied to see what patterns are 
displayed among the examples. Whether quantitative or qualitative, the search 
for patterns in information is essentially inductive. 

The difference between inductive and deductive approaches does not lie in 
the presence or absence of a working hypothesis or multiple hypotheses, but 
these approaches may differ in the stage at which the hypothesis is derived. 
The difference does not dispense with the need, at some stage, for developing 
an hypothesis which must be tested against data and reason. 

Those of us working in geomorphology have a particular interest in the 
philosophy of research, both because of the nature of our subject and the history 
of its development. The aim of this portion of the geologic science is to under- 
stand the forms of the earth's surface. It is not difficult to see, then, that it is 
a subject which might first have been approached by classifying the observed 
forms, i.e. devising categories for pigeonholing different types of hills, valleys, 
scarps, rivers, and drainage patterns. From such classification, certain general- 
izations were drawn an inductive approach. 

A continued interest in classification, during the first third of the present 
century, took the form of assigning names to features of the landscape. Streams 
were designated as subsequent, superimposed, etc., and each such designation 
carried with it appropriate inference about both operative processes and his- 
torical sequence. Little attention was paid to the study of process, which, 
looking back at the record, now appears to have led to a neglect of field studies 
as the foundation of geomorphic science. As a result, the subject became one 
of decreasing interest to other workers in geology. An important aspect of 
this growing disinterest was that geomorphology, as practiced, seemed to lose 
its inherent usefulness. 

In science usefulness is measured in part by ability to forecast, i.e., to predict 
relations postulated by reasoning about associations and subsequently subject 
to verification by experiment or field study. With this in mind, it is apparent 
that preoccupation with description could lead to decreasing usefulness because 
classification and description are usually insufficient bases for extrapolation 
and thus for prediction. 

At mid-century there began a revitalization of geomorphology, which has 
taken the form of a more detailed investigation of processes operative in land- 
scape development. Study of process has been accompanied by increased use 
of quantitative data and mathematical expression. The trend toward quanti- 
tative study in geomorphology, in contrast with description, should not be 
viewed as a basic difference in method of investigation, as mentioned earlier, 
but rather as a difference in the type of problem being attacked. Both quanti- 



188 LEOPOLD AND LAXGBEIX 

tative and qualitative geologic research are based on the use of associations 
and the concept of uniformity. 

This trend parallels that in geologic research in general. Before 1930, less 
than one page in a hundred in the '"Bulletin of the Geological Society of 
America" contained mathematical formulation. The percentage now ap- 
proaches ten in a hundred. Civil engineering shows a similar trend, but the 
level has always been higher. 

Coupled with the forward increase in the quantitative method in geomor- 
phology there is, encouragingly enough, a greater concentration on geologic 
mapping in many investigations, and in others, at least a detailed study of 
stratigraphy in the field. The work of John T. Hack (1960) on geomorphology 
of the central Appalachians is a model which it is hoped a growing proportion 
of workers in the field will emulate. He made detailed geologic maps of local 
areas which he then used as the basis for study of form and process in which 
both qualitative and quantitative arguments were used. Similarly, John P. 
Miller mapped extensive areas in the Sangre de Cristo Range, New Mexico, 
and used these as the basis for geomorphic studies (see Miller, 1959). 

Among the geologic sciences, geomorphology has, for some time in America, 
been approached in a manner sufficiently different from other aspects of geology 
that it may have come to be viewed as different in philosophy. We contend 
that in philosophy and in method it is one with other geologic sciences. Asso- 
ciation, uniformity, working hypothesis, reasoning, quantitative and qualitative 
data are concepts and tools as much needed here as elsewhere in geology. 

At any time the need for a set of questions, implicit or explicit, is paramount. 
Over and above that, there is a time for new data and there is a time for new 
theory. Progress depends on both. For several decades governmental authori- 
ties had been collecting data on rivers. No one knew just how to apply this 
store of information to geomorphic inquiry. No one knew what questions to 
ask. Then, in 1945, Horton set forth a new hydrophysical theory of the land- 
scape that was refreshingly exact in its principles in contrast with the anthropo- 
morphic word pictures of William Morris Davis. The analysis of river data 
began soon after. There followed a decade and a half of analysis using the data 
available hi conjunction with the ideas stimulated by Horton's theory. Not 
much more is likely to be gleaned from either. The time is set for new theory 
and new data. 

The shift in interest from description toward process and from the qualitative 
toward the quantitative in geomorphology appears also to be leading toward 
an important shift in viewpoint which may have far-reaching effects on the 
field. New sets of associations are evolving because of the particular questions 
now being asked. We think we see operating in landscape development a 
principle long recognized in physics but new to geomorphic thinking a prin- 
ciple of indeterminacy. 



ASSOCIATION AND INDETERMINACY IX GEOMORPHOLOGY 189 

By indeterminacy in the present context we refer to those situations in which 
the applicable physical laws may be satisfied by a large number of combina- 
tions of values of interdependent variables. As a result, a number of individual 
cases will differ among themselves, although their average is reproducible in 
different samples. Any individual case, then, cannot be forecast or specified 
except in a statistical sense. The result of an individual case is indeterminate. 

Where a large number of interacting factors are involved in a large number 
of individual cases or examples, the possibilities of combination are so great 
that physical laws governing forces and motions are not sufficient to determine 
the outcome of these interactions in an individual case. The physical laws 
may be completely fulfilled by a variety of combinations of the interrelated 
factors. The remaining statements are stochastic in nature rather than physical. 

These stochastic statements differ from deterministic physical laws in that 
the former cany with them the idea of an irreducible uncertainty. As more is 
known about the processes operating and as more is learned about the factors 
involved, the range of uncertainty will decrease, but it never will be entirely 
removed. 

An example may be drawn from river processes. Into a given reach of river 
between tributaries, a certain rate of flow of water and a certain amount of 
sediment are introduced from upstream. Both change during the passage of a 
given flood or through a season or a period of years. To accommodate these 
various rates of discharge of water and sediment, a number of interdependent 
hydraulic variables will change, including width, depth, velocity, slope, and 
hydraulic roughness. A particular change in discharge and sediment may be 
accommodated by several combinations of values of these dependent or adjust- 
able factors. 

Specifically, the physical equations which must always be satisfied are 
equations of conservation, such as the conservation of mass. In the river, this 
is expressed in the statement, 

Q. = "&> 

or discharge is the product of width, depth, and mean velocity. Another 
physical equation is the relation of velocity, depth, slope, and hydraulic rough- 
ness expressed by the Chezy or Manning equation. Another is the relation 
between shear stress and the sediment load. In a particular case these physical 
relations can be satisfied by a variety of combinations of values of the dependent 
variables. 

In addition to the physical laws of conservation, another kind of principle 
is operating, a principle which deals with distribution of energy in time and 
space and is probabilistic in form. It operates as tendencies guiding the com- 
bination of the dependent factors. There is a tendency toward minimum work 
or minimum rate of energy expenditure and, separately, a tendency toward 



190 LEOPOLD AND LAXGBEIX 

uniform distribution of energy expenditure. These are usually opposing 
tendencies. These tendencies operate through processes which tend to keep an 
equilibrium among the factors by restraining change. 

In the river, such processes, or governors, include scour and fill, changes in 
bed configuration (ripples, dunes, and antidunesj, and the Bagnold dispersive 
stress on the bed. Such processes act in the same manner as the mechanical 
governor on the old steam engine. Any tendency to change one factor at the 
expense of another induces a resistance to that change, and so the hydraulic 
factors hover around a mean or equilibrium. But at any moment in time, the 
specific relations cannot be forecast except in a statistical sense. 

Such governing action is well known in the process of scour and fill. If local 
deposition occurs on the bed of an alluvial channel, depth tends to decrease 
slightly, velocity may increase, and slope may tend to increase, the net result 
of which tends to limit deposition or to induce compensatory scour. The 
average relation or the most stable relation in river mechanics appears to be 
one in which total energy expenditure is minimized and energy utilization is 
uniformly distributed through the channel reach, a consequence of the require- 
ments for a stable open system (Leopold and Langbein, 1962). 

In the development of land forms there are many different processes acting 
at innumerable localities. There are, in other words, a great many hills, rills, 
valley's, cliffs, and other forms, and on each, a large number of variable factors 
operate. Geomorphologists have considered that the variations observed 
among examples of the same features are due to two principal causes: (a) slight 
variations in local structure, lithology, vegetation, or other factors, and (b) 
irreducible errors in measurements. We postulate a third no less important 
one statistical variation resulting from the indeterminacy discussed above. 
At first blush, this addition may seem trivial, obvious, or implied in the first 
two causes, but philosophically it seems important. The following example 
may illustrate the point. 

Imagine a broad hill slope of uniform material and constant slope subjected 
to the same conditions of rainfall, an ideal case not realized in nature. As- 
sume that the slope, material, and precipitation were such that a large num- 
ber of rills existed on the surface in the form of a shallow drainage net. Would 
it be supposed that rills comparable in size and position were absolutely identi- 
cal? The postulate of indeterminacy would suggest that they would be very 
similar but not identical. A statistical variation would exist, with a small 
standard deviation to be sure, but the lack of identity would reflect the chance 
variation among various examples, even under uniform conditions. 

In addition to known physical relationships there are other relations of a 
stochastic nature that can be used to explain certain geomorphic forms (Lang- 
bein, 1963), and they imply that variance in form is an inherent property. It 
is here suggested that the same principle may have general applicability to 



ASSOCIATION AND INDETERMINACY IN GEOMORPHOLOGY 191 

many aspects of geologic science. The landscape, in other words, exhibits a 
variability which may be expected as a result of incomplete dynamic deter- 
minacy. General physical laws are necessary but not sufficient to determine 
the exact shape of each land form. Some scatter of points on graphs showing 
interrelations between factors is expected, although the mean or median condi- 
tion is reproducible in different sets of samples. 

The same set of conditions, for example the same climate, the same lithology, 
and the same structure, can lead to a spectrum of different dimensions and 
positions of the otherwise identical aspects, for example, the rills just mentioned. 
These variations exist even though there are (a) common climatic and geologic 
environment, and (b) a common set of hydraulic principles. 

Hence we conclude that there remain certain unsatisfied conditions, certain 
degrees of freedom (excess of unknowns over number of equations that can be 
written to connect these unknowns). Implicit in this observation is the possi- 
bility of applying principles of probability to an interpretation of those aspects 
of the landscape subject to variance. The analysis is helped by the central- 
limit theorem that a mean condition exists. The variance about the mean is a 
function of the degrees of freedom. 

Thus it appears that in geomorphologic systems the ability to measure may 
always exceed ability to forecast or explain. The better to account for varia- 
tions in land forms, it may be possible to introduce new relationships, each 
deriving importance in proportion to the extent that they satisfy nature, i.e. 
agree with reality in the field. These new or alternative relationships may be 
stochastic rather than physically deterministic. Thus probabilistic relationships 
may provide better agreement with actual conditions than the direct physical 
relationships which have previously been used. The stochastic statements, 
which may at times enlarge upon physical relations based on Newtonian laws 
of mechanics, will differ from the latter in having an inherent variance im- 
plicitly or explicitly stated. But this probabilistic or stochastic statement may 
turn out to be the more important element and lead to more specific under- 
standing of processes than the previous approximation which supposed exact 
physical laws. 

What we believe will be an example of the substitution of a probabilistic 
statement for a physical one, and thus of an improvement in understanding 
is in the much-studied logarithmic distribution of velocity in turbulent flow. 
The approximation to field observation provided by momentum theory is 
deterministic in nature, but it is well known that it contains implicitly a vari- 
ance. It now begins to appear that explanation of the logarithmic velocity 
distribution based on stochastic principles may be more basic in leading to 
understanding and will agree as well or better with actuality than the physical 
models previously used. Further, the stochastic relation will lead directly not 
only to mean values but also to a statement of the variance about the mean. 



192 LEOPOLD AND LAXGBEIX 

Equilibrium in geomorphology, from this point of view, can be achieved 
in a variety of ways and is fixed or definable for a large number of cases only 
by their means. Those cases which deviate from the mean are not necessarily 
in any less perfect equilibrium than other cases which coincide with the mean. 
In this sense geomorphology inherently involves variance, which is an intrinsic 
property of geomorphic forms. 

In this light, statistical processes and statistical treatment are necessary 
objects of study and tools of the science. They can be studied only quantita- 
tively. This is, if need be, justification enough for the growing emphasis on a 
quantitative rather than a descriptive treatment of land forms. 

But justification of our tools, our methods, or our emphasis, should not 
occupy attention in geomorphology*. If results are of intellectual interest, or 
lend themselves to practical pre\*ision or forecasting, the science will prosper. 
To this end, geomorphologists might best look to the scope of the associations 
in our reasoning processes. 

Any aspect of science may founder temporarily on the shoals of small ques- 
tions, of details, as well as on the dead-end shallows of description. Resurgence 
of activity and interest can revitalize a subject when the questions posed for 
investigation are big ones, questions which, if answered, have wide applicability 
or lead to broad generalization. But generalization is the broadening of asso- 
ciations, the spreading of a foundation for reasoning. The big question is one 
the answer to which might open up new or enlarged areas of inference or asso- 
ciation. 

The measure of a research man is the kind of question he poses. So, also, 
the vitality of a branch of science is a reflection of the magnitude or importance 
of the questions on which its students are applying their effort. Geomorphology 
is an example of a field of inquiry rejuvenated not so much by new methods as 
by recognition of the great and interesting questions that confront the geologist. 



REFERENCES CITED 

HACK, J. T., 1960, Interpretation of erosional topography in humid temperate regions: 
Am. J. Sci., vol. 258-A (Bradley Volume), pp. 80-97. 

HORTON, R. ., 1945, Erosional development of streams and their drainage basins, 
hydrophysical approach to quantitative morphology: Geol. Soc. Am., ., vol. 56, 
pp. 275-370. 

LANGBEIN, W. B., 1963, A theory of river channel adjustment: Am. Soc. Civil Engrs., 
Tr., (in press). 

LEOPOLD, L. B., and LANGBEEN, W. B., 1962, The concept of entropy in landscape 
evolution: U.S. Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 500-A, 20 pp. 

MILLER, J. P., 1959, Geomorphology in North America: Przeglad Geograficzny, War- 
saw, vol. 31, no. 3-4, pp. 567-587. 



FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 



Geologic Communication 



Geology may be viewed as a body of knowledge that grows by additions of 
observations, verifications, and interpretations. The significant point in all 
identification of knowledge is that it has no tangibility until it has been ex- 
pressed in terms which are understandable to at least one individual beyond 
the discoverer. Thus the vitality of geology its data, hypotheses, principles, 
and methods of investigation is nourished by various modes of communica- 
tion, which are understood first by those who devote themselves to this science 
and second by others to whom geologic information is conveyed. 

While communication must remain abreast of investigation, it should not 
become an end in itself. The mass of scientific information has already become 
greater than any individual can absorb. Soon the scientist will not even be 
able to deal effectively with the abstracts published as guides to the literature 
of his special field. To cope with this problem, a "science of communication" 
has developed, but this separation of communication from subject matter 
brings with it the threat that the servant may come to dominate the master. 

Perhaps the best way for scientists to attack the "information problem" is 
to become more expert with the tools of communication, which we often use 
indiscriminately and badly. In the following discussion, the example of geologic 
communication is considered from several points of view. Among the topics 
to be considered are the nature of geologic data, the characteristics of the tools 
used to communicate geologic information, and the influence of communica- 
tion upon the body of geologic thought. 

Data of Geology and Tools of Communication 

W. G. Krumbein (1962) classifies the data of geology as observational and 
experimental. The first type consists of (a) "qualitative observations or state- 
ments regarding natural objects or events" and (b) "numerical measurements 
on those natural objects or events." They are obtained in the field or "measure- 
ment" laboratory. The second represents "quantitative measurement data 
arising under specified and controlled conditions in an experimental labora- 
tory." Krumbein asserts that, although geology is basically a qualitative 
science and geologists are most concerned with observational data, quantifica- 
tion is advancing steadily in some subfields. 

193 



194 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

The tools used to record and communicate geologic data are language, 
mathematical and abstract symbols, and graphic representations. They are 
used individually, but often appear in combination, partly because they are 
needed to supplement or reinforce one another in providing the most effective 
communication of different kinds of data, and partly because the capacity of 
each tool is not fully exploited. There may also be a substitution of tools 
in different stages of recording and communicating data or interpreting 
them. The combined use and substitution of tools is illustrated by the geologic 
map. 

Since the beginnings of geology-, a major aim of its investigations has been 
the mapping of geologic objects, mainly units of rock. Krumbein notes that 
the measurements of the location, distribution, and orientation of units of rock 
are examples of the long use of numerical data in geology*. However, the rocks 
are defined by physical and chemical properties, not by these "observational" 
measurements. Some of the properties are examined quantitatively, but others 
are not or cannot be. The rock type is, therefore, defined by mixed quantitative 
and qualitative data. Furthermore, the unit of rock that is mapped is estab- 
lished on a qualitative interpretation or judgment of unity, represented either 
by homogeneity or some peculiar heterogeneity of components. The judgment 
is often based on the relative age assigned to the rocks by use of a variety of 
procedures, both qualitative and quantitative. If users of the map or other 
observers in the field accept the judgment of the mapper, it is credited with 
being objective. \Vhere there is disagreement, the same area may be mapped 
more than once with different results, one of which is presumed by each mapper 
to be correct. The desire to promote quantification and eliminate subjective 
determinations and evaluations in geologic mapping is understandable, but, 
as Krumbein warns, quantification raises a problem that pervades all of geology. 
It "involves making a distinction between those parts of the science that can 
best be treated wholly on a quantitative basis and those that may actually be 
weakened by overquantification." The danger lies in attributing regularities 
to geologic objects, which, to an unknown degree, do not exist or cannot be 
proved. 

In the geologic map, some of the recorded measurements of dimension and 
orientation are expressed graphically, but others are superposed directly on 
the map sheet in the form of numbers. The quantitative reliability of the 
presentation is enhanced by the use of a topographic base, which allows an 
immediate visual recognition of the relationship between the rocks and the 
configuration of the surface. 

Data on lithology and relative age are expressed by colors, patterns, and 
symbols. On large-scale maps, graphic presentation of these data need not be 
a difficult exercise in communication. In maps of medium to small scales, the 
quantity of data given must be smaller or the detail simplified. Simplification 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 195 

may be preferred because it permits retention of both categories of data. At 
still smaller scales, the alternative of eliminating one category is often unavoid- 
able. Since the geologic map is primarily an instrument of historical investiga- 
tion, the data on lithology are sacrificed so as to retain information on relative 
age. 

When the data are not incorporated in the map, they are usually given in 
texts and tables. When printed on the map sheet, this information can be 
regarded as the explanation of the map. Frequently, however, the information 
is contained in a separate pamphlet or book, where it may be combined with 
material not direcdy related to the map. Then, instead of serving as an accom- 
paniment to the map, the written material is the main product of the mapping 
investigation, and the map is secondary. At small scales, which are used for 
compilations of data covering large regions, or for indices to maps of larger 
scales, all details must be provided outside the map. 

As constituted, then, the map is not a self-contained communication. The 
information necessary to make it completely useful must be obtained elsewhere 
or by interpretation based on the user's knowledge and experience. For the 
nongeologist, the cryptic information on relative age and lithology has little 
meaning or value. 

The question raised by the geologic map is whether it represents the best 
and most complete use of the cartographic medium for the purpose. The im- 
pression created by the geologic map is that the amount and nature of informa- 
tion exceed the capacity of the graphic tool. It might be presumed that the 
map, because of its fundamental place in geologic science, has been carefully 
and steadily developed, and that the combined use of the graphic tool and other 
tools was a refined solution of a problem in communication. The evidence is 
to the contrary. The map is essentially what it was in its earliest examples, 
a geographic directory of geologic objects only superficially characterized by 
graphic devices. 

That there is an opportunity for fuller use of the cartographic medium is 
demonstrated by various types of maps. In geology, progress toward better 
direct communication of data through maps has been made where a practical 
purpose is involved. In this case, there is usually a need to make the map 
usable by and useful to nongeologists. The requirement has forced geologists 
producing such maps to become aware of the resources of the cartographic 
medium. In the case of the geologic map, two types of investigations might be 
undertaken to improve and develop it. One would be to determine whether 
the map should have additional functions of communication, such as synthe- 
sizing the relationships between the objects mapped and placing the geologic 
data in a more distinct environmental perspective. The other would be to 
analyze the potential of the cartographic medium to determine whether in- 
formation now in texts and tables could be expressed graphically. 



196 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

The reliance on language for communication of geologic knowledge is evi- 
dent, but as experimental and quantitative procedures become more common, 
numbers and other systems of abstract symbols will make inroads on the dom- 
inance of language. 

The advantages of symbolization as a tool of communication are familiar, 
but may be reviewed briefly here. Baulig (1956) points to mathematical 
symbolization, especially algebraic, as the most perfect scientific language 
because it is rigorously precise, unequivocal in meaning, unexcelled in ease of 
handling, and universal in use. Symbolization also has the obvious advantage 
of relative economy in use of space. Baulig notes that mathematical symboliza- 
tion is suited best to expressing relationships, particularly abstract ones. The 
physical sciences are in a position to avail themselves of this tool, but the natural 
sciences are still in the process of describing and classifying objects and are not 
ready to employ symbols exclusively. They must rely on the word to give form 
and reality to their data and the inferences derived from them. Furthermore, 
so long as substantial parts of geology are treated better qualitatively or elude 
quantitative investigation, symbols will not replace language as the primary- 
tool. 

The advantages of mathematical symbols are the drawbacks of verbal 
language. Nevertheless, scientific verbal languages possess a superiority over 
systems of symbols because they are not limited to their symbols, or terminology*, 
but can make use of words that everyone knows in common languages. 

The deficiencies of verbal language can be overcome by accurate and skillful 
use, which should be desired by the communicator and expected by his audi- 
ence. Inaccurate and inept use of numbers is censured and casts doubt on the 
validity of the data being presented and the investigations underlying them. 
The user of language should search for a similarly strict standard of accepta- 
bility*. As a group, geologists, who are dependent on language, do not give 
it such support. Often those geologists and other scientists who use language 
well are looked upon with suspicion, as though they were guilty of concealing 
faulty procedure and inadequate data by clever manipulation of words. An 
equally negative attitude common among geologists ascribes to all an innate 
inability to use language correctly and effectively. The prevalence of poor 
writing is, however, not to be excused in a science that requires verbal com- 
munication. 



Criticism of Geologic Writing 

The published criticism of geologic writing focuses on poor grammar, bad 
habits of style, and abuse of terminology. 

The first two charges have been discussed lately by Weber (1957) in respect 
to German geologic writing. This critic attributes the decline in quality of 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 197 

writing in recent decades to a lack of training of geologists in classical languages. 
He sees the trend continuing as the poor writing of today becomes the model 
for tomorrow's authors. To substantiate his claim Weber refers to errors in 
syntax and spelling, use of dialectal words, and diffuseness. Earlier, Cloos 
(1933) had protested against the wordiness of German geologic literature, 
illustrating his complaint by examples that he rewrote in shorter, clearer form. 
Geologic literature in other languages seems similarly afflicted. 

These criticisms can be debated, because grammar and style are themselves 
not clearly defined. Usage has replaced grammar in some languages, particu- 
larly English, as the standard of correctness and acceptability. Bergen Evans 
(1962) says: "There is no simple rule about English that does not have so many 
exceptions that it would be folly to rely on it." The obligation of the writer 
in English has shifted from strict observance of grammatical rules to an aware- 
ness of accepted ways of saying things. This obligation rests also on editors, 
who have the power to destroy good writing by application of bad rules. 

Referring to scientific and technical translating, which shares the problems 
of original writing, Holmstrom (1951) says that the ability to express thought 
"involves skill in exploiting the possibilities of interplay between words through 
syntax and accidence, emphasis and cadence, metaphor and simile, sentence 
and paragraph structure and the indefinable thing called 'style.'" The diffi- 
culty of acquiring this skill is stated by E. B. White, who says 1 that "There is 
no satisfactory explanation of style, no infallible guide to good writing." Evans 
advises: 

In order to exercise good taste in English one must know the full spread of 
what is allowable, the great variety of forms that are being used by the best 
speakers and writers. And one learns this not by mastering rules but by 
paying careful attention to details in the speech or writing of those whose 
English seems attractive or compelling. 

The advice is given without reference to subject matter or intended audience. 
The criteria of good style are as relevant to technical writing as to literary 
writing and perhaps should be applied more stringently to the former, if one 
accepts the views of Darlington (1953): 

The theory that scientific discovery is impersonal, or as it is called, objec- 
tive, has had several evil consequences . . . One should write, one is told, in 
the third person, in the passive voice, without betraying conviction or em- 
phasis, without allusion to any concrete or everyday object but with the 
feeblest indifference and the greatest abstraction. This practice has proved 
to be so readily acquired that it has now, for a whole generation, been 
debauching the literary language of the world. The result has been that 

1 See Strunk and White in the References. 



198 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

science, instead of being a source of strength and honesty, is fast robbing 
the common speech of these very qualities. For the style itself is neither 
strong nor honest. 

Several decades ago, Sir James Barrie was quoted by T. A. Rickard (1931) 
as having said that "the man of science appears to be the only man who has 
something to say, just now and the only man who does not know how to say 
it." Rickard preferred to think that this comment had been a friendly jibe at 
the pure scientists of the nineteenth century, but was an unpleasant truth when 
applied to practitioners of "the avowedly utilitarian branches of science" of the 
present day. A more significant comparison would be made between present- 
day writing in pure science and applied science. In the case of geologic writing, 
as with geologic maps, clarity of communication seems to be more and more an 
attribute of applied science, because it is a necessity. The unfavorable criticism 
should be aimed at geologists who feel no compulsion to write well, not at 
branches of their science. Barrie's premise that the scientific writer has some- 
thing to say is put to a serious test by many writers. As a consolation they may 
accept White's opinion that there is "no assurance that a person who thinks 
clearly will be able to write clearly." 2 One may also note that there is no assur- 
ance that a person who does not write clearly is able to think clearly. 

To combat the weaknesses in grammar and style of geologic writing, Weber 
(1957) suggests two measures. One is to encourage systematic scrutiny of 
published literature for offenses, which should be publicly cited. The other is 
to encourage authors to assume personal responsibility for correcting and im- 
proving their writing before submitting manuscripts for publication. The first 
proposal relies on the efficacy of threats to improve behavior. It would cer- 
tainly meet with widespread opposition, even from those not found guilty. 
The second is the more agreeable proposal, but it rests on the dubious assump- 
tion that geologists as a group are better critics of writing than they are writers. 

An improvement in geologic writing may result from the strain being placed 
on publication facilities by the constantly increasing number of manuscripts 
submitted. Among the ways of relieving this strain, several that have been 
introduced in scientific and technical journals strike at prolixity. The objective 
is attained by setting maximum limits on the length of manuscripts that will 
be published or by offering incentives to authors to write as briefly as possible. 
A promise of more rapid publication is the most persuasive argument. In 
acceding to self-discipline, more authors may learn to appreciate the weight 
and value of words. 

The third criticism of geologic writing concerns the abuses of terminology. 
C. W. Washburne (1943) describes them as the use of incorrect terms, contra- 

2 See Strunk and White in the References. 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 199 

dictory terms, pleonasms, and fancy words, and the misuse of valid terms. A 
distinction can be made between the more and the less serious abuses. Pleo- 
nasms are often idiomatic and have a claim to acceptability, especially in the 
spoken language. The use of fancy words, including foreign-language equiva- 
lents and obsolete terms, can be altogether appropriate in places. White 
treats these offenses under the heading of style rather than correct or acceptable 
usage. The inexcusable abuse is the use of a valid term that is irrelevant in 
the context. 

Watznauer (1956) sees a twofold purpose in terminology. To the individual, 
terminology is the means of possessing knowledge in condensed form; to the 
group, terminology provides the verbal codes that simplify communication. 
Terminology should be a distinct aid to scientists, but has become increasingly 
a barrier to understanding. The barrier is heightened by the proliferation of 
specialized vocabularies. When communication based on the use of terminology 
breaks down, the special language becomes a jargon. 

Challinor (1961) attempts to clarify the problem by differentiating between 
jargon and acceptable terminology. He calls jargon "Twittering, chattering. 
Terminology invented or used where ordinary words would do as well." On 
the other hand, he says "Technical terminology, geological terminology, how- 
ever uncouth the terms, is not jargon if it fixes meaning shortly and concisely." 
Regrettably, his attempt fails, for neither gracefulness nor succinctness pre- 
vents terminology from being jargon, even when the terms look like ordinary 
words. 

There is also the problem of communication with scientists in other fields 
and with the general public, which terminology tends to complicate. A drastic 
view of the barrier that exists here is shown in the following statement from 
a geologic dictionary for general users by Himus (1954): "It is a common 
accusation that geologists in common with other scientists are guilty of in- 
venting and using a barbarous and repellent jargon which is incomprehensible 
to the man in the street and may even be adopted as a protection against 
criticism." 

Such criticism of geologic writing underscores the need for skill and accuracy 
in the use of language. Leniency may be permissible in judging skill, but accur- 
acy, particularly in the use of terminology, is essential. There must be a com- 
monly held belief in the integrity and inviolability of terminology to which both 
the user and the creator of terms subscribe. Acceptance of this belief would 
prevent the user from using terms without knowing their meanings, and the 
creator from introducing terms for which there was no need. The abuses by 
the user can be overcome by the conscientious use of dictionaries and other 
types of wordbooks. The creator has the added obligation of knowing the 
motivation for terms, the sources of terms, and the terminology of his subject 
in different languages. 



200 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

Sources of Geologic Terminology and Implications of Its Growth 

In his work on the composition of scientific words, Roland Brown says that 
these words "originate in three ways: (1; adoption directly with appropriate 
modifications in spelling from Greek, Latin, and other languages; (2) composi- 
tion by compounding and affixation; and (3) outright or arbitrary creation 
without use of evident, antecedent root or stem material." 

It is not always easy to determine which of these actions accounts for the 
origin of a particular term. Some dictionaries explain the etymology of the 
words they contain, but this information does not tell whether the first user of 
a term borrowed or derived it from an existing word or invented it. In fact, 
many terms, especially the older ones, entered the vocabulary without a known 
formal introduction. The source shown in dictionaries is more often the author 
of an accepted current definition than the first user or originator of the term. 
For the user of terminology, the accepted meanings are, of course, far more 
important than the history of usage, and it would not serve his purpose to have 
this additional historical information. 

F. A. Burt (1949) has examined the origin of geologic terms specifically and 
found that the commonest source is the vernacular. He cites such terms as 
joint, graben, dune, lava, and moraine as examples of ordinary words that have 
entered the geologic vocabulary, but with more restricted meanings than they 
had originally. There is an almost endless list of common words with geologic 
meanings. To add only a few, ash, axis, basin, bed, bomb, boss, groove, group, habit, 
head, heave, and incompetent can be mentioned. Burt also refers to terms that 
come from particular environments, such as barchan, hamada, and nunatak. 
Baulig (1956) remarks that the terminology of geomorphology is filled with 
such words, which come into use as localisms and, in some cases, acquire wider 
use. 

Besides common words, proper nouns are adopted or adapted for use in 
the geologic vocabulary. Every geologist is familiar with the many stratigraphic 
and rock names that are derived from specific geographic designations and the 
fossil names drawn from surnames. Burt cites the following examples of terms 
of this origin: in geomorphology, meander and monadnock; in paleontology, 
Beltina; in mineralogy, labradorite; in petrology, syenite; and in ground-water 
geology, artesian. 

It is evident that many cases of adoption or adaptation of ordinary words 
and proper names involve borrowing from a foreign language. Decke, fjord, 
graben, horst, Jdippe, loess, and nappe are examples of terms, used in geologic 
vocabularies generally, which have been borrowed from vocabularies of par- 
ticular languages. 

Terms should be borrowed from foreign languages primarily to fill gaps in 
terminology. A second reason for his kind of borrowing is to take advantage 
of terms that seem especially suitable to subject-matter specialists. The latter 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 201 

reason is less definite than the former, which can be determined by the inspec- 
tion of vocabularies in different languages. Gaps are far more frequent, not 
only in scientific terminology but also in ordinary words, than is usually 
realized. 

To illustrate the gaps in geologic terminology, a sample has been taken from 
the four-language geologic dictionary edited by Rutten. The section on "tec- 
tonic geology" contains 653 terms (not including synonyms), of which only 
393 are represented in all four of the languages, 141 in three, 105 in two, and 
14 in one. There are 644 terms in Dutch, 561 in German, and 506 in both 
English and French. Dutch appears to have the richest terminology of this 
subject, but the relative scarcity of gaps is undoubtedly related to the fact that 
Dutch was the primary language of the compilers. Furthermore, the dictionary 
project afforded them an opportunity to discover the gaps in the Dutch ter- 
minology, which, according to two of the compilers, were closed by coining 
terms. 

The absence of equivalents in two of the four languages for any term is less 
significant than a gap in one or three. Where at least two languages contain 
equivalents, the sense of the knowledge they express is seen to have gained 
identification beyond its source. A term that has no equivalents in three of the 
languages may represent a highly restricted identification, although it may 
also stand for a distinct advance of knowledge in one language area over the 
other areas. The absence of a term in only one of the languages suggests that 
the subject has, for some reason, not been pursued actively in that language 
area. This interpretation is supported by the prevalence of gaps in sequences 
of related terms. On the other hand, it may indicate that foreign-language 
terms are being used regularly to discuss the subject. 

In the sample, English and French show the same number of gaps, but 
English is the only missing language in 83 cases, whereas French alone is absent 
in 42. Based on a study of the terms of geomorphology, Baulig finds that 
foreign-language terms are used most in English and successively less in German 
and French. He relates the prevalence of borrowed technical terms in English 
to the long-time general receptiveness of English-language speakers to words 
of foreign origin. German, according to Baulig, is more likely to contain trans- 
lations of foreign-language terms or modifications to a German form. French, 
he finds, resists German terms because they seem difficult for French speakers 
to assimilate and pronounce, but is more tolerant of words from other Romance 
languages. Thus, the indicated gaps in French terminology are more likely to 
be real gaps than those in English. 

Baulig comments on the dangers of borrowing without adequately under- 
standing the source language. Too often, adoptions result in distortions of 
meaning and incorrect usage. The tendency to borrow freely makes these 
abuses all the more noticeable in English writing and speech. 



202 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

Borrowing occurs also between different sciences, particularly to serve the 
needs of specialists working in border areas. The rapidly developing inter- 
disciplinary fields, such as geophysics and geochemistry, have vocabularies 
that represent mingling, rather than mere borrowing, of terms from the parent 
fields. As terms become common to more than one field, they tend to fall 
within the scope of the general language and appear in standard language 
dictionaries. The commonly accepted definitions of an increasing number of 
scientific terms are found today in these dictionaries, which are cited as the 
authorities for definitions shown in modern technical dictionaries. 

Adoption or adaptation of words from any source often involves change in 
meaning. The scientific usage is subject to further change, with the result that 
many terms have several different scientific meanings, not just in succession 
but simultaneously. Watznauer regards change from original meanings as 
normal deviation caused by the advance of knowledge. A typical example of 
the history of origin and changes in usage has been traced by Tourtelot, using 
the word sfale . He concludes that the present usage of this term hi two technical 
meanings is permissible and justifiable. It would be futile to insist on a single 
meaning for this kind of term. The user cannot be expected to define his usage 
of each term with different meanings each time he uses it. The usage, whether 
technical or vernacular, should be apparent to the reader from the context. 

Invention of terms should become necessary only when no terms fulfilling 
the purpose are available in any language. The need grows as the knowledge 
of the field increases. The discovery* of hitherto unidentified objects demands 
the creation of new names. There is less frequent need for new common words, 
since they stand for classes of objects, generalizations, and concepts, which are 
not newly recognized as often as data are. 

Whatever the mode of origin, need is the basic justification for terminology. 
The growth of terminology in modern time suggests that need does not always 
motivate the introduction of new terms. Watznauer has examined this growth 
critically and concluded that the purpose of terminology is being destroyed by 
uncontrolled addition of specialized terms. He argues that a new term should 
represent an addition to knowledge and that too many terms are unnecessary 
because they merely reexpress what has been known before. He observes that 
terms are being introduced without clear-cut definitions and therefore do not 
serve as a point of reference for the state of knowledge at a given time. 

Watznauer (1956) sees the individual scientist unable to cope with the many 
terms applying to special subfields and abandoning the effort to keep abreast 
of knowledge in specialties other than his own. He finds terminology- threaten- 
ing to become the master of science and artificially promoting specialization 
that tends to disunite fields. This argument oversimplifies the explanation of 
real or apparent fragmentation of sciences. The actual increase in the store of 
knowledge is still a compelling factor in limiting the scope of individual interest 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 203 

in and capacity for comprehending a science. In the case of geology, specialized 
vocabularies do not cause the drift of subfields toward affiliation with other 
sciences, but once the movement has begun they serve to reinforce it. 



Monolingual Dictionaries 

Dictionaries and other types of wordbooks are a measure of the amount 
and kind of attention given the subject of terminology. Bibliographic and sta- 
tistical records of all types of monolingual and multilingual dictionaries through- 
out the world, published by UNESCO (1961 see also Wiister, 1955, 1959) show 
geologic dictionaries to be few in number today; and there is no evidence that 
they were more common in the past. 

Dictionaries can be classified as general or specialized by reference to their 
coverage of fields and degree of completeness within the fields covered. In a 
strict interpretation, a general dictionary is one that covers the entire termin- 
ology of a field at a given time. An all-inclusive geologic dictionary may have 
been compiled in the past, but none appears to exist now. By design, the 
modern general geologic dictionary is one with broad coverage of the termi- 
nology, but with intentional omissions of some subject areas or categories of 
terms. 

Specialized dictionaries do not have to conform to any standard of coverage 
or completeness. These dictionaries may be separate publications of consider- 
able size with complete coverage of a stated range of subject matter, but often 
they are glossaries and vocabularies appended to geologic books, papers, and 
map explanations. 

In English, four general geologic dictionaries published in the nineteenth 
century by Roberts in 1839, by Humble in 1840, by Page in 1865, and by 
Oldham in 1 879 are cited in modern dictionaries as predecessors. The modern 
dictionaries, which have been examined for this discussion, are those prepared 
by Rice (1940), Himus (1954), Stokes and Varnes (1955), the AGI Glossary 
Project (1957; second edition containing a supplement, 1960; abridged ver- 
sion, 1962), and ChaUinor (1961). 

The Rice and AGI dictionaries are comprehensive works intended primarily 
for professional geologists. The Rice dictionary (1940), with an estimated total 
of 8000 terms, was the largest English-language geologic dictionary at the time 
of its publication. With 14,000 terms in the original edition and about 4000 
more in a supplement, the AGI dictionary is the closest approach to an all- 
inclusive geologic dictionary available today. Some of those compiled in the 
nineteenth century may have covered the smaller body of terminology of that 
time as completely. For example, Humble (1840) defined about 3000 terms in 
his dictionary published in 1840 and added 300 in the second edition in 1843. 



204 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

The difference in size of the Rice and AGI dictionaries is partly an indicator 
of the growth of terminology* in a period of less than 20 years. It is also an 
indicator of the vastly greater resources of manpower applied to the AGI 
Project. After about four years of planning by representatives of numerous 
organizations, topical committees, in which more than 80 individuals partici- 
pated, spent three years and four months in selecting terms and providing 
definitions. The Rice dictionary was compiled by one person, not a profes- 
sional geologist, without organized assistance, over a period of many years. 

As comprehensive works, both the Rice and AGI dictionaries necessarily 
contain a broad coverage of geologic fields. The compilers of the AGI diction- 
ary considered 30 fields of geology and related sciences and included all but a 
few in the final compilation. The terminology of each field covered is complete 
except in a few cases, for reasons that are stated in the preface to the dictionary. 
Limited coverage was justified mainly by the existence of accessible specialized 
dictionaries or other reference works on terms and names of a subject area. 
In the Rice dictionary, the only announced exclusion was stratigraphic and 
paleontologic nomenclature. Actually, it contains a great many stratigraphic 
names. 

The Himus dictionary (1954) and the abridged version of the AGI dictionary 
are classed as selective general dictionaries. Both were published in series of 
pocket-sized reference books intended for the general reader. The Himus 
dictionary is the smaller volume, containing about 1800 terms and names. 
The AGI abridged dictionary, with 7000 entries, or about half the contents of 
the second edition of the original dictionary, is, despite its format, a compre- 
hensive work. It establishes a new scale for selective geologic dictionaries. 
Two decades ago the most complete dictionary was less than 10 percent larger 
than this abridged work of today. The largest selective dictionary published 
previously contained less than half as many terms. 

Stokes and Varnes (1955) selected 2800 terms covering the field of geology 
broadly, which they considered to be of concern to civil engineers and related 
specialists. The specific omissions are stratigraphic names, most rock names, 
and most general and elementary terms of mineralogy and petrology. Whether 
the intended audience has no use for the information that is omitted is ques- 
tionable. What Stokes and Varnes have accomplished is to put the problem 
of abridgment in focus. They have distinguished information that is properly 
recorded in an abridged general dictionary from that which belongs in un- 
abridged general and specialized dictionaries. 

Challinor (1961) explains his purpose in compiling a geologic dictionary 
with this statement: 

There appears to be room among works on geology for one that will probe 
the subject by examining the meaning and usage of names and terms that 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 205 

stand for the more significant things, facts, and concepts of the science. This 
small book is an essay towards a critical and historical review of a selected 
ABC of the subject. 

The format of a dictionary is employed by Challinor to present comments 
on geologic subject matter. Terminology is treated as a manifestation of the 
state of geologic knowledge and the degree of maturity of the science at different 
times in its history. Secondarily, Challinor supplies a study on the usage, 
source, and etymology of geologic words. There is no pretense of complete 
coverage in this selection of about 1250 terms and 300 names belonging to 
subfields of geology, to which 250 general geologic words, designation of tools 
and concepts, and terms borrowed from physics and chemistry are added. 

In addition to the five dictionaries mentioned, two other modern dictionaries 
contain a broad representation of geologic terminology, although they are not 
specifically geologic. These two are the dictionary of mining- and mineral- 
industry terms by Fay (1920), and the geographic dictionary prepared by a 
committee (L. D. Stamp, Chairman) of the British Association for the Advance- 
ment of Science (BAAS), which was published in 1961. 

The Fay volume (1920) contains 20,000 terms, or 8000 more than appear 
in the first edition of the AGI dictionary. In this compilation, Fay had six 
active collaborators and twelve reviewers of definitions. About 4000 of the 
terms can be considered geologic. Thus the Fay dictionary was also the first 
major geologic dictionary published in the United States. Only paleontologic 
terms are specifically omitted, but, in keeping with the purpose of the work, 
the majority of the geologic terms are mineral and rock names. 

The BAAS dictionary (1961) may be regarded as the geographic counterpart 
of the AGI dictionary, since it, too, is the result of an intensive examination 
of terminology for the purpose of producing a comprehensive general diction- 
ary. The BAAS project took even more time than the AGI project. In a first 
stage, an attempt to carry out directions given by the BAAS to a dictionary 
committee ended in a virtual suspension of effort after three years. The 
project was resumed by a reorganized committee of twelve members, supported 
ultimately by fifty-eight collaborators, many of them outside Britain. A re- 
search officer was appointed to prepare an initial list of terms and definitions. 
This task was completed in one year. In the following six years, Stamp, who 
was also the editor of the dictionary, quadrupled the list of terms and, with the 
assistance of the other committee members and the collaborators, reviewed 
definitions and prepared comments on them. 

With an estimated total of only 3200 terms, the BAAS dictionary still may 
be classified as both an unabridged and an abridged dictionary. The size does 
not indicate selectivity in subject-matter coverage so much as intentional 
limitation to "terms in current geographical literature written hi English." 



206 FREDERICK BETZ, JR 

The criterion of currency is not applied in any of the other dictionaries being 
considered here. 

The BAAS dictionary contains many terms used in geography that are also 
identified with the vocabularies of geology*, climatology-, meteorology, soil 
science, and ecology*. In respect to geologic terminology, Stamp notes the 
following omissions: mineral names; rock names except for some "commonly 
misused or misunderstood ^names,' and names applied to broad groups' 5 ; all 
but a few stratigraphic names (but more than 200 are listed in an appendix to 
the dictionary;; and all but some important tectonic terms. These omissions, 
primarily of nomenclature, do not indicate a narrowness of interest in geologic 
subject matter among physical geographers. Geologists might presume that 
the majority of terms in the dictionary were taken from the field of geomorphol- 
ogy. Actually, geomorphic terms amount to less than 10 percent of the total 
of geologic terms. The coverage of geologic terms is so broad that, according 
to a review in '"The Geochemical Xews," 3 the dictionary contains many terms 
of interest "to geologists, mineralogists, petrologists, and even geochemists. 59 

The fundamental significance of the widespread borrowing and sharing of 
terminology and subject matter among sciences is that they no longer have 
completely separate areas of interest. Indeed the boundaries between the major 
fields are being erased rapidly. The question can be asked: What will be the 
identifying marks of the individual fields in the future? An answer is given for 
geology by C. \V. Wright (1959), who characterized this field as a group of 
sciences unified by a special outlook, which he describes as a sense of time and 
process. Wright mentions only chemistry, biology, geography, and meteorology 
as sciences joined for a special purpose in geology, but still other sciences are 
familiar in their geologic orientations. If Wright's interpretation is accepted, 
then one can ask whether geology was ever anything but an outlook on prob- 
lems dealt with from other standpoints by other disciplines. Today, the identi- 
fication of such fields as geophysics, geochemistry*, and geohydrology is viewed 
widely as evidence of the fragmentation of the science of geology. On the con- 
trary, these subfields are interdisciplinary* links between geology and other 
sciences that have always existed but were not recognized formerly. In the 
process of identifying these links, the concept of geology* as a completely sep- 
arate discipline is becoming obsolete. lake other sciences that have already 
abandoned an imaginary autonomy, geology will become identified as one 
important viewpoint influencing investigations in a group of interdisciplinary 
fields. In them the geologic influence may be dominant, but from time to time 
and place to place it will undoubtedly be supplanted by influences of other 
participating disciplines. It is unrealistic to classify* these fields as branches of 
any one of the participating disciplines, even if they were first recognized within 

* See H., in References. 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 207 

single disciplines. Thus geophysics is as much a branch of geology- as it is of 
physics, geochemistry is not the exclusive property of geology- or chemistry, and 
it is proper for both geographers and geologists to be geomorphologists. 

The replacement of distinct sciences by interdisciplines has been foreshad- 
owed by the terminology gathered in modern technical dictionaries. For prac- 
tical reasons, comprehensive general dictionaries are forced to omit whole 
vocabularies of existing subfields of the science and interdisciplines in which it 
participates. Basically the compilers are faced with the problem of defining 
the limits of the field and are finding the solution increasingly elusive. The 
general dictionary must, therefore, abandon comprehensiveness, and the burden 
of recording the complete terminology must be distributed among specialized 
dictionaries. 

A stated function of the BAAS dictionary- is to serve those whose native 
tongue is not English, because English is becoming "increasingly the normal 
medium for scientific writing and publication." This conclusion was con- 
firmed by the revisers of the Royal Netherlands Geological and Mining Society's 
multilingual geologic dictionary. As a Dutch publication, in the original 
edition in 1929 Dutch was the language of reference. In the revision published 
in 1959, English occupied this position because the compilers found that it 
was becoming dominant in geologic literature. 

These dictionary compilers refer to the dominant medium as English with- 
out describing this "English" that is used for scientific communication. In 
respect to terminology, as was indicated in the earlier discussion of sources of 
terms, a significant part consists of foreign-language terms adopted with little 
or no change by English-language speakers. Thus the BAAS dictionary- 
contains about 900 terms, more than one-fourth of the total, from 31 foreign 
languages or language groups. Presumably these terms have been assimilated 
into English and are now integral parts of the communication medium called 
English. In reality, an international terminology is evolving. 

The natives of foreign-language areas use the so-called English terminology 
in a framework that is also referred to as English. On examination, this lan- 
guage is found to be a geologic lingua franca composed largely of English words, 
used frequently in ways unfamiliar to English-language speakers, and of 
English-like words that seem to be invented more or less spontaneously by the 
foreign-language speakers. In grammar and style it often bears greater affinity 
to some foreign language than to English. Foreign-born scientists carry this 
lingua franca into English-language areas, where, unfortunately, too many 
continue to use it. They complicate the problem of scientific communication 
by adding negligence to the already prevalent indifference toward, and defiance 
of, good use of language. 

The difficulties created by the use of foreign-language terms and the faulty 
use of English by foreigners are augmented by the differences between North 



208 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

American and British English. The BAAS dictionary takes into account 
these differences in the use of terminology-. They occur in both terms and 
usage. The more troublesome are the differences in usage, which are apt to 
be overlooked by English-language speakers. The extent to which British 
terminology* differs from American is demonstrated by the Himus geologic 
dictionary. Roughly 400 of the estimated total of 1800 terms are British terms 
and names, which are not used regularly, if at all, by Americans and are no 
more meaningful to them than foreign-language words. 

In group projects it is difficult to obtain agreement on definitions. The 
BAAS instructed its first dictionary- committee to prepare "a glossary of geo- 
graphical terms with agreed definitions in English including references to 
origin and previous usage and to current use and misuse." The reorganized 
committee evaluated the charge and concluded that the effort to prepare 
definitions that would meet with complete approval of the members would 
have to be abandoned. They discovered further that while original definitions 
can be found for recent terms, many older terms have gained acceptance 
without benefit of a specifically recorded first definition. The committee chose 
to accept from a standard source, usually the Oxford English Dictionary, at 
least one clear meaning and to obtain variant usages from the technical lit- 
erature. 

The AGI dictionary offers a combination of different types of explanations. 
Presumably the topical committees adhered to the aim of finding the original 
or another authoritative definition before writing a new one. The agreement 
on either accepting an existing definition or preparing a new one was a responsi- 
bility of each committee. These committees ranged in size from one member 
to twelve, with an average of about three. There is visible evidence of a lack 
of uniformity in handling definitions, which, like the variations in coverage of 
topics, is probably the result of wide delegation of responsibility. That such 
irregularities are not desirable was recognized by the compilers, but those 
that occurred were not corrected because too much time was believed to have 
been spent on the project to permit further delay in publication. Instead, an 
immediate review of the dictionary for omissions and errors, in which the readers 
were invited to participate, was announced. It yielded about 4000 additional 
and redefined terms. The revision of the dictionary seems to prove that the 
number of experts who can be expected to reach agreement on the proper 
selection and definition of terms in their own special vocabularies is very low. 4 

4 The following statement appears on p. iii of the AGI dictionary: "Selection of 
definitions used was made by the members of the sub-committees listed below. Un- 
accredited (sic!) definitions were written by these committees or individuals." As 
printed, the second sentence says that definitions not ascribed to a source are not 
approved definitions. This expression of no confidence in the committees and their 
members can be interpreted by each reader to his own satisfaction. 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 209 

Interlingual Dictionaries 

The basic purpose of interlingual dictionaries is to coordinate terminology' 
in different languages as an aid in reading and translating foreign-language 
writings. The function is to provide equivalents, not definitions. Such diction- 
aries are, as Holmstrom (1951) points out, "apt to foster the illusion that each 
word in a language necessarily has its exact and self-sufficient counterpart in 
other languages." The presence of gaps, or absence of equivalents, has been 
illustrated earlier in this discussion by the example of geologic terminology in 
four languages. Where equivalents do not exist, the reader or translator must 
be prepared to visualize or express the term in some other way, usually by a 
phrase. He will also have the opportunity of reducing a statement in one 
language to a word in another. 

A technical word or expression is surrounded by other words that create the 
context. The real unit of equivalence between languages is, therefore, more 
often a phrase or a sentence than a word. Holmstrom (1951) states that 

the first principle of good translating is to translate not words but ideas 
organically. The effect of reading a sentence in one language ought to be to 
generate in the translator's mind an articulated pattern of ideas, so that he 
may then forget the wording in which they were originally expressed and 
may himself proceed to reexpress them by making his own professionally 
educated choice and arrangement of words in the other language. 

The scientific reader should also adopt this principle and not be content with 
knowing approximately what the foreign-language author has said, but require 
of himself that he know it completely and idiomatically in the other, generally 
his own, language. To do so, the reader or translator must have at least as 
good command of his own language as he has of the foreign language. 

Most interlingual technical dictionaries, in addition to presenting language 
in incorrect units, contain an overabundance of irrelevant and unnecessary 
terms, according to expert opinion cited by Holmstrom (1951). These dic- 
tionaries are encumbered by "unwanted" terms, which are ordinary dictionary 
words, cognates, and compounds with easily identifiable constituents. In a 
sample of seven bilingual technical dictionaries, Holmstrom found the average 
content of "unwanted" terms to be 90 percent of the total. 

For comparison, Holmstrom's criteria were applied to Huebner's German- 
English geologic dictionary (1 939) . It was found to contain as much superfluous 
material as in any of Holmstrom's samples. Huebner includes countless terms 
that are identical in German and English or that differ only slightly in spelling; 
compounds with meanings obvious from their elements; and many words and 
parts of compounds that are in the German general vocabulary or common 
scientific vocabulary. By strict adherence to the criteria, Huebner's dictionary 
would have to be reduced from 25,000 entries to about 3000. 



210 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

On reappraisal of Holmstrom's criteria, it is clear that they presuppose a 
higher level of competence in languages than can be expected of scientific 
readers. It is not realistic to presume that these readers can analyze word 
structure in foreign languages. The "unwanted" words in interlingual diction- 
aries may, therefore, be essential to the majority of scientific readers. Trans- 
lators, as the other main group of users, should be able to get along without 
common words in a technical dictionary, but they are in need of explicit 
assistance in deciphering technical terms and their derivatives. The profes- 
sional translator typically lacks proficiency in technical vocabularies in any 
language, as published translations amply demonstrate. 

When Huebner's dictionary is reexamined in terms of its usefulness to readers 
with an unequal knowledge of German and English, it emerges as an encyclo- 
pedic work of substantial quality and value. Besides its primary function, it 
gives information on regional usage of both English and German geologic 
terminologv, often with more than a mere word equivalent, and it indicates 
incorrect usage of German terms in English. Regrettably, the English-German 
part of this dictionary has never been published. 

Bilingual dictionaries commonly have two parts, each with one of the 
languages as the language of reference. In effect they are pairs of dictionaries 
in which the contents of both parts are cross referenced. Ideally all terms used 
in one part should appear in the other, but the purpose of the dictionary may 
dictate differences. For example, Fischer and Elliott (1950) explain that in 
their German and English glossary of geographic terms, the English-German 
part "is not intended primarily for the German student who wants to read 
English geographical literature, but for the English-speaking geographer who 
wishes to establish the German equivalent for an English term." Thus, because 
ik many English terms are not easily rendered in German," they "are to be 
found only in the English-German part." Also, "Terms practically the same 
in both languages are, in general, included only in the English-German part; 
English readers usually recognize such words but may hesitate to use them in a 
foreign language. This is especially true for English terms used in German . . . 
and for terms from another language . . . used in both languages." For the 
English-speaking user's benefit, the German-English part is the larger, since 
his main problem is to understand German literature, not translate English 
into German. 

In multilingual dictionaries, additional dictionaries can be handled in the 
same fashion as the two languages of bilingual dictionaries. The complete 
repetition of all terms as many times as there are languages in the dictionary 
produces the easiest work for the largest audience to use. In a variant on this 
arrangement, a trilingual geologic dictionary prepared by the military geologic 
organization of the German army during World War II 6 contains a German- 



5 See Wehrgeologenstab Wannsee in the References. 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 211 

French-English part followed by a French-German and an English-German 
part. Starting with a French or English term in the second and third parts, 
respectively, the German equivalent can be used to find the equivalent in 
either of these other languages in the first part. Thus, although intended for 
primary users of German and arranged for their convenience, this dictionary 
can be used effectively by speakers of English or French. 

In all dictionaries discussed so far, the terms are listed in alphabetical order. 
This simple arrangement is replaced in some dictionaries by listings based on 
some type of association of meanings. 

Both editions of the Royal Netherlands Geological and Mining Society's 
multilingual dictionary (Rutten, 1929; Schieferdecker, 1959) illustrate a non- 
alphabetical arrangement of terms. In this general dictionary the field of 
geology is divided into major branches or subjects, which are further subdivided 
topically. 6 According to Schieferdecker, who edited the second edition, the 
arrangement of terms is genetic. The characterization is appropriate for 
various sequences of terms within topical divisions, but it is meaningless for 
the dictionary as a whole because many of the terms have no genetic connota- 
tion and thus their order can have no genetic significance. Schieferdecker 
commends the so-called genetic arrangement as a convenience for the reader 
by greatly facilitating the finding of terms. On the contrary, the alphabetical 
index is the only convenient key to the terms. 

In another example of a nonalphabetical arrangement of terms, Challinor 
(1961) lists his terms in a classified index under 48 group headings. According 
to Challinor, "within each group an attempt is made to put them into some 
logical order." Some sequences of terms are familiar and, therefore, appear 
to be logical, but others are arbitrary and wholly personal. In this case the 
user can ignore the index and look for terms directly in the alphabetical listing 
of the dictionary proper. 

Despite the weaknesses of nonalphabetical order, it offers the advantage of 
grouping terminology by subjects and topics. The user with time to browse 
can obtain a complete picture of terminology of a topic without the distraction 
of interspersed unrelated terms. The plan converts a general dictionary into 
a series of specialized dictionaries. 

The associative order of terms in a dictionary is an indirect approach to the 
problem of placing terms in context. The additive effect of sequences of words 
with related connotations can create an impression of the places in which they 
are used properly. A direct approach is taken by scientific reading exercise 



6 The first edition (1929) contains eight primary divisions and 44 secondary; the 
second edition (1959) has 74 primary and 107 secondary divisions. The great increase 
in primary and secondary divisions in the second edition may be due to various causes 
indicated in the previous discussion of English dictionaries. The effect of the increase 
is to provide more structure for the allocation of terms in the dictionary. 



212 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

books designed for use in foreign-language instruction. Selections from foreign- 
language literature may be translated in their entirety into the user's tongue 
and printed beside the original text, or only technical terms and other selected 
expressions or phrases are translated and given in footnotes, sidenotes, or 
appended vocabularies. These books are not systematic presentations of 
terminology*, but are often used in place of dictionaries for hasty acquisition of 
a specialized foreign-language vocabulary*. 

A direct systematic approach to the problem of coordinating terminology 
in two or more languages demands an effort beyond translation and compila- 
tion. In the late nineteenth century, de Margerie and Heim (1888) became 
concerned by the increasing misunderstanding of terminology of crustal dis- 
locations. They undertook to clarify- the concepts of the topic by publishing 
parallel French and German versions of their text. Where technical terms 
appeared, the columns of text were interrupted and the special French and 
German terms were centered on the page. In addition, any English equiva- 
lents of the French and German terms were given. The authors also appended 
references to sources of terms and examples of usage. 

Baulig (1956), inspired by this older work, published a study on the termi- 
nology of geomorphology in French, English, and German, with incidental 
attention to other languages, especially Arabic. The text is in French. Baulig 
divided the subject into many topics, which he discussed systematically in more 
than 500 numbered paragraphs. Immediately following the appearance of a 
French special term in the text, equivalents in French, English, and German, 
and in places dialectal terms and equivalents in other languages, were inserted. 
The same term may appear in several places in the volume to account for usage 
in different contexts. A combined index refers to the numbered paragraphs, 
and the different usages are also signalled by cross references in the text. 
Baulig summarized the purpose of his study as follows: to reveal to the French 
user the resources, often unsuspected, of his own language; to help him hi 
reading and possibly translating foreign-language literature; and to contribute 
to a revision of the international vocabulary of geomorphology. 

Both studies attest to the ingenuity and scholarship of their authors. They 
have produced a combination of monolingual and interlingual dictionaries and 
explanatory texts that can be used for a variety of purposes. Baulig may have 
dealt with the largest practical grouping of subject matter in his study. The 
feasibility of applying this plan to a general dictionary is slight. These studies 
support an argument for detailed specialized wordbooks, which can portray 
technical language in meaningful units. 

Interlingual dictionaries call attention to the seriousness of the problem of 
worldwide scientific communication. In the absence of an international 
language, the primary reporting in one language is not directly usable by those 
lacking a reading knowledge of that language. A recent examination of the 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 213 

effects of language barriers in earth sciences was made by Emery and Martin 
(1961), who found that the literature contains references mostly "to sources 
from the same country as the author, evidently because of familiarity with 
language and ease of access." They observed that the second most frequent 
source for non-English writers is American and British literature, "probably 
because English is the most familiar language of the scientific world." 

Language barriers are being lowered, though not eliminated, by the simul- 
taneous publication of abstracts in one or more of the other widely used lan- 
guages along with the original complete text. Journals and volumes of abstracts 
issued periodically in various important languages are invaluable guides to 
worldwide literature. The dependence on abstracts of foreign-language litera- 
ture is paralleled by the growing reliance on abstracts of literature in the user's 
own language. The abstract is becoming an ultimate unit of reading, instead 
of serving just as a guide to publications. 

An alternative to abstracting foreign-language literature is complete or sub- 
stantially complete translation. Whereas abstracts are often prepared by 
subject-matter specialists, translations are usually the work of professional 
translators. The value of completeness of a translation can be outweighed by 
the deficiencies in rendition of technical information. Translation is, there- 
fore, a way of overcoming language barriers that should be adopted only if 
it can be justified. The primary justification is not the existence of a barrier 
but the importance of the literature and the need to have its contents 
known. 

Today, in the United States, bulk translation of Russian literature confirms 
the inability of most American scientists to read Russian. If the translations 
prepared so far have established the importance of Russian scientific work, 
then the obvious solution for American scientists is to learn to read Russian 
and not to depend further on translations. In defense of translation on 
a grand scale, the limited opportunities for studying Russian in American 
schools could be cited. On the other hand, the existence of widespread op- 
portunities for studying foreign languages does not guarantee lasting pro- 
ficiency. 

Emery and Martin (1961) show that American earth scientists do not report 
extensive use of French and German sources, although the literature in these 
languages is voluminous. A report on proficiency in foreign languages, pub- 
lished by the U.S. National Science Foundation (1961), explains the reason for 
this surprising observation. The report is based on an inquiry among 100,000 
American scientists, who provided the following information: (a) "84 percent 
stated they could read scientific or technical material in a foreign language"; 
(b) of this group only "30 percent rated their ability as good"; (c) "Only 12 
percent of those reading German rated their ability as c good'; in French it 
was 9 percent . . ." 



214 FREDERICK BETZ, JR; 

Although many Europeans are competent in the use of several languages, 
the growing number of languages in which scientific literature is written poses 
a problem for them, too. In 192?, Salomon in Germany was discouraged by 
the growing problem in worldwide communication of geologic knowledge. 
He predicted, perhaps not altogether facetiously, that the future geologist 
would have to spend his first 80 years in learning languages and then only 
could he begin with geology-. Salomon proposed the adoption of Latin as the 
language for international geologic communication, but was realistic enough 
to anticipate strong opposition. The outlook for the success of this proposal 
has long since faded, but the need for an international language is greater 
than ever. 

The increasing use of English in scientific communication may lead to recog- 
nition of English as the international language some day, but there is no 
prospect that it will displace all other languages in the immediate future. 
Until that day, geologists and other scientists who depend on language to 
express much of their knowledge, must keep in mind the grave conclusion 
stated by Emery and Martin (1961) that: 

. . . science is proceeding in each country largely independently of progress 
in other countries. This is ... extremely wasteful of manpower, facilities, 
and time, although it does provide independent confirmation of ideas and 
techniques. Its existence means that probably a majority of scientists tacitly 
assume that it is easier to make independent discoveries than to learn of 
other prior work when the latter is reported in an unfamiliar language. 



Concluding Remarks 

The problems of terminology and its unrestrained growth, of dictionaries 
and their contents and arrangement, of modes of communication other than 
language, and of interlingual exchange of scientific information are all over- 
shadowed by the more perplexing problems caused by the rampant growth 
of literature. 

Emery and Martin (1961) remarked that: 

... a scientist of a given field is faced not only by a flood of publications in 
his own language but by similar floods in other languages. Since there is a 
limit to his time and ability to absorb this material, the scientist may choose 
to specialize in a field so small that he can read most of the literature or he 
may choose to cover a larger field and ignore most of the literature, particu- 
larly that which is difficult to read or obtain. 



The problems only appear to have become urgent in our time. 
70 years ago, when the flood of literature was a trickle compared with today's 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 215 

outpouring, Archibald Geikie (1897) said much the same 7 : 

I am only too painfully aware how increasingly difficult it is to 8 keep pace 
with the ever-rising tide of modern geological literature. The science itself 
has so widened, and the avenues to publication have so prodigiously multi- 
plied, that one is almost driven in despair to become a specialist, and confine 
one's reading to that portion of the literature which deals with one's own 
more particular branch of the science. But this narrowing of the range of 
our interests and acquirement has a markedly prejudicial effect on the 
character of our work. 

Geikie continues with words of admonition that should be repeated today: 

The only 9 consolation we can find is 10 the conviction, borne in upon us 
by ample and painful experience, that 11 a very 12 large mass of the geologi- 
cal 13 writing of the present time is utterly worthless 14 for any of the higher 
purposes of the science, and that it may quite safely and profitably, both as 
regards time and temper, be left unread. If geologists, and especially young 
geologists, could only be brought to realise that the addition of another 
paper to the swollen flood of our scientific literature involves a serious 
responsibility; that no man should publish what is not of real consequence, 
and that his statements when published should be so clear and condensed 
as he can make them, what a blessed change would come over the faces of 
their readers, and how greatly would they conduce to the real advance of 
the science which they wish to serve. 15 



7 The text is quoted from the first edition (1897, pp. 287-288) of Geikie's "Founders 
of Geology." Several changes were made in the second edition (1907, pp. 471-472), 
which are indicated in the footnotes that follow. 

8 Inserted between "to" and "keep" in the second edition: "find time for a careful 
study of the work of our predecessors, and also to." 

9 "The only" is replaced in the second edition with "There is but slender." 

10 "we can find in" is replaced in the second edition with "to be derived from." 

11 Inserted between "that" and "a" in the second edition: "in the case of geological 
literature." 

12 "very" is omitted in second edition. 

18 "geological" is omitted in second edition. 

14 "utterly worthless" is replaced in the second edition with "of little or no value." 

15 "." is replaced in second edition with "!." 



216 FREDERICK BETZ, JR. 

REFERENCES CITED 

American Geological Institute, 1957, Glossary- of geology and related sciences: Wash- 
ington, D. C., Am. Geol. Inst., 325 pp.; 2nd ed. (with supp.), 1960, 420 pp. Abr. ed., 
1962, Garden City, X. V., Doubleday, 545 pp. 

BAULIG, HENRI, 1956, Vocabulaire franco-anglo-allemand de geomorphologie: Paris 
(Soc. d'Edition: Les BeUes Leltres) Univ. Strasbourg, Fac. Lettres, Publ., fasc. 130, 
230 pp. 

BROWN, R. \V., 1956, Composition of scientific words: Washington, D. C., U.S. Natl. 
Mus., The Author, 882 pp. 

BURT, F. A., 1949, Origins of geologic terms: Sci. Monthly, vol. 69, pp. 20-22. 

CHALLINOR, JOHN, 1961, A dictionary of geology: Cardiff, Univ. of Wales Press, 235 pp. 

CLOOS, HANS, 1933, Wie sag ich's meinen Fachgenossen?: Geol. Rundschau, Bd. 24, 
pp. 225-228. 

DARLINGTON, C. D., 1953, The facts of life: London, G. Allen & Unwin, 476 pp. 

EMERY, K. O., and MARTIN, B. D., 1961, Language barriers in earth science: GeoTimes 
(Am. Geol. Inst.), vol. 6, no. 2, pp. 19-21. 

EVANS, BERGEN, 1962, Comfortable words: New York, Random House, 379 pp. 

FAY, A. H., 1920, A glossary of the mining and mineral industry: U.S. Bur. Mines, 
B. 95, 754 pp. 

FISCHER, ERIC, and ELLIOTT, F. E., 1950, A German and English glossary of geographi- 
cal terms: Am. Geog. Soc., Lib. Ser. no. 5, 111 pp. 

GEIKIE, ARCHIBALD, 1897, The founders of geology: London, Macmiilan; 1st ed., 
297 pp.; 2nd ed. (1905), 486 pp. 

H., E. W., 1962, Book review A glossary of geographical terms: Geochem. News, 
no. 3, p. 8. 

HIMUS, G. W., 1954, A dictionary of geology: Harmondsworth, Penguin Books, 153 pp. 

HOLMSTROM, J. E., 1951, Report on interlingual scientific and technical dictionaries: 
Paris, UNESCO, Publ. 884, 35 pp. 

HUEBNER, WALTHER, 1939, Geology and allied sciences A thesaurus and a coordina- 
tion of English and German specific and general terms: New York, Veritas Press, 
Part 1, German-English, 424 pp. 

HUMBLE, WILLIAM, 1840, Dictionary of geology and mineralogy: London, Henry Wash- 
bourne; 1st ed., 279 pp.; 2nd ed. (1843), 294 pp. 

KRUMBEIN, W. C., 1962, The computer in geology: Science, vol. 136, pp. 1087-1092. 

MARGERIE, EMMANUEL DE, and HEIM, ALBERT, 1888, Les Dislocations de Pecorce ter- 
restre Die Dislocationen der Erdrinde: Zurich, J. Wurster, 154 pp. 

OLDHAM, THOMAS, 1879, Geological glossary, for the use of students: London, Edward 
Stanford, 62 pp. 

PAGE, DAVID, 1865, Handbook of geological terms, geology and physical geography: 
Edinburgh, Blackwood, 506 pp. 

RICE, C. M., 1940, Dictionary of geological terms (exclusive of stratigraphic formations 
and paleontologic genera and species): Ann Arbor, Mich., J. W. Edwards, 461 pp. 

RICKARD, T. A., 1931, Technical writing: New York, John Wiley, 337 pp. 

ROBERTS, GEORGE, 1839, An etymological and explanatory dictionary of the terms and 
language of geology; designed for the early student, and for those who have not made 



GEOLOGIC COMMUNICATION 217 

great progress in that science: London, Longman, Orme, Brown, Green, & Long- 
mans, 183 pp. 

RUTTEN, L., ed., 1929, Geologische nomenclator: The Hague, G. Naeff, 338 pp. 
SALOMON, WILHELM, 1927, Die geologische Literatur und die Sprachen: Geologic, 

Nr. 41, pp. 1009-1013. 
SCHIEFERDECKER, A. A, G., ed., 1959, Geological nomenclature: Gorinchem, J. Noor- 

duijn, 523 pp. 
STAMP, L. D., 1961, A glossary of geographical terms: London, Longmans; New York, 

John Wiley (1962), 539 pp. 
STOKES, W. L., and VARNES, D. J., 1955, Glossary of selected geologic terms with special 

reference to their use in engineering: Colorado Sci. Soc., Pr., vol. 16, 165 pp. 
STRUNK, WILLIAM, JR., and WHITE, E. B., 1959, The elements of style: New York, 

Macmillan, 71 pp. 
TOURTELOT, H. A., 1960, Origin and use of the word "shale": Am. J. Sci., vol. 258-A, 

pp. 335-343. 
UNESCO, 1961, Bibliography of interlingual scientific and technical glossaries: Paris, 

UNESCO, 4th ed. 236 pp. 
U.S. National Science Foundation, 1961, Foreign-language proficiency of scientists 

reporting to the National Register of Scientific and Technical Personnel, 1960: 

Washington, D. C., Nad. Sci. Found., Sci. Manpower B., no. 16, 4 pp. 
WASHBURNE, C. W., 1943, Some wrong words: J. Geol., vol. 51, pp. 495-497. 
WATZNAUER, ADOLF, 1956, Rritische Bemerkungen zur wissenschafdichen Begriffs- 

bildung: Zs. angew. Geol., Bd. 2, pp. 64-65. 
WEBER, HANS, 1957, Die Sprache in der deutschen geologischen Fachliteratur der 

neueren Zeit: Neues Jb. Geol. u. Palaont., Mh., no. 6, pp. 274-278. 
Wehrgeologenstab Wannsee, Aussenstelle Heidelberg, 1943, Wehrgeologisches Worter- 

buch Deutsch-FranzSsisch-Englisch: (German Army ),Oberkomm. d.Heeres, AHA/In 

Fest (Geol.), 449 pp. 
WRIGHT, C. W., 1959, Order and disorder in nature: Geol. Assoc. (London), Pr., 

vol. 69, pp. 77-82. 
WUSTER, EUGEN, 1955, 1959, Bibliography of monolingual scientific and technical 

glossaries: Paris, UNESCO, 2 vols. 



JAMES GILLULY 

L\ S. Geological Survey 



The Scientific Philosophy of 
G. K. Gilbert 



The philosophy of G. K. Gilbert has earned a place in this symposium 
because of his profound influence upon the thinking of geologists everywhere. 
Other American geologists, notably Hall, Dana, Rogers, Darton, Daly, and 
perhaps a few others, have contributed nearly or quite as importantly to the 
body of our science. But Gilbert gave geology a larger dimension and greater 
vigor through his thoughtful discourses on scientific method, the creation and 
testing of hypotheses, and the disciplined use of the imagination. Much more 
influential, however, than all of his essays on method, was the example set by 
his scientific memoirs. The conscientious, imaginative observation and the 
judicious weighing of alternatives that these memoirs exemplify have become 
the ideals by which most of his successors evaluate geologic research to the 
present day. Because these qualities have become the standards of American 
geology, many geologists who have never read a line of Gilbert's writings are 
modeling their work, to the best of their abilities, upon his. 

Gilbert's stature and breadth of vision were recognized in his own day. He 
was the president of seven scientific societies, the recipient of four prizes and 
medals for scientific accomplishment, and the corresponding or honorary 
member of many foreign societies. He was the only man ever to serve twice as 
president of the Geological Society of America first in 1892 and again seven- 
teen years later in 1909. No one can deny his meriting this unique honor; 
he was one of the first truly distinguished American geologists. 

Gilbert's great powers would have made their impact felt under any circum- 
stances. It is not to denigrate them, then, to point out that his influence was 
maximized by the scientific climate of his time. He came on the scene at a 
turning point of American scientific history, when our science was just emerg- 
ing from the long eclipse that began with the death of Franklin precisely the 
right time for him to exercise the greatest influence upon the course of the new 
day. 

218 



THE SCIENTIFIC PHILOSOPHY OF G. K. GILBERT 219 

For the first two-thirds of the nineteenth century, American science lagged 
far behind our technology and invention. Between the time of Franklin and 
that of Willard Gibbs, we produced no scientist of the very first rank unless it 
be Matthew Fontaine Maury. As Tyndall deplored in 1872, many of our better 
scholars were diverted by lack of support for scientific work either into admin- 
istration, like Joseph Henry and William Rogers, or into the teaching of other 
subjects. Gibbs, for a time, had to teach Latin rather than either mathematics 
or physics, even though Yale paid him no salary. The Drapers, father and son, 
were perhaps the best of our astronomers, but the father made his living by 
writing history and the son by teaching physiology, in order to get the money 
to build their telescopes (Cohen, 1959). 1 

After the Civil War this situation began slowly to change for the better. 
The great step forward for geology began with the mining boom in the West 
and the pressures for exploratory surveys as the railroads expanded across the 
sparsely settled frontier. With negligible exceptions, this was the first time in 
our history when geologists were able to devote their full time and energies to 
geologic research. Certainly it was the first time in our history that a consider- 
able group of such men were assembled. To borrow a term from our friends 
in physics, it is clear, I think, that there is such a thing as a "critical mass" of 
scientists who, by mutual stimulation, are able to do much more as a group 
than the same men would have been able to do if each were working alone. 
Perhaps this generalization would not apply to the very great geniuses, but I 
believe it is easy to show that it applies to most scientists of more normal compe- 
tence. Every teacher of graduate students recognizes the application of this 
rule to a graduate seminar. The blossoming of American geology in the late 
years of the nineteenth century took place not only because the descriptive 
geology of half a continent needed to be done and men could spend full time 
in doing it, nor because the group assembled was one of great geniuses, even 
though I think the average competence to have been very high. It took place 
because the great challenge of scientific exploration attracted an unusually able 
group of men who could devote full time to research in an atmosphere of mutual 
stimulation. 

No wonder this generation produced so many men distinguished in geology: 
Gilbert, Powell, Button, Emmons, Walcott, Hayden, Cross, Becker, Hague, 
Ward, Iddings, and McGee. This list could be considerably extended by adding 
the teachers in the new graduate universities who were also a part of the same 



1 A hundred years ago many able scientists were diverted from teaching and research 
into administration because of lack of funds for science; today the plethora of project 
funds is luring far more scientists away from teaching and research into management 
and fund solicitation than ever were driven away in the simpler days of the last century. 
Plus $a change. . . . 



220 JAMES GILLULY 

program: Chamberlin of Chicago, I. C. Russell of Michigan, G. H. Williams 
of Johns Hopkins, and H. S. Williams of Cornell. That most of these men were 
exceptionally able is generally agreed, but it seems to me that the impact they 
made upon the science was even larger than their abilities would normally 
have justified. The combination of great challenge, mutual stimulus, and the 
financial support that enabled them to study many facets of geology, not only 
areally but also in depth, made possible the flowering of the science in America. 

Of these men, Powell was the man of broadest vision, perhaps the most far- 
seeing American statesman of his generation, but there is no question that 
Gilbert was the man of preeminent influence on geology. His influence was 
not revolutionary, like that of Gibbs in physical chemistry, but was more akin 
to that of Richards, our first Nobel prize winner, in setting a high standard 
of breadth and critical insight into the problem he studied a standard so 
high as to form a permanent criterion by which his successors test scientific 
excellence. 

Gilbert's philosophy was, of course, a synthesis of ideas and methods built 
up by the scientific fraternity over the centuries. The task of science consisted, 
for him as for others since Bacon, in the observation of natural phenomena 
and the discovery of orderly relations between them. 

In several of his lectures on methodology, he specifically disclaimed any 
novelty of approach, and, indeed, his philosophy did not contain anything 
new. That one must have several hypotheses in mind in order to sharpen ob- 
servation, that sound judgment depends upon testing more than one hypothesis, 
that the scientist should be reserved as to his own conclusions because every 
man tends to be partial to his own brain child all these ideas stressed by Gil- 
bert and beautifully illustrated in his papers had been familiar since the days 
of John Locke and had been eloquently stated by David Hume a hundred 
years before Gilbert wrote. 

Because the attitude underlying these ideas is so essential to research, Gilbert 
properly laid stress upon them. He also was fully aware of the pitfalls of 
semantics and of the danger of mistaking words for ideas, a danger from which 
the vast rubbish pile of obsolete geologic terms still fails to discourage our too 
numerous neologists. In the 1880's he was alert to the problem of relating 
language to meaning. Few others in that day considered the constraints placed 
on our thinking by language, although Mach in physics and Pearson in statistics 
were working along similar lines. These constraints are a principal concern of 
present-day philosophy. 

The relation Hume called "cause and effect," Gilbert more noncommittally 
called "antecedent and consequent.*' He continually stressed one fact: every 
antecedent has not one but many consequents. As he put it (Gilbert, 1886, 
p. 286), "Antecedent and consequent relations are therefore not merely linear, 
but constitute a plexus; and this plexus pervades nature." 



THE SCIENTIFIC PHILOSOPHY OF G. K. GILBERT 221 

His work gives innumerable examples of his realization that the very com- 
plexities of the antecedents and consequents of a particular phenomenon 
furnish powerful ways of evaluating hypotheses relating to it. The more conse- 
quences one can recognize as implied by some hypothesis, the more abundant 
the opportunities of testing them against the facts; the more diverse the conse- 
quences, the more sensitive the test. To quote: 

[An investigator] is not restricted to the employment of one hypothesis 
at a time. There is indeed an advantage in entertaining several at once, 
for then it is possible to discover their mutual antagonisms and inconsisten- 
cies, and to devise crucial tests tests which will necessarily debar some of 
the hypotheses from further consideration. The process of testing is then a 
process of elimination, at least until all but one of the hypotheses have been 
disproved. 

In the testing of hypotheses lies the prime difference between the investi- 
gator and the theorist. The one seeks diligently for the facts which may over- 
throw his tentative theory, the other closes his eyes to these and searches only 
for those which will sustain it. (Gilbert, 1886, p. 286) 

This method of simultaneously confronting several hypotheses with the 
pertinent phenomena, both antecedent and deduced, goes back at least two 
centuries and perhaps, even further, back to Bacon. But it was much in the 
minds of both Gilbert and Chamberlin, whose much-quoted paper on the 
method of multiple working hypotheses was published ten years later. 

Gilbert's method embodies four essential elements: (I) observing the phe- 
nomenon to be studied and systematically arranging the observational data, 

(2) inventing hypotheses regarding the antecedents of the phenomenon, 

(3) deducing expectable consequences of the hypothesis, and (4) testing these 
consequences against new observations. 

Of the mental qualities involved, Gilbert ranked highest the ability to create 
hypotheses. Keen and pertinent observation in the gathering of data itself 
demands several hypotheses in order that the mind may be focused on sig- 
nificant features. Indeed, hypothesis is virtually implicit in judging what 
features of a phenomenon are really significant. An observer cannot observe 
everything. If enough possibilities do not occur to him as he is observing, he 
may fail entirely to recognize relations of the utmost significance. The bias 
arising from the inadequate observation will then vitiate all the logical processes 
to which the data may later be subjected. 

Gilbert thus stressed highly the value of the creative imagination. He said, 

The great investigator is primarily and preeminently the man who is rich 
in hypotheses. In the plenitude of his wealth he can spare the weaklings 
without regret; and having many from which to select, his mind maintains 
a judicial attitude. The man who can produce but one, cherishes and cham- 
pions that one as his own, and is blind to its faults. (1886, p. 287) 



222 JAMES GILLULY 

Gilbert tried to look into the nature of the scientific guess considered as a 
mental process. He once asked (1886, p. 286) whether it is possible by training 
to improve the guessing faculty, and 9 if so, how. His analysis of his own think- 
ing led him to the conjecture that most, if not all, hypotheses arise from actual 
or fancied analogies. A newly recognized phenomenon reminds a person, 
consciously or unconsciously, of another more familiar one whose antecedents 
and consequents are thought to be understood. The mind swiftly constructs 
hypotheses in which the antecedents and consequences of the new phenomenon 
are similarly related to those of the analogue. This important analysis of 
mental processes had of course been suggested long before by Locke and Hume 
and had been much emphasized by John Stuart Mill. 

Gilbert did not go on in this paper to expand explicitly upon how one is to 
develop the capacity to recognize abundant analogies among natural phe- 
nomena and thereby become fertile in hypotheses. But one may read between 
the lines of many of his papers and learn that diversified experience, both first- 
hand and vicarious, was an important catalyst in his own case. One may thus 
value the widest possible reading as an aid to the creation of hypotheses in the 
sciences of natural history. Reading furnishes experience, even though second- 
hand, of a wider range of natural phenomena with which to conjure analogies 
than could ever be acquired autonomously by a single person. It is impossible 
to reduce most natural relationships to the shorthand of mathematical equa- 
tions. Perhaps this accounts for the fact that nearly all studies of scientific 
productivity show that geologists, botanists, and zoologists in general attain 
recognition later in life than do chemists, chemists later than physicists, and 
physicists later than mathematicians. The more complex the phenomena dealt 
with, the longer the apprenticeship that must be served before mastery. Cer- 
tainly Gilbert's own growth as an investigator continued until his final illness. 

Gilbert was no armchair theorist, but an intensely practical working geolo- 
gist. He recognized that in our science we must always be satisfied with "as 
if." Although by implication he probably had the same attitude toward the 
more exact sciences, he expressed this outlook only with reference to the sciences 
of natural history. The impossibility of conducting experiments on a geologic 
scale demands that we must always be satisfied with hypotheses whose validity 
rests on the fact that they have not yet been proved wrong. Excluding directly 
observable processes, and even there within embarrassingly narrow limits, we 
can never assert that a given phenomenon could have arisen only in a single 
way, but merely that it might so have arisen. 

If not influenced by personal motives, the mind naturally prefers the simplest 
among innumerable possible alternatives. This does not mean, however, that 
the simplest theory is necessarily correct. Occam's razor is a mental tool, 
not a touchstone. The simplest is only the momentarily preferred hypothesis 
and is lightly held pending exhaustive tests. The more numerous the tests 



THE SCIENTIFIC PHILOSOPHY OF G. K. GILBERT 223 

that an hypothesis survives and the more abundant the uncontradicted deduc- 
tions from it, the greater its credibility. Few hypotheses in geology' remain 
simple, after analysis. But in the nature of geologic evidence, a geologic con- 
cept, even if it survives enough tests to have the rank of theory*, can never be 
proved. On the other hand, a single definite negation is enough to disqualify it. 
How perilous the way of the geologic innovator! 

If, then, the essential elements in Gilbert's philosophy were not new, what 
were his personal contributions that left so strong an impress on American 
geology? It seems to me that it was less his philosophical essays themselves than 
the philosophy he revealed by his superb geologic writings. His influence 
derived from his fertile imagination, from the logic and clarity with which he 
presented both his conclusions and the chain of reasoning by which he was 
led to them, and, not least, in the judicial and essentially undogmatic attitude 
he retained toward even his own most strongly fortified conclusions. 

To detail the reasoning behind a conclusion seemed to him quite as important 
as the conclusion itself. In fact, one of his most influential papers presented no 
conclusion at all it merely reviewed the lines along which the problem of the 
origin of Coon Butte (now Meteor Crater, Arizona) had been attacked (Gilbert, 
1896). He repeatedly stated that review of methods is more valuable than the 
actual conclusion reached. An hypothesis that one researcher rejects as in- 
adequate may suggest a useful application to another, either in the same prob- 
lem or elsewhere. 

It is thus through his many beautifully reasoned papers that Gilbert made so 
large an impact upon the science. He presented the facts unfavorable to a 
tentative thesis quite as prominently as he presented those favorable to it. He 
followed the logical implications of a phenomenon wherever they might lead, 
holding himself rigidly impartial. 

Of innumerable examples in his work, none is more illustrative of his per- 
sistence in tracing the consequences of an hypothesis than the last paper pub- 
lished during his lifetime (1917). Starting with an analysis of the effect of the 
hydraulic mining debris from the Sierra Nevada on the regimen of the streams 
in the Sacramento Valley, he found that all of the sediment was trapped at 
least 50 miles northeast of the Golden Gate. Few geologists assigned to analyze 
such a problem would follow the subject beyond the point where the fate of all 
the debris had been determined. Not so with Gilbert. Other consequences 
were implied; he felt compelled to follow them out. 

The several cubic miles of gravel carried to the upper bay were deposited 
below the level of high tide. They therefore filled several cubic miles of space 
that formerly had been filled at high tide by water. The tidal prism, the volume 
of water flowing out on the ebb, was diminished by a very notable fraction. 
The regimen of the offshore bar at the Golden Gate was therefore affected by 
the Sierran gravel, even though no gravel had come within 50 miles of the 



224 JAMES GILLULY 

Golden Gate! The bar had migrated inshore by nearly a mile in fifty years 
because of weakened tidal currents. Truly a plexus of antecedents and conse- 
quents pervades nature ! 

Through all his work, as his biographer, William Morris Davis (1926, p. 1) 
said, "It was his habit in presenting a conclusion to expose it as a ball might 
be placed on the outstretched hand not gripped as if to prevent its fall, not 
grasped as if to hurl it at an objector, but poised on the open palm, free to roll 
off if any breath of disturbing evidence should displace it; yet there it would 
rest in satisfied stability. Not he, but the facts that he marshaled, clamored 
for the acceptance of the explanation that he had found for them." Here, in 
his example, rather than in the novelty of his philosophy, is the reason for the 
tremendous impact of G. K. Gilbert upon American and world geology. 2 



REFERENCES CITED 

COHEN, I. B., 1959, Some reflections on the state of science in America during the 
Nineteenth Century: NatL Acad. Sci., Pr., vol. 45, pp. 666-676. 

DAVIS, W. M., 1926, Biographical memoir-Grove Karl Gilbert, 1843-1918: NatL 
Acad. Sci. Biog. Mem., 5th Mem., vol. 21, 303 pp. 

GILBERT, G. K., 1886, The inculcation of scientific method by example, with an illustra- 
tion drawn from the Quaternary geology of Utah: Am. J. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 31 (whole 
no. 131), pp. 284-299. 

, 1896, The origin of hypotheses, illustrated by the discussion of a topographic 

problem: Science, n.s., vol. 3, pp. 1-13. 

-, 1917, Hydraulic-mining debris in the Sierra Nevada: U.S. Gcol. Survey, Prof. 



Paper 105, 154 pp. 



2 In preparing this discussion I have talked over Gilbert's work with many friends; 
in this way, I gained many of the ideas here included. Paul Averitt, W. H. Bradley, 
T. A. Hendricks, C. B. Hunt, W. T. Pecora, and G. D. Robinson have been especially 
helpful. 



J. M. HARRISON 

Geological Survey of Canada 



Nature and Significance of 
Geological Maps 



A geological map may be defined as one on which are shown the distribution 
and structural relations of rocks. As such it is the product of research under- 
taken in the geologists' principal laboratory, the earth itself. And because it 
describes and interprets the earth, the map must, in the last analysis, be the 
source of geological theory. 

Many text-books and papers have been written on the technique of present- 
ing geological data on maps, and the professional lives of many geologists are 
devoted to the preparation and interpretation of such maps. Nevertheless, the 
opinion is widely held that geological mapping is a routine procedure gkjn to 
an instrumental survey. Such a concept is extremely misleading. Unlike topo- 
graphic maps, which record data that can be gathered largely by mechanical, 
instrumental, or routine methods, the geological map, although in part objec- 
tive and a record of actual facts, is also to a very large degree subjective, because 
it also presents the geologist's interpretation of these facts and his observations. 
A good geological map is the result of research of a high order. 

The first geological map is variously ascribed to Packe in 1743, to Guettard 
in 1746, to William Smith in 1801, and to several others, depending on the 
author's concept of what constitutes a geological map. The first person to 
study geology by making a map appears to have been Guettard, who, in 
presenting a paper to the Acad6mie Royale Frangaise in 1746, used a geological 
map to demonstrate that England and France were part of the same geological 
region (see Mather and Mason, 1939, pp. 77-78). According to Sir Archibald 
Geikie (1901, p. 22): "These maps, so far as I know, were the first ever con- 
structed to express the superficial distribution of minerals and rocks. The 
gifted Frenchman who produced them is thus the father of all the national 
Geological Surveys . . ." Geikie also noted that, brilliant as were the deduc- 
tions of Desmarest in 1771 concerning the volcanic origin of Auvergne, his 
geological map of the region must be considered his most memorable contribu- 

225 



226 J. M. HARRISOX 

tion to the progress of geology (p. ~5'. Most geologists agree, however, that 
William Smith's map of England and Wales, published in 1815. marked the 
real beginning of geological mapping. Tomkeieff (1948, p. 256) stated that 
prior to the publication of Hutton's ''Theory of the Earth" in 1 7 88, or to the 
appearance of William Smith's geological map, geologv did not exist as an 
organized science. Since that day countless geological maps have been pre- 
pared and many areas have been surveyed several times, but great land areas 
of the world are still unmapped, and the geology of the sea floors is virtually 
unknown. 

Am map of the surface of the earth can convey some information on the 
geology of the area. Air photographs, and the topographic maps derived from 
them, may show surface characteristics due to faults, folds, varying lithology, 
and ocher features, so that a good first approximation of the geology of the area 
can be obtained by an observer who is familiar with the interpretation of such 
features. Maps resulting from airborne magnetometer surveys may be useful 
as interim substitutes for geological maps in areas where geological observa- 
tions are lacking, and, of course, they are widely used to supplement geological 
data. Similarly, soil maps and geochemical maps are useful guides to geology. 
All such maps disclose much about the geology of an area because, in most 
regions, it is the bedrock that controls the geochemical and geophysical charac- 
teristics. 

To interpret geology from such maps, a geologist need not see a single rock 
or rock outcrop. His interpretation is made by applying his geological knowl- 
edge and experience to the study of chemical and physical data, topographic 
forms, colour variations, etc.; he deduces from these observations the physical 
cause of the observed phenomena. Although these maps are important to a 
geologist, they are not geological maps in the true sense because they do not 
portray the geology of the area geological information is only incidental. 

For most people, the geological map, with its scheme of contrasting colours, 
apparently unequivocal structural symbols, and sharply drawn contacts be- 
tween rock units, creates the impression that it is, like most other types of maps, 
a factual and objective record of data derived from observations made on 
different classes of rocks clearly distinguishable from each other by well-defined 
physical characteristics. For most geological maps this impression is fallacious. 
A good geological map is much more than an objective presentation of the 
distribution of rock units, their structure and their relations; it is also a sub- 
jective presentation of interpretations based on a multitude of observations and, 
to a greater or less degree, based on theories and prejudices held at the time 
the map was made. This is true of the first maps made by Guettard, Lehmann, 
Packe, Smith and other pioneers, and it is true of the maps made today. We 
have accumulated much more knowledge since the days of the pioneers, and 
we hope we are producing maps more closely approximating the truth. But 



NATURE AND SIGNIFICANCE OF GEOLOGICAL NL^PS 227 

geological maps are not static or timeless; as the science evolves, so will the 
maps that portray our evolving concepts. 

Consider the preparation of a modern geological map. \Ve may assume the 
geologist has an accurate topographic map and air photographs, and that he 
will assemble all available geophysical, geochemical and other useful data 
pertaining to the area. From these he makes his first interpretative study and 
produces a rough outline of the geology. With it he plans critical traverses 
and selects sections for detailed study. Only then will he begin examination of 
the rocks and deposits themselves, including classification of the different rocks 
according to their physical characteristics and his interpretation of their origin. 
He must, in other words, decide on his classification before he can show it on 
the map. He must decide, for example, whether the rock is magmatic or mig- 
matitic, whether it is volcanic or intrusive, whether two rocks represent differ- 
ent formations or different facies of the same formation, whether the rock was 
formed from a volcanic, marine, or continental sediment, whether it is meta- 
morphic or metasomatic, and so on. The fact that the classification must be 
made in the field is probably unique in the scientific disciplines. It would 
indeed be a rash geologist who, in an area of even moderate complexity, would 
make a geological map based on a collection of hand specimens. 

Not only is he concerned with the classification of the rocks, but also with 
the structural data relative significance of unconformities, relationship of 
cleavage to folds and faults, relative movement on faults, age of structural 
deformation, age of igneous intrusions, and all the complexities of rock rela- 
tionships. These data, together with those available from geophysics and geo- 
chemistry, borehole records, and other sources will be used to extend lithologic 
and structural units beneath the overburden. Even in areas where rocks are 
relatively well exposed, only a small part of the bedrock crops out, and these 
croppings, moreover, are usually not uniformly distributed. 

The geologist always collects much more information than he can show on 
the map, so he must select the data he considers most significant. For example, 
he determines the mineral assemblages in scores of thin sections so that he may 
refine his classification of the rocks, or distinguish half a dozen metamorphic 
facies. These classifications, in turn, lead to conclusions concerning the geo- 
logical history of the area. He may make a statistical analysis of hundreds of 
field observations to determine the shape of folds, the position of faults, direc- 
tions of paleocurrents in ancient seas and rivers, or the significance of fossil 
assemblages. These investigations constitute the author's laboratory research, 
and he includes his interpretation of the results on his map along with his inter- 
pretations of geochemical analyses, geophysical measurements and isotope 
abundances. 

Finally, the geologist must select the symbols and the scheme of presentation 
for all this information so that the map will best portray his selection of data 



228 



J. M. HARRISON 




A V> 



Geologically mapped 1928 



Batholithic intrusions; 
granitic rocks, locally 
numerous inclusions 
of Grenville series 




Basic intrusions 



Crystalline limestone, 
quartzite, garnet gneiss; 
locally abundant intrusions 
of granite 

Scale of miles 

01234 

i | i | i 

FIG. 1. Two geological maps of the same area in the Canadian Shield. 



NATURE AND SIGNIFICANCE OF GEOLOGICAL MAPS 



229 




Geologically mapped 1958 




Granitic rocb 



Basic rocks, 
mainly intrusions 




Granitized rocks, 
migmatites, etc.; includes 
some granite 

Crystalline limestone, 
quartzite, paragneiss; 
includes some granitic and 
granitized rocks 



Scale of miles 
1 2 3 



FIG. 1 (Continued} 



230 J. M. HARRISON 

and interpretations. They must permit the user to look into the map, so that he 
may visualize the distribution and relationships of the rocks beneath the surface 
of the earth Olackin, 1950, p. 55). 

When all this material is synthesized, the final product is a lithographed 
geological map that looks as positive and incontrovertible as a colour photo- 
graph, at least to the layman and perhaps also to some geologists. Actually, it 
represents the sum of analyses made by an individual, using information that 
never can be complete. The results are conditioned by the "conventional 
wisdoms" of the day and to that extent the map represents the "geological 
knowledge at the time of its production" (North, 1928, p. 1). Moreover, in 
many instances, more than one interpretation can be made of the information 
presented on the map; another geologist may make interpretations quite 
different from those of the author and may even see more than the author 
realized was there. 

In most regions, geologists of the same generation would produce similar 
maps, but if the origin of certain rock units were controversial, and the geol- 
ogists were products of different schools of geological thought, their maps would 
be different. For example, the area of "granite" shown on a map of a meta- 
morphic terrain could depend largely on whether the author belonged to a 
school believing that granites are, in the main, of magmatic origin, or to a 
school believing they are the product of ultrametamorphism or granitization. 
This may be an extreme example, but most geological maps to a greater or 
lesser degree reflect the background and prejudices of the author. Good maps 
also bring to light weaknesses in theory-, or in the interpretation of experimental 
geology-, or in classification. In other words, they lead to their own modifica- 
tion and eventual obsolescence. Certainly later generations of geologists will 
produce maps different from those of today. 

The field geologist, besides providing basic information, is in a good position 
to appraise theories developed from laboratory work. Unhappily, many field 
investigators tend to accept the results of laboratory- experiments with immod- 
erate faith and to modify their mapping to bring it into accord with experiment 
and theory. The field man should not forget that the laboratory investigator, 
in his attempts to simulate geological processes, must extrapolate on a grand 
scale and thus may make unwarranted assumptions. 

An example that comes to mind involves one of the great men of geological 
science, N. L. Bowen. About 1915 he began publishing the most outstanding 
petrological contributions of his generation, which culminated in his "The 
Evolution of the Igneous Rocks,* 9 published in 1928. His theories were based 
almost exclusively on brilliant laboratory research, and they dominated the 
thinking of nearly all geologists in North America for a generation or more. 
Too few geologists tested these concepts in the field; many geologists mapped 
according to them, overlooking all contradictory evidence. It was not until 



NATURE AND SIGNIFICANCE OF GEOLOGICAL MAPS 231 

1947 that enough heat was generated by field geologists to make a symposium 
on granites the major event at the Annual Meeting of the Geological Society 
of America in Ottawa (Geol. Soc. Am., Mem., 1948). Partly as an outcome 
of that meeting, the theory of granitization once more gained recognition among 
North American geologists, but only because the field evidence demanded its 
acceptance in opposition to prevailing theory. 

For an example of how theory can control mapping see Fig. 1 . The two 
maps, greatly simplified from the originals, are of the same area in the Canadian 
Shield. The older one was prepared when "magma' 5 was at its apex in North 
America, the later one by a geologist who had accepted the field evidence for 
granitization. Part of the discrepancy is due to the more modern realization 
that some hornblende-rich and pyroxene-rich rocks have been derived from 
limy sediments. The basic difference, however, is due to the fact that the more 
recent author shows on the map his conclusions about the origin of the various 
rocks. Maps that more closely resembled the later edition of these two had 
been published for other areas by many geologists over a long period. It was 
the weight of their evidence that made it necessary to accept, in opposition to 
laboratory theory, the principle of large-scale granitization. 

Similarly it was many years before field geologists and laboratory specialists 
resolved their differences on the temperatures of molten rocks. Laboratory 
investigations of silicate melts apparently demanded extremely high tempera- 
tures, but field geologists insisted that evidences of such temperatures could 
not be confirmed where magmatic material had invaded solid rocks. Eventu- 
ally, it was found that addition of small amounts of "mineralizers/ 3 mainly 
water, reduced the temperatures of the melts to the point where they were in 
accord with the evidence from the earth itself. 

To complete North's concept "The geological map is an index of the extent 
and accuracy of geological knowledge at the time of its production, and is also 
the basis of future research. It is the vehicle by which men communicate to 
one another their discoveries relating to the nature and arrangement of the 
rocks of the earth's crust, [and it] makes possible the prosecution of further 
research concerning the distribution of rocks, their origin and the evidence 
of the life of the past which they may contain . . . The geological map may, 
therefore, be regarded as the dynamic force in geology." (North, 1928, p. 1) 



232 J. M. HARRISON 

REFERENCES CITED 

BOWEN, X. L., 1928, The evolution of the igneous rocks: Princeton, Princeton Univ. 

Press, 332 pp. 
GEIKIE, Sir ARCHIBALD, 1901, The founders of geology, vol. 1 of Principles of geology: 

Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 297 pp. 
Geological Society of America, 1948, Origin of granite (James Gilluly, Chm.): Geol. 

Soc. Am., Mem. 28, 139 pp. 
GREENLY, EDWARD, and WILLL\MS, HOWELL, 1930, Methods in geological surveying: 

London, Thos. Murby, 420 pp. 
IRELAND, H. A., 1943, History of the development of geologic maps: Geol. Soc. Am., B., 

vol. 54, pp. 1227-1280. 

LINTON, D. L., 1948, The ideal geological map: Adv. Sci., vol. 5, no. 18, pp. 141-148. 
MACKIN, J. H., 1950, The down-structure method of viewing geologic maps: J. Geol., 

vol. 58, pp. 55-72. 

MATHER, K. F., and MASON, S. L., 1939, Source book in geology: New York, McGraw- 
Hill, 702 pp. 
NORTH, F. J., 1928, Geological maps, their history and development with special 

reference to Wales: Cardiff, Nat. Museum, Wales, 133 pp. 
POUBA, ZDENEK, 1959, Geologicke mapovani: Nakladatestvf, Ceskoslovensk6 Akad. 

Ved, 523 pp., 12 maps. (A complete account of the technique of geological mapping.) 
ROBERTSON, THOMAS, 1956, Presentation of geological information in maps: Adv. Sci., 

vol. 13, no. 50, pp. 31-41. 
STEINER, W. VON, 1957, Zur Geschichte der geologischen Karte: Zs. Angew. Geol., 

nos. 8/9, pp. 417-424. 
TOMKEIEFF, S. L, 1948, James Hutton and the philosophy of geology: Edinburgh Geol. 

Soc., Tr., vol. 14, pt 2, pp. 253-276. 

WELLS, J. W., 1959, Earliest geological maps of the United States, 1756-1832: Washing- 
ton Acad. Sci., J., vol. 49, pp. 198-204. 
WOODWARD, H. B., 1911, History of geology: London, Watts, 154 pp. 



ARTHUR F. HAGNER 

University of Illinois 



Philosophical Aspects of 
the Geological Sciences 1 



The geologic approach to nature raises some interesting philosophical ques- 
tions, and at the same time exemplifies a point of view which should contribute 
to the thought and progress of other fields, if it can be clearly delineated. An 
attractive area of knowledge, still relatively unexplored, invites analysis and 
evaluation. 



Intellectual Contributions of Geology 

In the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, geologists generated concepts that 
commanded universal attention. A venerable belief in an earth no older than 
a few thousand years, formed almost instantaneously by providential action, 
had long suppressed philosophic and scientific thought. Prior to the time of 
Hutton, moreover, it was generally believed that this brief past had been 
marked by extensive and violent changes, unlike any taking place today. 
Surface features of the earth were explained in terms of the Deluge. Erosion, 
the effects of glaciation in regions where today the climate is warm, and the 
presence of fossils on mountains were all attributed to Noah's flood. Geologic 
discoveries, and the resulting controversies in science and religion, led to a 
gradual abandonment of these beliefs. 

Before James Mutton's "Theory of the Earth" appeared in 1788, natural 
philosophy was based more on speculation than observation. Hutton's uni- 
formitarianism made it possible to explain earth features as a result of long- 
continued but ordinary processes, as opposed to extraordinary forces or cata- 



1 I would like to thank Dr. D. M. Henderson for carefully reading the manuscript 
and for offering suggestions that materially improved it. Dr. Norman Page contributed 
time and suggestions during the early stages of writing and preparation. A number of 
the authors of this volume have furnished helpful comments and criticism. I also wish 
to thank those graduate students in geology at the University of Illinois who took part 
in the informal and stimulating discussions on philosophy of science that were held 
during the academic year 1960-1961. 

233 



234 ARTHUR F. HAGXER 

clysms. Speculations slowly gave way to careful observations, correlations, and 
substantiated interpretations. It was not, however, until the publication of 
LyelTs "Principles of Geology"' in 1830-1833 that the revolution in this science 
became widespread and effective. By the middle of the nineteenth century 
fc a satisfactory geological philosophy in the inorganic world had been attained 
and established on a solid foundation of observation, so far as the criteria of 
the times would allow. In the organic field the bomb-shell had not yet burst." 
(Gordon, 1951j 

The idea of progressive change and development with time, as applied to 
physical science, has matured \\ith the gro\\th of modern geology. Previously 
historians had discussed the idea of progress, but onlv casually. When Hutton 
spoke of seeing no signs of a beginning or of an end, he realized that time was 
needed to produce many geologic phenomena more time than scientists and 
philosophers were prepared to concede. The idea of geologic time enabled 
Darwin to construct his theory of evolution on a scientific foundation. "The 
principle of Uniformitarianism had to be clearly established, or else the history 
of life of the past could have a thousand interpretations based on physical 
conditions entirely dissimilar to those of the present/' (Garrels, 1951) It was 
LyelFs Principles, then, that set the stage for Darwin and greatly influenced his 
ideas. "A long history of life on the earth, undisturbed by repeated world-wide 
catastrophies, no longer required successive creations of all living organisms . . . 
The possibility of the progressive development of life on the earth could no 
longer be dismissed/' (Thomas, 1947; The idea of geologic time, perhaps the 
greatest contribution of geology to general thought, has been compared in 
importance with the astronomers* realization of the vastness of space and with 
the physicists* concept of the relationship between matter and energy. (Stokes, 
1960, p. 5) 

Geology thus made a major contribution to both science and philosophy by 
introducing the idea of history into science. Prior to the nineteenth century, 
science had been concerned largely with the present. Not until geologists 
introduced the concept that the earth has a history was it possible to develop 
a systematized knowledge of the remote past. Geology demonstrated that it is 
possible to study the past by scientific methods and that there "is a validity to 
history apart from and independent of physics and chemistry- . . . The theory 
of evolution was a historical idea, not a law of nature. Its validity was to be 
tested by other criteria than those of mechanics." (Schneer, I960, pp. 377-378) 

Characteristic Features of Geologic Methodology and Reasoning 

In discussing the nature of geology-, Chamberlin (1904) observed that "Not 
a little consists of generalizations from incomplete data, of inferences hung on 
chains of uncertain logic, of interpretations not beyond question, of hypotheses 



PHILOSOPHICAL ASPECTS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SCIENCES 235 

not fully verified, and of speculations none too substantial. A part of the mass 
is true science, a part philosophy ... a part is speculation, and a part is yet 
unorganized material. 33 This remains true today, although the science is 
generally more quantitative and its generalizations and interpretations stand 
on a somewhat firmer basis of fact. Nevertheless many geologic theories rest 
on what Chamberlin (1 904 ) referred to as "the working test"' and Geikie ( 1 905) 
called "a balance of probabilities/ 3 Often the geologist's explanation turns on 
his judgment in selecting the most likely working hypothesis and revising it as 
data accumulate. Consequently, as stressed by Bemmelen (1961 j, the personal 
capacity of the scientist is more important here than in sciences which rely 
mainly on instruments and do not use an historical approach to their problems. 
Geology has had to advance more by observation, description, and classifica- 
tion than by experiment and calculation. 

The geologist has to work in an intellectual environment to which many 
other physical scientists are unaccustomed. In order to understand the nature 
of geologic problems and concepts, one must learn to live with uncertainty to a 
degree not imposed by problems involving closed systems, isolated variables, 
verifiable experiments, and the statistical treatment of large numbers of ob- 
servable occurrences. Of the physical scientists, moreover, the geologist is most 
often confronted with the problem of working with end products, which result 
from the interplay of many complex variables. It is usually difficult to isolate 
the variables for realistic experimentation. Commonly there are more variables 
than the number of parameters needed to reach a solution, and these operate 
over extreme ranges of magnitude. 

Geology differs from other sciences mainly in its concern with time. Processes 
and reactions that may take place so slowly as to be practically unobservable 
in the laboratory may be of great importance when given many millions of 
years of operation. Often the geologist must try to determine whether a phe- 
nomenon resulted from an intense process that acted through a short time, or 
whether the process operated at lower intensity over a longer period. Can he 
directly relate short-term laboratory experiments to natural phenomena that 
may have required an almost infinitely greater amount of time? Is he justified 
in speeding up the rate of an experiment in order to reduce the time factor? 
The geologist must rely not only on the soundness of his experiments, but also 
on the realization that, given enough time, many phenomena experimentally 
unreproducible at present can materialize in nature. A positive mental effort 
is always required to view problems in their proper temporal perspective. 

Another major difference between the viewpoint of the geologist and that 
of other scientists is that the former commonly finds it necessary to "predict 
the past." Bubnoff (1959) believes that the principal difference between 
geology and other physical sciences "lies in the fact that geology not only must 
explain the contemporary situation by means of contemporary phenomena, 



236 ARTHUR F. HAGXER 

but it must also observe and point out a genesis, a process which takes place 
in time and of which the different stages cannot be reached by us through 
immediate observation." Umbgrove (1947) has compared the geologist with 
the historian who reconstructs the past by using available data, and where 
these are incomplete s employ's temporary constructs to bridge missing data. 
"Since many earth phenomena cannot be verified experimentally, and com- 
monly the geologist cannot 'get at' the problem directly, it is necessary for him 
to use various indirect methods of analysis . . . These methods of reasoning 
and 'explaining 5 are necessary because the geologist deals with time and scale 
factors beyond human experience." (Hagner, 1961) 

Physicists and chemists are accustomed to contemplate and manipulate 
exceedingly minute objects. While this is true to some extent of geologists, 
they must also attempt to conceive of the relative size and behavior of units 
of matter much larger than the observer. One may observe the tracks of atoms 
in a cloud chamber, but it will probably be some time yet before man can ade- 
quately observe a continent in motion. Scale hi geology ranges from the sub- 
microscopic to the planetary, from the structure of crystals to the structure of 
the earth. 

In geology there is a rapidly growing trend toward quantification; neverthe- 
less, geology differs from some of the other sciences in the lesser degree to which 
quantitative data are available. In this connection, many scientists seem to 
believe that qualitative data are wholly subjective, whereas quantitative data 
are objective. But, as Birch (1951) has said, "No one ever discovered a quality 
apart from a quantity nor a quantity apart from a quality. Why, then, are we 
so anxious to adopt the weird hypothesis that the quantitative is objective and 
real but the qualitative only subjective?" Geologists are deeply interested in 
this matter because they must deal with an "indispensible core of qualitative 
observation that forms the foundation of virtually every geological study . . ." 
(Krumbein,1960) 

As already stated, the physicists and chemists have been concerned largely 
with problems of the present and with a time scale closely related to that of 
the observer. It has been said that these sciences have been successful in the 
main because they have deliberately restricted their temporal scope, thus avoid- 
ing the kinds of problems that cannot be approached by experiment. The 
geologist, however, cannot escape such problems and, despite the complexity 
of earth phenomena and the incomplete record of earth history, he has suc- 
ceeded largely by qualitative methods in establishing concepts which have 
withstood the test of time and which, in some cases, have been verified experi-- 
mentally. 

Perhaps the most important factor in the progress of geology has been the 
development of a "geologic frame of mind." This is acquired almost of necessity 
in the day-to-day effort of thinking about immense periods of time, very large 



PHILOSOPHICAL ASPECTS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SCIENCES 237 

units of matter, and the interplay of complex variables. Since it is impossible 
in geology to duplicate nature in the laboratory, natural phenomena are 
commonly studied as units. Where possible, factors are isolated for analysis, 
but since it is impossible to bring a mountain into the laboratory, experimenta- 
tion plays a less important role than it does in physics and chemistry. The 
study of nature as a whole calls for the kind of reasoning in which all the vari- 
ables are considered insofar as possible, even though this makes it necessary 
"to supplement in thought partially available facts." (Mach, 1903) The co- 
ordination of directly observable data with unobservable data by mental sup- 
plements has yielded models sufficiently useful to predict the location of sub- 
surface oil, gas, and mineral occurrences. 

Although interpretations of the evolution of mountains, basins, and the crust 
of the earth itself must be based on physical laws, there are many things con- 
nected with these and other gross features of the earth "that cannot be squeezed 
into a formula and can only be described." (Bertalanffy, 1952) As Bemmelen 
(1961, p. 458) has said, 

. . . matter reacted upon matter in an infinite number of combinations 
in such a way that ultimately new possibilities and new factors originated, 
so-called 'emergent phenomena.' The latter cannot straight away be ex- 
plained by the natural laws of the basic sciences . . . the natural sciences 
tend to possess a certain type of hierarchy in which the rules and laws of 
the simpler stages are also valid for the higher organized ones, but not 
vice versa. 

Because the earth does not behave like a stone, geologists have proceeded on 
the basis that, unless truly fundamental and pertinent physical laws are vio- 
lated, geologic evidence must be accepted at face value. "In many instances, 
such as the controversies in the nineteenth century over the age of the earth 
and the thickness and rigidity of its crust, history has shown the geologists to 
have been more nearly correct than the other physical scientists." (Hagner, 
1961) 

Geologic concepts and theories differ greatly in the completeness and quan- 
tity of data or observations on which they are based, and consequently in their 
reliability and general acceptance. The theory of magmatic differentiation by 
crystal settling and crystal fractionation, for example, is well substantiated 
both by field observations and by experimental evidence. For any theory of 
mountain-building, however, there is no general agreement, because the data 
on which it rests are fragmentary. Consequently there are few rigorous laws 
applicable to large-scale earth phenomena. 

Physics and chemistry deal largely with processes and the prediction of 
results from the action of these. For example, a basic assumption of thermo- 
dynamics is that it is necessary to know only the state of a system and the condi- 



238 ARTHUR F. HAGXER 

tions imposed on it in order to predict the result no knowledge of the "path" 
of the process is required. Geology deals with macroprocesses made up of many 
subsidiary dynamic processes. The observable end product is the sum of serial 
microprocesses that operated along a particular, often tortuous, path. The 
study of history in science is the diagnosis of pathways. Many lines of geologic 
evidence suggest that two different paths may lead to approximately the same 
kind of end product, e.g., the formation of granite by different processes. Such 
a possibilitv runs counter to a belief, perhaps intuitively held in some sciences, 
that distinctive end products generally form in onlv one way. 

It is interesting to note that in the twentieth century, physicists have come to 
suspect that their reasoning and subject matter have been too restricted. The 
immensity of time, for example, has received much attention in the theory of 
relativity. Today the theoretical physicist must infer the unobservable. He is 
increasingly concerned with phenomena that cannot be transferred into actual 
sense perceptions and tested by direct experience. Like the geologist, he must 
''supplement in thought partially available facts/' Major advances in physics 
and chemistry may well come as a result of concentrating on the whole rather 
than its smallest parts. This will call for reasoning more akin to that of the 
philosopher, historian, geologist, and biologist than is customary today among 
most phvsicists and chemists. 

The Position of Geology Today 

During the twentieth century a number of new concepts of general applica- 
tion and great fundamental importance have arisen both in physics and biology. 
These new ideas or principles pertain to all of science, not merely to one par- 
ticular area of investigation. Although geology has advanced greatly during 
this period, it has produced little or nothing of similar significance. This is 
somewhat surprising, for many of the new ideas have long been implicit in 
some fields of geologic research and in many lines of geologic reasoning. 

Recently emphasis has been placed by certain biologists (Bertalanffy, 1952) 
on a whole or organismic concept of nature the organic idea of Whitehead 
as opposed to an analytical point of view. This idea stresses the importance of 
the relations between the individual parts of an organism or system, and shows 
that a complete description of the organism must include the laws governing 
these relations as well as the laws governing the behavior of the component 
parts. Coupled with this idea is that of structure and form as temporary mani- 
festations of the interaction of processes proceeding at different rates. It is the 
process that is fundamental, and nature so viewed is dynamic rather than 
static. At the same time the concept of open systems has been fitted into this 
general scheme, the organism being viewed as a locus of interacting processes 
maintaining itself in a steady state of minimal entropy by the constant dissipa- 



PHILOSOPHICAL ASPECTS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SCIENCES 239 

tion of energy. Ideas of hierarchy of order have been formulated, each level 
with its own set of laws transcending those of the lower levels. 

These concepts deal with more complex organizations of matter than are 
usually considered in physics, but they deny neither the basically statistical 
character of the laws of nature in the microphysical realm, nor the discontinu- 
ous nature of primary events. Physical concepts have been incorporated into 
modern biology, with necessary attention to the biological factors involved. 
Even Bohr's complementarity principle, the idea that sometimes nature cannot 
be described by one concept but rather by pairs of opposed and complementary 
concepts, has found an application in biology. Just as in physics both the wave 
and particle descriptions of matter apparently are equally necessary and valid, 
so in biology the organismic and physicochemical approaches appear to be 
required for understanding. 

Geologists have dealt with these concepts in a qualitative manner and in 
varying degrees of explicitness, but apparently this has not been fully appreci- 
ated by scientists in other disciplines, or even by geologists themselves. Geology-, 
too, is particularly concerned with the interaction of processes of different rates, 
and it has long been realized that a description of only one process operating 
in an area is incomplete and may be misleading unless its relations to other 
processes are known. In other words, the concept of the whole is reaffirmed. 
There has also been a continuing consideration among geologists of the relative 
importance of uniformity and catastrophism in nature. This is evident in such 
fields as tectonics, paleontology, and stratigraphy; in fact, when dealing with 
geologic periods of time, this consideration can rarely be avoided. In perhaps 
no other branch of science is the transitory nature of form and structure so 
clearly realized as in geology. Most geologic systems are "open" in that both 
matter and energy' may move freely in and out of them, although there is a 
constant approach to temporary or local equilibrium. This approach to local 
equilibrium is a major unifying concept in geology. 

Today, "Geology is in a period of unprecedented discovery . . . and tradi- 
tional views concerning the physical and chemical processes that have produced 
and are now moulding the earth's crust are now being challenged . . . there is 
an atmosphere of fascinated suspense today such as has always marked the 
high points on the growth curve of a science." (Bucher, 1950) Major advances 
in geology can indeed be expected. Research methods and techniques are 
much more precise than those of the past; consequently it has become possible 
to analyze physical and chemical processes and phenomena more accurately 
than when these were amenable only to speculation or reasoning from inade- 
quate qualitative information. Major contributions to our knowledge of con- 
tinental growth and movement, the nature of the earth's interior, and the 
distribution and movement of material in the earth's crust are to be expected. 
Today the heredity principle is being applied to such diverse phenomena as 



240 ARTHUR F. HAGNER 

tectonism, igneous processes, hydrothermal activity, and the inheritance of 
properties by successive mineral phases. Pospelov (1961; has discussed the 
concept of multistage geologic complexes as having validity on a global as well 
as regional scale. The concept of paragenesis has been enlarged and becomes 
bi the basis of the theory of geologic formations, metallogenic complexes, etc. 
It pervades the entire problem of relationships between igneous activity and 
mineralization, between metamorphism and tectonics/' Pospelov has also 
stated that "geology- has come face to face with an understanding of the higher 
type of geologic form of motion, i.e., an understanding of the active self- 
development of the earth." 

In spite of the marked progress of geology during the twentieth century, its 
relative position among the sciences has declined. This is partly a result of the 
spectacular findings in such fields as quantum physics and molecular biology. 
But other factors have contributed to this decline and some of these are attrib- 
utable to disinterest and negligence on the part of geologists. Geology, perhaps 
more than other sciences, has suffered from a fragmentation into numerous 
semi-independent disciplines, so that geology is now essentially a group of 
sciences. Concurrently with fragmentation, the boundaries between geology* 
and other sciences have been disappearing, and new names have been given 
to the interdisciplinary fields. The subject matter of some of these vigorous 
hybrids geophysics, geochemistry, microcrystallography has been defined 
so as to include the more concrete aspects of geology that can be studied by 
mathematical., physicochemical, and statistical methods. What is arbitrarily 
left under the label "geology-" thus constitutes the less definite, more uncertain 
aspects of the science. 



Need for Studies in the History and Philosophy of Geology 

Geologists have accumulated vast amounts of data and are faced with much 
unorganized material requiring analysis and synthesis. Scientists in other 
disciplines are concerned with the possibility of achieving not only synthesis 
in their fields, but also a unification of all science. Because geology rests in 
part on physics, chemistry, and biology, in addition to being a science in its 
own right, the geologist is in an excellent position to appreciate attempts to 
unify science and to contribute to them. But geologists have published essen- 
tially nothing on this challenging subject. Is this field of knowledge also to 
be preempted by other scientists and philosophers to the exclusion of geologists? 

Geology must elucidate its uniqueness of approach, demonstrate the ways 
it has contributed ideas of interest to all sciences, and formulate and name 
these ideas as specific principles or concepts. We must show wherein we deal 
with nature in general. We need to be more self-analytical in our processes 
of reasoning, as scientists in other disciplines have been. Recently a few studies 
have appeared on the problems of sampling, scale, time and measurement in 



PHILOSOPHICAL ASPECTS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SCIENCES 241 

the geosciences, but long overdue are searching analyses of the nature of 
geologic concepts, methods, reasoning, evidence, and interpretation. In other 
words, we should take inventory of the nature, subject matter, accomplish- 
ments, and directions of geology. There is an obvious need for fundamental 
thinking about geology. 

Chamberlin (1904) has said "an appropriate atmosphere of philosophy . . . 
is necessary to the wholesome intellectual life of our science . . ." Study of the 
history and philosophy of science would add "perspective to the succession of 
facts as well as methods" and expose the "bond which holds scientific thought 
together." (Margenau, 1960) By history is meant the tracing of the develop- 
ment and interaction of ideas among different disciplines. The very nature of 
geology and its methods of study, in part historical and philosophical, should 
encourage the geologist to examine the evolution and substance of his ideas. 



REFERENCES CITED 

BEMMELEN, R. W. VAN, 1961, The scientific character of geology: J. Geol., vol. 69, 

pp. 453-461. 
BERTALANFFY, L. VON, 1952, Problems of life, an evaluation of modern biological 

thought: London, Watts, 216 pp. 

BIRCH, L. C., 1951, Concept of nature: Am. Scientist, vol. 39, pp. 294-302. 
BUBNOFF, S. VON, 1959, Grundprobleme der Geologic: Berlin, Akademie-Verlag, 234 pp. 
BUGHER, W. H., 1950, The crust of the earth: Sci. American, vol. 182, no. 5, pp. 32-41. 
CHAMBERLIN, T. C., 1904, The methods of the earth-sciences: Popular Sci. Monthly, 

vol. 66, pp. 66-75. 

GARRELS, R. M., 1951, A textbook of geology: New York, Harper, 511 pp. 
GEKIE, Sir ARCHIBALD, 1905, The founders of geology: London, Macmillan, 486 pp. 
GORDON, W. T., 1951, Geology, HI, H. Dingle, ed., A century of science: London, 

Hutchinson's Scientific and Technical Publ., pp. 98-113. 
HAGNER, A. F., 1961, Geologic education and its influence on approaches to geologic 

problems: J. Geol. Educ., vol. 9, pp. 89-97. 
KRUMBEIN, W. C., 1960, The "geological population" as a framework for analyzing 

numerical data in geology: Liverpool and Manchester Geol. J., vol. 2, pp. 341-368. 
MACH, E., 1903, quoted in Schrodinger, Erwin, What is life? and other scientific essays: 

New York, Doubleday, 1956, 263 pp. 
MARGENAU, H., 1960, Foreword to, The search for order, by C. J. Schneer: New York, 

Harper, xii pp. 
POSPELOV, G. L., 1961, Geology as a science and its place in natural history: Izvestiya 

Acad. Sci., USSR, Geol. Ser., 1960, (trans. Nov., 1961), pp. 1-11. 
SCHNEER, C. J., 1960, The search for order: New York, Harper, 398 pp. 
STOKES, W. L., I960, An introduction to historical geology: New Jersey, Prentice-Hall, 

502pp. 
THOMAS, H. H., 1947, The rise of geology and its influence on contemporary thought: 

Ann. Sci., vol. 5, pp. 325-341. 
UMBGROVE, J. H. F., 1947, The pulse of the earth: The Hague, Nijhoff, 358 pp. 



ROBERT F. LEGGET 

Research Council of Canada 



Geology in the 

Service of Man 



From the dawn of history, the development of the human race has involved 
close contact with the earth. On the surface of the earth man has made his 
home, from the time of the earliest mud hut to the present day \vith its towering 
sk\ scrapers providing eyries for urban dwellers. From mines excavated within 
the upper few thousand feet of the earth's crust, man has obtained his fuels for 
heat and power, his precious metals for barter, his serviceable metals for use 
and decoration, and much of the material he has needed for building. Upon 
the ground he has developed his transportation routes, from the earliest paths 
between forest settlements to the great highways, railways, and airports of 
today, boring tunnels through the hills when necessary, bridging streams and 
valleys, making the crooked straight, and the rough places plain. And the 
foundations of all the structures ever built by man, from the simplest sacrificial 
altar of primitive man to launching sites for rockets aimed at the moon, depend 
for their essential stability upon their contact with the earth. 

As man's mind developed and a sense of inquiry was generated into problems 
beyond that of daily subsistence, it was natural that the character of the ground 
on which he walked and lived and had his being should engage his lively inter- 
est. From such vague wonderings has developed the science of geology as it is 
known today. So intimate would appear to be the links between the study of 
the earth's crust and the daily activities of man that the inclusion of such a 
paper as this in a commemorative volume might at first sight appear to be 
superfluous. Geological studies might be thought always to be prosecuted in 
the service of man. Indirectly, this is probably true, but in the recent history 
of the science there appears to have been a tendency in some quarters to regard 
geological inquiry as the end in itself; its application to the activities of man is 
a slightly degrading use of pure scientific endeavour. A review of the way in 
which geology has developed through the ages, with special reference to its 
practical applications, may not therefore be out of place in this collection of 

242 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 243 

papers prepared in recognition of the seventy-fifth anniversary of a society 
devoted to the promotion of geology in all its aspects. For the wheel appears 
to have turned full circle. 

The beginnings of geology' were rooted in the practical demands of early 
man; the early days of the modern science led to the flowering of pure geological 
study, much of it far removed from any thought of application; while today 
the practice of modern engineering in many of its branches is making such 
demands upon geology that there are now organized groups of petroleum and 
engineering geologists. The challenge of the next few decades gives promise 
of still wider use of geology in the service of man, concurrently with its advance 
and development as one of the truly great branches of natural science. 

The fact that "earth" was one of Aristotle's four elements is a clear indica- 
tion of the importance with which the Greeks regarded the study of the ground. 
Equally revealing are the frequent references to rock, stone, and soil in the 
"History" of Herodotus. He knew personally the great stone quarries near 
Memphis and "observed that there were shells upon the hills" during his stay 
in Egypt. Was he the first palaeontologist? He might equally have been the 
first to observe sulphate attack on structures, for he records that he saw "that 
salt exuded from the soil to such an extent as even to injure the pyramids." 
He certainly appreciated the engineering significance of geology*, for he makes 
quite a few references to unusual excavation and river-diversion works carried 
out by warlike monarchs. Cyrus and his diversion of the Euphrates provide 
but one example. Two of the early queens of Babylon were similarly active, 
Semiramis who constructed massive flood-control embankments of soil, and 
the beautiful Nitrocris, who also diverted the Euphrates, but only temporarily, 
while its natural channel through the city was lined with bricks of burnt clay 
and a bridge of stone built over it "in the dry." (Herodotus, trans., 1910) 

The contributions of Aristotle to early geological thought have often been 
quoted. Even though it seems probable that his own book on rocks and min- 
erals was lost, it is pleasant to imagine that it was Aristotle who inspired Alex- 
ander to send out the special force that he directed to survey his empire, col- 
lecting information on the "natural history" of the districts in which they were 
at work, while maintaining the condition of the main roads. Anyone who has 
had the privilege of following Alexander's route down the Kabul River from 
what is now Afghanistan and then across the plains of Pakistan through Pesha- 
war to Lahore can have no doubt that a lively appreciation of geology* must 
have been yet another attribute of that commanding figure of history. 

That these are not isolated cases from classical records of two thousand years 
ago can be shown by reference to Vitruvius, a Roman architect and engineer, 
of whom almost nothing is known except his famous "Ten Books on Architec- 
ture," believed to have been written in the first century B.C. Some of his com- 
ments on geological matters are almost uncanny in their modernity. He could 



244 ROBERT F. LEGGET 

\\ell be the patron saint of the geobotanists, for he relates (Book I, Chapter V) 
that cattle on two sides of the river Pothereus, in Crete, were found to differ 
in their spleens. Physicians found the explanation in an herb which grew on 
one side of the river but not on the other. "From food and water, then, we may 
learn whether sites are naturally unhealthy or healthy*" is his prophetic con- 
clusion. (Yitruvius, trans., 1914) 

His treatise includes a lengthy section on natural building materials; most 
of his Book II is devoted to this subject. One would expect to find descriptions 
of sand, lime, stone, and pozzolana, but who would expect to find in a book 
written almost two thousand years ago the suggestion that "since the stones 
are soft and porous, they are apt to suck the moisture out of the mortar and so 
to dry it up" (a lesson not yet learned by all modern builders)? Somewhat less 
scientific are the instructions that Vitruvius records for the construction of 
dining room floors, "filled in with charcoal compactly trodden down, a mortar 
mixed of gravel, lime, and ashes is spread on to a depth of half a foot (giving) 
the look of a black pavement. Hence, at dinner parties, whatever is poured 
out of cups, or spirted from the mouth, no sooner falls than it dries up, and the 
servants who wait there do not catch cold from that kind of floor, although 
they may go barefoot." 

The "Ten Books" of Vitruvius not only reflected the high standard of Roman 
engineering at the time he wrote, but almost certainly exercised considerable 
influence upon its continued excellence. For several centuries after he wrote, 
the works of Roman engineers played their part in forming the Europe that 
is known today. Many miles of Roman roads and many examples of major 
Roman structures still stand and serve despite the passage of the centuries. 
The fact that there are no known examples of cyclopean or polygonal Roman 
masonry, all examples of Roman building extant being of rectangular blocks 
of stone set in regular courses, suggests that Roman engineers had a lively 
appreciation of the importance of the proper selection of building stone and its 
quarrying; their careful and selective use of travertine provides one specific 
example. Their discovery of the unusual properties of the volcanic ash in the 
vicinity of Naples, now called pozzolana but then pulvis Puteolanus, and espe- 
cially the combination of this material with lime, opened up new prospects for 
Roman building and led to such masterpieces as the Pantheon. And although 
tunneling was not frequently an activity of the Romans, such tunnels as they 
are known to have constructed demonstrate fairly clearly an appreciation of 
the geology of the rocks penetrated. The use of vinegar poured over heated 
limestone as a means of excavation, barbaric in its effect upon slave workers but 
effective when used on the right type of rock, provides one unusual illustration. 

It may be said that these examples are not of the applications of geology to 
the works of man, but merely incidents in the development of the ordinary 
practice of engineering; the name geology did not come into use for another 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 245 

thousand years. But may not the same comment be made about the early 
phases of all major branches of science and their applications? Chemistry 
and physics did not spring full blown into the experience of man but started 
haltingly through the probing inquiries of interested men; as a matter of fact, 
the general acceptance of the terms "physics" and "chemistry" and their 
recognition as distinct disciplines are relatively recent developments. One 
would imagine that geology acquired such a lead over those other branches of 
science, however, that it would have remained in the van of scientific develop- 
ment throughout the centuries. This was not to be. The grandeur of Rome 
departed. Human development entered its long centuries of delayed advance. 
Recent historical studies are showing that the so-called Dark Ages were not 
devoid of all progress, as is so often imagined, but the tempo of development 
was sadly slowed throughout the Western world. There jvere advances in other 
parts of the world, some of great significance, but for a thousand years or more 
Western man seemed to be content with the physical world as he knew it, and 
the minds that probed and the hands that experimented were few indeed. 
When one takes a general look at the growth of scientific thought during this 
long period, such as is so splendidly afforded by Charles Singer's eloquent 
volume, "A Short History of Scientific Thought to 1900," the retarded position 
of geological study in what little scientific advance did take place becomes all 
the more puzzling. 

The Arab world, even though it contributed so notably to mathematical 
and astronomical knowledge, appears to have had very little interest in the 
study of the earth. It seems probable that the attitude of the Christian Church 
prior to the Reformation may have retarded geological studies. And yet as 
one stands in one of the great mediaeval abbey churches, still in use today as 
cathedrals in all their beauty, it is difficult to imagine that the learned monks 
who built them accepted without question the varied stones that were quarried 
for them and which they set in place with such obvious skill. To see in Wells 
Cathedral in the west of England, for example, the great inverted arches be- 
neath the central tower, installed as a preventive measure in the fourteenth 
century, fills one with admiration not only for the skill in building they repre- 
sent but also for the remarkable way in which the monks were able to obviate 
a catastrophic foundation failure which they must have envisaged as they 
developed their unique solution. 

The records remain silent, however, and so the mystery of geological neglect 
must stand. Even the renaissance of learning in western Europe failed to 
change this strange stagnation of geological inquiry. Leonardo da Vinci quite 
naturally applied his unique genius to the study of the earth, as to so much 
else. His first observations on mountains were recorded in the year 1508 but, 
again as in other fields, his acute observations failed to lead to any general 
awakening of geological study. It was, indeed, not until the nineteenth century 



246 ROBERT F. LEGGET 

was well started that the first general stirrings of real interest in the earth's 
crust and in its constituents are to be found. And yet, by this time, Laplace 
had published his monumental "Celestial Mechanics,*' the most comprehensive 
survey of astronomical knowledge ever made and a work that can be studied 
with profit even today. 

The contrast is indeed striking, so remarkable in fact that it demands an 
explanation. Could it be that, unlike the case with these other sciences, the 
awakening of modern geological study had to await the start of the industrial 
age and the practical demands of modern engineering for information about 
the earth's crust and the materials in it? At first sight, such a suggestion might 
appear to be verging on the absurd, so subservient have been the applications 
of geology to the prosecution of basic geological studies until comparatively 
recent years. When, however, the records of the great pioneers of geology are 
studied, some warrant for the suggestion becomes immediately apparent. 

It is, for example, well known that the first of these modern "giants of 
geology" (as they have been happily called), Abraham Gottlob Werner, was 
appointed as an inspector of mines and instructor in mining and mineralogy 
at the Freiburg Academy in 1775 when he was only twenty-five years old. 
Here he conducted his famous classes for almost forty years until the disturb- 
ances in the wake of Napoleon's army of occupation made it impossible for 
him to continue. His skill as a teacher has never been questioned, even though 
some of the theories he taught became the centre of great controversy. His 
teaching, however, was specifically related to the application of geology in 
mining so that he was essentially an applied geologist. Even his antipathy to 
writing and his procrastination in relation to what little he did write fore- 
shadowed all too clearly what has (unfortunately) become almost a character- 
istic of those concerned with the application of the science of geology in the 
service of man. (Fenton, 1952) 

It is, however, not so generally recognized that Werner's great Scottish 
antagonist, James Hutton, came to enjoy his interest in geology by way of a 
very practical route; his importance in the general picture of unfolding geo- 
logical theory obscured his earlier interests in applied geology. After his early 
training in medicine and his disappointment at the prospects he saw in the 
medical profession, he turned to his friend James Davie and shared an interest 
with him in the production of sal ammoniac, while at the same time he farmed 
the small estate left to him by his father. To this latter task he applied his 
unusual scientific acumen, traveling extensively in Europe to study the most 
advanced farming methods he could find. His farm became a show place; 
and it is clear beyond all reasonable doubt that his farming activity introduced 
Hutton to the scientific study of the earth, for he certainly noticed the relation 
of soil properties to the character of the underlying rocks, as well as the insidious 
effects of soil erosion. \Vhen he rented his farm in 1768 and moved to Edin- 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 247 

burgh to devote himself to his scientific studies, he was forty-two years old, 
with much valuable experience behind him and his geological interests fully 
awakened through his practical activities and particularly his scientific farming. 

D'Aubuisson and von Buch, having been students of Werner, might be 
expected to have had interest in the applications of geology in mining. Von 
Buch actually spent a year as inspector of mines in Silesia before coming into 
the inheritance which gave him the freedom to pursue his scientific interests 
as he wished. It is well known that when, in 1818, Adam Sedgwick was elected 
to the chair of geology at Cambridge, he knew little of the science, his sound 
classical education having apparently won his election. But he was very soon 
learning his geology in the field, and he started in British lead mines, proceed- 
ing to study the copper mines of Staffordshire and then the great salt mines at 
Northwich in Cheshire. In his later years, even Sir Charles Lyell did not 
disdain to study accidents in mines, despite the many demands upon his time 
and his extensive travels. 

Of even more significance is the fact that in his presidential address to the 
Geological Society of London in February 1836, Lyell, after announcing the 
award of the Wollaston Medal to Agassiz, went on to record his own part in 
the formation of the Geological Survey of England, the first national geological 
survey to be formed in the world: 

Early in the spring of last year application was made by the Master General 
and Board of Ordnance to Dr. Buckland and Mr. Sedgwick, as Professors 
of Geology in the Universities of Oxford and Cambridge, and to myself, as 
President of this Society, to offer our opinion as to the expediency of com- 
bining a geological examination of the English counties with the geographical 
survey now in progress. In compliance with this requisition we drew up a 
joint report, in which we endeavoured to state fully our opinion as to the 
great advantages which must accrue from such an undertaking not only as 
calculated to promote geological science, which would alone be a sufficient 
object, but also as a work of great practical utility, bearing on agriculture, 
mining, road-making, the formation of canals and railroads, and other 
branches of national industry. (Lyell, 1836, p. 358) 

It is, perhaps, of even more significance to find a parallel development in 
the start of modern civil engineering. The great British pioneer in this field 
was originally a Yorkshire stone mason. John Smeaton (1724-1792) developed 
such skill in the design and construction of notable structures that he is widely 
regarded as the first civil engineer. His masterpiece was the first stone Eddy- 
stone Lighthouse, the remains of which may still be seen standing on Plymouth 
Hoe. His stone tower was built between 1756 and 1759. Many features of its 
construction are noteworthy, such as Smeaton's research into the Roman use 
of pozzolana and his use of the same material. Fortunately, Smeaton wrote 
an account of the entire project and the geological insights that this record 



248 ROBERT F. LEGGET 

contains are revealing indeed. His own training as a stone mason could be 
held to account for the detail in which he describes his search for the correct 
type of stone of which to build the lighthouse, but the way in which he exam- 
ined the treacherous rock on which he had to build the structure goes far beyond 
what a mason might have been expected to do, especially in such an early and 
pioneer venture. Smeaton's own words are worthy of brief quotation: 

The congeries of rocks called Edystone appear to me to be all of the same 
kind of stone, and of a kind so peculiar that I have not seen any stone exactly 
like it in Cornwall or Devonshire ... It differs from the Moorstone in this; 
instead of being composed of grains or small fragments, united by a strong 
cement, interspersed with a shining talky substance, as the Cornish moor- 
stone appears to be; it is composed of the like matter formed into laminae 
commonly from one twentieth to one sixth part of an inch in thickness . . . 
as is nearly one foot dip to the westward, in two feet horizontal, that is, in 
an angle of about 26 degrees with the horizon. (Smeaton, 1791, p. 12) 

These are the words of a practical civil engineer writing as early as 1791. 

The nineteenth century had opened before engineering work really began to 
transform the physical face of Europe, but the appreciation of geology so well 
demonstrated by John Smeaton was shared by other leaders in the newly 
developing profession of civil engineering. Canal and road building created 
much building activity in Great Britain. 

James Loudon McAdam was one of the towering practical road builders of 
these early days. He, too, published a record of his ideas on road building, a 
book that went through nine editions. A keenly developed sense of geological 
appreciation permeates the book, such as in this statement about road-building 
materials: 

Flint makes an excellent road, if due attention be paid to the size, but from 
want of attention, many of the flint roads are rough, loose and expensive. 
Limestone when properly prepared and applied makes a smooth solid road 
and becomes consolidated sooner than any other material; but from its 
nature it is not the most lasting. Whinstone is the most durable of all ma- 
terials; and wherever it is well and judiciously applied, the roads are compara- 
tively good and cheap. (McAdam, 1823, p. 20) 

Thomas Telford, undoubtedly the greatest of these early British civil engi- 
neers, a man whose fame led to his being invited to undertake work in Sweden 
and other European countries, was a man of action rather than words. For- 
tunately, in addition to his own brief writings, we have records of his character 
and works from other writers, amongst them Robert Southey, the English poet. 
He accompanied Telford on an inspection tour, in 1819, through the Scottish 
Highlands, where Telford was responsible for many projects including the 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 249 

Caledonian Canal. Southey kept a journal and this has been published pri- 
vately by the Institution of Civil Engineers. To find regular geological refer- 
ences in a journal kept by the Poet Laureate of England suggests that they 
must have been a regular part of the conversation of the two friends as Telford, 
the engineer, explained to Southey, the poet, details of the many works they 
had examined together. Southey noted that a new pier at Bervie Harbour 
was being constructed of "pudding stone ... of all stone it is the worst for 
working; but it is hard and durable, and when in place will do as well as if it 
were granite or marble." They saw a new bridge at Forres "built of granite 
of all colours . . . (near to which is) a bank of granite, in such a state of decom- 
position, or imperfect composition, that it crumbles at a touch." Southey tells 
how Telford advised a laird in Skye about developing a marble deposit, saving 
him from great expenditure by persuading him to make first an experimental 
shipment to London. And in a deposit of "marie" near Inverness they found 
it to be "full of very small shells, some resembling whelks, others like the fresh 
water muscle, but all very small." (Southey, 1929) 

The position of William Smith (1769-1839) can now be seen to be no iso- 
lated phenomenon, as is sometimes suggested, but rather the supreme example 
of what was probably almost commonplace in the early years of civil engineer- 
ing. For William Smith was a civil engineer; he so signed his name in docu- 
ments still to be seen. It is almost amusing to note attempts in some geological 
writing to skirt around this basic fact, by such devices as referring to Smith 
as a surveyor or a land agent. Fortunately, the engineering work of the man 
who so well earned the title of "Father of British Geology" is well documented 
and it can be seen to be as thorough as were his geological studies, upon which 
his fame so firmly rests. His whole professional career was so intimate a blend- 
ing of geology and its application to the practice of engineering that it is 
hardly necessary to do more than make this brief reference to it. But it may be 
useful to recall that his famous map appeared (in 1815) bearing a long title 
which began "A Delineation of the Strata of England and Wales, with part of 
Scotland, exhibiting the Collieries and Mines ..." There was no doubt as to 
William Smith's appreciation of the value of applied geology, nor of the breadth 
of his vision as to how geology may be applied in the service of man, for (in 
his own words) his "New Geological Adas of England and Wales," which 
followed the famous map between 1819 and 1824, was "calculated to elucidate 
the Agriculture of each County, and to show the Situation of the best material 
for Building, Making of Roads, the Construction of Canals, and pointing out 
those Places where Coal and other Valuable Materials are likely to be found." 
This must surely be one of the earliest charters of applied geology. (Phillips, 
1844) 

What of geology in the new world? Its indebtedness to the early geologists 
of Europe is well appreciated, but it may be asked whether the start of the 



250 ROBERT F. LEGGET 

scientific study of geology- in North America had this same practical beginning. 
The answer is clear as soon as the records of early American geologists are 
consulted. William Maclure started his geological studies with the objective 
of assisting with the development of ores of iron, copper and zinc. His last 
years were taken up in part with the start of his school of agriculture because 
the scientific study of soil was one of his continuing interests. James Hall's 
early work in New York State resulted in a report (1843) that devoted much 
attention to mining matters as well as giving the first account of the geological 
sequence to be found in that state. (Fenton, 1952) 

In early Canada, with its widely scattered and sparse population, the same 
picture is found, epitomized in another commanding founder of modern 
geology, Sir William Ernest Logan, first Director of the Geological Survey of 
Canada. Born in Montreal in 1~98, Logan was sent to school in Edinburgh 
and then entered the business house of an uncle in London. In 1831 he moved 
to Wales to take charge of a copper smelter. He became interested in the local 
coal mining and prepared a geological map of the coal field, without any 
instruction. This led him to a detailed study of the underclays associated with 
coal, and he presented a paper about them to the Geological Society (of 
London) in 1840. He sailed for Halifax in 1841 and immediately upon landing 
started on those field studies of Canadian geology' the record of which makes 
exciting reading even today, enlivened as it is by his quite brilliant pen and ink 
sketches. 

His work soon attracted attention, with the result that in 1842 he was ap- 
pointed director of a Geological Survey 15 years before the Dominion of 
Canada itself had been constituted. In supporting his candidature, Sir Henry 
de la Beche, Director of the British Survey, stated that "I would further observe 
that Mr. Logan is highly qualified as a miner and metallurgist to point out the 
applications of geology- to the useful purposes of life, an object of the highest 
importance in a country like Canada, the mineral wealth of which is now so 
little known." 1 From the time of his appointment until his eventual retirement 
in 1869 (he died in 1875J, he seemed to do the work of several men, becoming 
almost a legendary figure throughout eastern Canada. 

The practical aspect of his work was evident from the use to which his in- 
vestigations were put by such great engineers as Thomas Keefer and George 
Stephenson (for the design of the piers of the Victoria Bridge, Montreal, piers 
that are still in use). He received many offers of other, and more gainful, 
employment. In writing about one such offer, he had this interesting observa- 
tion to make. 

When the British Government gave up the Michigan territory at the end 
of the last American war, with as little concern as if it had been so much 
bare granite, I dare say they were not aware that 12,000 square miles of a 
coal-field existed in the heart of it larger than the largest in Britain, though 
the smallest of those belonging to the United States, which possess another 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 251 

of 55,000 square miles, and a third of 60,000 square miles . . . Taking all 
this into consideration, notwithstanding I have requested my brother Ed- 
mond, of Edinburgh, who has a friend in the East India direction, to make 
some inquiry into the matter, I fancy you will see that the chances are that 
I am tied to Canada. (Harrington, 1883, pp. 235-236) 

So germane to this study is Logan's whole philosophy that the temptation 
to quote from his own lucid writings is hard to resist. One more citation may 
perhaps be admitted, his own definition of the work of the Geological Survey 
of Canada. 

The object of the Survey is to ascertain the mineral resources of the coun- 
try, and this is kept steadily in view. Whatever new scientific facts have 
resulted from it, have come out in the course of what I conceive to be eco- 
nomic researches carried on in a scientific way . . . The analyses of new 
mineral species, while they directly regard a scientific result, must always 
have an economic bearing. You cannot tell whether a new substance is to 
be profitably available or not until you have ascertained its properties. The 
analyses of mineral species led to our knowledge of the limefeldspars, of so 
much agricultural importance to the Laurentian country. Thus economics 
lead to science, and science to economics. (Harrington, 1883, pp. 293-294) 

Economics lead to science, and science to economics and this from the 
man whose studies of the Precambrian have stood the test of a century of 
further study. 



Words of Edmund Burke come vividly to mind as these glimpses at the early 
days of geological study are considered: "People will not look forward to pos- 
terity who never look backward to their ancestors." A seventy-fifth anniversary 
is not only a time for glancing backward, not alone a time for reviewing present 
achievements, but also a time for looking ahead to the challenges of the future. 
How is geology to serve mankind in the years ahead as it so surely did in the 
days of its beginnings? 

The years between have a natural bearing upon the answer to be given, even 
though the record they present, certainly for the remainder of the nineteenth 
century, is not inspiring. Despite such auspicious beginnings, the divorce of 
geology from all its applications became very real as the century advanced, to 
such an extent that, in 1880, an eminent British geologist is reported to have 
said that the amount of money fruitlessly spent in Great Britain in a ridiculous 
search for coal, even within his own memory, would have paid the entire cost 
of the British Geological Survey. Early mining records are replete with 
examples of geological neglect, all supporting statements in this vein. 

Developments in the application of geology in civil engineering followed a 
similar course. The fault almost certainly must be shared equally by geologists 



252 ROBERT F. LEGGET 

and engineers, the mutual respect of early years giving way to differences that 
were sometimes acrimonious. Another of the great pioneer British engineers 
was involved in such divergences which, although now perhaps amusing, must 
have had singularly unfortunate results at the time. 

Isambard Kingdom Brunei was a young man of genius who gained his 
experience from his distinguished father, Mark Isambard Brunei (born in 
France), who was at one time Chief Engineer of the City of New York. In 1824 
Mark Brunei was responsible for the start of work on the first subaqueous tunnel, 
beneath the River Thames at Rotherhithe, just east of London. On the basis 
of numerous trial borings, geologists assured the older Brunei that he would 
find a stratum of strong blue clay and avoid the quicksand that had plagued 
an earlier attempt at tunneling. The prediction proved to be quite wrong, and 
although the tunnel was eventually finished by the elder Brunei, the extra cost, 
incredible difficulties, and the hazards that had to be overcome must have left 
an indelible imprint on the young man's mind. 

When building the Great Western Railway, almost twenty years later, the 
younger Brunei faced another major tunneling job in the construction of the 
two-mile Box Tunnel between Chippenham and Bath. The tunnel penetrates 
blue clay, blue marl, the Inferior Oolite and the Great Oolite, or Bath Stone. 
After the tunnel had been completed and put into use the Reverend Doctor 
William Buckland, then at Oxford, caused much trouble by declaring, even 
though he had not visited the tunnel, that the unlined section was highly 
dangerous and would certainly fall "owing to the concussion of the atmosphere 
and the vibration caused by the trains." To this Isambard Brunei replied that 
although he regretted his lack of scientific knowledge of geology, he had had 
experience in excavating the rock in question and so considered it to be quite 
safe. A Board of Trade inspector was called upon to report on the safety of 
the tunnel and strongly supported Brunei. Some of the tunnel remains unlined 
to this day, 120 years after its opening. (Rolt, 1961) 

Pursuit of such arguments, disagreements, and outright mistakes, although 
possibly of some human interest, is not profitable in a study such as this. The 
schism was created, however, and persisted throughout the century. There 
were naturally individual exceptions and occasional glimpses of the benefits 
to be derived by cooperation, such as a series of articles by W. H. Penning 
published in the British journal The Engineer in 1879, and reprinted a year 
later in book form as "Engineering Geology." (Penning, 1880) 

The academic isolation of the science almost certainly led eventually to its 
neglect in the sphere of public interest, represented so unfortunately in its 
almost complete absence from the curricula of schools, a neglect that persists 
even today, and its general denigration until very recently in the activities of 
natural history clubs and similar amateur scientific endeavours. This situation 
is also in contrast with the position in earlier days. A rare book came recently 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 253 

into the possession of the writer showing that almost a century ago no less a 
man than the Reverend Charles Kingsley, author of "The Water Babies" and 
other famous books for young people, was a popular lecturer on geology in 
addition to his many other activities. The book, "Town Geology," contains 
the text of lectures delivered in 1872 to the "young men of the city of Chester 
(England)," presumably at meetings sponsored by the Chester Natural History 
Society. In his introduction, Kingsley says: 

It does seem to me strange, to use the mildest word, that people whose 
destiny it is to live, even for a few short years, on this planet which we call 
the earth, and who do not at all intend to live on it as hermits . . . shall in 
general be so careless about the constitution of this same planet, and of the 
laws and facts on which depend, not merely their comfort and their wealth, 
but their health and their very lives, and the health and the lives of their 
children and descendants. (Kingsley, 1877, pp. xv-xvi) 

In rolling, somewhat ponderous but still enjoyable Victorian prose, the 
author gives a lucid general picture of physical geology and then shows how it 
affects "The Soil of the Field," "The Pebbles in the Streets," "The Slates on 
the Roof," and similar very practical subjects. The science of geology, says 
Kingsley, "is (or ought to be), in popular parlance, the people's science the 
science by studying which, the man ignorant of Latin, Greek . . . can yet 
become ... a truly scientific man." And in urging his readers to use their eyes, 
even in their own town, he says: "Be sure, that wherever there is a river, even 
a drain; and a stone quarry, or even a roadside bank; much more where there 
is a sea, or a tidal aestuary, there is geology enough to be learnt, to explain the 
greater part of the making of all the continents on the globe." (Kingsley, 
1877, pp. 4, 35) 

These words written so long ago are still strangely relevant. After decades 
of popular neglect, geology is again beginning to win some degree of general 
recognition; its application at last is appreciated by the man in the street as 
something that affects him. University extension lectures are the modern 
equivalent of such popular lecture series as those of Charles Kingsley. To these 
have been added, however, the steady stream, flood it might almost be called, 
of cheap popular literature, and all that modern mass communication media 
can provide in purveying information. To see well-illustrated "paperbacks" 
on geology on even small bookstalls is now commonplace; the same cannot 
be said of other major scientific disciplines with the exception of meteorology. 
When radio and television are used as educational media, geology is not neg- 
lected. For example, the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation devoted one of 
its major nationwide evening "University" lecture series to an introduction 
to geology; later the lectures were reprinted in book form. (Baird, 1959) 
Slowly, geology is at last winning a place for itself in the curricula of some high 



254 ROBERT F. LEGGET 

schools, and some organization such as the Bov Scouts, are giving it increased 
recognition in their excellent training work. Once again, it is coming to be 
recognized as "the people's science." 

What has prompted this awakening of the public interest? The reality of 
the change in attitude lends validity to the question. As in so many other social 
changes, the automobile would seem to hold the key to at least a partial answer. 
The potential mobility of the general public through the wide availability of 
private automobiles, when coupled with the unaccustomed leisure and extra 
wealth that the affluent society of North America is providing, has resulted in 
an amount of traveling for the ordinary citizen such as the world has never 
previously witnessed. And as the citizen travels, he must be conscious, to a 
degree, of the engineering of the roads on which he travels, especially when 
new highway construction interferes with his headlong high-speed touring. 
He can then see, as he waits impatiently to pass in single line through some 
construciion project, that civil engineers have to excavate rock and soil for 
their cuttings and tunnels; some motorists at least must see that all rock is not 
the same. Even while traveling, the motorist will be at least conscious of the 
scenery through which he passes. Interest has been aroused to the degree that 
there are available today many route guides giving geological and historical 
information about unusually interesting routes. (W. Texas Geol. Soc., 1958) 

Doubtless there are other causes of the regeneration of public interest in 
geology, but reflection suggests that it is the work of the civil engineer, as seen 
by the itinerant public, that is chiefly responsible. Few people have occasion 
to visit mines; fewer still probably give thought to the source of the gasoline 
they use so profligately; and, although adventures with mining stocks may 
make denizens of the stock market familiar with the names of mines, real and 
imaginary, this is no warranty of knowledge of geology- in fact, sober recita- 
tion of geological facts would remove much of the adventure from the bucket 
shops. As a prime example of the application of geology in the service of man, 
the practice of present day "engineering geology," as it has come to be called, 
will therefore be examined in brief review against the broader context of the 
unfolding science itself before a final glance is taken at what the future 
may hold. If, as William James once remarked, philosophy in the full 
sense is only man thinking, such a review might suggest a philosophy of 
applied geology. 

Just as the work of William Smith epitomizes some of the earliest interrela- 
tions of geology and civil engineering, so the work of Charles P. Berkey marks 
a real turning point in the more recent history of the application of geology 
to civil engineering work. In 1905, he was retained in connection with the 
construction of the Catskill Aqueduct for the water supply of the City of New 
York. Thereafter for half a century, his services were hi constant demand in 
association with many of the greatest civil engineering projects of North Amer- 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 255 

ica. Dr. Berkey's outstanding contribution to the development of the Geo- 
logical Society of America makes this reference to his work singularly appropri- 
ate. After serving as Secretary to the Society for eighteen years, he was elected 
President in 1941 and in the same year became an Honorary Member of the 
American Society of Civil Engineers, one of the many honours bestowed upon 
him which he always valued in a rather special way. In his presidential address 
Dr. Berkey had this to say about the assistance that geologists can render to 
civil engineers in the prosecution of: 

. . . works marking the progress of material civilization and magnifying the 
limited competence of man's bare hands. They are literally fountains of 
power perhaps in this present emergency the power that is to save the 
world. In a world seemingly bent on self-destruction, at least these adven- 
turers face toward the future and stand out as if to promise better times in 
a more constructive world. So I claim a place of honor for these men who 
spent their lives in devising new ways of using their specialistic knowledge 
and experience and ingenuity for more effective public works and for the 
greater comfort and safety of men and women everywhere. (Berkey, 1942, 
p. 531) 

These words were spoken twenty years ago; how relevant they are to the world 
of today. 

It was in 1928, at the age of 61, that Berkey was retained by the U. S. Bureau 
of Reclamation just as the monumental Hoover Dam reached the final stages 
of planning. His assistance with the study of the foundation problems and the 
allied diversion tunnels associated with this great structure was recorded in a 
series of lucid reports that in no way minimize the details of the relevant 
geology but which make clear how the safety of the engineering structure 
depends ultimately and entirely upon the adequacy of the supporting rock 
strata. This point of view is now very generally accepted, to such an extent 
that the failure of a dam because of geological defects in its foundations is 
today almost unknown. The tragedy of the failure of the Malpasset Dam in 
1959, and the exhaustive investigations into the cause of the disaster serve to 
confirm the foregoing suggestion in no uncertain manner. 

All the tools and methods of geological investigation geophysical methods, 
the use of large and small bore holes, exploratory shafts and tunnels all supple- 
mentary to detailed geological surveying are now regularly used not only for 
the study of dam sites but also for determining the geological conditions to be 
anticipated along the routes of proposed tunnels. In studies for the long- 
discussed Channel Tunnel between England and France, comparative studies 
of microfossils (similar to the widely followed practice in petroleum engineering) 
were carried out in some detail in checking the assumed continuity of the 
Lower Chalk across the bed of the Strait of Dover. (Bruckshaw, et al., 1961) 



256 ROBERT F. LEGGET 

In all applications of geology to the works of the civil engineer there are 
reciprocal benefits of varying degree but the excavation of tunnels provides 
perhaps the most obvious examples. The civil engineer can be guided in his 
work by the preliminary predictions of the geologist; the geologist can obtain 
invaluable information if he is permitted to examine the rocks exposed as the 
tunnel advances. There is on record the particularly delightful incident which 
permitted Dr. Hans Cloos finally to solve the riddle of the Rhine Graben by 
his observations in the short tunnel beneath the Lorettoberg at Freiburg. 
(Cloos, 1954) New light was shed on some of the complexities of the geology 
of the Scottish Highlands by observations made as the great Lochaber water- 
power tunnel was excavated beneath the slopes of Ben Nevis. (Peach, 1930) 
And in more recent years, one of the most difficult tunnels ever driven, the 
Tecolote Tunnel in California, was put to good geological use before being 
placed in service; it was used for a detailed study of the trends in the Tertiary 
strata that it penetrates. (Bandy and Kolpack, 1962) The dewatering, by 
means of cofferdams, of dam sites provides correspondingly unique opportuni- 
ties for the actual study of riverbed geology. 

The construction of major bridges today always includes a detailed study of 
one or more river or lake crossings and the requisite test borings will sometimes 
reveal submarine geological features that were previously unsuspected. Dis- 
covery of a preglacial gorge in Mackinac Strait between lakes Michigan and 
Huron in the course of foundation studies for the great suspension bridge which 
now spans the Strait is a good and quite typical example. (Rosenau, 1958) 
Civil engineering structures built in the open sea necessitate unusually difficult 
site investigations which will always provide a dividend in the way of new 
information on submarine geology. Of unusual value has been the information 
on the deltaic deposits of the Mississippi River derived from soil mechanics 
studies of soil samples obtained in connection with site studies for offshore oil 
drilling platforms. (Fisk & McClelland, 1959) 

Even more mundane engineering works such as the construction of roads 
and airports have their own contribution to make to the fund of geological 
knowledge, especially by the new sections revealed by major excavation work. 
At the same time, the wide areal coverage of such projects has led to develop- 
ments in methods of field investigation which constitute advances in geological 
technique. Notable has been the use of geophysical methods (especially seismic) 
for the study of shallow deposits such as those in glaciated areas. Engineering 
use of geophysical methods for subsurface investigation has constituted a singu- 
larly useful link between geology and geophysics, a link that must be greatly 
strengthened in the years ahead as the concept of quantitative measurement 
becomes more widespread in geological practice. 

Geological conditions on quite restricted building sites, such as those in 
central urban areas, are now engaging the attention of engineers to a degree 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 257 

never experienced previously. The increasing complexity of foundation con- 
struction in crowded city areas, due to the proliferation of subsurface services, 
makes knowledge of exact site conditions a virtual necessity. As geological 
records of this very localized type are assembled and coordinated, valuable 
information about the geology beneath city streets is developed. Urban geology 
has therefore become a term of real significance and is not the mutually con- 
tradictory juxtaposition of words that it might at first sight appear to be. 

There are some critical urban areas where a combination of steeply sloping 
ground and unsatisfactory soil conditions gives rise to serious landslide hazards, 
particularly after periods of heavy rain. Some of the suburbs around the city 
of St. Louis, Missouri, are plagued by this danger, but the largest and most 
notable area to have been developed in the face of this hazard is that constituted 
by the city and county of Los Angeles. So serious has this local situation become 
that legislation has been enacted requiring a report on any potentially unstable 
site by an engineering geologist before development work can proceed. Here 
indeed is a very obvious example of geology in the service of man. (Grove, 
1957) This legal requirement has led to the establishment of a professional 
society, the California Association of Engineering Geologists. 

Antedating this group by more than a decade is the Division of Engineering 
Geology of the Geological Society of America. The establishment of this divi- 
sion (in 1947) was public recognition, by the Society, of the importance of this 
particular application of geology. Both of these organizations, however, are 
fledglings in comparison with the geological divisions of several national insti- 
tutions of mining engineers, whose continued work has long provided valuable 
records of mining activity. Not much younger than the Geological Society 
itself are two other North American societies serving the needs of applied 
geology. Both are now international in scope, and their example has now been 
followed at the local level by the establishment of more than a few local mining 
or petroleum geological societies. 

The formation of the Society of Economic Geologists in 1920 and of the 
American Association of Petroleum Geologists in their more specialized field, 
in 1917, provide further turning points in the applications of geology. It is 
significant that alternatives considered to the name finally adopted for the 
Society of Economic Geologists included the Society of Geological Engineers 
and the Society of Applied Geology. Notable also is the fact that at the Society's 
first meeting there was presented a paper on "The Relation of Economic 
Geology to the General Principles of Geology" by President R. A. F. Penrose, 
Jr. (1921). 

It is not often that the official bulletin of a society antedates the society 
itself, but this is the case with the distinguished journal, Economic Geology, 
which is the bulletin of the Society of Economic Geologists. The first issue 
appeared in October 1905, and the Fiftieth Anniversary Volume in 1955. The 



258 ROBERT F. LEGGET 

two parts of this notable compilation, containing 1130 pages, present a compre- 
hensive survey of all main aspects of the geology of ore deposits, to which the 
journal itself has been generally devoted, but review papers dealing with engi- 
neering geology, soil mechanics, and ground water are also included. It is 
impossible to make even a cursory examination of this significant collection 
of papers without appreciating how much the application of geology in the 
search for ores and fuel has contributed to significant advances in the science 
of geology itself. 

The start of exploration for petroleum in Oklahoma about 1913 led to great 
interest in this area in the application of geology to the discovery and winning 
of oil. At a dinner in Tulsa, Oklahoma, on October 2, 1915, it was decided 
to form an association of geologists interested in this relatively new aspect of 
applied geology*. The Southwestern Association of Petroleum Geologists was 
organized on February 19, 1917, also in Tulsa, but the name was changed in 
the following year to the American Association of Petroleum Geologists. The 
Association now has a worldwide membership of more than 1 5,000 a number 
that is clearly indicative of the importance of this branch of applied geology. 
Through its Bulletin, associated specialized journals, and its more than thirty 
special volumes, the Association has made significant contributions to the litera- 
ture of geology. As is the case with Economic Geology, the Bulletin of A.A.P.G. 
includes many papers that may properly be described as theoretical, some seem- 
ingly far removed from the search for petroleum. 

The search for minerals and fuels will long continue. Exploration for new 
reserves of petroleum is today being pursued throughout the world on an un- 
precedented scale, to such an extent that it undoubtedly represents at present 
the most extensive application of geology in the service of man. Inevitably, 
however, it must be a transitory application even in comparison with the cor- 
responding search for minerals. All who are familiar with the Paley report 
and what geologist is not? will know the challenge that even now exists in 
the mineral field. And all such exploratory work will involve the most assiduous 
application of the principles and techniques of geology- and geophysics, if 
indeed the two need to be separated; it will involve deep probings beneath the 
surface of the earth and the bottom of the sea; and in this and many other 
ways, it will add to the store of geological knowledge and doubtless make its 
own special contributions to the advance of geological theory and principles. 
Economics will long lean on science, and science upon economics. 

As the future becomes the present, and the present the past, who can tell 
what advances will be seen in this unceasing hunt for the treasures of the earth? 
It is when one considers carefully the surface of the earth that the most impor- 
tant of all the possible applications of geology in the service of man comes into 
view. The population of the world is now exploding, and the rate of increase 
still shows no significant signs of slackening. Even assuming that some of the 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 259 

worldwide measures for population control that can now be seen to be impera- 
tive are introduced before it is too late, it is safe to say that by the year 2000 A.D. 
a crucial point in time that will be seen by most readers of this volume the 
population of the world will be almost double what it is today. To maintain 
these more than 6 billion lives, the use of almost all available arable land will 
be necessary as will also supplies of water that will make public water-supply 
systems of the present day appear almost parsimonious in comparison. Con- 
servation of the renewable resources of the earth, notably soil and water, is 
therefore a public responsibility of immediate urgency. 

Some may be tempted to say what has this to do with geology? Just this, 
that in the conservation of the renewable resources of the earth for man's 
future use, and especially water, civil engineering works will be called for on a 
scale surpassing anything yet seen, except in certain carefully developed river 
valleys. And in all these works the aid of the geologist will be essential, particu- 
larly in all considerations of subsurface water and of soil-erosion control. 
These projects will be in addition to the works and buildings required for the 
ordinary service of communities and areas, in the execution of which close 
collaboration of engineer and geologist will be vitally necessary. In all this 
work the engineer must have essential geological information for the stability 
and safety of his structures, and the geologist will gain new insights into sub- 
surface conditions as these are revealed by the excavations of the engineer. 
In this way the bounds of geological knowledge will steadily increase. 

What, then, is the conclusion of the matter? Even in such a pedestrian review 
as this, it has not been possible even to mention all the main applications of 
geology in the service of man. Military geology, for example, is now a well- 
accepted branch of applied geology upon which many comments could have 
been made. Much more could have been said about the new techniques that 
even now can be seen to have great value in all such engineering projects. It 
is exceedingly clear, however, that geology will be applied in the works of the 
engineer in steadily increasing measure as far into the future as the mind can 
foresee. 

It has been well said that merely boring holes in the ground is not geology. 
But if, in the location of test bore holes, geological advice is always sought and 
in the interpretation of test bores geological significance is always considered, 
the needs of the engineer can be better met while new information will thus 
become available for the use of the geologist. It is clear that there is no special 
philosophy of applied geology. How could there be in the application of the 
science to the art of engineering? If, however, the geologist brings to bear in 
his part of such cooperative endeavour a lively appreciation of the philosophical 
aspects of his work, he will be the more appreciative of the philosophical back- 
ground of all true engineering. And with such a meeting of the minds in the 
prosecution of what must always be essentially detailed and utilitarian work, 



260 ROBERT F. LEGGET 

what potential is presented for advancing the boundaries of knowledge while 
serving the needs of man ! 

Some must have thought it a hard saying as they were reading these words 
of the late Mr. Justice Holmes: "Science teaches us a great deal about things 
that are not really important, philosophy a very little about those that are 
supremely so." This Olympian view might have been expected from the 
eminent jurist. To the geologist at work in the field or in the laboratory, as to 
the engineer engaged in the design or the construction of some vitally needed 
public project, the words will seem to be almost heresy. And yet, as one sets 
the acknowledged wonders of geological investigation or the applications of 
geology' in even the greatest of engineering works against the backdrop of human 
history and as one glimpses ahead into ages yet unborn, the words persist in 
their challenge, reminding one of the dominance of the mind of man in all 
such studies, of the human core of all understanding. This is no new thought, 
for down through almost four centuries of time come words with which this 
essay may most fitly close, words of a philosopher-scientist whose prescience so 
frequently surprises his modern readers. It must have been with thoughts such 
as those now ventured that Sir Francis Bacon recorded his great concern "To 
make the mind of man, by help of art, a match for the nature of things." 



REFERENCES CITED 

BAIRD, D. M., 1959, An introduction to geology: Toronto, Canadian Broadcasting 

Corp., Ill pp. 
BANDY, O. L., and KOLPACK, R. L., 1962, Formaniferal and sedimentological trends in 

the Tertiary section of Tecolote Tunnel, California: Geol. Soc. Am., Abs., Ann. Mtg., 

Houston, p. 8A. 
BERKEY, C. P., 1942, The geologist in public works: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 53, pp. 

513-532. 
BRUCKSHAW, J. M., GOOUEL, J., HARDING, H. J. B., and MALCOR, R., 1961, The work 

of the Channel Tunnel Group 1958-1960: Inst. Civil Eng., Pr., vol. 18, pp. 149-178; 

See also discussion in vol. 21, pp. 611-628. 
CLOOS, H., 1954, Conversation with the earth (trans, by E. B. Garside): London, 

Routledge and Kegan Paul, 402 pp. 
FENTON, C. L. and M. A., 1952, Giants of geology: Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 

333 PP . 
FBK, H. N., and MCCLELLAND, B., 1959, Geology of continental shelf off Louisiana; its 

influence on offshore foundation design: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 70, pp. 1369-1394. 
GROVE, D. E., 1957, A geologic challenge: GeoTimes (Am. Geol. Inst.), vol. 2, no. 5, 

p. 8. 
HARRINGTON, B. J., 1883, Life of Sir William E. Logan, Kt.: Montreal, Dawson Bros., 

432pp. 



GEOLOGY IN THE SERVICE OF MAN 261 

HERODOTUS, 1910, The History of Herodotus (trans, by G. Rawlinson), 2 vols.: London, 

J. M. Dent and Sons, Ltd., 719 pp. 

KINGSLEY, C., 1877, Town geology: London, Daldy, Isbister and Co., 239 pp. 
LYELL, CHARLES, 1836, Geol. Soc. London, Pr., vol. 2, no. 44, pp. 357-361. 
McADAM, J. L., 1827, Remarks on the present system of road making, 9th ed.: London, 

Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme, and Brown, 236 pp. 
PEACH, B. N., 1930, The Lochaber water power scheme and its geological aspects: 

Water and Water Eng. (London), vol. 32, p. 71. 

PENNING, W. H., 1880, Engineering geology : London, Ballie>e, Tindall and Cox, 164 pp. 
PENROSE, R. A. F., Jr., 1921, The relations of economic geology to the general principles 

of geology: Econ. Geol., vol. 16, pp. 48-51. 

PHILLIPS, J., 1844, Memoirs of William Smith, LL.D.: London, John Murray, 150 pp. 
ROLT, L. T. C., 1961, Isambard Kingdom Brunei: London, Arrow Books, 383 pp. 
ROSENAU, J. C., 1958, Geology of the Mackinac Bridge site, Michigan: Geol. Soc. Am., 

Abs., vol. 69, Ann. Mtg., St. Louis, p. 1636. 
SINGER, C., 1959, A short history of scientific ideas to 1900: Oxford, Clarendon Press, 

525 pp. 
SMEATON, J., 1791, A narrative of the building and a description of the construction of 

the Edystone lighthouse with stone . . .: London, H. Hughs, sold by G. Nicol, 198 pp. 
SOUTHEY, R., 1929, Journal of a tour hi Scotland in 1819: London, John Murray, 276 pp. 
VITRUVIUS, 1914, The Ten Books of Architecture (trans, by M. H. Morgan): Cambridge, 

Harvard University Press, 331 pp. 
West Texas Geological Society, 1958, Geological road log, Del Rio to El Paso: Midland, 

West Texas Geol. Soc., 48 pp. 



CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

Southern Methodist University 



Philosophy of Geology: 

A Selected Bibliography 
and Index 1 



This bibliography contains references to some four hundred writings which 
reflect upon the scope, methods, and contributions of the geological sciences. 
The collection is not comprehensive; neither are its selections evenly balanced 
with regard to their professional origins, geographic distribution, or years of 
publication. 

Because the main effort here is to identify live rather than fossil problems, I 
have drawn more than half the items from works published since 1949. A geo- 
graphical weighting in favor of American publications a little more than 
half the entire list is unintentional. With more time, and with continued 
access to competent translators of eastern European and Scandinavian lan- 
guages, a better geographical balance could have been attained. I have made 
a special effort to learn how geology is viewed by persons who are not geolo- 
gists. Consequently, a fourth of the references are to the works of historians, 
philosophers, mathematicians, physicists, astrophysicists, biologists, bibliog- 
raphers, and linguists. 

The index at the end of this paper tells something about degrees of interest 
in different problems and subjects. As might be expected, three areas of spirited 
discussion center around the concepts of time, change, and the classification of 
natural phenomena. 

Hutton, as one admiring author claims, discovered time. In any event, the 
science he founded has seemed to differ from others by its concern with the 
changes that have occurred over vast stretches of time. Because history is also 
concerned with temporal sequences of events, geology has come to be known as 



1 Prepared with the aid of National Science Foundation Grant G-23887. 

262 



A SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY AND INDEX 263 

an historical science. This leads one to ask whether historians and historical 
geologists use the same basic methods. No, say those historiographers who 
insist that the only proper history is human history, and that in order to write 
it, one must relive in the imagination the things that actually happened to 
human beings in the past. Yes, say those philosophers who maintain that the 
explanation of whatever has happened, immediatelv or remotely in the past, 
requires the formulation and use of laws. However this particular issue may IDC 
resolved, it would appear that historical geologists are called upon to explain 
their explanations and to show \vhat use, if any, they make of laws. 

"The present is the key to the past, 53 we say. The principle of uniformitv, to 
which this adage refers, is held by many to be the foundation stone of geology. 
With regard to the validity of the principle, however, the range of opinion is 
amazing. Most modern historians of science seem to agree that LyelPs famous 
principle was an a-historic device, which was discarded after evolutionism 
became popular in the nineteenth century. Most modern philosophers of 
science seem to feel either that the principle is too vague to be useful, or that 
it is an unwarranted and unnecessary assumption. Geologists and other scien- 
tists have such varied opinions on the matter that it would be impossible, with- 
out a vote, to say which view prevails. Surely the principle of uniformity needs 
the critical attention of geologists. Is it no more than a prescription for analogi- 
cal reasoning? Will it reduce to the principle of simplicity, as applied to the 
agencies of geological change? And if so, with which of the many varieties of 
simplicity is it to be equated? 

As Simpson has said, all theoretical science is ordering. Many of the papers 
cited in the bibliography deal with the classification and ordering of natural 
phenomena. Admittedly, the things studied by geologists and paleontologists 
are hard to classify. Minerals, rocks, and natural fluids rarely occur in any 
pure or ideal state. The surface of the earth is so irregular, both morphologically 
and tectonically, that it is hard to devise classifications of land forms or geologi- 
cal structures that will apply to all terranes. Stratigraphic units are rarely 
clear cut, and it is difficult to name and group them in ways that will disclose 
both their relationships in space and their sequences in time. In classifying 
fossils, the paleontologist must contend with the imperfections of the fossil 
record, as well as the variable influences of environmental change and evolu- 
tionary development. 

The greater part of this bibliography was assembled during the summer of 
1962, which will explain why certain publications of more recent date are not 
included. The search for titles began with a scanning of the indexes for all 
issues of the "Bibliography and Index of North American Geology" (1732- 
1959), and of the "Bibliography and Index of Geology Exclusive of North 
America" (1933-1960). The search was continued through the files of "Phil- 
osophy of Science," the "British Journal for the Philosophy of Science," and the 



264 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

''Zentralblatt fur Geologic und Palaontologie." "Isis," \\ith its annual bibli- 
ographies for the history of science, yielded additional material. The bibli- 
ographic card service of the Seiwce flnfot motion Geologiqiie du Bureau de Recheiches 
Geobgiques et Mimbes led to many articles published in Russian journals since 
1960. 

I should like to thank the asjencv which made this work possible and the 
individuals who helped brine it to an end A grant from the National Science 
Foundation permitted me to give three months of concentrated effort to the 
project. Mrs. Robert R. Wheeler did much of the searching for titles and 
assembled the index. Mrs. Natalie Yoshinin also helped with the searching, 
and she translated the Russian articles. To Mrs. Nadine George, Reference 
Librarian of the Science Information Center in Dallas, I am much indebted 
for her patient and fruitful efforts at locating out-of-the-way materials. 

Many friends have called my attention to pertinent references they had run 
across in their own reading. Dr. Arthur F. Hagner graciously sent me a lengthy 
bibliographv of the philosophy of geologv, which he had prepared for his 
advanced students at the University of Illinois. Miss Marie Siegrist has called 
my attention to references which are to appear in future issues of the "Bibliog- 
raphv of Geology Exclusive of North America.'' Mr. Charles Gotschalk, Chief 
of the Stack and Reader Division of the Library of Congress, provided a private 
room for my use during a month of study in Washington. Mrs. Jacquelyn 
Ne\\ bury typed the manuscript and helped with the proofreading. Although 
I am deeply grateful to all these persons, I must say, for their protection, that 
I am solely responsible for the selection and annotation of titles, the design of 
the index, and for any errors. 



Bibliography 



American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1961, Code of strati- 
graphic nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., B., vol. 45, no. 5, 
pp. 645-665. Defines and differentiates rock-stratigraphic, soil-strati- 
graphic, bio-stratigraphic, time-stratigraphic, geologic-time, and geologic- 
climate units. 

AMSTUTZ, GERHARDT CHRISTIAN, 1960, Some basic concepts and thoughts on 
the space- time analysis of rocks and mineral deposits in erogenic belts: 
Geol. Rundschau, vol. 50, pp. 165-189. "The discovery, proof, and 
acceptance of evolution of life was only one victory of the principle of 
endogenesis over 'higher superstition 3 which clung ... to exogenesis. The 
gradual departure of science from alchemistic concepts is essentially a 
development from exo- toward endo-genesis, and of epi- toward syn- 
genesis ..." 

ANDERSON, CHARLES ALFRED, 1951, Older Precambrian structure in Arizona: 
Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 62, no. 11, pp. 1331-1346. An explicit application 
of the principle of simplicity to tectonic history is found on p. 1346. "Until 
more precise correlations of the older Precambrian rocks in Arizona can 
be made . . . the simplest explanation is that only one period of orogeny 
. . . has occurred in Arizona during early Precambrian time." 

ANDREE, KARL ERICH, 1938, Rezente und fossile Sedimente; Erdgeschichte mit 
oder ohne Aktualitatslehre?: Geol. Rundschau, vol. 29, no. 3-5, pp. 147- 
167. "Die Erdgeschichte ... die auch fur den Aktualitatsanhanger . . . 
den Kern geologischer Forschung bildet, vermag der Aktualitatslehre 
nicht zu entraten, ohne iiberhaupt den Boden unter den Fussen zu ver- 
lieren, auf dem sie aufbaut." 

ANDREWS, ERNEST CLAYTON, 1936, Some major problems in structural geology: 
Linnean Soc. New South Wales, Pr., vol. 63, pts. 1-2, no. 275-276, pp. 
iv-xl. "The student of the Newton and Darwin type seeks a simple ex- 
planation of natural phenomena; he knows that there are many ways in 
which, conceivably, a form such as a mountain range may have been 
caused, whereas, in reality, it was produced in only one way . . ." 

265 



266 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

APRODOV, V. A. 5 1961, Osnovnvje cherty filosofskago materializma v geologi- 
cheskikh rabotakh M. V. Lomonosova (Basic features of philosophical 
materialism in the geologic \vorks of M. V. Lomonosovj: Sovet. Geol., 
no. 12, pp. 3-13. Lomonosov's formulation of a materialistic method of 
scientific investigation was as follows: through observations, form a theory; 
through theory, check observations. 

ARKELL, WILLIAM JOSCELYX, 1956, Species and species: Systematics Assoc., 
London, Pub. no. 2 5 pp. 97-99. As conceived by paleontologists, species 
and genera are "purely artificial and subjective categories . . . Thus the 
only logical criterion for the size and definition of the taxon in paleontology- 
is its usefulness." 

2 1956, Comments on stratigraphic procedure and terminology: Am. J. Sci., 

vol. 254, no. 8, pp. 457-46 7 . "In stratigraphic procedure, it is not what 
terms an author uses that matters, but whether he knows what he is talking 
about. If he does, he will be unambiguous however few and simple the 
terms he employs, but if he does not, the more technical terms he uses, 
and the more technical those terms are, the greater will be the danger of 
confusion and misapprehension. 55 

BACKLUND, HELGE G., 1941, Zum Aktualitatsprinzip: Geol. Rundschau, vol. 
32, no. 3, pp. 394-397. 

BAKER, HOWARD BIGELOW, 1938, Inductive logic and Lyellian uniformitarian- 
ism: Michigan Acad. Sci., Sect. Geol. and Miner., pp. 1-5. "In the 
inductive process the more hypotheses the better . . . Contrary to this 
essential . . . the doctrine of uniformitarianism leads to poverty where 
riches are desired.' 5 

BARGHOORN, ELSO STERRENBERG, JR., 1953, Evidence of climatic change in the 
geologic record of plant life, Chapter 20, pp. 235-248 in Harlow Shapley, 
ed., Climatic change; evidence, causes, and effects: Cambridge, Harvard 
Univ. Press, ix and 318 pp. "There are two basic assumptions for the 
paleobotanical interpretation of climatic history. The first of these is that 
plant groups of the past had environmental requirements similar to those 
which they possess today . . . The second ... is that an environmental 
complex of definable climatic and other physical conditions supports a 
biotic population which is in general equilibrium with these conditions . . ." 

BARKER, STEPHEN F., 1961, The role of simplicity in explanation, pp. 265-274 
in Herbert Feigl and Grover Maxwell, eds., Current issues in the phil- 
osophy of science: New York, Holt, Rinehart, and Winston, 484 pp. The 
logical-empiricist view of explanation, "exaggerates the correlation be- 
tween prediction and explanation, . . . exaggerates the contrast between 
theoretical and observational terms in science, and ... by neglecting the 
factor of simplicity it gives no real account of what it is for one explanation 
to be a better explanation than another. 55 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 267 

2 1961, On simplicity in empirical hypotheses: Philosophy of Science, vol. 

28, no. 2, pp. 162-171. ". . . the hypothesis that . . . fossils really are 
remains of primeval organisms is a better hypothesis than is the hypothesis 
that they are not and were created only recently. The former hypothesis 
is better than the latter, not because it fits more facts or enables more pre- 
dictions to be elicited; it is better because it is a simpler hypothesis." 

BARRELL, JOSEPH, 1917, Rhythms and the measurement of geologic time: 
Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 28, pp. 745-904. "The doctrine of uniformitarian- 
ism has ignored the presence of age-long rhythms, and where they were 
obtrusive has sought to smooth them out; but in so doing it has minimized 
the differences between the present and the past, and the constant varia- 
tions within that past. This doctrine should be looked on only as supplying 
a beginning for investigation." 

BARTH, THOMAS FREDRIK WEIBY, 1952, Theoretical petrology: New York, John 
Wiley; London, Chapman and Hall, Ltd., viii and 387 pp. "Now that 
experimental methods have led to the synthesis of minerals and rocks and 
the determination of their thermodynamical constants, petrology has be- 
come physico-chemistry applied to the crust of the earth." 

BAULIG, HENRI, 1938, Questions de terminologie. I. Consequent, subsequent, 
obs6quent; ou cataclinal, monoclinal, anaclinal?: J. Geomorphology, vol. 1 3 
no. 3, pp. 224-229. "... one should never lose sight of the fact that theo- 
retical schemes imply hypotheses, and that the appropriate genetic termin- 
ology is applicable only to the extent that these hypotheses are demon- 
strated to be correct, or else are explicitly admitted as a basis of discussion. 
Otherwise it is better to employ purely descriptive terms." 

2 1949, Causalit6 et finalit6 en g6omorphologie: Geog. Ann., Stockholm, 

vol. 31, no. 1-4, pp. 321-324. Geomorphic explanations are commonly 
colored by anthropomorphism a tacit ascription of motives and aspira- 
tions to the mechanical agencies of erosion and deposition. 

3 1950, William Morris Davis: master of method: Assoc. Am. Geographers, 

Annals, vol. 40, no. 3, pp. 188-195. "Davis* s general method, as, in fact, 
all geological inferences from the present to the past, suffers from a sort of 
congenital weakness: for one term of the analogist argument, i.e., the 
present, can not be taken to represent the 6 normal 5 condition of the 
Earth." 

BECKER, CARL LOTUS, 1932, The heavenly city of the eighteenth-century phil- 
osophers: New Haven, Yale Univ. Press, Yale Paperbound Y-5, 168 pp. 
"Much of what is called science is properly history, the history of biological 
or physical phenomena. The geologist gives us the history of the earth; 
the botanist relates the Me history of plants . . . We cannot properly know 



268 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

things as they are unless we know 6 how they came to be what they are' . . . 
Historical mindedness is so much a preconception of modern thought that 
we can identify a particular thing only by pointing to the various things it 
successively was before it became that thing which it will presently cease 
to be." 

BECKNER, MORTON, 1959, The biological way of thought: New York, Columbia 
Univ. Press, viii and 200 pp. "Scientists are most likely to have recourse 
to historical explanation . . . when present phenomena seem explicable in 
terms of a temporal sequence of past events.' 9 

BELL, WILLIAM CHARLES, 1959, Uniformitarianism or uniformity: Am. Assoc. 
Petroleum Geol., B., vol. 43, no. 12, pp. 2862-2865. "Paradoxically, 
although we give lip-service to an awareness of isochronous but different 
facies when we write theoretically, in practice most of our arguments are 
peripheral to an almost axiomatic declaration that similarity implies 
isochroneity and the greater the similarity the more probable the identity 
in age." 

BELOUSOV, V. V., 1938, "Teoriya zemli' 5 Dzhemsa Gettona (James Hutton's 
''Theory of the Earth" J; Istoriya i Filosofiya Estest\ oznaniya, no. 7-8, 
pp. 156-162. Hutton stated two general propositions which are important 
to the philosophy of geology: (1) in reconstructing the past we can see and 
foresee the results of changes but neither the beginning nor the end of the 
processes which caused them, and (2) geologic time is vastly long in terms 
of ordinary human perspectives. 

BEMMELEN, REIN OUT WILLEM VAN, 1959, Die Methode in der Geologic: Geol. 
Ges. \Vien, Mitt., vol. 53, pp. 35-52. "Unser irdisches System geochem- 
ischer Prozesse ist nicht eine endlose Yerflechtung wiederkehrender Kreis- 
laufe ... Es ist ein Teil einer kosmichen Evolution mit gerichtetem 
Ablauf..." 

2 1961, The scientific character of geology: J. Geol., vol. 69, no. 4, pp. 453- 

463. Geology, essentially an historical science, differs from physics, chem- 
istry, and biology- in that the possibilities for experiment are limited. The 
principle of uniformity and the method of comparative ontology- are 
examples of rules followed in geological practice, but the premises inherent 
in these are not so firmly grounded as are the natural laws of physics and 
chemistry. Thus the geologist must resort to the method of multiple work- 
ing hypotheses to test the greatest number of presuppositions. 

BERINGER, CARL CHRISTOPH, 1954, Geschichte der Geologic und des geolo- 
gischen Weltbildes: Stuttgart, Ferdinand Enke, 158 pp. 

BERKEY, CHARLES PETER, 1933, Recent development of geology as an applied 
science: Am. Phil. Soc., Pr., vol. 72, no. 1, pp. 25-37. 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 269 

BERRY, EDWARD WILBER, 1925, On correlation: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 36, 
no. 1, pp. 263-277. "After all that can be said for them, it remains true 
that classifications are conveniences for reference and mediums of ex- 
change, and chronologic boundaries are quite as artificial as most political 
boundaries and far more subjective." 

2 1929, Shall we return to cataclysmal geology?: Am, J. Sci., 5th ser , vol. 

17, pp. 1-12. "So much nonsense has been written on various so-called 
ultimate criteria for correlation that many have the faith or the wish to 
believe that the interior soul of our earth governs its surface history with a 
periodicity like that of the clock of doom, and when the fated hour strikes 
strata are folded and raised into mountains, epicontinental seas retreat, 
the continents slide about, the denizens of the land and sea become dead 
and buried, and a new era is inaugurated." 

BETHUNE, Pierre de, 1953, Le cycle d 5 erosion: Rev. Questions Sci., an. 66, 
vol. 124 (s. 5, vol. 14) f. 3, pp. 321-346. ". . . la tteorie si fcconde des 
cycles d'6rosion ne constitue qu'une premiere approximation, et . . . seules 
de patientes recherches comparatives permettront d'6difier la theorie 
g6n6rale . . ." 

2 1957, Un demi-sicle de g6omorphologie davisienne: Rev. Questions Sci., 

an. 69, vol. 128 (s. 5, vol. 18) f. 1, pp. 100-111. "La faiblesse cong&iitale 
du davisianisme est dans cette m6thode a priori, e deductive,' de son raison- 
nement. Nonobstant tout ce que les davisiens ont pu 6crire a ce sujet, la 
vraie m6thode de la gomorphologie ... est Pinduction" 

BEURLEN, KARL, 1935, Der Aktualismus in der Geologic, eine Klarstellung- 
Zbl. Miner., 1935, Abt. B., no. 12, pp. 520-525. "Der starkste und nach 
haltigste Verstoss gegen den Dogmatismus in der Geologic war die 
Einfuhrung der aktualistischen Methode. . . . Wenn diese Methode dann 
allerdings zu einem Forschungsprinzip gemacht wurde ... so war das aller- 
dings eine unzulassige Verallgemeinerung und Umwertung der Methode 
zu einem Dogma . . . Dadurch machte sich der Aktualismus selbst dessen 
schuldig, was er zunachst bekampfte." 

2 1935 1936, Zur Kritik des Aktualismus; I. Bedeutung und Aufgabe 

geologischer Forschung; II. Das Klima des Diluviums; III. (with S. 
Thiele) Das Experiment in der Tektonik und seine Bedeutung in der 
Geologic: Zs. gesamte Naturw., vol. 1, pp. 23-36, 209-220; vol. 2, pp. 
49-61. 

BILLINGS, MARLAND PRATT, 1950, Stratigraphy and the study of metamorphic 
rocks: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 61, no. 5, pp. 435-448. In attacking field 
problems, including those involving many metamorphic terranes, strati- 
graphy and structure must be solved simultaneously. 

BLACKWELDER, ELIOT, 1909, The valuation of unconformities: J. Geol., vol. 
17, pp. 289-299. "The entire geological record ... is not to be conceived 



2"0 CLAUDE C ALBRITTOX, JR. 

of as a pile of strata, but as a dovetailed column of wedges, the uncon- 
formities and rock systems being combined in varying proportions. The 
former predominate in some places and periods, while the latter prevail in 
others."' 

BLAKE. RALPH M., DUCASSE, CURT J.. and MADDEN, EDWARD H., 1960, 
Theories of scientific method; the Renaissance through the nineteenth 
century: Seattle, University of Washington Press, iv and 346 pp. Critiques 
of the principle of uniformity of nature as treated in the writings of Newton, 
Hume, Herschel, Mill, and Jevons. 

BLANC, ALBERTO CARLO, 1951, Cosmolyse et epistemologie non-cart6sienne, in 
Sciences de la terre, XXI Cong, internal. Phil. Sci., Paris, 1949: Paris, 
Hermann, pp. 105-122. Distinctive floras and faunas (including the spe- 
cialized human races of so-called 'primitive cultures 5 ;, as the simplified 
derivatives of originally more complex entities, are analogous to the hydro- 
gen atom, which, according to the vie\\s of modern physics, is a simplified 
end-product in the evolution of cosmic matter. 

BLISS, HENRY EVELYN, 1952, A bibliographic classification: New York, H. W. 
Wilson, 2 vols. Astronomy, geology, geography, and meteorology are 
special natural sciences combining concrete and descriptive subject matters 
with theoretical components derived from and dependent upon both 
physics and chemistry. 

BONDI, HERMANN, 1959, Science and structure of the universe: Manchester Lit. 
and Phil. Soc., Mem. and Proc., vol. 101 (1958-1959), pp. 58-71. "I have a 
suspicion (although I would not put it higher than that) that the statement 
of uniformity makes sense in just such a universe as I think we have got, 
which, though it is infinite in extent, yet is effectively finite owing to the 
recessional velocities . . . The assumption [of uniformity] is by no means 
clear in its meaning but empirically it seems by far the most fertile we can 
make." 

2 1961, Cosmology*: Cambridge Monographs on Physics, Cambridge Univ. 

Press, 182 pp. "... in all our physics we have presupposed a certain uni- 
formity of space and time; we have assumed that we live in a world that 
is homogeneous at least as far as the laws of nature are concerned. Hence 
the underlying axiom of our physics makes certain demands on the struc- 
ture of the universe: it requires a cosmological uniformity." 

BRADLEY, WILMOT HYDE, 1948, Limnology and the Eocene lakes of the Rocky 
Mountain region: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 59, no. 7, pp. 635-648. "But 
what is the central theme peculiar to the science of geology that core 
which is not derived from any of the sister disciplines? Perhaps you will 
agree that it is the history and constitution of the earth." 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 271 

BRETSKY, PETER WILLIAM, JR., 1962, Barker on simplicity in historical geology: 
Dallas, Southern Methodist Univ. Press, J. Graduate Research Center, 
vol. 30, no. 1, pp. 45-47. "If Lyellian uniformitarianism ... be a kind of 
notational simplicity, does it not then become trivial?" 

BRIDGMAN, PERCY WILLIAMS, 1959, The way things are: Cambridge, Harvard 
Univ. Press, x and 333 pp. Occam's Razor "appeals to me as a cardinal 
intellectual principle ... I do not know what logical justification can be 
offered for the principle. To me it seems to satisfy a deep seated instinct 
for intellectual good workmanship. Perhaps one of the most compelling 
reasons for adopting it is that thereby one has given as few hostages to the 
future as possible and retained the maximum flexibility for dealing with 
unanticipated facts or ideas." 

BROGGI, JORGE ALBERTO, 1935, Los dominios de la geologia: Bol. Minas, Ind. 
y Constr. (Lima, Peru) s. 3, vol. 7, pp. 13-18. "El tiempo actual en his- 
toria, es un elemento de su constitucion futura; en geologia es la base de 
las investigaciones sobre el pasado." 

BROOM, ROBERT, 1932, Evolution as the palaeontologist sees it: South African 
J. Sci., vol. 29, pp. 54-71. "As evolution has practically finished and can- 
not be repeated unless all higher life is wiped off from the earth and a new 
start made from the very beginning, we may perhaps conclude that man 
is the end to which some power has guided evolution." 

BROUWER, AART, 1957, On the principles of Pleistocene chronology: Geol. en 
Mijnbouw (n.s.) vol. 19, pp. 62-68. "What is it that has induced geologists 
to adopt paleontology as the base of geochronology? Certainly not its 
reliability." 

BROWN, BAHNGRELL WALTER, 1959, Preliminary study of stochastic terms used 
in geology: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 70, no. 5, pp. 651-654. Precision 
would be gained in geological writing if definite ranges of probability 
values were assigned to the following words expressing likelihood: impos- 
sibly, improbably, equally likely, probably, undoubtedly, and possibly. 

2 1961, Stochastic variables of geologic search and decision: Geol. Soc. Am., 

B., vol. 72, no. 11, pp. 1675-1685. Demonstrates that certain problems of 
geologic search and decision can be treated stochastically. 

BRYAN, KIRK, 1950, The place of geomorphology in the geographic sciences: 
Assoc. Am. Geographers Annals, vol. 40, no. 3, pp. 196-208. "The first 
and most natural application of geomorphic study is to the history of the 
earth." 

BUBNOFF, SERGE VON, 1937, Die historische Betrachtungsweise in der Geologic: 
Geistige Arbeit, Berlin, vol. 4, no. 13, pp. 1-3. "Aktualismus bedeutet 



272 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

nicht, dass alles immer ebenso war wie heute, sondern dass Reaktionen 
(physikalische und biologische) derselben Grossenordnung von Raum und 
Zeit unter gleichen Voraussetzungen gleich verlaufen." 

2 (Hans Cloos and Georg Wagner), 1943, \Varum Geologic?: Beitr. Geol. 

Thiiringen, vol. 7, no. 4-5, pp. 191-204. "Diese Verknupfung naturwis- 
senschaftlicher und historischer Denkungs- und Untersuchungsart und 
diese Lebensnahe und 'Bodenstandigkeit' lassen die Geologic fur die 
Schule daher besonders wichtig und not\vendig erscheinen . . ." 

3 1954, Grundprobleme der Geologic, 3rd ed.: Berlin, Akademie-Verlag, 

\ii and 234 pp. "Die Grundfragen, welche dazu formuliert werden miissen, 
waren etwa: Was ist unsere \Vissenschaft, welche Wege verfolgt sie, welche 
Fehler sind in ihrem methodischen Aufbau moglich, was sind ihre End- 
ziele?" 

BUCHER, \\ T ALTER HERMANN, 1936, The concept of natural law in geology: 
Ohio J. Sci., vol. 36, no. 4, pp. 183-194. "Geology is peculiarly dual in 
its aims: on the one hand it is concerned with what happened once at a 
certain place, in individual mines, mountains, regions. Interest that centers 
on individuals is history, not science. As a science, geology is concerned with 
the typical that finds expressions in generalizations, whether they be called 
laws or something else." 

2 1941, The nature of geological inquiry and the training required for it: 

Am. Inst. Min. Met. Eng., Tech. Pub. 1377, 6 pp. "The typical 'geologi- 
cal' processes cannot be studied directly by laboratory methods but only 
indirectly by their results; that is, by the methods of the historical sciences. 
. . . the greater part of all geological work is not primarily concerned with 
'timeless 5 knowledge but with concrete, 'time-bound' reality. It deals not 
with ore bodies, but with this ore body; not with valleys in general, but 
with that valley." 

3 1957, The deformation of the earth's crust; an inductive approach to the 

problems of diastrophism: New York, Hafner, xii and 518 pp. Forty-six 
laws relating to diastrophism are formulated. 

BULOW, KURD VON, 1943, Geschichte und Zukunft der Formationstabelle: 
Neues Jb. Miner., GeoL, u. Palaont., 1943, Abt B., no. 5, pp. 116-130. 
"So entstand die Tabelle nicht eigentlich als Gliederung, Einteilung eines 
Ganzen, sondern dieses Ganze wurde erst durch die stratigraphische Klein- 
arbeit gefugt." 

2 1960, Der Weg des Aktualismus in England, Frankreich und Deutschland: 

GeoL Ges. Deut. Dem. Rep., Ber., vol. 5, no. 3, pp. 160-174. Actualism 
has been interpreted in two different ways: as a presupposition concerning 
the steady course of nature, and as a method for applying the experience 
of the present to the reconstruction of the past. The present tendency 
among geologists is to accept actualism as a useful method rather than as 
an article of faith. 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 273 

BUNGE, MARIO AUGUSTO, 1961, The weight of simplicity in the construction 
and assaying of scientific theories: Philosophy of Science, vol. 28, no. 2, 
pp. 120-149. "Historical theories such as those of geology, evolution 
and human society have a high explanatory power but a small predictive 
power, even counting retrodictions." 

CAILLEUX, ANDRE, and TRICART, JEAN, 1961, Id6alisme, mat&ialisme et ac- 
celeration: Rev. Geomorph. Dynamique, vol. 12, no. 1, pp. 1-2. A defense 
of materialism, in the sense of an empirical approach to geological prob- 
lems. 

CAMP, CHARLES LEWIS, 1952, Geological boundaries in relation to faunal 
changes and diastrophism: J. Paleont, vol. 26, no. 3, pp. 353-358. "Noth- 
ing much can happen to our facts, but fitting these facts together to erect 
. . . systems of biological classification and geological age-dating is an un- 
ending struggle. Awaiting possible refinements in absolute age-dating, we 
are often constrained to fit the facts together, and let the devil take the 
age boundaries of the geological time scale the facts and the boundaries 
don't always coincide." 

CANNON, WALTER F., 1960, The uniformitarian-catastrophist debate: Isis, 
vol. 51, pt. 1, no. 163, pp. 38-55. ". . . if Darwin was deeply indebted to 
Charles Lyell for the method of accounting for large changes by summing 
up small changes over immense periods of time, nevertheless he did not 
accept the general Uniformitarian account of the history of nature. Evolu- 
tion by means of natural selection involves the acceptance of the idea that 
some sort of cumulative development is demonstrated by geological and 
biological evidence and it is just this idea that Uniformitarianism con- 
sistently denied." 

2 1960, The problem of miracles in the 1830's: Victorian Studies, vol. 4, 

no. 1, pp. 5-32. "With their stubborn insistence on the historical nature 
of the cosmos . . . the Catastrophists forced speculation away from Lyell's 
unprogressive position and kept a developmental view of the world alive, 
so that today we popularly describe the history of the world as Whewell 
saw it (but without his miracles), not as Lyell saw it." 

3 1961, John Herschel and the idea of science: J. History of Ideas, vol. 22, 

no. 2, pp. 21 5-239. "It might seem to a modern man that geology is neces- 
sarily a 'historical' science, but Uniformitarianism attempted to make it 
as 'unhistorical, 5 that is to say, as much without development, as possible. 
LyelPs Principles of Geology was the last great codification of a non-develop- 
mental cosmography." 

4 1961, The impact of Uniformitarianism; two letters from John Herschel to 

Charles Lyell, 1836-1837: Am. Phil. Soc., Pr., vol. 105, no. 3, pp. 301-314. 
HerscheFs belief that the Uniformitarian-Catastrophist debate was at base 
inconsequential was incorrect, "since the Uniformitarian antidevelop- 



2"4 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

mental view of the world was quite antithetic to the Catastrophist insistence 
on a world developing geologically from a primitive chaos/ 1 

CARXAP, RUDOLF, 1955, Logical foundations of the unity of science: Chicago, 
Univ. Chicago Press, Int. Encyc. Unified Sci., vol. 1, pts. 1-5, pp. 42-62. 
"Let us take 'physics' as a common name for the non-biological field of 
science, comprehending both systematic and historical investigations with- 
in this field, thus including chemistry, mineralogy, astronomy, geology 
(which is historical), meteorology, etc." 

CASSIRER, ERNST, 1953, An essay on man; an introduction to a philosophy of 
human culture: Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 294 pp. The same logical 
structure characterizes the historical thought of the historian, geologist, 
and paleontologist, but the historian has the unique task of interpreting 
the symbolic content of human documents and monuments. (See Chapter 
10, Historj.) 

CAYEUX, LUCIEN, 1941, Causes anciennes et causes actuelles en geologic: Paris, 
Masson, 79 pp. "II est necessaire de reserver une place des Causes 
anciennes, & c&te des Causes actuelles, dans l'6tude des formations s6di- 
mentaires de P6corce terrestre, si Ton veut faire appel a toutes les lumiferes, 
susceptibles de nous en donner 1' intelligence." 

CHAMBERLIN, THOMAS CHROWDER, 1897, The method of multiple working 
hypotheses: J. Geol., vol. 5, pp. 837-848. c ln developing the multiple 
hypotheses, the effort is to bring up into view every rational explanation 
of the phenomenon in hand and to develop every tenable hypothesis rela- 
tive to its nature, cause or origin, and to give to all of these as impartially 
as possible a working form and a due place in the investigation." 

2 1898, The ulterior basis of time divisions and the classification of geologic 

history: J. Geol., vol. 6, pp. 449-462. "The most vital problem before the 
general geologist today is the question whether the earth's history is 
naturally divided into periodic phases of world-wide prevalence, or 
whether it is but an aggregation of local events dependent upon local 
conditions uncontrolled by overmastering agencies of universal domi- 
nance." 

3 1904, The methods of the earth sciences: Pop. Sci. Monthly, vol. 66, pp. 

66-75. "In some sense the earth sciences must come to comprehend the 
essentials of all the sciences. At least as much as any other scientists we are 
interested in the fundamental assumptions of all the sciences and in their 
consistent application." 

4 1907, Editorial: J. Geol., vol. 15, pp. 817-819. "The cheapest device for 

making the largest show of quasi-results in technical garb with the least 
investment of scientific capital known to our profession is found in giving 
new names to known formations." 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 275 

CHORLEY, RICHARD J., 1957, Illustrating the laws of morphometry: Geol. 
Mag., vol. 94, no. 2, pp. 140-150. "The laws of morphometry are here 
illustrated from three regions of maturely dissected sandstone terrain, 
lacking in differential gross structural control, and it is discovered that 
uniform, dimensionless ratios hold for their geometry." 

CLARKE, JOHN MASON, 1917, The philosophy of geology and the order of the 
state: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 28, pp. 235-248. "Nature makes for the 
individual . . . The ants are nature's . . . highest performance in commu- 
nistic effort and in cooperative achievement." 

CLEMENTS, FREDERIC EDWARD, and SHELFORD, VICTOR E., 1939, Bio-ecology: 
New York, John Wiley, vii and 425 pp. "... the key to the past is fash- 
ioned by the present, to use these terms in their everyday significance. On 
the other hand, the present is the sole heir to the past, and no adequate 
understanding of it is possible without tracing the continuity of develop- 
mental processes from the one to the other." 

CLEUGH, MARY FRANCES, 1937, Time and its importance in modern thought: 
London, Methuen, viii and 308 pp. "'The Past' is a curious entity. Al- 
though changeless ... it yet has a peculiar habit of growing. The possible, 
the general, the abstract: all these are subject to logical determinations 
but . . . when we pass from possibility to actuality, when we come to events 
happening in time, we have left that ideal realm of logic, and have intro- 
duced a radical contingency into the universe." 

CLOUD, PRESTON ERCELLE, JR., 1959, Paleoecology retrospect and prospect: 
J. Paleont., vol. 33, no. 5, pp. 926-962. A review of fundamental concepts 
and problems, with an extensive bibliography. 

COLBERT, EDWIN HARRIS, 1953, The record of climatic changes as revealed by 
vertebrate paleoecology, Chapter 21, pp. 249-271, in Harlow Shapley, 
ed., Climatic change; evidence, causes, and effects: Cambridge, Harvard 
Univ. Press, ix and 318 pp. "We assume that ecological conditions (and 
by extension, climatic conditions as well) were thus and so because of 
the presence of certain animals in the sediments. This assumption rests 
upon a basic precept that must be accepted at the outset, if our interpre- 
tation of past climates upon the evidence of vertebrate paleoecology is to 
have order and validity. The precept is that within wide limits the past 
is to be interpreted in terms of the present." 

COLLINGWOOD, ROBIN GEORGE, 1956, The idea of history: New York, Oxford 
Univ. Press, xxvi and 339 pp. "... whereas science lives in a world of 
abstract universals, which are in one sense everywhere and in another 
nowhere, in one sense at all times and in another at no time, the things 



2"6 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

about which the historian reasons are not abstract but concrete, not uni- 
versal but individual, not indifferent to space and time but having a where 
and a when of their own, though the where need not be here and the when 
cannot be now." 

2 1960, The idea of nature. New York, Oxford Univ. Press, viii and 183 pp. 

"I conclude that natural science as a form of thought exists and always 
has existed in a context of history, and depends on historical thought for 
its existence. From this I venture to infer that no one can understand 
natural science unless he understands history: and that no one can answer 
the question what nature is unless he knows what history is. This is a 
question which Alexander and Whitehead have not asked. And that is 
why I answer the question, c \Vhere do we go from here?' by saying, 'We 
go from the idea of nature to the idea of history/ *' 

COOMBS, D. S., 1957, The growth of the geological sciences^ an inaugural lec- 
ture delivered before the University of Otago on 5 July, 1956: Dunedin, 
New Zealand, Univ. Otago. 19 pp. 

COOPER, GUSTAV ARTHUR, 1958, The science of paleontology: J. Paleont, vol. 
32, no. 5, pp. 1010-1018. Paleontology is essentially a biological science 
embracing six disciplines: morphologv, taxonomy, evolution, distribution 
of fossils in space, paleoecology, and correlation. 

COTTA, BERNHARD vox, 1874, Die Geologic der Gegenwart: Leipzig, J. J. 
Weber, xii and 450 pp. "Die Mannigfaltigkeit der Erscheinungsformen ist 
eine nothwendige Folge der Summierung von Resultaten aller Einzel- 
vorgange, die nacheinander eingetreten sind . . ." 

CRICKMAV, COLIN HAYTER, 1959, A preliminary inquiry into the formulation 
and applicability of the geological principle of uniformity: Calgary, 
Alberta, privately printed, iii and 50 pp. "Uniformity as a principle was 
originally conceived as a rupture with the older notion of geomorphic 
immutability, and was therefore in essence a theory of uniformity of 
change . . . The law of uniformity of the essence of things geologic must 
include, in order to be general, the possibility of wider variation of causes 
and effects than any so far assigned." 

DALY, REGINALD ALD WORTH, 1910, Some chemical conditions in the pre- 
Cambrian ocean: llth Internat. Geol. Cong., Stockholm, C. R., vol. 1, 
pp. 503-509. "... a strictly uniformitarian view of the ocean's history 
must be in error; ... its evolution has, on the whole, meant progress 
from a relatively fresh condition to the present saline condition . . ." 

2 1945, Biographical memoir of William Morris Davis: Nat. Acad. Sci. 

Biog. Mem., vol. 23, llth Mem., pp. 263-303. "Valuable as it is, the 
scheme of the erosion cycle is not so important for research in earth science 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 277 

as the underlying philosophy, which makes deduction no whit inferior to 
induction in the tool-chest of the naturalist." 

DAVIS, WILLIAM MORRIS, 1895, Bearing of physiography on uniformitarianism 
(Abs.): Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 7, pp. 8-11. "Uniformitarianism, reason- 
ably understood, is not a rigid limitation of past processes to the rates of 
present processes, but a rational association of observed effects with compe- 
tent causes. Events may have progressed both faster and slower in the 
past than during the brief interval which we call the present, but the past 
and present events differ in degree and not in kind." 

2 1904, The relations of the earth sciences in view of their progress in the 

nineteenth century: J. Geol., vol. 12, pp. 669-687. "Geology objectively 
considered is not merely one of the earth's sciences; it is the whole of them: 
it is the universal history of the earth." 

3 1926, The value of outrageous geological hypotheses: Science, n.s., vol. 63, 

pp. 463-468. "The very foundation of our science is only an inference; 
for the whole of it rests on the unprovable assumption that, all through 
the inferred lapse of time which the inferred performance of inferred geo- 
logical processes involves, they have been going on in a manner consistent 
with the laws of nature as we know them now." 

4 1926, Biographical memoir Grove Karl Gilbert, 1843-1918: Nat. Acad. 

Sci. Biog. Mem., vol. 21, 5th Mem., v and 303 pp. Gilbert's laws of erosion 
are discussed on pp. 49-50, and his views of scientific method on pp. 145- 
148. 

5 1954, Geographical essays (edited by Douglas Wilson Johnson): New 

York, Dover Publications, vi and 777 pp. 

DAWSON, Sir JOHN WILLIAM, 1894, Some recent discussions in geology: Geol. 
Soc. Am., B., vol. 5, pp. 101-116. "Dead materialistic uniforrnitarianism, 
should it ever become the universal doctrine of science, would provoke a 
reaction in the human mind which would be itself a cataclysm." 

DEER, WILLIAM ALEXANDER, 1953, Trends in petrology: Manchester Lit. and 
Phil. Soc., Mem. and Pr., vol. 94 (1952-1953) pp. 63-92. The petrologist 
"is presented with end products that have attained their present state 
after many changes both in space and time. The basic problem is to un- 
ravel this complex and ever-changing time-space pattern. Although this 
is the essence of all science, it is much more the everyday province of 
geology than of the other sciences. Most sciences start with the raw ma- 
terial; the geologist is presented with the finished product and, unlike the 
biologist, his material is not alive but dead. It is his job to make it live." 

DEEVEY, EDWARD SMITH, JR., 1944, Pollen analysis and Mexican archeology: 
an attempt to apply the method: Am. Antiquity, vol. 10, no. 2, pp. 134- 
149. "On the whole, then, Occam's principle of economy of hypotheses 



2^8 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

compels us to hold in abeyance, for the moment, so detailed an applica- 
tion of the 'climatic factor" in human history, but this would not destroy 
the usefulness of slight changes of vegetation or climate as chronological 
markers in a pollen sequence." 

2 1953, Paleolimnology and climate, Chapter 22, pp. 273-318 in Harlow 

Shapley, ed., Climatic change; evidence, causes, and effects: Cambridge, 
Harvard Univ. Press., ix and 318 pp. fcS In the study of lakes, which are 
the eco-systems that lend themselves most readilv to the kind of analysis 
that does not lose sight of their essential wholeness, the geologist and the 
ecologist can collaborate most happily. One knows that the present is 
the key to the past, the other knows that the past is the key to the present, 
and each can think of the other as the captive expert. 5 ' 

DE GOLYER, EVERETTE LEE, 1948, Science a method, not a field: Norman, 
Univ. of Oklahoma Press, 15 pp. "... we may be somewhat pragmatical 
and accept as truth that which is conformable with fact \\ithin our present 
understanding.'" 

DEM AY, ANDRE, 1951, Observation, interpretation et th6orie en geologic, in 
Sciences de la terre, XXI Cong. Internat. Phil. Sci., Paris, 1949: Paris, 
Hermann, pp. 41-54. In geology, where the more difficult problems are 
those of genesis or evolution, a theory generally attempts to reconstruct a 
sequence of phenomena and to disclose in these phenomena the workings 
of mechanical, physical, or chemical laws. 

DINGLE, HERBERT, 1955, Philosophical aspects of cosmology, in Arthur Beer, 
ed., Vistas in astronomy: Oxford, Pergamon Press, vol. 1, pp. 162-166. 
". . . we cannot grant the inaccessible past freedom to sow its wild oats as 
it pleases . . .; it must to some extent conform to the pattern on which we 
organize the present behavior of the universe." 

DYLIK, JAN, 1953, Caracteres du developpement de la g6omorphologie mo- 
derne: Soc. Sci. et Lettres L6dz, CL III, B., vol. 4, no. 3, 40 pp. 

EBERT, HEINZ, 1953, Petrologie im kristallinen Praekambrium, genetisch oder 
historisch?: 19th Internat. Geol. Cong., Algiers, 1952, C.R., sec. 1, fasc. 1, 
pp. 81-87. "With respect to the e precambrian shields' certain petrological 
mistakes remain hidden because of the widely spread misunderstanding 
that the genetical viewpoint of petrologists is [the] equivalent of the 
historical one of geologists. . . . Instead of attributing a genetical 'expla- 
nation' to rocks, one must consider them as products of a long and com- 
plicated evolution . . ." 

EISLEY, LOREN COREY, 1958, Darwin's century; evolution and the men who 
discovered it: Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, xvii and 378 pp. "If there 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 279 

is one mind that deserves to rank between the great astronomical geniuses 
of the seventeenth century and Charles Darwin in the nineteenth, it is 
James Hutton ... He discovered an intangible thing against which the 
human mind had long armored itself. He discovered, in other words, 
time time boundless and without end, the time of the ancient Easterners 
but in this case demonstrated by the very stones of the world ..." 

EMMONS, EBENEZER, 1855, American geology, containing a statement of the 
principles of the science with full illustrations of the characteristic American 
fossils, with an atlas and a geological map of the United States, vol. 1, 
pt. 1 : Albany, N. Y., Sprague, J. Munsell, xvi and 194 pp. Cw Each period 
then is a fragment; but the present is a greater fragment than all the past 
put together." 

ENGELS, FRIEDRICH, 1940, Dialectics of nature; Translated and edited by 
Clemens Dutt, with a preface and notes by J. B. S. Haldane: New York, 
International Publishers, xvi and 383 pp. "The defect of Lyell's view 
at least in its first form lay in conceiving the forces at work on the earth 
as constant, both in quality and quantity. The cooling of the earth does 
not exist for him; the earth does not develop in a definite direction but 
merely changes in an inconsequent fortuitous manner." 

FAIRCHILD, HERMAN LE ROY, 1904, Geology under the planetesimal hypothesis 
of earth origin (with discussion): Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 15, pp. 243-266. 
"Geologists have been too generous in allowing other people to make their 
philosophy for them." 

FEIGL, HERBERT, 1943, Logical empiricism, pp. 373-416 in Dagobert David 
Runes, ed., Twentieth Century Philosophy: New York, Philosophical 
Library, 571 pp. "If all a priori knowledge is analytic, then we cannot 
deduce a synthetic assertion, like the principle of the uniformity of nature, 
from a priori premises. And if we try to validate induction on the basis of 
its certainly eminent success in the past, we are simply making an induction 
about induction and thus presuppose the very principle we set out to 
prove." 

FEUER, LEWIS SAMUEL, 1957, The principle of simplicity: Philosophy of Science, 
vol. 34, pp. 109-122. The metascientific and methodologic principles of 
simplicity are independent concepts, the latter being no more than a 
special case of the principle of verifiability. 

2 1959, Rejoinder on the principle of simplicity: Philosophy of Science, 

vol. 26, pp. 43-45. "... if we are going to make scientific statements 
concerning the distant past or future, the only way we can do so is by an 
extrapolative use of the known laws of nature. As applied to the past, this 
is precisely what historical geology does." 



280 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

FISHER, Sir RONALD AYLMER, 1954, The expansion of statistics: Am. Scientist, 
vol. 42, no. 2, pp. 2"5-282, 293. Some of the greatest advances of the 
nineteenth century were accomplished by the application of statistical 
ideas. A case in point is L veil's subdivision of the Tertiary sequence ac- 
cording to the percentage of fossil species with living descendants. But 
the statistical argument "by which this revolution in geological science 
was effected was almost immediately forgotten ... It had served its pur- 
pose; the ladder by which the height had been scaled could be kicked 
down." 

FLETT, Sir JOHN SMITH, 1940, Pioneers of British geology: Roy. Soc. New- 
South Wales, J. Pr., 1939 5 vol. 73, pt. 2, pp. 41-66. ". . . though it is recog- 
nised that there are limitations to its application, the general principle 
holds good that the explanation of the past history of the earth must first 
be sought in the processes that we see going on around us at the present 
day/ 5 

FRANKEL, CHARLES, 1957, Explanation and interpretation in history: Phil- 
osophy of Science, vol. 24, pp. 137-155. ". . . it seems to be the case some- 
times that when we ask for an explanation of a given phenomenon, what 
we want, and are satisfied to get, is an account of the stages of a process, 
the last stage of which is the phenomenon in the shape in which it exhibits 
those traits about which we have asked our question. This is one of the 
stable and accepted meanings of "explanation* in ordinary usage." 

FREYBERG, BRUNO VON, et al., 1938, Fragen der geologischen Ausbildung: 
Deut. Geol. Ges., Zs., vol. 90, no. 3, pp. 148-166. "Fur jede Ausbildung 
muss leitend sein, dass es Erdgeschichte ist, was wir treiben, keine Erd- 
beschreibung." 

Fu, C. Y., 1948, Methods and problems of geophysics: Chinese Geophys. Soc., 
J., vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 1-15. "There are ... scientists who believe that 
natural laws tend to be simple and natural phenomena . . . inherently 
uniform. It is perhaps wise to aim at simplicity, but there is no a priori 
reason why nature should be so characterized. The fact is that simplicity 
and complexity alternate as science progresses . . ." 

GALBRAITH, F. W., ed., 1961, What is geology?: Univ. Arizona, Studies in 
Geology, vol. 1, 36 pp. Contains eleven articles on the scope of geology 
and the interrelationship of the principal geological specialties. 

GALLIE, WALTER BRYCE, 1955, Explanations in history and the genetic sciences: 
Mind, vol. 64, pp. 160-180. "... a characteristically genetic explanation 
emphasizes the one-way passage of time what came earlier explains, in 
the genetic sense, what came later, and not vice versa. In other words the 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 281 

prior event is not taken, in conjunction with certain universal laws, to 
constitute both a sufficient and a necessary condition of the occurrence of 
the subsequent event." 

GEIKIE, Sir ARCHIBALD, 1893, Geological change, and time: Smithsonian Inst., 
Ann. Kept., 1892, pp. 111-131. "Lord Kelvin is willing, I believe, to 
grant us some twenty millions of years, but Professor Tait would have us 
content with less than ten millions . . . After careful reflection on the sub- 
ject, I affirm that the geological record furnishes a mass of evidence which 
no arguments drawn from other departments of nature can explain away, 
and which, it seems to me, can not be satisfactorily interpreted save with 
an allowance of time much beyond the narrow limits which recent physical 
speculation would concede." 

2 1897, The founders of geology: London, Macmillan, x and 297 pp. Traces 

the evolution of geological thought from 1750 to 1820. 

GIGNOUX, MAURICE, 1951, Le rdle jou6 par les sciences de la terre dans nos 
r6presentations de la mature, in Sciences de la terre, XXI Cong. Internal. 
Phil. Sci., Paris, 1949: Paris, Hermann, pp. 123-129. The physical and 
dynamical properties which determine the mechanics of the deformation 
which a given substance will exhibit vary according to the scale of time 
employed by the investigator. 

GILBERT, GROVE KARL, 1886, The inculcation of scientific method by example, 
with an illustration drawn from the Quaternary geology of Utah: Am. J. 
Sci., 3d ser., vol. 31 (whole no. 131), pp. 284-299. A natural phenomenon 
generally has multiple antecedents and consequents, the linear chains of 
which are plexiform. To discover the antecedents of phenomena, hy- 
potheses are invented and tested. The reasoning involved in devising and 
testing hypotheses is analogical. 

2 1896, The origin of hypotheses, illustrated by the discussion of a topo- 
graphic problem: Science, n.s., vol. 3, pp. 1-13. ". . . hypotheses are 
always suggested through analogy. The unexplained phenomenon on 
which the student fixes his attention resembles in some of its features 
another phenomenon of which the explanation is known." 

GILLISPIE, CHARLES COULSTON, 1951, Genesis and geology, a study in the rela- 
tions of scientific thought, natural theology and social opinion in Great 
Britain, 1790-1850: Cambridge, Harvard Univ. Press, xiii and 315 pp. 
"Geology . . . was the first science to be concerned with the history of 
nature rather than its order . . . That its historical character made geology 
a different sort of science was appreciated from the beginning of its de- 
velopment. Doubts were sometimes expressed as to whether it could prop- 
erly be called a science at all. Since the geologist, like the historian, 
had to rely largely on ancient relics and monuments of change, his conclu- 



282 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

sions were thought to be debatable in a way that those of the physicist, 
for example, were not." 

GILLULY, JAMES, 1949, Distribution of mountain building in geologic time: 
Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 60, no. 4, pp. 561-590. "... I can see no grounds 
whatever for assuming any increased tempo for diastrophism during post- 
Lipalian time. The uniformitarianism of Lyell seems not yet to require any 
of the amendments that have been suggested." 

GOGUEL, JEAN, 1948, La place de la g6ophysique parmi les disciplines geo- 
logiques: Geol. Applique et Prosp. Min., no. 2, pp. 123-135. "Certes 
dans 1'ere de la gtophysique nous faisons des mesures, mais ce que nous 
mesurons, ce n'est pas, ce n'est jamais ce que nous voudrions deviner." 

2 1951, La geologic, science naturelle ou science physique?, in Sciences de la 

terre, XXI Cong. Internat. Phil. ScL, Paris, 1949: Paris, Hermann, 
pp. 7-15. From the physical sciences, geology is distinguished by its his- 
torical method. The historical reconstructions of geology must, however, 
be in accord with the physical, chemical, and mechanical laws, which are 
presumed to be permanent. 

GOLD, THOMAS, 1956, Cosmology-, in Arthur Beer, ed.. Vistas in astronomy: 
London and New York, Pergamon Press, vol. 2, pp. 1721-1726. "The 
postulate of simplicity is sometimes so firmly in our minds that it is hard to 
recognize; but it is quite certain that it is a postulate of the greatest im- 
portance and that without it scientific progress, through the generalization 
of known facts, would be impossible." 

GOODCHILD, JOHN GEORGE, 1896, Some geological evidence regarding the age 
of the earth: Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinburgh, Pr., vol. 13 (1896-1897), pp. 259- 
308. ". . . the fundamental idea which a geologist steadily keeps in mind 
is that all changes, physical and biological, which the records of the rocks 
inform us have taken place on the Earth in the Past, can only be under- 
stood and properly interpreted by reference to changes of the same nature 
which are known to be in progress during the Present. This, of course, 
does not imply absolute uniformitarianism (as this is commonly under- 
stood) but allows for catastrophism in certain exceptional cases, along with 
normal uniformity of action in the rest." 

GOODMAN, NELSON, 1943, On the simplicity of ideas: J. Symbolic Logic, vol. 8, 
no. 4, pp. 107-121. "The most economical idea, like the most economical 
engine, is the one that accomplishes most by using least." 

2 1955, Fact, fiction and forecast: Cambridge, Harvard Univ. Press., 126 pp. 

"The typical writer begins by insisting that some way of justifying predic- 
tions must be found; proceeds to argue that for this purpose we need some 
resounding universal law of the Uniformity of Nature, and then inquires 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 283 

how this universal principle itself can be justified . . . Such an invention 
. . . seldom satisfies anyone else; and the easier course of accepting an 
unsubstantiated and even dubious assumption much more sweeping than 
any actual predictions we make seems an odd and expensive way of 
justifying them." 

3 1958, The test of simplicity: Science, vol. 128, no. 3331, pp. 1064-1069. 

"Nothing could be more mistaken than the traditional idea that we first 
seek a true system and then, for the sake of elegance alone, seek a simple 
one. We are inevitably concerned with simplicity as soon as we are con- 
cerned with system at all; for system is achieved just to the extent that the 
basic vocabulary and set of first principles used in dealing with the given 
subject matter are simplified." 

GORDEEV, D. I., 1960, Znachenije filosofskikh trudov V. I. Lenina dlya geologii 
(The meaning of V. I. Lenin's philosophical works for geology): Moscow 
Univ., Vest., ser. 4, GeoL, no. 4, pp. 3-7. Geology, more than any other 
science, deals with cyclic phenomena; but this same periodicity, if not 
approached from Lenin's viewpoint, will acquire a metaphysical and anti- 
historical character, as can be seen in certain foreign writings. 

2 1961, Stikhiinaya materialisticheskaya dialektika v geologicheskikh so- 

chineniyakh M. V. Lomonosova (Dialectical materialism in the works of 
M. V. Lomonosov): Moscow Univ., Vest., Geol., no. 5, pp. 7-26. In 
1763, Lomonosov introduced the principle of actualism in geology. Be- 
cause he perceived that the earth is evolving in a definite direction, his 
uniformitarianism was more substantial than Lyell's. 

GORDON, WILLIAM THOMAS, 1934, Plant life and the philosophy of geology: 
British Assoc. Adv. Sci., Rept., 1934, pp. 49-82. "Taking everything we 
know into consideration, the general consensus of opinion is that plants 
do afford an index of climatic changes, and that these changes have been 
very considerable in past time." 

GOUDGE, THOMAS ANDERSON, 1958, Causal explanations in natural history: 
British J. Phil. Sci., vol. 9, no. 35, pp. 194-202. "... the model of a hier- 
archical deductive system, so often presented as the ideal to which the 
theoretical part of every science should approximate, is not relevant to the 
sciences concerned with natural history, however much it is relevant to 
non-historical sciences." 

2 1961, The genetic fallacy: Synthese, vol. 13, no. 1, pp. 41-48. Geology, 

paleontology and other studies with a concern for historical development 
regularly and justifiably make use of genetic explanations. Fallacies are 
introduced in such explanations when temporal order is confused with 
logical order, when it is assumed that a genetic explanation says all there 
is to say about the phenomenon hi question, when it is assumed that the 
phenomenon to be explained is simply the summation rather than the out- 



284 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

come of its antecedent stages, and when a trivial but necessary condition 
of a highly developed state is treated as if it were a sufficient condition of 
that state. 

3 1961, The ascent of life: a philosophical study of the theory of evolution: 

Toronto, Univ. Toronto Press, 263 pp. *\ . . the doctrine of evolution 
would fail to be intelligible unless the uniformiiarian principle describes 
what is the case.'" 1 

GOULD, R. P , 195 7 , The place of historical statements hi biology: British J 
Phil. Sci., vol. 8, pp. 192-210. "Retrodictions are obviously not as con- 
vincing as predictions as confirmation or falsification of an explanatory 
hypothesis because a Statement about the Past (which is largely hypo- 
thetical) is being used as though it were an observation record." 

GRABAU, WARREN EDWARD, 1960, Geology as an historical tool: Gulf Coast 
Assoc Geol. Societies, Tr., vol. 10, pp. 87-91. As a reconstructive art, 
geologv is potentially applicable to any field of human effort concerned 
with the reconstruction of the past. Examples are given of historical events 
in the Civil War which are explicated in terms of geological evidence. 

GREENE, JOHN COLTON, 1959, The death of Adam; evolution and its impact 
on Western thought: Ames, Iowa, Iowa State Univ. Press, 338 pp. "... the 
explanation of terrestrial phenomena must be sought in the everyday 
workings of nature, not in cataclysmic events. This was the basic principle 
of umforrmtariamsm, the foundation stone of modern geology . . ." 

GRENE, MARJORIE, 1958, Two evolutionary theories: British J. Phil. Sci., 
vol. 9, no. 34, pp. 110-127; no. 35, pp. 185-193. "... instead of Ockham's 
razor we might adopt as a test of theories of evolution the opposite prin- 
ciple: that entities, or more generally perhaps aspects of reality . . . should 
not be subtracted beyond what is honest. In the light of this principle, we 
should ask of any theory of evolution, does it pretend to do without con- 
cepts which in fact it does not do without." 

GRESSLY, AMANZ, 1838, Observations geologiques sur le Jura soleurois: Allgem. 
Schweiz. Ges. f. d. gesammten Naturwiss., Neue Denkschr., vol. 2, 349 
pp. "Et d'abord il est deux faits principaux, qui charact&isent partout 
les ensembles de modifications que j'appelle facies ou aspects de terrain: 
Fun consiste en ce que tel ou tel aspect petrographique fun terrain quelconque 
suppose necessairement, partout oil il se rencontre, le meme ensemble paleontologique; 
Fautre, en ce que tel ou tel ensemble paleontologique exclut rigoureusement des 
genres et des especes de fossiles frequents dans d 9 autres facies" 

GRIFFITHS, JOHN CEDRIG, 1960, Aspects of measurement in the geosciences: 
Mineral Industries, vol. 29, no. 4, pp. 1, 4-5, 8. "The natural sciences lie 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 285 

somewhere between the 'precise' sciences and the 'imprecise' sciences and 
possess some of the advantages and disadvantages of both; indeed, because 
of this transitional position, the procedures utilized in the natural sciences 
may benefit from an analysis using logical procedures from both 'hard' 
and 'soft' sciences." 

GUNTER, GORDON, 1953, The development of ecology and its relationship to 
paleontology: Texas J. Sci., vol. 5, no. 2, pp. 137-147. ". . . all paleo- 
ecology is based upon the fundamental assumption that any given group 
of organisms lived in the past in an environment essentially similar to 
that in which they or their counterparts live today. The validity of this 
assumption is borne out by the fact that students of entirely different 
groups of organisms check each other in their paleoecological interpreta- 
tions." 

GUTENBERG, BENO, 1937, Geophysics as a science: Geophysics, vol. 2, no. 3, 
pp. 185-187. 

HAARMANN, ERICH, 1935, Urn das geologische Weltbild, malleo et mente: Stutt- 
gart, Ferdinand Enke, xi and 108 pp. "Diese universale Bedeutung der 
Geologie muss uns nicht nur anspornen, eifrig an der Losung der vielen 
geologischen Probleme weiterzuarbeiten, sondern auch veranlassen, unsere 
Forschungsergebmsse in emer verstandlichen und klaren Sprache mitzuteilen, die 
jeder Gebildete verstehen kann. Nur so ist es moglich, dass die Geologie der 
Menschheit dort dient, wo sie ihr unentbehrlich ist: als Grundstein fur das 
gesamte Weltbild der Menschheit" 

HABER, FRANCIS COLIN, 1959, The age of the world: Moses to Darwin: Balti- 
more, Johns Hopkins Press, xi and 303 pp. "It seems to me that the 
constant pressure of the Christian view of historical process on views of 
natural process helped to preserve a genetic outlook in terms of concrete, 
actualistic time. It was largely a matter of conditioning and prejudice 
during the sixteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, but it held the 
potential in readiness until the geologists discovered the real chronology 
of the earth in fossil strata ..." 

HACK, JOHN TILTON, 1960, Interpretation of erosional topography in humid 
temperate regions: Am. J. Sci., vol. 258-A (Bradley Volume), pp. 80-97. 
"The theory of dynamic equilibrium explains topographic forms and the 
difference between them in a manner that may be said to be independent 
of time." 

HALDANE, JOHN BURDON SANDERSON, 1944, Radioactivity and the origin of life 
in Milne's cosmology: Nature, vol. 153, no. 3888, p. 555. Milne's cos- 
mological theory permits description of events in terms of two different 



286 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR 

time scales, which have different implications for geologic history. Use of 
a time scale based on a finite past and Euclidean space implies that the 
rate at which energy- has been liberated through subatomic or chemical 
change has been constant. Use of a scale based on hyperbolic space im- 
plies, conversely, that in the geological past chemical change was less 
efficient as a source of mechanical energy- than it is now or will be in the 
future. 

2 1949, Human evolution: past and future. Chapter 22, pp. 405-418, in 

Glenn L. Jepsen, Ernst Mayr, and George Gaylord Simpson, eds., Genet- 
ics, paleontoiogv, and evolution: Princeton, Princeton Univ. Press, xiv 
and 4"4 pp. "We are polymorphic not onlv in our aesthetic but in our 
intellectual abilities Ways of describing the world as different as analytical 
and projective geometry may be equally true, even if at present one human 
mind cannot accept more than one of them at a time." 

3 1956, Can a species concept be justified?: Systematics Assoc., London, 

Pub. no. 2, pp. 95-96. A species is a name given to a group of organisms 
as a matter of convenience and necessity. "... the concept of a species is 
a concession to our linguistic habits and neurological mechanisms." 

HALL, J^MES, 1883, Contributions to the geological history of the American 
continent: Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Pr., 1882, vol. 31, pp. 29-69. "The 
grand problem of geology- is the entire history, chemical, physical, zoologi- 
cal and botanical, of the groups of strata constituting the formations of the 
globe." 

HAMEISTER, ERNST, 1935, Cbersichtstabelle der Methoden der angewandten 
Geophvsik in der praktischen Geologic: Zs. prakt. Geol., vol. 43, no. 2, 
pp. 26-29. Shows in tabular form how different geophysical methods 
electrical, seismic, magnetic, and gravimetric may be used to investigate 
various geological phenomena. 

HARRASSOWITZ, HERMANN, 1936, Die Grenzen geologischer Erkenntnis: Forsch. 
u. Fortschr., Berlin, vol. 12, no. 28, pp. 355-357. "Bei dieser ontologischen 
Methode oder der Anwendung des Grundsatzes des Aktualismus ist 
natiirlich nie der Beweis zu erbringen, dass in der geologischen Vergangen- 
heit Gesteine nicht auch unter anderen Umstanden entstanden sind." 

2 1936, Die Grenzen geologischer Erkenntnis in ihrer Bedeutung fur Geo- 
logic und Bergbau: Metall u. Erz, vol. 33, no. 16, pp. 425-431. "Geo- 
logische Schliisse geschichtlicher Art bleiben immer nur Annahmen, die 
niemals als Tatsachen erweisbar sind." 

HARRLNGTON, JOHN WILBUR, and HAZLEWOOD, E. L., 1962, Comparison of 
Bahaman land forms with depositional topography of Nena Lucia dune- 
reef-knoll, Nolan County, Texas: study in uniformitarianism: Am. Assoc. 
Petroleum Geol., B., vol. 46, no. 3, pp. 354-373. The development of 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 287 

present land forms in the Bahamas is taken as a basis for explaining the 
growth of a reef-knoll in the sub-surface Pennsylvanian of the Midland 
Basin in Texas. 

HAUGHTON, SIDNEY HENRY, 1957, The geophysicist and some geological prob- 
lems: Roy. Soc. S. Africa, Tr., vol. 35, pt. 2, pp. 59-69. "Observations are 
still the backbone of the science of geology: but to those made by the eye 
in the field or in the petrological, mineralogical, and palaeontological 
laboratories we now add the observations made by the varied types of 
instrument that the physicist has placed at our disposal." 

HAWKES, LEONARD, 1957-1958, Some aspects of the progress of geology in the 
last fifty years; I: Geol. Soc. London, Quart. J., vol. 113, pp. 309-321, 
1957; II: ibid., vol. 114, pp. 395-410, 1958. Uniformitarians, in the 
Lyellian sense, are back again in force, although it is not yet clear how 
atmospheric oxygen or Precambrian jaspillite banded ironstone cam be 
explained according to the dictum that the present is the key to the past. 

HAWKINS, HERBERT LEADER, 1936, Palaeontology and humanity: British Assoc. 
Adv. Sci., Rept., 1936, pp. 57-80. "Just as a net has been described as a 
set of holes held together with string, so a series of strata must often repre- 
sent a succession of non-sequences separated by films of sediment." 

2 1938, Humanity in geological perspective: British Assoc. Adv. Sci., Rept., 

1938, pp. 546-556. "The hoary imposture of the accuracy of the 'exact' 
sciences still deludes mankind, through the wildly illogical belief that a 
rigidly logical argument must reach a correct result whatever errors may 
have existed in the premisses on which it is based." 

HEDBERG, HOLLIS Dow, 1948, Time-stratigraphic classification of sedimentary 
rocks: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 59, no. 5, pp. 447-462. ". . . man's . . . need 
to apply an arbitrary and strictly delimited classificatory system to what 
in Nature is frequently a continuous process or gradual change in charac- 
ters results from the clamoring of the human mind for steps on which to 
rest as a relief from the more precarious footing of the continuous slope 
which often more correctly represents these natural relations." 

2 1959, Towards harmony in stratigraphic classification: Am. J. Sci., vol. 

257, no. 10, pp. 674-683. "Stratigraphic classification is the systematic 
zonation of the strata of the earth's crust with reference to any of the 
properties or attributes which rock strata may possess." 

HEMPEL, CARL GUST A v, 1942, The function of general laws in history: J. Phil., 
vol. 39, no. 1, pp. 35-48. "In history as anywhere else in empirical science, 
the explanation of a phenomenon consists in subsuming it under general 
empirical laws; and the criterion of its soundness is not whether it appeals 
to our imagination, whether it is presented in suggestive analogies, or is 



288 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

otherwise made to appear plausible . . . but exclusively \vhether it rests 
on empirically well confirmed assumptions concerning initial conditions 
and general laws." 

2 1958, The theoretician's dilemma, a study in the logic of theory construc- 
tion; ZTZ H. Feigl, M. Scriven and G. Maxwell, eds., Minnesota Studies in 
the Philosophy of Science, vol. 2: Minneapolis, Univ. Minnesota Press, 
pp. 37-98. "Scientific explanation, prediction, and postdiction all have 
the same logical character: they show that the fact under consideration 
can be inferred from certain other facts by means of specified general 
laws." 

HENBEST, LLOYD GEORGE, 1952, Significance of evolutionary explosions for 
diastrophic division of earth history (Introduction to a symposium on the 
distribution of evolutionary explosions in geologic time): J. Paleont., 
vol. 26, pp. 299-318. "Without intending to deny that rhythm or vibra- 
tion is a common characteristic of natural processes, it is evident that the 
theorizing on rhythm in nature has outrun the facts and possibly its 
actual importance." 

HERSCHEL, Sir JOHN FREDERICK WILLIAM, 1831, A preliminary discourse on the 
study of natural philosophy, in The cabinet of natural philosophy con- 
ducted by the Rev. Dionysius Lardner: Philadelphia, Carey and Lea, 
279 pp. "... geologists have no longer recourse, as formerly, to causes 
purely hypothetical . . . ; but rather endeavor to confine themselves to a 
consideration of causes evidently in action at present, with a view to ascer- 
tain how far they, in the first instance, are capable of accounting for the 
facts observed, and thus legitimately bringing into view, as residual 
phenomena, those effects which cannot be so accounted for." 

2 1841, Whewell on inductive sciences: Quart. Rev. (London), vol. 68, pp. 

177-238. "The most strenuous advocate for the exclusion of paroxysmal 
epochs will not contend for perfect uniformity so long as earthquakes are 
not of daily occurrence . . . : and the question as to what is and what is 
not paroxysm, to what extent the excursion from repose or gentle oscilla- 
tion may go without incurring the epithet of a catastrophe, is one of mere 
degree, and of no scientific importance whatsoever." 

HOLDER, HELMUT, 1950, Geologic und Palaontologie in Texten und ihre 
Geschichte: Munich, Karl Alber Freiburg, xviii and 566 pp. A source 
book for geology- and paleontology. Part 1, the last three sections of part 3, 
and part 4 are given largely to philosophical citations. Lengthy bibli- 
ography. 

HOFF, KARL ERNST ADOLF VON, 1822-1841, Geschichte der durch Uberlieferung 
nachgewiesenen natiirlichen Veranderungen der Erdoberflache: Gotha, 
Justus Perthes (vols. 1-3), H. Berghaus (vols. 4-5). ". . . iiberwiegende 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 289 

Griinde erlauben nicht nur, sondern fordern sogar, dass man die Veran- 
derungen, die man auf der Erdoberflache wahrgenommen hat, und noch 
wahrnimmt, nicht nur als auf einzelne Theile und Gegenden derselben 
beschrankt betrachten muss, sondern auch dass man sie keinen ausseror- 
dentlichen Naturwirkungen, welche aufgehort haben, sondern allein der 
Wirkung derjenigen Krafte zuschreiben darf, durch die man noch jetzt 
alle und jede Naturerscheinungen hervorgebracht sieht; und dass die fur 
uns unermessliche Grosse der Zeitraume, in welchen diese Krafte allmah- 
lich und immerfort gewirkt haben, geniigt, die Veranderungen durch eben 
diese Krafte hervorbringen zu lassen." (v. 3, pp. 252, 1834) 

HOOYKAAS, REIJER, 1956, The principle of uniformity in geology, biology and 
theology: Victoria Inst., J. of Tr., vol. 88, pp. 101-116. "Strict uniformi- 
tarianism may often be a guarantee against pseudo-scientific phantasies 
and loose conjectures, but it makes one easily forget that uniformity is not 
a law, not a rule established after comparison of facts, but a methodological 
principle, preceding the observation of facts. It is the logical principle of 
parsimony of causes and of economy of scientific notions." 

2 1959, Natural law and divine miracle: a historical-critical study of the 

principle of uniformity in geology, biology and theology: Leiden, E. J. 
Brill, 237 pp. "A less strict maintenance of uniformitarianism would 
perhaps give freer play to fantasy, but it might also open new vistas. The 
uniformitarian position, at its worst, forces past phenomena into a pre- 
conceived frame built upon events occurring in our time." 

HORBERG, CARL LELAND, 1952, Interrelations of geomorphology, glacial geol- 
ogy, and Pleistocene geology: J. GeoL, vol. 60, no. 2, pp. 187-190. "... a 
central aspect of geomorphology is its application to the task of deciphering 
Pleistocene history." 

HORTON, ROBERT ELMER, 1945, Erosional development of streams and their 
drainage basins, hydrophysical approach to quantitative morphology: 
Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 56, no. 3, pp. 275-370. Develops laws of drainage 
composition, law of stream slopes, and law of overland flow. 

HUBBERT, MARION KING, 1937, Theory of scale models as applied to the study 
of geologic structures: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 48, no. 10, pp. 1459-1520. 
A general theory of the similarity between a model and its original, for 
purely mechanical systems, is derived and then applied to illustrative 
geologic problems. 

2 1938, The place of geophysics in a department of geology: Am. Inst. Min. 

Met. Eng., Tech. Pub. 945, 19 pp. Ranked according to degree of de- 
pendence on other sciences for fundamental concepts, geology is a third- 
order discipline subordinate to physics, chemistry, and astronomy. Geo- 
physics and geochemistry are not sciences, properly speaking, but are 



290 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

rather the vehicles by which a more dependent science incorporates the 
data and techniques of a less dependent science. 

3 (Hendricks, Thomas Andrews and Thiel, George Alfred, Chm.), 1949 Re* 

port of the Committee on Geologic Education of the Geological Society of 
America: Geol. Soc. Am., Int. Pr., 1949, pt. 2, pp. 17-21. ". . .your 
Committee recommend that at all instructional levels from the most elementary 
to the most advanced, only those inferences be presented to students for which the 
essential observational data and the logical steps leading to the inference have also 
been presented. The satisfaction of this criterion will compel a badly needed 
critical reexamination from the ground up of the logical structure of geo- 
logical science. 5 ' 

HUNT, CHARLES B., 1956, A skeptic's view of radiocarbon dates: Univ. of Utah, 
Anthropological Papers, no. 26, pp. 35-46. "Consistency of results, in- 
cluding consistency in a series of radiocarbon dates, may be evidence of 
precision, but it is not evidence of accuracy although it commonly is cited 
as such." 

MUTTON, JAMES, 1788, Theory of the earth; or an investigation of the laws 
observable in the composition, dissolution, and restoration of land upon 
the globe: Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, Tr., vol. 1, pp. 209-304. "In examining 
things present, we have data from which to reason with regard to what has 
been; and from what has actually been, we have data for concluding with 
regard to that which is to happen hereafter. Therefore upon the supposi- 
tion that the operations of nature are equable and steady, we find, in 
natural appearances, means for concluding a certain portion of time to 
have necessarily elapsed, in the production of those events of which we see 
the effects." 

HUXLEY, THOMAS HENRY, 1862, The anniversary address to the Geological 
Society: Geol. Soc. London, Quart. J., vol. 18, pp. xl-liv. "Allied with 
geology-, palaeontology has established two laws of inestimable importance: 
the first, that one and the same area of the earth's surface has been succes- 
sively occupied by very different kinds of living beings; the second, that 
the order of succession established in one locality holds good, approxi- 
mately, in all." 

2 1881, The rise and progress of palaeontology- Nature, vol. 24, pp. 452-455. 

"The whole fabric of palaeontology' is based upon two propositions: the 
first is, that fossils are the remains of animals and plants; and the second 
is, that the stratified rocks in .which they are found are sedimentary de- 
posits; and each of these propositions is founded upon the same axiom 
that like effects imply like causes." 

Interdepartmental Stratigraphic Committee, USSR, 1956, Stratigraphic classi- 
fication and terminology (Translated from the Russian by John Rodgers.): 
Int. Geol. Rev., vol. 1, Feb. 1959, pp. 22-38. A sfcheme of classification is 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 291 

developed on the premises that stratigraphic subdivisions exist objectively 
in Nature, rather than subjectively in the mind of the investigator, and 
that these subdivisions reveal the actual course of geologic history. 

JACOBS, JOHN ARTHUR, and ALLAN, D. W., 1956, The thermal history of the 
earth: Nature, vol. 177, no. 4500, pp. 155-157. Studies of earth models 
suggest that the crust of the earth, down to about 100 km, may have been 
remelted during the first billion or so years of earth history, that the rate 
of cooling of the earth was greater in the past than now, and thus that 
orogenic activity may have decreased with time. 

JAMES, HAROLD LLOYD, 1960, Problems of stratigraphy and correlation of Pre- 
cambrian rocks with particular reference to the Lake Superior region: 
Am. J. Sci., vol. 258-A (Bradley Volume), pp. 104-114. "The most basic 
geologic law is that of superposition. Though the principle itself can be 
called obvious, its application to highly deformed rocks is rarely easy." 

JELETZKY, JURIJ ALEXANDER, 1956, Paleontology, basis of practical geochronol- 
ogy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., B., vol. 40, no. 4, pp. 679-706. 

2 1962, The allegedly Danian dinosaur-bearing rocks of the globe and the 

problem of the Mesozoic-Cenozoic boundary: J. Paleont., vol. 36, no. 5, 
pp. 1005-1018. "This obviously geologically contemporary extinction of 
the terrestrial and marine Mesozoic animals at the Maestrichtian-Danian 
boundary must reflect some kind of radical, world-wide change in the 
physical regime of our planet. This event can be quite properly referred 
to as a 'catastrophe' or 'revolution 9 . . ." 

JENNINGS, HERBERT SPENCER, 1933, The universe and life: New Haven, Yale 
Univ. Press, 94 pp. "The universe would be so much easier to deal with 
if the laws of its action were simple and uniform. Let us assume therefore 
that they are simple and uniform ! The doctrine is a marked case of wish- 
ful thinking." 

JEPSEN, GLENN LOWELL, 1949, Selection, "orthogenesis" and the fossil record: 
Am. Phil. Soc., Pr., vol. 93, no. 6, pp. 479-500. "Orthogenesis was fre- 
quently expressed as a e law s at a time when there was an eager search for 
biological phenomena or principles which could be called laws, after the 
model of the eponymic laws of physics and chemistry." 

JOHNSON, DOUGLAS WILSON, 1933, The r&le of analysis in scientific investiga- 
tion: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 44, no. 3, pp. 461-494. "Multiple working 
hypotheses as a method, employed in connection with critical analysis 
as an instrument of precision, offer us ... the best guarantee of success in 
scientific research." 



292 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

2 1938-1942, Studies in scientific method- J. Geomorphology, vol. 1, pp. 

64-66, 147-152; vol. 2. pp. 366-372; vol. 3, pp. 59-64, 156-162, 256-262, 
353-355: vol. 4, pp. 145-149, 328-332; vol. 5, pp. 73-77, Tl-173. "Hence 
the golden rule of scientific exposition: \eicr discuss an unknown in teims of 
an unknown." 

JOHNSON, MARTIN, 1951, The meanings of time and space in philosophies of 
science: Am. Scientist, vol. 39, no. 3, pp. 412-421. "Crudely stated, it 
may be said that physical science is interested in the changing or the flux 
of the world, not in any static picture, and is in fact a study of a sequence 
of events whose basic pattern is a time-order/' 

JORALEMON, IRA SEAMAN, 1952, Age cannot wither, or varieties of geological 
experience: Econ. Geol., vol. 47, no. 3, pp. 243-259. ". . . we have not 
sufficient reliable evidence ... for hard-and-fast generalizations or laws of 
ore occurrence/ 5 

JOYSEY, KENNETH A., 1952, Fossil lineages and environmental change: Geol. 
Mag., vol. 89, no. 5, pp. 357-360. "An essential key to the interpretation 
of fossil communities lies in the study of living animals on the present day 
time-plane. Equally, the process of evolution can only be seen in perspec- 
tive when the zoological picture is projected along the dimension of geo- 
logical time." 

JUDSON, SHELDON, 1958, Geomorphology and geology: New York Acad. ScL, 
Tr., ser. 2, vol. 20, no. 4, pp. 305-315. "Geology is history. Perhaps more 
than any other single characteristic, the time factor distinguishes geology 
from the other sciences. 35 

2 1960, William Morris Davis an appraisal: Zs. Geomorph., vol. 4, no. 3-4, 

pp. 193-201. "The cycle of erosion had an almost immediate acceptance 
not only because of its skilful presentation but also because the geologic 
profession was ready for such a synthesis. Uniformitarianism, a major 
element in the development of the cycle, was by then almost universally 
accepted by geologists. Furthermore, the orderly development of land- 
forms through successive stages represented a type of non-organic evolu- 
tion ... in harmony with the exciting new ideas in organic evolution then 
sweeping the scientific world. 53 

3 1961, Archaeology- and the natural sciences: Am. Scientist, vol. 49, no. 3, 

pp. 410-414. "The archaeologist reconstructs history largely from objects 
recovered from the ground . . . Such reconstructions are generally classed 
under the heading of c pre-history% a term that has always bothered me a 
bit because the inference exists that events of the pre-literate period do not 
combine to constitute history, a particularly unacceptable inference to a 
geologist." 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 293 

KAISER, ERICH, 1931, Der Grundsatz des Aktualismus in der Geologic: Deut. 
Geol. Ges,, Zs., vol. 83, pp. 389-407. "Aber ganz abwegig ist es, wenn 
man jetzt mehr und mehr von einem Gesetz des Aktualismus liest, trotzdem 
doch die Begriinder und Verfechter des Aktualismus nur von einer ak- 
tualistischen (ontogenetischen) Methode redeten." 

KALKOWSKY, ERNST, 1910, Geologic und Phantasie: Naturw. Ges. Isis, Dresden, 
Sitzungsber. u. Abh., Jan-June, 1910, pp. 10-19. "Nie hat jemand cine 
ganze Schicht gesehen, immer nur Stuckchen davon hat er vor Augen 
gehabt, und das Ganze ist in jedem einzelnen Falle nichts als ein Phan- 
tasiegebilde. Der Begriff der Schicht, meine ich, steht somit etwa auf 
derselben Stufe, wie der des Atoms . . /' 

KELVIN, WILLIAM THOMSON, Baron, 1864, On the secular cooling of the earth: 
Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, Tr., vol. 23, pt. 1 (1861-1862), pp. 157-169. "It 
must be admitted that many geological writers of the 'Uniformitarian' 
school, who in other respects have taken a profoundly philosophical view 
of their subject, have argued in a most fallacious manner against hypotheses 
of violent action in past ages. If they had contented themselves with show- 
ing that many existing appearances, though suggestive of extreme violence 
and sudden change, may have been brought about by long-continued 
action, or by paroxysms not more intense than some of which we have 
experience . . . their position might have been unassailable ..." 

2 1871, On geological time: Geol. Soc. Glasgow, Tr., vol. 3, pt. 1, pp. 1-28. 

"It would be just as reasonable to take a hot water jar, such as is used in 
carriages, and say that that bottle has been as it is for ever as it was for 
Playfair to assert that the earth could have been for ever as it is now, and 
that it shows no traces of a beginning, no progress towards an end." 

KEMENY, JOHN GEORGE, 1959, A philosopher looks at science: Princeton, 
D. Van Nostrand, xii and 273 pp. The scientist's assumption of the "uni- 
formity of nature" simply asserts that human capacities and the complexity 
of nature are such that it is possible for scientists to learn something about 
nature in a reasonably short time. See pp. 59-64 for a discussion of the 
principle of uniformity. 

KERMACK, K. A., 1956, Species and mutations: Systematics Assoc., London, 
Pub. no. 2, pp. 101-103. "Our justification for creating species, muta- 
tions, etc., in paleontology is solely one of practical convenience: the cate- 
gories themselves are man-made and artificial." 

KHAIN, VIKTOR EFIMOVICH, 1958, Nekotorye filosofskiye voprosy sovremennoy 
geologii (Some philosophic questions of modern geology): Nauchnye 
Doklady Vysshei Shkoly, Filosofskiye Nauki, vol. 2; Moskva, pp. 148-161. 
Soviet scientists approach each theoretical question from the standpoint 



294 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON. JR. 

of dialectic materialism; each geological concept in the Soviet science 
follows the idea of a directed and irreversible development. 

2 1961, Lomonosov i sovremennaya geologiya (Lomonosov and modern 

geology-): Sovet. Geol., vol. 12, pp. 14-28. Since the end of World War II, 
geology* has tended to change from a descriptive to an explanatory science 
whose aim is to discover the basic laws of the development of the planet 
Earth, and of the earth's crust in particular. 

KING, CLARENCE, 1877, Catastrophism and evolution: Am. Naturalist, vol. 11, 
pp. 449-470. "Men are born either catastrophists or uniformitarians. 
You may divide the race into imaginative people who believe in all sorts 
of impending crises physical, social, political and others who anchor 
their very souls in status quo " 

KING, LESTER CHARLES, 1953, Canons of landscape evolution: Geol. Soc. Am., 
B., vol. 64, no. 7, pp. 721-752. * w There is a general homology between all 
epigene landscapes." 

2 1957, The uniformitarian nature of hillslopes: Edinburgh Geol. Soc., Tr., 

vol. 17, pt. 1, pp. 81-101. ". . . the manner of hillslope evolution is essen- 
tially uniformitarian in all climatic realms outside the frigid zones and the 
erg deserts." 

KITTS, DAVID B., 1963, Historical explanation in geology: J. Geol., vol. 71, 
pp. 297-313. 

KOBAYASHI, TEIIGHI, 1944, Concept of time in geology: Imp. Acad. Tokyo, 
Pr., vol. 20, no. 7, pp. 475-478 (On the major classification of the geologis 
cal age.); no. 10, pp. 742-750 (An instant in the Phanerozoic Eon and it- 
bearing on geology and biology.); pts. 1 and 3 in a series of articles. 
"Time . . . may be classed into two major kinds, one with and the other 
without historical contents. Time of the latter kind is abstract, absolute, 
objective and physical; that of the former kind, concrete, relative, sub- 
jective and historical. Geological age belongs to the former while chronology 
is of the latter kind . . ." 

KOBER, LEOPOLD, 1946, Geo-Logismus: Geog. Ges. Wien, Mitt. vol. 89, no. 1-6, 
pp. 3-7. "Absolute kosmo-geo-logische Wahrheit aller Evolution der Erde 
ist der Geo-Logismus: die Vergeistigung der Natur in Menschen. Der 
Mensch ist das Mittel der Natur, sich selbst zu erkennen." 

KOCH, LEO E., 1949, Tetraktys; the system of the categories of natural science 
and its application to the geological sciences: Australian J. Sci., vol. 11, 
no. 4, suppl., 31 pp. "This method of application of the Tetraktys coin- 
cides with Aristotle's doctrine . . . that a system of categories of a very 
elementary nature is the necessary basis of any scientific definition." 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 295 

KRUMBEIN, WILLIAM CHRISTIAN, 1960, The "geological population" as a frame- 
work for analysing numerical data in geology: Liverpool and Manchester 
Geol. J., vol. 2, pt. 3, pp. 341-368. Statistical analysis may be applied to 
classes and aggregates of geological objects and events, toward the ends of 
deriving inferences and making predictions. (With annotated bibliog- 
raphy.) 

2 1962, The computer in geology; quantification and the advent of the com- 
puter open new vistas in a science traditionally qualitative: Science, vol. 
136, no. 3522, pp. 1087-1092. "The present dominantly empirical aspect 
of much data analysis in geology is not disturbing in a science where much 
effort . . . must still be directed toward a search for controls and responses 
in a web of intricately interlocked data." 

KRYNINE, PAUL DIMITRI, 1951, A critique of geotectonic elements: Am. Geo- 
phys. Union, Tr., vol. 32, no. 5, pp. 743-748. ". . . it seems that the 
classical principle of the description and classification of landforms as 
introduced by W. M. Davis the concepts of describing landforms in 
terms of structure, process, and stage could be fruitfully applied to the 
classification of geotectonic elements. This powerful generalization of the 
immortal Davis is indeed the great c universal solvent' of geology, and no 
subject in the Earth sciences contains problems that would not yield to 
this method, providing that adequate data can be gathered." 

KUENEN, PHILIP HENRY, 1958, Experiments in geology: Geol. Soc. Glasgow, 
Tr., vol. 23, pp. 1-28. "In a certain sense present day processes show an 
experimental relation to historical geology and the investigation of ancient 
rocks . . . Hence . . . the 'Present as key to the Past' is an experimentally 
tainted maxim." 

KULP, JOHN LAURENCE, 1961, Geologic time scale; Isotopic age determinations 
on rocks of known stratigraphic age define an absolute time scale for earth 
history: Science, vol. 133, no. 3459, pp. 1105-1114. 

KUMMEROW, EGMONT, 1932, Die aktualistische Methode in der Geologic: Deut. 
Geol. Ges., Zs., vol. 84, pp. 563-565. "Der Grundsatz des Aktualismus 
besitzt keine uneingeschrankte Gultigkeit. Er lasst sich auf periodische 
Vorgange im allgemeinen nicht anwenden. Die Gegenwart ist um so 
weniger geeignet, fur alle Krafte und Vorgange der Vergangenheit Bei- 
spiele zu liefern, als sie keine normale Warmzeit, sondern cine glaziale 
Ausnahmezeit darstellt." 

LADD, HARRY STEPHEN, 1957, Introduction, and Paleoecological evidence, 
Chapters 1 and 2, pp. 1-66, in Treatise on marine ecology and paleoecol- 
ogy, vol. 2, Paleoecology (H. S. Ladd, ed.): Geol. Soc. Am., Mem. 67. 
Describes the nature of the paleontological record, and explains how 



296 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

ancient marine environments are reconstructed on the basis of paleonto- 
logical and lithological evidence. 

LAHEE, FREDERIC HENRY, 1909, Theory and hypothesis in geology: Science, 
n.s., vol. 30, pp. 562-563. "The misconception of the need for unity of 
cause may be an outgrowth from the doctrine of uniformity. But uni- 
formity is not synonymous with simplicity, any more than complexity is 
synonymous with chaos." 

LAIRD, JOHN, 1919, The law of parsimony: Monist, vol. 19, no. 3, pp. 321-344. 
"The complexity of the universe can never be simplified out of existence . . . 
It is conceivable, therefore, that the law of economy is neither more nor 
less than a rule of direction stating that we should always select the simplest 
of any general propositions which may be true and ascertainable, since it 
is these truths only that are likely to aid the mind in making further dis- 
coveries. This rule shows the path of wisdom in view of the limited powers 
and scope of the mind." 

LAKE, PHILIP, 1930, The centenary of LyelTs Principles of Geology: Geol. 
Mag., vol. 67, pp. 433-436. "Each attitude of mind has its own dangers, 
and the chief danger of the uniformitarian attitude is that the mind may 
be closed to new ideas . . . There is little need now, however, to dwell on 
the dangers of the uniformitarian attitude. There is nothing uniformitarian 
about post-war geological theories, and there are so many of them that it 
is difficult not to keep an open mind. Meanwhile geology progresses in 
spite of theories." 

LAMONT, ARCHIE, 1944-1945, Geology in literature: Quarry Managers' J., 
vol. 27, pp. 555-560, 567; vol. 28, pp. 28-31, 77-79, 121-127, 194-202, 
287-291, 365-369, 405-407, 439-441, 495-499, 551-554. Illustrates, with 
many quotations, the impact of geological ideas on literature. "Geology 
is par excellence the science which deals with the repetition of the same events 
in widely separated epochs." 

LANE, ALFRED CHURCH, 1906, The geologic day: J. Geol., vol. 14, pp. 425-429. 
"Time is measured by change, and change . . . must progress from point 
to point . . . there is always a rate of progress which is measurable, and 
any interval of time must be marked by a certain stage in the change, and 
so begin differently at different points." 

LASKY, SAMUEL GROSSMAN, 1947, The search for concealed deposits a re- 
orientation of philosophy: Am. Inst. Min. Met. Eng., Tech. Pub. 2146, 
Mining Tech., vol. 11, no. 3, 8 pp. "Instead of looking for information 
indicating that ore is likely to be present, we ought ... to balance and fit 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 297 

together the observed facts so as to discover whether [it] could be present. 
In other words, the geology need be only permissive instead of definitely 
indicative." 

LAUNAY, Louis DE, 1922, La science g6ologique, ses m6thodes, ses r&ultats, ses 
problfcmes, son histoire: Paris, Armand Colin, 3d. ed., viii and 775 pp. 
A survey of geological methodology and the evolution of geological ideas. 

LAUTERBACH, ROBERT, 1957, Palaogeophysik, in Geol. u. Geophys. (Karl- 
Marx-Univ., Geol. u. Pal. Inst.), pp. 57-66. 

LECLERQ,, REN, 1960, Histoire et avenir de la mithode exp&imentale: Paris, 
Masson, 138 pp. "La recherche des puits de p6trole par Pexamen g6o- 
logique du sol est devenue courante. Ce n'est qu'un cas particulier de la 
m6thode qui consiste pr6voir une allure de stratification ou une couche 
d6termin6e un endroit pr6cis i partir de la connaissance de la gfeologie 
d'une region. On 6met une hypothfese en se fondant sur des observations 
et on la v6rifie par une autre observation." 

LE CONTE, JOSEPH, 1900, A century of geology: Pop. Sci. Monthly, vol. 56, 
pp. 431-443, 546-556. "The fundamental idea underlying geological 
thought is the history of the earth." 

LE GRAND, HARRY E., 1962, Perspective on problems of hydrogeology: Geol. 
Soc. Am., B., vol. 73, pp. 1147-1152. "Mathematical research relating to 
synthesis of the elements of hydrogeology is showing some promise, but it 
tends to wilt when faced with a kaleidoscope of hydrologic conditions 
caused by heterogeneities of geology." 

LENZEN, VICTOR F., 1955, Procedures of empirical science: Int. Encyc. Unified 
Sci., vol. 1, pt. 1, Chicago, Univ. Chicago Press, pp. 280-339. "A stage 
in the investigations of correlations of events is the determination of tem- 
poral sequences. The history of political events, historical geology, and 
paleontology are arrangements of events in temporal order. Science in 
the form of history systematizes observations of events by fitting them into 
schemes of development of the cosmos, life and society." 

LEOPOLD, LUNA B., and LANGBEIN, WALTER B., 1962, The concept of entropy 
in landscape evolution: U. S. Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 500-A, 20 pp. 
". . . we believe that the concept of entropy and the most probable state 
provides a basic mathematical conception which does deal with relations 
of time and space. Its elaboration may provide a tool by which the various 
philosophic premises still characterizing geomorphology may be subjected 
to critical test." 



298 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

LINTON, DAVID LESLIE, 1948, The ideal geological map: Adv. Sci., vol. 5, no. 
17, pp. 141-149. The symbols of geological cartography will require 
standardization on an international scale before all geological maps will 
be intelligible to all geologists. Choices of color symbols have been vari- 
ously determined by the "principle of the distinctive horizon" (bold colors 
for index formations), by the association of ideas (fiery red for volcanic 
rocks), by the "principle of associative colouring" (e.g., red for the Old 
Red sandstone), and by reference to a spectrum arbitrarily selected to 
indicate relative ages of rocks. Even greater diversity and confusion exist 
in the array of index letters and numbers variously sequential, nonse- 
quential, or hybrid used to designate map units. 

LOEWINSON-LESSING, FRANTS YULEVICH, 1954, A historical survey of petrology 
(Translated from the Russian by S. I. Tomkeieff): London, Oliver and 
Boyd, vi and 112 pp. "There is one fundamental and leading principle 
which lies at the base of petrological science. This principle was dimly 
perceived at the dawn of modern geology and petrology and since that 
time its conception has been steadily growing and expanding. The prin- 
ciple is that of development the evolution or gradual change to which 
every rock is subjected from the very moment of its formation." 

LOSSKIY, NIKOLAI ONUFRIEVICH, 1956, Organicheskii aktualizm Bergsona 
(Organic actualism of Bergson) in An introduction to philosophy, Chapter 
XX, pp. 190-198: Frankfurt a. M., Possev. Actualism is a philosophic 
concept according to which the whole world consists of events and proc- 
esses which appear and disappear in time. 

Lucius, MICHEL, 1957, Les principes fondamentaux de travail et de recherche 
en g6ologie: Soc. Nat. Luxembourg, B., n.s., vol. 49, no. 60, pp. 141-143. 
"Mais le principe d'actualisme n'est pas toujours apparent. Nous ne 
voyons pas se former aujourd'hui du granite, des schistes cristallins. Dans 
la nature, les deux 6tats extremes d'un mme ph6nomfcne peuvent &tre si 
diff6rents, qu'il n'apparait, a premiere vue, aucune connexion entre eux. 
Mais si on trouve une suite d'6tats interm6diaires entre les deux extremes, 
on peut admettre un 6tat original identique. C'est le principe des flats 
intermediates" 

LYELL, CHARLES, 1830, Principles of geology, being an attempt to explain the 
former changes of the earth's surface, by reference to causes now in opera- 
tion, vol. 1: London, John Murray, 511 pp. "Our estimate ... of the 
value of all geological evidence . . . must depend entirely on the degree of 
confidence which we feel in regard to the permanency of the laws of nature. 
Their immutable constancy alone can enable us to reason from analogy, 
by the strict rules of induction, respecting the events of former ages." 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 299 

MAGGREGOR, ALEXANDER MIERS, 1951, Some milestones in the Precambrian 
of Southern Rhodesia: Geol. Soc. S. Africa, Pr., vol. 54, pp. xxvii-lxvi. 
"In dealing with rocks formed when the world was less than half of its 
present age, a strict adherence to the doctrine of uniformitarianism is 
considered unjustified . . . the [older Precambrian] sedimentary rocks were 
closer in their mineral composition to igneous rocks and were therefore 
more amenable to granitization. The geothermal gradient was probably 
steeper . . . The crust of the earth may have been less rigid . . . Volcanism 
was more active than it is now . . . The earth's rotation was more rapid 
and tidal forces may have been greater." 

MCLACHLAN, DAN, JR., 1961, A guess as to what is science: Physics Today, 
vol. 14, no. 6, pp. 22-27. "When one science swallows another ... the 
general attitude among scientists is that the new science has built a firm 
foundation under the old science. The physicists and chemists would like 
to do this for geology . . ." 

MCLAREN, DIGBY JOHNS, 1959, The role of fossils in defining rock units, with 
examples from the Devonian of western and Arctic Canada: Am. J. Sci., 
vol. 257, no. 10, pp. 734-751. "All geology depends on one basic prin- 
ciple that it is possible to interpret the history of the earth by examining 
the positional relationships of rock and mineral bodies. Stratigraphy relies 
primarily on a special case of this principle the positional relationships 
of stratified rock bodies, from which derives the law of superposition. 

MANLEY, GORDON, 1953, Climatic variation: Roy. Meteorological Soc., Quart. 
J., vol. 79, pp. 185-209. (Reviews of modern meteorology No. 9) "The 
forecaster on a November day who considers whether a low moving up 
the Baltic will occlude more or less rapidly on account of a newly estab- 
lished snow cover in Lithuania is probably touching on the whole problem 
of the alimentation of the Pleistocene ice caps. But the time scale is very 
different. Yet it is the present writer's conviction that in the present can 
be sought the key to the past; the day-to-day synoptican will do well to 
integrate some of his findings into a greater pattern." 

MARSH, OTHNIEL CHARLES, 1879, The history and methods of palaeontological 
discovery: Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Pr., vol. 28, no. 1880, pp. 1-42. "If I 
may venture ... to characterize the present period in all departments of 
science, its main feature would be a belief in universal laws" 

MASON, STEPHEN FINNEY, 1953, Main currents of scientific thought: New York, 
Henry Schuman, viii and 520 pp. 

MAYR, ERNST, 1951, Bearing of some biological data on geology: Geol. Soc. 
Am., B., vol. 62, no. 5, pp. 537-546. "As far as paleontology is concerned, 



300 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

there has been a rather futile argument in recent years as to whether it is 
a branch of geology* or of biology. The answer, of course, is that it is either 
both or neither." 

2 1957, Species concepts and definitions, in The species problem. A sym- 
posium presented at the Atlanta meeting of the American Association of 
the Advancement of Science, Dec. 28-29, 1955: Washington, D. C., Am. 
Assoc. Adv. Sci., Pub. 50, pp. 1-22. ". . . the analysis of the species prob- 
lem would be considerably advanced, if we could penetrate through such 
empirical terms as phenotypic, morphological, genetic, phylogenetic, or 
biological, to the underlying philosophical concepts. A deep, and perhaps 
widening gulf has existed in recent decades between philosophy and 
empirical biology. It seems that the species problem is a topic where 
productive collaboration between the two fields is possible." 

MELTON, MARK ALDRIDGE, 1958, Correlation structure of morphometric 
properties of drainage systems and their controlling agents: J. Geol., 
vol. 66, no. 4, pp. 442-460. "The variability in any natural environment 
is the product of the happenings in many geologic periods ... To argue 
that this variability could ever be entirely explained is absurd. Geology 
differs from physics and other exact sciences in the kind of variability 
encountered, as well as the amount ... the concept of the universe ap- 
plicable to geology and physics is accordingly quite different; . . . there is 
not just a single scientific 'world view 3 , but two or perhaps many." 

MERRIAM, JOHN CAMPBELL, 1921, The earth sciences as the background of 
history: Sci. Monthly, vol. 12, no. 1, pp. 5-7. "Our greatest scientific 
contributions to the study of history and of origins have come through 
geological and biological investigations. Geology is the greatest of his- 
torical sciences." 

MILLER, BENJAMIN LERov, 1941, Geology and the allied sciences: Pennsylvania 
Acad. Sci., Pr., vol. 15, pp. 82-89. ". . . the principal reasons for geological 
investigation should be economic." 

MILLER, HUGH, 1939, History and science; a study of the relation of historical 
and theoretical knowledge: Berkeley, Univ. of California Press, x and 
201 pp. "Thus nature is still conceived as pure history, in human history, 
and as pure structure, in physicochemical theory; and biology and geology 
remain alone in the synthesis of historical and theoretical principles. While 
everyone speaks of universal evolution, the presence of evolutionary charac- 
ter is really admitted only in some branches of biological and geological 
science; and even here the dominant intention is often a reduction of his- 
torical change to structural law, just as if Darwin had never lived and 
taught." 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 301 

MILLER, JOHN PRESTON, 1959, Geomorphology in North America: Przeglad 
Geograficzny, Warsaw, vol. 31, no. 3-4, pp. 567-587. "Like all the other 
phases of historical geology, geomorphic history is based ultimately on the 
Principle of Uniformitarianism. This view that 'the present is the key to 
the past' implies only that physical and chemical mechanisms have been 
constant in kind, but it recognizes that their magnitudes and rates may 
have varied. In any case, interpretation of history assumes an adequate 
knowledge of the present. Contrary to the belief of Davis and his followers 
that process was known or could be inferred, current opinion holds that 
our knowledge of present processes and their products is so meager that 
inferences about geomorphic history rest too heavily on untested assump- 
tions." 

MILLHAUSER, MILTON, 1954, The scriptural geologists, an episode in the history 
of opinion: Osiris, vol. 11, pp. 65-86. "Stratigraphy and paleontology not 
only established the preconditions for a biological theory like Darwin's; 
in their day they were nearly as revolutionary in their impact on the 
popular mind." 

MILNE, EDWARD ARTHUR, 1935, Some points in the philosophy of physics: 
time, evolution and creation: Smithsonian Inst., Ann. Rept., 1933, pp. 
219-238. "The world is thus a continuing system; each particle or nebula 
has an evolutionary experience behind it and in front of it, with ultimate 
decay as its goal, yet the world as a whole cannot be said to decay. It is 
not the same in an observer's today as in the observer's yesterday, but it 
is the same forever." 

MISES, RICHARD VON, 1951, Positivism, a study in human understanding: 
Cambridge, Harvard Univ. Press, vi and 404 pp. "... the various 
sciences are distinguished by the objects they deal with ... If we examine 
a little more closely what the individual scientists make concrete statements 
about, we find that the objects of the various sciences can be summarized 
under a common expression: every proposition of a positive science refers 
to actions of men and observed by men (Bridgman) . . . The purely 
descriptive natural sciences do not constitute an exception . . . even the 
geologist can only say what happens if one examines rocks by means of 
hammer and drill." 

MITCHELL, RAOUL C., 1955, Changement de cadence des ph&aomfenes gfo- 
logiques: Cahiers Gol., Seyssel, no. 33, pp. 331-334. The principle of 
uniformity must be emended to allow for variations in the rate at which 
geologic processes have acted during the past. 

MOORE, RAYMOND CECIL, 1948, Stratigraphical paleontology: Geol. Soc. Am., 
B., vol. 59, no. 4, pp. 301-326. ". . . Stratigraphical paleontology is syn- 



302 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

onomous with paleontology* itself, viewed with the eyes of a geologist, 
whereas so-called systematic paleontology- comprises a purely biological 
approach, without reference to geology except for arrangement of fossils 
in order of time succession." 

2 1949, Meaning of facies: Geol. Soc. Am., Mem. 39, pp. 1-34. ". . . many 

features of geological history* can never be learned, because they never 
became incorporated in the rock record. These also are actual parts of 
earth history, which happen not to have left a trace ... it is obvious that 
geological history is circumscribed in no way by what we think we know 
about it." 

3 1955, Invertebrates and geologic time scale, pp. 547-574 in Arie Polder- 

vaart, ed. Crust of the earth (a symposium),: Geol. Soc. Am., Spec. 
Paper 62, viii and 762 pp. "The elementary but fundamental Law of 
Superposition, on which every- geologist depends for indispensable evidence 
of the relative age of sedimentary deposits laid down bed on bed, could be 
formulated by reasoning, without studies made first in the field. On the 
other hand, the nature of fossil assemblages in any given layer is not 
subject to prediction, at least not without much accumulated experience." 

MORRISON, R. B., GILLULY, JAMES, RICHMOND, G. M., and HUNT, C. B., 1957, 
In behalf of the Recent: Am. J. Sci., vol. 255, pp. 385-393. ". . . geologic 
. . . time is subdivided on a purely arbitrary, subjective basis, largely 
for convenience in classification of formations and depending upon the 
amount of detail recognized in the rock-stratigraphic record. Duration 
has never been a determining factor in defining time units, just as thickness 
has not been in defining formations or other rock-stratigraphic units." 

MOULTON, FOREST RAY, 1929, Thomas Chrowder Chamberlin as a philosopher: 
J. GeoL, vol. 37, pp. 368-379. "The methods of science, like styles in 
dress, appear to come and go in cycles. At one period it is the fashion to 
emphasize the accumulation of observational data and to disparage at- 
tempts at their interpretation . . . The opposite extreme is the fashion 
of hastily constructing theories, one after another, for explaining each new 
phenomenon that is observed ... the fashion during periods of frenzied 
research when priority is more highly prized than soundness and per- 
manence." 

MULLER, ARNO HERMANN, 1951, Grundlagen der Biostratonomie: Deut. Akad. 
der Wiss., Berlin, Abh., Kl. Math. u. allgem. Naturwiss., Jg. 1950, Nr. 3, 
147 pp. In seeking to reconstruct the sequences of events which have led 
to the preservation of organic remains as fossils, biostratonomy employs 
the principle of actualism. 

MUNITZ, MILTON KARL, 1957, Space, time and creation, philosophical aspects 
of scientific cosmology: Glencoe, 111., The Free Press and The Falcon's 
Wing Press, x and 182 pp. "... the Perfect Cosmological Principle, like 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 303 

the Principle of the Uniformity of Nature, functions not as a factual state- 
ment at all, capable of serving as a premise in an argument, but as a defi- 
nition that functions as a criterion or rule of what in the language of science 
is to be regarded as a law." 

MURGHISON, RODERICK IMPEY, 1839, The Silurian System, pt. 1: London, 
John Murray, 576 pp. "... while I rejoice in what I would call the 
'Lyellian method' of testing geological phenomena by modern analogies, 
I do not believe in the doctrine, that the dislocations of the present day are 
produced by causes of the same degree of intensity as those of which geology 
affords the proof. I must always be of opinion that, although they may 
belong to the same class, the geological catastrophe (such as the overturning 
of a mountain chain) and modern earthquake cannot be placed side by side 
without our exclaiming 'sic parvis componere magna.'" 

NAGEL, ERNEST, 1952, Some issues in the logic of historical analysis: Sci. 
Monthly, vol. 74, pp. 162-169. "The distinction between history and 
theoretical science is ... analogous to the difference between medical 
diagnosis and physiology, or between geology and physics. A geologist 
seeks to ascertain, for example, the sequential order of geologic formations, 
and he is able to do so by applying various physical laws to the materials 
he encounters; it is not the geologist's task, qua geologist, to establish the 
laws of mechanics or of radioactive disintegration that he may employ." 

NEWELL, NORMAN DENNIS, 1956, Catastrophism and the fossil record: Evolu- 
tion, vol. 10, no. 1, pp. 97-101. 

2 1959, The nature of the fossil record: Am. Phil. Soc., Pr., vol. 103, no. 2, 

pp. 264-285. "Paleontological exploration of the past is a sampling pro- 
cedure in which provisional estimates of the whole are made from small, 
frequently biased, samples." 

3 1959, Adequacy of the fossil record: J. Paleont., vol. 33, no. 3, pp. 488-499. 

"... the limitations of the fossil record are not so much a matter of poor 
preservation or insufficient quantity but rather insufficient collecting and 
inefficient methods of preparing fossils." 

4 1962, Paleontological gaps and geochronology: J. Paleont., vol. 36, no. 3, 

pp. 592-610. ". . . the geologic systems, series and stages are all, in the last 
analysis, world-wide units that are defined and identified by means of 
their fossils. The time scale that is based on them is in no sense subjective 
or arbitrary." 

NICHOLSON, HENRY ALLEYNE, 1872, Contemporaneity of strata and the doc- 
trine of geological continuity: Canadian J., n.s., vol. 13, pp. 269-281. 
"... in so far as we can judge from the known facts of the present distribu- 
tion of living beings, the recurrence of exactly the same fossils in beds far 
removed from one another is prima facie evidence that the strata are not 



304 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

exactly contemporaneous; but that they succeeded one another in point 
of time, though by no long interval geologically speaking." 

NIGGLI, PAUL, 1949, Probleme der Naturwissenschaften, erlautert am Begriff 
der Mineralart: Basel, Birkhauser, \Vissensch. u. Kultur, vol. 5, xii and 
240 pp. "Die Natur ist also nach gewissen Grundprinzipien gestaltet, und 
es ist diese Gestaltung und Gliederung, die trotz der offensichtlichen 'Uner- 
schopflichkeit' den Versuch der Naturerkenntnis zu keinem hofFnungslosen 
Beginnen stempelt." 

NOLKE, FRIEDRICH, 1937, Astronomic und Geologic: Deut. Geol. Ges., Zs., 
vol. 89, no. 3, pp. 167-175. Astronomical hypotheses, such as those related 
to the secular decline in solar radiation and to the migration of the moon's 
orbit away from the earth, have important implications for geologic his- 
tory, e.g., warmer climates and stronger tides in the geological past. 

NOLAN, THOMAS B., 1962, Role of the geologist in the national economy: Geol. 
Soc. Am., B., vol. 73, no. 3, pp. 273-278. To problems involving the wel- 
fare of nations, geologists might usefully apply the habits of thought in- 
grained by the practice of their science. These include the tendency to 
think in three dimensions, an almost instinctive use of the fourth dimen- 
sion of time, an appreciation of the inevitability of change, and an accept- 
ance of the variety of natural materials which lie below the surface of the 
earth. 

NORTH, FREDERICK JOHN, 1933, From Giraldus Cambrensis to the geologic 
map, the evolution of a science: Cardiff Naturalists' Soc., Rept. and Tr., 
vol. 64, pp. 20-97. "The spirit of caution that was evident in Kidd's lec- 
tures was also shared by those who founded the Geological Society of 
London, for their chief aim was to observe and to record; they discouraged 
further attempts at solving problems that could not be solved until more 
information was available, and they would have nothing to do with hy- 
potheses like those in which the previous century had been so prolific. 
This attitude profoundly affected the course of geologic investigation, 
which for many years consisted solely in the collection and classification 
of specimens and facts." 

2 1934, From the geological map to the Geological Survey, Glamorgan and 

the pioneers of geology: Cardiff Naturalists' Soc., Rept. and Tr., vol. 65, 
pp. 41-115. "Geology cannot be regarded as an exact science, for, from 
the nature of things, the unknown must always be greater in extent than 
the known. We can never hope to examine more than an exceedingly 
small proportion of the rocks of the earth's crust, and all the fossils we can 
ever hope to unearth will represent but an infinitesimally small part of 
the whole pageant of life." 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 305 

OPIK, ERNST JULIUS, 1954, The time scale of our universe: Irish Astron. J., 
vol. 3, no. 4, pp. 89-108. "We will be guided by the principle of minimum 
hypothesis, or economy of thought, which requires that new laws of nature 
must not be used for the explanation of phenomena which can be ac- 
counted for by known laws." 

ORCEL, JEAN, 1954, Essai sur le concept d'espece et les classifications en min- 
6ralogie et p6trographie: Soc. Franj. MineY. Crist., B., vol. 77, pp. 397- 
432. The evolution of the concept of mineral species reflects an interaction 
of discoveries and ideas developed in crystallography, chemistry, and min- 
eralogy. According to the present concept, mineral species are differenti- 
ated primarily on the basis of two criteria: crystalline structure, as deter- 
mined by the refraction of x-rays, and chemical composition. 

OSBORN, HENRY FAIRFIELD, 1904, The present problems of paleontology: Pop. 
Sci. Monthly, vol. 66, pp. 226-242. "Just as the uniformitarian method of 
Lyell transformed geology, so the uniformitarian method is penetrating 
paleontology and making observations of animal and plant life as it is 
today the basis of the understanding of animal and plant life as it was 
from the beginning." 

PAGE, DAVID, 1863, The philosophy of geology; a brief review of the aim, scope 
and character of geological inquiry: Edinburgh, William Blackwood and 
Sons, ix and 160 pp. "The philosophy of our science is thus to believe in 
the fixity and uniformity of nature's operations, and under this belief to 
regulate all our methods and arrange our results." 

PARKS, WILLIAM ARTHUR, 1925, Cultural aspects in geology: Nature, vol. 116, 
no. 2916, pp. 432-435. ". . . uniformitarianism is being questioned seri- 
ously from both the inorganic and the organic points of view. We are 
swinging back to a conception of a milder catastrophism variously ex- 
pressed as rhythm, diastrophism, and so on." 

2 1928, Some reflections on paleontology: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 39, pp. 

387-402. "... the modern tendency is to regard the time factor as the 
motif of geology that is, to regard geology, in the first instance, as history. 
We speak . . . more and more of the sequence of events in time." 

PASSENDORFER, EDWARD, 1950, O zasadzie aktualizmu w geologii (na margi- 
nesie ksiizki L. Cayeux," Causes ancienneset causes actuelles en g6ologie"): 
Wiadom6sci Muz. Ziemi (Polish Geol. Mag.), vol. 5, no. 1, pp. 63-70. 
"... les ph6nomfcnes gologiques anciens sont dus aux mmes causes, 
agissant selon les mmes lois qu'aujourd'hui. Les mmes causes dans les 
mfemes conditions donnent les mSmes effets." 

PENCK, WALTHER, 1953, Morphological analysis of land forms (Translated 
from the German by Hella Czech and Katherine Gumming Boswell): 



306 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

London, Macmillan, xiv and 429 pp. "This state of affairs forms the sub- 
stance of the fundamental law of morphology: the modelling of the earth's 
surface is determined by the ratio of the intensity of the endogenetic to 
that of the exogenetic displacement of material." 

PIATNITZKY, P. P., 1939, Sur les dfauts de la terminologie du Pr6cambrien: 
Int. Geol. Cong., 17th., U.S.S.R., Rept., vol. 2, pp. 15-24. Many of the 
names given to geological systems below the base of the Cambrian are 
ambiguous, illogical, subjective or otherwise unscientific. 

PLAYFAIR, JOHN, 1802, Illustrations of the Huttonian theory of the earth: Edin- 
burgh, Cadell and Davies, and William Creech (Facsimile reprint with an 
introduction by George W. White, Urbana, Univ. of Illinois Press, 1956, 
xix, xx and 528 pp.). "Every river appears to consist of a main trunk, fed 
from a variety of branches, each running in a valley proportioned to its 
size, and all of them together forming a system of vallies, communicating 
with one another, and having such a nice adjustment of their declivities, 
that none of them join the principal valley, either on too high or too low 
a level; a circumstance which would be infinitely improbable, if each of 
these vallies were not the work of the stream that flows in it. 55 

POINCARE, HENRI, 1913, The foundations of science (Translated by George 
Bruce Halsted) in Science and Education, a series of volumes for the pro- 
motion of scientific research and educational progress, J. McKeen Cattell, 
ed., v. 1: New York, Science Press, 553 pp. "It is often said: Who knows 
whether the laws do not evolve and whether we shall not one day discover 
that they were not at the Carboniferous epoch what they are to-day? 
What are we to understand by that? What we think we know about the 
past state of our globe, we deduce from its present state. And how is this 
deduction made? It is by means of laws supposed known ... So that if 
the laws of nature were not the same in the Carboniferous age as at the 
present epoch, we shall never be able to know it, since we can know nothing 
of this age, only what we deduce from the hypothesis of the permanence 
of these laws." 

POPOV, VLADIMIR IVANOVICH, 1940, Protiv morfologicheskikh ustanovok v geo- 
logii (Against morphological tendencies in geology): Sovet. Geol., no. 5-6, 
(May-June), pp. 167-172. The view that geology is basically a morpho- 
logic science, devoted to a study of external structural features and their 
relationships, not only inhibits the development of the science but is con- 
trary to Engels' dialectic principle of 'struggle of the opposites. 9 

POPPER, KARL RAIMUND, 1957, The poverty of historicism: London, Routledge 
and Kegan Paul, xiv and 165 pp. ". . . while the theoretical sciences are 
mainly interested in finding and testing universal laws, the historical 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 307 

sciences take all kinds of universal laws for granted and are mainly inter- 
ested in finding and testing singular statements." 

2 1959, The logic of scientific discovery: London, Hutchinson, 479 pp. 

"Thus we are led back, by our concept of simplicity ... to that rule or 
principle which restrains us from indulgence in ad hoc hypotheses and aux- 
iliary hypotheses: to the principle of parsimony in the use of hypotheses." 

POTONIE, ROBERT, 1957, Vom Wesen der Geschichte der Geologic: Germany, 
Geol. Landesanst., Geol. Jb., vol. 74, pp. 17-30. "Wir wollen in den 
Schriften der Geologen und Forscher blattern, welch sich in einem hoheren 
Sinne um die Geschichte unserer Wissenschaft bemuht haben; nicht nur 
registrierend, sondern nach allgemeineren Erkenntnissen strebend, zu 
hoheren Schluszfolgerungen." 

PRUVOST, PIERRE, 1951, Les refuges de Phypothfcse en geologic, in Sciences de 
la terre, XXI Cong. Internal. Phil. Sci., Paris, 1949: Paris, Hermann, 
pp. 3-39. Scientific hypotheses, though born to die, have ways of living 
on, perpetuated in handbooks, embedded in popular opinion, upheld by 
scientific authority, or concealed by jargon. Geologic hypotheses, in par- 
ticular, may seek refuge at the bottom of the ocean, in the depths of the 
earth, or in the abyss of time. 

RAGUIN, EUGENE, 1951, M6thodes d'6tudes des formations gSologiques anci- 
ennes, in Sciences de la terre, XXI Cong. Internat. Phil. Sci., Paris, 1949: 
Paris, Hermann, pp. 17-28. The principle of actualism is insufficient for 
the reconstruction of Precambrian history. For explication of the older 
terranes, studies of the spatial distribution of metamorphic zones, structural 
analysis of igneous rocks, comparative studies of orogenic belts, and geo- 
chemical investigations are becoming increasingly useful. 

RAMSAY, ANDREW CROMBIE, 1880, On the recurrence of certain phenomena 
in geological time: British Assoc. Adv. Sci., 50th Meeting, Rept., pp. 1-22. 
"... whatever may have been the state of the world long before geological 
history began, as now written in the rocks, all known formations are com- 
paratively so recent in geological time, that there is no reason to believe 
that they were produced under physical circumstances differing either in 
kind or degree from those with which we are now more or less familiar." 

RASTALL, ROBERT HERON, 1943, Terminology in the geological sciences: 
Nature, vol. 151, no. 3828, pp. 294-295. The decline of popular interest 
in geology is partly due to "the volume and complication of the nomen- 
clature now current ... By far the greater part of the trouble arises from 
the activities of the palaeontologists ... It is commonly understood that 
modern palaeontology is supposed to be founded on evolutionary lines, 
but it really seems that the present tendency to hair-splitting distinctions 



308 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

and infinite multiplication of new names is exactly contrary to the true 
principle of evolution . . . these modern developments are mainly due to 
museum specialists; people with the Civil Service mind, who spend all 
their time indoors, surrounded by mountains of monographs instead of 
mountains of rocks, and appear to delight in making everything as com- 
plicated as possible/ 5 

RAVIKOVICH, A. N., 1961, Uniformistskoye uchenie Layella i ego istoricheskie 
korni (Uniformitarian teaching of Lyell and its historical roots): Akad 
Nauk, SSSR, Inst. Geol., Ocherki po istorii geol. znanii, vol. 9, pp. 48-83. 
In uniformitarian thinking, von Hoff and Hutton were the forerunners of 
Lyell. 

READ, HERBERT HAROLD, 1937, Certain aspects of metamorphic geology: 
Liverpool Geol. Soc., Pr., vol. 17, pt. 2, pp. 103-114. "Time because it 
means history, and in one aspect life, is the most fascinating aspect of 
metamorphic studies. We shall some day read a long and complex history 
at a glance in a single section of a metamorphic rock, and shall know even 
the minor episodes of its dark and turbulent past." 

2 1943, Geology in the war and in the peace: Junior Institution of Engineers, 

London, J. and Record of Tr., vol. 53, pt. 7, pp. 179-187. "Any man 
looking out of any window sees a geological laboratory in constant and 
full-scale operation. 55 

3 1957, The granite controversy: London, Thomas Murby, xix and 430 pp. 

"The study of history of any kind depends upon documents and records. 
For the history of the earth's crust, these documents are the rocks and 
their reading and interpretation are often difficult operations. It is true 
that for certain classes of rocks, made at the earth's surface, the uniformi- 
tarian method is valid and sufficient . . . But many important rocks were 
clearly made deep in the crust and no uniformitarian key can unlock their 
secrets. 55 

RENSCH, BERNHARD, 1960, The laws of evolution, pp. 95-116 in Sol Tax, ed., 
Evolution after Darwin, vol. 1 : Chicago, Univ. of Chicago Press. The 
laws of evolution are of three kinds: laws of causality, laws of psychic 
parallelism, and laws of logic. 

RICKEY, JAMES ERNEST, 1952, Some aspects of geological research and their 
practical application: Adv. Sci., vol. 9, no. 34, pp. 122-133. "A pattern 
of evidence may include an anomaly at variance with apparently valid 
conclusions reached on other grounds. Anomalies may not constitute vital 
objections to a conclusion: on further investigation they may yield and 
conform to the prior solution, or prove irrelevant. On the other hand the 
recognition of anomalies has frequently been a most fruitful source of 
discovery in geology as in other sciences. 55 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 309 

Rios, JOSE MARIA, 1962, Limitaci6nes y perfectibilidad permanente en la 
cartografia geo!6gica. Problemas que plantean las tecnicas modernas: 
Inst. Geol. y Minero de Espafia, Notas y Comuns., no. 65, pp. 127-138. 
"For mi parte me alegro mucho de poder participar aun de la 6poca en 
que la cartografia geo!6gica es un arte y no una fabricaci6n, en que el 
g6ologo es una persona y no una maquina." 

ROBERTSON, THOMAS, 1956, The presentation of geological information on 
maps: Adv. Sci., vol. 13, no. 50, pp. 31-41. Geological maps are not real 
portrayals of Nature. "At the very start of our field investigations we 
abstract from geology as a whole the subject that we choose to study" and 
the treatment of that subject will be "based upon a theory regarding the 
succession and structure of the rocks." In the alternating flux of induction 
and deduction attending the construction of a geological map, deductions 
are sometimes built upon deductions "until an inverted pyramid of 
formidable size is balanced upon a very small base." 

RODGERS, JOHN, 1959, The meaning of correlation: Am. J. Sci., vol. 257, no. 10, 
pp. 684-691. "... in stratigraphy the term correlation should and in fact 
ordinarily does mean the attempt to determine time relations among 
strata . . ." 

ROEVER, W. P. DE, 1956, Some differences between post-Paleozoic and older 
regional metamorphism (with discussion): Geol. en Mijnbouw, vol. 18, 
no. 4, pp. 123-127. "There is apparently not only an evolution of life 
during the history of the earth, but also some change in the character of 
the metamorphic mineral assemblages produced during the main phases 
of regional metamorphism of the various erogenic epochs." 

ROGER, J., 1961, La documentation en g6ologie: B. Biblio. Fr., vol. 6, no. 1, 
pp. 5-15. "Des progrfes consid6rables ont 6t6 r6alis& en geologic (au sens 
large) depuis une trentaine d'annees dans les moyens et les techniques 
d j observations. Par centre, dans la plupart des domaines, les gn6ralisa- 
tions, les larges hypotheses, les theories n'ont pas sensiblement avanc6 et 
souvent ne sont conserves qu'en raison de 1'absence de vues satisfaisantes. 
Cette situation est due . . . pour une grande part & Pincapacit6 de r&mir, 
dans un temps suffisamment court, une quantit considerable de donn6es 
6parses dans une Iitt6rature 6norme ou issues d' observations nouvelles 
qu'il fait souhaiter aussi abondantes et pr&ises que possible." 

ROMER, ALFRED SHERWOOD, 1949, Time series and trends in animal evolution, 
Chapter 7, pp. 103-120, in Glenn Lowell Jepsen, Ernst Meyr, and George 
Gaylord Simpson, eds., Genetics, paleontology, and evolution: Princeton, 
Princeton Univ. Press, xiv and 474 pp. "From time to time we are con- 
fronted with ideological evolutionary theories, evolved in general in the 



310 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

philosopher's cabinet or theologian's study, which base evolutionary events 
upon the 'design* of some external force a deity, or 'Nature' or upon 
some mysterious 'inner urge 3 of the organism or its protoplasm ... In 
general, the paleontologist can dispose of such theories by the application 
of Occam's razor." 

2 1959, Vertebrate paleontology, 1908-1958: J. Paleont., vol. 33, no. 5, 

pp. 915-925. ". . . divisions between disciplines are tending to become 
faint. Physics merges into chemistry; chemistry and physics merge into 
biology and geology*; paleontologists, invertebrate and vertebrate alike, 
bridge the gap between geology and biology." 

ROSSITER, Mrs. P. M., 1937, Basic for geology, Psyche Minatures, gen. ser. 
no. 90: London, Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner, 164 pp. "There is no 
danger now that the theories of geology will seem to be against true religion, 
little that such forces as the vis plastica will be made the 'causes' of effects, 
even less that the printed word will not get into the hands of workers in 
far countries. The danger with which the present-day worker is faced is 
that the printed word may not make sense when it gets there." 

RUSSELL, ISRAEL COOK, 1907, Concentration as a geological principle: Geol. 
Soc. Am., B., vol. 1 8 3 pp. 1-1 8. One of the important net results of physical 
and chemical changes affecting the earth throughout geological history 
has been the concentration of mineral substances which originally were 
widely disseminated. 

RUSSELL, RICHARD JOEL, 1958, Geological geomorphology: Geol. Soc. Am., 
B., vol. 69, no. 1, pp. 1-22. "Never before has the earth been so well 
armored [by soils and vegetation] against processes of weathering and 
erosion. Effects of this armoring must exist in sedimentary deposits to a 
degree which makes it a bit hazardous to press too far any interpretation 
of the remote past on the basis of the present." 

RUTTEN, MARTIN GERARD, 1955, Mathematics in geology and the former ex- 
tension of the Pre-Cambrian (with discussion) : Geol. en Mijnbouw, vol. 17, 
pp. 192-193. "... every geological phenomenon is determined by an 
almost immeasurable number of variables, horrifying in their complexity 
and in the number of their interrelations. Every formula that uses a limited 
number of variables is therefore but an extreme simplification." 

2 1957, Origin of life on earth, its evolution and actualism: Evolution, vol. 

11, pp. 56-59. "There was, of course, at one time a pre-actualistic period 
in the earth's history . . . These early stages have often been called pre- 
geologic. It seems better to speak of them as pre-actualistic, for a non- 
actualistic early geologic history is well conceivable." 

3 1962, The geological aspects of the origin of life on earth: Amsterdam, New 

York, Elsevier, vii and 146 pp. "... the findings of geology are in complete 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 311 

agreement with the modern biological views on the origin of life through 
natural causes." 

SAINT-SEINE, PIERRE DE, 1951, Les fossiles au rendez-vous du calcul, in Sciences 
de la terre, XXI Cong. Internat. Phil. Sci., Paris, 1949: Paris, Hermann, 
pp. 78-84. Although generally regarded as a descriptive science, paleon- 
tology is rapidly developing predictive capabilities. 

SANDBERO, C. G. S., 1932, Der Grundsatz des Aktualismus und die Bestimmung 
gewisser Ablagerungen als glaziogene: Deut. Geol. Ges., Zs., vol. 84, pp. 
636-641. 

SCHAFER, WILHELM, 1959, Elements of actuo-paleontology: Salt Marsh Conf. 
Pr., 1958, Univ. Georgia, Marine Inst, pp. 122-125. Actuogeology and 
actuopaleontology are based upon direct observation of events. "Because 
the work is in the present there is the possibility of experiment. The result 
is in all cases the knowledge of timeless laws. These laws in the hands of 
the geologist and paleontologist cast light on the geological occurrences of 
the earth's past, and they give an insight into the past life and death upon 
the earth and into the environments of this life." 

SCHAUFELBERGER, P., 1962, Geologic und Bodenlehre: Neues Jb. Geol. u. 
Palaont., Mh., 1962, no. 4, pp. 179-203. Pedology draws its resources 
from several of the physical and biological sciences, but geology by virtue 
of its concern with problems of weathering in general is the discipline 
which appropriately coordinates and unifies the various approaches to soil 
science. 

SCHEIDEGGER, ADRIAN EuGEN, 1960, Mathematical methods in geology: Am. J. 
Sci., vol. 258, pp. 218-221. The mathematical method is indispensable in 
testing the consistency of inferences drawn from different sets of geological 
data. 

SCHENGK, HUBERT GREGORY, 1961, Guiding principles in stratigraphy: Geol. 
Soc. India, J., vol. 2, pp. 1-10. Compares original and modern usages 
relating to the concepts of superposition, horizon tality, original continuity, 
uniformitarianism, faunal succession, strata identified by fossils, rock- 
stratigraphic unit, time-stratigraphic unit, and facies. 

SCHINDEWOLF, OTTO EfeiNRiCH, 1944, Grundlagen und Methoden der palaon- 
tologischen Chronologic: Berlin-Nikolassee, Gebriider Borntraeger, 152 pp. 
Because fossils, taken in their natural order of succession, record an evolu- 
tionary development which is both linear and irreversible, paleontology 
provides the surest basis for geological chronology. 

2 1944, Uber die Bedeutung der PalSontologie als geologische Grundwissen- 

schaft: Reichsamt fur Bodenforschung, Jb., vol. 63 (1942), pp. 629-676. 



312 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

3 1948, Wesen und Geschichte der Palaontologie; Probleme der Wissen- 

schaft in Vergangenheit und Gegenwart No. 9, Gerhard Kropp, ed.: 
Berlin, 108 pp. As a historical science, paleontology has provided an 
empirical basis for evolutionary theory in modern biology. By the same 
token, paleontology is basic to systematic stratigraphy and hence to geology 
in general. 

4 1957, Comments on some stratigraphic terms: Am. J. Sci., vol. 255, no. 6, 

pp. 394-399. "The sedimentary rocks, by themselves ... do not yield any 
specific time marks, setting aside the old law of superposition, which can 
provide relative age indications only in a restricted manner and which is 
unfit for age correlations." 

SCHNEER, CECIL JACK, 1960, History in science, Chapter 10, pp. 159-185 in 
The search for order; the development of the major ideas in the physical 
sciences from the earliest times to the present: New York, Harper, xvii 
and 398 pp. "The development of geological science, as a historical science, 
within the larger framework of the growth of natural philosophy, has a 
special importance that can be compared only with the development of 
astronomy as a descriptive science." 

SCHRODINGER, ERWIN, 1956, On the peculiarity of the scientific world view, 
pp. 178-228 in What is life? and other scientific essays: Garden City, N. Y., 
Doubleday, viii and 263 pp. "This object, the vivid and colourful picture 
of past events is one hundred percent purely ideal . . . Should one, there- 
fore, omit it and study only the actual remains . . .? 

The picture is not only a permissible tool, but also a goal ... it is hard 
to understand why that which is self-evident in the historical sciences 
ought to pass for heresy in the physical sciences, namely, to deal with 
events and situations that are inaccessible to direct observation. The 
historical sciences do that almost exclusively." 

SCHUH, FRIEDRICH, 1937, Gedanken uber die bei der tierischen Entwicklung 
hervortretenden Entwicklungsrichtungen: Palaont. Zs., vol. 19, no. 1-2, 
pp. 116-126. From an evolutionary point of view, progress is a series of 
psycho-organic victories over the inorganic world. 

SCHWINNER, ROBERT, 1943, 1st die Geologic wirklich eine "historische" Wis- 
senschaft?: Neues Jb. Min., GeoL, u. Palaont., 1943, Abt. B., no. 5, pp. 
130-136. It is misleading to call geology an historical science. History 
deals exclusively with man; geology is an explanatory natural science. 

SCRIVEN, MICHAEL, 1959, Explanation and prediction in evolutionary theory; 
Satisfactory explanation of the past is possible even when prediction of 
the future is impossible: Science, vol. 130, no. 3374, pp. 477-482. "The 
most important lesson to be learned from evolutionary theory today is a 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 313 

negative one: the theory shows us what scientific explanations need not do. 
In particular it shows us that one cannot regard explanations as unsatis- 
factory when they do not contain laws, or when they are not such as to 
enable the event in question to have been predicted." 

2 1961, The key property of physical laws inaccuracy, pp. 91-101 in 

Herbert Feigl and Grover Maxwell, eds., Current issues in the philosophy 
of science: New York; Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 484 pp. "The most 
interesting fact about laws of nature is that they are virtually all known to 
be in error. And the few exceptions . . . seem quite likely to become 
casualties before long ... but they represent great truths so we forgive them 
their errors." 

SCROPE, GEORGE JULIUS BUNCOMBE POULETT, 1858, The geology and extinct 
volcanos of central France, 2nd ed.: London, John Murray, xvii and 258 
pp. "The periods which to our narrow apprehension . . . appear of in- 
calculable duration, are in all probability but trifles in the calendar of 
nature. It is Geology that, above all other sciences, makes us acquainted 
with this important though humiliating fact." 

SEARES, FREDERICK HANLEY, 1938, The concept of uniformity, growth and reac- 
tions (Elihu Root lectures of Carnegie Institute of Washington on the 
influence of science and research on current thought): Carnegie Inst. 
Washington, Supp. Pub. 37, 50 pp. "Evolution . . . stands as the law of all 
the laws of science and thus symbolizes two things of interest here: the 
notion of pervasive recurrence and regularity in the world of phenomena 
the uniformity of nature and the growth of the notion of uniformity itself; 
in a word, the development of the idea that the phenomena of the physical world 
can be described by simple laws" 

SEDGWICK, ADAM, 1831, Address to the Geological Society, delivered on the 
evening of the 18th of February, 1831, on retiring from the President's 
Chair: Geol. Soc. London, Pr., 1826-1833, pp. 281-316. ". . . we all allow, 
that the primary laws of nature are immutable . . . and that we can only 
judge of effects which are past, by the effects we behold in progress . . . 
But to assume that the secondary combinations arising out of the primary 
laws of matter, have been the same in all periods of the earth, is ... an 
unwarranted hypothesis with no a priori probability, and only to be main- 
tained by an appeal to geological phaenomena." 

SEEGER, RAYMOND JOHN, 1958, Scientist and theologian?: Washington Acad. 
Sci. J., vol. 48, no. 5, pp. 145-152. ". . . all our views are based upon an 
underlying assumption of the uniformity of nature, not only those views 
of scientists but also those of theologians, for whom dependability is a 
sine qua nan." 



314 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

SEMPER, MAX, 1911, Bemerkungen iiber Geschichte der Geologic und daraus 
resultierende Lehren: Geol. Rundschau, vol. 2, pp. 263-277. "Ausserdem 
1st es in der Geologic gar nicht moglich, sich auf die Wiedergabe von Be- 
obachtungen zu beschranken. Jedes Profil enthalt cine grosse Anzahl 
von Angaben, die auf Schliissen, auf dem Zusammenwirken von Beob- 
achtungen und theoretischen Elementen beruhen." 

SEWARD, Sir ALBERT CHARLES, 1959, Plant life through the ages; a geological 
and botanical retrospect: New York, Hafner, xxi and 603 pp. "It does 
not in the least follow that because all living species of a genus are now 
confined to areas with a certain range of temperature, therefore extinct 
species, almost identical with the living species, were equally susceptible 
to limiting factors." 

SHERLOCK, ROBERT LIONEL, 1922, Man as a geological agent; an account of 
his action on inanimate nature: London, H. F. and G. Witherby, 372 pp. 
"Man's most permanent memorial is a rubbish heap, and even that is 
doomed to be obliterated." 

SHOTWELL, JAMES THOMSON, 1949, Time and historical perspective, in Time 
and its mysteries, ser. 3, pp. 63-91: New York, New York Univ. Press 
"... though we cover all time with numbers, we do so only in order to 
find things in it, and to know where we are when we find them ... In 
short we mark Time by events rather than events by Time." 

SHROCK, ROBERT RAKES, 1948, Sequence in layered rocks; a study of features 
and structures useful for determining top and bottom or order of succession 
in bedded and tabular rock bodies: New York, McGraw-Hill, xiii and 
507 pp. 

SIGAL, J., 1961, Existe-t-il plusieurs stratigraphies?: France, Bur. Rech. g6ol. 
et min., Serv. d'Inf. gol., B. (Chronique Mines d'Outre-mer, Suppl. 
no. 297) an. 13, pp. 2-5. Distinguishes between faciostratigraphy, zoneo- 
stratigraphy, and chronostratigraphy as aspects of stratigraphy whose 
respective concerns are with the establishment of local stratigraphic 
columns, the definition of units bounded by isochronous surfaces and the 
understanding of earth history. 

SIMPSON, GEORGE GAYLORD, 1941, The role of the individual in evolution: 
Washington Acad. Sci., J., vol. 31, no. 1, pp. 1-20. "Whatever happens in 
organic evolution, or indeed within the realm of the biological sciences, 
happens to an individual." 

2 1950, Evolutionary determinism and the fossil record: Sci. Monthly, vol. 

71, pp. 262-267. "The fossil record is consistent with historical causation 
that is in continuous flux, nonrepetitive, and therefore essentially non- 
predictive." 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 315 

3 1950, The meaning of evolution, a study of the history of life and of its 

significance for man: New Haven, Yale Univ. Press, xv and 364 pp. "It 
used to be usual to claim that value judgments have no part in science, 
but we are coming more and more to perceive how false this was. Science 
is essentially interwoven with such judgments. The very existence of sci- 
ence demands the value judgment and essential ethic that knowledge is 
good." 

A 1960, The world into which Darwin led us: Science, vol. 131, no. 3405, 

pp. 966-974. Astronomy made the universe immense; physics and related 
sciences made it lawful. "To all these discoveries and principles, which so 
greatly modified concepts of the cosmos, geology added two more of funda- 
mental, world-changing importance: vast extension of the universe in 
time, and the idea of constantly lawful progression in time." 

5 1960, The history of life, pp. 117-180 in Sol Tax, ed., Evolution after 

Darwin, vol. 1: Chicago, University of Chicago Press. "All science is 
philosophical, and the only philosophies capable of validation are those of 
scientists ... A scientist cannot so much as make an observation without 
reliance on a philosophical premise, such as the by no means self-evident 
minimal premise that there really is something to observe." 

6 1961, Principles of animal taxonomy: New York, Columbia University 

Press, xii and 247 pp. "All theoretical science is ordering and if ... 
systematics is equated with ordering, then systematics is synonomous with 
theoretical science. Taxonomy, in any case, is a science that is most 
explicitly and exclusively devoted to the ordering of complex data, and in 
this respect it has a special, a particularly aesthetic . . . , and . . . almost a 
superscientific place among the sciences." 

SMALL, JAMES, 1952, The time scale of organic evolution: Irish Astronom. J., 
vol. 2, no. 1, pp. 21-26. ". . . we can recognize that there is, and has been, 
as much law and order in organic evolution as there is and has been in 
astronomical evolution and on a similar time scale of millions of years." 

SMILEY, TERAH LEROY, ed. 9 1955, Geochronology: Univ. Arizona B., Physical 
Sci. B., 2, 200 pp. Twelve essays on scientific methods which can be 
applied to the dating of terrestrial events. 

SMITH, JAMES PERRIN, 1900, Principles of paleontologic correlation: J. Geol., 
vol. 8, pp. 673-697. "The geological succession of faunas has some irregu- 
larities and anomalies . . . but the displacements of the time scale are too 
slight and the uniformity in various separated regions too great to lay 
much stress on homotaxis as opposed to synchronism." 

SOLLAS, W. J., 1900, Evolutional geology: Science, n.s., vol. 12, pp. 745-756, 
787-796. With the growth of knowledge about the earth, catastrophic 
geology was supplanted by uniformitarian geology, and this in turn by 
evolutional geology. 



316 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

BONDER, RICHARD AUGUST, 1956, Gedanken zur theoretischen Geotektonik, 
pp. 381-395 272 Franz Lotze, ed., Geotektonisches Symposium zu Ehren 
von Hans Stille: Stuttgart, Ferdinand Enke, xx and 483 pp. "Die in der 
endogenen Geomechanik anzuwendende Methodik muss nach dem bekann- 
ten Prinzip von c Versuch und Irrtum* vorgehen. Die verschiedenen Grund- 
theorien sind fur den Theoretiker Probe-oder Testtheonen, die geotek- 
tonischen Thesen sind die Testthesen** 

SPENCER, HERBERT, 1884, The classification of the sciences, pp. 59-112 in 
Recent discussions in science, philosophy and morals: New York, D. Apple- 
ton. The sequence of concrete sciences astronomy, geology, biology, 
psychology, and sociology forms a natural and intergradational series 
which reflects the cosmic evolution of their subject matter. 

SPIEKER, EDMUND MAUTE, 1956, Mountain-building chronology and nature of 
the geologic time scale: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., B., vol. 40, no. 8, 
pp. 1769-1815. "The pattern of concepts, and the consequent way of 
thinking that the geologist brings to his observations . . . inevitably will 
control the data he obtains, either by selection or in outright discernment." 

STENO, NICOLAUS (NIELS STENSEN), 1667, Canis carchariae dissectum caput 
(The earliest geological treatise, translated from the Latin, with introduc- 
tion and notes, by Axel Garboe): London, Macmillan; New York, St. 
Martin's Press, 51 pp., 1958. "Since the ground from which the bodies 
resembling parts of animals does not produce this sort of body in our time 
(a); since it is likely that the soil in question has been soft in former times 
(b), indeed, presumably has been mixed up with waters (c); why, then, 
should we not be allowed to surmise that these bodies are remains of 
animals that lived in these waters?" 

STOREY, TARAS PHILIP, and PATTERSON, JOHN ROBERT, 1959, Stratigraphy 
traditional and modern concepts: Am. J. Sci., vol. 257, no. 10, pp. 707- 
721. "Whereas the traditional stratigrapher sets his sights high by regard- 
ing attributes of time as the guiding factor in stratigraphy, modern workers 
drift aimlessly about in their arbitrary philosophy that lithologic, biologic 
and time criteria should be treated without simultaneously relating one 
with the other." 

STRAHLER, ARTHUR NEWELL, 1952, Dynamic basis of geomorphology: Geol. 
Soc. Am., B., vol. 63, no. 9, pp. 923-938. "Two quite different view- 
points are used in dynamic (analytical) geomorphology and in historical 
(regional) geomorphology. The student of processes and forms per se is 
continually asking, 'What happens? 9 ; the historical student keeps raising 
the question, 'What happened?*" 

2 1958, Dimensional analysis applied to fluvially eroded landforms: Geol. 

Soc. Am., B., vol. 69, no. 3, pp. 279-300. "The rational phase of science, 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 317 

often associated with 'deductive science' in geology, consists of the formula- 
tion of explanations and general laws through logical steps of reasoning 
from a series of initial postulates which seem to be valid in the light of 
prior observation and experience." 

STUBBLEFIELD, CYRIL JAMES, 1954, The relationship of palaeontology' to stratig- 
raphy: Adv. Sci., vol. 11, pp. 149-159. "Both palaeontology and stratig- 
raphy are observational rather than experimental sciences, nevertheless 
however accurately the observations are recorded, they are but retrospec- 
tive in so far as they relate to natural processes." 

SUZUKI, Kom and KITAZAKI, UMEKA, 1951, On the stratigraphical meaning of 
time and space: Res. Inst. Nat. Res., Tokyo, Misc. Rept. no. 22, pp. 28-35. 
The dualistic conception of stratigraphic classification, according to which 
sequences of strata may be subdivided into lithological and chronological 
categories which are independent of one another, reflects a misunder- 
standing of what geologic time actually means. Since the chronicle of 
earth history is based upon the arrangement of rock masses in space, 
lithological and chronological units are conceptually inseparable. 

TASCH, PAUL, 1954, Search for the germ of Wegener's concept of continental 
drift: Osiris, vol. 11, pp. 157-167. Wegener's concept of continental drift 
may have its roots in Plato's myth of the lost continent of Atlantis. 

TEICHERT, CURT, 1958, Concepts of facies: Am. Assoc. Petroleum GeoL, B., 

vol. 42, no. 11, pp. 2718-2744. 
2 1958, Some biostratigraphical concepts: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 69, no. 1, 

pp. 99-120. "Biochronology shows the order of succession in which events 

occurred; a loosely fitting absolute scale comes from the radioactive 

methods." 

TEILHARD DE CHARDIN, PIERRE, 1951, La vision du pass6: ce qu'elle nous 
apporte, et ce qu'elle nous enl&ve, in Sciences de la terre, XXI Cong. 
Internat. Phil. Sci., Paris, 1949: Paris, Hermann, pp. 71-74. As our per- 
ceptions of space are affected by the geometric laws of perspective, so our 
perspectives of time are subject to certain natural constraints. In recon- 
structions of the geologic past, the slow rhythms of the universe are re- 
vealed, but the actual origins of entities which have evolved in time cannot 
ordinarily be resolved. 

THOMAS, GWYN, 1956, The species conflict abstractions and their applica- 
bility: Systematics Assoc., London, Pub. no. 2, pp. 17-31. Discusses 
differences among paleontologists, and between paleontologists and neon- 
tologists, on the definition of species, and suggests that paleontological 
taxonomy is, and will remain, as much an art as a science. 



318 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

THORBURN, W. M., 1918, The myth of Occam's Razor: Mind, vol. 27, pp. 
345-353. "The unfortunate carelessness of Tennemann and Hamilton . . . 
has turned a sound rule of Methodology- into a Metaphysical dogma . . . 
It is folly to complicate research by multiplying the objects of inquiry; but 
we know too little of the ultimate constitution of the Universe, to assume 
that it cannot be far more complex than it seems, or than we have any 
actual reason to suppose/ 3 

TIKHOMIROV, V. V., 1959, Aktualizm v trudakh russkikh geologov nachala 
XIX veka (Actualism in the works of Russian geologists at the beginning 
of the nineteenth century): Akad. Nauk. SSSR, Inst. Geol., Ocherki po 
istorii geol. znanii, vol. 8, pp. 154-164. The uniformitarian, or formal, 
approach to actualism leads to a dead end, because, according to this 
approach, we cannot explain the origin of rocks whose analogues are not to 
be found forming at the present time. On the other hand, the outright 
rejection of actualism leads to agnosticism regarding the possibility of 
deciphering the evolution of our planet. 

TOMKEIEFF, SERGEI IVANOVICH, 1946, James Hutton's "Theory of the Earth" 
(Hundred and fiftieth anniversary of the birth of modern geology) : Geolo- 
gists' Assoc., London, Pr., vol. 57, pt. 4, pp. 322-328. "Towards the end 
of the eighteenth century the heroic conception of human history was 
being replaced by one of gradual development composed of the actions 
and thoughts of a multitude of men and women. Condorcet was the expo- 
nent of this idea and his book was published in 1794. To the heroic concep- 
tion of human history corresponded the catastrophic conception of earth's 
history. This Hutton replaced by what may be called gradualism." 

2 1948, James Hutton and the philosophy of geology: Edinburgh Geol. Soc., 

Tr., vol. 14, pt. 2, pp. 253-276. Hutton's theory of the earth was based 
upon the principle of the uniformity of Nature; the postulate of deter- 
minism; the idea that the study of processes, rather than of matter, affords 
the better approach to geological problems; and the principle of integra- 
tion, which assumes that small events in their cumulative result lead to 
great changes. Hutton's principal contribution to geology was his concept 
of the geostrophic cycle, which he apparently borrowed from the life cycle 
of organisms. 

TOULMIN, GEORGE HOGG ART, 1783, The antiquity of the world, 2d ed.: London, 
T. Cadell, xiii and 208 pp. "If something always has existed, or must have 
been eternal, why not pay a deference to the magnificent and beautiful 
objects of whose existence we are certain? Why not grant eternity to 
nature? . . . Nature is invariably the same, her laws are eternal and im- 
mutable . . ." 

TOULMIN, STEPHEN EDELSTON, 1953, The philosophy of science; an introduction: 
London, Hutchinson's University Library, 176 pp. "... in whatever 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 319 

sense we understand the Uniformity Principle, whether as assumption, as 
discovery or as manifesto, it has one special weakness: that of irremediable 
vagueness. A principle stated in such general terms can be of no practical 
significance .... So it is not Nature that is Uniform, but scientific pro- 
cedure; and it is uniform only in this, that it is methodical and self-cor- 
recting." 

2 1961, Foresight and understanding; an enquiry into the aims of science: 

Indiana University Press, 116 pp. "Those who build up their sciences 
around a principle of regularity or ideal of natural order come to accept 
it as self-explanatory. Just because (on their view) it specifies the way in 
which things behave of their own nature, if left to themselves, they cease 
to ask further questions about it." 

TRUEMAN, ARTHUR ELIJAH, 1948, Geology today and tomorrow: Adv. Sci., 
vol. 5, no. 19, pp. 184-193. Among the principal contributions of geology- 
to general thought are the scale of geologic time, a world view of the 
history of life against this time scale, and an appreciation of the insignifi- 
cance of historical time as compared with the stages of human evolution 
and of vertebrate evolution in general. 

TSILIKIS, JOHN D., 1959, Simplicity and elegance in theoretical physics: Am. 
Scientist, vol. 47, pp. 87-96. "Truth is usually simple, and the discovery 
of simple equations for the description of natural phenomena gives some 
assurance that simple results involve factual truths." 

UMBOROVE, JOHANNES HERMAN FREDERIK, 1942, The pulse of the earth: The 
Hague, Martinus Nijhoff, xvi and 179 pp. "The historical succession of 
phenomena, their correlation and meaning, form the most attractive and 
interesting feature of geology." 

VOGELSANG, HERMANN PETER JOSEPH, 1867, Philosophic der Geologic und 
mikroskopische Gesteinsstudien: Bonn, Max Cohen, 229 pp. "Wo die 
Gegenwart aufhort, da fangt die Vergangenheit an; die eine kann nur 
durch die andere erklart werden." 

VYSOTSKII, B. P., 1961, Problema aktualizma i uniformisma i sistema metodov 
v geologii (The problem of actualism and uniformitarianism and the system 
of methods in geology): Akad. Nauk, SSSR, Inst. Filosofii, Voprosy 
Filosofii, no. 3, pp. 134-145. Actualism and uniformitarianism are differ- 
ent scientific concepts. Uniformitarianism is an hypothesis of a simple 
cyclic development in Nature; actualism is a method of investigation, by 
which the study of present phenomena and processes is used as a basis for 
discovering the geologic past and predicting the future. 

2 1961, Vozniknovenie uniformizma i sootnoshenie ego s aktualizmom (The 

origin of uniformitarianism and its relation to actualism): Akad. Nauk, 



320 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

SSSR, Inst. Geol., Ocherki po istorii geol. znanii, vol. 9, pp. 84-125. 
"... as a rule, hypotheses and ideas never die; they are partly incorporated 
into new theories . . . LyelPs periodicity does not contradict irreversible 
evolution; it is only one of its aspects . . . The uniformitarian approach, 
but not the uniformitarian philosophy, is valid on small scales, so that it 
still remains significant in the same sense that the decimal scale remains 
significant despite Einstein's theory of relativity." 

WADELL, HAKON ADOLPH, 1938, Proper names, nomenclature and classifica- 
tion: J. Geol., vol. 46, no. 3, pp. 546-568. "Geology is unfortunate in the 
respect that the things pertinent to the subject are difficult to arrange into 
a single well-constructed and complete classification." 

WALTHER, JOHANNES, 1893-1894, Einleitung in die Geologic als historische 
Wissenschaft: Jena, Gustav Fischer, vi and 1055 pp. "Wahrend die Geog- 
nosie beschreibt, die Formationslehre ordnet, ist die Erdgeschichte eine 
erklarende Disciplin, und daher bedarf die Geologie als historische Wissen- 
schaft anderer Methoden und anderer Hilfswissenschaften, um ihr hohes 
Ziel zu erreichen . . . Diese ... Art geologischer Erklarungs-versuche, die 
mann gewohnlich als Aktualismus bezeichnet, wollen wir die ontologische 
Methode nennen." 

WATSON, DAVID MEREDITH SEARES, 1951, Paleontology and modern biology: 
New Haven, Yale Univ. Press, xii and 216 pp. "Thus even the most 
extended flights of morphological argument have led to predictions which 
. . . have been verified by the description of actual fossil animals whose 
structure conforms exactly to expectation." 

WATTS, WILLIAM WHITEHEAD, 1911, Geology as geographical evolution: Geol. 
Soc. London, Quart. J., vol. 67, pp. Ixii-xciii. "The History of the Earth, 
so far as the Geologist is capable of following it through the geological 
systems and formations, is a history of successive geographies, and of the 
relations of these geographies to the living beings which successively 
characterised them. In the reading and restoration of these geographies 
there is but one unfailing guide, unceasing comparison, at every stage, of 
the ascertainable geological phenomena of the past with the known geo- 
graphical phenomena of the present." 

WATZNAUER, ADOLF, 1956, Kritische Bemerkungen zur wissenschaftlichen 
Begriflsbildung: Zs. angew. Geol., vol. 2, no. 2-3, pp. 64-65. "Das geolo- 
gische Weltbild ist das Ziel der geologischen Wissenschaften." 

WEBER, CHRISTIAN OLIVER, 1927, The reality of time and the autonomy of 
history: Monist, vol. 37, pp. 521-540. "... suppose that we reconstruct 
the world's past, by applying our present laws to the data of the world's 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 321 

present state. It is evident that we could never meet with a contradiction 
in making this reconstruction, provided that no disharmony existed be- 
tween our present data and laws. Then, suppose we find deep in the earth 
a geological condition which shows a past different from the one we have 
reconstructed? Will we conclude that the laws of mechanics have evolved, 
and that they were different in the past? No, for the scientist can always 
say that our present laws of mechanics are faulty, and must be modified 
to cover the new facts. This amounts to saying that scientific laws do not 
enable us to recover historical facts." 

WEDEKIND, RUDOLF, 1916, t)ber die Grundlagen und Methoden der Bio- 
stratigraphie: Berlin, Borntraeger, 60 pp. "Das grundlegende Prinzip 
jeder Zeitmessung lautet: Die gleichen Ursachen bedurfen des gleichen %eitinter- 
valls, um am gleichen Objekt die gleiche Veranderung hervorzurufen" 

WEGMANN, EUGENE, 1950, Diskontinuitat und Kontinuitat in der Erdgeschichte; 
ein Nachwort: Geol. Rundschau, vol. 38, no. 2, pp. 125-132. The tension 
generated between catastrophists and uniformitarians continues to stimu- 
late investigations and discoveries. 

2 1951, L' analyse structural en geologic, in Sciences de la terre, XXI 

Cong. Internat. Phil. Sci., Paris, 1949: Paris, Hermann, pp. 55-64. In 
reconstructing a succession of shapes which have led to the development 
of a geological structure in its present form, structural geology accomplishes 
one of its main objectives without appeal to "causes" or "forces." This 
manner of explanation is appropriate to geology, which is above all an 
historical science. 

3 1958, Das Erbe Werner's und Button's: Geologic (Berlin), vol. 7, no. 3-6, 

pp. 531-559. "Die Herstellung der geologischen Geschichte ist eine Art 
Zusammensetzspiel in Zeit und Raum. Viele Stucke dieses 'Puzzles' 
fehlen und zwingen uns, um die Lucken herum zu bauen. Die Art des 
Zusammenfugens der einzelnen Bausteine hangt weitgehend vom Leit- 
bildeab." 

WEIZSACKER, CARL FRIEDRICH VON, 1949, The history of nature: Chicago, 
Univ. Chicago Press, 191 pp. "Since practically every event in nature 
produces heat though often very small amounts every event is in the 
strictest sense irreversible. Every pendulum comes to a stand-still. Even 
the motion of the planets around the sun is constantly slowed down ever 
so little by interstellar gas. Hence no event in nature is repeated exactly. 
Nature is a unique course of events." 

WESTGATE, LEWIS GARDNER, 1940, Errors in scientific method glacial geology: 
Sci. Monthly, vol. 51, no. 4, pp. 299-309. "Geology differs from most 
sciences in that its investigations are geographically determined ... It was 
no accident that stratigraphic geology took its rise in central England . . . 
and ... in the Paris Basin . . ." 



322 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

WHEELER, HARRY EUGENE, 1947, Base of the Cambrian system: J. GeoL, 
vol. 55, no. 3, pp. 153-159. ". . . how can we continue to indulge in a 
concept which regards the base of the Cambrian system as a time horizon 
but determines that base by physical criteria that are not amenable to 
interregional correlation?" 

2 (and Beesley, Edward Maurice), 1948, Critique of the time-stratigraphic 

concept: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 59, no. 1, pp. 75-86. "This variation in 
age of lithogenetic units is ... a fundamental truth in stratigraphy, nearly 
equal in significance to the laws of superposition and faunal succession, 
and is ... designated therefore as the principle of temporal transgression'' 

3 1958, Time-stratigraphy: Am. Assoc. Petroleum GeoL, B., vol. 42, no. 5, 

pp. 1047-1063. ". . . just as rock units of one kind or another are defined 
to fill all space occupied by the determinable present geologic record, 
time-stratigraphic units of one kind or another must be conceived or 
designated to account for all interpretable space-time." 

A 1959, Stratigraphic units in space and time: Am. J. Sci., vol. 257, no. 10, 

pp. 692-706. "Time has no meaning in stratigraphy unless it is tied to the 
spatial record and then substituted for its vertical dimension." 

WHEWELL, WILLIAM, 1858, History of scientific ideas, being the first part of 
the philosophy of the inductive sciences, 3rd. ed., vol. 2: London, John S. 
Parker, xv and 324 pp. "I conceive that the assertion of an a priori claim 
to probability and philosophical spirit in favour of the doctrine of uni- 
formity, is quite untenable. We must learn from an examination of all 
the facts, and not from any assumption of our own, whether the course of 
nature be uniform." 

2 1872, History of the inductive sciences from the earliest to the present 

time, 3rd. ed., 2 vols.: New York, D. Appleton. "The effects must them- 
selves teach us the nature and intensity of the causes which have operated; 
and we are in danger of error, if we seek for slow and shun violent agencies 
further than the facts naturally direct us, no less than if we were parsi- 
monious of time and prodigal of violence." 

WHITE, ANDREW DICKSON, 1930, A history of the warfare of science with theol- 
ogy in Christendom: New York, D. Appleton, 2 vols. Chapter 5, "From 
Genesis to Geology" sketches the contest between geological and theo- 
logical views of nature to near the end of the nineteenth century. 

WHITTARD, WALTER FREDERICK, 1953, The enigma of the earliest fossils: 
British Naturalists' Soc., Pr., vol. 28, pt. 4, pp. 289-304. 

WIENER, NORBERT, 1961, Newtonian and Bergsonian time. Chapter 1, pp. 
30-44, in Cybernetics, or control and communication in the animal and 
the machine, 2nd. ed.: New York, M. I. T. Press and John Wiley, 212 pp. 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 323 

"Bergson emphasized the difference between the reversible time of physics, 
in which nothing new happens, and the irreversible time of evolution and 
biology, in which there is always something new . . . The record of paleon- 
tology indicates a definite longtime trend, interrupted and complicated 
though it might be, from the simple to the complex." 

WILLIAMS, HENRY SHALER, 1893, The making of the geological time-scale: 
J. Geol, vol. 1, pp. 180-197. "Chronological time periods in geology are 
not only recognized by means of the fossil remains preserved in the strata, 
but it is to them chiefly that we must look for the determination and 
classification on a time basis." 

WILLIAMS, JAMES STEELE, 1954, Problems of boundaries between geologic 
systems: Am. Assoc. Petroleum Geol., B., vol. 38, no. 7, pp. 1602-1605. 
Discusses criteria that have been used to determine the boundary between 
the Devonian and Carboniferous systems in Missouri, and concludes that 
it is rarely possible to establish intercontinental correlation of thin units 
near boundaries between systems. 

WILLISTON, SAMUEL WENDELL, 1914, Water reptiles of the past and present: 
Chicago, Univ. Chicago Press, vii and 251 pp. "... it is also a law in 
evolution that the parts in an organism tend toward reduction in number, 
with the fewer parts greatly specialized in function, just as the most perfect 
human machine is that which has the fewest parts, and each part most 
highly adapted to the special function it has to subserve." 

WILMARTH, MARY GRACE, 1925, The geologic time classification of the United 
States Geological Survey compared with other classifications, accompanied 
by the original definitions of era, period and epoch terms: U. S. Geol. 
Survey, B. 769, vi and 138 pp. 

WILSON, JOHN ANDREW, 1959, Stratigraphic concepts in vertebrate paleontol- 
ogy: Am. J. ScL, vol. 257, no. 10, pp. 770-778. "Type sections in strati- 
graphic classification should have no more significance than name bearers. 
They are one dimensional samples of three dimensional bodies of rock." 

2 et a/., 1961, Geochronologic and chronostratigraphic units, Note 25 of the 

American Commission on Stratigraphic Nomenclature: Am. Assoc. Petro- 
leum Geol., B., vol. 45, no. 5, pp. 666-673. "... time can be logically 
thought of, in geology, as being coincident with space." 

WILSON, JOHN Tuzo, 1952, Orogenesis as the fundamental geological process: 
Am. Geophys. Union, Tr., vol. 33, no. 3, pp. 444-449. "Now if, as is 
believed to be the case, geologists accept the assumption that the general 
laws of physics and chemistry apply to the earth and that no other ex- 
clusively geological laws are necessary, then the fundamental processes 



324 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

arrived at from physical reasoning must be the same as those arrived at 
from geological reasoning." 

2 1959, Geophysics and continental growth: Am. Scientist, vol. 47, no. 1, 

pp. 1-24. "A belief that the earth does operate in a manner which can be 
generalized in some simple way is justified because that is usual in nature." 

WILSON, MORLEY EVANS, 1956, Early Precambrian rocks of the Temiskaming 
region, Quebec and Ontario, Canada: Geol. Soc. Am., B., vol. 67, no. 10, 
pp. 1397-1430. " c No vestige of a beginning 5 is as true of the earliest Pre- 
cambrian rocks of the Canadian Shield as it seemed to Hutton of the 
Highlands of Scotland in 1785." 

WINTER, JOHN GARRETT, 1916, The prodromus of Nicolaus Steno's dissertation 
concerning a solid body enclosed by process of nature within a solid: an 
English version with an introduction and explanatory notes, with a fore- 
word by William H. Hobbs: Univ. of Michigan Studies, Humanistic Ser., 
vol. XI, Contributions to the History of Science, Pt. II, pp. 165-283; 
New York, Macmillan. "If a solid substance is in every way like another 
solid substance, not only as regards the conditions of surface, but also as 
regards the inner arrangement of parts and particles, it will also be like 
it as regards the manner and place of production . . ." 

WOLMAN, M. GORDON, and MILLER, JOHN P., 1960, Magnitude and frequency 
of forces in geomorphic processes: J. Geol., vol. 68, no. 1, pp. 54-74. 
"Analyses of the transport of sediment by various media indicate that a 
large portion of the 'work' is performed by events of moderate magnitude 
which recur relatively frequently rather than by rare events of unusual 
magnitude." 

WOODFORD, ALFRED OSWALD, 1935, Historical introduction to geology: Pan- 
American Geol., vol. 64, no. 1, pp. 1-7. 

2 1956, What is geologic truth?: J. Geol. Education, vol. 4, no. 1, pp. 5-8. 

"... complicated problems can usually be broken down into simple parts. 
Then each element can be attacked by one of several more or less rigorous 
methods ... A solution, if found, may be (1) mathematically rigorous 

(2) the sole surviving hypothesis, after exhausting other possibilities 

(3) intuitive but fitting an extensive series of known facts, or (4) more or 
less doubtful." 

3 1960, Bedrock patterns and strike-slip faulting in southwestern California: 

Am. J. Sci., vol. 258-A (Bradley Volume), pp. 400-417. When two slip- 
solutions for faults are possible, "tentative choices may be made by use 
of the rule Disjunctions minimae, disjunctiones optimae . . . This rule may be 
considered a quantitatively parsimonious relative of Ockham's law . . ." 

WOOLNOUGH, WALTER GEORGE, 1937, Fact and theory in geology, with special 
reference to petroleum, salt and coal: Australian and New Zealand Assoc. 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 325 

Adv. Sci., Kept. 23rd Meeting, pp. 54-79. "I desire very diffidently to 
suggest . . . that a set of physiographic conditions has existed from time 
to time in past geological eras of which we have no true example at the 
present time; and that variants of these conditions may serve to explain at 
least some of the difficulties with which we are faced in an endeavour to 
explain the origin of oil, salt, and coal." 

WRIGHT, CHARLES WILL, 1958, Order and disorder in nature: Geologists' 
Assoc., London, Pr., vol. 69, pp. 77-82. Geology comprises a group of 
sciences unified chiefly in their concern with time and process. The 
geologist should occasionally review his store of purely factual information, 
for the order and regularity of nature are in the last analysis assumptions. 

ZEUNER, FREDERICK EBERHARD, 1952, Dating the past; an introduction to 
geochronology: London, Methuen, xx and 495 pp. Describes methods 
and principal results of geochronology, "the science of dating in terms of 
years those periods of the past to which the human historical calendar does 
not apply." 



Index To Bibliography 



Abstraction 

in scientific investigations: Niggli 
Actualism (see also Uniformity, principle of) 

Beurlen 1, 2; Bulow 2; Kumnierow; Rutten 2; Tikhomirov; Vysotskii 1 
classical: Beringer, Hoff 

compared \xith uniformitarianism: Hooykaas 1 ; Vysotskii 1 
contemporary: Beringer 

Engels' criticism of Lyellian uniformitarianism: Engels; Gordeev 2 
essential to historical geology: Andree 
Lomonosov's: Gordeev 2 

principle: Backhand; Bubnoff 1; Cotta; Ebert; Hooykaas 2; Khain 1 
relation to analogical reasoning: Hooykaas 1 
temporal limitations: Bemmelen 1 
working hypothesis: Bemmelen 1 
Actuogeology 

Schafer 
Actuopaleontology 

Schafer 
Age determinations 

iso topic: Kulp 
Age of the Earth 

geological evidence: Goodchild 
Analogical reasoning 
Gilbert 1, 2 

basis of uniformitarianism: Hooykaas 1, 2 
examples from historical geology: Watts 
fallacy in organism-epiorganism metaphor: Simpson 1 
in paleoecology: Cloud 
in geomorphology: Baulig 3 
limitations: Hooykaas 1 
Applied geology {see Geology, applied) 
Archeological stratigraphy 

methods: Smiley 
Astronomy 

bearing on historical geology: Nolke 
Atmosphere 

preactualistic and actual istic: Rutten 3 

326 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 327 

Biochemistry 

comparative: Rutten 3 
Biochronology 

Schindewolf 1; Teichert 2 
Bioecology 

use of principle of uniformity: Clements 
Biogenesis 

multiple: Rutten 3 
Biogeography 

Mayr 1 
Biostratigraphy 

Moore 1 

definition, contribution to geochronology: Teichert 2 

nomenclature: Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature 

principles and methods: Wedekind 

synonym of stratigraphy: Schindewolf 4 
Boundaries, chronostratigraphic 

Bell 
Boundaries, stratigraphic 

difficulties of intercontinental correlation: Williams, J. S. 

objective character of Mesozoic-Cenozoic boundary: Jeletzky 2 



Cambrian 

definition of base: Wheeler 1 
Cartography, geologic (see Maps, geologic) 
Case histories 

Economic geology: Joralemon 

Lake Bonneville Basin: Gilbert 1 

value in scientific education: Gilbert 1 
Catastrophes 

climatic: King, C. 

erosional: Wolman 

extinction of animals, end of Mesozoic: Jeletzky 2 

erogenic: King, C. 

place in uniform nature: Dawson 

volcanic: King, C. 
Catastrophism 

Cannon 2, 4; Eisley; Geikie 2; Gillispie; Greene; Le Conte; Wegmann 1; Wheweli 2 

bibliography and quotations: Holder 

catastrophist-uniformitarian debate, false issue: Herschel 2 
heuristic values of: Wegmann 1 

compared with uniformitarianism: Rutten 3 

criticisms by German and French geologists: Bulow 2 

Davis* tendency toward: Khain 1 

defended: King, C.; Sedgwick 



328 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

early Greek historiography: Collingwood 1 

extinction of Mesozoic animals: Jeletzky 2 

French: Billow 2 

historically oriented theory: Bulow 2 

illustrated by examples: Murchison 

opposed: Ne\\ell 1 

psychological roots: Berry 2 

relationship to theism: Hooykaas 2 
Categories 

natural: Koch 
Causality 

Miller, H. 

in geomorphology: Baulig 2 
Causes 

ancient vs. present in geology: Cayeux 
Chronology 

diastrophic: Schindewolf 1 

geologic: Wilson, J. A. 2 

ortho- and parachronology: Schindewolf 1 

paleontologic: Schindewolf 1 

Chronostratigraphic units (see Time-stratigraphic units, Time) 
Chronostratigraphy 

Sigal 

boundaries: Bell 
Civil service mind 

workings in paleontology: Rastall 
Classification 

artificiality of geological schemes: Berry 2 

biological: Simpson 6 

concept of "type": Niggli 

coordinate relational: Gilbert 1 

crystals: Niggli 

empirical- Gilbert 1 

general: Koch 

genetic classification in tectonics: Krynine 

genetic, land forms: Davis 5 

geological: Wadell 

geotectonic elements: Krynine 

land forms: Davis 5 

linear relational: Gilbert 1 

minerals: Niggli 

natural classes: Gilbert 1 

natural phenomena: Hedberg 1 

paleontologic and neontologic: Hawkins 1 

relational: Gilbert 1 

stratigraphic: Interdept. Strat. Comm., USSR; Am. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 329 

Climatic fluctuations 

basis of Pleistocene chronology: Brouwer 
Columnar sections 

asymmetry and transiiiveness: Griffiths 
Comparative economic geology (see also Geology, applied) 

case histories: Joralemon 
Comprehensibility, hypothesis of 

Schrodinger 
Concentration of mineral substances 

geologic principle: Russell 
Continuity, principle of 

Davis 2; Nicholson 

use in petrology: Deer 
Controversies 

granite controversy: Read 3 

uniformitarian-catastrophist debate: Cannon 1 
Cope's law 

Simpson 2 
Correlation, stratigraphic 

Berry 2 

catastrophist influences: Berry 1 

contemporaneity of strata: Huxley 1 

criteria: Berry 1 ; Rodgers; Williams, J. S. 

diastrophism an inadequate criterion: Spieker 

difficulties of intercontinental correlation: Williams, J. S. 

homotaxis vs. synchronism: Smith 

meaning: Rodgers 

paleontologic: Berry 1; Smith; Spieker 

Precambrian: Haughton; James 

principles: Berry 1 

Wernerian influences: Williams, J. S. 
Cosmology 

cosmological uniformity: Bondi 2 

functional and evolutionary aspects: Simpson 5 

geological and biological implications of Milne's cosmology: Haldane 1 

postulate of simplicity: Gold 

problem of order: Simpson 5 
Cosmolysis 

principle of: Blanc 
Covered-interval decision 

Brown 2 
Crystals (see also Mineralogy) 

ideal and real: Niggli 
Cuvier 

contributions to systematic descriptive geology: Whewell 2 
Cyclic phenomena 



330 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

Gordeev 1 

bearing on principle of uniformity: Barrell 

earth history: Chamberlin 2 

erosional: Bgthune 1, 2; Judson 2; King 1; Penck 

geochemical: Earth 

geologic: Umbgrove 

Mutton's geostrophic cycle: Playfair; TomkeiefF 2 

vs. linear processes: Schindewolf 1 

Dacque's principle 

Simpson 2 
Darwin, Charles 

debt to Lyell: Cannon 1 
Darwinism 

Beringer 

implications regarding status of man: Simpson 4 
Data, geological 

categories: Krumbein 2 
Davis, W. M. 

contributions to philosophy of geology: Daly 2 
Davis 5 cycle of erosion 

Davis 5 

critique: B6thune 2; Judson 2 
Decision making 

Brown 2 
Deductive method 

Popper 2 

Davis* erosion cycle: Daly 2 

explanation: Kitts 

in geological mapping: Robertson 

in geomorphology: Davis 5 

weakness of Davisian geomorphology: B6thune 2 
Deductivism 

Popper 2 
Definitions 

Koch; Wadell 
Demarcation 

problem: Popper 2 
Dendrochronology 

methods: Smiley 
Denudation 

human vs. natural: Sherlock 
Deperet's law 

Simpson 2 
Description 

geologic: Koch 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 331 

Determinism 

Chamberlin 3; Kober; Simpson 1 

in evolution: Simpson 2 

postulate: TomkeiefF 2 
Developmental ism 

Eisley 
Dialectic materialism 

Khainl 

basis in history of nature: Engels 

bearing on geology: Gordeev 1 

laws: Engels 

Lomonosov's: Aprodov 

"struggle of the opposites": Popov 
Diastems 

BarreU 
Diastrophism 

aperiodic: Berry 2 

geographically localized: Berry 2 

laws: Bucher 3 

not a reliable basis of interregional correlation: Wheeler 1 

outgrowth of catastrophism: Wheeler 4 

theory tested by paleontological evidence: Henbest 
Dimensional analysis 

applied to geomorphology: Strahler 2 
Discovery, paleontologic 

human factors: Henbest 
Discovery, scientific 

logic: Popper 2 
Doctrine of irreversibility of evolution 

Romer 1 
Doctrine of permanency of ocean basins 

Le Conte 
Dollo's law 

Simpson 2 
Dynamics, geologic 

scope: Whewell 2 
Dynamism 
Beringer 

Economic geology (see Geology, applied) 
Economy, law (see Simplicity, principle of) 
Emergentism 

Miller, H. 
Empirical science 

methodological unity: Hempel 1 

qualitative and quantitative: Strahler 2 



332 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

thought schemes: Koch 
Empiricism 

fundamental thesis: Popper 2 
Endogenesis 

Amstutz 

geomorphologic: Penck 
Engineering geology 

scope: Galbraith 
Entropy 

landscape evolution: Leopold 
Epigenesis 

Amstutz 
Epiorganisms 

relation to totalitarianism: Simpson 1 
Eras, geologic 

origin: Stubblefield 
Errors in scientific method 

glacial geology: Westgate 
Ethical systems 

naturalistic: Simpson 3 
Evidence 

geologic: Richey; Vogelsang 

paleontologic: Moore 1 

paleoecologic: Cloud; Ladd 

taxonomic: Simpson 6 
Evolution, general 

cosmic: Milne 

nature: Kober 

not a universal law of nature: Popper 1 

organic and inorganic: Gotta 

supreme law of science: Scares 

universal phenomenon: Schuh 
Evolution, inorganic 

Goudge 2; Mason; Wilson, J. T. 2 

geographical: Davis 5; Watts 

geoxnorphic: Leopold 

hillslopes: King 1 

landscape: Crickmay; Judson 2 

mineral assemblages: Roever 

oceanic: Daly 1 
Evolution, organic 

Simpson 3 

adaptation: Simpson 3 

adaptative vs. progressive: Schuh 

amoral: Simpson 4 

archetypes: Simpson 1 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 333 

and catastrophism: King, C. 

causality: Simpson 3 

comparison of neo-Darwinian and orthogenetic theories: Grene 

controlled: Haldane 2 

Darwinian theories, reductivism in mechanistic aspects: Grene 

doctrine of irreversibility: Romer 1 

epistemological implications: Grene 

evolutionary biology: Mayr 1 

"explosive": Henbest 

extinction: Simpson 3 

fatalism: Simpson 1 

finalist views: Simpson 3 

historical process: Simpson 2 

holistic views: Broom 

human: Haldane 2 

individualism: Clarke 

laws: Hawkins 2; Rensch; Simpson 2, 3; Small 

materialistic and mechanistic views: Simpson 3 

metaphysical theories: Simpson 1 

negative and positive eugenics: Haldane 2 

neo-Darwinian dogma: Small 

opportunism: Simpson 3 

opposed to uniformitarianism: Gannon 1 

organic and inorganic: Schuh 

orthogenesis: Jepsen; Romer 1; Simpson 1, 3 

paleontologic contributions: Simpson 4 

plants: Seward 

principles applied to civilizations: Hawkins 

progress: Simpson 3 

relation to Christian philosophy: Simpson 3 

selection: Jepsen 

slow development: Haldane 2 

societal: Simpson 3 

synthetic theory: Simpson 3 

teleological theories: Romer 1 

unknowable: Rutten 3 

vitalist views: Simpson 3 
Evolutionism 

geoxnorphic: Khain 1 
successor to uniformitarianism: Geikie 2 
synthesis of uniformitarianism and catastrophism: Le Conte 
Exogenesis 

in geomorphology: Penck 
relation to "higher superstition": Amstutz 
Experimental geology 
Bemmelen 1; Coombs; Demay; Leclercq 



334 CLAUDE G. ALBRITTON, JR. 

beginnings: Wegmann 3 

geostatic and geodynamic aspects: Broggi 

limitations: Bemmelen 2 

misleading experiments: Kuenen 

suitable problems: Kuenen 

tectonics: Beurlen 2 

theory of scale models: Hubbert 1 

value: Kuenen 

vs. natural science: Miller, H. 
Explanation 

causal: Gallic; Goudge 1; Popper 1 

causal lines: Gallic 

complex events: Kitts 

deductive: Kitts 

explanation sketches: Hempel 1 

genetic: Beckner; Goudge 2 

geological: Kitts; Vogelsang 

historical: Beckner; Frankel; Gallic; Goudge 3; Hempel 1; Kitts 

insufficiency of logical-empiricist views: Barker 1 

logical character: Hempel 2 

phylogenetic: Gallic 

relation to description: Mises 

retrodiction: Gallic; Gould 

scientific: Hempel 1; Scriven 1 

supernatural: Page 

ideological: Beckner 
Extinction 

correlation with physical events: Camp 

usual fate of species: Simpson 5 

Facies, sedimentary 

classification: Moore 2 

concept: Gressly; Teichert 1 

definition: Moore 2 

faciostratigraphy: Sigal 

nomenclature: Moore 2 

variation in usage: Moore 2 
Falsifiability 

criterion for testing scientific theories: Popper 2 
Fatalism 

evolutionary: Simpson 1 
Faunal sequence, principle of 

Newell 4; Rutten 

deduced from laws of superposition and organic evolution: McLaren 

importance to concept of geologic time: Hawkins 1 

importance to organic evolution: Hawkins 1 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 335 

law: Wheeler 2 
Finalism, in evolution 

Simpson 2 
Formation, stratigraphic 

ambiguities: Schindewolf 4 

use of fossils in defining: McLaren 
Fossil record 

adequacy: Clarke 

bias: Newell 2 

causal gaps: Newell 2 

fossil populations: Newell 2 

imperfection: Hawkins 1; Lyell 

nature: Newell 2 

preservation: Newell 2 

reliability: Newell 2 
Fossils (see also Fossil record and Paleontology) 

arguments for organic origin: Steno 

evolution of ideas: Greene 

history of interpretation: Haber 

specimens, probability of discovery: Newell 3 

use in defining formations: McLaren 

Generalizations 

distributive: Spieker 

universal: Gould 
Genetic sciences 

Gallic 

vs. nongenetic sciences: Miller, H. 
Geochemical cycle 

Earth 
Geochronology 

accuracy of radiocarbon dates: Hunt 

astronomical aspects: Smiley 

climatic fluctuations: Brouwer 

definition: Jeletzky 1 

importance of fossils: Schindewolf 4 

methods: Smiley; Zeuner 

principles: Brouwer 

radiochemical dating: Smiley 

Recent: Morrison 

relative vs. absolute dating: Rutten 3 

sedimentary vis-a-vis intrusive igneous rock: Rutten 3 
Geochronometry 

Kulp 
Geocosmology 

branch of historical geology: Broggi 



336 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

Geodynamics 

definition: Broggi 
Geogeny 

same as historical geology: Broggi 
Geography (see Geomorphology) 
Geological history 

definition: Moore 2 

record: Moore 2 
Geologic climate units 

definition: Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature 
Geologic time scale (see Time, geologic) 
Geologic-time units 

definition, nomenclature, ranks: Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature 
Geo-logismus 

Kober 
Geologists 

classicists and romanticists: Bemmelen 1 

contributions to society: Nolan 

habits of thought: Nolan 

increasing numbers: Nolan 

intercommunication : Roger 

motivation: Woodford 2 

specialization: Nolan 

Geology (see also Experimental geology, Geomorphology, Historical geology, Petrog- 
raphy, Petrology, Stratigraphy, Structural geology) 

age of earth; evolution of ideas: Greene 

applied: Berkey; DeGolyer; Galbraith; Joralemon; Miller, B.; Richey 

applied to military history: Grabau 

background of history: Merriam 

barriers to progress: Roger 

basic assumptions: Chamberlin 3; Woodford 1 

basic words: Rossiter 

basis of modern industrial society: Read 2 

basis of a rational world view: Haarmann 

bearing of astronomical hypotheses: NSlke 

biblical: North 1 

bibliography: Roger 

boundaries of knowledge: Harrassowitz 2 

categories: Koch 

central theme: Bradley 

"classical period": Khain 2 

classification vs. ordering: Bemmelen 1 

compared with history: Kitts 

concern with aggregates: Spencer 

concern with time and space: Bubnoff 3; Judson 1 

concrete science: Spencer 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 337 

conflict with religion, England, 1790-1850: Gillespie 

contribution to biology: Mayr 1 

contribution to Darwinian evolution: Gillispie; Greene 

contribution to general thought: Engels; Hawkins 2; Lyell; Simpson 4; Trueman; 

Whewell 2 

"critical period": Khain 2 
cyclic character of geologic history: Lucius 
data analysis: Krumbein 2 
decision making: Brown 2 
definition: Hubbert 2; Spencer 
derivative natural science: Bliss 
descriptive: Harrassowitz 2; Mises; Whewell 2 
descriptive vs. historical: Harrassowitz 1 
development of ideas: North 1, 2; Vogelsang 
distinguished from geography: Judson 1 
distinguished from history: Collingwood 1 
distinguished from mineralogy: Whewell 2 
distinguished from physical sciences: Goguel 2 
disunity: McLachlan 
dogma: Haarmann 
dynamic geology: Bucher 2 
elementary facts: Demay 
emergent phenomena: Bemmelen 1, 2 
evidence: Richey 

evolutional vs. catastrophic and uniformitarian: Sollas 
expansion of scope: Nolan 
experimental: Bemmelen 1; Bubnoff 3; Coombs; Demay; Kuenen; Leclercq; 

Wegmann 3 

explanatory natural science: Khain 2; Schwinner 
fallacies: Harrassowitz 2 

fields: Bliss; Broggi; Galbraith; Judson 1; Roger 
fundamental idea: Le Conte 
geographical evolution: Watts 
geological dynamics: Whewell 2 
goal: Khain 2; Launay 
"heroic period": Khain 2 
high school subject: Bubnoff 2 
hindrances to development: Rossiter 
historical: Becker; Bucher 2; Ebert; Feuer 2; Gillispie; Harrassowitz 2; Johnson 1; 

Moore 2; Schneer; Vogelsang 
historical explanation: Kitts 
historical method: Bubnoff 1 ; Goguel 2 
historical science: Bemmelen 1,2; Cannon 3; Carnap; Judson 1; Le Conte; McLaren; 

Merriam; Nagel; Parks 2; Schindewolf 1; Schneer; Umbgrove; Walther 
historical and scientific: Bucher 1; Bradley 
historico-theoretical natural science: Miller, H. 



338 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

history of ideas: Coombs; Eisley; Gillispie; Holder; Launay 

history of, importance to geologists: Potonie 

human values: Hawkins 2 

hypotheses: Chamberlin 3 

ignorance of, on part of government officials: Read 2 

imaginary entities: Kalkowsky 

inductive method: Le Conte 

inquiry: Bucher 2 

laws: Bucher 1; James; Kitts; Whewell 2; Woodford 1 

literature of: Roger 

logical structure, need for reexamination: Hubbert 3 

Lomonosov's contributions: Khain 2 

mathematical: Krumbein 1; Leopold; Scheidegger 

metaphysical and anti-historical tendencies: Gordeev 1 

method: Gilbert 1, 2; Launay; Lucius; Woodford 1 

military: Read 2 

model: Hubbert 1 ; Jacobs; Judson 1 

Mosaic: Haber 

motivations for studying: Bucher 2 

neglect by schools: Read 2 

nomenclature: Whewell 2 

not a historical science: Bubnoff 3; Schwinner 

not a morphologic science: Popov 

not an exact science: North 2 

not a predictive science: Grabau 

objectives: Emmons, Page 

observation, interpretation and theory: Demay 

observations: Chamberlin 3; Haughton; Haarmann 

outrageous hypotheses: Davis 3 

palaetiological science: Whewell 2 

peculiarities: Grabau 

phenomenal: Whewell 2 

philosophical studies, metaphysical element: Andrews 

philosophy: Beringer; Clarke; Launay; Page; Whewell 1 ; Vogelsang 

physical geology, status: Whewell 2 

physical and historical: Hall 

physical vs. historical: Wilson, J. T. 1 

physical, scope: Galbraith; Whewell 2 

prediction: Krumbein 1; Teichert 2 

prediction and retrodiction: Schrddinger 

principles: Emmons 

probabilistic science: Brown 2 

problems: Launay 

processes: Bucher 2 

progress: Coombs 

pure and applied: Coombs 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 339 

quantification: Krumbein 2 

quantitative: Coombs; Krumbein 1; Leopold; Scheidegger 

reconstructive art: Grabau 

reflected in literature: Lament 

relation to archeology: Judson 3 

biology: Mayr 1 

civil engineering: Read 2 

cosmogony: Sollas 

geography: Davis 2 

geophysics: Goguel 1; Gutenberg; Haughton; Hubbert 2; Wilson, J. T. 1 

history: Collingwood 2; Cotta; Judson 3; Schwinner 

other sciences: Bemmelen 1; Bubnoff 2; Hubbert 2; Lyell; Miller, B.; Vogelsang; 
Wright 

paleontology: Moore 1; Schindewolf 2 

pedology: Schaufelberger 

philosophy: Cotta 

physical and biological sciences: Teichert 2 
research trends: Nolan 
Rickert's views of: Collingwood 1 
ruling theories: Chamberlin 3 
science of earth history: Read 3 
scientific, historical and applied aspects: Bliss 
scientific and historical aspects: Bubnoff 2 

scope: Beurlen 2; Bubnoff 3; Galbraith; Hall; Lyell; Sollas; Spencer; Wright 
scriptural basis of cataclysmic geology: Millhauser 
scriptural postulates of 18th century British geology: Millhauser 
speculative character: Davis 3 
stages of development: Khain 2; Rossiter 
subjective aspects: Bemmelen 1 
systematics: Judson 1 
temporal limitations: Bemmelen 2 
theological attacks: White 
theory, inadequacy: Whewell 1 
time concept: Schindewolf 1 
timeless vs. time-bound knowledge: Bucher 2 
"transitional period": Khain 2 
universal history of earth: Davis 2 
Geomorphology 
complexity: Davis 5 
cycle of erosion: B6thune 2 
cyclic theories: Hack 

Davis' use of anthropomorphic terms: Judson 1 
Davisian, weakness: B6thune 2; Judson 1, 2 
deductive reasoning: B&hune 2; Daly 2 
development of thought: Dylik 
dimensional analysis: Strahler 2 



340 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

disciplinary value: Davis 5 

dynamic basis: Strahler 1 

dynamic and historical approaches: Strahler 1 

empirical and rational methods: Strahler 1 

endogenetic processes: Penck 

entropy concept: Leopold 

errors: Davis 5 

exolgenetic processes: Penck 

expanations, anthropomorphic: Baulig 2 

geographic: Bryan 

geographical cycle: Hack 

geologic discipline: Judson 1 

historical: Bryan; Horberg 

landscape evolution: Judson 1 ; King 1 ; Leopold 

laws: Chorley; Horton 

mathematical: Baulig 3; Davis 5; Horton; King 1; Strahler 1 

methodology of W. M. Davis: Baulig 3 

model: Judson 

morphological analysis: Penck 

observations: Davis 5 

physical: Davis 5 

processes, limits: Baulig 2 

processes, magnitude and frequency: Wolman 

progress and current problems: Miller, J. P. 

relation to geology: Davis 5; Watts 
geology and geography: Bryan 
glacial and Pleistocene geology: Horberg 
other sciences: Dylik: Miller, J. P. 

scope: Galbraith 

systematics: Judson 

terminology: Baulig 3 

theories of landscape development: Hack 

theory of erosional cycle: B6thune 1 

theory of variable systems: Melton 

uniformitarian: Dylik; King 2 
Geophysics 

applied to geologic problems: Hameister; Haughton 

definition: Hubbert 2 

methods and applications: Hameister 

qualifications of geophysicists: Hubbert 2 

relation to geology: Goguel 1; Gutenberg; Hubbert 2 

scope: Gutenberg 

theory of continental growth: Wilson, J. T. 2 
Geostatics 

definition: Broggi 
Geostrophic cycle 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 341 

Hutton; Tomkeieff 2 
Geotectonics 

theoretical syntheses: Sender 
Geothermal gradients 

changes since early Precambrian: Roever 
Gilbert's hypothesis of hypotheses: Gilbert 2 
Glacial geology 

methodologic errors: Westgate 

relation to Pleistocene geology and geomorphology: Horberg 
Goethe 

geological conceptions: Semper 
Gradualism 

James Hutton's: Tomkeieff 1 

philosophical extension of Newtonian calculus: Tomkeieff 1 
Granite 

origins: Read 3 
Great Chain of Being 

Tomekeieff 2 
Gressly's laws of facies 

Gressly; Teichert 1 

Hiatuses, stratigraphic 

Barrell; Blackwelder; Hawkins 1 

effect on biostratigraphic boundaries: Berry 2 
Higher Superstition 

Simpson 4 
Historical geology (see also History) 

background of history: Merriam 

concern with temporal sequences: Lenzen 

evolutionary and revolutionary phases: Interdept. Strat. Comm., USSR 

periodicities: Interdept. Strat. Comm., USSR 

pictorial reconstructions: SchrSdinger 

scope: Galbraith 
Historicism 

Beringer 

contribution of geology and paleontology: Haber 
Historicity 

Miller, H. 
History 

actualism in humanistic history: Collingwood 1 

conservation of values: Weber 

contrasted with science: Schwinner; Weber 

cosmic: Weizsacker 

evidence: Simpson 5 

exclusive concern with man: Schwinner 

explanation: Hempel 1 



342 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

geographic: Davis 5 

historical science: Popper 1 

historical statements: Gould 

historical vs. theoretical knowledge: Miller, H. 

humanistic: Collingwood 1 

irreversibility: \Veizacker 

limited to human affairs: Mises 

logical structure: Cassirer 

natural: Weber 

philosophy: Collingwood 1 

purpose: Collingwood 1 

reconstruction: Simpson 5 

relation to geology: Cotta 

relation to second law of thermodynamics: Weizsacker 

synthesis: Weber 

thermal: Jacobs 

thought of historians, geologists and paleontologists compared: Cassirer 
History of geology 

Haarmann 

bibliography and quotations: Holder 

explication of ideas: Semper 

value: Geikie 2; Gilbert 1 
Holism 

and evolution: Broom 

in geology: Popper 1 
Homogenesis 

Berry 1 
Homotaxis 

Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature; Henbest; Huxley 1; Jeletzky 1; Kobayashi; 

Nicholson 
Hutton, James 

contributions: Lake; Whewell 2 

founder of modern geology: Tomkeieff 1 

impact on 18th century philosophy: Haber 

philosophy: Belousov; Tomkeieff 2 
Hydrogeology 

scope and methods: Le Grand 
Hypodigm 

Simpson 6 
Hypotheses 

geologic: Pruvost; Woodford 2 

geologic, fallacies: Lahee 

geotectonic: Sonder 

hypothesis of unequal activity: Crickmay 

mistaken for laws: DeGolyer 

multiple: Chamberlin 1; Gilbert 1, 2; Johnson 2; Woodford 2 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 343 

origin: Gilbert 2 

perpetuation: Pruvost; Vysotskii 2 

regarding occurrence of petroleum: DeGolyer 

universal, in history: Hempel 1 

working: Chamberlin 1 

Idealism 

Cailleux 
Igneous rocks 

concept: Deer 
Imagination 

role in geological concepts: Kalkowsky 
Indeterminism, in evolution 

Simpson 1, 2 
Individuality, biological 

Simpson 1 
Induction 

in geography: Davis 5; Bethune 2 

Inductivism: Popper 2 

nature: Herschel 2 

predictive character: Herschel 2 

problem of justifying: Goodman 2 
Industrial Revolution 

influence on rise of geology: Tomkeieff 1 
Intuition 

in scientific discovery: Popper 2 
"Irregular" subjects 

Scriven 1 

Knowledge, geologic 

limitations: Harrassowitz 1 

Laws 

Bergmann's rule: Rensch 
biological, bibliography: Jepsen 
complexities: Sedgwick 
Cope's law: Simpson 2 
Cope's rule: Rensch 
Cuvier's law: Saint-Seine 
Dacque's principle: Simpson 2 
Deperet's law: Simpson 2 
Dollo's law: Beringer; Goudge 3; Simpson 2 
evolutionary: Hawkins 2 
fundamental law of morphology: Penck 
geologic: Khain 1; Kitts; Schafer; Whewell 2; Woodford 2 
geomorphologic: Horton 



344 CLAUDE C ALBRITTON, JR 

geotectonic: Sender 

Gilbert's two laws of erosion: Davis 4 

Gressly's laws of fades: Gressly; Teichert 1 

historical: Kitts 

historical succession: Kitts 

in history : Hempel 1 

Horton's laws of morphometry: Chorley; Horton 

immutability: Sedgwick 

inaccuracy: Scriven 2 

Law(s) of: 

contributing areas: Chorley 

diastrophism: Bucher 3 

drainage basin areas: Chorley 

facies: Gressly 

faunal succession: Teichert 2; Schneer; Wheeler 2 

horizontality: Steno (see Winter) 

morphological correlation (Cuvier's): Gould 

original continuity: Steno (see Winter) 

progress: Page 

stream lengths: Chorley 

stream numbers: Chorley 

stream slopes: Chorley 

superposition: James; Jeletzky 1; McLaren; Moore 3; Steno (see Winter) 
Wheeler 2; Whittard; Wilson, J. A. 1 

tendency to the complex: Parks 1 

vertical succession: \Vheeler 4 
Lindgren's volume law: Barth 
Lyell's law: Mitchell 
natural: Goudge 3; Kemeny; Scriven 2 
organic evolution: Rensch; Simpson 2; Small 
paleontologic: Williston 
paleontologic and geologic: Huxley 1 
physical and biological: Carnap; Nagel 
Playfair's law (see G. W. White in Playfair) 
scientific: DeGolyer 
in scientific explanation: Scriven 1 
statistical probability statements: Hempel 2 
Steno's laws: Woodford 1 
Stromer's law: Simpson 2 
universal: Popper 1 
universal statements: Hempel 2 
Williston's law: Simpson 2, 3 
Legality, principle of 

relation to uniformity: Hooykaas 2 
Lenin, V. I. 
contributions to geological philosophy: Gordeev 1 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 345 

Life 

origin: Rutten 3 

unity: Simpson 3 
Lithostratigraphic units 

Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature 
Logic 

alien to methods of natural science: Miller, H. 
Lyell, Charles 

appraisal of his "Principles": Lake 
Lyellian method (see Uniformity, principle of) 
Lyellian revolution 

Haber 



Man 

a moral animal: Simpson 4 

peculiarities: Simpson 4 
Maps, geographic 

Davis 5 
Maps, geologic 

Robertson; Whewell 2 

color pattern, inconsistencies: Linton 

complexity: Wilson, J. T. 1 

history: North 2 

hypothetical character: Rutten 1 

ideal: Linton 

imperfections: Rios 

importance: North 1 

metamorphic rocks: Billings 

philosophy of mapping: Lasky 

quantitative aspects: Krumbein 2 

scale: Linton 

subjective nature: Lasky 

symbols, inconsistencies: Linton 
Materialism in geomorphology 

Cailleux 
Mathematical methods in geology 

Scheidegger 

cautions: Rutten 1 

statistical analysis: Krumbein 1 
Matter 

evolution in concepts: Gignoux 

temporal aspects: Gignoux 
Measurement, in geosciences 

information levels: Griffiths 

nominal, ordinal, interval and ratio scales: Griffiths 



346 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

Metamorphic geology 

cardinal principle: Read 1 

concern with time and history: Read 1 

relic structures: Read 1 
Metamorphic rocks 

cartographic representation: Billings 

importance of stratigraphy: Billings 
Methodological nominalism 

Popper 1 
Methodology 

Chamberlin 3 

analytical method: Johnson 2 

astrophysical method: Walther 

basic assumptions: Chamberlin 3 

classification: Johnson 1 

colorless observation: Chamberlin 3 

comparative economic geology: Joralemon 

comparative ontology: Bemmelen 1, 2 

confirmation and revision of hypotheses: Johnson 1 

cyclic changes in style: Moulton 

Davis': Baulig 3 

Davis' universal solvent: Krynine 

deduction and induction: Johnson 1 

dimensional analysis: Strahler 2 

experimental method: Walther 

generalization: Johnson 1 

Gilbert's: Davis 4 

glacial geology: Westgate 

hydrogeology: Le Grand 

interpretation: Johnson 1 

invention: Johnson 1 

mathematical methods in geology: Scheidegger 

morphological method: Watson 

multiple working hypotheses: Bemmelen 2; Chamberlin 1,3; Johnson 1 

observation: Johnson 1 

ontogenetic method: Kaiser 

ontological method: Harrassowitz 1; Walther 

reconstructing Precambrian history: Raguin 

regenerative hypotheses: Chamberlin 3 

reporting: Johnson 2 

ruling theory: Chamberlin 3 

tectonic method: Walther 

verification of hypotheses: Johnson 1 

working hypotheses: Chamberlin 3 
Michurinism 

Simpson 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 347 

Mineralogy 

branch of inorganic chemistry: Bliss 

concept of individual: Whewell 1 

distinguished from geology: Whewell 2 

mineral associations: Niggli 

minerals compared with organisms: Niggli 

scope: Galbraith 

space-time analysis of mineral deposits: Amstutz 
Mining geology 

scope: Galbraith 

Natural units 

Koch 
Nature, idea of 

Collingwood 2 
Neo-catastrophism 

Jeletzky 2; Parks 1 
Neptunism 

Gillispie; Greene; Tomkeieff 2 

compared with Hutton's plutonism: Wegmann 3 
Nomenclature 

Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature; Chamberlin 4 

ambiguity of stratigraphic terms: Arkell 2 

ambiguity of systemic terms: Piatnitzky 

paleontological, unduly complex: Rastall 

proper names: Wadell 
Nominalism vs. realism 

Popper 1 
Nonprogressionism 

Eisley 

Objectification 

Schrodinger 
Observations 

classification: Krumbein 1 

extrapolation: Wilson, J. T. 2 

geologic: Koch 

Occam's razor (see Simplicity, principle of) 
Ontological method (see Uniformity, principle of) 
Order, natural 

postulate: Johnson, M. 

problem: Simpson 5 
Orogenesis 

evidence for geological dating: Spieker 

fundamental geological process: Wilson, J. T. 1 



348 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTOX, JR. 

Orthochronology 
Schindewolf 1 
definition: Teichert 2 

Palaetiological sciences 

Hooykaas 2; Whewell 1, 2 
Paleobotany (see also Paleontology) 

contribution to the philosophy of geology: Gordon 

development: Gordon 

paleoclimatologic interpretations: Barghoorn; Gordon 

principles: Barghoorn; Seward 
Paleoclimatology 

branch of paleogeophysics: Lauterbach 

deductive and inductive approaches: Smiley 

evidence, from botany: Seward 
from paleobotany: Barghoorn 
from paleolimnology: Deevey 2 
from vertebrate paleontology: Colbert 

relation to principle of uniformity: Beurlen 2 
Paleoecology (see also Paleontology) 

analogical reasoning: Cloud 

bibliography: Ladd 

evidence: Cloud; Ladd 

plants: Seward 

principle of parallel association: Cloud 

principle of uniformity: Colbert 

principles: Cloud 

problems: Cloud 

relationship to ecology: Gunter 

scope: Ladd 
Paleogeophysics 

definition and scope: Lauterbach 
Paleolimnology 

contribution to paleoclimatology: Deevey 2 

principles: Bradley 
Paleontology (see also Paleobotany and Paleoecology) 

adequacy of fossil record: Simpson 5 

analogy and homogeny: Osborn 

application to geochronology: Smiley 

artificiality of species: Kermack 

basic propositions: Huxley 2 

basis of geochronology: Jeletzky 1 

biological and stratigraphies! aspects: Newell 3 

biological science: Cooper; Osborn 

complexity of nomenclature: Rastall 

contribution to evolutionary theory: Collingwood 2 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 349 

the humanities: Schindewolf 3 
organic evolution: Simpson 4 
other sciences: Schindewolf 3 

definition: Stubblefield 

developments between 1908-1958: Romer 2 

difficulties of study: Cooper 

fossil, definition: Ladd 

fossil record, adequacy for evolutionary studies: Newell 3 

fossil specimens, probability of discovery: Newell 3 

fossils, minerals: Ladd 

fossils, preservation: Ladd 

foundation of geology: Marsh 

historical aspects: Osborn 

historical study: Hawkins 1 

history of ideas on nature of fossils: Ladd; Marsh; Schindewolf 3 

importance to geology: Parks 2; Schindewolf 2 

importance in stratigraphic classification: Interdept. Strat. Comm., USSR 

law of tendency to the complex: Parks 2 

laws: Huxley 1 

limits of chronologic precision: Jeletzky 1 

morphological method: Watson 

paleontologic sample: Simpson 5 

philosophy: Parks 2 

predictions: Saint-Seine; Watson 

problems: Schindewolf 3 

propositions: Huxley 2 

pure and applied: Schindewolf 2 

quasihistorical science: Collingwood 1 

relation to biology and geology: Cooper; Romer 2 
neontology: Hawkins 1 
other sciences: Marsh 
stratigraphy: Schindewolf 2; Stubblefield 
zoology: Wedekind 

scope: Cooper; Galbraith; Schindewolf 2, 3 

scope of vertebrate paleontology: Romer 2 

species concept: Wedekind 

status of micropaleontology: Schindewolf 2 

stratigraphic concept in vertebrate paleontology: Wilson, J. A. 1 

subdivisions: Schindewolf 3 
Paleooceanography 

branch of paleogeophysics: Lauterbach 
Parachronology 

Schindewolf 1 
Parallel associations 

principle of: Cloud 
Parsimony (see Simplicity, principle of) 



350 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

Pedology 

geologic contributions: Schaufelberger 
Perfect cosmological principle 

critique: Munitz 

Periodicity (see Cyclic phenomena) 
Petrography 

scope: Galbraith 
Petroleum geology 

scope: Galbraith 
Petrology 

basic concepts: Loewinson-Lessing 

evolutionary' aspect: Loweinson-Lessing 

experimental: Coombs; Loewinson-Lessing 

igneous: Read 3 

principle of actualism: Loewinson-Lessing 

principle of continuity: Deer 

scope: Galbraith 

theoretical: Earth 

theories: Loweinson-Lessing 
Phenomena, geologic 

interpretation: Emmons 

multiple antecedents: Gilbert 1; Rutten 1 
Philosophy 

definition: Collingwood 1 

geologic: Beringer; Clarke; Launay; Page; Vogelsang; Whewell 1 
bibliography and quotations: Holder 
definition: Page 

Hutton's contributions: Belousov 
need for re-examination: Hubbert 3 

relation to geology: Cotta 

scientific: Simpson 5 
Phylogeny 

discovery: Simpson 6 
Physical chemistry 

applied to mineralogy and petrology: Barth 
Physical geology (see Geology) 
Physicalism 

Mises 
Pleistocene 

chronology: Brouwer 

relation to glacial geology and geomorphology: Horberg 
Plutonism 

Deer; Playfair 

analysis of Hutton's system: Wegmann 3 

compared with Neptunism: Wegmann 3 

critique: Lyell 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 351 

cyclic features in Hutton's system: Wegmann 3 

Mutton's system: Play fair 
Populations, geologic 

Krumbein 1 
Positivism 

Miller, H.; Mises 
Postdiction 

logical character: Hempel 2 
Postulates, geologic 

continuity of life: Chamberlin 2 

continuity of sedimentation: Chamberlin 2 
Precambrian history 

circular reasoning in reconstructions: James 
Prediction 

Hempel 1; Popper 1 

geologic: Kitts 

logical character: Hempel 2 

scientific: Scriven 1 

vertebrate paleontology, examples: Rensch; Watson 
Pregeologic stage of earth's development 

Rutten 2 
Prehistory 

Judson 3 
Principles 

concentration of mineral substances: Russell 

continuity: Davis 2; Deer; Nicholson 

cosmolysis: Blanc 

Dacque's: Simpson 2 

faunal succession: Schenck; Schneer 

horizontality: Schenck 

initial horizontality: Schneer 

injection: Schneer 

intermediate stages: Lucius 

lateral extension: Schneer 

original continuity: Schenck 

Steno's three principles: Schneer 

superposition: Schenck 

temporal transgression: Wheeler 2 

typotopology: Schenck; Schneer 

uniformity: Schenck 
Probability 

Popper 2 

geologic: Lasky 

words expressing likelihood: Brown 1 
Problems, geologic 

analysis: Johnson 1 



352 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

attack: Woodford 2 
Processes 

geomorphic: Wolman 
Prochronism 

Gosse's: White 
Prognosis 

Popper 1 
Progress 

evolutionary: Simpson 3, 5 

law: Page 
Progressionism 

Eisley 
Prospecting 

ore deposits, philosophy: Lasky 
Prostratigraphy 

Schindewolf 4 
Proterohistory 

principle of uniformity: Hooykaas 2 
Protocol sentences 

Popper 2 
Providentialism 

Gillispie; Hawkins 2; Hutton; White 

re Christian historiography: Collingwood 
Pseudosubstitution 

theories of organic evolution: Grene 
Psychologism 

Popper 2 
Psychozoic era 

unjustified: Berry 2 
Purpose 

problem in evolution: Simpson 5 

Radiocarbon dates 

precision and accuracy: Hunt 
Rational science 

Strahler2 
Recent epoch 

definition and status: Morrison 
Retrodictions 

example in paleontology: Gould 
Revolutions: geologic 

exemplified at Mesozoic-Cenozoic boundary: Jeletzky 2 
Rock-stratigraphic units 

Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature 
Romantic movement 

influence on geology: Tomkeieff 1 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 353 

Scale models 

applied to geologic structures: Hubbert 1 
Schematization 

in scientific methodology: Niggli 
Science 

abstract: Spencer 
abstract-concrete: Spencer 
aims: Toulminj S. 2 
classification of sciences: Bliss; Spencer 
concrete: Spencer 
explanatory hypotheses: Gould 
futility of classifying and ranking: Mises 
generalizations of observation records: Gould 
generalizing vs. individualizing: Mises 
growth stages: McLachlan 
as history: Lenzen 

influences of sciences on each other: McLachlan 
measurables: McLachlan 
a method: DeGolyer 
observation records: Gould 
rank: Hubbert 2 
Scriptural geology 

Chalmer's "interval theory": Millhauser 
Search 

theory and economics: Brown 2 
Series, stratigraphic 

development of concept: Stubblefield 
Simplicity, principle of 
Barker 1; Bondi 1; Feuer 1, 2; Goodman 1, 3; Herschel 1; Laird; Popper 2; Scares; 

Thorburn; Wilson, J. T. 2 
applied to archeology: Deevey 1 

cosmology: Bondi 2; Gold 

geologic hypotheses: Simpson 5 

historical geology: Barker 2; Bretsky 

history: Collingwood 1 

laws of nature: Opik 

mechanics and physics: Baulig 2 

scientific theories: Bunge 

slip of faults: Woodford 3 

structural geology: Anderson; Andrews 

structural history: Spicker 

ideological evolutionary theories: Romer 1 

theories of evolution: Grene; Simpson 3 
cardinal intellectual principle: Bridgman 
end product of evolution: Blanc 
kinds: Bunge 



354 CLAUDE G. ALBRITTON, JR. 

limitations: Bunge 

metalogical: Tsilikis 

metascientific: Feuer 1; Hawkins 1 

methodologic principle: Feuer 1 ; Thorburn 

origin: Thorburn 

postulate: Gold 

related to cosmolysis: Blanc 

relationship to uniformity: Barker 2; Hooykaas 2 

wishful thinking: Jennings 
Smith, William 

contributions to systematic descriptive geology: Whewell 2 

stratigraphical nomenclature: Whewell 2 
Soil science (see Pedology) 
Soil stratigraphic units 

definition: Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature 
Space 

concept: Spencer 

relation to time in stratigraphy: Suzuki 

space-time analysis: Amstutz 
Space-with-time contimia 

in stratigraphy: Wilson, J. A. 2 
Species, inorganic 

individuality: Niggli 

mineral species: Orcel 
Species, organic 

Simpson 6 

artificiality: Arkell 1; Haldane 3; Kermack 

chronospecies: Thomas 

conflict in neontological and paleontological viewpoints: Thomas 

geographical and chronological subspecies: Joysey 

morphospecies, monotypic vs. polytypic: Thomas 

multidimensional: Mayr 2 

nondimensional: Mayr 2 

philosophic basis: Mayr 2 

typological: Mayr 2 

varieties of concepts among paleontologists: Thomas 
Stages, stratigraphic 

development of concept: Stubblefield 
Stagnancy 

landscape evolution: Crickmay 
Statistical analysis 

geologic data: Fisher 1; Krumbein 1 

geosciences: Griffiths 
Steno 

laws of: Steno (see Winter) 

postulate of: Woodford 2 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 355 

Stochastic geology 

Brown 2 
Stratigraphical paleontology 

basic to historical geology: Henbest 

empirical: Moore 3 

relation to biology and geology: Moore 1 
Stratigraphy 

ages of stratigraphic units: Arkell 2 

aims: Interdept. Strat. Gomm., USSR; Sigal 

archeological: Smiley 

biostratigraphic units: Hedberg 2 

chronostratigraphic units: Hedberg 2 

definition: Interdept. Strat. Comm., USSR; Jeletzky 1; Schenck; Stubblefield; 
Teichert2 

deductive vs. inductive approaches: Hedberg 2 

fades: Schenck 

formations: Arkell 2 

geochronologic and stratigraphic scale: 
Interdept. Strat. Comm., USSR 

homotaxis: Amer. Gomm. on Strat. Nomenclature; Henbest; Huxley 1; 
Interdept. Strat. Comm., USSR; Jeletzky 1; Kobayashi 

"laws": Smiley 

lithological units, ambiguity: Suzuki 

lithostratigraphic units: Hedberg 2 

metamorphic rocks: Billings 

mineralogic units: Hedberg 2 

principles: Hedberg 2 

prostratigraphy: Schindewolf 4 

relation to paleontology: Stubblefield 

relations between stratigraphic units: Hedberg 1 

relationship to structural and metamorphic geology: Billings 

rock-stratigraphic units: Amer. Gomm. on Strat. Nomenclature; Schenck 

scope: Galbraith 

significance of primary structures: Billings 

sources of confusion: Hedberg 2 

stages: Arkell 2 

subdivisions of: Sigal 

temporal considerations: Storey 

terminology: Schindewolf 4 

time concept: Schindewolf 4 

time-stratigraphic units: Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature; Schenck 

traditional vs. modern concepts: Storey 

type sections, status: Wilson, J. A. 1 

units restricted to surface-accumulated rocks: Wheeler 4 

units: Interdept. Strat. Comm., USSR; Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature 

zones: Arkell 2 



356 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

Structural geology 

analytic, dynamic and synthetic terms: Wegmann 2 

geo tectonic theses: Sonder 

interpretations in spirit of dialectic materialism: Popov 

relation to stratigraphy: Billings; Wegmann 2 

scope: Galbraith 

tectonic stage and style: Wegmann 2 
Stromer's law 

Simpson 2 
Studies, geologic 

depersonalization of: Rios 

examples: Krumbein 2 
Superposition 

basis of geologic science: Spieker 

law: James Jeletzky 1; McLaren; Moore 3; Richey; Rutten 3; Schindewolf 4; 

Wheeler 2; Wilson, J. A. 1; Woodford 2 
Symbols 

geologic cartography: Robertson 
Syngenesis 

Amstutz 
Systematics 

definition: Simpson 6 
Systems, stratigraphic 

development of concept: Stubblefield 

terminology: Wilmarth 



Taxa 

evolutionary basis: Simpson 6 
Taxonomy, animal 

principles: Simpson 6 
Teleology 

Davis 5 

biologic thought: Beckner 

theories of evolution: Romer 1 
Temporal transgression 

principle of: Wheeler 2 
Terminology, geologic 

ambiguity: Watznauer 

genetic vs. descriptive: Baulig 1 

geomorphic: Baulig 1 

origin of terms for eras, periods and epochs: Wilmarth 

overelaboration: Chamberlm 4; Watznauer 

proper names: Wadell 

stratigraphic: Wheeler 3 

structural: Wegmann 2 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 357 

Tetraktys 

applied to geological sciences: Koch 
Theism 

in geological thinking: Parks 1 
Theory 

continental drift: Tasch 
fallacies: Lahee 
geotectonic: Sender 
ruling: Chamberlin 1 
testing: Popper 2 

variable systems applied to geomorphology: Melton 
working: Chamberlin 1 
Thermodynamics 

bearing on historical geology: Jacobs; Weizsacker 
Theses 

geotectonic: Sender 
Time 

abstract: Jeletzky 1 

basic quantity in physics: Johnson, M. 

as becoming: Gleugh 

Bergsonian: Gleugh; Gignoux; Wiener 

biochron: Teichert 2 

biostratigraphic: Teichert 2 

boundaries compared with biohistorical events: Camp 

calendars vs. chronologies: Shotwell 

concept: Spencer 

conceptual: Cleugh 

contemporaneous: Teichert 2 

cosmologic: Milne 

direction: Weizsacker 

"duree": Cleugh 

geologic: Hutton; Jeletzky 1; Page; Teichert 2 

absolute scale: Kulp 

based on paleontologic zones: Newell 4 

basic concept of earth sciences: Scrope 

basis of subdivision: Morrison 

changes in concept: James 

chronologic order of strata: Shrock 

compared with common time: Lane 

comprehension: Hawkins 2 

concept: Kobayashi; Rutten 3 

criteria for determining contemporaneity of strata: Lane 

cyclical reinterpretation of time scale: Bulow 1 

determination of time horizons: Wheeler 1 

determined by biostratigraphy: Wedekind 

development of scale: Bulow 1 



358 CLAUDE C. ALBRITTON, JR. 

epibole: Tcichert 2 

estimate: Geikie 1 

evidence: Goodchild 

evolution of ideas: Haber 

evolution of ideas on length- Hawkes 

fossil-time: Kobayashi 

hemera: Teichert 2 

history of scale: Williams 

Hutton's discovery: Eisley 

immensity: Lyell 

importance of fossils: Williams, H. S. 

importance to uniformitarian thought: Rutten 3 

inconsistencies in scale: Biilow 1 

instant: Teichert 2 

instant-duration-eternity: Kobayashi 

intervals: Bell 

irreversible: Wiener 

marine vs. continental: Kobayashi 

measurement: Hunt; Smiley 

metamorphic rocks: Read 1 

methods of obtaining absolute dates: Zeuner 

moment: Teichert 2 

nature: Spieker 

origin of terminology: Wilmarth 

paleontologic standard: Jeletzky 1 

partial time standards: Teletzky 1 

perspectives: Tcilhard 

preactualistic: Rutten 2 

in plutonism: Read 3 

in stratigraphy: Suzuki 

teilzone: Teichert 2 

temporal problems: Smiley 

timeless and time-bound knowledge: Bucher 2; Strahler 1 

time-stratigraphic classification: Hedberg 1 

time-stratigraphic and time units: Bell 

time-stratigraphic units: Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature; Hedberg 1 

time stratigraphy: Schindewolf 4; Wheeler 3 

scale: Bell 

scales: Whittard 
strata-time: Kobayashi 
stratigraphic: Wheeler 4 
zone time: Kobayashi 
historical: Page; Teichert 2 
historical perspective: Shotwell 
historical vs. physical: Kobayashi 
importance to geology: Kulp 
irreversible in evolution and biology: Cleugh; Wiener 



INDEX TO BIBLIOGRAPHY 359 

measurement: Teichert 2 

mineral time: Kobayashi 

Newtonian: Teichert 2 

Newtonian vs. Bergsonian: Wiener 

past: Teichert 2 

perceptual: deugh; Teichert 

physical: Cleugh 

physical and historical: Weber 

physical and psychological: Johnson, M. 

preactualistic: Macgregor 

pregeological: Page; Ramsay 

psychological: Gleugh 

radioactive time standard: Jeletzky 1 

relation to change: Gleugh 

reversible aspects in classical physics: Wiener 

scales: Haldane 1 

scales appropriate to different disciplines: Gignoux 

sense: ShotweU 

space time: Gleugh 

temporal and logical sequences: Gollingwood 1 

time scale of universe: Opik 

Time-stratigraphic units: Amer. Comm. on Strat. Nomenclature; Hedberg 1; Schenck 
Truth 

criterion: Chamberlin 3; DeGolyer 

geologic: Woodford 2 
Typology 

concept: Simpson 6 
Typotopology 

principle: Schenck 

Unconformities 

significance to diastrophic theory: Henbest 
valuation: Blackwelder 

Uniformitarianism (see Uniformity, principle of) 
Uniformitarian principle (see Uniformity, principle of) 
Uniformity, principle of (see als